·*THE
SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI
OF
BHATTOJI DIKSHITA,
EDITID ANT TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISHI
BY
SRISA CHANDRA VASU,
AND
VÄMAN DAS VASU
VIDYA
www
Vol II, Part II.
BHAVAL
(VERBS.)
LIBRARY
SACS
wry
PUBLISHED BY
THE PANINI OTTICC, BILUVANISIIVARI ASIIRAN
ALLAHABAD
PRINTED AT TIE UPPER INDIA PRESS, ALLAHALID
1907.
All rights reserved

·FORE WORD. This part contains tlıc Kridinta allizos. or tlosc affiros which are applied directly to roots in order to forin substantives. In addition to the afli rcs given in Panini's Grammar, ut contains some 800 sûtras relating to the Unádi affixes. This portion is complete in itself and may be studied separately from the rest of the book. 1st January, 1907 S C. V. B. DV.

·SRISV मोर TIE SIDDHÂNTA KAUMUDI. VOLUME II. PART II. अथरुदन्तप्रकरणम् THE KRIDANTA AFFIXES. CHAPTER I. २९ । धातोः ।३।१।९। या हतीयसमातेरधिकारोऽयम् । तत्रोपपद सप्तमीस्यम्' (०८१) । कृदतिह' (198)। 2829 As far as the end of the Third Book reckoning from the present aphorism, the affixes treated of aro to be understood as coming after somo verbal root. This is an Adhikarashtra All thage verband affixes are broadly divided into two parts and a affixes which will be described Inter on. Here we must again repeat the two sůtras that follow it in the Ashtadhyayi, namely, III. 1 92. S 781, and III. 1. 93.8.374. २८२९ ।क। तस्रोपपद सप्तमीस्थम् ॥ ३॥16॥ 2829A, Here a word exhibited in the locative case is called an upapada or a dependant word. २८२९।स। कृपति॥३।१।। 2829B. Any affix except tio, 19 called krit. २८३० । वा सरूपोऽस्त्रियाम् । ३।१।४। परिभाषेयम् ।स्भिाधास्वरिकारेसहपोउपदादप्रत्यय उत्सर्गस्य पापोवास्यास्याधिकारी क्तं दिना। 2830 In this portion of the sûtras, in which thore is a reference to verbal roats, an affie which is calculated to debar ageneral one, not being of the same form, optionally debarsite but not so in the case of feminine affixes (111. 3. 94, &c) ·2 THE SIDDHANTA KAUNUDI (Voc II PART II CHAP I $ 2831 Note --Thas the affixes and 72(II. 133) are general affixes applicable to all roots in forming nouns of agency, and t'ie sútra III 1 133 which ordaing these affixes is an utsarga or a general rule, while the sutra III 1 135 ordaining the afix after verbs having a penultimate svowel, and the roots Et At and is an apavada or a special aphorism in the latter case therefore optionally we may have the afhxes en and also Thus fais a root that has a penultimate belongiog to the pratyahara , And therefore, in forming the doug of agency from it, the affix it will havo to be applied by rule 195 of this chapter already mentioned, thus fafera + fafora tufafrai, but this special rule, however, does not debar the operation of the general rule, and we have optionally विक्षिप+पधुल विक्षेपका, and fafes +=fara nom sing for at २८३१ । कृत्याः ।३।१।। अधिकारोऽप पषु लामा । 2831. From this aphorism, as far as the aphorism gut (III 1. 233), all the affixes treated, will get the name of Kritya This defines the class of affixes known as hritya, a subdivision of krit afhxes These are certain affixes libero, sita, &c, which may be treated as declinable verbal termination (III 4 70) The word formed by them may be called Pas ive Potential Participles or Futaro Pargise Participles, २-३२ । कर्तरि कृत् । ३ । ४।६७ कृत्प्रत्ययः कर्तरि स्यादिति माते। 2832. The affixes called 'Krit'aro used in the senso or agent The words formed by Lyıt allixes have the sense of agency other special eenso has been nsaigned to them by any rule, tiicn the rula, will apply, and fix the force of the nffy Th19 rulo will not theroforo apply to hral allises liko (III 2 6 and 6) to which a special sengo hag beca assigncd but aflxes like this and T &c, (III 1 133) Thus wear mcaDs A.docr,f'an agent, one who cruscs happiness, uns who deizes', 'who cooks' The following adtra, however, males an exception to this general senso of hrat afbres. २९३३ । तयोरेय त्यस्तरालया।३।४। ७ । बोभागष रय।। 2883 Tho aflcs called 'kritya' and tho affix "kta' and those that inse tho scaso of 'bhal, haro only these last toro Bensis, agacls, an action and an object, (bŁATA ADd karmal When no .

·2 You II PART II clar, I $ 234] TITE KRIDAVA AFFI YE9. Note-The word of those two' refers to ar 'an Impersonal act', and me objcct'. The word 'only' 19 used in the gatra to excluda the word 'agent' from it Thus कर्तव्यः कटा भवता 'the mat must be made by you', Rreton TETT Hantlo rico must bo caten by you'. Here tho affix muz has the force of denoting the object, we may, therefore, call at the Potential Passivo Participlo affix So also wiwerod at 'you must eat', wfacolta' you must lie down' Here the sense of the affix at being that of the action itself, which being Impersonal, as in tho singular namber as it is one only, and neither malc nor female, thero is, from tho nataro of the case, a singular affix, and tho neuter gender is cmployed Similarly the affix a denotes both the object and the action, at met भवता 'the mat is made by you', भुषत आदमो भवत the rice 19 eaten by you' Herc # 19 used with the force of denoting the object and may be called tho past passive participle. Similarly may be used in denoting the more act, wifade Rurat 'you sat, afarar *you lay down' Similarly thc aflixes having the sense of WL(III 3 12G) denoto both the object and the Impersonal act In the following examples tho affixes denote tho object, to : OCT 96' this mat is made, by little at a time, by you', Tuv' what is mado with ease', 55*** 'what is mndo with difficulty'. In the following examples tho affixes denoto the act, fixate perete and स्वाहपभव भवता। After transitive verbs, the hritya, tho Ila and tho Lhalartha aflizes only denote tho object, but never denotc the ti or 'an Impersonal action'. २८३४ । तव्यत्तव्यानीयरः । ३।१।। wariat AATTI Stari ratrått fram i puta taarit rrafata पपनसीबत्वं । घेतष्य चपनीयो या धर्मरथया । • वस्तव्य कर्तरिणिपातीति T&TT starare uno T477" Tafea BTTT Teatati forefathers are worst कवि प्रत्ययः । पृत्तिकारस्तु 'कर्म कर्तरि चामिप्यते प्रत्यार । तापिन्। 2834 Tho affixes TT, and and where come alter Ferbal roots. The phraso after verbal roots' is anderstood in this apborigm by anu. Yritti from sQtra 2829 The final letters r of तन्यत् and of अनीयर are for the sake of indicating accent, being merely diacritical lettr. The letter indicates svarita accent (VI 1 185) and the letter indicates penultimate adatta accent (VI. 1. 217), these being exceptions to the general role of &ccent given in III 1. 3 Thug ***50=Rivera, and 17thg=efriger' must be increased, t*tae antea 'must be increased'. In these cases the sense being that of the Impersonal action itaclf or bhara, there is acuter gendur singular pumbor.

·$ TPE SIDDIANTA KAUNODI (TL II PART II CHAP 1 $ 2835 2 When karma or object is denoted by these affiscs we have the exawplo at or with storaat The dharma must be acquired by thee. Hero the affixes bave a Pessive designation Vart --The affix 8727 when coming after the verb o'to dell' in marbing the agent 1e treated as if it had on indicatory The force of my 29 to cause yriddhi Thus पस्+तायत वास्तव्य: adveller Here the word 18 in the masculine gender as the force of the affix is that of the agent and not as it generally has that of an act or object (111 4 70) Vart --The affix fc should be coomerated in addition to those already enumerated in this aphorism Thus weth Tay: hidney benns fit to be cooked', fara? *7* the woods are apt to be split ce fragile This afix is to be employed when it is intended to expreas an object alone (t€ in the passire sepse) and cannot be employed like those epumerated above to denote also the action The auther of Kasika says that the affix is used in the Reflexive sense (harma Lartarı) But this is opposed to the Bhashya २५३५ । कृत्य । १४.२९ उपसर्गनिमित्तापरस्या र उत्तरस्य कृत्याय मस्य पाप स्यात । प्रवाणीयम् । प्रधा' fontos parties are tee KarTe 15796 TEFTATATA TOT Tott वचनम् । परस्यवस्वम् । पूर्वस्व टुत्वम् । निर्षिरशः। 2835 Ther of a Kritafis, prec-aed by a vowel, is changed into w when it follows an alterant upasarga The following are the specific Krit affixes in which this change takes place ---** (T) 47 (Gradc'VII 2 82) ** (III 1 96) safa ( 3 111) xfit (fotor III 2 78 &c ) and the substitutes of Faret (VIII 2 42) Thug अपागाह परिमात प्रमालम् परियार । भाना प्रयायमाशम् परियापमाणER vas मयालीयम् परियाणीयम् ॥ अनि 9441fe, wyfanya पनि प्रदायिन् प्रयायपो परिपापिन् परियायिणी fagur प्रहरीमा परिहीणः महीण्यान परिहोलवान् ॥ Long by YI 406 Why do we say sa preceded by a vowel ? Observe the lighth of भस्ज It 19 thas formed 91 +a+*+8+(VII 2 45 tho root no 19 read astery to the dhâtûpitba having an indicatory thay givtag scope to th3 rule) R6_***1+(The babstitution being considered asiddha the 2 of masj w elided by VIII 2 29 and then there is gutturalisation by VIII 2 30)=RTI H Vart --The word fixtares should be enumerated in this place As fotos पचारिम सलमग निर्षिरारमानवासे Here therdoes not come after a rowel but after of fire and so the rulo Tould not have applad to it Thu dricks vet o ·5 THE XRIDANTA AFFIXES. VOL II PART II CRAP. I $ 2896 ] , makes the rule applıcıb! to this = also. Thus fafata=fafalta (VII 2 42 S 3016)=निर्षिद्+निर्वि पणः ॥ The is changed also to ॥ २८३६ । विभाषा ।।४।३०। उपसर्गस्यानिमिसात्परस्य एयन्ताद्विहितोया कृत्स्यस्य नस्य यो धा स्यात् । प्रयापणीयम् प्रयापनीपम् । 'पिहितयिथेषणम्' किम् । वका ध्यवधाने यथा स्यात् ।प्रयाप्यमा परय । गत्वे 'दुर उपसर्गत्व' न' इत्युक्तम् । दुर्गापनम्। दुर्यापनम् । 2836 The of a Krit-affix ordained after a causative verb (रयन्त }, is optionally changed to p when it comes after an alterant upasarga. Thus प्रयापणम् or प्रयापनम् , परियापहम् or परियापनम् प्रयाप्यमाणम् or मयाप्यमानम् प्रयापणीम् or प्रयापनीय, प्रयापति: or प्रयापनिा, प्रयापिणौ or प्रपापिनी ॥ Why hav we used the sord faren ordained'in explaining the satra ? Because the change takes place, even where the va affix does not follow directly after the affix for but where a thlrd affix such as the intervenes As प्रयाप्यमाणम् पश्य ॥ Th..: being in the ablative, under the ordinary rule of interpretation (I 1 72), tlız krit alix should come immediately after fu. For the purposes of causing the change of न to m, the word दुर 19 not considered to be an upasarga This has already been taught before, (seo vartaka under VIII 4, 16 5 2231) Thus दुर्यापनम_or दुर्यापनम् । २८३७ । हलश्चेजुपधात् । ८।४ । ३१ । .इलादेरिजुपधात्म याच परस्य णो पा स्यात् । प्रकोपणीयम् -प्रकोपनीयम्। 'इल' किम्। मोहपीयम् । इजुपधात' क्षिा (प्रयपणीयम् । 2837 Akrit affix, coming after a verb, which begins with a cousonant and has a popultimate tu vowel, changes optionally ats which is preceded by a vowel, into , when it comes after an alterant upasarga The phrase कृत्वच: 1s understood here. Thus प्रकरपणीयम् or प्रकोपनीयम् , परि कोपणम् or परिकोपनम् ॥ Why do we say हल. beginning with a consonantr observe महणीयम, and मोहणीयम, where the change is obugatory, under VIII. 4 29. These are from tष्टायाम and जदयितई। Why do we say जुषधात् 'having a penultimate इच् rowel ' ? Observo मषषीयाand परियपराम , no opsion Note -The word in tha satra should be interpreted as सादे, and rob us ordinarily "after what ends In इल" For an इजुपधा verb implies that it ends with a consonant, and so the employment of the word as in the text would have beon useless had it meant furata nt . .

·6 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMODI (val IL PART II CHAP I G 2838 २३८ । इजादेः सनुमः ।।४।३२ । मनुमश्चेति ाई इजादेईलतादिक्षितो यः कृतास्थस्यैव । मेसीयम् । 'दादेशिम् । pirma #777779 17THJESTATTETTH'VE 75-(49) faz asurans मेन । प्रेभ्धनम् । हात स्यादेव । मोम्मणम् । 2838 A krit-affix ordained after a verb beginning with an vowel, having the augment 97 10 it, and ending with a consonant, changes its into whon preceded by an alterant upasarga. The word at of the last sätra 13 anderstood here Bat contrary to the construction put upon it in the last sútra, here it means are, by the natural rule of construction as given in I 1 72 We must interpret it so here because it is impossible for an mie root to commence with a while to have done so in the last aphorism would have been redundant Thus haute TTTE** from fire and the 29 added becauss at isa # The rule will not apply to Arang but it will apply to start from gwe where I or the Dasal 19 part of the root The bere means the anusvára generally as also in sutra (VIII 4 2) Therefore though tho change would have been raild by the general rule, (VII 4 29) this s@tra makes & Faraw or restriction That is, only in the case of Turfe rug verbs the change takes place, not an other ty verbs Thus AMATE, fone from the root of a Note -- This rule dog not affect rule VIII 4 30, relating to a verks, for those rerbs cannot be said to end with a consonant Moreover, we haro used the word fafrarin explaining the søtra, in order to indicate this fact, that the brit-affix must be ordained after a CODsonant ending verb In the case of causativo verbs, the Spit aftix is ordained after a vowel-onding (f) verb, and the vowel 19 elided after tho adding of the allix So that before the adding of the affix, the verb did not end in a consonant. २८३८ । वा निसनिक्षनिन्दाम् ।।४।३३। शर्मा मस्प बोगस्पारवृति परे । प्रतिक्षितपण-मानचितयन् । 28.39. Tho offwroto kiss' fire to bo angry and finog 'to blamo 13 changed to optionally, ben preceded by an apasarga having in it a cause of chango. Thus afferty or afaianta, ferty or afrTTy, sfimte or ofanya Nole--l'hicso verbs are wntten with in the Dhatapijha, and thercforo by rulo VIII 4 14 ante, the change of into would have boca obligatory. The present sátra poakce at optional, Tho root fafe praps lo kus', Fufe thra, and fifr TTC 6 ·VoL. II. PART II. CHAL. I.5280.] TI1S KCIDAYTA AFFIIES. 7 . २८४० । न भाभूपूकमिगमिप्यायिवेपाम् ।।४।३४ । करमाप जो रामभानीपम् ।मभयनीयम् ।'पूना पर पानिपते। पूरा प्रपती॥ गामः । " पपन्तभादीनामुपसण्यानम् "प्रभापमीपम् । 'कयामा यस्प यो या पुरतं पाया. रखोपरि तबोध्यम् । परयस्यामित्वेन पकारव्यवधामाम्म पत्यम् प्ररुपानीयम् । 2810 Tho * of a krit-affix is not changed to , though preceded by an upasarga having in it a cause of change, when tho affix is added to the following verbs : मा ' to shine', stobo', s'to purify', afm ' to be brilliant', *f* 'to go', raifa 'to increaso', üç'to shako'. This rule is an exception to VIII. 4. 29. Thus:- भा, मभानीयम् परिभानम् ।, प्रमखमीयम् परिभवनम् । पूमपान, परिपतनम् । Ishti.-The verb is to be taken and not the verb. In the caso of the latter the chango is obligatory, as, प्रपतीया सो. कमि मकभनम् , परिकममम् । गमि मगमनम्, परिणमगर ध्यापि मप्यायमन्, परिप्यायनन् । पेप् प्रपनम, परिचपन् । Vart-The abovo roots, even when in the Causatire, do not change thor of their krit-affix. As ममापनीयम्, परिमापनन् । There is no change in मण्या otev also. It is derived from the root truly with the prefix -. The sig replaced by a by a vartika in the Mahābhashya under II. 4.54:and tho position of this vårtika is taught there also, namely, that it should be read in the subdivision of asiddhas (VIII 2. 1) just at the close of the changa rules. Therefore a boing considered asiddha, the w is not changed to because no intervenes or rather is still considered to interveno-between the c of # and ** Had the root been w4th no ruloerould have presented the change of r to a in मण्यानीपर and the form would be मरुपाचीवम् Sco II.4.54.S 2436. . When the r is changed to gin to the ~ of me is not changed. Thas भनष्ट, ,परिनस्ट: a The नुस् ordained by VIL. I. 60, is elided by VI.4.24, and changed to y by VIII. 2. 36. Why do we say that ? Observe Avfa, frezafer It The word sore is taken in order that the probibition may apply to words like "Trafa,thick did end with though the has been changed by other rules, and is no longer visible. For here the of me is changed to by VIII. 2. 36, and then this 15 changed to T by VIII. 2 41; and the is added by VII.1.60. २०४९ । कृत्यल्युटो यहुलम् । ३।३। ११३ । पात्यनेन चानीय दीप दानीय विधा। 2511. The fixes called 'krityn' (tj. 1. 05) and the alliz lyut', are direrseis applicable: .

·8 THE SIDDHANTA KAOBUDI (JOL II PANT II. CAP. I $ 2842 By saying' diversely've mean that they occur in other pinces than those where ordained by the rules Thug lritya affixes aro ordained to come when an'act'or an object is to be expressed, bat they come niso n hen the Laraka as other than the objective Thus ita' a 'powder for bathung, TATTETCU: 'a Brabmana to whom a donation is to be made' la the first of these examples the 'powder' is the 'instroment' oxpressible by the 3rd case, and in the second the 'Brahmana' 9 the recipient expressible by the fourth case, so that in both cases the affix is applied without any express rule A says Similarly, as ordained to come un denoting instrument, location, and a verbal noun (III 3 115 and 117) But it is applied in other benses also. Thus traitrat Tar" halls for eating of kings', trompete7fa orifer dresses to be worn by the king': By using the word 'diversely', eren the 1sztrffires are appued in places other than those expressly ordained Thus पादाभ्याम् हितते = पादहारका क्षेची wasaaa** For accent see VI 2 150 To the root on with the upapada (the negative Particle w) would have been added the tro afjxes 7 and 720 under sûtza III 1 100 S 2854 This sūtra ordains of Odly and that also, when tho senso 18 that of censure The irrogalar form 47 therof re is for both these purposes Thús starty 77 & triding ain'. Why do we say " Ben condemnable"? Observe the name of the teacher 19 not to be uttered The name of the teacher 19 neither condemnable nor incrpable of utterance But it is not polite for the pupil to utter the name of th ttacher the verse of the Smrle "Let the person desirous of prosperity not tak- his own ande, or bis teacher's name, or the name of a great miser, or of an elder son or wife" २४२ । अधोगत् ।३।१।। समन्ताहा मास्यात् । रेयम् । अयम् । पप गश्यमतम् । पविभागोरध्येयम् । बष्यदादिव पतोपि दुपटवाद। 2812. The aflix 4 comes after a root that ends in a Torel. The letter or of this affix is indicatory showing that the adatti accent falls on the first vowel (VI 1 213), thus 17+7=ito noon bing, free • what to be sung', so also #99'shat is to be drank', & 'what is to be conquered'. The stof it and is changert sato e by VI 4 05. Nole-Why do we say that onda s A FOS 1'} By JII 1 14. a rool ending in a consonant takes rem affir 10stçad of 47, reading the aphorisms together, the conclasion to sw drawn is that the Allit come tro ·VOL II Part II Chap ! $ 2913 19 TIIE KIIDAVTÅ AFFIXES 9 aftor roots which primarily eid in a vo vel though in the co 1080 of development they may end in 3 consonant by the application of other rules Thus from 1 to cut' we have the il ritive root fees which ends in a vowel This 19 elided before ardhudhatoha ailirez and thuy the root b comes from which ends in a consonant, nevertheless wo shall havo the altis T and not tay Thu FTTETT what is wishad to be cu*, FETTE 'what is wished to b placed Similarly b fore ardhıdh tuka affires comer er, the it is changed into a b foro (VI 1 79) and the forenz then is 4* The root ac however takes to and not tu as erottyen &c We could have will spared the word zat in this sitra L'or all roots either ond in a vowel or a consonant No vIII 1 124 specifically ordains ***aft r all roots ending in a consonant L'l refors at youll fiud its scop only after those roots which end in 1 vo vel For similar reasons, moreover there was no necessity of making thig a separata sutra It could well have been inclul d in th pr ceding Ashta Thyayi sutra III I 96 That 19 10st ad of Tetratat: We could *have well enunciated 16 19 minniltaa: m uning the affixes tavyat tavya, aniyar and yat come aftur verbal roots The scope of yat would bo restricted to vowel ending roots by the subsequent satra III 1 124 २८४३ । इद्यति।६।४। ६५ । यति पर शात ईल्ल्यात् । गुपः । देयम् । ग्लेयम् । • afspre paafar afruar grat" तपयन । सत्यम् । चस्यम् । यत्पए। जयम् । नेपावधिा सरार्य । पपतापि परिधान प * wfirana (ayua) rfa fraura STT TV PROTI पोषयमाखो पबद । पात्या। 29.13 The final w of a stem is changed into & beforo the Kritaffix बत् ॥ Thus a'r, The Guna takes place according to VII 3 84 Vart-The verbe az 'to laugh at to kill 'to ask यद to attempt and to be born should be cnumerated in addit on, that is to say theso verbs though ending in a consonant tale om and not as MRT TT 1747, T71 and way Th root t woull hapo assuraed the form rr even by the aflis me the present partiha ordains are for the anke of the arc ut Thu 7 woull not have crusd vriddhi of the or for vriddhi 19 specifically prohibited with regard to by VII 3 35 The accent of tra is regulated by VI 1 213 and of core by VI 1 185 Vart -- And of tho verb to kill ww is the substitute when it optionally takes the afis ta This we hare यध्यम् or पात्यम् forn 18 uvolved by sutras VII 3 32 and 54 Thu affic are comes only after the ver substitute, afl ? the affix e comes which changes the into and into a aed causes vriddhi The latter ·10 NC KIDDIANTA KATXODI 'Tro. II Part 11 cuar I $ 2944 २८४४ । पोरदु पधार ।३।१।। पवर्गाग्वारपास्यात् । परापदादा गप्पम् । सम्पा' नावापतममाप्यमx" अतोन पर बापराध। 2941 Thozila o comice after 4 200t, suitch cnds in 1 Inbul letter lireradu shorts This doing tre, thus tetevo 'to ba sworn', +7 *WT to Lo ncquireet' Note-y do to pay n luick en is in Inbul ? Bu 1989* sf n rob ends in nny other consonant thoigh preyon }} hy a short the mot will tako at, thus ** + autogrid's what is to ba cookt 1, 040'ı 'specch Why do vo any' wlien priced dl by a short ? When preceded hy any other sowel it will tako vam, thus to TES' to be angry', 89 also itrary to be conccnlcd The word voor 15 weed in the stru in the original Tho force of here is, by I i 70 that shout having ono mattis or prosodial length 19 to bo taken and not long ** Thereforo, after the root 'to obtain we have T and not , thus relato breached ne attainable In tho strn III I 01 & 2830 wo have used the word 1 B 10 id must understood that the in licators letters do not make two nffixes asarpa whogo chcrent parts are identical Therefore यत् and पयत् aro sarupa afixes, and one will dobar the other And so there will be do added to thcsc roots But the afüxes * &c are not debarred, and they wall certainly como after these roots Note --Why do we say not b ing of the sime form? B causo if tvo affires have the same form the present rule will not apply, and in the case of such affixes the special aflix will dobar the general ntis Thus the aflizes and are when stripped of their indicatory letters aflixes having the same form re , and therefore the sutra III ? 1 ordaining as n generel rula will be alsynys debır ed by satra III 2 3 oradainya ing as the latter 19 & special stra applicable only to those roots which end in long a or which are simple roots not compounded with any preposition Thus गोदा+काद: giver of cows So algo 107 blanket giver In these cases we cannot have the affis var It follows from this stry as a necessary corollary, that the addition of indicatory letters does not make two or more affixes dissimilar in form (WT6) when tbeir essential effectige element is the same Thus the afilises $ &c are similar Why do we say but not so in the case of feminine affixes ? Because in the case of feminine afires a special aflix will debar a geperal affix, though they may be dissimilar inf rm Thus sûtra III 3 94 ordaining faut in forming feminine nouns from roots 19 & general or utsarga rule ·POU II Part II Chap I § 2347] TUE KIIDANTI AFFIXES 11 whilo sätra III 3 102 ordaiping after roots that have already taken some aftis 19 a special or apardia rule, and though and fal aro dissimilar in form, they bring fuminine affixes, the former will always debar the latter Thus the compound desiderative 100t3 fixte and forte will foren feminine nouns in sy and not by feat Thus feitat and fartaf and not fantafa, &c ४५। प्राडो यि।७।११६५ । आरः परस्य लभेर्नुस्यादवादी प्रत्यये विवक्षिते । मुनि कृतेऽद्धपभत्यामापात् पयरेप । चार- **at it: 1 2815. The augment Ta is added to the preceded by before an aflix beginning with all As vektor PT The TT is added before the addition of the affix, and by so doing it becomes * and thus loses its character of having a penultimate sa, and therefore by III 1 124, we shall buvo ta affix, and not at affix by III 1 98 Note--Had tie ir been added after thu addıtion of the fis, then I would be added by III 1 98 Chough in both ons 5 the forin will be TEFFVTT, the difference will be in the accent I would throw the acute on the first syllable (GATS*T* ), while, as a matter of fact, the word has svarita on the final, thus instead of a*** (VI 1 213 and by VI 2 139), which ar gives, we have som**(fara svar) Note - Why do we say 'whon preceded by ? Observe **** How do you explain aftreme **T? All rules are optionally applied in tho Vedas Orrua muy be expluned by saying that tho y having been added, is again dropped २८४६ । उपाटप्रशंसायाम् । ७।१।६६ । ..सपलम्पसार स्तुती' कि । उपलर शय उपलया। 2846 The augment is died to the preceded by , before 1, wlien the reference is to something pruseworthy.. As Otwa: Tytu (These words are form-d by mas and have gvarita on the final) Why do we say 'when referring to something praiseworthy'? Observe 5***** this is formed with the us afir (III 1 98) and means caprble of being perceived २८४७ । शकिसहोश्च । ३।१।। मरपए पश्यन् । 2817. The afbx comes after the roots na 'to be able', and Te to bear'. Thus viaxt' possible' at 'endurablo', ·( c 12 TIC SIODISTÅ KAUNODI Tror 11 rart II CHAP I 2848 २-४ । गदमदघरयमश्चानु पसर्गे ।३।१।१०। गदाम् । मदरम्। चर्यमा परेराधागुरी "चार्यो देशः। गन्तव्य इत्यर्थः । 'भगुरे कि भाचार्या गुस । यमनियमार्यम् । रोपसर्गाम्मा भूदिति । प्रपाम्यम् । निर्यात्स्यादेव । तेन 'सान भवेदिनियम्यम् इति धार्तिकप्रयोगात् । एतेन समियम्यस्प मापुतिः । 'त्ययामियन्या मनु दिव्य चपा' इत्यादि व्याख्यातम् । नियमे साधुरिति था। 2848 The aflis na comes after the roots te 'to speak', 9 "to bo mad', 'to go, to eat, and to resti un', when these 100ts do not take any proposition Thus Here's hat is to b spoken se, prose', 'wine, 'what is to be followed, *** what is to be restrained' Why do we say 'when not preceded by a preposition? When compound ed with au upasarga these roots will take out thus 75 de ATEC The root we would have tahen the afix to by III 1 98 also, as itends in and is preceded by its separato enumeration in this sâtra is in order to show, that the compound verb will not take the affis app Therefore with regard to write this is & neyama or restrictive rule and not a udhı or original rule Thus **991 Careption, however, must be made in tha case of the preposition fr. There the afix 19 added and not 18, a9 wo find the form fatirana uscd in a virtika For this reason the form First 19 not without authority As in the sentənce pent foruwatayfaya tu Or these forms can bu explained notjas kritya words formed by me added to the root ve, but as Taddbita words formed by added to the noun free (IV 4 98) Vart -The root when preceded by the propositiou takes the quaffix when the wņs, is not that of a preceptor , thus wat tot 'n eppronchable or communicable country But when the sense as that of a teacher the root takes one, thus was 'a preceptor २-४९ । अवधपण्यवर्या गहर्यपणितष्यानिरोधेषु । ३ । १।११। पम्युपपदे बद मुपि- (२८५४) इति यत्वपपोः भाप्तयादेश चापि गायाभवत्युभवाय निदातास । सर सर । शहरे शिम । भनुम TAIR सिम समान। भारमनात गुरोम नामातिकृपयस्य च । अपरकामा नरमीयासपेष्टापत्यकललयो। gfa rayas , vet inte TOMT) on these sites for portater fra TA1 A2 But all that I 2819 The words war" (VI 2 160) fra and at gr irroirregularly formeel laring the sense of condemnable', salcable' and 'not restrictul repectuely Thus 7 9 ac nsurable or triflungen Another and regular form 18 समुदान This ) form d by adding the affis *99 to the root as by II I 106 As a TH the patre of an elder sbould not bo uttered .

·FOL. II. PANT II CHAP I § 2851 TIL KHIDANT. AFTIES. 13 Here there 19 no sense of condemnation, but it lays down a precept of good conduct according to the above verso of the sinrıtı which declares" a person desirous of prosperity should not utter the names of himsulf or of his Guru or of a very miserly person, or of the eldest son or of a wife." So also tra: ***T: 'Baleable blanket', True #1: saleable cow. The other and regular Form is art, formed by the addition of the and meaning 'praiseworthy'. So also tapaaf'courted by hundreds”, au auf wood by thousands, ze, there is no restriction as to the numb r of candidates for the purpos3y of selection of a husband by a maid in other words wat - wooed, courted. Courted by hundreds, &c The other and regular form is your from the root y' to chooso'. 44 means a girl choosing her own husband and is not reserved or shy. Tho word wat in the sû tra is in the feminino gender, and it 19 in this gender only that the word is so formed In the masculino gender, thc word is regularly formed, thus att fraai, २८५० । यह यंफरणम् ।३।१। १०२ । वाग्ल्यनेनेति पर शक्टम् । 'करणम् किम् । घामम्-बोदव्यम् । 2850. The word ag is irregularly formed, in the sense of "wherewith somethung is carried". The word is derived from the root a 'to carry' and means 'a vehicle' i.., that by which a thing is carried, as # *When it does not mean a carriage, the root takes the affix 44, thus far 'an ox'. ८५१ । अर्यः स्वामिवैश्ययोः । ३ । १ । १०३ । " गती अस्मात् । पयतोऽपवादास्वामी वैश्वी वा । 'अना' किर। सार्यो प्रासपा माप्तध्य इत्यर्थः। 2851. The word wä" (and **) is irregularly formed when meaning 'lord' and a 'Vaisya'. The root 'to go', would have taken by III 1 124, but it takes when the sense of the word formed by it is that of a 'lord or sır', or a man of the 'Valsya' caste As a parut, honored sır'vat Ara: Arya or Vaisya.' Note.-Though by VI 1. 213, the afix makes the udátta accent fall on the first syllablo of the word, yet in the case of the word *** whon it means 'lord ', the accent falls on the last syllable Why do we say when it means air or a Vaisya? Otherwise the root takes the alliu 47 as wat ripu: 'the respectable Brahmana," ne, one worthy to be appronched or reachable २८५२ । उपसर्या फाल्या प्रजने।३।१।१०४ । गर्भग्रहरी प्रातकाला दिल्पर्यः । उपसर्या गोः। गर्भाधानाय पृषभेशोपगन्तु योग्यत्यय।। माने काल्या' इति किम् । उपसार्या काशी । प्राप्तध्येत्पर्यः। 2852. The word rest is irregularly formed in the sense of ripe for cover, or ripe for frution."

·imp rishable 14 TIK SIDDHANTA KAUHUDI [ROL II PART II CEAP I $ 2853. The word sitaf is formed by adding te aflix to the root T'to move', compounded with ths preposition 4 The word wat means having reached the timo The word *** means the first conception Thus उपपर्या गोthe cow fit for cover 9707 of the mare fit for the horse. Why do we say when meaning what has reichnd the time favorable to conc ption ? Olher vis3 th aflix tac will be used, as ventaf arut Kashi is approachable २८५३ । अजयम् सगतम् । ३।१।१०५ । नम्पूर्यापीर्यतेः कर्तरि यत्सगत द्विशयन् । कार्यतीत्यार्यम् । तेन सगतमायेप रामामय कुरु द्रुतम् इति भट्टिः। सौरजयं परसोपदिष्टमदेख पाय पुनवध इत्यत्र तु संगमिति विशेष मध्याहार्यम् । सगतम् किम् । अजरिता कायल । भायेतु भगतक केपि पयरेव। समार्य भगतेन । 2533 --The word in (VI 2 160) 'imperishable' is irregularly formed when qualifymg the word ofan 'fiiendship expressed or understood The word Tit is formed from the root by the addition of a with the force of the agent and afairing the negativ particle as +5+23 w the forc is not that of bhava (III 4 70) Thus 0 ATSE let our friendsh P be So also भनयमार्यातम् So also Bhatta तेन सङ्गतमायश रामाजय कुरा गतम् -ORamat quickly make upp rishable friendship with that honor d one • The word ** 19 an adjective qualifying the word fuendsh p expressed or under stood It does not mean friendship for two synnyms can not be used in the same sentenc and 28 T of Bhattı would have b en wrong as ajaryam used in the sense of friendsh p ia th sent nc altra maneira for here the word sargatam is understood and ajaryam qualifies it Why do we say wheo qualifying the yord 77T9? Observc aufen Ft: undecaying blanket when the forc is that of bhîva the affix would bnyat though the agent be sungata As माय सङ्गतेन Imp rishable through friendsh p २८५४ । वद सुपि फ्यपच । ३।१।१०६ । 'उत्तरसूतादिर भाव ररयपकृप्यते । वर्भावे श्यस्यामासदापसर्ग नुपुपपदे । मोसाद अप्रथमम् । प्रम वेदा तस्य यदमित्यर्थः। कर्मणि प्रत्ययावित्येके । उपयगे पु षदेव । अनुगमनन् । पवादाम्। 2934 After the root o'to speak', governing i case inflcctcd word as its up?pada, and not having a preposition annexed to it, there comes the nflir as well as us to denoto condition The sord TR 13 to be drawn into this sû ra from the next The phraso 'not having a prepositron 15 to bo read into th.9 sätra by anurrillo from III 1 100 S 2833 The force of the word also is to in dicate that the allir 4 19 also e aployed fb word of mcans in con straction with an upa pada that ends is a case-aflix, Nor 1 ·TOL II PART II CHAP I § 2837] TEE ERIDANTA AFFIIS 15 Thus 77 +€4479=A+++i=got7 +5+ toll by the Vedas or Brahman' Similarly TNT or T2T47truth monthe 1 Somo say these two affixes coms with a Passiyo significanca and 20t that of bhiva only Why do we gay vhºn it his crs infl ct d syord as appel'? Other W190 **+T=ETTE a musical instr imont Why do ro say not having proposition ? Observe HIT 1 rumour formed by thu aflix tan and not by und or २८५५ । भुवो भावे । ३।१।१०७ । पवारयात् । अमर भापो प्रमभूयम् । मुपीत्येव । भव्यम् । अनुपगर्ग इस्पेय । प्रभव्यम् । 2835 - After tho root to be, in construction with ca e inflected word 7s its upapadı anl when usel Tithout 1 preposition the aflis mauris employed to denoto condition (bliůvr) The words for an l T of previous stras are understood in this Tho anuvrittı of do s pot cover th s aphor sm As 1749 7 = 7*7* TTT: gone to or arrived at Bral mahoo! 241=TT4 Taigon to divinity The word bhara of this sûtrn governs the auc Ing ons Why do ve say in construct on with a caso ini at d word ? Othrz .W11 it will take 13 +-47-1+48-7 (VI 1 79) Why do we say not taking pr post on? Obrve *** २८३८ । एनरत प । ३११।१०% । समुपवर्ग मुप्पपपदे पन्तर्भाये परस्यात्तारवानादेयः । नमो न ब्रमपरया । पीई KTC 2836 After the root 'to hill, when in construction with 2 caso inflectel rord is its up?pı 12 inl wlien usel without a preposition comes the fis is in denoting con le tion anl the lettera is the subsitute of its finals The hrnsug Titti and 77 nroad rstood in tñ s giftra As *#+*+*+-+*+1+-a=3884 (VI 1 71) 0 Brihraina murder Tho word is f m pine b caos of u ?? Mole When not in construction ith no in the form 13 vra: a blow (r+fre +) This serb do r not to the affis tee in d no 10g condit on thr being no crimpl of such formation Why do I say when not taking a preposition ? Obzorre at via thero is a combu २८५७ । एतिस्तुशास्त्रजुप स्पप् । ३।१११०६ ।

·C 18 THE SIDOKATA KAUNUDI [nz II rart II cap 1 $ 2857 After the serbs roto go', ef to prio', 'to görern', 'to choose', 'to respect and as to pltase', comes 2557 the affir क्यप् a krit Tho znuyritti of gra was an inte does not extend to this aphorism The pres nt sútra orduns g nerally the affix ** after the above rerbs २८५८ । इस्वस्य पिति कृति तुक् । ६।१।७१ । 7792) F779) TT TTET (2855) frems TT TETTI ETRS ! UTE थार्या ऋषिज । सादृत्यः । शुष्य । पुना कपघुक्तिः परस्यापि पयतो बाधना । अपाय स्तुत्यशविदुहिगुदिन्यो वा इति काशिका । सत्यम् । शस्यम् । दुम् । दोसम् । यसम् । Nagi 62€ *** (7900) RETTTTTEET Taat (1903) TR fazi RCAIET *** 9747721Fgisi: 917754804779* fra दिए । माहुलकारकरणे यर । अनिदिताम्- (४१५) इति नसोपः । भाग्यम् । 2858 lo 3 root ending in a short rowcl is added the aug. menta (9) when a Krit air buring an indicatori e follows Note--Chus sxf tofa+ Font - trafiga sobo Erau Similarly मकृत्य and मात्य and उपस्तुश्य formed by the affix स्पर॥ Why do we way 'ending 12 ? short vo vel ? Obs rv wit Hurtt # Why do we ary 'having 10 indicatory ? Obz rvc **** **** Why do 11e say affix 1 Obs rvo पदुतर पत्तमा with the Inddhttraffixes तर and लपप. In the corpo ind Trafata thongh thn ront 19 mał short yet thero is no augment in as much as the rul by which the root 1114 be n shortened 18 nº Bihirangi rule and the pres nt rule van Intoringa on *FTE AFECTCn That which 14 Bahurunga iš regard dng not having talcu cffect or as not causing wh n that which 29 Intaringi 19 to tako eß ct Thus *+-+etters to b gone' So nlo ** OTTE! 'to be presud +*** afon + (being chan3 I into by VI 34 S 2195) fie to by instructele a papil Sy nig. Ta ** roto by chosen By tin the uûtra tho ront u int n lelta bo trken, nn I not tho root r The murulent dansatoru of tho latt r 14 dny arrat **** *18+ SIEMS tob bono ir 556999 to be asso Thou, 5 th anuyritt: of or Y Carr nt fronu ti po 910 15 satrı 2554 ats rep it on in this aphorian is to in I eat that oth rrulha III 1 125 or luninnynt shoal I not tako efict in th: aboru vorbet Thus III I 125 150 requr ntr the verb * but the pregnt rola probabite that Th sta listo TTTTTTI m 1st be friscal Arconl ng thank the rooft er to Ass to in Ih ani je to corer optronills that's afix TT ATT (TTTTY (11 37) or 16 im or him of the abuso thrin frossava rizy l» explained 1yaubing unui bs P's ini int!? *airs V 3 ( an ſurinał Wynyal of 11:14 But the Atubaits for too her twoud aliful 2 10 maxim 19 ·ror. II. PART II CIAr. I. 82901. TE KRIDAVTA ATTIIKS. 17 - Vart ---The crba (21) to anoint', preceiled by the preposition on takes tho allir utt when used as an appellative. As 21+ 1+ - सारण meaning clarithrd butter. The nasal is clided by VI.44.3415. Tho aſx 1128 tho force of instrument as a diversity. २८५९ । अदु पधाच्या पितेः । ३ । १ । १९० । "पुर' । पृत्वम् । 'मधु' । पुष्पम् । पित्यो । करप्या । परन् । 'तपरकर' विम् । 'कृ' । बीर्यम् । शनित्यायन्तामुरादय रति मिनभावे पयत् । चिन्तातु यदेव । 2559. After verbs having a penultimate short the ailir व is employed, with the exception of the rerbs रुप 'to be able', aul ya to hurt'. Thus Zए + पय - सत्यम् , so also एप्पम् But O. and व will form कम्प्यम्, and पर्यम् Why havo we uscd tho letter in *? It is to indicato that short 1s mount and not long (I 1.701 Therefore the root it will tako un and form strin It lag already been taught that free adulai to Tof roots 14 not of universal npplication "Therefore when for 29 not add d we have thalis ayat But when the root ends in nich then the yat is the proper atix २०६० । ई घ सनः ।३।९। १११ । पास्य । सायुषः। पेयम् ।''रति गुपटा। 2980. The affiर क्या is employed after the root सन् 'to dug'and long is substituted for the final of thic root. By the forco of we draw in पप् • Thus n+ कापूस++यसेयम् ' to be dag (V.1: 87) 9 usd in tha sutra for the she of cuphony Tho samo purpose would hto been persed by using shortr, thus 'रच राना' But tho long indicates thubo rulo VI.4 43 doce not apply bere. By that rule the sof er would hare bhen length oned into at before the afix परप्. २६. मोसंमायाम् । ३.९. १२ । स्या कमरा भर्तया रत्यः। किवायग्दोग्य म तुसंहा। ममत मानम् "। रया।। संमाया यशायामेष पिकापार्यमिदं पार्तिकम् । 'अमचायाम् 'किम् । नाना नाम लिया। प्रय वर्ष भार्या वरिति । सहि 'सायांसमन-- (३२७६) इति पापा भाष्यम् । संशापर्य परास्त विपरिवार 'सत्यम्। रिभते रति दीर्यान्वारस यादेर्श पद । श्यतु मरतेरेव। ४ वदम्पन्न- माये-४'रति परिमाया। 2501. The affix पर is employed after the rerb सन् 'to bear' when not used as a nime. 'Thns +777** PIRTI 'toge who ought to be supported,' 1...,'SCI- The word 23 hore a verbal poun and not an appellatire Why dowe say'nhon uor usrd as an apredstire ? Obserrer+रत् = भा. Kshatriya. Hoy do you thin explain wat meang wifi'. - For by the 8 Tbc long Tants' ·18 THE SIDDHANTA KAUAUDI [YOL II PART II CHAP I G 2862 tion sâfra III 3 99 S 3270 the feminine ought to have ben year with mr and not yet with nyat for tho exc ption Sustare finds its f ill scope in the mus-uline? True the objection is appare itly valid #19 not from TSVER (Bhyadi 946) b it from rither of th» Jib tjá 115 o fomending in long of the Krga di class No 21 lae ya of th- pres nt sutra mus $ confined to the Bhua.lı root and not to those of the Juhotsål for the latt r hugan indicatory s and is read az 5.7 in the Dhatupatha B caus- th maxim an expression with an indicatory lett r do s not include one with it' applies Vari -The us of 1 yap is optional when this verb takes the prepost Tbus cats or curd: This vârtıka allo vs an option only when the word is not an appellative २८६२ । मुजेर्विभाया । ३।१ । १९३ । हजे. यया स्यात् । परोपपस् । दृष्य । 2362 The affixent optionally comes along with nyat after the root ys to cleanse This is an example of Prap a vrbhdsha By III 1 110 ante, the root gy having a p nultinat vould have nec suar ly taken hyap this sutra d clares an op on As Pict su: or afcarta': to be cleansed The pocond form is thus evolved POCRAT-24 (HII 1 125) Now applies the following satra by which 3 is changed to g २०१३ । घजो कु घिण्यतो । ७।३ । ५२ । AR Wyr fifofa Tamm Head ud, fagrerefire show', air z'fu (889), et 2563 Tor the final, or of a root there 19 substituted a corrosponding guttural, before an alia laring an indicators anl before 1981 Can yo have sign +599Then there 19 siddhi of the ri of mrig by VII 2 114 so weg tafar Noc --The gurita ral do 9 no apply hero The s@tra diosg not mean that the visgittura) sed before a far and a bcfure afecallis but both. Thi* guttural change tales placs in the case of Dyanku 2. also by the following ६४ । ग्यदनादीना घ।।३।५३ । und TITITE I masi- TIATITI I 2801 The gutural 19 substitutci in agindu and the rest Thus farat 745Eri a kapd of black antclope ·FOLII rart Il-chir I $ 9868] Tilt zrIDYTA AITIX 3 19 . . . २०६५ । रागसपमृगपोधन प्रयपष्टपच्यायया ।३.१५ ११५ । पने गह पपm पिपारा । रारा m...भिभारा पिलाया। नमाना गोमा रामा मयते बारा Malai TRENT iit ITI पातर ar परनो मे गे । पपा बर पि । fm मिनायोग्रगुणा एगे रोप mmyोसार ई. मा यम । गोपवायत् । परे सपने पसोपा की। पशिष्टपा । न पयते गया। 2SO3 The worls राप पूर्व पोम एप पट पर anil पार are irregularly forncl by the addition of t'o n'lic 777 Thus nा पोतय. or रामरागपते, राज+म+वा = the Rijraya or coronation 830-1fic Th sima crops also call my! Thr cremony in which somi 19 cxtric d 13 also call drujas isa Tul ngth ains 15 by nipatana Similarly Tor 14-879-asthu s'in, Ist ralls that wh ch morcs (afu) ia thoshy, or that wh ch imp Is (Ilft) creation to anion Whn sarya 19 derived from sri+lyap, th 1st plac ! by stTrub.mry lengthrned by VIII 27 Uh n it is derived fre in the Tulsi rasa gara, th n the nugm nt e is adidto kyn ए++पर - filso Epsonha, tus 13 a 1 cxc ption till I lb, rh 7 TT woull also have bun applıcd This rule present3 it In for who is th aüt kap 15 added to /ral prer a br the upapada mrisha thy forms of thr alix being to denote an obsrct, and it antya in word follows tho gntr, &c of the substan'ıya which it qilifi 5 10,1tisd p nd int 01 iti suban. tive (rizshya) Thu3 उपाय योगदगुग रोमा: 'रोते नी+r- व 'an agrerabla lorer' Smals गु+पर कुयम् ' alms real (other than got land silver) , the other form 13 गोपा+१फया thes which ripeus of its If in cnlusat ground This is when the force of thrafix is thstofar Lexire But what denotes an obyce APassure) only th-forn 19 टपाममयः = समस्या - 05231-(rhadarsna.more by legs). २६ । भिद्योद्ध्यो नदे । ३ । १. १९५ । निदेव परम् । शाखा भित्ति न FARRIEगाना। किता रेता पण्डिा 2366 The words in an la are urrezularis formed by thefins when meanings 'rirer'. This fri+71=*t's nr thz banks 13 banks by ta'rash of its rater, thr name of Bdra rurer बकर ग्दर 'a uter rkes ratang cre-intbo banks', Amol this Uudbys tirer, thchored nor Why do we gay "whan merge .

·20 TOR BIDDIANTA KAUBODI, [yo. II PINT II CUAT IS 28Gr - ang a riyur"? Whon got maning or qualifying the river, the regular forms are used , thus मेता and उस्मिता २०६७ । पुष्यसिध्यो नक्षत्रे ।३।१।११६ । अधिवरेसे पग्निपारयते । पुष्य त्यरिमन्नाः पुष्पा सिधपस्पिम्पियः । 2867 The words yet and free aro irregularly formed by the afix when used as ruines of 3stcrisms Thus पु+बयप-पुप्या 'the Pashya asterism' It is 80 called because objects are nourished under the influences of this asterism पिपिप् शिद्धा ths asterism Siddhya another name of Pushy so called because things are accomplished under the influence of this star The force of the affix is that of location Note-When not the name of asterisms, the forms are a 'nour shing'सोपन accomplishing' २०६८ । विपूयविनीयजित्या मुञ्जकल्कहलिए ।३।१।११७ । प्रस्नीजिभ्यः पप । विपूयो गुजामवादिकरणाय सोयितथ्य इत्पर्यः। यिनीया बल्क। पिष्ट जोपभिनिरोष हत्पर्यः । पापमिति धा । विस्पो दलिः । वन फष्टव्य इत्यर्थः । कृष्टसभी पारणाय स्मूल काष्ठम् । अन्यत्तु विपश्यम् । दिनेश । श्रेयम् । 2868 The words fare fornitor and fai aro irregulurly formed when they mean, the 'munja grass', the 'sediment' and the 'plough' respcotirely Thus fæ+9+*4=faget etymologically that which has to be purified to make rope , fa t-torqzfantar 'a sediment or sin , fotaforest 's plough that which is to be conquered by strength' The regular derivatives are fagram foto and free २०६८ । प्रत्यपिझ्या ग्रहे । ३।१।११८ । "बन्दीति पलभ्यम् । प्रतिपय । पिएमम् । सायद मतियारम् । अपिनाम् । 2869 The verb tr 'to seize', preceded by the prepositiois मति and अपि takes the affix पपप (in the Vedhe literature) Part --It should be rather stated in the Vedic literature Thus माय नमतिपदाम तमाम्नापियमम् ॥ Note-The k&gt u nads the word chhandası into the gâtra its If In the clasical Sanskrit the prop r forins are afarian and SFTTHY २७ । पदास्वैरिवान्यापक्ष्येषु च । ३।१ । १९ । अपमम् । मसं पदम् । अस्वैरी परतन्नः। पुरा सुझाः । पजरादिवाने परमम्मी मता , बागाया प्रापमा पेना। पागद तेत्यर्थः। श्रोलिङ्गानि गायन पनि । पो भवः पक्ष । दिमादिवासात् । शाशा शार्यपायित इत्य । 2570 The root T takes tho affix pre when it means a 'rrord', 'dependant', 'outside', or a 'partisan' ।

·POL II Part II QTAP I 28731 TIE KRIDANTA AFIXES 21 . Thus ATFTY' tha Pragrıhy? words that donot admit of sandhi alrcady defined in sutra I 1 11 So also wareh Th ge arc technical terms of the Prátisakbyas also The word eft means depandant upon others not free to provid for himself 'Chus Tiits Tas the captive parrots dependent upon others by being kept in cages &c The word ta mcans situated ontsid Thus ग्रामवृक्षा सेना' an army lging outside thr villago The word algt bing in the prom indicates that the derivative word form d from Te must also b feminio in gender to have this sense and not who the word is masculine or neuter The word et is derived from vasid a party aud m aus a par $15an follower or friend Thus area16 siding with or bing the parti. sang of Y Agudeva So also 23a7f7: b longing to the party of Arjun, Sa also wire'tha partisan of the Asyls २७१ । विभाषा कल्पो ।३।१।१२० । जयपार । कृस्यन् । वृष्यत् । पथे। 2871 After the verbs yan'to do', and 'to rain' the alix vis optionally cmployed The root y would have taken the affix red by III 1 124 and the verb op would necessarily have taken 99 by III 1 110, the present sQtra th Refore declares an optional rule Thus +9=744'to bo dono or +7* So also trong or modern stimulating In deriving the alternative forms the following sutra spplies २८७२ । ब्राहलोपर्यत् । ३।१।१२४ । अवर्णन्तादलताप पातोरयत्स्यात् । कार्यम् । पर्यम् । 2872 lhe affix ! comes after a vcrb that ends in (long or short), or in a consonant The phrassu: is in the genitivo case dual number the force of the genitive here being that of an ablative Ag +147=7* to be made' +14= २८१३ । युग्य च पत्रे । ३।१। १२९ । पत्र बारनम् । युग्यो गोः । पत्र क्याकुत्य च निपारयते । 2873 ia The word op 19 irregularly formed meaning Tehicle" Thus पुग्यो गो. the The word vs means that by which a thing is carried carrier bull or the yoked bull carry युत प-युग्यम् . affis kyap grit rent tb harnessed el phant ready to Here x 13 changed irregularly into t before the When not meaning a Brer ora cairage it has th> fo matr ·TUR SIDDHANTA KAU VUOI (VOL. II PÁRT II. CAP. I. $ 2874. २०७४ । श्रमावस्यग्यतरस्याम्।३।१। १२ । मोरपदावधिशारे पपत् । पड़ो सत्यो पहिलो इसव निपात्यते । समा राह पराया चन्द्राको नामास्या-शारा 'मातोपर्यत्' (२८३२) । 'चा-२८) पति शरयम् । 1977) "****! Tara **:"1757977077777SWITTI mituri Trata- Tai top: 1 *177757" Taraf 2374. Optionally the word Argent is irregularly forncd. The word 47 maas' along' or 'together. T in comp 191*ion with th: root o'to dwoll', tak th' afir Tit in the 89033 of location of time. Optionally the Vred lht 13 not substituted in such a c333. Tha tims or tha day on wh ch the sun and the moon dsell together in tho samo constellation is called अमावास्या or समावस्या The final # in JA12E*7 19 indica tory and is for tho sako of shoming where the proper accent should fall Tho two forms 1971 a TITTEOT Or) thy game worl, and a forliori a ruis made with regard to one will be made applicable to the othar \ฏd to this effect thºra is a paribbazhd which deciras estofa ZJETITFATIT, *that which has undergone a change in regard to ono of 163 parts, 19 by no means in consequence of this change som-tbing else than what it wag bxford tha chung ha taken piacs, Ta hrefore slºra fY 3 30, chough 14 10 triny, 8233 **1776319197 19 mils app'ıcablo to the form 7WTETI Nis) In th) ashtadhyayi ord » tha sâtri ***(8182838*) follow: the present sůtru So th, author reads at ngaia hero. 28714. Tho affix nyat comes aftor a vorb that ends in ri or in a consonant. 3 bus tetrarca gayi Tha gattaralisation is by VII. 8 5.9 S 9863. Varl-The root takes the aflix ray when compoun led with tho word siis Thug wegral y 'n rop This dsbury thu hyap of 1959 l'ar! - Thu roos me wh'n prezed by both era and se takes oras 99117 Time: 19 1241 iii17 dhe i minia*6YY's='(=5871-fegrerer faz: te grimus **TI? (135]) refe 767137. *****27*** your razrul turiTTIITRITIS Use yen??!! *tyri funery # Tia'aard HS ETUTTON' 173 A faltarı! su',latuled for the final ofn sost which bryn wit's a gaitirsi, bivan liix hnung an inlicitors and le ore , Airst meaninolin ihr Ta + Is un rempi"yt V11 3 31. The Årsikritra is ny r., 5192 tha: 18.74 412121993 For kt krets the word fremerefert in the attra un procin - ·TOL II PART II ONIP 1 $ 2978] TI KRIDAVIA ATTIILS (V11 362) which would thra m 19 "l'or the finals or of a ront, which down tieth i' ein lines in th> mhthá th rs i sabrit;"* In &" tur il forsa it. Pret Afis' Tus fott, t'i rs wouli buns 81:6 181 chungst this car wc,b cus th.sing38, in tu se nutna or Pro PCP boitisois hail th ra will be gilur alımı tion of u 13 iniis of the 3? &, iniz? th? 7**hay; a putlir 22 25 on inual, and a burding t, ths så rakura th ro ought not to by any gosturaluntion 11 suforu thoigh ac ording to ths opinion of Pånin tha sutra suthor the forms would have ben quite the ruvers, yet on ths muxim til NT #TTTTTT " when th 19 a diff rency of option aruang tia larss S/01, ens opinion of thy lamrin 352 paraile orur that of the olle' Tho opintoa Ka yalyans sip 73 d a tho rule of Panigi haro. २८७६ । सवित्रज्योश्च ।।३।६०। ममात्र परिधान 2576 A guttural is not substituted for tho final or of ETA and its boforo an allir finvas an indicatory and beforo . . . Thog ganti, afronti This 19 an excription to VII. 3 52 Note--Th ro is no crimpl. of 17 with th affis van. b-cansı by 11 4 6C at replacus TTL foru all ardhiſha uka allizes excöpt en andra Thy of t'i sútra amplıcs tase the ruls applics to oth s roou also not mira. tioned as a cor from a २-७३ । भुगम्युमी पारपुरगापयाः ।।३।६१। परिपारपो। सुमेरपुर पालिका बना (100)ीप । गुमरम fetfmyfr *11u9nit ITI I TIJ* fkti 4778 31 2977 u 'an arm', anl *J11'? hial oi boldly dt52180', po irregularly furnil, without 11170 11733 of thcir*baforo Tawul 5.7 w ch ++ (11 3 121 S 3300) Tos irr gularib, c 17th, aos 1. OʻG121 4+*sll ng gitarralu1'101 191 Tilf ******* from th) to Jirania (Tijalı 20) Tas irregabirity coas13.3 in t5 non-chussing of 2 Wen nu: no aging 'on ar 'aada d193237', wa hura QrT: TI २० । राजापाशी यमाहे ।।३। ६२ । mai fatte TF1 94 541471 18547752TETA BAYI ETTEI SETTI 2STS **50 and an ama irregularly formed with a wlien mezung a portion of a sacrificial offering. Turt: ary dard farge TI #ikh ** *bor: tha gyharal sabze Litutioa, 2 TITKI, HI3*: 1111* na 1 78' TIRITTI Bat asiti and I wan di sef priaz ty portions of a sacrifico.

·TITE SIDDIINTA KAUNODI (vol II Part II Chap I $ 2879 मपाज Note-Tho ut* and 4t are illustrative only The guttural change do s not take place with other prepositions &c also as tor: STITUTUS ऋतुपात्रः as in the sentences एकादयोपयाजाः उपांशु याममतरा यति सप्टो पनी सपा भन्ति ऋतुया घरति २-७० । वचैर्गतौ । ७।३। ६३ । कुत्वं न । ययम् । गतो किम् । घश्य काष्ठम् । कुटिलीकृतमित्यर्थः। 2879 A guttural is not substituted for the palatal of ** in the sonse of going' As वयं घर्षात पशिज: Why is गती used when we know from the Dhatupâtha (Bhuadı 204) that in ang to go ? The specification shows that the roots possess many meanings other than those assigoed to them in the Dhâtupâtha Observe TFT ate=gfza २८८० । श्रीक उच के।।३६४ । परेशकुल्थे निपास्यों के परे । ओका सकुन्तवृषलो । गुपथलपा का पत्र पिदे अन्ता दातार्यमिदम् । 2880 **** is irregularly formed from the root or with tho aflix क (अ) The change of into x and the Guna are the irregalarities Asोर्की & bird a gudra The affix is added under III 1 135 Tho * 18 added with the fo ce of the haraka rulat o 1 bo ng that of Lo atron c Tho affix sould have giv n the forma regularly but then the word would have been acutely accented on the first syllable but it 19 desired that tho acutu should be on the last The words दिवाकराः घलोकपा &c are also stro gular formed with the Unadi affis the being substituted for ras an Unadi diversity (bahalam) ८८१ । एय प्रायश्यके।।३।६५। कुरुवं म । अपश्यपाध्यत् । 2581 A guttural is not substituted for the palatal, bororo tho fix re when it mcans 'to do as absoluto necessity' अपाय पाच्या मारय वाच्यम् but पाप वाव ani Rat when the snse 11 not that of nccssity Sco III 3 170 171 for the sense २८८२ । यजयाचरुषप्रयचर्यश्च ।।३। ६६ । पये करवायाम्पम् । पाण्यन । रोग्यम् । प्रवाई प्राविशे' मनाप्रप पराप्यतएव पापबाररवत् । 'योव' पापमा पत्रिपूरपोष रति कापियामेरी चित्य भायातायात । पदावनात्यानम् इव रिमाध्यम् । 2552 A guttural is not substituted for thio fiul palatala of पर पाए र ए anlm before the flix रन् । Aसाम्पर वार, रोय. प्रवादन, and सन. Though पर है panultimatroanlth reloro ly Ill I llunosl) buyutah u reg it inker .

·Foc II PART II CHAP I $ 2886 ) THE ORIDAVTA AFFIXEE . पयत् by force of this sutra भव shows that the present sutia applies to it, though it ineans a word or spach', and the prohibition of VII 3 67 does not apply मपाय is the name of a particular book Others say that tho prohibition applies to T only when it is preceded by - aad does not mean word or speech (VII 3 67) and not when it is preceded by any other preposition A9 अविवाफ्यमारिति पटरित ॥ This even in a very restricted senss, namely, on the tenth day of the Dasaratra ceremony. In other places we have शवायं । Vart-त्पञ् should he enumerated in this connection, 18, before पत्, the remains unaltered as FUTOTT & According to Kasika, the vårtıka applies to ren and you. The inclusiou of 94, however, is doubtful, as it is not given in the Mahabhåshya ८८३ । वचोऽशब्दराज्ञायाम् ।।३।६७ । बाष्यम् । यदायाया तुपाक्यम् । 2583 The guttural is not substituted for the final of before or when it does not mein 'a word or spcecli'. As पाध्यमाद, प्रवाध्यनार but अवधुपितं पाप्यमान २८८४ । प्रयोज्यनियोज्यौ शक्याथै । ७ ।३।६८ । प्रयोक्त' पपया प्रयोज्यो नियोक्त यक्यो नियोग्य भृत्यः । 288-1. भयोग्य and नियोग्य preserve their palatal in the sense of capable to do this' As प्रयाण्याप्रयाक्त यक्य नियाज्यानियोक्त पक्या 18 a servant, but माप and faritra in other senses स्८५। भोज्य भक्ष्ये । ७।३ । ६८ । भोग्यमण्यत् । " यत्प्रकरणे सपिदमिन्या घेति वक्तव्यम् । साप्यम् । दभिर्धातुवदिवोऽपि पातिकवतारस्वीकार्यदाया। 2885. भाग्य preserves its palatal in the sense of 'eatable'. The word us derived from भुज् with पयत् in the sense of 'able'. AB mtoa stens 'eatable rica', 797 part: 'tatable barley gruel'. *** here meang anything which is fit for being eaten. When not having this sense we have भोग्यः कम्बल Varlık --Thc verberg and T should be enumerated in the chapter of Thus लप्रयतसाप्यम् Though दमि is not read as a root in the Dhatupátha, it must be taken ag a root by the force of this vårtika. Thus दाभ्यः ८६ । पोरावश्यके । ३।१। १२५ । उषाताहातापर्यत्स्यादवायभाधे मोत्ये । लाव्यम् । पाथ्यम् । 2886 The aflix tot comes after a root that ends in tho letters lon; or short vlen tie sense is that of necessity पपद ·(OL II PART II CHAP I $ 2887. 20 TIE SIDDIAYTA KAUMUDI - 6 we This debart the affix 47 Thas v+v=+CATE (VII 2 115 and VI. 1 79)'must be cut', so niso 9+ TUT = * must be parified २७ । भासयुपपिरपिलपिनपिचमश्च ।३।१।१६। les raq I'I fuera'17*7TT 1 4749 IME I ETT I STORITETET 2987 The afli va comes after the verbe ang 'to distil', s to join', 'to FUT', 'to speak distinctly' sa 'to bo ashamed', and 'to dunk'. Tho verb IT is a compound verb formed by the preposition se and the roots. This satra debars to that would otherwiso have come by III 1.97 and 98 S 2812 & 2844. Thus 19+-142=UTOTTE. (VII 2 115 and VI. 1. 79), bo also for पाप्यम्, राप्यप, प्राप्यम् and चायन २८८८ । मागाय्योऽनित्ये ।३।१।१२७ । aregatorated in any forreste fruftfada ThTRITFE seurattaa sfitrah TaTHYTATTISTârsos | TETET: 1 8725 Teht UCHI 2888. The mod war is u regularly formed when meaning impei manent' This word is thus formod -12 ++42=57+*+7=, (the being changed into it by the analogy of VI 1 79) As To Trevig This 13 a species of Dakshinaga fire As this fire 19 brought from the Gårhapatya fire and is not pörmanently kept alivo, therefore it 19 called anâyys This hosyover, is not co-extensive with Dak shinagai It is that fire which is brought from the Gârbapatys, and has the same source with the Dakshinagai and Abavanıy&goi A Dak shinagaı fire may be taken from different sources, as from the family of a well to do Vargya, or from a frying place, or from Garhapatya fire when at is taken from the last, se, from Gårbapatya fire, it is ankyya Dakshinâgni Ahavanıya is also taken from Gârbapatya It is not every thing that is not lasting, which is called Andyga, for a fragile pot will not be called so It applies only to the consecrated fire When it has not this sense, the form 13 waa meaning 'what ought to be brought RESC I AUTEUTSUFATIS!!$75 criar safar 499 ÁTTSTE: I HOT Maestrasforafat suitTETI 1 sitra Fatti HUTTsaarati face 4:1 ADUTSETTI 2889. The word atat is irregularly formed when meaning disapproved'. The word swara 13 a negative word meaning "non-agreement'. It meana also disrespect' 1 1 .

·YOL II PART II ONAR I $ 2892) THE KARDAVTA ATITE 27 Thus hureers 'the thief is to bo disliked '. Why do wo day when meaning' dreapproved' Becauss otho wise tás regular form 15-+' to lead' agi 'tractablo The word in thr altra 19 91771 which we have translated as 'dis. approved' But the word aaft also m'ans i att ord 4 ro', and stafa would thereforo, m'an 'free from desiro or worldly attachment', Therefore the word wat means also 'fres from attachment', as 10 tho following sentenco - ज्येधाय पुप्राय पिता ब्रह्म मयूपात प्रथाप्याय भातेगासिने नाम्पस्मे करमेन let tha father teach the Sucret Doctriac to his eldest son, or to sash popul who u free from worldly attachmºnt, and to no one else' २८४ा पाय्यांनाप्यनिकाय्यधाग्यामानहविनिवाससामिधेनीपु।३।२।१२९॥ मीयते मेन पाय भानम् । ययात्यादो पत्य च । 'चासो पुश्-' (२०११) पति पुन । पार नीय दामामलि मतीति मानाय विधेियः। यदापादेयः समादीच निपात्यते। मिश्रीय. सिगन्धाभ्यादिक मितावा मियायः । भिमररी पयत् । पायोधारयादी कुरुप च निपारवते । पीपउनया भिदिति पाप्या शा। 2890 The words Tor, T*TTA frate and stay are irregularly formed meanirg 'a measure', 'an oblation to fire', 'adrell. *ing', and 'a sacrificial prayer', respectively. Thuyo words are supposed to bu formd thus --** (to measure) +3710 appare the being changed into and anothor o being added by VII 3 33 The regular form 18877' to by masured'777777-38 VI 4 03 - मेय) उम्+नो (to lead) +पयदपापाव्यम् 'ths oblation'. It being a crudo form applies to a particular kind of oblation Tha regular form ५ सम्मेयम् । मि+घि (to collect)+ रयत-नि+ये+पनि+चाय+ य=मिकाम्य: a dwelling'.The regular form 1s निया (to put) +रव-पाप्या (fem) The rāmadhena rs the nomo of certain Rik hymus used as supplemental verses in a Lindy. The other formsय । सत् । ती तुण्डपास्यसंचाप्यो ।३।९।९३० । पुरन पीयतेस्लिम्सोमा कुरडपाया कुछ। चीपतेसो चाया। 2891. The words year and tera: are irregularly formed meaning a sicrifice These words are thus formed फुरा+पा(to drink)+at+पा++प (VII 3 33)-छुएइपाया the sacrifice in which Soma is drunk with a bowl. Tho accent falls on the first syllable by VI 1 213 TE+f«(to collect)+roo detail the sacrifice in which Some is collected'. If not applied to sacrifices, the forms will be कुरडपारम् end रेषा २८८२ । अमौ परिचाप्योपचाप्यसमूहयाः ।३।१।१३१ । निधारा परियेप र चार पत्र परितपन । उपचेयर पराम। .

·23 TIE SIDDHANTA KAUSUDI: [VÇL. II. PART II. CHAP I. $2692, . - 1 2892. The words afonai, sperants and piare irregularly formed when they are names of fire. These wor Is are thus formed: -fe+for+4=18+9+9=9f8+ *+ ** effatai: 'sacrificial fire arranged in a circle (the being changed into star by the analogy of VI. 1. 79. ''This pecaliar sandhi befor; the semivowel a hus been illustrated in the previous examples also. So also styr: '& kind of sacred fire'. *+T+=5+15+: *a kind of fire'. cu fermata Totus : let him kindle the Samdhya fire desirous of a victim'. Why do we say' when they are names of fire"? Observe otherwise, aftar 'to be heaped', write to be increased', 'to be carried'. २-९३ । चित्यानिधित्ये च । ३ । १ । १३२ । frastr fartsfat isagawafaf7971 MATATA 49747918590) पपा गन्तभ्यम् । गमनीयम् । गम्यम् । लोटा वा माभूदिति पुस परिधि भिकारा. दूध पाएपविधि दिन्न' तिचापति । तेन तरपद्नुहल -४'रति मिन। 'पहार (२८२२) स्तनुमई। स्तत्या स्ततिकर्म । स्तोता रतिकर्ता । तिकी wf for yraatfefort 2593. The vords fore and afvufære are also irregularly formed. The word fordi comes from the root fa 'to collect', and means fire, i.e., that which is collected. As frasfos :' the funernl pilo firo'. The word ufafera means, arranging the fire. The Affixa has been added to denota oondition, together with the augment (T). Thoso mords hare uddita accent on tho last towel. The regular form is pop' to bogathomed.' २८५३ क । पाति मर्ग प्राप्तफालेपु फ़त्याश्य । ३ . ३ । १६३ । 2893A. Tho aflitos called 'kļitya', and thio aflix 'Log como after rerbs, in the senso of direction, granting permis. sion, oud propor (particular) timo. Thus tout mode or vid or noen rou must go", "yon may go", "it is proper time for you to go". The re onlaining of kritys nfires by this adira, in ordar that the Erityn may not bo debarrer! by lot or Imperative aftsxe, indimi-e by implication the crisienso of the following marim:"1. rol.nf non-uniforra ares (IIL 1. 04.) does not dec Starily apply in all caang aflet pQtrs III. 3.04, treating c! primary aftues by which the féminin pogas aro fornet." In cther words, tha rale Ill. 1. 94 was net rutrient by itself to ordain Kritya fins to be added with tht forrad * direening." &e; futbexperiks fixrac Ore would bare detarted the gozerul afin of kritya. Tienoot repellion of the 100 krtje in this ittra Bec Fut:517 buse the Or $ ·VOL. II. PART II. CAP. I § 2894 ) TIE KAIDINTI ATTIIT 11 aphone n 19 fully explained Therefore thlin, lys, lumitin, and Ihnl, meanings are never denoted by the kſitya affixes; and the kritras can Dever come with the force of kla, &c Thas rid or स प Here hy the sútras III 3 114 and 115, the lin and lyut have boed added to ry with the force of Te or condition But the krit affix a thagh denoting *Tby III 3 18, will not be added to /rt with this pxulsar force Similarly we have rufe Proy He wants to eat', but we cannot bavo the i affix here, though that also is ordained after & porb denoting met by III. 3 151: but the fire will come not by force of III. 3 157, but by III 3 159. Similarly by III 3 128 ths affix t 19 added to root. ending in long ; but the affix my will not come after such a root, by III. 3 127. २३ । ख ॥ हे कृत्यतयश्च ।३।३ । १६८ । 28938. The kțitya alines and the allis trich are added to a root, when fitness as regards the agent is implied, (19 well As the lin.) Thus ** ' praiseworthy'. estat' the panegerist'. The oraining of the kritya and trich is for the sake of indicating that they are not to bo debarred by the Potential for the anuyritti of fre 19 current into thug aQtrn by force of in this aphorism See S 2818 २८५४ भव्य गेयप्रवचनीयोपस्थानीयजन्याप्लाव्यापात्यावा।३.४१६८। Tauri Tifea Frarena 18 Hanara Baharrafo at रोपातीति भाया ।मथमनेन वा। गायतीति गेया मानानयम । गेयं सामानेन वारपाधि। 'फि लिए' (२८२३)। चारकृत्या।। घाई' सक्यो बोरया । पानीण वासतिरामा We offer greidefor a wengine wa haber getre' fR TEXTI VI हरपोर्मक 2894. The words 'bharya', 'gera' 'prarachanfya', 'upasthaniya', janya', 'Aplavya' and 'Apatya' may optionally be used to denote the agent. These words are formed by kritya affixes and therefore by role III: 4. 70, they would geacrally denote an action in the abstract, and the object, but not the agent. The present sâtrs, however, makes them denota option. ally the agent also In the alternative they denote the action-dams and the object also. Thus the may msan existed', 'existence or 'one who erista', ## meang a singer',' a song', or 'singing', mutta moans 'ona who explains',' what ought to be explained', or an explanation', verita means 'who waits apon', 'what ought to be waited upon or served', ar "waiting npon or attendaoca', mendsh or parte meang 'one who gives birth, e., a father', 'birth' or 'what 19 born', wat or terorita 'mean 'who immerses', one 'immersing', or 'what ought to ·30 TIE SIDDIANTA KAUKUDI [YDL II PART II CHAP I 5 2894 inmers-d', WATER=919rit or wait meang'what falls upon','falling upon', or 'shirt ought to fall 11 pon' Thug átti 779€ Trat' the boy is the singer of the Sâmi', or at TUTTUTTA' the boy ought to sing the Sama, मयपनीयो गुमा स्याध्यायस्य the guru is the expounder of the lesson, 1997 TUTT219: 'the lesson onght to be explained by the teacher , 09797-987- तेपाती गुरो! the pupil is the servant of the teacher', उपश्यानीया मिरे गुरा the teacher ought to be served by the pupil' २८९४ । क । शकि लिङ्च । ३।३। १७२ । 2894A. And the afix Ju as well as the hritya affixes come after a ferb, when the sense is that of 'capability.' By the force of the words, we druk in the anuyrittz of hritya. Thus mits wert aterat or writt, or 2: "cabable of carrying That the face may not debar tbe kritzas, so the Eritya has been read into this sûtra by the cnu vritti oro We could have well omitted the words are in tho sútra III 3. 163, Be consulted brevity, for the jāapaka of this sâtra would have been enough, 1e, the of this gîtra vould have done 10 The inclusion of the words ma and T7 also in III. 3 189 18 open to the same remarks इति कृदन्तकृत्यमकरणए । Here ends the Chapter on the Kritya.

·THE KRIDANTA AFFIXES. CHAPTER II. अथकदन्तप्रकरणम्। . . २८८५ । एल्तृचौ । ३ । १।१३३ । भावारती स्तः । 'फर्तरि पद (२८३२) पति फ। 'औरनाको' (१२४०)। कारका । फर्ता । पाहुमो धोया । कारिका । की। गाङ्कुटा-' (२४६१) इति हिरवम् । कुटिवा । अश्यि दिपुक्तर्न छिरखए । कोटकः । 'बिग इट्' (२५३६)। विजिता । इनस्ताऽपिपणलो' (२५98)। पावकः । 'भाता युक्-' (२०६१)। दायक । नोदात्तोपदेशस्य-'(२०६३) इति न वृद्धिः । समका। दमक्षः । अनिटस्तु नियामक निपच्योर' (२५१३) । जनकः । 'ध हिसायाम्। वधः । 'रधिभारचि' (२३०२)। रन्धकः। जम्भकः । मेटलिटि (प' (२५१६) । रधिता-पता। 'मस्मिनगो:-' (२U19) इति नुम् । महा। मंदा-नमिता । रमेरयग्लिटो। (२५८१) रम्मक। रया । 'लभेड (२५८२) । सम्भवः । लम्या । 'तीपसह-' (२३४०)। रपिता-रष्टा । दिवा- सदा । दरिद्रातरालोपः। दरिद्रिवा । 'पपुलिन' ददायका । 'कृल्यएयुटा-' (२८११) इत्येव सूत्रमस्तु । यत्र विदितास्ततोऽन्यत्रापि स्युरित्यर्यात् । स्य च बहुसग्रहरा योगयिभागेन कृन्मान- स्याभिचारार्थम् । पादाभ्यां हियते पादहारफः । कर्मणि एबुल् ।' कुम) कर्तर्यात्मनेपद विषवास्कृत पिनषेधा वाध्या" मफन्ता । 'करि' इति किम् । प्रमितम्यम् । 'भारमनेपद-' इति किम् । समिता । नम्पभावाविषयगम्द । तेन 'अनुपसर्गाद्वा' (२०१६) इति विकल्पाईस्य - निषेषः । समिदा । तदईत्वमेव तद्विषयत्वम् । तेन फुन्तेत्यपीति केचिद । 'गमेरित- (२४०१) इत्यत्र परस्मैपदग्रस तानयोरभाव लक्षयति। मजिगनिपिता । एव 'म युद्धपश्चयः' (२३४८) । वित्यिता । तसन्तापरवुल् । अल्लोपस्य स्थानियरधाम्म इति । पापक्षकः । यह गम्मान The affixes पषुल् (धक) and तृच (४) are placed after all • verbal roots, expressing the agent The word 'root' is understood in the above aphorism Thus +पवुल्- कार+यु (VII 2 115)= कार+प्रक (VII 1 1)=कारक , nom sung कारक 'doer' +च् = कर+(VII 3 84)=फर्तु', nom sing फर्ती So also cont and rat The of Ty is not indicatory, but distinguishes this affix from T1, the simple y includes both 77 and 29 12 V 3 59, and VI 4 154. The accent 1s by III 13 The trich has the force of fitness' also by III 3 169. Thus ante चोदा। Their feminines will be afat and wat The affix सृच् 1s द्वित् after the roots गा and फुट &e by I 2 1 Therefore we have tregizat i But is not fee because it has an indicatory Thus कुट+खुत् चोरक्षा। पापापकर। 2895. - ·(YEL 11. PART II CRAP. II. $ 2895. 32 THE SIDDIANTA KANNUDI. Su also by I. 2. 2. An affix that begins with the augment is forg after the root faxi Thus fex trafafura* By VII. 3. 32, T replaces the of r before a fre affi.. Thus +पर-पातका. By VII. 3 33, the augment gx is added to try when it comes after roots ending in long sa Thus दीवुत-दा++शक्ष-दाबका। By VII, 3. 34, udatta roots ending in do not take vridbi before Thus Ta+T; so also T. But roots which are anudatta and anit consequently take vriddhi. Thus fit + = =ftation By VII. 3. 35. there 19 po vriddhi of the roots us and m'to kill'. Thus बन्+पवुल जनक: so also *** Then here is a distinot root and not tho substitute of . By VII. 1. 61. a nasal 15 inserted in the roots te and or before पवुल् । Thus धक: and जम्भवः। But by the subsequent sitra VII. 1. 62. thu nasal is not inserted in tv before te aflives. Therefore fr+tware It is optionally are by VII. 2. 45. The other form is += By VII. 1. 60. a nasal is inserted in the roots wat and Thug भाता and मंटा। But मथिता । नाता is thus formed. To the root हुनस्की (Tud. 121) is added the nasal is inserted by VII. 1. 60; the vis elided by VIII. 2. 29, and then the final w 18 gutturalized into w i By VII 1. 63. a nasal is inserted in the root ow before TT. Thus. But or with g . By VII. 1. 64 * gets a nasal befora vowel-affixes. Thus wat but खम्पा with हन् । By VII. 2. 48 the augment is optionally added to y after the roots E, TE, 91, q, unu itqIhus afant or pet, oftar or ira, &c. By the vårtıkıs under VI + 112, the art of foot is elided before I Thus दरिद्विता। But not so before geri As featurat The sûtra arget III 3 113 should be divided into two parts (1) #avger Let the aftixes břitya and lyut be applied also to places other than those specifically ordained.' (2) T5 "The bfit affixes havo tho sengcs other than thoss spacifically given to them: and are applied to other than those expressly ordained." By thus splitting up III. 3.113 into two aútras, wo can extend the scope of kşit affixes. Thus re may be added with tho force of object also. As oferwat fram Vårt.-Probibition of should bo stated with regard to an Activo kşit affix when it comes after that root which is tho subject of getting Atmanepada afixes. In other words, which is conjugated in the Atmanepada. Thos by 1. 3. 42 preceded by # or " is átmanepadi. Theroforo T will not take ! As: Why do wo BAY 'tho Krit-offis should have an active forco'l Obsorró no forn, vrafier. Wby do wa ·VOL II PART II CHAP II § 28962 TIE KRIDANTA AFFIXES. 33 say " when it was subjert of Atmanepada"? Observo ofta a Hero there LS TE augment, for is not fitmanepadı but Parasmapıdı. Tho word for in tho vårtıka means ananyabhava or soldly Thereforo whoro the atmanepada 1s optho ial as it us by I 3 43 when kram takes no upasargas there this prohibition does not apply for it is not solely Atmanepadi Thus fine I But according to another view, the word forma does not mean' solely', but "subj ct to' or 'capable of' Therefore, wherever, the root is liable to be conjugated in the atminepada, there the TE 19 Pro bibited So we have the alternative form at also for kram without upasargas can be conjugated in the atmanepada though not solely in the Atmanepada. Ths sutra VII 2 58 declares that an ardhadhatuks affix beginning with a gets the Te augment after the in the Parasmaipada The phrase * in the Parasmaipada' indicates the absence of the affixes tan and ana. Therefore the इट् 18 added before the कृत् afix As afarrfafuar To the root « preceded by we add the desiderative : Then there is reduplication, and we have सजगम्+रा Then becomes fm by VII 4 79 Then comes the augment and we have forfra and is changed to gi Then सजिगमिय् + तुच् = सजिगमिप् + इट् += अविमिपिता। So also VII 2 59 declares that ua and the three roots that follow it get the augment इट् b•fore at The krit also get the augment Thus विरिषता The affix V 15 added to the Intensive root also Asपापचका Thero IS no riddhi, as the elided 29 ethânivat But in yanluk Intensiva the form 1s पापाचक | Tha Intensive roots पापव्य Thus पापण्य+ययुल = पापप्यू +एयुल् (the aus elrded by VI 4 48) This lopadesa is sthanuvat for the purpoz s of preventing Vriddhi See I 1 57 So the 7 of 9 19 not vriddhled The य is ended by VI 4 49 Thus we have पापयका ॥ सद । नन्दिग्रहिपचादिभ्यो ल्युणिन्य चः । ३.१ । १३४ । नादादे प्रसादेशि नि पचादेरहस्यात् । न दयतीति मदनः । जनमर्दयतीति जनार्दना। पुसूदा विशेषण मापपतक्तिपिप सम्रा कम्मतिमा मिलापत्यम् । ग्राही। स्थायी । म त्रीमिययो । अध्यभायो विपातनात् । पिषयी । दश परपमपि। परिभावी परिभषी। राहिको यरसावो निपात्यते । पादिराकृतिगतः । गिरयमरिष्टस्य करे' (४८) 'शि पटी ठच् (१८३६) इति सूत्रयो करोतर्घटेवाप्रयोगात् । प्रमत्ययेपरे यद्दग्विधानाच्च । केपी चिरपाठस्त्दनु यम्याराजनार्थः । फेषाधिरमपचार्यः केचिदायकवापनार्थः पचतीति पच । चेलट् । मपद । चोरट् । देवत् । इत्यादयष्ठित । मदी।पोरी। देवी । दीयते 'इगुपध- (२८९७) रतिक्षा प्राप्तः । जारभरा। सपचा।नयोः 'फर्भपया (२९१३)माप्तम्पझ्यादिषु पाटाइपासोऽपि । 'पोधिच' (२६५०) इति सुक् । 'म धानुसोप ' (२६५६) इति गुरुद्धिनिषेधः । किया। भन्या । लोलुदः । पोपुवः । मरीजः।" परिचलिपतिवदीना वा वित्यमध्यावधाभ्यासायवि बत्तव्यय आगमय दोपणामोदभ्यानी 'इलादिषा' (२१७) । चराचरा। 5 - ·[ror II PART II CLIP IN F 2896 34 TDE SIDDHANTA TAUILDI पतापक्षापतापतः। पदावदः। इतेषं च । घत्वमभ्यासस्योसरस्य तु प्रभ्यासाच (२४३०) इति कु यम् । पनापनः । • पाटेर्णिधोक्य दीक्षाभ्यासस्य . । पाटूपटः । पर्छ घर चला। पतः । पदः । हनः । पाटा। राने कृति- इति या मुए । राHिघरोरात्रिघर । 2896 After tho Terbs classed as मन्द 'to be happy , ग्रह 'to take' and पच् 'to cool' there are the affixes ल्यु (धन) णिनि (इन्) rnd यष शो respectively The word adı mending and the rest is to be joined with cvery one of the above three words These thrie affixes come respetively after the verbs of the above three class s Thus after the verbs of class comes the nflix , after the verbs of TE class comes the affix faft, after the verbs of पच class comes the affix भन् The reife verbs will not be found in one place in the Dh tupithin The 1 st of the words formed by th se zfixes have ho verur been collected in the Ganapatha Thus नन्द ल्यु-नन्द् + यु(I 3 8)नद्+शन (II 1 1)= So also fiom the follo y son (lit what gladd ns) मदन nom Bins नदन ing crusative roots nouns are form d meaning names -घास-याचन : or धायन, मदि-मदन दूषि-दूपणः (or भूपराः) साधि-साधन पर्धि धर्धनः शोभि- पोभन: and रोधि-रोचनः The follo ng d ravntives are names -पहि-गहनः तपि-तपनः दमि-दमनः So also the folloy ng words --जरूपन रमण दर्पणा सकुन्दन शकणः सहर्षयः जमार्दनः यवनः पवम मधुसूदनः पिभीपण लथणः (the in लयण is ure ular) पित विनाशनः कुलदमन and शत्रुदमनः॥ The Teie verbs are also i owhere enumerate l in n grou; The follo y ang are however thos verbs -ग्रह-ग्रहिन् nom ग्राही उत्सह-उत्साहिम nom उत्साही उदस्-उदासिन, प्रशास-उद्भाचिन, स्या-स्थायिन्, मत्र-मप्रिन् समर्द - सर्दिन So also the verbs रक्ष यु पर यप् and या prec ded by नि as निरक्षन् निश्रापिम्, मियासिन मिशापिन् नियायिन् The verbs याषि ध्याह भष्याह अप्र यद and the for when preced i by the negat ve particle as it wererfare SHOUTETET watoto wafat and wifez So also after rerbs ending in a zowel wh n agen 3 arc non conscious beings as the seriea So also प्रथिनायिन् विशायिन्, पिपिन् विपयिन् (meaning a plac?) पिशापिन् and पिपापिन्,-, शभिभाविन् अपराधिन् उपरोधिन परिभपिन and परिभाथिन् । The following are पचादि words -पच पच पप यद चरा तप पत मदद भपट् पम् गट स्वट् तष्ट् चोरट् ग्राहद जर नर हर तम मुदद देव भोरट् भेष भेप कोष पूरा दश दश दम्म जारभर स्वपच भेप कीप चप मद रख दीप पाट् । The in मदद् &c shows that the feminine of these is formel by longt (Iv 1 15) The पचादि class is an थाकृतिग: B cause we ful rords not en imcrate labore also forme l by ach aflix Thus the word at: doer is an nch formed word and is us a by Pantnt himself in the sutrs IV 4 113 So also tlo word met dexterous in the sutra V 35 That 1 19 General aſtix coming after almost all roots sc may infer from II 474 which ·VOL. II PART II. CHAP II § 2867.1 THE KRID INTA AFFIXES 35 Thus we declares that the Intensive character he is elided beforo the aflix ; thus showing that comes after all Intensive roots and a priori after all simple roots Some of the 4 words aro read in order to fusten tho apubandbag to them, others are merely illustrative, while the remaining Words debar the application to them of other allises like a &c Thus TT: 19 formed by yo meaning "the cook", and it is merely illustrative. Whilj मदद्, चोरट् and देवट १re read with the anubandha ट् indienting that their feminine as formed with long ई, as नदी, चोरी and देवी॥ In the case of देव the affix # was the proper affix because the root has 2 penultimato 1 But debars that of III 1. 135 In the case of STITCT and yet tho nfbx I of III 2 1 is debarred by ya, for these words can br analysed as one fauff and zará vafa i The word IT9119 also another form of this word as found in th- Nyankvadı list. When the 46 is elded by If 4 74 before the affix v7, then there is no Guņa or Vriddhi of the root because of the prohibition of I 1 4 have, घेकिया नेभ्यः, सोनुया, पोपुवः and मरीजः ॥ Vari --The roots , ta, and a tale reduplication when followed by the afix (III 1 134) and the reduplicata (abhyasa) tak as th* aug. ment प्राक्॥ The final consonants of the Abhyası (reduplicate) are not elided in these vorbs, in order to give scope to the augment, for of the final • consonants be elided by VII 4 60, then the addition of the rugment becomes unnecessary, as there is no difference butween the augment and the kdesa (shortenig of the vowel) taught in VII 4 59 Thus TT, VET, पतापता, पदावदः॥ The above vârtıka is optional, so we have the forras ati gads, wat tai, बदी मनुष्य.&c Vart -The root 19 reduplicated before th affix y, and the augment stat comes after the Abhyasa, and is the substitute of of the Adhyâsa Thus -74 =15+NE+7+7=411. (Thc sucond 19 changed into y by VII 3 53), is in the phrase 777972 tutte Vart. -The cansative root oife is reduplicated before the affix so, there is elision of fit (sign of the causatıye), and 518 the augment of the Abo hyâsa, and it is lengthened Thus arie+1=17TZ 1 To the upapad? or misis optionally added the augment when it 19 followed by a krit word (VI 3 72) Thus tyor THET: ८९७ । इगुपक्षानीकिरः कः।१।३। १३९ । एभ्यः क स्यात् । क्षिप लिखः । बुध: । कृश । मीणातीति प्रियः। किरतीति किए। वासरूपविधिना एवुल्लूचावपि । क्षेप -सेता। 2897. After a verb endiug in a consonint but peceded by Y, OR (long or short), and after the verbs IT to know', 'to please', and 'to scatter,', comes the aflix * ().

·[VOL II. PART II, CRAP. II G 2898 86 THE SIDDIATA KACAUDI. Thus fort=fa non sing. for: So aleo FerT'inscription"; ri' who knows'; 'lean'; 7+6=T! 'who knows' (VI. 4 64), st+w=frat that pleases"; +5=F+I (VII 1. 100)=f+9 (I. 1 51)=fat: wha scattersi 1 e hog'. By the rule of non uniform affix (III. 1 04) we have ņval and trich also As Taxi or TNT Note-The words a' God', ta' service' and 'ram', should be read in the more class of the last sûtra, being formed by the attiz yg and and not by स । पातश्वीपसर्गे।३।१ । १३६ । पाः स्यात् । 'ग्यायधा-'(२९०३) इति पयस्यापवादः। मुस्तु । मचा 2898. Also after a verb ending in long » When there is a preposition along with it, the aflix - is placed. This is an apardda of III 1. 10, and debars the afix Thus we+ =+=AFTE (VI. 4 64) gret+=grertsgrenivery weary' (T substituted for by VI 1 45) ge+=+=yraz 'very languid. So also a The final 19 dropped before the affix # by VI 4 64. There is elision of long when an ardhadhâtuka affix follows beginning with a vowel and having an indicatory For parte I TETEHT TE SAT: 91: 13878391 farfa fuer i for: VII 1911 191*** I 'Referaterawat' fa suite fot. I was fera' a FT: पश्यतीदि परयः। प्रा समापां.' 'च्यामादिभिा-(०३५)रति निदेगा। 2899. The affix + () is employed after the roots t to drink', * 'to smell', ht' to blour', pre 'to suck', and i to see Thus t-v=fr&+» (VII. 3. 78)=fra nom sing font, farger CH+=+"=(VII 3. 78)=475, üt="?; so also +7=4791, (VII. 3. 78)=vi, 8+1=1", 80 also 4+1=1741, (VII. 3 78). As In यदा परयः परयते एमपरः । पया Is the proper feminine of पर, as पया The root having one indicatory = would have made the feminine vat with to as we have in fata formed by a but this ordains 17 According to Haradatta the feminino in 19, 19 forland only when the root takes tw and do where elsc. Some commentators read the word upisarga' into this satra. According to them the forms like 4741 &c, cannot be formed. The nffix o, of which indicatory, the real affir being », causes the root to undergo all those changes, which it undergoes in special tensa, for it is a sárredhatuka affix there, soe sutra III 4, 113 and VII. 3. 78 कम्पा। .

·VOL II PART II CHAT II 52901] TIE KRIDINTI AFFIXES 37 . Prohibition must be stated of the root AT, when the word to be formed is a nams becanso of the word being so exhibited in II 1 56 As fat मा++कयाम: tiger' (an animal tbat goes about smelling). Here there 19 K and not the affir + २९०० । अनुपसर्गालिम्पविन्दधारिपारिवेधुदेजिचेतिसातिसाहिभ्यश्च । ३।१।१३८ । या स्यात् । लिम्पः । विन्द । धारयः। पाया। घेदयः । उदेजया । सातिः सुखार्थः सौत्री तुमपपयन्तः । सातयः । वामरूपम्यायेन फ्यिपि यात्परमात्मा । सात्वतो भक्ता: । “परमपंचे सुरादिः । तुमपरयन्तो वा । माय । 'घनुसर्गाद' किम् । प्रलिप-मी लिम्पेर्याच्या निलिम्पा देयाः । “गपादिषु मिन्दः संधायार "गोविन्दः । परविदा। 2900 The afix o is employed after the following verbs when used without a preposition ferea, fame and the causatives धारि पारि, पेपि उनि, ति, पाति and भादि Thus ferrats smearing', farno acquirog', men 'holding' meat ' ferrying', वेदया ' knowing' , उदेवया ' shaking', पेतपा. perceiving , पातपः, and साय, The root enfa means "to cause happiness," and 19 a sútra root with tho causative fu added to it. Thus utta"one who causes delight" By the maxim of va sarupa III 194) we can have kvip also As पाद परमात्मा "the supreme self, the giver of happiness भास्वन्तो भक्ताः "The devotees are,&c" The /पब' to endure' to forbear' s churadi (No 267) and so has taken the for Or it is the gausative of of Bhre hi or Diradi, Why do we say' when used without a preposition'? Obserye sferas, here the affirs क Vart -The verb लिए with the preposition नि takes the affir स As feferung' the name of certain deities ', ' a cow' Vart --The affix * 13 employed after fare when compounded with the words गो, &c, and when the word to ba formed 1s a proper noun As गोपिन्द: ' Krishna ' (protector of cows), सविादः 'lotus ' (having petals like spokes) २००१ । ददातिदधात्योर्विभापा ।३।१।१३८ । सा स्वार । ददः । दया। पवे व एमाणे सशक्षुपसर्गादिस्पेव । मदः । प्रधा। 2901 The alix is optionally employed, after the root दाito give, and भा 'to hold', when used without a preposition This debars च Thus ददा giving , or दाया 'inheritance', दयः holding' or rar' having: When a preposition is used, the afir vis not employed, as माया . । . .. .

·38 TIC SIDDIANTAI AUHUDI [ror II PART II CLAP II 2003 २९०२ । ज्वलितिकसन्तेभ्यो ण ।३।१।१४० । इतिगद पादाः । दलादिभ्या कर भ्य या स्थाद्वा । पञ्च । ग्यासः ध्वलः । चाला- चलः । अनुपर्गादिस्येव । उज्वलः। • तमोतेषपसख्यानम् । बहानुपसर्गादिति धिमापति चन सवध्यते । अघतनोतीत्यवतानः। 2912 After the rerbs beginning with water to shine incl ending with 'to when used without a picposition, tho affis is optionally employed The word इति in लिति means beginning with These are about 56 verbs all b longing to the Bheddr class See Nos 84? &c This debars the affia yq which comes in the alternatiy as tute Or VII, go, पात:or चला The affir (57) having an ind catory causes the sriddhi of the penul timate » When the affix 23 not used then is used and we have the oth form But compound verbs take अच् as प्रज्वल luminous Vart - Chr verb to stretch must be included in this list and it takes the affixe as अवतान The condit ons option and without prepo sition do not apply in th s case The verb as necessarily takes this affix, though compounded with an upasarga २९०३ । श्याव्यधासुसस्वतीणवसावहलिहनिपश्व सश्च ।३।१।१४१ स्पैङ्ममृतिभ्यो निस्य तः स्यात् । रपैडोऽथस्यतेवादन्तस्वारिगहे प्रयागहणमुपसर्ग के बाधि तुम् । अवश्याय । मतिश्याय । वात् । दाय । धाय । व्याधः । व गती यापूर्वः सपूर्यश्च । भानावः । ससाव । पत्यार शाय । यहाराहालेर । पारू । 2903 The afir is emplored after the following va bs also -ये to go, rerbs ending in long शा व्यय 'to pierce, शास्त्र 'to pain, w' to flow, wat 'to pass on, want to complete', wat 'to tahe wav, लिए 'to lick , रिसप 'to embrace, and रवर 'to breather The root rl before affixes becomes ग्या (VI 145) and is thus inclull in the phrase verbs ending in log था What is th n the us of its s pa rati enumeration? The 8 parate enum-ration 13 for the sahe of excl ring the app! cat on of erery other role which might have prohibited I hus III 1 136 enjoins a when a compound rerb ends in शा But that rula does not apply to the verb रया Thus वाराय: frost प्रविश्याय: catarrh दाय: inheritance, har ing pain STEMTE: wound सत्राय: flow' अत्याद tran greas on घरपायconclusion पवहार taken away at licking सेप: en bracing वासः' breath See VII 3 33 २९०४ । दुन्योरनुपसर्गे । ३.१० १४२ । स्यात् । हुनोतीति दीवार मीनारचर्यात्माबापनाइनोतरेष ।। दवझे उपाय । सापनीतिमाया। उप मदवः । प्रथम . व्यापा ·VOL II PART II CHAP II $ 2966 ) THIE KRIDIVA AFFIXCS 39 ¢ 2904 The affix = is employed after the verbs 'to buin' and 7 to lead', when used without a preposition The root g is the Srêdı verb 55 to burn' (No 10), and not the Bhridig' to go' (No 992) because it is read along with 771 The Bhrada takes the of the raif class (III 1 131) as : Thus gt-q=&+#(VII 2 115)=217: (VI 1 78) 'burning' So also +=+= 'leading' Why do we say *when used without a preposition'? Observe मदया * burning', Ta' frieudship' २९०५ । विभाषा ग्रहः।३।१।१४३ । सो घा । पसेऽघ । घ्यवस्थितविभापेयम् । तेन जतचरे गाए । 'भवतेछ इति फाशिका | भयो देवः पारध । भावा पदार्या । भाष्यमते तु प्राप्तपर्थाचुरादिएयन्तादच । भाव । 2003 lhe aflix optionally emporel aflor tlic vcil I to seize'. This debars the affix my which com s in thu ubuntiv 1 ius T2+ T="E+ (VII 2. 116)=116 'seizing', a crocodile', or R+=T: a planet' The option allowed by this aphorisın 13 a 'yavasthita ribhast d or de finite option that is to say, the allix e 19 always us d when the word to be formed means a water animal such as a crocodile shark &c, and in that 80nse the word 18 UTE But not so, wá a heavenly luminaries are meant , there the word is TE According to Kasıků vartika this rule should b extended to the Bhradu root to be also Thus --TUT:' conditions objects and a 'existence, * derty But this vårtıka 19 not found in the Bhashya According to him bhava is wrong According to Bhashya the word bhara is derived from tee Ohuradı (H1fU) (No 300) to obtain 20, from भावि॥ २९०६ । गेहे क. ।३।१।१४४ । मेटे परिप्रदेश का स्वाद । पति पान्दादिमिति गृहम् । तात्स्प्याट्टर दारा । 2906. The alix 19 employed after the verb TT when the agent so expressed denotes a house' Thus ak+*(VI 1 16)=rq'a bouga re, th & wh ch holds paddy, The T is changed into by the rulu of samprasarana Thu plural form : means wife, ay she is eap cially thy porson that constitutes the house, while the plural of It meaning 'house' will be tafo Note -The gatra 13 apparently redundant Gribu could have been derived from grihu 'to tale' withothe affix of III 1, 135, . grain &c 5 ·40 TRE SIDDHI IYTA KAUHUDI [VOL. IL PART II CHAP II S 2907 ॥ . . २९०७ । शिल्पिनि वुन् । ३।१। १४५ । कियाकोशल शिल्प तद्वत्वारि स्यात् ।" भूतिखनिरगिभ्य एम.'मकान की। खनक -सनकी। सि धकेने घ रज्जे लोपो वायः रिका-रजकी। माध्यमत मृतिमिभ्यामेव तुर । रजेस्तु विनियरिपसायो' इति पर । साए । रसिया । पुणे दुरजकी। 2907. The affix पुन (पक) comes after a rerb, then tho agent so expressed denotes an artist. Dexerity in action is called silpa Vart -This afir should be confined to the verbs मृत 'to dance', खर "to dig' and sy'to dye'. Thus मृत्युत् मत+(VII 1. 1) मर्तय: dancer' The letter 4 19 indicatory (I 3 6) and by IV 1.4l, it denotes that words formed by pro. fires having indicatory form their feminino gender by the aflix for Thus the feminine of नक 15 नर्तकी , to also राना - miner', fem रामली, वहा 'washerman, fem. स्त्रकी In the case of the root for the ansal 19 clıded According to the opinion of the author of Mahdhhdshya, oply tiro verbs sro govern d by this såtru namely me and According to him, the verb y takes the affix *IT Thus com+पुन्+ (VI 4 37)+घ(VII 1 1) mins fwn,'n wagherwoman', but the wife of a washarman will be twat. २८०% । गास्यकन् ।३।१।१४६ । गायत याद । पिरिम परिणापडा। 2008. The aflix कर (1) comes after the rerb + to 'sing.' when the agent so cxpressed dcnotes an artist. As+पव-गापा (VI. 1. 45) 's nnger', fem. गायिका २०८ । स्युट । ३.१।१४७ । गाबमा पिपी। 2009. The affirst is also employed after the rerb to ring', when the agent so expressed denotes an artist, By the word rials, the word m of the last editatu drawn in the Thas +पुर-II FIL. I.)-नारfern गारी, ther validuy VII.S.33 सादरपयोहिकालयोः।३।१।१४ । परमारोतर mrefa किशाह गरिराजमना। 2010. After t'rrcrb", also the allis SE!s employed when the agcat so cxpressed dcnotes' let'acl'timo'. .

·YOL. II. PABT IL QUAP. II. $ 2913 ] TIL XRIDAYTA AYTIL. 41 ca tha ander Thc verb 47 denotes the verbs in'to abandon' and Te' to goboth belonging to th: 'Third Conjugition, formi 13 6727 ani fata as 3rd per. sing Thug 17+Tf=text'a kind of rica' (that whici j thuli 'leaves off' all water)**: 'a year' (that wuch juhile 'go's through all conditions) 1h3 accents sro however dittcrent in the tivo In one udatta is on the middle; in the other, on the last. २९९१ । घुसल्वः समभिहारे बुन् ।३।१।१४९ । एमभितारमन पाघुसारिश्यं सदा । मया । पर लरक्षा। 2911. After tue verbs म "to go', q 'to more', 'to flow to cut', tho afir st is employed, then repetition is mcant. As,+=+*(VII. 1. 1)=779; 50 also, 0777', and 976. The word elinabhtharii in the satrı indicaid that th: action dopo by the agent must be well porformed. Tho alit vun bring this ordained for the action, when it is well performed, it follows that it will not be employed where the action 23 repsat-dly ill performed Tho alfis will be employed cven when there is no repetition, but the action is well performed even at the first attempt. १२ आशिथि घ । ३ । १ । १५ । spala care au tataarifs i situar-sites: 1 toata-ratio eft: vir retice forrainagitsar 2912. The aflix Tt is employed after all verbs, when bene liction is intended. As, 072+=etzt' may he live'z u77377; 7*'may he be happy'. The word wat means a sort of prazer, and it relates to action. The force of this affix is that of an agent', with the addition that the action is simply the object of a prayer of some one who wishes that that may be the action of that agent'. The bencdiction here is the attribute of the person using the word. The yserh s to others by a rather dra prison Way 'him, giving 'o-othiction on his son, &c, by saying "sites:" . The feroinine is erat. See Vårtıka to VII. 3 45. S. 464 २९९३ । फर्मण्यतु करयुपपरे धातोरप्रयया स्यात् । उपपदामा । उस करोगोवि कुमार शादित्य पायवीत्मादायनमिराताम् । शोलिमामिभरिभ्य। 'घोपवादा वार्तिकम्। मांयमीता। मांसकामा। मांयमता। बश्यादापारा । "पिवरिभ्यां च "मुखमनीटा। बहुपमा वर्ष ताई महाररमूधरादयः। पर्यायवदायां भविष्यन्ति। 2913. The afix e comes after 3 Terbal root when the object is in composition with it; (as an upgrada).

·(vb. II PART II CHAP II 3 2914 THE SIDDIASTA KAUNUDI 1 This gives rise to that well knowo kind of compounds called upapada samasas under II 3 63 Thus कुम्मम् करोति he make a pot' =कुम्भकार: But we cannot form any compound of th• phrase arrest Tofa, bc, because never found in asage Vart --The afir comes after the verbs , T *** and stoc and the noun in composition with it retains its original accent As Weite' addicted to flesh', fumeziter, WTOGTR: 'loving flech, fem नासकामा , नासन: carnivorous', fem नासमवर, and Tera 'good-conducted, fem TT TTT 1 Vart -The affir y comes after the roots fo' to look' and 'to forbear' under similar circumstances As सुखमती: fem भुगमतीचा 'expecting happiness', TTT: fem a much forbearing How do you explain the forms 77, 797: &c, not formed by wrę? These are not upapada sa masas at all bat genitive compounds where the Genitive has the force of accusative by sesha role of II 3 50 Thus VTI 18 a noun meaning “holder" Therefore TFTOT : 'the holder of Ganga = &c २२१४ । हवावामश्च । ३।२।२। WTFUTTI TUTTI I Fitrat i afat I wanya: 1 2914 The affix recomes after the root 'to call', ar to weare', are 'to measure' when the object is in composition with it This debars the afix * (III 2. 3), as mani+*+=+17+ FUT+7+ (VII 3 33)- So also avata:, vtruntar | २९१५ । प्रातोग्नुपसर्ग क. । ३।२।३। भादस्तादातोपपत्करपुपपदे का स्वाग्नाम् । पातो सोपा'। गोदः । गरि igrarñ fata totalI' *f * inerfor gi'i reforma TUTTI Tratamira IVTT I ATI I 2915. The affix comes after a Terba) root that ends in long » when there is no upasarga prcocding it and when the object is in composition with it. This dubars ve, 23 07+7+*+-+*+aites Giver of cows", (ths long * 18 clıded by VI 4 64) So also, who gives blanket', waar 'what protects the rear', Than what protcts thr finger (a thimble) Why do to say when there 19 ng apasarga't Witness Tiere who aremoniously gives a cow, ITT 'who ceremonioasly gives * maro' Here the compound Terbe takes tho athir Vart --Tho air before which the final consonant with the vowel that preendes it is dropped. comos al gays after those rosto whow somt ·VOL. II. PART 11. cuar. II g 2917.1 TIL KPIDASTI ATSIII. comc vowel is vocalised in conjugation in cagns where would havo o:darwin Prasirani means gamprasirao1 Thus the root jd ca in 100 W and would have taken i Bat this root becomes tocaliend by VI 1 16 before tho vikariga sn Tbrrefore the upspada 83misi will be runtit So also it and in Had the afin breath, formas woald haro beoa जमनिया, थापा and ago by vocalisation. The allix e prevents is, २९९६ । गुपि स्यः । ३।२।४। सुपीति योगो निभायते । मुप्युपपदे भादतारका स्वाद । दाना पिणीति दिपारा । Foto 941 Tarife fagate to Tawatara islyngrettoya 2016. The afix « comes after the root of then in corrposition with a word ending in a caso affis, as an upa pads. In tho three previous sotras, the word 10 composition was always ia thaccusativo caso This sätra declarey that with regard to the verb FIT, tho unapada inay bave any caso nos necessarily the accusativo A, Iata fagfa' who dwells in accessible position', and ferrarat .baring og inaccessible position', I FUT 1 Tius sutra should be divided into two aatras (yoga bibhig) Thas- (1) feu The allir « comes after crory root onding au long -7, wbro in composition with a cago-inflected word, as T**T forfa=f7+7+ va fi (VI 4 64 S. 2372) who drinks with two organs,' se, the proboscis and the mouth, an elephant'. So also nga: '& plaat' (what drinks through the foot) Mus'a tortoise' (thst always pro'ec's its mouth by by drawing at in, at the approach of ding r) (21 forur The affic comes after the root 47 when 10 composition with a word ending in a caso-aflix Suoco this is a 3^ rule, it applies ken the verb denotas "condition or stat', for when it denot gagent th: affix would base como by III 4 67 S 2834 As बासूपातरपारमाय 'the restag or appearance of rats' '& swarm of raks." Sce VI. 4,6$ S. 2372 for tho clision of si, and VIII 4 61 S 118 Nole.Why do we make this two-fold dirigion, wbwa wc ve is ancond rule is inclu lud iu th fint as the rerb at also end, in a long 1 The reason is that th. Grs. rul applica abng the agent 13 indicated, whila tho scond rule applies where eondilion is in by d nored I TUTTITTET: 'Esrarm of rau ,» also Tour a 'swarm of locusts २९१०। प्रप्टोग्नगामिनि ।।३।। afara fa netti Tiedusefa Far Et 917. The word ay 15 urçularly formed when deanlage a chial' or 'one who gocs in fronti' ·.. TOE SIDDHANTA KAUSIODI, [roL. II. PART II. CHAP. II. 52918. . Thus Tst sitt' a good cow' IST91 meaning & 'bast borsa'. Why do we say when meaning going in front'? Observe प्रत्ये दिनयतः पुरये. On the sacred peak of the Himalaya". प्रस्थी, मोहीयाम् a measure.' १८ । अन्याम्बगोभूमिसव्यापयित्रिकुशेकुशकागुनभिपुजि- परमेबहिदि व्यग्निभ्यः स्यः ।।३।६७ । 'स्पा' इति करत्ययातस्यानुरराम । पास गपमा । एभ्यः स्यस्य यस्य प: स्यात् । विष्ट । भिः । एत साम्य पशि गुपोषि द्वयमप्यनुवर्तते, वानर पीत्वस्य पंपए। 2018. The p of is changed to after भन्म, भाम्म गो, भूमि, पप्प, थप, वि. मि, छ, कु, यश प्रश्न, गम्मि, पुत्रि परभे, गाई, दियि and पनि । Thus Nउस माम्बा, गोटा, भनि, पथ्येष्टा, अपडा, विषः, मि, मु, मेकुटा, सराहा, अजा, ननिहा, परमेह, बर्दिया, दिविता, निष्ठः ॥ The word cu 13 formed by the affix s and is shown in the satra in the first case, but with the force of the sixth case and incang tho vord-forın स्य, and it is not the genitive case of r, for then the rule would apply. to गोस्वान, भूगिस्यानर &c, No.-Vart-The same change talkes place in स्था, स्पिष, and स्प in As सव्येष्ठाः। परमेष्ठी एवेवा गारथिः। Both tha words for and we are understood in the stras that follow : viz, the word fra in satra3 that relate to transitive verba, and the word gfc everywhere else. २११६ । तुन्दशोजयोः परिमजापनुदो।३।२।५। गुम्दयोः फर्मयोरपपदयोराहा स्यात् । "पापगरपायोरति पक्तश्या ." छन्दं परिमावि तुन्दपरियोस शेजापाठः । पुसस्था। राणादया मुन्दपरिमार्थ पय । यसप वाराणरत्शेरचा शोजनपरी शोकापगोदापामार मूलविधुशादिम्य स्पानम् ' मी विधि पूलविभुगो रया। सातिगयोऽपए मरीयः। गिल. तीति गिला. 2019. The ainx r comes after the rerbs परिष्टम् 'to wach out' and अपड'to drire array,' when in composition with the words दुग्द 'narel' and पोर 'griel', as objects, respectively. A दुग्धं परित्र माश्व ho lay lazy. So also गोवापिनुदः पुनो पात: 'a son, destroyer of sorrow is born'. Vart. This alii: is to be applini coly then, when tho mzaning of the word to bn fornned is lazy' and 'giver of happiners'. The epithetsfysi'is applied to 's lazy person'; whilo or fronti means " who clears his uavel'. So that means 'giver of happiness, while atat ini mens 'remorer of sorrow': hs who by teaching tbs nothingoc33 of the world remorcs B TOT is so called. Vart.--The Iords Tayt: 'a chariot' and the rest should be incladed in the subdişision of sores formed by be alix c.. The words belonging ·YOL. II. PART II. CAP. II. $ 2922 ] TIB XRIDINTA AITI ZS. 15 to this head can only be recognised by their form, there being no list of them to ba fognd anywhere. Thus fagni'a chariot', Tiyata bow,' CTKUT'sesamums', UT (HRT) 'a lotus': FIRI a mountaia', 'a mountain"; fra: 'a crocodilo ia th: Ganges' (literally one who stallows'.) २९२० । मेदाः ।३।२६। पापाजामातेरच मोपगृष्टारर्मयुपपदे का स्पारणेऽपयादा । अमदा । पिता wyn Y TETEROTFR R1 Arinetai 2920 Tho alix 5 comes after a root having the form of t'to giro' fon, and at 'to know', whca taking tho proposition, and in composition with a word in the accusative caso. By III. 2. 3. tha alit a was npplied after verbs thrt ended in long ** and had no upistrgt. Now begins tho cago of verbs wità apasargn. 1 his debars tho sfix ; ag tang: (VI.4 64) 'giver of all; liberal', Fax: (VI. 4. 6!)'acquainted with roads'. The long or of F7 and is clided by VI. 4. 64. S. 2372. Why do we day' when taking o'? With any other upasarg, the verbs will take the general allir <5; 99 Tingtai २९२१ । समि एयः । ३।२।७। treat 2021. Thoallix comes after the root to tell!, Then preceded by the proposition to and whicn thic object is in comnosition with it. The verb ta ends ia long and by III 2.3 when compounded with an upasargu, it would have taken the affiz r . This debars ; 29 mtu ** (VI 4.65)'a cowherd' (mitm). २९२२ । गापोप्टक् । ३।२।८। अनुरराष्टा यामाग्य वस्यालरगुपपदे । साना-सानपी। सपनामा "fred otsanffa mar", Station TITITOG gr 41FX पवीति सुरापा 2022. The allis recomes after the rerbs to sing and ' to drink' when uso.) without a preposition, aat when tho objcct is in composition with it. Tho pbraso anupzsargs is to be read again into this sötra by anuvrit': from III 2.3, though this anuerli had towpornly laia dor mant in III. 2.6 and 7 as being unnecessary. This dabant; of this afis, and tre indicatory, to showing, among others, that is feminino i forbied bis the city (IV, 1,14). .

·46
TRE SIDDHANTA KAGODI
(VOL II PART II OHIP II $ 2923
As,
Tefa=*++25=1: (VI 4 64)'who glogs Sakra
hymos' T*T: 'singer of Sâma', fem want and anti
Vart --The affix te comes after the verb or when it magas to drink
and only when it 15 in composition with the words go and its as its object
This is an important modification of the general sätra Thug e fem
मुरापी 'wine bibber', योप: fem गीपुपी 'spurnt drinker'.
Why do we say 'when in composition with súrs and sidbu'? Obgarve
TYT TC 'the milk drinking Brahmanı', formed by the aflix and the
feminine, therefore, not formed by the afix & bat by
Why do we say
"when i means to drink'? When et means' to protect
this affis is not used, as who protects wine'.
When these words are compounded with an upararga they do not
but wc, as T&T, VTRUTTI I
Note - Vart-There 19 diversity in the Chhundas as to the employ"
ment of thess afires, us या प्रापरी भुरापो or मुरापा भबति मेरा देशापविनोट
wafra the Gods do not carry that Brahman to the regions of her husbaod
who draks 1200
२९२३ । हरतेनुद्यनने । ३।२।।
sa orarit faro MITITI I' FIKTHITYacafevrategis
घरेप पारोलिनाचूराण पर पूर्वसपारचे
worrafa **TRU ITT: I
2923 The allis * comes after the verb pe when it does
not mean to rullo up', wl.cn the object is in composition
with it.
take

·Ynt. 11 PART II cuaP I[ $ 2927 } TUD KILIDANTA ATTIYES 47 २९२४ । वपसि च । ३।२।१०। उक्षमाय भूत्रम् । पारस कुमार। 292 The aflix y comes after the yerhry Then tho objoct 19 in compositior with it and when the meaning of tho word so formed is descriptıro of age In thug sátra the verb re has the sense of udyamant which was specifically cycladed in the last l'ho wordt means the condition of human body a9 deprndent upon timo This role applies to those word which indicato tho attainment of appropriato ago for the accomplishmaent of objects described by the upap ida, or the reaching of that age in which the thing described by the upspada, naturally takes placa, as affatto per "the dog that has roached the age when at can chew Donea' (lat wien it Can Also it up) : We tha bog old enough to wear (eta hur over up or bear) tho shield, so that tho Terb borc has tho scare of ra1910g op'. २९२५ । प्रालि ताच्छील्ये।३।२। १९ । getrartefacten gerelamu' for i wpro 2925 The aflix a comes after the verb pe (when the object is in composition trith it), the root taking tlic preposition 97%, and the sonso of the word so formed is inclination or accustomed occupation The word te moans a natural inclination or habitual occupation *9 giumet (grat resfregertat) ha who has a natural ccadeacy to wards fetching flowers or whoso habitual occupation is to collect lowers. Why do we say 'when denotiog inclination ? Otb rws the aflis mill bo Tv, ag ria=-*1775: 'who brings load २९२६ । प्राईः।३।२।१२ । Startrekkrar?SETT: Jaar met 2926 The allis ver comes after the rerb * 'to respect', when the object 18 10 composition with it Thus dcbara w The words so formed are especially of feminine gen. der As mico's Brahmana lady aeg TIDS of respect २९२७ । स्तम्बकीयो रमिजपो ।३।२।१३। ** Ffeaturiffa ****'s for a site that i orghi afer-' (453) Forsaire (eco) fariririr ! 2927 The aflir recomes after the verb pito sport' and reito whisper " when the case-saffected words upur's clamp 1 ·48 TAL SIDDIYTA KIUXUDI, (VOL. II. PART II. CHAT II. & 2938. of grass' and scar' are in composition with them respectirely. The verb us intransitira and the verb pe can take an object coder very limited circumstances only, namely, when the object denotes Sábia ; therefore in the case of both thes: verbs, the object cannot be in cotaposition as an accusative cage, consequently the upupida hore must be a general cag-inflacted word. Hence there is the aburritti of the word Y from sůtra III 2. 4 Do this, and tbs apurtitta of tho word is inapplicable berc. Vari--The words to ba formed mast have the sense of clephnnt and a tale-bearer'. Thos kvieti'an elephant (lit who sports in claster of frass)' on the refer to a flanderer (lit. who mbuspors in the car)'. The case afir as not cleded, cither VI. 3. 14. S 672, or VI. 3.9. S. 966 prevents the el1910n of the locativa case-ending. The allix is not employed when ths words to be formed do 20 mean an 'clephant' and a 'traducer: Thus tout a who plays in clasters of grasy Far***,' the raustaito ehatkamas near tho car'. २९२८ । शमि धातोः संक्षायाम् । ३।२।१४। W*** RUTII grigord wusfredsfr Femininos Premio 7 ITITEETTIT affett tolerts 2925. Tho alus or is employed after all veriul roots, when we well', is in composition, and the word so formed do potos > nnmc.

·FOL -II. TART II CAP. II. § 2931 ] TUE KRIDAYTA AFFIXCS. 7 . 4 गिरियः । कय वाई 'गिरियमुपपपार प्रत्पदं सा गुकेगी' इति । गिरिरस्यास्पीति विप्रदेषोमा. REFETTET 1 2929. The affix my comes after the verb 'to lio down' when in composition with a case-inflectei word indicating location, i.e., in the locative case. The word The III 2 4) a noun ending in & Case-affix is understood in this aphurism As a 97=4791'who lies in the sky'. Vurt —Th» fix com's after the verb 1 when in composition with the w.rds 7 'ribs', &c, though not necessarily denoting location; AS Torxai 24: 'Woo reclines on his sides', 549: 'who lies on his stomacb', yawho lies on his back'. Vart-So also when the words Tan &c, are in composition with it depnting agent and in the nominative ca93 As उत्तान: मेते-उतान। watet gå=anions ho who sleeps with his face downwards'. • Viert - In the Chbandag the afix it comes after the verb ft whza in composition rith the word fitfc in the locative As fordra?=first who lies on the man ara' How do you explain the u33 of fitics in the classical literature then, as in the following ver33 of Kalı lêza (Ku. I 60 and 37) fitfrauta TC ATAS UT 979 She of the beautiful hair daily worshipped Girls'. It is forinců by the alue of (V 2 100 S 1907) faf creatie "He who has hills', and not by this virtikê. The lett r * f TT 15 indicatory denoting that thue is elision of the final, vowel with what follows it (1 1. 64) Rego I vie: 131 Pipe अपियरस उपपदे । कुरुपरारुवरी। 2930. Tue allis e comes after the verb 'to go when a word in the locative case is in composition with it. Tho word adhikaranu of the last sätra is understood in this. As STT F=944:' who goes a nong tho Kurus'. ti' who goes among the Madras'. Of the alis the real afis 1g , the letter 2 being indicatory, showing that the feminine of these words is formed by the afix it See IV. 1. 14), as yract, VII २०३१ । मिनादायेयु प । ३ । २ । १७ । frai ritfa figToU, BUT I etdia as I IST4: IGT fecai city' FATTO tizfa STUTTI 2931. The aflix t is employed after the verb to 'to go: when the words in composition with it are futet 'alms', ni army' and 78' having taken'. 7 + 6 ·. 50 TUIC SIIDKANTA KAUKO01. {FÖL. 11. PART II. CHAP. II. $ 2- The anupills of the ords ' in the locative case' dogs not extend this aphorism, and hence the necessity of making a distinct and scpar satra. Thus ft4790 'a beggar'(who goes for alms); TTTT'003 pho one into an army', TITET'one who goss after having taken'. The w Sliya is formed by lyap (the substitute of ktk). How do you espl the word on the feminine ta stq of which must have been forn by & a in order to get op? It is not form:d by ța-afix, but is compound of too. The word charat is read with ! in Pacbedi III. 1. 134. S 2896. The difference betncen an upapada compound 8c es bhikshaebara, and a noun compound as one is that the former nilya, and the latter an optional compound. See II 2.19. S. 782 २९३२ । पुरोग्नतोऽग्रेषु स्तः ।३।२।। SITO I TITTI I TTTTTTT catreiti Sa Triqarsafe forever कंप ताई 'प्रय तगारतिकृपसारम्' इति । पाराक्षादिति रापा । 2832. The alis e comes after the verb 'to more' cthe words in composition with it, aro 30, was and a maining 'in front of or beforo'. The last word 29'agre' sath T and not 'agra'. This apomnly ind cates that the word agresara may be analysed not only in the locatır. but in the accusative and instrumental also. As IT for via yo foi That tho word in the sotra is' agro' and not agra' is implie by its being put last in the compouad, otherwiso os it begins andrenal in a sovel, it would have stoad first (II. 2 33. S 001). Moreover, crer from 'agra' wo could get the form'agrc-sara,' by non-clu on of the 71 cass-aftin: the special mention of 'sgro' sbong ibat ia analysis it may be in other cases tton the locativo, As Iti ofiayti ottho goes in front, a harbinger'So niso per and Togoing in front, a leader'. Ilow do you explain wist in प्रसार 1 Itu a diversity according to Uaradaita, allar- Abla under III, S, I13 S. 3311. २९३३ । पूर्व पतरि । ३ । २ । १९ । werfaftu ? vício in rife' fari F* TO, 2033. Tho alix comes after the terug 'to go, wlica is in composition with it, denoting the ageat. Tbos ir priepping in front', Why do mo may depoinç thamns'? O:htwisy tkr acis me will be ebplay. Asyiti tie-imgoing to the cast'. .

·VoL. II PART II. CIAP. II. F 2933]. TOE KRIDANTI AFFIXES. 61 २०३४ । कुमो हेतु बाच्छील्पानुलोम्येषु । ३ । २ । २० । पशु घोल्येर फरोतेका स्यात् । 'पा हानि-' (१०) विप पानी पिशापार परापपनसर। . 2934. The alliee comes after the verb 'to mako', wuen tho object is in composition with it dcnoting 'cause', habit' and 'going with the grain' (concession). The word of this s@tra means the final or conclusiva cau93, and is not tha gram natical तु meaning agent'. वाशीश्य means " habit, and litorally, the act of being accustomed to that. They come from STIR mining "with the hair', that is to say, regular, in natural order, suc. cessivs, and hane3 favourablo', and 'agreeablo', 'complaisance', 'acquio. scence', &c of देव, we have शोशारीमा'the daughter that causes torron%3B पयस्यारी पिझा honorable science', the visarga of yasah 1s changed to s by virl. 3 46. S 1G0. ; फुजार घt the family making wealth'. Or पापीय, we have मादार 'who performs obsequres'; अर्यकार 'who amasses wealth.' Of surgthea, we have fun who promptly does what bo 13 directed' "वपनर 'who regularly does what he is told'. Why do we say when having those genses'? Otherwise the afis will •ba पर, As पुस्तकार. 'pottar', नगरका 'city.maker' २५३५ । दिवाविभानिशाप्रभागास्कारान्तानन्तादिवानान्दीकिंतिपि- लिवियलिभकिाशतपित्रणेवरख्याजल्यायामहर्यद्धगुरमः।३।२।२९॥ एप घामट पादत्वादापि । दिगाकरः । विभावरा । नियाकः । पयादित्वारः। मारा । पसरा । ययादाच पुश्याय सपायरया प्रमगदम् । सिपिलिपिगम्दी पर्यायो । एख्या । समाहिक पाशादित्यादात 'नित्यं पमरपेग्नुत्तरपदस्यस्य' (१५६) रवि पत्पत्रा घन्कार अवारा सिंयत्तदहुए प्रोऽजिमपारण •'दति पार्तितम् । सिंपरा । पत्करा । वरदारा। स्यादरियाधिवा परस्वाद । पुगोसी । किसरी । 2935. The affixe comes after the Ferb to make' wlion the following words aro in composition with it eafqat by day', विभा ' light', गिया ‘night', प्रभा 'splendour', मा: 'ligit', र 'rork', भन्न 'on', धनन् 'endless, धादि 'beginning', या 'many', भान्दो 'benediction', हिम् 'what', तिपि 'writing', सिपि writing', बसि 'oblation', भक्ति 'devotion', कई agent', चित्र 'painting', देश 'field', words deuoting numerals, पट्या 'thigh', याद 'hand', भार 'day, पर 'what', बत् 'that', 'bou' and उहए 'round'. Both the words' Larma' ond' oup' are onderstood in this aphorism ; that is to say, som-timug the39 apapadas birre the accusative case aad . - ·52 TEE SIDDEA VTÁ LAUNUDI (VOL II BT II CHAP II $ 2936. . sometimes they have other cass, as the construction may require This atis t comes when the sons> is not that of cause, &c, as it was in the last sûtra Thus Frost: the sua Thy word fee is an indeclinable and means in the day tima'. Thore the aupapada, therefore, is in the locative case The sun is so called, b»ctus: it makes creatures active in tho day tim So fuo 'toc sun' (light maler), f4977: 'the moon' (the nightmrker), wirts' the sun', *1977: 'the sun' (the latter is not changed into visarga, as it belongs to the Kaskâtı list VII 3 45 S 144, TTT'agent', a death' (endmaher), *: ' magnifying to any extant', सादियर *th-creator', C#7:' the basy', The word 'bahu' fere means 'spicious n°39, and sa it 19 not sankhya when meaning' many' at 19 sankhya and would br governed by sankhya of this satra Flat 'the spraber of benediction', faat 'a sərrant', faftunt 'a scrubo', fufa: 'a scribe afast: offering sacrifice', ufati'a devotoo, A**:' an agent', ferrari * A paintar', 1775'a cultivator , #777 'doing only one thing', fato'doing two things , 7167 doing thier things , TEUTTG:' a runner, an express', OTET'a horo', 'a manual labourer', WFFST'the sun (VIII 343 S 144 by which there is a), 799: dog that, ut: doing that', wote 'bow." maker' (by VIII 3 45 S 159 changed to ), 'causing or inflicting wounds' Vart -The effix y comes after the terbang when foy, 7, and T are in composit101 with it The spaciality of caix is that the femanno of words derived from it is formed by long, while the feroinic of Ivords derived by is form d by long "T 1 kus for a f male wervint Sertt, #YOTT, and *g, th 99 words migłıt bu said to b long to th sath class (See IV 1 31) loco when hati,, sc (5 2936) 19 cipr 33-4 th ra would bo per and not for that is debarred The fuminine 19 by, utq as fract *the wifo of a srryant' २४३६ । धर्मसि भृतौ । ३ । २ । २२ । फसाद उपपदेप्रोबेष्टा माइती कर्महरो मृतका कर्मकारोया। 2036 1 nu aflix comes after the verb 'to malo, vrhcn tho word oü is in composition Tith it, and the sensc of the word so forinel is that of 'trages' The word oft morns & rfice for bire, wages The word dang not mean the grammatical objact bus thy world forms 35 tahired labourer' (not s plave), o herw133 the albx is , as dites 0 Artisan २९३७ । न शम्पमोककराहगापावरबाटुमूत्रमध्यपदेषु ।३।२ . २३ । etni frantic Tifafawi IMT ITTIFI ·YOL 11. PART II. CHAP II $ 2910 ] THE KRIDAVTA ATTII C3, 53 . . , an . 2937. The aflix = does not come after the verb 'to make', when the following words are in composition with it :- भन्द 'sound', रलोक 'verse', पाना 'quarrel', गाश 'praise', धेर 'enmity', पाटु 'flattery', गूग ' thread', मन्न 'hymns' and पर 'word'. This proubition relat's even when the sense is that if C71192, habit, &c, of S 2931 fhg fax = being prohibited, the genral afir takes its placs As यादमा 'rounding, sonorous', भोपाकारा 'n versemaker' 1 पल इमार: 'one who foments quarrels' , गायाकार 'a writer of Gathis or prakrittic verses'; CATT: 'an enemy', VICT: 'a latterer', 07576 'an author of sutras'; मन्त्रकार 'a composer of Mantras'; पदशारा " author of Padapatha'. २९३८ । स्तम्यशकृतोरिन् । ३ । २।२४ । •ग्रोदियरायोरिति वाच्यम् । स्तम्पारिवादिःसकृत्यारियायः । 'मीडियरस्यो।' फिन् । स्तनकासा यत्काल। 2938. The affix v comes after the verb कृ when the words in composition with it, ara AFI 'a sheaf", and isl'ordure'. Thus fata++TefTa*fts. nom sing farsaft, so also zjafts, Vart -This rule 18 applicable wh’n the sense of the words to be formed, is that of 'rice' and 'a calf' respectively. Therefore facrafcs, means 'Tuca', and it fc: * & calf'. When the words have not the senses of rice' and 'a calf', the affix भए is employed As स्तम्भकार 'sh af-maker', अवकार, ordure maker'. २०३८ । हरते तिनाथयोः पशी । ३ । २ । २५ । द्वतिनापयोपपदयोनिरस्ताद पशोपरि। इति परतीति दुविरमा नापार परतीति नायरि। 'पयो' फिन् । हतियारस नाथदारः। 2939. When the agent indicated is an animal, the affix comes after the verb r' to take', the words in composition with it being दृति 'a leather-bag' and नाय 'nose-string'. Thus graziei'a dog' (a carrier of skin), PETÍCz'a beast' (that carries tho noss ropa' The word नाय means 'a rope put in the noss of animals.' When the words formed do not denote an animal, the afix भण् 1s em. ployed, ns FFAETT: 'a water-carrier (a carrier of a leather bag for holding Water) मापहार'a carrier of his master'. २१४ । पालेग्रहिरात्मम्भरिश्च । ३।२।२६ । फलानि पहाति फसेनदिः । उपपदस्य रदन्ताय परिप्रत्ययय नियात्यदे । सामान प्रीति भास्मरिः । प्रारमनो चुमागमः । शुभम् । वार्षिभरिए । चाग्दास्तु भामोदरक्षित दिति पेटु । सोलापप्रमुरिमरवरा' इति मुरारित।

·5+ THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI (VOL. II PART II OIAP II S 2940 29 10 And the words फ्लेग्रहि and प्रात्मभरि are irregularly formed The word met fra 18 formed by adding the affis Ts to the verb pe and making the up?pada end in the sowel e Thus ft TuT=ife the fruit bearing, 2 e 4 tree' The word watot is formed by adding the augmont 3* (*) to the upapada wrth and the affix to the verb Thus भारमान शियि = HFC s-lish (one who feeds his own self) The word 'and indicates that there are other sach irregularly formed words As afirmatic glattonous, selfish' (caring to feed his own belly) glattonous selbsh Chandra Grammarian says that when the words set t and fu, are in composition as upapadas, th A also the above forms are valid As we find durdri, author of Adargha rågha ya using the form of in the following verse — VINTEERT ETTYT TCT The word 973 10 ibo following is wrong it ought to b gid na fafter ARETTE रति मन्तिममा fofer ITT: afansin YATRATI मा मलयानिला of efra fett मस्त विबुधाबया stratefra sfrutto २९४१ । एजे. सश् । ३।२।२। पयातादे पम् स्यात् । 2911 llo affix re comes nfter the verb to tremblo' then cnding in fr nud rice tro objeot 1918 composition with it Aole-This aflix comug nft r the cinstesc of of tho ali's the Ictters IT and I are iodictory, the real affis u The Tindicates that the sugment 15 added to the upapıda en lingin vonel (11 3 GT) The indicant but this is a Sarradha oke nflix III 4 113) and the fore tho vakumnas likt me bc (III 1 63 ) will be employed here २९४२ । भविषदजस्तस्य मुम् । ६।३।६७ । tserriare 7 fararnir Time T1 gafariTITAT: # creare 9912 s tlic ruşinent addal immediately after tho final yopel, of offre nud of a stem endin, un 1380l on. less it is an Indeclinavir, when a muni furmel by a Toys nflix follows ·YOL 11. Part II. OMAP. II $ 29441 THE KRIDAVTA AFFOX9. 55 Note-Thus i fatti, foto &c See I11. 2 35, 39, 83. The TT of wet and the T of fac arc dropped by VIII 2 23 Note - Why do we say 'of 7TT &c'? Observe faatanatu Why do we gay 'not an Indeclinable i Observe to F#7, failuratutin Why do we use the word met in wat, when merely saying we would have sufficed by the rule of tadanta-vidbi ? This indicates that the shortening taught in the preceding sůtra does not debar the taugnant, nor does sy debar the short-ains. So that a 18 added after the shorten. ing has taken place Thus शामेमपतिजनमेवा (जन+पनि+म+सम्मा+र++) मनसे 4: 'who a wce mankınd' Vart --The afix Te comes after the verbs 'to go', te' to sack', 'to stribe', 'to leave' when in composition with the words * Widd', tot 'a bitch', faren 'sesamim' and Ti Aatulence' As Twitt I swift antal pes' (going with the wind) For grit, the following applies by shich the long t of yrat 19 shortened २९४३ । सित्यनव्ययस्य । ६।३। ६६ । firsra i gara FETE FATE at gfiras i fart I TUMAT TUTAI Ti$977**** mrafa formes i faca ace: 1 2918. A. short is always substituted for the final of the first member, when the second member is a word formed by an aflix having an indicatory o, but not when the first member is an Indeclinable. Thus #t+Togfimae 'a bitch gucker Faretti 'an oilman' 5957 aro' a kind of bean' (that causes or cures flatulence ) The word yfa has the causative sense latent in it and means "causes to go away Thus utförur, fifaTTATThe augment does not prevent the shortening, had it done so, the rule would have been unnecesz iry, Buti ATTUTTI feet aneraf, where are and fear are Indeclinables there is no shortening the above words are formed by TI (III 2 83) The phras anuoja; zsya indicates by implication that the sord fire here ineans fagras contrary to the maxim engnciated in VI 3 17. TUTTE Supa agraftfräsa u For an Ayyayą can never take a fura affix which is ordaind only after dhitus Pyy i arrativa: 13:31 पत्र धार्तिक- स्तने घेटो नासिकायां पति वाच्यम्"। स्तन घयतीति एवमय । पेटरवारस्त पडी। किपमः । माधिपः । 2011 The allix tan comes after the verbs 5* 'to blog and 'to suck' when fest pose' and qt 'breast' are in composition with them as object.

·56 THE IDDIANTA KAUNODI (vol II Part II Char II $ 2945 Vor - It should be stated that stana is compounded with Vdhet, while nasihi 13 compo ipded with dict and /dhaa both Thr rulo of yatkd ankhyd is given in I 3 10 does not however, apply here L'or Fat is comp vaded with te, as (F1*+*+TI=571+11+&+ TU+W=F71+8+4+3+9)=FTY 'ad infant' (sucking the breast) The feminine of FTTY: 19 Faavat as the verb has an indicatory 11 But most is compounded with both w and tas TT + TUTT =+*++* (VI 3 66 and 67, VII 3 78)=faen: blowing and breathing through the nosa So also afrova 'drinking through the nose २९४५ । नाडीमुष्टयोश्च । ३।२।३२ । vantaxed Fiorattats FI FATT I 'Tunat tota'mirus-fTTR: 1 giceva: USVA: 1 * पटोखारीखरीपूपसरयानम् i sie #9-ofer I GOT forum 2915 And when the words tot 'a tube' anl yie 'fist'aro objects in composition wit the surbs 51 zad the alis 71 es employed Ishthi -(Here also the irregularly form d Dian iva compound Wof shows that th“suis non applicabil ty of the rule of ya hdsanl hyd, for this boing a fa ought to have stood first (II 2 32) Thus itTURblowing through the tube , grgasms blowing through the fist , mira: 'sucking through the tubs, an infant, giarraian infant Vart--The words ghatt khári (a measure), Lhari (she-a3s) should be enumerated The word and in the aphorism indicates that there are other words also 80 forined Thug vier wa), munti, ufc 1, (erva, TUTTI' mountain) so also fra: I २४६ । उदि कूले सजिवहो ।३।२।३१ । जापूर्वाभ्या जरियां फूले परपुपपदे पा स्यात् । पूतीशिला। 2910 lbc Mix 74 comes after the verbs I 'to break into pieces anl* to carry' rien precedei bi the upasarz i to an.) the word ste bunk' 25 in corposition with them as tho object Thus wearingai 'braking own brals (nach as a cảario.. river, clerkant &c), 5'taring up or carrying as ay the band २०७१ दहा सिह.।३।२।३२॥ ti Terit anna let itu antara I in Fragen St- ཟ''འི་ས་ ·VOL II. PART II. Mar. 11. 2951.] TITE KRIDASTA AFFIXES, 57 2017. Tho alix Te comes after the rerb for 'to lick then tlo word in objectivo case in composition with it, is the ord 45 'the shoulder of an ox' or 'a cloud'. Ag miatt of 'tha shonlder-licking com'; v4 fmct 27y! 'tho cload. licking wind'. Tho root fare belongs to tho Adddi class, 80 tho ssknraņa rt is clided. Thor of fair is not gunated as tho allir try is foc (1 2. 4. S 2231) २४ । परिमायो पयः ।३।२।३। AFET FUTOTT TI I 2918. Tko aflix tro comes after tho verb to 'to cook When tho word in objectiro caso in composition with it denotes A measure. Thus med TORTIV'a pot having the capacity to cook a prasha of food' ; 80 also TUFTTI, Tai'n kettle.' २९४ । मितमखे च । ३।२ । ३४ । मितपणा प्रासपी। संपरा यवागू पपिरत तापवानी। 2019. Tho aflis is employed after the verb or when fata* small quantity' or To'nail' is tho word in composition with it in the objcotivo casc. Tho aphorism has its scope whon ths words formed do not denoto measures, which was the caso in tho last gatra. Thug TT wodt'tho Brahmani who cooks a little, ie, a niggardly Brahmani', 97 watt: 'tho nailscorching barley grael.' Ler pach denoteg 'to scorch', 'to heat. २८५० । विध्वरुपोस्तुदः ।३।२।३५ । fogni sta ga martes 119: 1 WTTI 2950. Thc afir recomes after tho verb 'to striko', when fag 'the moon' or vro' yound' is the word in com. position with it in the objective case. As for must tryi'the Rahu that cclipses the moon', 'corrcsiro, wounding the vital parts'. For the addition of the augment after the word ***, see VI. 3. 67. 9. 2942 Thus TTT+5 Note the final of n conjunct consonant is elided by VIII. 2. 23. S. 54, and the form is २९५१ । प्रसूर्यललाटयो शितपोः । ३।२।३६ । watatawada TT: 1 FIAT ** ima I Duzuatredens TTHETITE I समाटवपः सूर्पः। 8 ·[Voc II PART II CHAP II $ 2951 59 TITE SIDDHAYTA KAUHUDI 2971 The allir 71 comes after the verb I 'to seo and there to heat when you and the are respectively the words in composition with them in the objective is Thus wof++=FIT: , 75 watanzt TY7Ct the king's wires not cven seeing the sun' (being shut up in the hr-em and so having ng opportunity of seng the sun, far less any other person who 19 a stranger, that is, they nre so well protected that even the sun cannot see them, murh lese any irreverent gaze) So niso arema 'heating the fore head' (such as the sun) The word u 19 an incompleto or impossible compound, ns the negative applies to the verb Et nnd not to the word or This is in opposition to the rule of samartha pada vidhr (II 1 2) २९५२ । उग्रंपश्येरंमदपागिंधमाश्च । ३।२।३७ । एते निपात्यन्ते । उग्रनिति क्रियाविशेषण तस्मिन्नुपपदे द्वये सश् । न पश्यतीत्या परयः । परोद सेतमापति दीप्यतेऽधिन्धनत्यादिति परदो भेषज्योति । इनिपातनातरयन्न । पापयों Hawasifafrafa rio VTSZETI WIKTIGTET ruut i anff criegata पाया यामन्ते। 2932 The words TTTA, TTAT and forur arc irregularly formed Thus otetuia=57***: ' fierce looking The word ugra is an adverb, Trith this as an npapada, hbus is added to dris PTH = w * delighting in drinking, an epithet of Agni a fish of lightning' Tha word iri mrang' fater that which 19 cxcited or illuminn! by water is so calle i As an anomaly the viharana syin is not added So TTTOHTO yapti dark roads , literally "where hands (pânnyih,) are clapped (dhmaz ante) owing to darkness in order to drive awny thc snakes, &c २९५३ । प्रियवशे वदः खच् । ३।२।३८ । fata i quat," gf 274 "queriface forantet Front," fort qiz farz TTT 1.राच विद्या प्राध्या • पिगम:-विहगा । भुशगम -भुषा । 1933 The flix comes aftei the verb of 'to speak then from or is the ord in composition with it in illo Objectire case Thus fat farfset' tho speaks kindly , 147:' ho professce submission of the ans Tre, thc Ictters, and arc indicatory , nt indicatrs the insertion of the augment 1 (VI 3 G7), and shows that there is shortening of the rowel in certain cases (VI 4 94 S 2955 ) In the cas of f54 and with thr affix or Trond huse giren the same result ng the affix 't Making n s parite aflis in this sätra us for 1 7 ·59 For II PART II CHAP II § 2936 ] TOE KRIDA TA AFFIX C3 . the sake of the aphorisms that followy whore this affix will produce diff rent cffects than a Vart ---Tho afix my comes aft r the verbeter to go whan a word ending in a caso nffie is in composition with it As FALTAT (Tt'tho slow moving elephant faatat for at the slow moving she elephant Th words so f 11 i ara not epithsts or names Vart-This alix com s undir similar circumstinc39 when the word in composition with Te is farrer and the latter is then replaced by th> word 1 AS विदायमा गद्धति विदंगम a bird (that which goʻg through the shy) Vurt-In th Varlılcas above given tha afir oq may optionally be considered as if it had an indicatory Th forcu of is to causn the clusion of the final vowel with what follows 10 As facri or farit: bird So also भुगर or भुजग a serp at (what go s crookedly) २९३५ । द्विपत्परयारतापे ।३।२।३। 2951 The affil y comes after the verb at ito heat', when द्विपत् on qrt is the word in composition with it in the objective case Vote - The verb aq belongs both to the Bhu apd the Chur classes Both are meant in th“ sutra In the case of thº Bhradr, the verb af 19 the causative ending in for of a while in the Churdde all verbs taks for Note --Thug for at arrata=fara (VI 4 94) 'one who destroys hus so also परन्तर one who subdues his edamies & hero The arc bec mes qe by the following sutra which shortens the vowel २९५५ । सचि एस्य । ६।४।४। खरुपरे सो उपधाया इस्व स्यात् । विपन्त पर था तापयतीति विपंतपः । परतपा पदपटी Warfemyfave fHTTÍTEUT I ti fesat arecatfa fenntart: 1 2935 lhe penultimate of the Causative stem is shortened before the affix खच् ॥ Thus faut pas : Sec III 292 and 41 las aflix however, will not apply when the above upapadas are in the fe nipine gender In this cas, the general affix ut will be employed , as favorit arsafa=faatare The maxim that a masculine includes the feminine for the purposes of the application of Grammatical rules 13 not of universal applicrtion b caus had it beun so hatyayana soilint have ugod both th masculinu ghata and th fm shâţi an yêitika under S 2015 २०५६ । वाघि यमो व्रते । ३।२।। पामाद उपपदे यो अस्पामते गये। enemies ·80 TIE HIDDIANTA KAUMLUDI. (VOL II. PART II CHAP II. $ 2066 1 2956. The aflis comes after the verb 'to ourb' when the word ik speech' is in composition with it as objeot, ard the sonse indicated is that of a yot. २९५७ । वायमपुरंदरौ च ।६।३।।६। भारपुरोमान्तर मिपास्यते । बायनो मीननती। 'ते' फित् । अयपादिका मारण तीति वाग्यामा 2967. पाधयम and पुण्दर are irregularly formed. The word to means a vow taken according to the rules of DharmaśAstra Thus 0 STES'he has taken the Tow of rigid silence'. Why do we pay Ow? Otherw190 the form is TRUTH: 'restranding speech' (VI. 3 G9) owing to want of power, &c No.-Similarly gotyfa=below, for its formation. The sbortoning of att and 475 takes place by VI 4, 34 S. 2955. २९५८ । पू: सर्वयोरिसहोः । ३।२।४१ । पर पायतीति पुरंदरः । समः । पदिग्रामसहायर । 'भगे च दारी' इति काशिका बालोन लम्पमिदभिरपा मग दायतीति भगंदर। 2958. The aflix y comes after the yerbs efic to split' and are to bear' when respectively in composition with tho words 'B city' and a all', in the objective case. As st rafa-yrat 'name of Indra (who splits esunder cities)'(VI 3. 69 and VI 4 94), martor 'the king who is all forbearing' Theme is tahen here in order to form words which are not Names When Names are to be formed, at tales kbech by $ 2963. Vart-So also when the word 1977 19 in composition with tho verb eft, 29 got a fistula in the anas'. This våtika 18 given in the Kasıká. The word can be formed by the rule of 'babulam' also according to some. २८५८ । सर्वसाधफरीपेषु कपः ।३।२।४२ । सकपा पलाएलकपा भदी। अभ्र कपो वायुः। परीरकपा माल्या। 2959. The aflix comes after the Ferb w' to rub when the words to all'. 'bank', 'cloud' and to a dry comdung', are in composition with it in the objectivo caso. As vint TT: 'a villain, a rogue', 57**** 7' a river', ***** stigt a wind',itat TEHT' a strong wind'. २९६० । घर्तिभयेषु कृतः ।३।२१४३ । भेषकर । किरा मकराभवयम्देन तदाविधिः। घरंपरा। 2960. The aflix comes after tho verb 'to mako' thon tho words a cloud', fa'misfortuno' and fear aro in composition with at in the objectic case. + ·VOL. II. PART II. CHAP. II52963] TUE KRIDANTA AFFIXES, 61 As मेघर: 'producing clouds' ; ऋतिकर: giving pain' ; भयंकर 'frightful'. Vart.-The tadanta vidhi applies in the caso of upapadas like #4, &c. This iş an exception to the vdrtika under I. 1. 72. $ 26 by which, in the case of affixes, cadanta-vidhi was prohibited Thus we have भयर 'who causes security'. २९६१ । क्षेमप्रियसद्रेग्ण छ । ३।२।४।। एषु कृशोऽरस्यात् । वात्सप । घेर्मकर:-क्षेमकारा प्रियंकररा-मिग्रकारा। भाकररा-कारः । वेति धान्येऽस्यहरं देवादिन तो मा दिदि । कप ताई 'अल्पारम्भा नारा 'विक पेपरविश्यायां पपादच् । 2961. And the affix v as well as सप comes after the verby' to make' when the words शेम 'happiness', मिप । 'pledsant and नद 'joy' are in composition in the objective case. The word 'and denotes that the affix खच् Is also to be included. Thus fantti or That 'propitious'; Fisteret: or forint: 'showing kindness''ATTI or 75 T: 'causing delight'. The repetition of tho affis ter when its anuvritti could have been read into this sůtra by using the word 'optionally', indicates that these words never take the affixe of sutra III.2.20 S. 2934 though cause, habit, &c., may be denoted, so that the feminine of those words is formed by wand. not by k: How do you explain अपारमा वनकरा 'small beginnings lead oto or cause prosperity'. The form Kshemakara is derived by the of the Pachadi class, the object denoting a relation not otherwise specified. २९६२ । भाशिते भुवः कारणमवयोः । ।३।२।४२। शाषितसाद उपपदे भवतेः खन् । प्रायितो भवत्यमेनायितभव प्रोदनः । धाषितस्य भवन बाधितमवः। 2962. The affix सच् comes after the verbs to be' when in composition with the case-inflected word for 'satisfied by eating and the sense is that of instrument or condition. The word 'aft' of III 2 4 is understood here. Thus sifat 21 meaning 'food' the quantity of rice sufficient to feed the guests to their satiation. literally by that which one 19 satiated wrforat माधति अभेन, Here the word denotes instrument. And प्राधिमा also means 'satiety', which denotes condition, namely, the state of being satiated, २९६३ । संज्ञायां मृत्यजिधारिसहितपिदमः । ३।२।४६ । विष बिभर्तीति विषभरारतरं साम । इद रथेन वरतीति व्युत्पत्तिमा न त्वषयवा- सुगमा । पविवरण कायदो दस्ती । गुगंधरा पर्वत । पदपः । पनुः । रिदया। पनि गमनावा तेन सर्मक इत्युक्तम् । मवान्वरे तु अश्व वितरपत्र दमिः । 2963. The aflix y comes after the following verbs when the words to be formed denote a name:-riz., "to bear', 'to .

·62 THE SIDDHANTA KAUNODI (vol II. PART II. Cap. II. $ 2984. - Cross over', 'to choose', fato conquer', ufr to hold', afir to bear', apo to licat' and 'to cubdue'. Both the words for and are of III 2.1 and 4 are understood hero and should be applied as the occasion requir.s Thus fou earth' (that which supports all), tad 'the Rathantara Sana' lhe etymology is merely tha atra, but the whole word does not show in at the meanings of its different components The word rathantara, however, is considered to be a compound, the result being that it takes the accent of the compound and has the avagraha of the compound As 10 TUFIKIAMTCTufogs the avag. raba is after The acceut 19 on the second member by you facetii, Had it beon an indivisible word there would have beon no avagraha, and accent would have been on the first as it 19 a Neuter noun (see hit II.3) sfarct a girl lit (who is about to choose a husband), 7974'an elephant' lit (who conquers the enemy); yut'a mountain or 'the pole of a carriage to which the yoke is fixed', 79'T 'Satrupsahe' (withstanding an enemy, ya'ni Satrantapa' (destroying an eneny), TA: 'Arindama' (victorious). The dam is Transitive when meaniug 'to pacify' This has already been mentioned (see S 2519 root **) Acrording to another opinion, the 100$ dam bas latent in it the sense of the causative and so becomes Transitive. Why do we say when denoting a nape'? Obsecro ***'he who, supports his family', २९६४ । गमश्च ।३।२।४७१ 11 2961. And the affix va comes after the yerb ng 'to go when in composition with a word cading in a a caso-affis, and when the word to bo formed denotes a name. As gan Sutangama'. Though the scrb my could well have been in cluded in the last aphorism, the separation series ths purpose of carryiug te anuvritts of into tho subsequent sûtras २९६५ । अन्तात्यन्ताध्यदूरपारसर्यानन्तेपु ः।३।२।४ । forufafa framing nazi ata 1 frenutnofcafafa zatim तीरयातनादिराप्रपामारपसंवारर 'सर्वप्रगा। पतित गानोति पाना। पम्ममिति पता हियारियेवलम् । • जो लोपटणा गादीपुरता। "saciva".FÅTATYRyuszistanitzien via *******, IT,"fonoa: ford #121, farei 2965. Tho aliis x comics after the rerb sy to go tlich in composition with the folloning sonis as its objects 2 f ·VOJ II TART II CRAP II $ 2966 ) THC KPIDITA AFY:9 07 . 1 ? fond' *7** 'crccssive,' 1977 'road,'E' far,' at 'acro«,' Ti all'and monilleas'. Thm annyritti of thr word tary docs not cxtend to this Ag 93: 'having gone to thr end, thoroughly conversat', 7271: going ton Post seanta 'A wy farer', ETT 'going to a distint plica', TETI' compitiy familiar', vår going everywhere, tho Supreme Bcing , ERTATTI Soins to infinity, moving for crer Of the aflix = tho letter 19 indicatory, the real affix bring, The F indicates that tho fe portion of the ford to which thus 19 added, must bo elded (VI 4 143), R$ **************+1+* (the fe portion of the is clıded) Nos though the rulo VI 4 143 says' then that which has nn indicatory, follows, there 19 eligion of the fe of & # , yet in tha pres nt casc, bach clision takes place, althoagh the word hy here is not one of thoso called (1 4 18), brcause the presance of t as an indicatory lutter mus' not by unmering and should find somo scopo Vari - That is also employed when the words in composition and tax 'evcrywhers' and Tnt creeping , as ta'* 'Sapremo Spirit', MARI ognakn' TTT 13 an adverb formed by tho affix o added to th TF (IV. 60) and mans'crcepiogly 'or downward' Vari -So nko when the word in composition TI 'breast', and there *15 clision of its final As It +=State 'moving on brcast, a snabe' Yart-So also with the words on Fell'and I'brd' when the resalt ing worils dunots location As 'that in which one gocs €291ly, casy of ncccss' t difficult of acces, a fort' Tart-Others sny, that this is added when other trods besides the above stands uprpadas Thus #Tigoing to tho village Vari-faster 19 replaced by far then the affis ? (III : 48) comes after the rerb TT, as foront: 'a bırd Thug ye have three forras form, विदम, दिशामा CEE I SITOTTA : 1317 yeni मधु पधारदमुदः । 'शापि' किम् । गनुपातः । दारावानीमातम दारयाद उपपदे शाम्तेरामातादेश पलाय बरपा । पापाः . * TINTT) mates," **fe oft'', ka man aradi i stafi NE ISHTE I TI TUTTI 2066 The fixe comes after the verb ' to kill", Then the object is in composition mth it, and then bencdict on is intended The Affis is understood in this sütna Thas IR KITI'may họ kill th ency ·64 TIE SIDDHANTA KAUYUDI (VOL II PART II CHAP II 9 2967 Why do we say when benediction is intended ? Otherwiso we have Tani' who kills his enemy' Vart --The affix comes after the verb We then the word Food 19 in composition with it and its final letter is changed into z, then the word so formed denotes & name As I Sefra=grafarzı (FT**SITE +)'the wood pecker' Vart-So also optionally when the word 'beautıful 13 in compost tron under the circumstances detailed in the last tdrtrka as vetett or Vart -So also, when the verb is preceded by the preposition and 8 in composition with a word in the objective case, the affix ! 18 em ployed, and the final 19 replaced by e, as eft facere: or wordt “the alphabet', पदामि सदन्तिम्-पदसपाट: or पदमपात: 'connecting the words that are separated, an annotator २९६७ । अपेक्शतमसोः । ३।२।५० । अपपूर्वाद्वग्तेई स्यात् । पनागीरर्थमिदए । होशापा पुमा । तमोरपदा सूर्यः । 2967. The affix + comes after the verb o'to kill then it 19 compounded with tlte preposition, and then tho object in composition with it, is the trord she'pain' or at 'darkness' AS, Bursagut 'thic paiti allay'er, 2 e, the son', met the dark ness destroyer, 1 e, the sun This aphorista has its seops when the sense is not that of benedictzón २९६८ । कुमारशीर्पयोर्णिनि । ३ । २ । ११ । कुमारपाती। सिरसा सीमाशे निवारयते । शीर्ष पाती। 2968 The affix fofa comes after the verb 'to kill then the trord in composition Tith it 15 TT 'a chud', or otá hend Thus we+6+ forfer TT TT+TT (VII 8 54 und VII 3•32) मारपाबिर Nom Bing yutat 'cbild killer. So also when farve nom. slog turn head-striking. The Trord tii 19 80 irregular form of the 'svord force 1 २९६ । लक्षणे जायापत्योप्टक । ३ । २५२ । memeterycafa wife I want it fast at 2969 Tho affix recomes after the verb 'to kul' then at is in composition with the word tertifo or afy husband as object, and micn the ord so formed denotes the agent pos. sessed of that attributo (or when the ord so formed denotes a mark). .

·TOL II PART 12 CHAP. II § 2971 THE KRIDANTA AFFIXES The word Tv of this sůtra gives rise to the doubt thether it mnans 7 otic or rivala waft. In the former casa tho meaning will be'w bon the agent is itself the mark', as Fritat'a mole' (a mark on the body indo cative of the death of one's wifc) In the latter case the meaning will be when the agent is possessed of tro attribute denoted by the word', as Trattat 'tho murderer of his wife', afacant. the murderer of her husband' Of tho affix at the letters T and are indicatory The shows that the femmine is formed by &, and causes the elision of the pönultimato of T Thus war +FT+TAT+T7+ (VI 4 93)=TTTCT: (VII 3 59) २९३० । अमनुष्यकर्तृ के । ३ । २।५३ । पायापरितलकाका । पतिघ्नी पाणिरेखा । पित्तन पृतए । 'गगनुष्य-' इति किन। orgara T" 1 34 * THI: TTFJET I TIC: I att ric i afanfarar स्थिर । परिपातो नगरपाता हस्तीति तु बाहुलकादशि । 2970 And the affis zem comcs after the verb 7" to kill' Then the object 1^ in composition with it, and then the word to be formed denotes an agent other than a human being AS ETTERF7 m'the molo' (literally that which indicates the death of ones wif), fruit ruan' the line of th“ palm of the hand' (that vluch indicatog the d ath of one's husband) These two forms were dcducible also from the last aphorism toatering honey (literılly that which has the property of destroying tha phlegm) FATET 17 clarified butter (lit that which destroys the bıla) Why do we say when the agent is not a human being'? Observe TETT mapa a Sudra (lt rally on who kills the mire) Here tho nfix 2. W How do you explain the formg 77: the killer of Pralamba demon (an epithet of Balabhadru), Sztrughna orę ten!? These forms aro valid under Mid'avibhujådı class (III 2 5. vârt S 2919 ) and are formed by th a fix a Why is th: athe tarot employed in the following? Tar or not Grüt an elephant' (c, who kills a thief) Her- tho mord is formed by the aflix zu on th- analogy of sûtra III 3 113 which allows a diversity in c se of hritya affixes, wbich dirersity is extended in this cage to a krat afax २९७१ । शक्ती हस्तियावाटयोः ।३ । २ । ५४ । TAOFFTTH teatTE | AJUTS srüfazei Efentit te TESTI सपाटेति पाठान्तरम् । 2071 Thic aflix comes after the verb to kill' then the word in composit on with it as its object is it! elcphant or 'grtc and when the sense indicated is that of power. .

·< 66 TIL SIDDIANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. II PART II CHAP II 2072. o Th3 sutra applies whore the agent is a humo being As fear to Th=rent year'a man who is strong enough to kill an elephant' , so also FTOHTI' a barglar (who is capable of breaking open the doors) Why do we say 'where power is indicated ? Obærre fato feat Fr* offers who kills the elephant by poison' &ere the aflix is Apothor read.pg 13 TER : poziorogareet farfara 1313141 इन्तेष्टषिटतोपो प्रत्य च सिपात्यते पापिताइयोपपदयो । मागिपः । सासा'गिपनि । For I afera INTRATTE & *7** ETE'' Tarafa T901 2972 The words'ofer and arcu are irregularly formed when denoting an artificer, These forras are thus evolved This afix tg employed after the verb in composition with arfor hand and as 'a blow as object, then the fe portion of 7 36 57 19 elided and is changed into irregularly Thus wift+FT+2=9+1+rfet: a drummar (torkman or handicrafts man), ate*: 'a smith' Why 'whon denoting an artificer | Observe era 'boxing', "hammering Vart -The word tara: should be enumerated in this connection, THU 'a regicide'. The affix By 19 taught now in the following २९७३ । प्रायसुभगस्थूलपलितनग्नान्धप्रियेपुच्व्यर्थेष्वच्या कृतः करणे स्युन् ।३।२ । ५६ । Tõrvaag inte egyi egreras TEV 15 godina stal "अयो' किस् । सडयोकुर्वन्त्यनेन र प्रतिषसामोरल्युपि वि कापिका। भाज्यते तु स्यु स्वादेव । सच्चाधियुत्तरार्थत । 2973 Then tho sense of the word to be former is that of an instrumental agent, the aflix by comes after tho Terb to malo', when the folowing words are in composition with it as objeots ~यादप 'ruch', गुमय 'fortunate, स्थूल ' ling', पसिव ' grev', naked , taro blind and fara pleasant, provided that, these words have tho sense of the words formed by the aflis fra, though not actually cndng in the alis foz (S 217) The affit fira (V.4 50 ) 19 added to a non when it 13 in composition with the verbs ' to become', 'to male and se 'to bo , its force being that Athing attains to a condition in which it previously was not The fou being an optional affix its senso 18 two-fold, namrly, words ending in fra and words nos ending in for Both may have the forcs of fox In the present sätra, lowerer, the spords that actually cadia for bass boca ex- ·VOL. II PART II COAP II § 2974 } TIE KRIDAYTA AYTII23 67 cluded, while words which do not take the alliz fry, but bavo tba force of for aro included in the prezint sätra Thus 167 + * to 14 +5+ WEEKTE 'that by th instru montality of shich the poor becomes rich, viz , wealth, prosp rity, mcan3 of enriching', 9141ey'making bappy,, TVR by which one bacon's big", PITANT 'rendering frog', TA'making naked', w***TY 'making blind , fax'showing kiodacse' Why do wo gay 'when the force 19 that of the allir fra'? Other 193 when aan usufra, ze, stanefna 'they anoint with oil' flere though something is joined with what it previoasly was not joined, namely, with oil, yet as the radical word is not prominent here, the songe 19 not that of fear and hence this counter-cxample Why do we say 'when not ending in the affix fez'? Observe wreeft sofa wit' they make rich by this' Here tho allix nyt is not employed Kdstha - It might be objected 'Well if 19 not used, then tho affix us must be uged (III 3 117) as there is no difference between yr and PUE, both having the efficient portion y, what is then the use of prohibit ing fax? We reply, bạcause there is this prohibition, when the attir tt 19 not employed the uffit ege will not also be employed Thas by implica tion tho affix Te is also probibited The prohibition of fear in this satra 19 for the sake of the aphorisms that follow' Bhdshya --Patanjalı observes that this prohibition 19 saperfluous be. cause tbere is no distinction between us and t For the word formon i by any one of these affixes have the same form and the same accent Nor 19 there any distinction in the feminines of their derivatives For the word formed by 5, 7, f, * and my take in the feminino as well as the words *** and at Nor is there any distinction in their samd sa s For in both the cases it will be nitya samdsa Nor 19 the prohibition mado for the sake of the augment 14 For 10 being an indeclinablo, TT cannot come after it The probibition, therefore, is of no use to this satra, but it is inserted here for the sake of the following sætras २९७४ । कर्तरि भुवः खिष्णुच्खुको । ३।२। ५७ । भादवादिषु ज्यवारयन्तेषु मददेतो वा । अनादप पादयो भवतीति शाडम मदि। Siz Hrga portuga forca' (877) YAFTS. I fa figure fywnitter ***"' fearagrafragfryseansu' (393) terak'tarfig मातोपने ' (१२९) 'पमानास्पयोवेवि भाग्यम् । पहल-पहा । सम्पादक-प्रया इमःोपियामा । तादृपः। सप।। प्रन्याहा। 2974. When the word to be formed denotes an agent, the offixes fuys and gas come after the rerb ' to become', when it is in composition with words , &c, provided that ·68 TUE SIDDHANTA KAOBUDI [SOL II PART II CIAP II S 2074 these bavo the sense of the words formed by the flix fe though not ending in fox Thus faran 'becoming rich (who was not rich before)', FYTÝ 'becoming rich Why do we say then denoting the ageot'? Not so when it denotag the instrument The affiscs will apply when the s^nso of thr up pada 13 that of fea, others ise not, 13 TGM he will be rich' These afises will not apply when the upapada ends 10 fta, WIE HETTI 3093 1 5 Fascia tra 3131451 2974A The affis fpat comes after the rebou' to tonch', when it is in composition rith a case infected word other thin 097' water. By III 2 1, tha anult itt: of thn Turd yiq is to be read into this stra It mi, bo bu objecter' why do re not read the anueritli of the word insind of it bacause the verb FT9719 a transıtırc verb and of vrouch sorbs the aniritti of thought to come from III 24"? To 1129 110 87y there is no harm in reading the anuyritts of gia 19 tlus casu boonusa tha word fc of (bo last satra is also in a ny understood hcrc, and indicatcs the col cction of all sorts of agents whether objects, instrutineats Cc, and this can only be when tho firat member of tho compound 19 a word in fencral laus gewia=MT nom sing PEYK 'ho who touches clarifica buttar 71+ F7+1=17+fato (VI 1 C$)FTTHONI 1 1 67 and VIII262) So also prired by WBTSHEYE 'who louch ith lumay", ETT ATT=977'who touch with water Butar FET FITTINE hero we havo the general afiir to SCS 432 २९७४ । स । प्राविदिस्यसदिगुप्णिायुशिया प।३।२।। 20713 The i ords for a doniestic priest's royaumpudcnt', *** & garlaue', fra' a direction and stres quatrnin' aro irregularly formed by adding the allir foot, wud o no after the verbs w' to rorslıp', sfa' to join' and on to apr prorch', tho nii: fart is criplo: cih Ib. frufitu nouls are irregular forme Testing foryoft ho who garfarms sacrifics in tota muih) or to thea 201(977) This word, offe", 11A sie word in which it us fru 133 138 12h for 141 (ty.am Jogiral rumanın et fosy of Here t) 19 styloj'cat on arie's fnal bus acuts ace go po to 1177*** llerc lh rois aurtsort Tv 774 Erst mira Syabr tit frugtfatturfort All ih ** art in fantralt I uru th ir camni uranına hirizi trening of the rrutto JA < ·VOL II PART II CHAP II 5 2974 1 THIE KRIDANTA AFFIXES 69 . The alia for comes after the three roots ! #3 and 17 Being read along with the five above mentioned irregularly formed words there is some irregularity in tho application of fun to these verbs Thus the affis fere comes after I only when a vord ending with any case affix pr c tles it in composition As +59 + faces=5154 nom sing ATE (VI 4 2. VII 1 70 VIII 2 23 and 62) erst so also usest north The fix fort comes after gfic and so when these are uncombined Thus 93 +iT="" In nominative singular 7+5=+ T (VII 1 71)=TI+(VI 1 68)=16 (11f 2 62) who joins When tho root FT 13 in coin position with an upapada it takes th- affix færi (seo III 2 61) As a yol ed with horses So alu, 7+7+447="vu nom sing 'a curiety Tho non elision of tho (VI 4 21) of ST 18 an irregularity as this word has heen taught in cono culon with other iriegular words See S 373 २८७४ । ग । त्यादादिपु दशोग्नालोचने कञ्च । ३ । २ । ६० । 29740 And the afis * comes after tho verb 'to see' when it is in combination with 745 &c, and docs not signify perception Soe 129 Thr force of and is that the fray also comes under similar circumstan ces te &c are pronouns for a list of which see I 1 27 Thus स्पाय nom sing such like when 10 is formed by fort and furgui such like' when the aflix 1957. So also 18+51 + frat=5LIVI 3 81) non sing ATTE (VI 1 68 VIII 2 36 and 62 VIII 4 56), and argi whun 4 19 the afbx So दादू or यादृय: what like What is the force of the letter of ? It is for th- sake of accent, the adalta is on the first syllable of thoss words which are formed by an affix having an indicatory or 7 (VI 1 117) But the ind crtory roila have given the same accent there being no difference between 1 and 2 in this respect The indicatory then serves only the purpose of distin guishing the aflix un from * in stra IV 1 15 in which is taken and not Had wo not formed this separate affix, then for ***ty of that s@tra we should knee read *** so that the feminine of words formed by T would have also taken long & so that the feminine of TTF (0744-7 V 4 29) would have been start instead of a Why do we say when not signifying perception ? See a wafa=&e*: who sees that The words tarot , &c are crude nouas in which the eismological sense of the root not being puble, the act of seeing can never be denoted by these words .

·(VOL II. PART II. CEAP, II $ 2075 70 THE BIDDIANTA KAONUDI. . - Vart.-This rule applics also when the words thi and Y4 are in composition with 'As y or ETL'like' (4977+7+78+VI, 3. 89); so also ten or tre' of another kind'. Vart.-The aflix FT comes also after the root n. As , urges, भाबादता and कीद्वषः। तद+हर+ता+दूर+क्स (VI 3 91.)-- ताहम् + (VIII. 2.36)=+(VIII. 2. 41)=265 +9 (VIII. 3.59)=ar: I २८७५ । सत्सूद्विषद्रुहयुजविदभिदच्छिजिनीराजमुपसर्गेऽपि किम् । ३।२।६१ रन्या विवस्यादुपसर्ग सत्पति र भुप्युपपदे। दुभत् । उपनिषत् । अरदसू । प्रसूः । मिन- विट् । प्रविट् । मित्रत्रुक्मक् । गोधुक्। प्रपुर । अश्वयुक् । मयुक् । वेदपिन् । नियिदित्यादि। sugarruf saaat awa: ', &: irohi 2975. Tho affix for comes after the following verbs whrn in composition with a word ending in a case-afis, though it may be an upasarga, viz.--"' to sit', 7' to bring forth', fac "to bate', x' to bear malice', 'to milk', 'to join', 'to concentrate the mind', faço to knory', to become', ' to consider"; fare "to divido', fx. to cut, for ' to conquer', a7. to lead" and to shine'. The phrase 'the word ending with a case-affiz' is understood in this sátra. The anuvrilti ofera is not to be taken in this sätra, for the samo reasons as in III 2.68 S. 2974 A. The apasargas are also words ending in a case-affix, i e, they are also subanta words Thrir special mention in this section, andicates by implication (Midpaka) that wherever in the previous sutras, the word subanta (& case-infected word) is used, it docs not include an upisarga (III 1. 106). The root or being read in conjunction with fire shows that werfe class verb is meant bere, and not the class. The verb to includos, both forç to join' and you' to concentrate one's mind'. The verb fors includes the threo rerbs having the sense of 'to knorr', 'to b-come' and to consider', bat does not include the verb fars'to gain', because that root has an indicatory (fr) while all these vcrbs have indicatory Thas, c. 35'the dweller in the sky'; cofree' the dweller in the pre. gence of the master',-ferra' dwelling in purity'; waitrea' dwelling in the skies', 'epithets of Brahwa' (Kath. 6. 2), TET'arria. I-TT": anparous'; 'bringing forth hundred'; ** 'parent'. for forefre 'treacherons”; af, 'hostilo', -fas 'treacherous'; wys 'hostile (VIII. 2. 37). Try 'cow milker', ['milker' (VIII. 2 3. und 37). 'carriage';, 'impals', frs-refore 'kaower of Voda', ·VOL II PART II. CHAP II S 2978 ) TEE KRIDANTA ATRIZES fara' knower', uf'knower of Brahma' and facere in pocation' मिदmrefore 'wood cutter', afm7 'catter' fears fra 'ropo-cutter', afety & cutter f#_#d'enemy conqueror', Afra conqueror मी-वामी। 'lendar of an army , sat: a leader', maar 'head borough', vrati 'first', (Why is thero cerebral in these words ? Because the word wo has a cerebral in shtra Y 2 78 and that indicates that these words will bara -, as also by sätra VIII 4 3) T-Foaie 'splendour', ure'emperor' (the letter is added by VIII. 3 25) Vart -The letter replaces the r of the root of to lead', when the words' agra' and 'grâma' are in composition with it, as write and urheit: २९७६ । भजो शिवः । ३ । २ । ६२ । Tattor warra: FATT I THYER ITHTEE 1 2976 The allix fre comes after the verb to share' when in composition with a word ending in a case-affix, whether it be an upasarga or not The words apasarga' and 'supi' are understood in this satra As w=* Nom sing UK sharing a portion So also when in composition with a preposition, as SHTE' division', २९७७ । पदोग्नन्ने ।३।२१६८ । पिट् स्यात् । ग्राममति प्रामात । सस्यात् । 'सनम्ने' कि । अम्नादः । 2977 The affix fere comes after the verb ve when in composition with a case-infected word other than food' Thus *f=xture eating raw food', TEST' gradivorous' Why do we say 'when Sex is in composition ? Because with it ag an upapada we have also eating food, which is formed by the general affix T (III 2 1) २९७८ । कम्ये च ।३।२। ६६ । अदेर्षिट् । पूयण सिद्ध वचनमएबाघनार्थच । क्रव्यात् । भाममासमयका कप नाई 'ऋष्यादी भएर सानुरः इति । पदमास पद उपपदेए । उपपदस्य मध्यादेयः पृषोदरादित्वात् । 2978 The affix fre comes after the verb to eat;' hon the word ** is in composition with it As Ihsafe= TUTT' carnivorous Thy h sut been made a separate sđtra when this form could have been obtained by the last sätra also ? 'To this the vârtika replies been made a separate sutra in order to indicate that the role of text (INT 1 94) does not apply here' Therefore the afir y will not apply in the alternative If the aflix sa does not apply, how then we get the form A$971 in the verse ATEIS VIST:dAmarakosha I 1.62) which is evident. to eat,' 1 This has ·THE SIDDIAYTA KADHIUDI (roz. II PART II CHAP II $ 2979 G ly formed by the allir vy? The alix we comes after the root het the word formed inenas 'the cater of meat which has bech cut dr s3 d zad cooked, thus mergi means a man who eats mcat cooked and prepar e, a mont cater a Rakshası as oppos d to a vegetarian or 0191113 d man whic ng means 'an animal which cats raty flesh' the word met 10 fact may be regarded as an irregular form falling under the yüretit class of autra VI 3 109 Thus *1 +5=62tste tho upapada palyamamsa 19 replaced by hravza irregularly under Prishodarådı २८ । दुह कम्पश्च ।३।२।७० । कामदुपा। The aflix se comes after the rorb 'to nulk' when in composition with a word onding in a case allis and the letter replaces its final As Agu' a milch cow, 1910g abundance of milk. २९८० । अन्येभ्योऽपिदृश्यन्ते । ३।२ । ७५ । पदसीति नियुत्तस् । पनिम्वनिम्यनिष्पित् एते प्रत्यया धाताया। 2980 These affixes viz afora afro afore and fore are seen after other verbs also besides thoso onding in long s The word rela is not understood hero Ag thnso afoxes all begin with a consonant the question nring will they take the sugment ! This is answered by the next aphorism For examples of this sutra see 2981 and 2952 २९८१ । नेड्वशि कृति। पगादेः कृत इएन स्यात् । । मुशर्मा । मातरिया। 2981 The rugment is not added to a brit alia begining with a conant consonant (* pratyahara) A8 5+to injur + Forecast 1st sing gant who destroys # 1 he destroys sin i zwied' wat +371 676 +99477 (VI 1 71)=mtFT Ist sing stafcent who goes early २९२ । विड्वनोरनुनासिकस्यात् ।३।४। ४१ । अनुनासिकस्यास्यात् । पितायत इति विनाया । घोष भिषावा। विए । ऐट् ।। अगए. 2952 A stem ending in a nasıl, mod folloned by the face or u alirare substitutes long for its 17259) Thus WTATI ATITE TANTI piatt 1791: (0 6 1987 ST9 R. IV 10) FTTI TATTI UTETTU PATI VÝTT DETTE Tlio afha faz (which is totally clıdcd) 19 added under III, 67 The Tof en is changed to by . $ ·voi. 11 mint II Chat' 11 $ 2994] TIIT KAIDINIA ATTIIN 13 VIII 3 108 ia uten slith thn alir ve Whitith{ winn fenn worm III : 761 Thur partition of the worl Tefte in ti 0'r* shown thnt the limitation of anu Alinpidoss ka, lurh applen 1 ts the fax of ratra VI 4 37 4 2123 dore not apply herc Now we IV. canmpl 9 of th: Afhxes fraght in III 2 73 % 2030 f«+waofwef« +7+T (VI 41) fextay 14 nz frym cho bring forth i'who se ab furs' P, also from vate B'ynal: 492 wc hsro 0 + +1***TNTT Nom 4 metais fortfara RE (VII 3 80) 1st sing for who anjica , as in the iwi (Tajur la VI 18) Similaris from rush wh for the form is de 49 aly * formed by far Nolco-fh word ' also in S. 2390 has the force of remoring All con la trons un lor whe's these alliema ter employ l in the previoit aphorus 'ns that is to any th saflizes con crun whan the rc 19 no aprIada Asdre HT Tho word, 'Arc en in this eaten show that all verbs do not admit of theso affircs indiscriminately It is only when wc • * parul ular form that we can inf r th cr14t-ns of thes) a fixes २९.३ । शिघ । ३।२।६। wanfe gradi upor- (2204) forrada ATTISOITT I sort! from a car' 2083 And the affix iure la also seen after all terle the thier living an upaprds or not in tuc Vedic as well as in the niodern Sanskrit AS STITI WENT (VI 4 24) 'falling from the pot', Trix • falling from tho cares , ME MANTL. 134. siog MITTE. falling Thor is long by VI 3 137 Swo Rig Ved 128 २८५ अन्त..८.४.२० । soonerfelirt ert bayan fosfrutar I PATLITUT (arts) eftrae fastforfet fardh * sretti ont at Tmi me ft. In 2091 Thc - of is changed into e when it is preceded is an up343797 competent to produce the change, provided it occurs at the end of n pada As P ATP erre!!. This paloft an excepti - Ilf 4 3; by thich the fical in a pula us no cbeogal into ** TA. wor! Is its eatra is to be on lerstoleo boquivalen to these, at} the ra's appl-s whea the word in the rocatro cse 10 ·74 THE SIDDUANIA KAUSIUDI (VOL II PART II CHAT Y1 : 2935, The word #Tr 18 a fez formed word and the final 19 not elided in the Vocatiye Singular becruse of the prohibition of VIII 2 8, in carry cther place, when the 7 13 padanta, it would be droppnd, aud ther foro tha illustration is given with Vocative singular, wluch alon- satisfies the requirements of this sätra By TI 4 34 S 2186, the st of /* 19 changed to y b-foru forret As farut =ffe RT I The stap is faare I non foro? + Vartika -The at of art procodud by the prepositio ) WIG 19 changed to before kvip As vrait from frei Similarly are formed rit and so with the affix hvip The crude forms are fire and 111 २९८५ । इत्लन्त्रनिकपु घ।६।४।६७ । एपु वादेईस्था स्थाए । तमुदत । 'अनुमारिकप शिष-' (२६१६) इति दी। मानो vrat:'(589) Hang SWITI' IZAT-' (2494) DE 1 21:1'FACEUC-'(&$48) EFTIR U19 1 DIT I ET IF Istraalia sat, warato I TITII म। गुदी। इयः। सुमः । मुची। सुभः । 'राल्लाप । (२६५५)। मूर्बान । मुरी मुला gute 2985 The penultimats of site is shortened before tho affixesए, गन् मा and विव । Thug FEL, 65 (neuter) wear and over a The first threo are Unadı affixes As yet Trom the roots are and we with nffix l-vip are formed ant nn 1 प्रगान , thus प्रय+रिप = प्रयाम्+श्वि-(tho length nngof the penaltimata 19 by VI. 4 15 S. 2666) *77 (changed to v by VIII 2 64 & 331 ) So also is Fart 1 Trom the far to play', nith nix dvip, is formed wyczy. dic plager ! The is changed to by VI 4 19 & 2501 Thus ufu firrte पदिक+पि । from the roots vas and pare with tho aflix krip are formadots and is they us changed to or by VI 4 20 S. 2654. Thng nru declined thas NSid op FTI 1 Nom Smid edipl. mit from fare (S.2754) is obtained i with ksip) from the root (S. 2051) 19 à rired so with fore Thus **+f871-31L+farz<311 db p! 118the upıpda T W huse mit+forcen+ taxi with tho ipalihi It is duelipid! Jom S ait, dup! w17311 Irom rz (2634 mih kup) is obtaine.de!, declined as Non S. d utopi TI!! But a droit, I'm Iron guzt ( 2650). by npplying II 4!19 2755, is obtaine with krip pl Isomi wa fact Xom you ir ITI - ·101. Hurril Unr.!! 1991 TIEKRITITLarrixrt . २६ । गमः की।६।४।४। प्रnिtra तरापिrim घर पनि on ता" प्रेगा ।। 2053. Thir 117471 of 14 jannst clicllrforr for. 'ThT कागत, पण 'Th Trity PI.1.1. I'r l.-It shoulil br stiend of mannlture!. The clizan las play her.nlm परीपाद। Part. Iho nosnl of kr. ischtend b furo "TAS, गा, पर २०० । स्थः या प।३।२।। पारिस्मा'ची (२१) गिरा 2137. Turniliwani im.comaltortroverly rnirn. it 14 in composition with a word en lins in a case-allie or an apsuga. Why than this aprim lyrn mdr in by III 14. Kolhiro kuwan by III. 1.75 roall hart knourint Thers. pulation is for the purpon of prohibiting th pronbirn, thit ** tn 75. thy satra III. 1. 14. S. 2929 prohibirth - III. 4.82910mm prou nt sutri romoses that P ohibution Thustrian- Durthis sotri, the form couki nwthsolven erolred, lor, with ths uparda पर • surb eer Youthsretikon suralix byII.21 २८ । मुप्पाजाती णिनिस्ताच्छील्ये । ३।२० । wnप तो गाडीहरे कोजी 'तो' शिप्रामा' नामोरे 'हिर मरे पदाचित । स गtar. पnिापि चिरियावास माvिie परियार भावाभि तदेशातन् । पाप मापिरोपादरेम रिमोर rat पवमोरि 'सामना''शाशे vिat''ruit in घोषिभिा Triमामालिपुरमान"!"र'TIMERAIL पाणि । पासपीबादी। 22083. Wler ant' 18 totycxpresrl, the aflir trit roncs after reris, prosuded that the tror with a case-aflix in compuest'on rith it does not mean a venus 'Thus su++iravir. Is ring भोगे 'who catshru ranl hor. So Rky शीतोषीkc. 15hs do yo no thai dores no n*an & garra? Figou TT. TC 'the iariter of Briborat iemand for 7 TOTTACI Why do we say 'whon habit 12 to be ret? ins मुर पराचित : sometimesents hot. The artiyr ottha kink misays that ·76 TIC SIDDHANTA KAMUPI (10L II raut 11 chap II $ 7982 उदा रिती R 1 though the anurşitti of the word sup was u derstood in tl 9 aphorism its repetition here declares that the ujargas arc not 11 clud d and be gives the follo ving artik& Jari -- ſhe serb wir in composition pith the preposit on for RFA should be eno nerated as taking this affix A९ उदाधारिन् । Ist plural oferte So niso 474Tetſtot pl AUTHIETA: I 11 ultra and Bladhava have follo red haşık 1 in this re pet This is loves cr against the Bhishya shoill be discard Vi over clues alles com-3 er 1 with apsur 118%. fi itt ITIAT 19 Inc &c As in the versa Tarkenfants Farrunt , umtaut up facifci Hasutat: 4#15grafier ? Vart-So also when the senso 13 hayli ook tl in sich ind s rab nc on As vry a excellent worker , aygrút giving liberally Vart-So also after they rb a pr.c 1 l by As wparfemin ***Entrert the huovers of Brahms su Tis 18 ) & tık.xy cover crses where there is not tbe sense of habt २९८। कर्तर्युपमाने । ३।२।। fof*FOTO I Teras y proudTU o'rnimi sa ma surat #yet warmatei Tă! mif fair sgurfte *** #TOTT 'सपमाने किम् । सदा कोपत्ति । 2999 Ibe affir fara comes after } verbs in it is in contposit on with & Ford denotat au object of comparison, expressing the agent, the sense of the athx being down, somo th like that', that is to sqr hatin up up a la ag ut istio stun lai l of conpurison of the rent dinot d bit's word to which the sense of the afla i efers Thus ou re sofa atfer who makes a no se like a on pel váru सविन । takes northea cr > Ib gstri lics wher Ito 13 lot indicitet ur hr denoted : oi post on to the Last Af huris It hy do v say when expr szi g th ag nt ? Iltness as ugrif** ** afa TOTT ha eats masha like apa Hero wt is obj -ct and not Agent and) nc uoco npos tion takes lac Why do we 81v lenoting A staadard of comparison 1 Othr 1190 th re will b no co nposto As te miria tha cam i males no:93 . २९ । व्रते।३।२।०। ferm PUIT I Format 103 The allir left corres after a rerly in composition rth a word cading in a case allis, when you 15 murut ·FOL. II. PART II. CAP. II. S 2002). TAC KRIDAXTA ATTIXUS. 77 The word to miang a 'yow' As regulated and ordineri by the Scrip tures. This condition when yow is expressed ' applies to thy completed word, that is to say, when the compict: word mads up of the root, tha upapada, and the affix, denotos & Vow. As poftrwafatha yow of sleeping on bure ground (and nowhere els:) or a person who has taken this vow upitfing' who has vowed not to eat during tho performance of a Sraddha ceremony'. Why do we say when vow is to by expressed'? Otherwise there is 10 coinposition. As cafea ta erre: 'Divadatta sleeps on baro grouad: This søtra 19 also au cxcoption to III. 2. 78 applicable sebep habis is not mennt, or when' genus' is to bz expressed. २९८१ । बहुलमाभीपये । ३ । २ ।। पोगाणेदोत्ये सुप्युपपदे शिनि वीरपाधि पीनरा 2991, Tho aflix fafor comes after a verb divorsely, sbon continuod repetition of an action is to be expressed. The word writura meaus continued repetition, that is to say, zealous practice or ngiduous performanco of anything, but does not man habit. As menfor spouttri 'the poople of Gandhárn aru kashaya-drinkers'. **T*++ fofr+7+3*+fafa (VII. 3. 33.) So also ticarfan. TIGT: the people of Uspira na milk-drinkers'. Doe-yout w/th people of Bahlıba aro bauvira drukers. By using tho word diversely' in the satra, this affix is not applied in other places, as in the following:- TITTATTI'& grain eater'. २९९२ । मनः । ३।२।२। for mudráfa: Fata Imantati 2992. The aflix fefe comes after the rorb 'to think', then there is a word with a case-allis, in composition with it, The word supi' is underst in this tútra. ds Teatemat'sho thinks bumself handsoine'; 474* who thinks himself beautiful'. Nolr.-Tae verbang bulongmg to the 4th conjugation is taken hare and not that belonging to th: Sth onjugation : because tha aturſiti of th: word diversely' 13 understool here. In the present aphoris n, whether we tahu tho Divaji or Tunada y the resulting form would by the same, nauels, fr. But not so in the nest aphorism, wbara before the affix trg there would be difference of form oring to tha Viharana, t. e., 10 th: 4th conjugation zu would be added, bat not so if the verb belonged to the Sth clus. . • ·18 IIE IDDHIhAUMUDI (vol II rant Il caur II $ 2993 Pretz IT TITI$13151 FITH TH? partità git 17 FCI 91rofits afTETTIHTI 7728 **** I Titanit FTESTUTET (128:) i ofrfa**TTI 75TT Frificar गया। 3 2993 491 tielle Frones after the ve;bor 'to think, vrlien the trurdin composition with it is a word with a casem iflis and when it is o uplowed to signify thought, thereof the object is self (tul scase of the afis beinz 'tiinhing limsulf as sic'') Th word in mea is think ng of onos owns IF' By thr wor! and it is m ant tha tho ntfix fait inay ba employed in tho sa n3 nsa This rulo applies wh ra tha agunt in ficated by th sa ise of th nffix thanks himas if pos3 ssal of the qualties of handsom n93 '&ud notut by the upapada As I909341 or datorat who thinks huns If bundsone free or afiant*t who thinks hins If trarn 1 २९८३ । क । खित्यनव्य यस्य । ६ । ३ । ६६ । T .. long vowa 19 ahortan d b fora Urr by VI 3 66 S 2913 Tius errie Fat Why do usa in S. 2313 'trh a not an Induclinabls word '? Ob serve दियामया २०७४ । इय एकाचोऽम्प्रत्ययवच्छ ।६।३।६० । 77372mruts are fatentera Intasan' (R54) I THI arxar'(992)fordamp: 797. III HAT? 1 9***** fatturato 9 मिमा कुलम् । माध्यमारवाडीयादस्परस्पा मारतावरष । 2991 A monosyllabio word, ending in any forcl other than thon followed by a word formed by a faa alis, reccires tuo nuginents witch is added in the sauno tray as tho alir Ety of tlım iccusative eirgular Tie worth is to briat i hero this entsy YTTY Tn is otros: Varzi or fardavnF****9: Ylly forcs of es altf^82 **T#019 th citugas joulua lhis th: Aucu sities online ars cnnt i by *! :**1m 1111go 92 sh.bs ats! 10 of lung 27 th sob a lion of a rlli musz 103 erit's the tra tha grunn the substitue3 191 sur Au -**31 (VL 103 S 185) jarins olores (VI I 10" 2191), çung as ATTE: (VII 3 1107') from And nr 151, 43 Feda191 keinai (VI 60 9 20") Why do we #11 cndire in unur! ob r than (TUTOW Yu petang Lo do w) say's mills? Obi rte kage.

·FOL. 11. PART II. cair. 11. & 2997.) TIIT KRIDAXTA AFFIXES. 70 The affis ay is elided after a Reuter non (VII. 1. 23), therefore, will this also be elided when it is treated as Neuter 1 As faqHWTH na माझ पकुल-प्रियंमत्यम् or श्रिमण्यम् ॥ The second form is the valid foria according to the great commentator. Here there 18 shorteniog of 7, and the absence of and yw augments. २८८५ । भूते । ३।२।८४। 47859E! ATA of'(2949) Fa urat ! 2993. All the affixes to be treated of hereafter should bo understood to come in the sense of past time. The phrase' with the sense of pass time' is an adhikåra or governiog aphorism and exerts its influence up to aphorism III. 2. 123. S. 2151 ; that is to say, these afizes give a signification of past tense to the verb whoso anuvšitts is aka understood throughout the subsequent sätras ; sce III. 1. 91. Thus it will be taught in the next aphorison after the verb tre, when the word in composition 19 in the instrumental case, the affix fafa 19 emplo; ed. llere to complete the sense we must read into the alltra, tha words ' 112th the sense of past time'. As ufpendeure=fint atf** • who has sacrificed with an Agnishtoma or a five day series of offerings. Why do we say with the sense of past time'? Otherwise thesa affixes will not ba employed As saatat tatt he sacrifices with Agnishtoma's TT 1:13! 314 र उपपदे भूसाक्षर्णिनिः स्यात्कार। सामेमेष्टयाम्सोमपाजी। प्रमिष्टोमयामी। 2996. The alix fufit comes after the verb or 'to sacrifice' with the senso of past time, when the word in composition is in the instrumenal case. The azurritti of fuff and pot of TI is to be read into this sútra. As TFT cint' who has sacrificed with Agnishtoma' Here Agpishton a 13 the instrument for the attainment of the desired fruit, So also पानमानिन् । २९६७ । पर्नगि हनः।३।२।६। पितृष्णपाती। धर्मपीयेतर 'एप' (२००६) रवि पावदपिनियते । 2997. Tlie alis fufæ comes after the verb 'to kill', with the sense of past time, wiſen the word in composition is in the accusative case. 1 ·80 TOE DIANTA XAUNUDI (VOL II Part II CBIP II $ 2998 - As farsifat who has killed his paternal uncle', atfefestet f«f# (VII 3 54 )$#T+faft (VII 3 82)=ufre (VII 2 116 ) This 'alfix is employed only when censure is implied Therefore it 19 not employed in aan 'he has kill d the thief The anuvrittı of the word wife of this aphorism extends up to satra III 2 96, S. 3006 २८ । ब्रह्मभ्र णवृत्रेषु किम् । ३ । २ । ८७ । पु कर्मभूपपदेषु एते ते शिवप्रयाद । ममा भूगा । पहा । विषय ' (२८) र लिमिवमार्थमिदम् । प्रमादिषरतेरेव भूव एष विवेति चतुर्विधोऽन्न नियन रति कापिका । vorfraafwaafa fafant forget that propi 2998. The altix fotre comes after the verb try to kill with the sense of past time, when the following words fd tho accusative case are in composition. ve a Bráhmana,' verrat fætus' and 'Vritra'. As Tor 1st. sing metho has killed a Brahmana', FUTT' wybo has killed a fætus', 'who has k iled Vritra,' re, Indra' Since by eatra 2983, the aflix fere was ordained to come after all verbs, and therefore would have com; after the verb TT also whero is the necessity of the present aphorism? Tais aphorism makes a nigami ? che verb takes the alix for only when it 19 composition with tho words me, &c. Four fold restriction 19 hero intended according to the Kasika (1) When it has, es upapada, the words re, &c, and not any other word, as yte he has killed the man'. (2) When tho words #e, kc, &re apapaday of any other verb than ry then this affit is not omployed Bo that the verb must be ru, thur. tunne 'he has read the Voda' (3) Tae fere is the only affix to denoto past eins in the case of vi preceded by me, &c, and no other affic caa bs employed in thison (4) This is employed only in the past tense and not in any other topsa, a Tor fra or finaste ho kills or will kill the Brabmana. According to the Bhashya, tho niyama is two fold onlr nata ly! and 3,18 tho apapadas must be Brahmlos, Lc, and ebollis mos bus krap Rece | गुफर्मपापमस्त्रपुष्पेषु कम । ३।२।। yalfry year for fofas fore fa af**i arti yri IFT: grani fruta fu frekome neuitat perfformi mamWTETU I *** frein vafe frestand any strefa afx forrida freg i enfrrüfafirmorefrovary TT fani trage ·YOL. II. PART II. CHAP II. $ 3001.] TIE KRIDAYTA AFISE 81 2939 The aſic fr71 concs after the very 'to malo with the sense of p23: tiwc, thon the following mords in tho aocusative case are in coniposition 'Tell, an 'action', 4 'sin', ** 'hymn' and TTT 'virtuc'. The phraso' in the accusativy case' is understood in this aphorism, and applies to all the abovem ’ntioned words, cscopt u which bing an attributive word, of course, cannot tahe any case terminations. As 97 (VI. 1. 71)' who has done well”; nene' who has done all works'; TUTT who has committed sins'; var' who has made a mantrab; TTUTT' who has done virtuous actions'. This sutra also ordaios a restrictiva rule or niyamı, Three fold restriction is intended here according to the Kasihå 18m ty, restrictions with regard to past time, root kri and the afix, bat not with regard to aprpada. 1. The restriction b ing that the affix most be ksip, we havo to ser in Figarreu 2 Tas root mat bo , we have qWTUIS Patare 1 Here there is no kvip. 3. The tim mati be pozal. There fore no kvip in the Present or Futury, as trop sofa or aircofa 1 There being no restriction with regard to the upa padas, this affix is employed when words other than thuse T **, &c., are upapadas. As, gram' who has made Scriptures', TOTKT 'who has made a commentary: Thetis added to the root by VI. 1. 71. ३००० । सेामे सुजः।३।२।। सोमपुर । चर्षियोऽत्र नियम इति कापिका । एवमुशरमप्रेऽपि । 3000. The affi, fure comes after the verb to press out juice', with the sense of past time, when the word #ra, in the acousatire case, is in composition. Ag, Bras' who has pressed the semi juico, or soma distiller'; et dnal orgar; 'st. plural orayas , Tois sûtra is also for the sake of making a nigami of restrictire rule. The four fold restrich in 13 here intended, i.e, as regards the serb, the tense, ths upapada and the aflix. Tais 19 according to the E&sha. Soaleo ia the nest satra. ३२२२ । श्रमाचेः । ३।२।। अनिचित । 3001. The affis fere comes after the verb feito collect' with the sense of past time, when the word via, in the accusa. tiro case, is in composition. 11 ·80 TOE SIDDHANTA KAUNUDI (VOL II Part IL CRAP. 11 344 As fogarn who has killed his paternal uncls'; **f*f***T foF# (VII 3 54.)=rs+fufa (VII 3 82) FT (VII.2 116.) This 'afix is employed only when insure 13 implied. Th refrest ** not employed in te tauho has killed tho thief. The anarritte of the word awfor of this nphorism extends up to ad'ra III 2. 96, S. 3006. सह । ब्रह्मभू गश्त्रेषु किप ।३।२।७। *aag mogen at fremme IKPRI Termoforre'(3) pite fui fazarafatui referito fortifs finise forem eft forti verfae foraafa fatin firewafa TTI 2998. The a fix fere comes after the verb ry to kill with the sense of past tima, then the folloring xoris in the accusatiro caso are in composition: ta 'a Brjánitaa," seal fætus' and TyVpitra'. As rom 1st sing went who has killed a Brahmara', ': hins killed a footus'; * T who has k lled Vrstra,',c, Indra'. Sinco by adera 2953, the allix fere was ordained so nomy Alt-all verbs, and therefore would have cims after the rosd my alm, we is the Deortsity of the present apbori«m ? Toto mphorion nikan niyazsin. tha vero vt takes the aflix feng only when it it out position with to words ro, Lc. Four-fol. res.riction is here it!-nded weding s. KAsikk ·YOL. II. PART II CHAP II. $ 3001.) TNE KRIDAVIA STFIXX. 2993 The allir fant concs after tho Fer 'to malo' with the sense of past tiwc, whon the following words in the accusativo caso arc in composition :-'well', d'action', 919 'sin', '#'hymn' and gta virtuc'. Tao phraso' in the accusitiva casa' is understood in this aphorium, and applies to all the abovementioned words, escopt u which bing an attributiva word, of coure, cannot take any cage-terminations. A9 (VI. 1.71)' who has done well' ; **ge' who has done all worlus'; TTTTT who has committed sins'; 'TT'who has made a mantra'; 95482' who has done virtuous actions'. This sūtra also ordains a restrictive rule or niyrmi. Three-fald matriction is intended here according to the Kåsika nam 19. restrictions with regard to past time, root kri and the alis, but not with regard to upapada. 1. The restriction bing that the affir most be krip, we havo to in TITTI 2 Ta3. root must be . we have into wauaart 1 Here there is no kvip. 3. Thetim must be past. Therefore no kvip in tha Present or Future, as मन् करोति or करिष्यति । Thera being no restriction with regard to the apapadas, this nflix is employed when words other than these I **, &c., are upapadas. As, man who has made Scriptures', 774ma'who has made a commentary. The 25 added to the root by VI. 1. 71. ३००० । सामे मनः।३।२।। सामसुत । पधिोग्न नियम इति कायिका । एवमुक्तरमश्रेऽपि । 3000. The aflix fare comes after the verb 'to press out juice', with the sense of past time, when the Ford 869, in the acousative caso, is in composition. 'As, Bragt who has pressed the semi juico, or soma distiller', 1st dual fragar; st. plural Ornyasi Tais sätra is also for the sake of mihing a niyami of restrictes rale. The four-fold restricti in 13 here intended, 1.l, as regards the verb, the tense, the upa pada and the allir. Tag 13 according to the basika. Su also in the next stra. ३००२ । अमाचेः । ३ । २ ।। अनिषित् । 3001. The alis fere comes after the verb fx 'to collect' with the sense of past time, when the rord via, in the accusa. tire case, is in composition. ii .

·82 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI (VOL II PART II CHAP II $ 300 As wiHiat 'one who has kept the sacred hie , ist dual sfferat, 1st plural safafari Here also is in the last aphorism four fold restriction is intended ३००२ । फर्मण्यग्यारवायाम् । ३ । २ । २ । करयुपपदे फापयेव कारके चिनोतेः विवस्वाद प्राण्याशरस्पलविशेषस्याख्यायाम् । स्पेन दव पिता पेनचित्। 3002 In expressing an object the affis feare comes after the verb feito collect' with tho sense of past time, when it is in composition with a word in the accusative case, prorided that the word so formed is the name of the place or altır of fire The words a: and for are understood in this sutra Tho Namo is expresa d by taking the compl te word consisting of the v rbal ront, the upapada and the affix Ar if a fire altar wh ch has b-en arranged in the shape of a hawk *ffet the fire altar arranged like a heron The word sont indicates that these words are ridhi words, their sense depending upon usage rather than etymology Tre arrangement of I ricks for sacrificial purpose with regard to fire gets th sa vario 15 nan , that is when the bricl.s are arranged fok: a falcon it 19 call d raafia and so on ३००३ । कर्मणीनिविकियः । ३ । २ । ३ । कर्भपशुपपदे विपूर्यास्त्रीयात्रिमित स्यात् । कुत्सितमारा कर्तव्यम् । wfost gafamuti 3003 The affix xfx comes after the compound verl, Fant to sell, in the sense of past time, shen in composition with a word in the accusative case Vdrlar --The rep lition of the word of in the satra through its anuvsittı might hava baen drawn from the laot uphorism indicate that thon the object carries with it gonse of censure on the agent then only this aflix is employed nod not with Avery and any object As Ornir fare the seller of some plant infrafe 'the s fler of 11q1ors, emplosing disappe val of the action of thos) parsons who carry on things mnan professions Ja not so in strainai the eller of pulds ३००४ । दृगे क्वमिए । ३ । २।४। कति भूतपापेर। पारवा पाया। 300 The offix alte comes aftcr thc rerly 'to ren' in the sons of past time, when in composition with a word in the accusative case ·II Patr II ap 11 3003) TUG KRIDA TA AFFIXS 83 who A. T 1st eing on who hu aen tho Jeru has 9 en the end or th other side Though the affix wafa wus valil by sátra III ! 15 its imprisuon her shows that no oth r oflix com s in this sens afts this Yurb ३०२५ । राजनि गुधिकृत । ३ । ३ । ६५ । waferary gfirmifericordi i treno TIVITTHU 7777 3005 Tur affic anfire comes after tho serbs Ta' to fight' and y' to make with a past signification, then the wordt "king' 19 in composition, in the accusative casc Hoy con the verb Ty which is an intransitivo verb govern an object? It 19 a transitive verb inasmuch as it is trk n to be a caustive verb with the for all x latent As ttaytay lat sing trayu (VII 27) who has caused the king to tight, and 1st sing *TUT (VI 1 71 ) who has ma lo a king ३००६ । सहे घ।३।२।६। * nfa fram i ESTETITEETTI 3006 The affixatire comes after the rerlis yari sath a post signification, when tlic word or 'with' 19 in composition Ti e anuiritti of kar nani crag The word ve buing a partic! and not d noting a substance 14 incap alle of taling ar y C390 16 317 who h?9 m ud to light rath , TEYTT who has dor o any thing along with ano her ३०२७ । सप्तम्या जनेई ।३।२।। •सत्रम् । मदुरापा पातामग्दुरता। सापा- (१००) पति वा । 3007 The flis comes after the verb 'to be produced', mith n post signification when the word, in composition with at, is in thc locative cisc As utfort i So nlo ? TIA!= ************* (VI147) born of the frst conc ption ty: Lon in th sabi as shorten d to it by 11 3 63 S 1001 ३० । पन्धम्यामजाती।३।२।। भातिपादर्धिते पारम्पत पपर बनेः स्यात् । भरभारमः । सहका। 3009 The afise comes after the verb TT with a past signification, when the word in compo ition with it, is in the ablatiro case, which docs not degot a genus, . Here OTT ·$ 84 THE SIDDHANTA KAUHUDI [VOL II. PAXT II cuap 11 $ 8009. As ytan' born through understanding, tea*. 'born of habit', 57**? " born through pain'. TI"result of th: pist barianº (ailpıhtı)" Vote.-\by do woray'»b o not denoting a genus'? Obsurte fe* wal' born of elephant', 'born of honi's ३३०६ । उपसर्ग घ संज्ञायाम् । ३।२।। A Foretat a 3009. Tho alix r comes after the verb me with a past signification, when an upasarga is in composition and when the sense is simply appellatiro. The term hore being simply appellatıpe, and not descriptırd, canoot bo explained by giving the signification of its component elements A9 10 people', or 'a son', as in the sontencz RETIUTAT or (Amarakosha III, 3. 32) ३०२० । मन कर्मणि । ३।२ । १० । atraps mungu? : EUTE I STOTT PAY gaganti 3010. The aflir 3 comes aft»r tlo verb or with a past sige nification, then t'ic root tahes the preposition way and is compounded with a word in the accusat ic case. A8 94T 'gırl born after th) malo chuid, i.e, a girl having an elder brother', aranywi'n boy born after tho female child, 1.es, n boy having an elder sister'. ३०११ । अन्येप्यपिदृश्यते । ३ । २ । ११ । meer verget='S FETS I WRITT INN I foremo ataforyſoreya trer ## Te Tavirafa fari fra try to 3011. 'I bondir * 1* scen to come after the rurby within past wgnification, though it be in preposition with other other thin those mentioned in tlc nouns, 1123ins cascs prosions fûtms. There the dorilaren en hins bien dealt with in entrs III. 2. 97;t thing Rflex c 5 thn the urrus bntary o:her car than tho senth. A. * 83Olmon', fattigt wielor'. Tags. 111sma I insitra Ill. that the pipa la mub in tak 1.sembra 16*11 no, durn d. 1** **, ! *** P, **@***. !!ร xt why pri ***d non, Ainovit vel, from TITS 1: It doelem! maln III, % Hut #K, A). Istit. in Anl, I'm ***** flet the comptar i rib Hapo wan* * *i***s Tot ima trial stirr, kvienlle view * 1.tn or prolomet al 10th, 1.2, bir ·YOL II PART II CHAP II g 3014] THE KEIDATA AYFIXES 85 ३०१२ It is declared in sūtra III 2 100 When an object is in composition ith the verb with his affix 19 employed But it may also be cap oyed when'no object is in compo ition As sy born after younger broth r The force of the word of though 19 to free this rule from all restric tons and cond tions So this affix com s after other verbs and other cagog in compozition with sich verbs As far a fi'a moat (literally that which has been dag all round) ETET & pond The Past Participles क्तक्तवतू निष्ठा ।१।१।६। wat fattat a: 1 3012 The affises ktr and kthvatu are called Nishtha ३०१३ । निष्ठा ।३।२ । १०२ । भूतार्धातोर्निया स्यात् । तत्र तयोरेव- (२८३३) रति भावकर्मणोः । कर्तरि कृत' (२८३२) पनि कर्तरि तयः । उवाविवौ । स्नात भया । स्तुतस्त्यया विष्णुः । विर्विर प्रत चाम् । 3013 The affixes called foret come after & verbal root, enzplored with the serse of past time By III 4 70 S 2833 the affi, kta denotos state and object 1 10 is Passive Participle vh le th ktavalu is Active Part cp al altix by v rtue of III 4 67 S 2832 The vand s are to the real affixes are and 1 As ea WUT bath d by m Egraferat fra Vishnu was praised by thee विध्या विश्व कृतवान् Vishnu made the universe As कृ+h- कृतम् Inade + क्तवतु-कृतयत् Ist sung कृतवान् done so also भुक्तम् and भुक्तवार eat a ३०१४ । निष्ठायामएयदर्थे । ६।४।६० । *T***V7 1347 front in the FATTI 3014 A long is subetituted for the of fo before the Passive Participle in when it has not the sense of the future Tassive Participle in पयत् । Note—The force of my is to denoto condition (Impersonal action) and object (p1531ve) When the Past Participle has not the force of tra the vowel of fe is length ned Thus wretarse sfietsi all used in the active sengo The * is added to the Intransitive fo to denote the agent (III 472) Thus ratafin aka this is tha spot where Devadatta Here * 19 used with a Locative force (III. - 76) Why do . . perished ·86 THE IDDHAYTA KAUMUDI (vol II PART II COAP II 3 3015 * . we say not having the force of रवत् ? Obs rve शक्षितमगिमामेवेटा । Here # is added with the force of condition and alsnitam means im rus ablu Th vowel not being lengthened the a is not chauged to (VIII ? 46) ३०१५ । क्षियो दीर्घात् । ८।२।४६ । दीपापियो निष्ठानस्य न स्यात् । तीयवान् । भापकर्मोस्तु हितः कामा मया। मशः किति (२८१)। थित रितवान् । भूत भूतवान् । दुव । को बहावा याच्या एकात्याम्नट् । सपुतः । नुतः । पृतः । 3015 The a of Nishthi is changed to after fe when the root rowe) is lengthened Thus सीसाः लेथाः सीमो धारमा, सीपस्तपस्वी The vowel of F 18 lengthened by VI 4 60 and 61 Why do we say when the vowel is lengthened ? Oberve शक्षितमसि मामे The word अधित 1s formed with h in the s nse of भाष and means imperishable The Nighthi b ing a lded in the s use of a there is no lengthening of the vowel by VI # GO The root fe includes the two roots fe và and fa fautenuto e As fre: ***T FAT I See also the commentary of Sâyana on wir'at fas ou fiert arata सलिल' (Rig I 5_9) ३०१५ । क । अयुरु किति ।१२।११ । S 2351 Karnha -बाय को बनाया यमसिद्धि प्रपोजनम् । शामय प्रतिपाद्यमेकापड पपवाद 3015A The augment rç is not added to an afir hring an indicators when it conies after the root for or after a monosyllabic root ending in * * *ory, in the Dhatupitba AS बिल्चा विता वितबान् । So also with roots en lng in 3 vowels as पुत्वा पुतः पुतवाम् नत्वा तमः समपान , रत्वा इतः पतवार तो तीला तीर्यपार । भूतभूतवान् । चुतः। Why For and our ending roots only ! Observ, forstua l hy 1 13ing an indicatory i Oba sve afag wfage sfeceran Somor u tvo solo g&tra and would apply it to the indicato y In ko na yey (III 2 139) hdrika --भईs treated as if it was a when the affix पर ! to be np plied ste us to be prohibited or r is to be deborreci The Jornu thing thus treated as a monosnilibe root do is notदद। Thus at: Sonlso g ततः । ३२१६ । रदाभ्या निष्ठातो न पूर्यस्य च द ।।२।४२ । सारामा पारप मिदाताप मारवाद मियाकार! रह- (1) पराल । यो रिपर परिमलाप freef - ·87 101 II II II Char II 83011] TIE XRIDITA Arrir 3016 After rande for the r of the participant sufline an mut there 14 substituted and the same substitution tahes placó niso for the precedin? ** After nars frनी, किसी न किसी पार्ष. Thua from /M wo gen+Trafm+w (VII 1 100 8 2390)-शिर+ ( I151 S70) गि+ (IIII ! 4 -5 1011पोर्ट। Nole. - 11 hy do we szy. after cond 't Obarn **, Thn word there done not de notre the common round c, which would include alsrbut the consonantr: Buteren if the taken x common sound name includling much we get the change does not take place in , &c, bncaono between and thoseonnd, thero introvenes vowel-ound , for 19 sounded not liku paies, but to vowel sound Mote-Why do we stv "of the Purticipal saffix" ? Olserve को . Hot-Why to rosy " for the r'1 Observe तिम्, पति-fiere the m of the N14htht does not follow imme liately after the augmentre interrongs Note - Why do we fry" of the preceding"? The auccording will not bo ching. As भिगवान भिमा In the word wifit the dirse ndant of 7 i tha Hol Nightha is immedintely preceded by , but no change har tikan placa, boczosn the Vriddht, by which as changed to पार, 13 Bthiranga ani conquently asiddha, and for the purposes of change, the Tro oblained 19 inrald For th- Vriddhi 19 ordainel b 01110 of that of a dded to T and it lies oulade of the mhtha T, and <0 14 Bahirings After ar-मिला, भिमपान मित, मिदम् from मि And लिए। ३२२७ । सयोगादेतो धातायंग्यतः । ८।२।४३ । मिलाप मार द्वारा प्यार लाना। .1017 T'or ther of the Yishtha there is substitutela, after 1 root ending in 31 and commencing with a conjunct consonint ift'se latter contain a semi-Torrel. Tus frou/ET कुस्खायाम् we hare मदान प्रदानगरपान । ग्यास, नाममा fom it. Th 3 mois Et nndrat end 10 7 have a conjanct consonant in thly nrring on ofwhch se sm: roxeltandar २०२० । ल्यादिभ्यः ।।२।४४ । . वियते प्रादयामाग्वत् । मतदा सिया' (११२), श्री योदी निगे । पार'वयं दम पसते भामुम्भकरवाद ।' नया हुना' रति भागप्रो दिलाये 'ना या । दिरष्टाः पूतमार। • मिनायोपकार फिलो प्रामः । 'माम रवि किए। पिता पामेर नवरी। वर्ष विगि। तिहास सपने। .

·89 TIIR SIDDE&YTI KAUHUDI [VOL II PART II OIAP II $ 3018 3018 Thor of Nisilha is changed to w, after the roots and thio tecnty roots that follow it Thoge roots belong to Kry&di class, and commence from **** (IX 13) and end with (IX 32) Thus ti, a mi, TOT from 197 6721, otrary the vocalisation is by VI 1 16 S 2412 Nole -After a root ending in 705, and after a root of L1&di class, the # of the affix Fey is o anged to T like as in Nishtha thus offer, trots for, afas, form These are from (IX 26) T (IX 28) (IX 18) and पून Var! --The vowel of the roots g777 (Bhu 991) and 3 (Bhu 997) are lengthened before the Nishtha which is changed to 1 As 1767, Farts The root 'to heat' (sva 10) bag an indicatory zand 19 th refore not taken Its Nishtha 7 is not changed to 1 As : in SATT SATT (Magh) Vart -The change takes place after 'to destroy (Chu 1015). As ya 445:- fornets : But sa oted from sy to purify (IX 12). Vart -- The same change takes place after the root fa pua of Sridi class No 2 when used 10 a Refirive senge of b coming a mors / fit for swallowing As feature: To, 1 e, where a morsel by bring mixed with curd, condiment &c becomes rounded of itself, there this form is usad: RUTI FTOHT TOT, UT Fonfresa ata asta sfarna 287547 * # # But when not used in this sense, we have fuat rot 70' the she hog is bound in the goose' Doreover, the ute must be the object and not the subject of the verb. Therefore not here for atêr an u ३०१९ । मोदितश्च । ८।२१४५ ॥ भुओ भुमः । टुनोरिख । उष्णूनः । शोकाक् । प्रीया स्वादप भोदितः' इत्युक्तम् । पून:- शुभवाम् । दूना-दनवान् । घोदिमध्ये डी पाठसामयाग्नेट् । उड्डीना। 3019 The or of Nishtha is changed to T after a root, which has an indicatory sit in the Dhátupåtha Thus from bhujo (Tud 124), YN I HATE 1 tu o 89 (Bhu 1059) I TOTTE! Vo håk (Juha 8) to So also starest-FTRI, STATOTT Fort-fills, OFETTATO starosserta Tatrang The roots furga (Dis 24) &c are considered as it Seo Dirndt root 24 Thus मना मनवान , दूना हमवान्, दोह-दीरा, दोमवार, रही। डीनवार, धीर--भीनी भीनपाम्, भीड़-भीना, भीषवात् , हरीया, रोपवान, सीर-लीना सीनपा, मोर-श्रीश मीणवान् । The root xt wuch otherwise takes dous not do so in the Nuskhe a* 10 w included in the mirc class Thuis octail t ·ror II :170 11 var 11031 TIL KRIDAYTA ATTIC . ३२२ । द्रयमूर्तिस्पर्गयो यं ।६।१।२४ । पाप न काटिनामगार सानिहाया । 3020 Ilerc 19 vocalisation of the semisoral of the root 17 () 'to go' srlien tho nishtlid aðixes follow, when tho scnsc is "coagulation or ' cold to touch The word raato means hardening of a fluid by coagulation & Thug #tfs t * Now applies the following sdtra by which the nusbthan is changed to | ३०२ । श्योगस्पर्श । ८।२।४ । अपेको निहातस्य नारयादप ला'(२५५) पति दी। पीर पृतन। 'पार जिए । चीत जगन् । 'वभूतिपय शिम् । भाषामा पनि शीताराकुषित पम्।। 3021 Tho Nishtha ais changed to r afterrt but not when tho Partioiplo dcnotes 'cold to the touch' Thus fa + 9 = festett (tho lengthening us by VJ 4 2 S 2550) ns ची पूर्त frozen butter' Why do we say not cold to the tonch 1 Observs पीताम् collater' Why do we say there is vocalisation ben meaning' congulation and cold to touch'? There is no vocalisation when tb sens i no that of conguld ton'orcoll, as UTAT FIR 'the roll d up scorpion' The short r 18 lengthened in 1* &c by VI 4 2 S 2559 The word re is a guna Ford form d by ani denotes the parts cular guns or ensation to be sensed through the organ oftwach scnso it is derived from the root fou RETRNIt also denotes a discay, derived from you. There 19 nothing to show what he is meant in the satra Explanation is the only refugo here ३०२२ । प्रतेरप।६।१।२५। विपूरप या समधार स्वाग्मिष्ठायान् । प्रतिपीना। 3012 There is ro alisation of re precede lbr tic up1ern for klienten sht! A is folloir TIu3 प्रतिसीना प्रतिणीयान् । 'Theatra applies to engwh re the words ned dot I we th in aning of congulator colt ३२२३ । विभाषाभ्यवपूर्यस्य । ६।१।२६ । एप महारश वा स्यात् । अभियान अभियोगन पृतम् । सानाविधीको पवित्र । पपस्थितषिभायन् । तर मनवायाना। 3023 There is optionally the vocalisations w follosed by the dishthå afisea when the upacar,75 54 14.] =* precedt 2 Ia dars ।

·00 TITE YIDDISTA KAUHUDI (SOL II PART II CHAT II 3024 This is footage or sofratres eo sarath or a This option Applis even when th wordt meang coug ilation and cold A. (1) **** or wrap gant Agill autar or start org: &c eft or TITUTE Th in the så ra gayp 9 the same pirpose as in VI 1 27 Thas firstutt or whitrar tid Thr97. The word sa shows tl at it 19 & vyarnsthita vibhaal & hencn there is no option allowed when sfer and sa are 10 the mutile R8 STATH FEATTI # Here we cannot bave the alternative forms TT &c ३०२४ । अयोग्नपादान ।।२।४ । पानी मिट्ठातस्य नास्पाम स्वपादाने। 302 Ilo Nishtlid a 18 changed to " after but not when it is in connection with an Ablative caso Thus पमपनो यकु पादासाती, तस्मात् पपवा बिमा . There augments not added in *** by the following ३०२५ । यस्य विभापा ।।२।१५। En wafefantear fafernenar fogtat i fatat sigara (7375) «far surat ferat ferr inte ***t i warga fore I THOT**TVA 1 TENNIFESTAT - (ac) <for 7 ATE forgrent TPAFTCATTIfafira foztung: * 3022 The Participal aflises do not take te after those roots, to which another suffix can optionally be added, with or without this augment That is a root which is option lly Set before other affixes is invariably anit before Nightha Thu, by VII 2 41 consonant beginniog affixes Rre optionally ac after the roots y buc. The Nishthe after v &c will be invariably anit Thus far fara Tu By VII 2 56 S 3328 the roots having an indicatory v optionally are followed by Set *TThe Nisbthe after ofte roots will invariably be anıt as I (trom acc f TUY no By the vârtika afr oft ftatuty Timutra the note muy and FFCAT rike optional e in the D giderative (VII & 49) Though 198 rout which thug optionelly takes in the Desiderative yet it N, bịha is always for Pånini h mself has employed the word aan in sätra II 1 24 38 According to Padamaojari this rule of the format is aditya and pot of universal application Because had this rule been of universal ap plication then the root on which is optionall: anit by VII 2 57 would be universally adit by the present sátra and there would be no necessity of reading it with a long in the Dhátupatha, as (VI 141) to make at9 Aushth& an under YU 2 44, ·TOL. II, PART II coor II $ 3026.) TNE RIDIY. AITIIL 91 Why do we say in S. 1024'han no; in construction with an Ablasira Cas.'1 Obs rver***** *71=ITY. drawn cui: "Ttis svord wrong is from sho rout WTT sifonning, and not from the root sor; and hence the Nishtha is not changed. Tho changs of w into w is ordain I by a TripAdı rule (V.JI. 2.49 &c.) and thereforo it is considered asiddha (VIII. 2. 1. S 12), and therefore the of Jorasch requires to be changed to b:fore * by VIII. 2. 36. 8. 294. This za, however, presented by the following: Varl.-Tho substituto of the Nishtha affiin should be considered as Yalıd or siddha for the purposes of the rules relating to the (1) changing of o to .(2) accont (1) Alix, and (0) r augmcat. As (1) , The The root is yr (Tajadi 11) the indicatory archows that tho nishtha mis changed to " (VIII. 2. 45. S. 3010). This nisbtha substitata is considered nu vald or siddha, and the final of tho root is not changed to e, as it other. vigo would have been by VIII. 2. 86. S. 291. for would hayo beco still considered as # or a letter. The equatiod is as follows -**- Trit (VI 1.16)-T2+* (VIII 2. 45)-13+* (VII.2.9+ (VIII. 2. 30)-5. (VIII. 4. 1) Tas is changed to by VIIL 2.80, by considering * 19a91ddha and thereforo cqual to nor a laths. Thus it will bo geen that this wa faz for ths purpose of rule VIII. 2. 30, bat it is fers only for the purpose of rulo VIII. 2 36. ३०२६ । परिस्कन्दः प्रागभरतेपु । ।३.२५ go w 972 warnt frorat i fag-rfH fare referre wiriririr' (736) Tfos foxy: 1 (2797) fa a THI. 3026. The trord titete is used without the cerebral chango in the country of Lastern Bharata. Tais is an anomiy. Tas required by the VIII. 3.74 8.23.23 i prombitad. The other form is faire Tae word परिवरrest by tho alix y or it is a Nishtha, the x B2ing eleded. Toen qualifies the word ATTI: Prof. Bohtlingk translatog it "aierz is seen in the Erstern l'eople and the Bharata": lo tax bis con*** II. 4 66, and IS. 2. 113, wbud i Tronas means Bharata". Why do wosoy' Eastern'? Oberte for form is by the option of Vm. 2 74 S. 2392. Tae of death required to be charged arrestone The following satrs prevents that ·02 TIE SIDDHANTA LAUSUDI (vol II Part II cup II 3027 । means ३०२७ । प्रतिस्तब्धनिस्तब्धी च ।।३। ११४ । जनपरस्यादा 8027 Tho words & fafunt and forfan are anomalous In these words the 18 not changed to though so required by VII 3678 2272 ३०२८ । दिवोगविजिगीषायाम् ।।२।४ । दिघा निष्ठातस्य नः स्यादविजिगीपापा । इयूनः । विजिगीपायो छ । इतक्ष। 3028 The Nishthat Is changed to r after दिव when the sense is not that of 'play' The word farvey means ' desire of conquest or gain, but here it gambling Thus सादर मा चोदरिका परि मासीwn Why do we say when it deos not mean to play ? Observe a . Here the throwing of dice 19 with the desire of winning or gaining victory (vijugisha) over the opponent. ३०२८ । निर्वाणोऽवाते । ८।२।५० । सवात रति खेदः । निक्षावार्मिष्ठातस्य माय स्याद्वातकर्ता । निर्वामिभुमि । धाते निर्वाता पाता। 3029 The word forata 19 irregularly formed by changing the Nishtha to when the wind is not the agent of the verb The word frafer is formed the root of with the preposit on face and the Participial affix a a Thus निर्वाणोऽग्निः = उपशाता निर्वाणानदीपा निर्वाण भिक्षु: -उपरता॥ the wind Why do we say when not meaning ? Observe frafar aras निर्वात वातेन In the sentences frafot uz7h2 atau fraterstraatar the , change has taken place because the location of the verb 27 19 in the writer and difer and not in the ta which is merely an Instrumente Hence the above Srittı uses the words if the sense of the verb 7 has not the word as its agent ३०३० । शुष क ।८।२। ५१ । निष्ठात इत्येव । पुस्त। 3030 * is substituted for the Nishthå after the root og As गुष्का शुक्रवार ३०३१ । पचो व ।८।२। ५२ । 3031 * is substituted for the Nishtha # after the root en As पयः पश्यवान् ।

·ILI 11 1011 Il car II 9 3031) TIIL KIDINTA ITIIK 03 . ३२३२ । सायो मा ।।२। ५३ । 3032 is substituted for tho Nahthim afte the root. Thug 11 WWII ३०३३ । स्त्य. मपूर्वस्य । ६ । १ । २३ । प्रारहरमा भप्रयारक स्थाग्निष्ठापार। 3033 The verb ezet (På and c) vien preceded bs * changes its semitowel to a rowcl, when a Nightha aſfix followg The phrasco "when tho nishtha followe", and there a rocalisation are understood hare Tho anavr tu of Fl docs not run harr The rool F# and to both assume the form and are include hrte Tags #tout + *=** fra (VI 1 103) REIT (VI 4 2), and statu The # of nishthi nffix would have been changed into T by VIII ? 43 in as much as the root frit has a demisowel and ends in long en If it by the vocalisation of or the condition of the for thn application of VIII 2 43, no longer existing tho affix a 19 not changed to wo Bat * is optionally changed to by VIII 2 5+ below A9 ARTIS and WTTTTO ३०३४ । प्रस्त्यारन्यतरस्याम् । ८।२।५४ । fagtart 01 FATTI - matarolme' fani tor! 3031 is optionally substituted for the Nishtlin after the root ora preceded br* T113 प्रस्ती Or मस्तोता मस्तीनवार or मरवीरगन् - In the second alternative when duos not come wo first vocalise th root put into it and th Dadd, Bad Sapra-Irann not taken place first thra the Ausbthin moull have been changed to w after rent by VIII ? 43 But when empra-Grana is onco marl, the root no longer bas a acmisowel and so thrre remains co occasion for the application of VIII 2 43. 12v do 10 535 ben preceded hy #1' Obseite MERRIWI (TIN 2 43) TATATIT* If it was intended that focalisation should take place whta #singly stood beſon then the stra corld well bare ran thus at The use of the word gir implies that the rule applies when stands fire, though other apgugus may intervene between it and the root. Thas अस्तीतः प्रसस्तीतजार . The compound प्राय should be explained asa Baburrihı Fiyat The VINTERESITATS T* (that which consis*ing of root and upasargs 19 preceded by * is called up) Therefore the rule is nado apricable to get a ·94 THE SIDDIANTA KAUDI (vol II PART II cuap II § 3015 1 ३०३५ । अनुपसांत्फुल्रातीयकृशोल्लाघाः ।।२।५५ । प्रिफला । पुल निष्ठातस्य लरव निपारपसे । तपस्वेदेशस्यापीद निपातनमिप्यते । पुल्स वान् । हीरादर करवपस्येव तलोप । तस्यापिटरपारमातस्यैटोभापरष मिपात्यते । जीवी नत्तः । पस्तमु । उमापो नीरोगा।'अनुपसर्गाद' किम् । 3035 The irregular Participles grans blown,' et 'drunk, mrd' Jean' and are 'healthy' are formed then only, when no Preposition precedes them The word y 18 derived from the root fwa fuoco the # is changed to su The change of * tos (VII 4 83), and the want of a augment (VII 2 16) are regular The same change takes place before pay also as The affix the elided after the roots चीन, कृग् and उत्-लाप , and as the clision 19 asıddha there would have been , but as an apomaly the augmentre is prohibited also, this is the irregularity in star, yu: and STIH: Why do we say when not preceded by a Preposition ? Observe (agrants सुमनसा मचीबिता प्रकृयिता, मोल्लाषिता ।। In the case of साथ, prepositions other than a are probibited) ३०३६ । श्रादितश्च । ७।२।१६ । साकारतो निष्ठाया म स्याद । 3036 The Participial affixes do not get re augment after a root which has an indicatory star The root fetarent has an indicatory s and so its nishtha will not take res Thus **+ Now applies the following by which the sof 13 changed to ou Note ---As for fare foto fototy, fairyferro: frentary forfree ferra: feront The implies that other roots not enumerated are tą be also included is wa Fai Note--This and the sätra following it in the Ashtadhyayi could have been made into one, ag wenze finantat perfekte The separate making of two aQtras indicates thro the rule of her fortsat (VII 2 15) applies with the restrictions and limitations of the rule ordaling option', e the probibition of augment, with regard to the participial affixes 19 limited by the game conditions, which apply to the optional employment of before other affixes in the format rules (TS TTÜF 4797 gori: Afaqwa) Thus VII 2 68 ordains re optionally to the affix ay after the roots TY free and forą u Tho root fare there is the Tudâdı root meaning 'to acquire . The role of frest will apply to this far with this meaning and not to fir meaning to boon' the Past Participles of which are feftai, fafeXIT * t ·Yol 11 mart II CRA II $ 5614) TIIT TUDANTA AITII - . ३०३७ । ति च ।।४।। परफनो नाही किनि प्रीदिनानिमोनाNिE 'समानुसता मला 'पुनधिका 'पमा लागिन "Eryपापयामा " 3037 319 mulustitutted for the romo of rand se beloro an aflix beginning with a hasing an indicato : *. Thug afas (and or II) Arati and Agim** Tu anussitta of the TEVATEE deos not apply here, though present. Sic VIII.2 65. Thus कस् +7+पुताso also मशीपितामपिता मोरताNिon do you explain the form agent in होमन सामता प्रकार (Raghukr. 29) It is not the Passivo Part. of fæ*, but a derivatve of gun 'to bloom with the nflix y of the Pachadi. The present aatra prvvents the formas . Vart -The forms *Ti nod yw should be enumorated Jere is changed to m, though th root has taken a P're pro ation In tho word sfiyet the word oft is not a Preposit 100 with regard to the verb कृपा परिणता कृपा afiya. So that ofc is upassage of the verb T#1 understood, henc, we have the form you ३०३८ । नुदयिदोन्दनापानीभ्योऽग्यतरस्याम् ।।२।५६ । एभ्या निवासस्य मोबा-पुतादि' मिस रोपतिरपिता परसाद विता-पिता सेतु विपिता रिमिन्दी। 3038 The Nishtah n may optionally be changed ton, after विद, पाप्रा. Thus yra, or y, froki or free, (gou, or ygwi, MTS1 पाया, प्रा 0 माता : or stai). • with regard ton, ther change was not ordained by any rule, and so it is an aprápta vibhaght With regards to others, the change woald hare alunys taken place by VIII 2. 42 and 43, this postes at optional. Tho root far fauna of Rudhidi is to be taken here, and not other for roots, because it is read along with Jand! which belongs to that clasy Thus Nishtha at पिद-देति of Adidh clas • शिपिता, () offor-मिले, of Vivadı cizss farti only, (3) of fors of Tadålt is forts, ($) offre of Rudh&d: are both front and forget The Tadedı far has also the forma fort in the sense of sto by VIII 2. 58 Tae root ma is read in the Dbátaçatha with an indicatory long t. the force of which is explained in the following alltra :- .

·TITE SIDDHAYTA KAUMUDE (VOL. II Part II CHAP II 9 3039 ३०३८ । श्वीदितो निष्ठायाम् । १२ । १४ । वयतेरीदितरच निष्ठाया । उता-उत्ता। प्राशा-प्रातापा-प्रातः हीदा होता। 3039 The Part cipial affi res and awa (kta in t ktavatu), do not get the rugment after for and after the root which has an indicatory tu Thus उद्+तम or जतः The Past Participle of /प्रा (S 3038) 19 प्रात: or प्रा। Of/प्रा (S. 3038) 19 प्राय: or प्रातः। Of/की,कीsor fast ३०४ । न ध्यारुणमूर्छिमदाम् । ८।२।५७ । एभ्यो निष्ठातस्य नावं मध्यातः । ण्यातः । पूर्तः । 'राश्लोपः। भूतः । मत्तः। 3040. The Nishtha. a 1s not changed to r after प्या, पण, प. भूचिई and मद Thus प्याता, भाववान एपातः, यातवान् प्रतः प्रतवार मूर्ती, मूर्तवार, नाता, - This debars the change prescribed by VIII 2 42, 43 S 3016 and 3017 The 100 भूEि 1 exhibited in the ratra in its lengthened from , the root you is lengthened by VIII 2 78 and the 19 elded before a by VI 421.32655 ३०४१ । वित्तो भोगप्रत्यययोः।८।२।५ । विन्दतेनिष्टान्तस्य निपाताय माग्ये प्रतीते पार्थे । वित्त धाम् । वित्तः पुरए । 'नयो।' किन । विनः । विभाषा गमहन-' (२०६९) रति स्वसो वेत्यादिने । 3041 The irregularly formed Participle for denotos 'possession' and ' renowned' This is derived from fasz ere of the Tadadı class, the ar is not changed to though so required by VIII 2 42 S 3016 Thus forwart 23=TAMET NG' he has much riches'. Because riches aro enjoyed (पुज्यते), so they are called भोग or 'enjoyments' par excellence In the a ne nf r no y e!" w h24 frelst pra: this man is te Here वित्त महीना प्रतीयते-प्रत्यय Why do we gry wrhn having the sense of poxae9e1 ng'and famous ? Oberre fanat The ront 19 anit in the Arshtha Beciust it 19 optionally से before me affix by VII 2 698 3009 See S 3025 ३०४२ । मित्त शफलम् । ८।२।५८ । भिममपत्। 3012 lhe frord Fow is irregularls formed in the sease of 'n frngment, a portion' noun dor famous ·vor. IT PARr cur. II 53046] TIIE KRID INTÅ AFTIXES 37 Thny far fagfa fue Asafa a This is synonymous with * The root meaning of fire 18 not very manifest in this word 16 may be taken as a rudhr word The regular form is fittil under VIII 2 42 S. 3016 ३०४३ । ऋणमाघमण्ये । ।२।६० । अपाता तकारस्य मत्व निपात्यते प्राधमध्यपहार । तमन्यत । 3043 The word " is irregularly formed in the sonse of debt. It is derived from the 2 is changed to * The word *** 19 com pounded from अधम अणे 'he who in a debt transaction holds a lower posttion, i e, a debtor' The other form 1s मृत ' truth, right' ३०४४ । स्फायः स्फी निष्ठायाम् । ६।१।२२। स्फीता। 30-44 The Fat is the substitute of Fame to swell,' turn the Nishtha aflixes follow Thus स्फीतः स्फीतवान् Why do we say " when the Nishtha afixes follow' ! Observe फाति: formed by तिम् ॥ In the phras. स्फाती भवति, the word स्काती is the feminine of the word forfa form’d by forta ३०४५ । इपिनष्ठायाम् । ७।२।४७ । गिरा कुचो मिटाया र स्यात् । 'पस्य विभाषा' (३०२५) रवि नि मा पुग। मिाकुपिता। 3045 The augment re is added to the Participialalixos स and ववव after हुए preceded by निर्॥ As fare formaty firstams a The special mention of EE in the sůtra 18 for the sake of making its addition invariable otherwise it would have been optional, or debarred by VII 2 15 S 3025 In the subseyuent Ashtådhyâyi sQtra, the addition becomes again optional ३०४६ । वसतिक्षुधोरिद । ७।२। ५२ । प्राभ्या परवानिष्ट पानिध्यमिट् स्यात् । उपितः । धितः । 3016 The affix ltva, ktr and ktayatu always receive tho augment after the (tefa) and on As उपित्वा पिता and पितवान् सुधिस्था, पुधित सुधितवान् । Note --The qe of the Adâdr class will get as it 19 enumerated in the list of te roots The repetition of shows that the rule is in variable, the 'optionally' of the preceding Ashtadhyâyf sûtra does not affect it ३०४७ । अञ्चे पूजायाम् । ७।२।५३ । प्रभावमा पत्यानिपोरिट् स्यात् । धम्चितः । गता रवक्तः । 13 .

·98 TAN SIDDRANTA KAUMUDI (FOL. II PART II. CKUP. II 3047 3047. The alises I tra, kta and ktaratu take the augmen ve after the root , when meaning 'to honor or do sore thing to show honor.' As -571 Time, fra WH 4: (III. 2 188, VI 4,30 II 3.67) By VII. 2.56 w5y would optionally have caused ee to come before ktre and hence by VII.2 15 S 3035 never before the Nishtha This autre ordains invariable addition of this augment. Why do we say when meaning 'to honor ? Observe 99% e 'the water is raised from the trell," where anchu means 'to go'. See VIII. 2 48 S 3024, and VID 2. 15. S. 3025. ३०४८ । लुभी विमोहने । ७।२।५४ । मुभा पत्यानियोनिस्पमिट स्थान सु गाये । सुभितः । गाउपा। 3048. The allises htra, and lta, htaratu take my after the root TI (Ind 22) when meaning 'cntangled or confused.' As yfitzat and an, fagforato As, Fagfirat stavai, foglie mit Han By VII 2 48 ya would have optionally caused E to come before htva, and then by VII 2 15 the Nishtha would never have been de » Hence this satra. Why do we say when meaning to entapglo'? See QTV: Tasettaa sitar, u TL' to be giccdy' (Div:128) is not go- Ferned by this role, but by VII. 2. 48. As soat or erfarer and forget (1 2 26) governo fpfit: Franfiigat: 191piyon CT FITTIFU Juo' forced argt for faauh', a aratat forumet farsfo forgrer fra et fast: i farfuas-fert 3019. Tuc affixes átra, kta, and kkaratu, may optionally tahe se after into Ag Fre_o7 or Faforcat, fret or farfumi, fiecary or faforte. Foram (Divadı 54) 54779, being anudatts would altoays have taken Bororo ktvi and Nichtha Henco this ralo ordains option with regard to htva. for fri (IX. 50) haring an indicatory * roull haro optionally taken re beforo lira by VII 2 41, but then the Nishịha afixes by VII 2 15 Trould never have taken the augm-ot. ३२५२ । पूरुष ।।२।१। i matindicat este 3030 The afixes tra, bta and blafaty optionally got to the after ·VOL. II PART II owar II $ 8052 ] TIE KMDANTA AFFIXES 09 Ag 925t or farar erkrintai, traitafa-1 3777 or FINT Th allors option whora by VII 2 11 there would have b en polub 137 Sye 1 %. 22, given below. When the affix takes the augm'nt re, it is no longer ngarded as five by the following sätra, and so there is gunr. ३०५१ । पूछः क्त्या घ।१।२ । २२ । Tiigra fagt om one f*** *57019791-741 | ariyutq, TEXTE" (३३२४) रत्यत्र हि वरवर सयष्यते । 3051. The set Nushtha and the seţ khd are not kıl altor tho veib pun 'to purify.' Thus +10+=art=fait When thers 19 ao , we have THI By role VII : 51, S 3050 after the verb tho Nishtha allixes and ketti tako thy intrmediate < So that ktud b ing sét (by vittu of S 3050) svould have been non kit by S 3322, and it might be asked what 19 thg necessity of repeating it in this stra when I 2 18 S 3322 comprisci the casc. The reason of this repetition is that by ment oning Ind in thig sutra it has governing force over the succeding Ashtadhyayi sütras. Thus in l. 2 23 S 3324 the afix htvå alouc 13 tahco and nothing clso ३०५२ । निष्ठा शीखिदिमिदिदिवदिधृपः । १।२ । १० । xxar afarge fara frati Fara - Franta, wyrupor Tesefagpadre #fxr- Frantie •ादिकर्मणि निष्ठा वक्तव्या.'। 3032 The sot Nishtha affiscs are not lil after the fire vorbs bi' to lie down,' srud 'to sweat,' mid 'to melt,' kshrid' to bo unotuous,' and dhuish' to offend' •Thus अमितापयितवान् । The root he is read in the satra seith its indicatory letter E, 10 order to ind cats that this rule dos not apply to th= Nishtha of uik. Thus 27192: 1 OFTATE ! The other four roots fer (Fafert) for (faitzi) fre (fufuat) and you (forgat) have all a long as indicatory, as well as the syllablo fy Thaga roots therefore by VII 2 16 S 3035 are 'anit, and consequently beyond the scop- of the operation of th> prasant sutra As fETTI, fettata Though Nushthår 13 genemlly a Passive Participial atis denoting & Past Tim, it also denotes the beginniag of an action by the following Tårtika Vartika when the beginning of an action 19 intended to be expresa de the Nisita affiscs are employed yan ·100 THE BIÐDRAVTA KAUNODI (FOL II PART II OHAR II $ 3053 . When Lla denotes an Adharma, it fosce its Passito forc* and becomes an Active Participle by the nazt sätra Therefor when the Nishth& Mixes druoto 'n stato or condition, bóta' or beginning of action' then *LIC muore four roots optionally become seg (VII 2 17) It is in that can that the present eutra is applicable to them ३०५३ । आदिकर्मणि कन कर्तरि ध । ३।४।११ । पादिकपिपासा र परिस्पात् । पाद्वापकर्मणोः। 3053 Tho aflix ta' also denotes the agent, whca it expresses a beginning of an action The word sticuf means the beginning of an action' or when the action signified by the roots is intended to be expressd merely as having breen aimply begun The forco of the 90tra 19 to indicate that aren when the beginning of an action is intended to be expressed, the m may bo 1 sed to denote the act and the object as well Mole-Then Bhava and Adıkarma are denoted by the Nishtul 16 optionally tales XT by the fllowing ३०५४ । विभाषा भावादिकर्मगो. । ७।२ । ७२ । HTC Tirafe uri at fetar K** Futa i seg formafit dhe i for दिया इति पादिरलपमते नीद्भिः साहचर्यात। स्विझतेस्तु स्थिदित इत्येव । प्रिमिदा 'शिशिवदा दिवादी म्यादी । मभेदिता-अमेदितवान् । स्वेदिता-पत्येदितवान् । प्रति:- मर्षितषाम् । शर्षितं तेन । 'हैट' किस् । मस्विनः । मस्पिन तेभेत्यादि । 3054 The principal affixes after roots Laving an indtcitory may optionally take the augment is when the affixes hare an Impersonal scose, or denote the beginning of an action. Thus the four roots fil shvid& fi mida ñi kshvidê and 81 dbrish& become when their Participle denotes an Impersonal songs, or the bo ginning of an action and when the Nishtbø 19 not fort by S 3052, Tu Azaferar (Adıkarma) a(bhara) The (fil) shoid (A) of this sutra (S 30-2) is the Bhuê li root as it is read in the company of /ad/ksbrid &c which have fat indicatory It must therefor: be that grid which has an indicatory fw and that is Bhvadı (No 780) Or the Diyadi root forg (No 79) there is no guna as teafati The two roots i midâ and Dihshvidê belong both to the Divadi (Nos. (133 134) and the Bhrádı (No 779 780 or 1027) Both are taken bere Thus :मेदितााममेदितवान् । श्वेदिता माधेदिताम् । The fifth root dbrush (V 22) offers no peculiarity Thus sida wwfdart So also भर्पित वैन । Why do we say in S. 3052 the tenishtha '1 Obserye Taitafer # No guns ·YOL. II. PART II CBAP. II. S 3056). TIIE KRIDANTA AFFIXES. 101 - ३०५५ । मृषस्तितिक्षायाम् । १।२।२० । #fing fist bila i afáas far I'7747' fai sayfa 91491 sfa referat 3055. The set Nishtha is not kit after the verb mrisha when moaning 'to forbear' Thus shear forborne' afara' forbore.' Why do we say 'when meaning to forbear?' When it has not this sense, the set nishțhe will be faa. As vegfart 4774978' he spoke unintelligible language. ३०५६ । उदुपधाभावादिकर्मणोरत्यतरस्याम् । १।२।२९ । उदुपारपरा भावादिकाः पिनष्ठा था किन स्यात् । दरवितर-दोतितम् । दिव- मादितं भावनामतिता-प्रयोतितः । प्रमुदिता-प्रमोदितः साधुः । उदुपधात 'किम् । विदि. तम् । भावा-' इत्यादि किम् । रषित बापयम् । 'रेट' कि । अष्टम् । 'गरिबकरोग्य एवेन्यतेने प्यतेगुपितम् । 3056. The se! Nishtha is optionally not kit, after the Terbs having a penultimate s, if used impersonally or denoting the beginning of action. According to some the set Nishtha suffixes are not kit after the verbs having a penaltimatoo if those verbs are used impersonally (bhara) or denoto the boginning of action (&di-kárman). Thus 'to shine'a fan a or pitfaramita 'it bas been lighted' Similarly welfart or firas he first illumined. So also मुदित or नादित थामा। प्रमुदित: or प्रभादितः साधुः। The word penultimate or upadha hag been defined in I. 1. 65. Why do we sny" when u 18 penultimate ?" If the verb has any other vowel than v ag penultimate, then the rule does not apply. As far front written by him,' Or fafcigi Here is penultimate , and, therefore, no option is allowed. Why do we say " when used impersonally or denoting Adıkarma ?" This rule has no application where the Nishtha does not express either upra condition' or 'Impersonal action '; or will beginning of action', hat is ied. & verhal adiestire. As font mutage TFT be givee shining coin (called karshapaņa).' Here tho sword fox'shiding' is used 29 adjective Why do we eny '<'? Thr rulo applies to the Nisht)& which takes the intermediate and not to others; as, ty 'the rice that has been eaten.' Here no option is allowed. So also me! Isthli:- This optional form of past participle is restricted in its scope. Those verby which take the vikaraña re, in c., the verbs of the Bhu class, &c., admit of this option. Thus Ta' to yrap up' belongs to the Diyadi clase, and therefore, its participle one form only, as, sfint.

·102 THE SIDDHANTA KAUNUDI (VOL II PART II CHAP II $ 3057 ३०५७ । निष्ठाया सैटि।६।४। ५२ । रोप: स्यात् । भाविता-माविषवाम् । 'पीमिता- (३०३३) इति मेट् । समसारणम् । शनः । दोहा । गहा। पतः । वनु । तता । पतेः। सनि वेटकरवादिभावे माते 'द्वितीया चित-' (६८६) इति सूत्रे निपातमादि । पतितः । सेसिधि' (२५०६) इति घेट्करवा रिण्टे कृपतत्यादीमामीदियेनानियत्वज्ञापनाका तेन 'पाक्तिमिनराजपिया' इत्यादि।' यस्य- विभाषा' (३०२५) इत्यप्रेकाच इत्येव । दरिद्रितः। 3057. The affix णि 1s elided before the affixes kta, and ktavatu when these take the augment इट। Thus भाविता भाबितवाम् | So also कारितम् हारितम् गणितम् लषितम् ॥ By shtra VII 2 14 S 3039 the/sudoes nob take इट् in the Nishthar The root is wire in the Dhatupatha Thug fra +9+a (the vocalisation is by VI 1 15 S2409)=y+त (VI 4 2S 2259)-सूमः (VIII 2 45 S 3019) Similarly from /dipi (IV 42) flat guha Ta!! From vanu eat the nasal 19 elıded by VI 4 37 S 2428 /tanu mai The root पत is optionally सेट in the D siderative by the varika तनिपतिदरि द्रादिभ्यः पनो यार वाच्यः (Se S 2621) The Nightha would not therefore, have taken r (S 3025) but as Pånını himself has used the form ofar: in II 1 24 S 686 we infer that the prohibitton of S 3025 does nob apply to पत। Or it may be said that S 3025 is anıtya (not universally valid) Fou had it been universally valid tho roots a ya ka took optional te by VII 2 57 S 2506, and would therefore have formed their Past Participle without T by virtue of S. 3025 What was therefore, the necessity of teaching these roots with a long t in the Dhatupitha (Tudadi 141 & 35, Dividt 9) and making them applicable the rule VII 9 14 S 3039 Thus we farat (S 3025) is avitya hence the form ofa &c, are valid ag 12 धावितमिभरा पिया।e See note unders 3025 Moreover the sutra ne format (S 3025) applios only to monosyll&bio roots as the word एकाच: Is understood therein from VII 2108 2246 10 does not apply to roots having more tha 1 ons syllable Taus Tiefent from darıdra ३०५८ ॥ सुव्यस्थान्त ध्यान्त लग्नम्लिष्टविरिब्धफाण्टयाढानि मन्धमन- स्तम सक्ताविस्पष्टस्वरानायासमृशेषु । ७।२।१८। पायादीग्यष्टापनिट कानि निपात्यन्ते समुदायेन मम्पादिप दाम्येषु । यद्रषमताः सात यो नश्यामपनदरहरष । हुम्टी मध्यरवेत् । स्वास्त नमः । ध्यान्तं दमः । लग्न एतम्। निष्टान स्वमपि निपातनात् । ग्लिष्टमविस्पष्टम् । विरािमा स्थरा। लेछ''रे' धारावा रवमपि निपात्यते । फापटममायासमाथ्या कपायधिपः। भावातु नवनीतभावाल्यावस्थापन द्रय कारटमिति चेदभाध्य पाए । चार भयम् । पत्रभितम् । चम्पा पति यानपान. वानिरपवाद । सनित । निवन । गितम्लेगिन् । निरभित्र सिरिया। .

·TOL II PART II CHAP II § 8059] THE KRIDANTI AFFIXES 103 3058 Tho following eight words are formed Tithout re augment, in the senses given against them 1 T* " porridge' or 'a churning stick', 2 yurant 'tho mind', 3 ir darkness', 4 pras'attached', o fret'indistinct or unintelligible', 6 fafcrus'a note or tono', 7 FITT!"7 decoction made without an effort or by an easy process', and 6 * excessive' The word mantha' means fried barley mixed with any liquid subs tance It also means the churning stick 2 Svänta means 'mind, or manas , 36 Dhvânta means darkness 4 Lagna means 'attachment' The # of the nishtha is changed to as an irregularity 5 Dilishtham mcans indistinct or inarticulate speech 6 Vırıbdha means 'tone or sound These last two words are derived from mlechchbu and Jrebbrı the penultimates have been changed to ranomalously 7 Phantam is a decoction made by an easy process But Madhaya in his commentary nn the following text of the satapatha Brahmana ( aaron wafat देवाना TE neturite 1) says 'phantam is the first particles of butter produced by churning 8 Badha means excessive When the words have not the above senses we have 1 for 'disturbed or agitated The phrase T T 25 a metaphorical use of the word and shows the anıtya nature of Agama rules (as the reagama) 2 atat ag rufaat : Fafira WET 3 rafrat or safira ATT # 4 furt 5 vafsu (=aa) 6 farfure from my 'to sound' or fuftfirrt from रिभि ॥ 7 फापित ॥ 8 परिस from /बाह 'to strike' ३०५९ । धूपिशसी वैयारपे । ७।२ । १९ । स्तो निष्ठायानपिनव रवानिटी स्तःपष्टः। विधस्तः । अयप्रदर्पितः पियमितः । नारा दिकर्मणास्त थैया भूपिर्नास्ति । अतरप नियमामिद भूषमिति वृत्तिः । भूपेरादिपये फल चिन्त्यमिति सदसः । नाधवस्तु भावादिकशोरयपात् विकरुपमा। धृष्ट-पर्षितम् । मष्टा- rafuar 3059 The Participial affis does not get r augment, after the roots and Tobold, impudent and arrogant' As yet FOURIR The root te is exhibited in the Dhatupâtba ng fstras to be impudent (V 22) and as it has an indicatory 7, its past participle would be sfic by VII 2 16 S 3036 TT 15 TE in the Dbáta påthr (1 763) and as it has an indicatory by VII 2 56 read with VII 2 15 its Nishth& 19 also Anit The special mention of these roots herą 19 for the sake of making a nigama rule namely write only then when meaning impudent, and in other senses as wféxi, fatigas 1 ·104 TUE SID DEANTA KAUNODI Frol. II. fant II, CHAY. II 9 3060. in never fornis past participle with the force of 1974 (Impersonal action) or store (beginning of action), and therefore VII. 2. 17 cannot apply to it. Therefore it is a niyama rulo"-thus says the author of the Kasthi. Haradatta saga " the use of indicatory Hin yar is of doubtful propriety.". But Nâdhava says " that the option is allowed in the Impersonal and Adi. karma when it does not mean impudent." Thus re' or Tfn bhůva and and yet and sufámi (adikarma) Bhattiji quotes Haradatta and Il&dhava, and gays that धूप forms participles in those senses, when option is allowed as, re' or what, yes or sufámnot meaning 'impudent', ३०६० । दूढः स्थूलवलयोः । ७।२।२० । Fuat marafire francezi T Eft ret met TUI I MET GRUP I T diterii efrat mature girang fratsoat 1 3060. The irregularly formed Past Participlo # means stout' and 'strong.' It is derived from o'l with mafix. In other senses, the forms are g'fire or gf . There are two roots one FL (I. 769) without nasal, and the other (I. 770) with the nasal. pe can be derived from any one of these by eliding , and the nasal, and changing a to , and not adding the augment * The difference between fast and art is that a man may be stout or without being strong (TTT) and vice kersa. The word in the sûtra is equal to बलवत् । The irregularity in the formation of consists in the absence of me and the elision of Land of t, if the root at be taken): and the change of « into # This irregular elision of ris for the sake of preventing the application of the rule genfes (VIII. 2. 1). The form could have been obtained in the regular way by the elision of , thus : *+-+(VIII. 2. 31)==+=+1-5+7 (VIII. 8. 13)=x* a But then when is elided, the rale gaufry will apply, and the forms for, atan, wafat could not be obtained. For is changed to by VI. 4. 161 only when it is laghu or light, but z lopa being considered widdha, the would be heavy as standing before a conjunct consonant. So also the form or GECUTSTA: could not be obtained : for the fu would not be changed to wa before the when the is not light or laghu (VI. 4.66). So also, fitnesafiant (the daughter of Paridşdha) could not be formed. For being considered guru or heavy, the affix sure would havo come in the feminine (IV. 1. 78). ३०६१ । ममी परिषदः । ७।२।२९ । 'पाधिपूतो' मिपावन प्रावत् । परिक्षिता-परिहिताया। 8081. Tho irregularly formed array means 'Lord'.

·501 FOL. II. PART. II. COAP II S 8064 ) THE XRIDAYTA AFFIX 9. . . This is formed, like gt, from ac or <a When not having the sense of Lord', we have परिवृहितग And परिवदितम् ॥ 'Tho 19 elided first as an anomaly By so doing we can get the forms like aftazafa, fegranat, arraztasun ३०६२ । कृच्छगहनयोः कपः।७।२।२२ । को निष्ठाया इएन स्यादेतयारर्यये । कष्ट दुःख तरकारणं च । स्यात्मपूष्मानीयम्'। फप्टो माह कष्ट यातम् । दुरवगामित्वः । कषितमन्यत् । 3062. The Participial aflix does not the the augment TC after the root #q, when the participle means 'dificult' and 'impenetrable'. The word kashta meanscorrow' and its cagas', See Amarı Kosa I 93 As we are delusion 19 sorrowe, czuge of sorrow, TIT difficult is the scripture'ze, difficult of penetration Garsias, se 810T Warste Caco Trifta "Difficult is lire sacrificie, it 19 difficult to completely master the ritual connected with the worship of fire; and difficult enough is Grammar, but th- Sâmans are worst of all'. egrim অনানি। impervious forests' PTI Tar: u When not having thesa senses, we have siau yra ३०६३ । घुपिरविशब्दने । ७ । २ । २३ । सुपिर्निष्ठायामनिट स्यात् । पुष्टा एणुः । 'प्रवियन्दने' फिम् । सुपित पावयम् । पदेन *प्रकटीकृताभिप्रायमित्यर्थः । 3063. The Participal alis does not take the augmont , after the root or in any sense other than that of 'proclumatl.' As ya 79, vet er i Why do we say 'not meaning to proclaim'? Obsorve yfon 47***** [Ie uttered definite speech' re, expresses his intention by words fazia=sfantay 'assertion, afirmation agreemrat'. foc sfarvã 15 Bhvadı (I 683), and gfar fugă 13 Churadl (X 187), both of these are referred to in the sůtra The prohibition of farzt in the sútra, indicates by jõâpaka that the for added to the root in the Churâdı class in the sense of fuvoza 18 anitya So the following construction becomes valid -as et: 7727 999: groetT: " expressed their opinions in words'. In fact the Churâdı fue vill intervene between the root nod tho affix, and so no use prohibiting i Thus 5+for+ = afwas (3057) ३०६४ । प्रदैः सनिविभ्यः । ७।२।२४ । एतत्पूर्यादमिष्टाया इएन स्यात् । समर्णः । न्यः । व्यः । अदिताय । 3061. Tho Participii aflis does not take the after tho root te when it is preceded by x, ftoriau As समा: 'plagued ' भ्यर्ण, व्य. Why of पर्द'। Observe समेधिता Why 'ov, fa or fa?? Obsurya feat a 14 he .

·106 TEE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI (VOL II PART II CEAP II $ 3065 Tin ३०६५ । अश्वाविदूर्य । ७ । २ । २५ । अभ्यर्णम् । मातिदूरमासन्न था । सभ्यर्दितमन्यत् । 3065 The Participial affix does not take the , after se preceded by w when the meaning is that of near' As wrof 991, auf @ why when meaning nerr ? See अर्दिवो वृपला भीवेन meaning पीडितः ॥ विदूर means 'remote ' that which as not remote is fans 'non remote the state of being non remote 19 sata i non remote ness.' The afix an is added irregularly, in spite of the prohibition contained in V 1 121, ३०६६ । णेरध्ययने वृत्तम् । ७।२।२६ । एयन्ताइपचे। मस्येडभायो णिसुरुषाधीयमानेऽये । यत्त बन्दरदाप्रैण सपादितम् । अधीतमिषि पाषत् । अन्य तु पर्तिता रस्जुः। 3066 The word is formed from the causative of the sense of studied through or read' There is absence of t and luk elision of the cansative sigo Thug TL OTT the prosody was finished by the papil' agar argaz Devadatta bas read or gone through Guna' (1 TT ** afire wafutat) # 7 Traderau When the senge is not that of *read wo have ata as Faz titam ryjah 'the coiled rope The root car 19 intransitive, and becomes Transtıre when employed in the Caugative The participle is formed from this Transtivo causative verb otherwise at could not have governed an object as shown above • The affix Fr 19 added with a Passive forco to go as we find the author himself using this form in foreste un gâtras IV 2 68 and V 1 79, on the analogy of Foraster tho word aan could also have been formed without this sûtra 309 I una mane!? 1291 mfan Teh Tit Porarena strefaits Titi goi ate atat fafaretin पप स्पा चीरहपियानन्या थाट-पितं दा। 3067 Optionally t is formed in the sense of coobcd' by the vocalisation of the semivowel of a before the nishtua allis# Tho word front 13 understood hero Tho roots to cook of the Bbrade clas, and to cook' of the AdAdı cizes, and I ' to cook of tho Dhrádı sab-class Ghatadı are meant here In all thos replacng T, whether cadantryc or not Thos ante, dapi Flera Thu is a vyavasthitt Fishishl, so that Ti 15 20 Fariably changed to whed referrug to 's nod ofe, but not anywhere clec Thus U7 TITTI ÍTAT ULTT: (\ 11.3 36 ani 11. 4 92) This word does not take doable caneatire, though the sco! inay requiro it As, R' Deradatta throagh Yajna datta bos caused to tik to b could. Tho T 13 latrapar 11 Leo 4.

·YOL II PART II Chap II & 3070 ] TEE KRIDANTA AFRIXES 107 - । the sense us that of Rojexive, or Causative, there the form पृत is to ba used As मृत शोर स्वयमेय श्रृत शीरं देवदन ॥ ३०६८ । वा दान्तशान्तपूर्णदसरपएच्छन्नशामाः । ७ । २ । २७ । ते सिधिनिष्टान्ता या नियास्यन्ते। परे। दमिता। शमितः । पूरित । पासिका स्पा- शितः । छादितः। धपित । 3068. The following irregularly formed Partıcıplos, from the causative roots, may optionally take ten, namely ftra, tra, पूर्ण, दस्त, स्पष्ट, इन्न, जप्त । These words are formed either from the causative base or from the primary roots दम् &c. The other forms are दभितः, शमिता, शरिता, दासिता, स्पापिता, वादित: and पितः। The words दान्त &c are formed by the lukelhsion of णि (Causative), and not taking the इट_ Augment. By VII. 2 49 1 optionally 1s सेट and therefore by VII 2 15, its Partreaple would havo been always sjare hence this sůtra makes an option. ३०६९ । रुप्यमत्यरसघुपास्वनाम् ।।२।। सभ्यो मिस्ठाया इड्या। पिता-रष्टा। प्रात-मितः । र्श:-त्वरितः। अस्यादित्य फल गन्दम् । समुष्टा-सधुपितः। भाषान्त:-सास्वनित । 3009 The Partioipial affix may optionally get Et, aug. • ment, after रुप, अम्, स्वर, मधुपू , and धास्वन् । As s or for a By II 2 48, the affixes after कम् are optionally O and therefore by VII 2 15, the Nishtha after this verb would have been always anit, henco this optional rule. अभ्यान्त: or स-पमित , वर्ष : or स्परित ॥ The स्वद् 19 exhibited in the Dhituphtha as मित्यरा (I 812) १९, with 22 indicatory long us, and bence by VII 2. 10 pould have been amit always, this rule makes it optionally anit So also, संपुष्टी पाद, or भयुषिती पादी, सपुष्ट or संघुपितं पाषयमा सधुष्टो or अपिता दभ्यो पुम preceeded by it will be optionally anıt, even when having any sense other than that of proclaimed', as this subsequent sutra sup rsedes VII : 23 80 far. So also सास्यास्त: or भास्वमिता देवदत्ता, पास्वारतम् or प्रास्वमितं ममा, Farty when preceded by , though denoting 'mind," 19 Optronally Adit, in spite of VII 2 18, that rule being superseded so far by this Bubsequent role ३०७० । हपेर्लोमसु । ७।२।२९ । हर्मिष्ठाया पापा स्यात् लेममु विषये । इष्ट-षि साम। "पिस्मितातिशयो. इप्टो इपिता भेला । पिस्थिता प्रतिहतो घेत्यर्थः । अन्यत्र 'एशनीमे उदिवारिष्टापा नेछ । हुए मुष्टी' इट। 8070. Phe Participal affix optionally takes reafte Then the ord erat or its synonym is in construction mith it. . - ·109 TOE SIDDIANTI KAUBUDI, (VOL II PART II CTIAP II $ 3071 As retra Braifa or fonfo Trafa, PETIT or fam: TI, TE OG fica Etraft: or **: Tno wor.. it means the hair of the body as well as of the bend ng zu the s ntonre are tye at tage The ceas of a in connection with star will be that of brıstlig up, horıpıllation, 11 hy do we say 10 connection rith are ? Observerष्टो (Bhuadi) देवदन the deceived Duvi Datta' and grea (Divadi) 25: 'tlio delighted Devadatto 1991 --T'he option 19 allowed also in the sense of astonish d and • haten back', 25 हप्टो 1 इपितो देवदत्त 'the astonished D इप्टाः पिता दन्ता the bent or destroyed teeth ve weiter to lie (1 741) is exhibited with an indicatory in the Dhâtupåtha, and would have been consequently always ant in the Nisbthî (VII 2 15), because it was optionally anit before ktvå (VII. 2 56) hence this rule za "to be delighted (IV 119) is also included here, this verb is te u he op*lop appertains to both these verb. २०२१ । नपचितश्च । ७।२।३७ । । पायोर्षि पासाग्य पा । पपषिरा-अपपायितः । 3071 Aud vanalins also a second form with the ugment Tu Th word gita is formed wath the prepos tion * added to the root L(I 921) to honor to flir to see and ate changed irregularly to foco b fore if The other form is Tithe ag szafaât or perfuar stay": the teacher is fiar d by him This cxample is given when the sense 13 that of fuar', when the word m ans then the participle must govern the genitive cas as required by III 2 188 ३०७२ । प्याय पी।६।१।। पोपा स्याभिष्ट यार । ध्यपश्यितविभाषेयम् । तेन साझे मित्पम् । पोर्न मुखम् । अन्यत्र 17-07Catilinaria *184911 I ART gdeqirquart farza wretarsaye यापीनमा 3072 it is optionally the substitute of the root vra 'to increuse' before the Nishthå aflises fan root start at belongs to thia Bhs Adı class The indicatory 77 shows that the affixes 7 and act are changed into 7 and (VIIT 2 45) Tus चीन पुगए पीनी दाट पीनमुरः ॥ The option here is also a regulated option (vyayıstato ribhishå) Tae substitution takes place when it refers to & limb (svuaga) or a portion of body As 1 STT: Bat when it 19 not sva ga word, then als or 1 FETI Jarla-Th» «ubstitution takes place intariall/ when the root us witho.16 uprsarga, and teuer when it is prec ded by an upasırga Thus HEITI, ARITMA TIR honor, - $ ·FOL. II rart II chir 1 $39ir TITEREDICTAITIEI 107 1 -- m Virliti- That on प्रा 114 Prim 10 यस IncoRE . जाmanthan ३०३ । नादी निष्टायाम् । ६.४।। माया . 3078 110 I ultunate of the natur of ritik shortened by Cure the Port mijlrolliray manly. TI 14 1 हानि »tor TI 11 ale> * nfkyf | one wifi iyp is guptth M orism in uter OURA (B) मियागार ३०२४ । यतिम्पतिमास्यामित्ति फिति । । ४।४ । पानिपातना पानादीनि । पापा। निxि गिरिधा। 3071 The clhortr is substitutel for thosial of n(DIT 10) मे (DLI)मा (118, Um 1010) and enhotore in flix inning mathu nnilung an indicators « • The inth lon.kanli skin (50* 7n122) दिनानिदिनगन् पषित 1 पतरा निमिवार पिन . nिmall with wril कानु। bir TI 003 PT Wavby fro a fw11"«? Obier ATTIRE with 17* ३२३ । शाज्योर पतरस्पाम् । १४।१। जिता मातानि । वरिपरिभाषायादापि परियार पादितमिर-पिता yिurमानिारयः 3073 Short r is optionalls substituted for the final of 1 (२) (Dir 37) anl ner) Dir_39) lefore an affis beginung with vnnd haring an indicators *, लिपिन-निपातम् विपिन रियानगर पानि शनिशEORAT पाषा - The या alraj takes th than it m ans a TOT A3 faat magania: d ligeat is tba proformace of his toys or who has fully compt nd his ron Tan rola of thus sê ra thus b-com 3 a syaras. thita vibbahan ३० दधातेहिं ।।४।। हाजिरिन् । मिषु । 3076 fras substituted for (unit, before in alix beginning with and haring an in licatore A पति नितिन so ako,f,पिरति ·110 THE SIDDHANTA KAUNODI (VOL II. PART II OMAP. II $ 3077. * ३२७७ । दो दरोः । ७।४।४६ । पुकत्य'दा' इत्यस्य 'दद्' स्यात्नादा किति । पर्यम् । दत्ता।'' किम दालः। तान्तो वायमादेश । न चैव विदचमिस्वादाषुपसर्गस्य 'दस्ति' (३०७६) इति दीपित्तिः। तकारादी तद्विधानात् । दान्तो पा । धाग्तो था।म पदान्तस्ये मिधानस्य धास्तत्वे पस्तयो-' (२२८०) इति धस्व शङ्करम् । सनिपातपरिभापायिरोधात् । 3077. For दा, when it is a Ghu (I. 1 20), thero substituted दद् before a कित् affix beginning with ॥ As दस , दत्तवान्, दत्ति Why of दा? Observe धीता, धीतवान् from धे, and the long t is by VI 4 66 Why when it is Ghut Observe दात af** from the to cut', and steta gæ from aq' to clense' Note -The substitute 1s दए ending in u, according to an Ishts Karaka -तान्ते दोषो दीर्घत्वं स्पाइ, दान्त दोपोनिष्ठा मत्वम् । धान्ते दोपो घस्य प्राप्तिस्, थान्तेऽदोष तस्मात् याम्तम् ॥ If the substitute best ending in then it would require the leng, thening taught in VI 3 1248 3079 (N.B The sutra दस्त should be interpreted as 'tha vower of the Preposition is lengthened beforo a substituto of I which ends in t' in order to mike this objection applicable Taat aatra however 29 capable of another interpretation) If the substituto be onding in thon the Nishtha a would be changed to by VIII 2 12 19 in fire +-r=furt # If the substitute bs Trending in , then by VII. 2. 40s 2280, the Nishthi. a would by changed to vu IHence the substatute ts दयू 16 however, the kütr. VI 3 124, 29 interpreted as "the rotol of a proposition 19 longthened before a substitute of Er which begins with ". then the substituto may bu q also without any harm Even if tha substituto be sorry, the apprchended Innd substitutions will not take place, on tho muxım yfirarTiN fafo for foren afgutakaSc. VII 1.13.5204 ३२७ । अषत पसांतः । ७।४।४७ ॥ तापमारपरस्पा'त्यस्य धोत्परता स्याणा हितात I सादत दिप पवादि। मुवतमनुपरहिमितियी। यादारावामातम्। 3078. uis substituted for the final roral of the ghu root a before a fan affir licginnin; vill 4 lira a Preposition cud. jug in a ronel precedes ato Truy*+1+1+1+0+0+*+*+* (t changed to t by S. . 121) Tno riump'ng unlop ths presort din aro , TT, H. ror the tangthrningsuT. 3. 121. Wbyd remy adlogina Timil ·POL. 11. PANT II. chap. II. $ 3070.) TIE KAIDINTA 157IXES 111 Observe fat # Why" after an pasrga only": 0 prothy TTL 49W7Why 'the st called Ghu'? Obecrre TITTY forma $7 Tho following aro exceptions to VII. 4. 47, 48, fary, 4, fi. wyl and frame Or tho words * &c, bcro arc not Uproarge. Sono I. 4 57. Kdrikdommer fra efferriferi मुदसमनु निदमितिच्यते। The word om*for qualifies pradatsz only. Th* word shows that regular forms way, foret, a, &c algo are valid Obj. The word oronia in the sutra 19 in the Ablativo chc, and by I. 1. 67, tho bubstitutes should replace only the first letter of 77, how do og at replace the whole ? Ans-Tho ward w is to be repeated in the sutra, ono s being in the Ablativo caso ond qualifying state, and the other wwi belog in tho ticnitivo caso showing tho stbinın to bo 57, A9 " after an Upasarga ending In a vowel, 19 substituted for the tonel of 7" Or the word nu may bo road into this satrn from VII 4 32. Or wountame consists of three 's, tho substitutes being , and being a subststute of more than ono letter, it roplaces tho uhole of ET (I 1. 55) Vart - After a Preposition ending 10 & TOPCI, * 13 substituted for the finals of (E1), when would bave been substitnted otherwise for ats final by VII. 4 40. As a fa apd 77, n. ३०७८ । दस्ति । ६।३ । १२४ । गतोपसर्गरूप दी। स्पादादेयो पस्वकारलदादागुत्तरपदे । 'सरि (१२१) रति पर नापारिभम् । भीतम् । पतंम् । 'गुमारपा-' (२४६२) तीरवम् । पद । पीतम् । गीतम् । पीवस् । 'जममम-' (२५०४) त्यास्यम् । भातम् । हावम् ' सादम् । • 3079. A Preposition ending in r or lengthers its final TOTcl, beforo the Forb 7, when the latter is changed to Thus 4, 7, 1, war. Sco VII, 4. 47 S. 3078 for the change of at to a & Bat Am, TT, where the prepositions do not end in rors Why do we say 'pp is changed to 'Observe fastene fratera Why do we say fat 'a substitute of E7, beginning with a '? Obscurto 4, here I 13 the substitute of 7(VII 4. 46 S. 3077.) Ob --Now the change of sto a tales place by S 121 (as Toast *** S. 8079=*+&+a), and S 121 ITA (TIII 1 55. S 121) being a Tripidi is asuddha for the purposes of VI. 3 121 (the present satra), and so the substitute of should be considered as and the present sutra cannot apply:

·119 TIE SIDDHAXTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. II. PART II CHAP II 5 3030. - Ans -The present satra will apply by considering a substitution of to be siddha or valid as was done in VI 1. 113 S 163 in the case of By VI. 4 66. S 2462 the set of ghu verbs is changed to Thus पेट् (98) forms its Past Participle stayi By the same rule 7 becomes it as गीतम , and पा becomes पीas पीतम् । By VI. 4 42 S 25€ 4, the roots w, a and 7+ become , m and r, asजातम् सातम् and खातम् ॥ ३०० । प्रदेा जन्धिय॑ति किति । २।४ । ३६. । स्वविति लुप्त सक्षमीकम् । वदो जन्धिः स्यारल्यपि तादी किति च । इकार पच्चारणार्थः । घस्यम् । 'तरोपरि-' (०१) अग्ध । 'सादिकशित कर्तरिष' (३०५३) । प्रकृता पर शा। प्रकृतः कटस्तेन । निष्ठायामपयद' (२०१४) इति दीधी। वियो दीर्घात' (३०१५) प्रति नत्यम् । Tut T: 1 3080. The word of is the substitute of to eat,' when the aflix tak (VII 1. 37) or an årdhadhâtuka fatafix beginning, with a follows AFUTA 'Having eaten.' (+*+Fag=at we +7). So also one eaten' (+ar+at+vs+ (elided by $ 71 ) The 10 of 19 merely for the sake of articulation and is not an apubandha otherwise there would have been the insertion of the nasal (9) So also the x in af loco, is smerely for the sake of articulation But wtf=**** 'food' is an irregularity Nole --The employment of er in this sůtra indicates the existency of this Paribhasha 'A babıranga substitution of up superacdes cria antranga rules' Because in case this maxim did not exist, the sub stitution of any for web forc toe which is trught in this satra, would follow alrendy from the word fifa (before that which 29 distinguished by on adicatory =) in this rule, 1 e, or would (by maxim'that which is babıranga is regarded as not having taken effect, or as not existing when that which 'is antaranya has taken effoot') first be substituted for before and afterwards for Why do we say before aflizes beginning with r'? Obuerve R Pls caten Why do we say before alizes having an sodicatory '? Obgarra सतव्यम् Here we repeat III. 4 71 $ 3053, ३० । क। मादिफर्मणि क्त कर्तरिच । ३।४।७१ । 3050 A Tho aflix 'hta' also denotes tbc agent, when it cxpresses a begiuning of an action.

·TOL. IL PIRT II ou II 3093) TIC KRIDANTAITIKLY 113 . म This Ri rt here than nt Instil माता की देवर hr throlycsd no 1 प्रता प्रभुत पोरन देपोन hre more nction " dnst 1 5m larly my चोरल देवता (anant), प्रभु पारको करने (oby c), मधुर देवाने (act) Simularly from kahı, is derive i TITII with th forcy of Azkarmu. The short Tifingthen l by VI 4 GO S 3014 ani the allik 11 Cangri tor by VIII 2 169 3015 Bit this nothing of the shoir of for ts optional under the follo mins sutra ३००१ । वामोशदेन्यो ।६।४।६१। चिपोमिटायां दीपा पा स्यादरामागे देरे च । सीमापुभव । पितापुतीचा तपशी। चिताचा 3081 Thc long is optionally substituted, for thor of for before tic Past Participle ** not having tl o sense of thic Tuturo l'assic Participle 4L uhrn tho word means 'imprecation' or in miserablc plızlıt' Th 19 firingir or loy?fu Bo tho short lived पिता, पितोप शादी, पीयोग्य तपस्वी'tlus harm : sms rably Ian Wlen not meaning the cursing or mls rible condition te have on for n only as पीपसमाः। ३०२ : निनदीभ्या स्नाते फोगले । ८ । ३.९ । पापा नाता छप पा स्मात्सीयले गये। निधाता पास्त्रेषु । नक्षा लातीति बनाया। सुषि- (२८१६) रतिया 3082 Thic is substituted for the of efter for nad 1 When tlio ord so formed denotes dexterous Thus fra! Da erp it in the scrip ur y? निजाती रापुरतंना मार्ग स्पतीति नदी 'dexterous n sriming in th This last word 13 formed by the saddd to ti prc ded by th uprpada at und r sđtra III 2452910 Thy do say when meaning d stroj 1 Ob3 rrc fraTETTT (नदा माता) ३०-३ । मूत्र प्रतिपातम् ।।३।। मते नाते पत्यम् । मतिर पात मत्रन् । गुमित्यर्थ । भापत्र प्रतिम्नातन । 3003 The Ford simulat is irregularly formed when meaning 1 sutri . river Thus प्रविष्याता मा १ पुरुन् pure Whait has nothi mazing me bare प्रविरमाद= bathed 15.

·114 THE SIDDHANTA KADJUDI [ror II PART II CHATU3084 -- . * -- ३०८४ । कपिष्ठली गोत्र। 1८1३।९। कपिलो माम पस्य कापितिः पुना। 'गाने किम् । कपीना स्थल कपिस्थतन् । 3084 The word कापिटल 1s irregularly formed denoting the founder of a gotra of that name. Tbus tho son of Kapıshthala will be mfagfer: # The word 'gotra 'here does not mean tho grammatical "gotra," but the popular term gotra' denoting' clang,' as described in the list of privaras Why do we say "when denoting the founder of a gotra' 7 Obstrve miTEURTE 'the land of the monkeys' ३०५ । विकुशमिपरिभ्यः स्पलम् ।।३। ६ । एभ्या स्थलस्य सस्य पा स्यात् । विष्टलम् । पुलम् । पमिष्वशन् । परिसर । 3085. The ' is substituted for the e in स्थल after पि, पु, पमि and ofte Thus विष्टला, कुष्ठलम, अभिष्टलम् and परिष्टलम् n The word वि, कु and परि are compounded under 11 2. 18, the word wat forms a genitive by VI 3 63 In the aphorism the word fe is shown with a short indicating thereby that when the rs not shortened, the cerebral change does not arke place, शमीस्पता। ३०८६ । गत्यर्धाकर्मकश्लिपशीस्थातवसजनरुहजीर्यतिभ्यश्च । । । ४। ७२। एभ्यः कतरिका स्याद्वापक गोरष । गा गतः । गहा माप्तः। लाना । लक्ष्मी पालिष्टो इति। शेषमपियित । कुरठमधिष्ठितः । शियमुपासितः । रिदिनमुपोषिता । राममनुभात । गहमारा विश्यमानी पधे प्राप्ता गहा तनेत्यादि। 3086 The affix 'hta' is employed in denoting the agent 19 well as the act and the object, after reibs implying motion, after intransitive roots, and after the verbs 'slish' (to emwuce), s. (to lie down), 'stha' (to start), 'le' (te sut), qos' (to arell), 'Jan' (to produce), 'ruli' (to mount) and gri' (togrow old) The phrase 'the act and object has been added into the edtra by virtue of the word as gone to the Ganges , Faas 'reached the Ganges, FATTI T'he is , fatigued', evitaficcret eft: 'Earı embraced Labshmi, *Tahuufants Sad on the serpent' 9 furgat 'resided in the Varkantha', शिममुपाशितः Served Siva दरिदिनमुपापिता - fasted on the 'day of Hari', राममनुशात'followed Rama' गहमारता rode Garudhs'. विश्यमनुजीसा 'desh troyed the universe. In addition to the examples given in the test above, iye give the following more from the Kåsika, .

·TOL II. PART II. CAP. II. $ 3087.) TRE KRIDAYTA AFFIXES. 115 Thig at Tatay Der'adatts 19 gone to the village' (ngent), fata oraz nas 'the villnge wag gonc to by Daradats (objac:), ' Deradatta pent' (nct). The pret participle forms from Intransitio verby, dcnote the ngent and the act only, or in other words, thing aro used imprisonally and in the Actio voice, but never in the l'assisc roico or denoting the object. Thus AT FITT, you vero fearicd' (ngrnt), #927 (object), wisat orang 'you sat' (agent), mira 1 (objrct), reimatet tai mare the guru yras embraced by you' (objact), fet *701 'you embraced (act); tofuar To Tere you lay near tha garu' (ngent), vuitat T want (object), erat portt (act); refent IT (ngent), exfeud #777 (object), sarega TATY (nct), serfirat The TTT (agent), sufent TI (nbject), 5977 arst opp (act), Ery Ford TTTTT (agent), wyfant *74747 (act), wyrat punt atafaatua ngent), TATUT watne Rrafant (objrct) wat proast (act), ST E 37 (agcot), et pot water (object), wat ont (act), watararat: (agent), प्रमुजीर्ण एपली देवदत्ते (object), घमीणं देवदत्तन (acty. The rerby लिए &c, becomo traositivo with certain prepositions or upisarga, hcoco they have bocn montioned hero Otherwise there w29 no neanggity of mentioning them scparately , ag they, bºog intransitive verbs, when withoat prepositions would be included in the word dharmaka of the sutra ३०.७ । तोधिकरणे च धौव्यगतिप्रत्यवसानार्थेभ्यः।३।४।७३ । पभ्योऽधिकरता स्यात् । नामपामाप्तम् । प्रोग्य स्र्यम् । अफुरदस्यासिमिदमिदं यात रमापतेः। भुक्तमेतदनन्तस्यैत्यूनुगोप्यो दिहवा पप सामेएफकत्यारकर्तरि भाये च । शामितो मुकुन्दा। शासितं तेन । गस्पा करि शिरमापतिरिद वातः। तैमेद पातम् । भुने कर्मणि । घनानने हर। पर 'धुरा **FUTI' fa iyafet est fara adiest TATT PORTER I 3087. The aflix ta' which is ordained after roots denoting fiscdness (to cling to a place), motion and taking, gires the sense of location as well. The verbs denoting sits or persisting in a place aro Intraositiva verbs The gratya asana means eating' also, the force of in the sacra 13 that the atix Ita cxpresses other relations also. Thus after verbs denoting firedness' or dhraubyártha at denotes the agent, the act and the location, after serbs denoting' taking or eating', it has the sense of object, art and location. Tous ST ETT. 'Devadatta sat', wiar ata sitting by him (act), kartong 'th.s was thuir seat' (lcestion), arat 57** 'Derada:ta went to the villame' (actire), a 27507 ma. (passive), 7 Baht (abstract), Tini wak'this is their place of going' ·116 THE LIDDI VTA KAU NUDI [voL II PART II CHAT II 53068 (ocath n), मुल मोदनो वदन (passive) Yक शोदर्म देवदसा (active), देवदन धत्तम् (abstract), दवा भुक्तम् (location) फथ भुक्ता प्रापणा । पीता गाया। The था 1. ता and पीता has the force of मनु (IV 285) भुमेपास्ति or পারি। Thus in the following verse ar illustrated the various uses of पास &c मुपयामितमिद मिदं यात रमापतेः। भुसभेतदम तस्पेत्य गोप्यो दिदृश्य । "llus is the sent (Asitam) of Mukunda' this is the path (3&tam) trodden by the Lord of Rama, this is the food (bhuktam) of Ananta, -thus epoho the Goj is desirous of sceing The Te being Intransitive the afix bas the force of the agent and condition As शास्तिो मुकुद: AMukunda sat sfer To It was sat upon by him' . After roots denoting 'to go', the force of the offix is 'agent' and 'object ' As रमापशिरिद यात and लेनेद भुकम् । After crbs of 'cating at denotes the object As अनम्मेदं भुक्तम् । How do you explain the active use in ym 1*: ? Il 19 not Past Participle, bu formed by the affie ve added south th force of Matup to the noun bhukta as भुमरिस एपास्-भुक्तः। The Past larticiple has also the force of the Present by the following satra, which is read in the sub section goverud by वर्तमाने of III 2 123 82151 ३०८८ । जीत क्त । ३।२।१८७ । प्रिपिदा । विपण। भिडभी। इदः। 3088 The perbal roots, muurhed with an indicatory fs lalo the aſix fi in dcnoting the present time The Nashtra affix th, as a general rule is a parincipal affix and denotes past time, and is so or lained by III 2 102 The pres nt stra thus makes an exception in case of those verbs which are marked with an indicatory fs in the Dhdlupatlır 89 faire to be affectionately inclined मिनः (मिद+=मिद्+त-भिन्++ (VIII 2 42) being aff c So (भिलिदा-हिपण 'sounding inarticulately , निपा -भ्रष्ट: bold (निइन्धीइ.)। The anutritta of वर्तमामे 'in the senso of present, 13 read into this sutia from III 123 S 2 2151 ३०२८ । गतियुद्धिपूजार्थेभ्यश्च । ३।२।१८ । मतिरिका बुद्ध पृषणुपादानात् । राता मत TET रिष्यमा हत्यर्थः। बुद्ध। विदिवा पूजितः। प्रषिता । चकारोऽमुक्तटभुपया। शीशिता रविता सात पाटो छुट इत्यादि। tionately ipclined ·YOL. II. PANT II. chir. II. S 3092). TIE KNIDINTI arrixT$. 117 30$0. And after roots cnoting inclination, unborstanding, or respect, the affix *ię cniploscd sith llin force of the present The word of maang' wish' or 'draire' ne it is rend along with builhi and so cannot m4 An buddhi. gf pitans 'knowledge"; ani gu m'ans * worship', 'honor' or 'resp ct. As the FI --TE,-Ti',~$179 afwa, &c.'thching wishes, desires, thinks, knows, honoro, respects dic'. Tho force of the word is to include other kinds of serbe, not irrimed in thc aborratra. Thus the following participles hare their senere confined not to the ringt timo oply: 1ilfeas' practised,, trono protected'; 1871. forbcaring'walce narcd', pleaeed, Elinngry'; fam Angry'; frentams uttered', TER 'happy', pet satisfied'; *1946 favourite'; *901 'restrainc',; van: 'sendy't 'ivil, miery' (with no futuro signification), and won'ummortal. So nlao -- I* 'alrering'; mfatte'lying clown', wiforme 'caten', fort' smeared', i 'satiofied'; all these have a presunt sigoification. ३०० । नपुंसके भावे फ्तः । ३ । ३ । ११४ । कोपरषिमिष्टे भावे काससानाम्येला स्यात् । रिपतन हितम। 3000. Thc aflix .hta' is added to the root, licn action is expressed, the mord being in the neuter gender, There are ncuter abatract noun - thu, tfnrylaugh'; wheat 'speech', F a sleeping'. Su aleo , eft &c. ३०८१ । सुयगोई यनिए । ३।२।१०४ । vitaehto kufreTATER I Trat i greint ITVAT I start 3091. The allia raite conics after the rerls 'to press out or cttract juice' and as 'to sacrifice', with a past signification. As 5+ Tafa+1(VI. 1 71)= Ist. sing. 9747'ho has Prissed out or extracted juice'; dual miti Trat, 1st. sing. That 'who his sacrified' d. i The Tus added by VI. 1. 71. See Rig. Ved. I. 3 1. ३०२ । जीर्यतेरतन् । ३ । २ । १४ । भत त्यानरम् । एवो । जनतः । वासापापेन निष्टापित्री श्रीवाद । 3092, The affis comes after the verb 'to grow old' with the sense of past time. .

·118 TIE SIDDI MT& KAUMUDI (FOL NI PIRT II onap II 9 3093. As +15=15+32 (VII 3 44)=547 Ist sing so, di reat, pl. What'grown'old' (VII 1 701 By the rule TT* (III. 1 94), the Nishtha affixes also come aftor this verb As sites and wearistofer ** (VII 1 100 and I 1 foreta (VIII 2. 42)=sta (VIII 2.77 and VIII 4 I)' grosyn old' ३०६३ । इन्दति लिट् । ३।२ । १०५ । 8093. In the Chhindas, tho affix faz comes after Terb watli a past signification As TT मूर्यभयतो ददर्य 'I saw the sun from both sides', सई दावापृथियो van Istretched the heaven and the earth' Here the words agd wanna have the force of nishtha See Ya; Ved VIII 9. Why this separate sútra, when by aphorism III 4. 61, in the Chhandas the lun, luni, and lit come in all tenses? That rule 19 made with regard to two or more verbs when in syntactical relation (warm) with each other(III 4 1). The present rulo is general, and without any such limitations ३०१४ । लिटः कानज्या ।३।२ । १०३ । 3092 In the Chhaudas tho alix fre is optionally replaced by the affir कानम् । AS अनि विषयान "he consecrated the fire', सोम सुपुवाण: 'ho pressed the soma juice' This blog an optional nflix, soigetimes is not employed, as in the examples in the last aphorism Way has the word lil been repated in the satra, when its anurfitto could have been drawn from tho last sûtra ? The substituto Thy replaces not only the ep cial faç of sutra III 2. 105, but the general fore, which comes after the roots in forming the perfect tengs , so that tho affix TTT forms verbal adjective as well as the perfect tenso The afbx comes after thos; verbs only which take Atmanepada termi. patrons See I 4 100 Ah (Rig Ved I 3 ) ३०५ । कमुश्च ।३।२।१०। राभूतमामा पे बादति लिन् । तस्य विभीषनानो समुभाषिताविति निमुनिमतम् । *74** *si afumu TITTATZ' of gatrafixugura' रत्यादि। 3093 In the Chhindas tho Alis ry is optionals tho substitute of flere The force of fore hero it to drnote the post in general. According to the opinion of the Thrco Sages (Pånini, K&tydjans and l'atanjali) the ·vor. In rART II cuir If 3097.3 TIIZ KRIDAYTA ATTIXES 110 affixco Kaanch and Krasu which come with the force of fac arc l'arlikn alco and not found in the classical fit muturo But thr po* t. 11* dirersly As हरिया रोपवाटे। गानि पारि पितापरते । As डिम् Ist tang धिया 'enten (Xay VIII 19), पिषम् 1st EIDg. पपियान 'drun Sometimes it does not come, as in thr cxample and rodim III % 103, पर सूर्य नभयतो पद. The division of this satra from the last, in which it could well harc been included, is for the sake of tho gabsequent sátras, into which tha apuvrict of wat only run3 ३०८६ । वस्येकाजाद्वसाम् । ७।२।६७ ॥ कृतद्विर्य रमानामेकाचामादरताना पक्षे वयोरिट् मायेगा । पहा । शारिवान् । प्रात् दिवान् । 'रा' किम् । भूपान् । 3006. The Participal affix पम् (म्) gets tho augment re, only tlich vien tlic reduplicated root before it consists of ono syllablo, or when it comes after a root ending in long #1, and atter पप Thas monosyllable मारिवान् । So alo धादिया, प्रायिवान, परिवार OFERTED In the first two of these, the reduplıcato stems we and TTL *become of ono syllablo by the coalescence of 77 and 7. In de ani the the redaplicata 19 clıded and the towe changed to e aod thus the reduplicate has becom of one syllable Ofrosts ending in जा we haro इदिवान पपिषाम् वरिपया of पम्-अधिवान् । This at would have thken thu augment by the general rule of increment, the present sätra makog a niyami, so that th- roots which are not monosyllabre in the reduplicath form ate anst as पिमिद्वार चिम्लिदार भूवान, पिषिताम् । ३०८७ । भापायां सदवस वः।३।२।१०। सदादिभ्यो भूतसामाग्थे भाषाया लिपा स्यात वस्र पनि बा । 'निसरीमान- वापी अपूपस्तामभवासमस्य। गुदवार । 3097. In the classical Sanskrit, the aflix en optionally replaces fare after the yerbs en and with a past siguification. This being a substitate only, the original afix fere also comes after these verbs As, उपदिशान कोरमा पारिरिक ' Kantsa serred PAunt alternative, the proper affixes of the nas: tense will be employed. As हात he srrid', उपासीदत and उपमभाइ Su also safrTE ET feit In th: alternatire we have emrater उपापोत and पराध, . - Inthr ·120 TOG SIDDHANTA KAUHUDI (VOL II PANT II. chap II $ 3098. 1 So also उपशुश्रवार कोरठः पाणिनिम् In the alternativa we havo सपामोपित उपायणोत् and उपधYष So also निषेदुपीन and मध्यपुष: from vr and यस ॥ The aflii va is employed with the force of 5 and we nlgo ३०९८ । उपेयियाननाश्वाननूचानश्च । ३ । २ । १०९ । पते निपात्यन्ते । सपदियो भाषायामपि भूत माने लिहया तस्प मिस्यं कमः। इट् । स्पेविधान , उपेपुषा स्वामपि भर्तिमग्याम्'। उपयूपी । उपत्यविधषितम् । ईपिवान् । ममीयिषान् । म पूर्वादनात पयमुरिभावट । 'वनयधृतेरमाणपः, इति भारयि। भनुपूर्वावधः कर्तरि कानम् । रस्यामुवधर्म कृतवाननु चान। 3096. The forms gafant, 44, u are irregularly formed. Thcge forms are thus evolved - To the verb 'to go with the preposition उप, tho affix up 19 added as t+*8. The root is reduplıcated as 34+*+*+ Hoy The reduplicate is here long # by VII 4 69 This long does not coalesce with the short by the rules of sandhi, for then the rule by which this was introduced would have no scope. Now we add the augment contrary and in opposition to the rule VII 2 67, and this is the irregularity As 3+*+7+12+147 Then the tout 19 replaced by uby satra VI 4 SI As su++++-उपेयिषस् ,, 1st. sing उपेपियान The augment rt is however dropped in those cases (#) where ne is changed into a , because the insertion of ac was itself an cxceptional crse of limited scope – for while the generalıruleg VII 2 75 &c. ordained at the special rule of VII 2 67 probibited it, and it wa, by prohibition of this prohibition that he was employed before ro Therefore in the accusative plural we have siga: , instrumental sing sagot &c This irregular participle is not limited to the upaqarga 5«, we find such irregular forms with other upasargas and without them also ; thus 'एमीयिवान्, and ईयिवान् as well. By tha apuvrette of the word streerd in this aphanista, We 'uva se le in the alternative As in Aorist उपाणार, Imperfect उपेत् Perfect पेयाय । The word 1475 is thus formed To the verb ye 'to enjoy' wc add the negative particle wr , apply the affis up and do not insert tho augment , so, we have 21+31+ TS, 1st siog WATATU In the alternative we have Aorist TOT Imperfect #TETIT and Perfect The word AVTA: 19 this derived - The aflix ATAU is added in exprageing the agent to the verb * proceded by w Io the alternative wo have Aorist vanad, Imperfect swagato Perfect अभूधाच.

·yoL II PART II Chap II. $ 3101.) TIF KPIDAYTA APFIX 121 प . ३० । विभापा गगहनधिदायिशाम् ।।२।६। भ्यो धरिया वार-गाया हरियान्-जम्मान । विपिदिया-पिदि था । यिपिगिया-पिविरगन् । यिगिता मारमर्यादिग्दतिया । येते मिथिवान् । 'जय गिति' (२२८१) नीति!"गे", दगियान-दहरयान । 3000 The Illus पम् (प) optionally tiker r after पम् न, पिद 11d बिग A गम्-जरिमयात् or जगापान (म changed to Iv III 2 G), गणित or पयाम् (VII 2 5 and E5) पिर-विविदियान or पियिवान, विग-यििगपान or fafareta The root fet to 202airo' bch ngs to th T.1111 c114, 1915 19 rond horu with the Tilsk fet * Thi root foto I no v' (11. 53 IV (2) Prm inliruall, fafara bccau90 16 19 Atmoepili and cannot toker angment belore, पम् affix (S 2081) Vart --Tho root rt shoull also be cnumirate ! As TROIX an 1 हरया ३१०० । राटः शतशागचावप्रथमासमानाधिकरगे।३।२ । १२४ । प्रथमातेन पागानाधिशासीत्पः । यथादि । पचत न पश्य । 3100 Tle affines Tr and. पाम are substitutes of Ne, when agreeing withi want does not end with the first casc affic A५ पपमान देयए परय 'b hold D radatte who is cooking', पचता पता or परमाने कृतम् lony by one r 10 rs cooking' पन मानवप+ + माग (III 113 III 1 GS)-प++ + AIR (TIL 2 82)-परमान | So alo पा+ग+य-प+a+प 19 पचतं न पश्य । Why do we say when agrering with what do not end with first casu nix! ObsIV 97TH: TAP Devulatta rooly the aflix जान of धाम &c tales thr augument n by the following ३१०२ । साने गुरु ।।२।२। महत्यात मुगागमः स्वादाने परे। पचमाम पे पापा सहित्पवर्वमाने पुरसहप्रहराभित्र विधानार्थगनयमामामाधिकररये.पि धषित । सम्मान माइपाकोग इति पारपर। 'मा पीरमा पराभव पदापि जीपति । मारि शु (२३१९) रति माहे । एकत सापर ट्। 3101. Before the Part cipal en ling शान a rerbal stem endin in sliort , jets the augment *t* A९ पवनार पेय पश्य EP Chutra who is cookirg' S ner th:t om FIZ_ in it hws hasub en supplt in III ? 1215.3100 froy th 195t Is'i a inyasa ap 10*10, 111 2 123 S !! I do! tvi is for the sake of larger afplicatica of th 3 tals, that is to say, the ruls applies som med tren wb ntb worl u in concord w 5 2 059 nits 16 . 2018 समाना। .

·722 TEE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI (VOL II PART II CHAP. II S 3109 caso As सन् ग्रामस: 'who is a Brahmans'शस्ति ब्राह्मणाः, so also विदाते माझणः and बिदामानो'माण, पुहूत् and जुहोति , and अघियामः and अधीते । Vart.-These affixes are employed after a verb, when the particle FTE IS 18 composition, and censure or curse 13 implied As या पचन and PTT ya: 'may he not cook', Tatari : TURIGTrrutsforetafa 'cured be be (lit may he uot lire) who though smitten by the prin of the contempt of others, still li res' Some commentators read the annyritti of the word 'option from sútra III 2 121 into this That option, However, is a limited option (vyavasthita vibharhd) and not of universal application Whenever a particular form is found as differing from the general form, there it should be understood that the option has been allowed, and not everywhere By III. 3. 175 S 2219 (IST) the aorist replaces all tenso affixus when 7 19 used This vartıka mahes an exception to that and the Piccent is used ३१०२ । सबोधने घ । ३ । २ । १२६ । हे पपन् । पचमान । 3102 The allises me and my are the substitutes of even when agreeing with what ends with a first case afix, provided that it is in the vocative case This aphorism declares when these participles may be employed even in the first case, as an Ora' Othou who art cooking' ३९०३ । लक्षणहे त्यो क्रियायाः । ३ । २ । १३६ ।। fixerat vitae tot ñ imparatāraiz: Turn fat i tranhystat utan gravida Fit Tinyurà i SET 7TH TI 4797: (3434) sitgeruierest 3103 The affires me and Tay are the substitutes of a and come after q Terb, in expressing an attendent cuicumstanco or characteristic, and the cause of an action The word ruumeans that by which a thing is recognised or known ze, an attributa, meins both the producrt or cause as well as the product and the fruit Both tbc33 yrits oro attribut s of the word feet or lakoluna 3 347773 778 27T: 'the layanas trke their meals lying down' fromasyaraRT9571 1 Of her ~-18 tft 14 guzt' by (rcason cf) secmg lları he gets lilorition, wtent we fot for the palo of study lc dwells here. uatia Ledwells ther in order to acquire i (alth.' Why do sc gry wlicndcroting a characteritic or a caus) ? Olscryo <sí'he cooks', zithe roads'. . € ·VOL II PART II OHAP II $ 3103 ] THE KRIDANTA AFFIXES 123 . Why do we way of tho action ? Not so when the participle is tho charyctoristie or caus of a sibstines or a quality As I tad at. TT *th + wlich 13 sh'u 19 the Asgat', 7619 wybut ver flomas 19 light, fautefa agn: that Iuch einkz do yn is teavy Vart - This partc ple al o d fucs th agent of 22 Aulon za stara WITH Tat: he is Dev.datta who sats studying Vart -- This participle is also used to state a general truth as TTT घर्धते दुर्वा the Durva grass grows in a recumb nt position , मामीम वधी मिठ a lotus stalk grows in an upright pos tion The compound Prot: of the sđtra contradicts the rule by which a word of fower syllables stands, first (II ? 14) This shows that the rule II 2 14 is not universal ३१०३ । क । कृत्यच ।८।४ । २० । प्रचीयमापासेमा 3103 A The dental # of 2 Krit flis is changed to , when an alterant preposition precedes at Tous with # we have otra 19; Sec S 2835 ३१०४ । ईदास.। ७।२।३। सातः परस्यानस्येत्स्यात् । श्रादेः परस्य (१४) यासीनः । 3104 The long # is substitutel for the set of sate after waren Thus stitit tai See I 1 54 S 44 by which the first letter of the second term after wist which is exhibited in th Ablative is taken here) The sta which 19 16 the 7th caso in the last apholism should be taken in the 6th case in this ३१०५ । विदे शतुर्वसु । ७।१।३६ । घेरो परस्य शतुर्यमुरादेश पा स्यात् । विदन् । विद्वान । विदुषी । 3105 The me is substituted for the Present Participle affir 15 atter the root rag'to knot' Thus far & fare forgiat fagre u The words forıncd with affixes baring an indicatory (uita) add a T in their strong cases (VII 1 70) and form their feminine with unaccented As farat The 12 is an athix having an indicatory therefore its substitute would also be considered as having an indicatory n the o of ug therefore is not abaolutely necess any for the purposes of gfta operations 49 19 80 written in order thutin the strz ost *HOTET (VI 4 131) both uy and should be included Mor can we object that in the above m ntioned sätra t with one indict tory letter being taken cannot include 30 affix ! Le haviug two ind! catory letters -on the maxim TYTT 92-962--for if that were so there was no necessity of 3 in a Some read the anusritti of the word optionally into this and we have face fazrat frymas formed with a (sce Y $ 38) ·194 THE SIDDHAYTI KALJUDI (TOL II. PART II CHIP II 93106 ३१०६ । ती सत् । ३।२ । १२७ । सी भयानची सत्सवी स्तः। 3106. These tno ug and map are called TTT These participial affixes got collectirely this name, and 19 such they are not limited by the conditions ennmersted abort, so that they replaco rot only the fiscs of the present tense but sometime if tho Inture 4140 (III 3 14 ) as well as other tengas Taus ग्रामपय कुर्यन् करिष्यन् कुर्यात यारियमाण । The word to occurs in sûlri III. 3 14 s 3107 See below. ३९०० । लुटः तद्वा ।३।३ । १४ । व्यवस्थितयिभापेयम् । तेनामयमाामानाधिकरपये प्रत्यये।तरपदयोः सपाधो लसपास्पोन मित्यम् । परिप्य त फरिप्यमारा पश्य । करिष्यतोऽपत्य फारिप्यता। फरिष्यक्तिः। फरि ध्यत् । धर्मयिष्यग्यसति । मधमाधमानाधिकरणेऽपि कचित् । करिवीति परिया। 3107. The affixes called 'Sati csatri' and 'sinncli' are optionally the substitutes of 'Lrit' This option is 1 regulated option, that is to any, thm affiros way and TP replace it under the conditions in which they ruplan thug ly III 194, s 3100 thnge aflsts will replaca te sh neçrcuing with what does not end wivh the fint civo athx In the cal9 TU will unrartally replaco TE In other c1s 3 it will optionally replace In t)«cas thug wall form what is known 19 future participle A oferova baga 177 balold D.yadintts about to do', #11 977 'hold D sadat a 1 about to be dono FATTAT or Poitrante Badea simp'ı fituriir, at de votre intention or purpnw, as wäferansit via he vin lis intending in carn lus in Ithood, wfitontti THT MIT 'entend ng us for a fant 19 sath arrows To descendant of afire is afroad Sonhomtam Mim1 11h o homoser, it agters with the nominatire che it 19 offrorilly As mit freutet, freefror afreax GoTTI'Dunduita wil 118 ap's } 1 form rimer is tha. crolved ********72(III. I. I) 4 7+ +84 toy casione non ring after los horno ili part 14 F11T) ***, t ctnicallr kna* Mar 17** alo run rob ti * has Inkers th p*tronal eding Fill in to 376-ige gat. 07T! SIRIPI PTV STY*711 1 ***** 1 he alley are comes after the reris I. irits 1!.4.to sicratico Terjun1111 free Bir), n' enfor. 1 ·TOL II Pirt II Tir Il $3112] TIF KIDATTI AFFITTY 123 - d stroy his foc spori arealouaita Tauffany Wat 13197 pacie? श्य दौत्येषु परिचाम् । 357771 1 674 FTUTTI I TX TO 3100 'l lo ft 19 comes after i serb, in cxpressing *117bit, 'standa of ac' and 'ability Tho wori atatea te ins 'habit or disposition', qui means the condition of body such as 'infancy, youth &v, Tie in any cajacity to don thing As HIT 777: labituated to enjoy , AT TINI caring an Dimour (of the 20 at vluchtipon may b worn) , * fra Tai able to So also, फतीद मुरदयमाना, भूपयमान, कर, पर्यस्यमाm, fract 467777 un 1 EATI! ३११० । एडधार्यो. शत्रकृच्छ्रिणि । ३ । २ । १३० । भा-या यत स्यादष्ििण कारि। जमीन् । पारयन् । सम्मिणि किम् । कृष्शापीते । भारत। 3110 The flis super comes after the verbe Te 'to so' and wife to hold' in denoting that tlic agent does the action tithout troublo I hu woril 275 meing thnt wh ch 19 accomplı heut by the agent with casc and fuclity Ay sutaz TIME ch tuil rading of the lirinn • 1867 yang casily muswering th by inishid In root utfr 13 Cho tue of y and inrans la ru W dny do so say wh a fucility is in catal? Otherwis Jo TUIs with diff culty W 1177** he rem-mb rs with dificulty २१११ । इविधोमिने । ३ । ३ । १३१ । থিলঃ। 3111 The finza conies after the verb fa nilien tlic agent indicated me ius in enemy lliy vord UTREC ans inomy As for 'enemy , frat two द्विषता enenics Why do we say when denoting an enemy Obscrve folyaf after the safe hates her husband. ३१९२ । मुझो यासयोगे । ३ । २.९३२ । ***** W TTATTI TATIT 311) The fis te coincs after the terly juice' y licn the sense is that of association within clerifice The wor I UTRDIT 15 an instrum ntal compoun l mining Assuciation or Counction (077) path sacrifice 10 ny str. en molts 2 गु 'to press ont A$*+3+ xri (Ill. I 16, III 4 113) ·126 Tit SIDDHAYTA KACHUDI (VOL II PIRT II CHAP II S 3113 2 U (1 9 4) (VI 1 77) 1st sing tatt 1st pl you the Sacrificer as in vain om'all are int csted in or partal 3 of or sboru in the sacrifica सर्यमनमाहाः॥ The word wart indicates that the principal sacrificer te tha #9719 meant and not (very person who is assoolated in the p rformanc of ? Bacrifico in a subordinate capacity, such as I the sacritica: priese ३१९३ । मह प्रशंसायाम् । ३ । २ । १३३ । YETI 0 3113 The affir up comes after the verb in expressing piaise As a fine utfra ang 'thou art worthy of this knowledgo here fone 21Fatq'chou art worthy of honor in this place ३११४ । मा क्वेस्तच्छीलतद्धर्मतत्साधुवारिपु । ३ । २ १३४ । forskfiserta TELUHTUTI HUENTERETA agere Trg kring the fruit 3114 Fion this sutra is fli 38 ft iu kütm III 2 177 inclusive the flixes that we shall trent of, are to be understood in the sense of 'ygents having such 2 habit, or nature', or 'having skill in such and such action' 1 he force of it in this sutra is limit 11 clusive and include, forare also The term mata means the natural inclination to vards an action not prompted by a coutemplation of its fruit or result The term ng muins' vho enters upon action not from habit but thinking that it 19 his duty Tie term wery it means who do s the action captussed by the verb in an excull at way Illustrations of th sy will b given under the subsequent aphorismy ३११५ । तृन् ।३।२। १३५ । की फटम् । 3116 The affix comes after verbs in the sense of agents laying such a habit do' Tha T of It is indicatory, and regulates th- accent (VI 1 197). Ag *+7= 1st sing ** This aflix denotes htbit 11 th flosing 09 FIT' vho is nccus on 19 miks mit 1 tire-au forume Migrant We'the family of Srårıhthuynna share the heals of their wi lo ve, 115974 13C 1 utfra min for tho Aherals at al x ray food 9 soon as Srillha 19 accomplished , sinkin wafor maith Tauleliyanı become clat d on tha birti of a sin Still - and skillul maker of wats, praissaer skilful huotor # ·TOL II pirt II Chap II S 3117 TIK KNIDANTI III.9. 187 prints l'art. Tu aims stabs, without up arz14, thr the nflix mantha porus no forma are many of ACTIſical potresitA*I+17#*77.15 sing 'the lintre prugi', saloo drythe l'olri Why do we $13 bon not taking the spaerga'! 01 * the titre priat; nfhze' tha Prathastri prines' fler th: Alix 14 7. Though th sam u the inr, thus 11 dienr however in the arr nt, le plar a udatta nccent on th brst aglial (W'1. 1 197), while 7 pince it on the last (1 1 1. 163) Sarl.–The augmant * 15 adeled when it takes tho afix tt; 49 7*9**Telst sing. Any Meshin prangt' l'art.- 1ben sigmfying duity, tho verb foot takes 7, the latter is tho substituto for the of the root, and the albir done not like the init. medinte at a,"want, 29, free traite. Ist. sing. TerTrashtra'. l'art-The root it takea 17, when the word to be formed menos nn oficer ,ns vur'anntendant, a door kcepap'. l'art -- In th. Vedn the root ottaneo AS The form is the rune ng the Inst bot there is difference of cont. 3PPE I Stief Trepisamaicaulaati5544744gTYTK- घर मागुम् । ३ । २ । १३६ । wwxfetare o fataliti Isufar repair Trafman I gofreni tofauciena tu ferragoniteta afingaferro fui 3116 The affir yere comes after the following serbis in the sense of the agent 113s1ng such a habit ofc.; siz *to adorn', fara 'o espe?', 'to ho born', TTT'Io in ripn', 1777 'to flyto be nad', 'to abmc mang 'tolin afilinmed', 7 'to bo', 'to gros' 'to lear' and I'd walk'. As yfirgo 'rcorating, fortafleys' srpnia!103' sufrago 'proprong. tire', safety is 'np: to nen', zeitig, 'lsing' gmised', to forry * bright', eristys 'bashful, iaisgi 'scrolsinz: vzroye 'growing, viette' patient', fe'morcaliu'. PurlThu nx mad bins hr antication thrafis Of III 2 151, after the root any though it by th0 A 3« of dreta:197. ३१९ । मेरवन्दमि । ३।२।९३७ । arri eitratti 9117. The aflix pre in the sense of 'tkir agent hasing such . 117 bit úe', come in the Chanda, after a ferb that cods in the causative for .

·127 101. I1 rant n car II 3121 ) TIE KADASTI ATTIIE3 Varl - In the Chhan in thu aflit coin alrth.v obytt bita, as 'to 2011'th b asta tfiat bita. •३१२० । प्रतिधिपिधिपः ।। ३ । २ । १४० । I DETI I Tifupit 3120 Tho illix 5 comes after thin icels o'ta tremblo', o'to bn grocd}', 'to bo bold' and fer to throp' in the sense of 'tlicent liring such a habit les Av utgi'trembling, roi'gredy', reg: 'iyil.and furu' throwing: ३१२१ । शमित्यष्टाम्पो पितुरा । ३ । २ । १४१ । UTC stercard xfx AFT*? I wye tiX NAHI RA nieformet afwitter syfte (59) faim II 97 9:7 sinfr111 ENTITATOTT** ***1*127 offre Ar-'(+982) fa risalento molt thi anuntaip mang strators, sipafranezze mer fafirat feguit i gutationemRI Trafafurlfri +' tfit #fit 3121 'Ile affis fese comes after the ciglt rurbs begmoins Tith 'to be calm, in tho scnso of the neat lasing such a unbit &c. Thm word fix in the aphorizın indicaing bng nning To su pig's: vorbi begin with mr and end with or in the list of very Orths affix farer tirs .nalnffix 19 x the other letters are servilc the is for the sake of subtstuting sut: urn for tho final palatals , 1 19 firth sila of eupholy accord ing to hasikil, or for the sake of rulo VI 3 45&crording to th: B.Ashya, and the lofter causa priddhi (Vil 2. 1 6) which in th• casa of rooms ending in * 1* prohibited by the rulu VII 3 319 2763, th> only verb takip said thı being As of 16. mg tit calm, like no ?'<u31710g, p'timing' wut' laboricus, whirling', 'moving round, it fitiguing, b t&inz', antimad and Totti'mal'. Though by III.2 136, S 3116 tho rerb sviT taken tho atlir twy, it also takng thoafis far by the rale of 1857 (III 1.91) All thioso verby b long to ths Dulls clio Afrotha tirbr than those cut hire oti raffreg, as afat To su ugon indicators I far, 172 P15707 9-17T17: Hers tl ru 19 opt onal s'ti't ning be congd tit! Afis as 'ngt unrhae VI 3. 4,S57 Yor is th to any occus on to all 12070°17 , çi*** & berita 95159' led to a code tus oily the bord mbing drauninIII 1 705 331, fron 'II 1 GOS 231", clairal (381) 19 limi'w woui ending in a sti? Ta stadiul is prob bied by $. **G3 Par 31: "T, rule III I DIS 2330 17 w 20 4 yil 1. a is which is na: onform tiek as ' rotors. 3591'1 sup ala tha 17 ·130 TIC SIDDHANTA PUUVUDI. FroL. II PART.II. CHAP.W83122 . lattor only optionally, lins no concern with Apava la nffixes added in the sense of having such a habit'le with the affixes taught in III 2 134- 177. This Paribhashe is not of universal application, hence we have two derivatives उन्मदिया by s 3. 11.6, and उम्मादिन by the present sutra. ३१२२ । संपृषानुरुधाममाड्यसपरिसृसंसृजपरिदेविसज्वरपरिक्षि- पपरिरटपरिवदपरिदहपरिमुहदुपद्विपद्रुहंदुहयुजाक्रीसविविचत्यजरज- भजातिचरापचरामुपाभ्याहनश्च । ३।२।१४२ । पिनुपस्यात् । सपळ । अनुरोधी । मायामी । धायासी । परिकारी संसर्गी । परिदेवी। संचारी परिपी। परिराटी। परिवादी। परिदादी । परिमाही । दापी।द्वेषी।द्रोही दादी। पागी । माक्रीती। विधेकी । त्यागी । रागी भागी । तिवारी । अपचारी । भामापी । सभ्याचाती। 3122 Tho alfix fuger comes after the following verbs, in the sense of the agent having such a habit &c': viz —PTL, अवर, सायम् सायम् , परिण, संसृज, परिदेष, संज्यर, परिशिप, परिस्ट, परिवद् परिद, परिमुङ्, हुए, द्विप, दुह, दुइ, पञ्, साझीह, घिथिच, त्य, र, भन्, अतिघर, अपपर, भाउ and अभ्याइन The root Typ is to be taken as belonging to th- Rudhadi clagg and not as belonging to the Adadi, because the vikarana is elded in the latter. The root परिदेवि belongs to the Bhvadi class, the simple verb beng देय "to sport . Ton verb for to throw' 19 common both to tho Tudâdı and the Dıvadı, and both are taken h re yi 'to concentrate is Divâdı, and yw 'to join' is Ru. both are meant hege Tae verb ta 'to color' has lost its nasal in this sutra, irregularly Thus सपृय -+-पिनुए = संपर्क+इन (VII 2.52) = रम्पर्धि 1st SIDE सम्पी • mixture' , cumilarly, अनुरोधी 'compliant' , मायाको 'one who restrains' , सायागी one who exerts', परिसारी 'that which flows round'सर्गी' united परिदेवी 'lamenting , संधारी 'greatly beating', परिशेपी ' moving about' परिटी 'crying aloud', परियादी 'reriling,, परिदादी । "burning', परिमाही beguiling', that guilty', hating', zit 'quarrelling', et milling', un'uniting or concentrating', reitet 'playing ', fortent discriminating', 777' renouncing', not yearping after', sharing', पतिवारी ' transgressing', अपचारी offending', 'साभापी thief, अभ्यापाती 'attacking'. The indicatory = of the afix shows that the final palatal 1s changed into a corresponding guttural before this afiix. (VII 3 52 and 64) ३१२३ । वो कपलसकत्यसम्भः । ३।२। १४३ । विकापी पिलारी पिकस्थी। धिनम्भी। 3123 The affix पिनुन_comes after the verbs कप् to injurc', ng 'to embrace and sport', ia' to praise' and to belicro', Then these are in consposition with the preposition fai dhadi, . .

·YOL. II PART II CHAP II S 3127) TITE KREDITA AFFIrry 131 - . As fantat 'injuri'lg, formiut 'sportive, a sensualist', fanit 'vaaniing', and format' confiding'. .३१२४ । अपे पलपः । ३ । २।१४४ । चाही। अपनापी विलापी। 3124 Tho alix facer comes after thc verb 'to wish when compounded with the proposition and for As अपलापी ' thristy', बिलापी The thrm yि is to be read into this satra by the force of the word 'and! ३१२५ । प्रे रूपसुद्रुमथवक्ष्यराः । ३ । २ । १४५ । प्रलापी सारी । प्रदापी (प्रमापी। प्रपादी। प्रवामी। 3125 The affir पिपुल् comes after the verbs लप, महुपप, पर and us when compountled with the preposition । As part 'prattling', Arct extending aroun l', PITÄ 'running away, fugitive zit 'tormenting', water reporting', sarat ' travellor Tac root at hero is th3 Bhvili u morning' to il well' and is not the Adadı ancauing to cover', because in the latter the vikarana is elid d ३१२६ । निन्दहिं सक्तिशरणदविनाशपरिक्षिपपरिरटपरिवादिष्या भाषासूयोवुश् । ३।२। १४६ । पञ्चपर्ये प्रथमा। सभ्यो युस्यात् । निन्दक। हिशक रस्यादि। तुला सिद्ध पुण्यवर • पापफ तशीसादिपु पासकपभ्यायेन तृमादयो मेप्ति । 3126. The allir sm is added to the following Terbs in the sense of the agent h2ping such a habit &c'.--निन्द्, विष, कि, पाइ, बिना परिषि, परिरट्, परिषादि,ध्यभाए and घमय । In this sätra the whole phrase ending with yg has trhen the termination of the first cass , which, however, has the force of the abstive here. As मिन्द्+तुम् =निन्दका (VII I. I) blaming', so also दिसा :' injuring', T** * tormenting or troublesome, C#* ' eating', fata* ' destroying', परिपक: 'sarrounting', परिष्टकः 'who cries aloud', परिवादका 'a plaintifi, ध्याभाषक detracting', and असूयक ' detrncting'. The same forms as the abive would have been obtained by adding the affix वुल trught in III 1 133, as by addrug घुत्र its sepuate enunciation indicates the existence of the following paribhisha.-- The rnle of III 1.94 by which an apa ad raffix which is not uniform with itsarga aflix should supers do the latter only optionally, has no concórn with aprild-affises ad led in the sense of having such a habiti ?e with the attires taught in III 2 134-177'. Therefore the affixes TL &c, are not added in the senss of having such a habit &c'. ३१२७ । देविक्रुशोश्योपसर्गे । ३ । २ । १४७ । पादेवकः । सानोपा । 'उपएगे' शिरदेवरिता कीटा। 3127. The aflis y comes after the vei beata 'to lament' apri *' to cry', when an upasai ga is il composition with thom - ·182 TITE SIDDHATI KAUNODI. (rok II. PART II CHIP. II $8128. । 1 conso- A प्रादेयका 'one rha sport or laments', अाक्रोगा 'vociferous, a rorite', परिदेषक 'one who hments', परिमोशका a reviler'. Why do yo say ' ss hon in composition with an ripasarga'? Observe faatani ne formed by T (Ill. : 135) ३१२८ । घलनशयदार्थादकर्मकायुच् । ३।२।१४।। चलनार्यावादार्याठच युध् स्यात् । पलना। चोपना। कम्पनः। सदमा । एषः । 'सार' किम् । पहिता विद्याम् । Tho nflik Tecomes, in tho sense of the agent having such habit cc. after antransitive rerbs denoting "motion' or 'sound'. As चल् +युषचलना moving' (VII. 1. 1), घोपनः 'creeping', कम्पन: ' shak. ing', पम्पन: ' sounding', स्पष: 'roaring'. Why do we say 'intransitive'? Observe afany anty. ३१२९ । अनुदायतश्च हलादेः।३।२।१४९ । अपर्मकादा स्यात् । धर्तमः । वर्धनः । अनुदाता' किम् । भविता सादे किम् । एपिता। 'चर्मकार किए । सिता वस्त्रम् । 3129. The allia yg comes in the same sense after suo h intiansıtıro verls as are Atmanepadi and begin with a nant and are Auudutlet z. e. hare a gravely acoented vowel as indicators. As a' being', 'growing' Why do we aay Anudattet'l Observe भषिता Why do we say 'beginning with a consonant'? Observe fwat, which though Atmanepadı, tahes me Why after 'Intransit vo* ?. This rule will not apply if tho root 19 trangi. tive,ag धमिता यस्त्र, ३१३० । जुबडलम्बदन्द्रम्यगृधिज्यलशुधलपपतपदः।३।२ । १५० । पति सोत्री धातुर्गती धगे च । अपनः । चक्रममाः । चन्द्रमणा । गरयः। पूर्व पति पद मार्ण सपपतपद-(३१३४) इरशुरुमा याधा मा भूदिति । तेन सापकीलियेषु परस्पर यात्प विभिनास्तीति । नाम । 3130 The aflix ne comes after the following verbs in the sense of the agent having such a habit do', vir --२ चम्प, वदन्य, सू, पृथ, ज्वल, एच, लए, पs and पद The verbr is not to be found in the Dhatupatha, but is taught in the a phorisms and 19 hence called a kautra dhulu. It means' to go, to be quick'. Ass+जो+मन VII.1 1 and VII 384)-नयनः (VI 173, 1. 3.46)'a courser, REVIft horso', सप+ गुच्चमा चन| (II. 474) चक्रममा ' moving about, so also इंद्रमण: ' wandering', सरण: "Howing', गर्दना 'greedy', verti' buraing', dren'grieving', wurdegring', **** falling", पण ' moving The enumeration of the word in the abore, indicates that this sätra npplics to the transitive verbs, otherwise the stro III. 2. 148 would . .

·would have 1 TIE XRIDANTI AYTIXES 138 TOL II PÁRT II ONAP II § 3133) Moreover the affix ukan of have been sufficient, ag 19 6 VITIO verb III 1 134, S 3134 will not now de bar this yr after otherwise it Others sny that tho jnciusion of in this aphorism indi catus the existence of the parıbhdshd already given under stra III 2 141 ve the rulo of III 1 D1 has no concern with affixes added in the sense of " having such a habit &c. Tho afix ray which by III 2 186 is added to wall supersedes, therefore, not merely the addition of it to wa If a tachohhulika (III 2 185), but also the addition of you to the samo aparada were to supörsede only an aldchehhrlika utsarga, it would have been superfluous for Pånini to teach in this sûgra the addition of go to , because in that case the addition of to " by III 2. 154 would not have debarred the addition of qy to us by III 2 149 The repetition 19 foi tho sake of ondpuna therefore, and it indicates the existenco of the alove mentioned maxim The und pana is not, however, of universal appli cation, for sometimes both afixes are applied concurrently, as a az पिपरपनः । ३९३१ अधमरहार्थेभ्यश्य ३।२। १५१ । prati i atyari YTTI 3131 And after the verbs having the sense of to bo angry' and attito adorn', the allir 7 is employed As wituni nrathful, traw: irascible,, ***?'adorning', 'ornament But not so after the verb with to which sátra III 2 136 applies ३१३२ । न यः।३।२ । १५२ । पारामादरम स्पाद । पिता । मायिता । 3132 The alix reis not employed after those vorbs Which end in the letter This debars III 2 149 As fan 'making creaking sounil', मापिता 'trembling' In these cases tho bihx to 19 employed (III 2 135) ३१३३ । सृददीपदीक्षश्च । ३ । २ । १५३ । अप्न स्यात् । सूदिता । दीपिता । दीक्षिता । ममिलि- (३१४) इति रेण युचो वामि 79216 Incuft + antinho mererafanlietoto xfå arramfafari i BUT फमना पतिः कन्या कल्पना माता । यदि सूर्यन कप मधुमदन।। मादादिः। 3133 The allie go, doos not como after the verbs moto strike, te 'to shino' and fra 'to initiati' Tht.30 three rurbs are unu laitet, and by gâtra III 2 149, would have taken 111 The present sûtra prohibits that Therefore, they take me As दि 1sb sing भूदिता 'one who strikes', 'दीपिg on who shines', दीक्षित Sone who initiates Now it might be objected" \Ve find that sdtra III 2. 167 specifically enjoins the affix Cafter efter, this apara la rulo will therefore, sapersede the general role, where it th ·ALSDDUATHARAUUDI 1 PART II ORAP 9313 rale ? If you say that the affix पुच् Is also obtaint by the rule of non u iformity (IIL 1 94) we reply that th Parıbl fish gr n under alltra 3121 will pruvent that This objecuion 13 ar swared by saying that the above mentioned P ribhishe is not of universal application, there are exceptions to it 19 *31 gafas and 1 gafar & young gul which aro both Tolid forms derived by ad ling tand 3 to táo verb * So also on and कल्पना पाखा 'asbaking branch If we prohibit पुच् after the root मूद how do we gt the forms मधुसूदन and खिदम ! This objection may be auswered in three ways (1) the present 19 anilya rule not of univereal application which can be inferred from finding this sūtra separated from the last (yogavibhaga) wh n it was easier to mako them ove () the words 1977 & belong to the tranfit class (III 1 134) taking the affir स्यु or (3) they are formed by III 3 118 by the aff'xeyan ३१३१ । लपपतपदस्थाभूयपहनकमगमशभ्य उकञ् । ३ । २ । १५४ । लायुका। पानुक स्वादि। 3131 lhe aflix se concs after the following veros, in the case of the agent living such a habit do € 7 स्था भएप पर फम् गम and ग As লাঘন্ধ পৃথক ঘাৱষ সম মনি ঘষম ঘেহাহ হ যয়ী भवन्ति प्रभ षुकमग्न भवति प्रवर्ष का पर्जन्या शापातुक फापालिकस्य एलम कामुक एम स्त्रियो भवन्ति भागामुक पारासारर शाहुः किथारुक तीवण माहु । Th य 19 adid ofter Für In OTETYK by VII 3 33 The ti is changed into sreby VII 3 32and 54 ३१३५ । जल्पभिक्षलुएटयड पाफन् । ३ । २ । १५५ । जपाका । भिवाकः । कुहाका । सुपटाकः । धराफः । चराको । 3135 The affix पाकन् comes in the sense of the agent has ing such a habit do, after the following verbs fry कुटु सुपट and The is indicatory showing that the femin nes of the words ro formed take the afix कीप 18 long (IV 141) A जल्पाक: talkativ भिशाक boor basettes Shrefer sex •low miserable Inth femint पल्पाकी धराक्षी kc ३१३६ । प्रजोरिनि ।३।२ । १५६ । मजयी । मधिनी। मधिनः। 3136 The aflis fa comes in the sense of 'ther agent having such a habit eti', after the reiba tu hasten forvard' As sufor sing 'an express co rier dial safont pl fatto ३९३७ । जिक्षिविश्रीरयमाव्यथाभ्यसपरिभूप्रसूभ्यश्च । ३।२।१५७ ॥ जयी। दरीची। विभयो। शत्ययी। वमी। मध्यपी। भाभी। परिभणी। मरनी। घसक ·FOL 11 Part Il mar M91491 IPL KRIDINIAI 3137. Tuy nilie pfa comce, in thic srosc of 'tho adent 119Ting uch a habit le', after the scris frito conquer', 'to respect', for to st., to dwell, to go', fefer to slicitor', 'to go', 'to vomit', 7*tenot to gaso pain, st. toinjure', afro * to humiliate and at to benet. Ax xfam 19. 8196 páticongi muuse', omilarly, Otrepr! 15', vit. #19108', fuvar' wry 11, nit'excuz, a vomiting, treel free froin pun, svaf 1100 injuring', ford'huminting' and Amat procrita. ing' ३९३: । स्पहिनहिपसिदयिनिदातामाहाभ्य मालुप । ३।२।१५० 17716**YTITT 11Fytair, 1 77971 I TIJ. f* Meyer ET 1771 1779 Faerett 1*12191" from Targe 1139 lhe afir 75", comes in the sense of the agent haring such a Irabit , after tlic fullowin, words -7 to sesire', or 'to seize', 'to fall', To'to give, to go, to protect', fort to skepprit' to be tirel' and est to renerate'. The first thrco rurlus belong to the Churî li chat and end in ghinito and tak for withont genior trildh: A«, fytordaxa d to be desprotus of, Tri depas menth hold of or« 13 ', SOIT 'topding or prone to fall 15 'compu«i unat, F*777 dejniwel to sleep' [ne word Freit 19 ferm d by adding the preprostiru fa to thu ycb' logo crophuls', i 'plochſ, 1931 9 fyrir by n } ling ** to , and th n irregulvly chaoging the not 'full of futh'. The t mm wyt na formed by ndling og to the serb Tis 10 hol3. Song VI 4 155 for adding 1 l'art -The nic 27 crory nlaynfer th» root rol3 dowo', ** matui' depee d to lie donn' ३१३९ । दाधेटसिशदसदो रुः ।३।२ । १५ । वापारा। पेर । यदुमदु । 3130. The allir comes after tho rerbe e'to giro', A. to suck', foto binil', *= 'to fall' and 'to sit'. As y la munitiernt man', teret A acking chilt of thin moth r. The genitive casu is here p-shibit d by II :. 60, tha bir tabın ng cquiralunto I As ar 'blading'; ' falling': sodur ३१४२ । गृपस्यदः पमर ।३।२। १६ । 10 III 31 10 Ti o aflis maty in t'ho scn-e of 'tlic agent horing such 1 lub til, cornes after the servis 'to flos', i to cat', and to it . . runs As gigcing, a Lad of deur', to zlate20us', TI Toridors, ·136 TRE SIDDHANTI KAUNODI (POL II PaprIl cor. II $3141 - 1 ३१४१ । भाजभासमिदो पुरच । ३।२।१६१ । मा.सभामुरा मेरा। 3171 Tho aflis ty comes in the sense of the ayent harug such a habit do', after the rerla PK to breik', 1 'to sbine', and for 'to be fat As ***+SAW+31(VII 3 52)avyo 'brittle', the printal buing changed into guttural becaust of the indicators So also Resi's fat brast'. Toc varfiat' splendid light'. After the rerb 47% this affic gires & reflexira digalficitou-char which naturally breaks of itself ३१४२ । विदिभिदिच्छिदेः कुरष । ३ । २ । १६२ । fakti i faggiori 3172. Tho alix t comes, in tho sense of the agent haring such a linbit &o', alter the scrbs fors to hnor', foto dirido' and fry to percc'. As fara efi'a knowing landit' forgetta a splitting or fragila wood', fxti's cutting or braking r ps. Tho atlix 13 cinpissed 0 R reflexrra enge after the rerle for and try Mole-Thc aflix comes after the s-sborn' to kill', and there is vocalisation of the samironel, as fayti ३१४३ । रगमजिसतिभप. करप् । ३ । २ । १६३ । These imati femTTI I TICI 31 3, Ihc nflix comics, in tho sener of the agent linring such a lialut he', after the surbs x to go'. *7'. destros', fe' to conquer', nudly lo flor' THIS dr-story and youd in order to lac* t'i augment 54 Itween the rcob arda Mix (VI 1 71) The **** TIT HAS Atrareil r', wteto fora el tra 19 ny fut<< spinto ir a ment, en fem selt rong. A sitrr'. Timah the acting with a legop pad xurm" :**161 A copy Intara lain bo ta torre i a'? PE (11 ? 35), *111*. 11y 1984 ATTI?18jly! perfeutralt forreste spaene 1o the wor] 71 e irregularir (rmird. 7****!** 11 from toppa3x1417 p! *!11!!! 10 Pr*f***if'alai Lara 1la ·VOL II. PART II QNAP IL 9 3149] THE KRIDAXTI ATTIXX 167 ३१४६ । यजजपदशां पडः।३।२।१६६ । pote Iva I FATT I Torfafe enfant han f*** 1 0744 IT! GI 31 46. Tho affix * comes in the sense of the Agent having such a habit &c'. nfter the verbs om, and I which thoy end in the allix TF, The intensives of thcso verbs take **. As uti* performar of frequent sacrifices';***'mutterer of prayors repratedly ; TTTH A enake (what bites freqoently). The nasil is inserted by VII. 4. 86. 8. 2658. The root (Bhradi) is shown in the satra without its nasal, in anticipat on of its losing it before the allix by VI. 4. 24 S. 415. ३९४७ । नमिकम्पिस्म्यजसकमाहिसदीपो रः ।३।२ । १६७ । 1 ***1/2 ofgasgas fazenazawa, www unfort) ** i fiti 3147. Tho aflix e comes in thio sense of the agent haring buch n habit &c after the verbs po to bot', 'to slake',. fpipe to smile', are not to cease', *** to desire', fre' to injuro', and 70'to shine'. Thus, ma' atg.soft wood', **:27 TIR shaking branch'; *** . miling facs, un gorfa "he sacrifices perpetually', *** garant'a beautiful maiden', for the injuring Rakshas', Tara brilliant wood." Tho word step 19 an adverb, and 19 derived from the root or 'to sot freo', with the negative particle , and the afür ças *****a! ३१४८ । समाशंसभित उः।३।२।१६ । femita'. i wagi i fuge. 3148. The slix comes after roots that have taken tho alix third after the verbs unds' to pish' and fry to beg' in the sense of the agent having such a habit &c'. The term in the aphorism means Desideratives in the affis ry, and not the verb Ty, because the verb 19 never seen with this afix. Ar, frig' desirous of doing', finite desirous of taking', wnda' de- Birous', fugi' a beggar'. The verb es with the upasarga 7 13 the serb ofe' to desire' and not the verb #fe. to praise'. ३१४९ । विन्दुरिष्ठुः ।३।२ ॥ १६६ । By farm facti frantat finger rufari 8140 The words fars and men are irregularly formed hy the addition of the afli s s, in the sense of the agent haring ench a habit &c.' To the verb faft we add the augment and then the sfiz x; As, Free +8+5=forgi (I. 1. 17)E' inteligent', eo of re'to wish', the is replaced by y, and sye bare ryth desirous'. 10 ·188 TED BIDDHANTA KAUBEU DI (SOL II. PART II Chap 11. $ 3150 1 ३१५० । क्याच्छन्दसि । ३।२ । १७० । 'देषाग्निगासि जनयु 3150. The affix 3 comes in the Chilandas, after tho roots that hare tn.cn the Denominatrio afii * in the sense of the agent having such a lubit &c The term includes the thrco affixes 97, 976 and 47 (see sätrag III. 1 8. 11, 13 &c). As fwagi, pagi, 959: (Rig Ved. I 3 4) Par Forrifa T39 In tho mo lern Sanshrit It will be employed. As fastfear, By sátra VII, 4 53, the long replac s thr final when #97 follows, as gatav =gxt+1=9317 Wby then in the case of fag, there is uot the substatution of long for the sof fem? Becaust the rulo VII. 4 33 19 set aside by VII - 35 which declares that in the Chhandas the long is not substituted for the ३१५१ । शाटूगमहनजनः किफिनौ लिट् च । ३।२।१७१ । wierarjerarenfancy faferat freio at a factor of the fantai africanfragerispor'umfafanyifu: " 771070T WISE Teftabangsa, iu i fins i ufat: i et fort i TT: IRF9:* farſaiyanatargreat- YU 'न्य सदेत्यादिन्या विकिनी पोंगभाषन निपात्यो। 3151. In the Churndns, thoaffises fes and form in thc senso of the agent having such a habit &c' come after the vorbs that end in long st, or short or long , and after tho verbi me "to go', 'to kill, and sta' to be produced', and those affixes opei ate lile fac causing reduplication of the 100t Thn after 7 is either for the sake of enphony, or for the sake of pro Ci9 on Had it been then by the rule of MT (I 1.70) short wonld only be included and not long But the presentrulo is applicable to long as well Thus 17+*=1t: drinking , as it give drinking the soma juice, info giving cows' (Rig Ved 11 23 4) frauit agft (Rig Ved IV. 39 %, VI 68 71 Eurft: (Rig Ved 1 198 I. T4+5=ofone being in constant motion, wind,', sirug'at (Rig Ved II 23 11), 1+fa Eft&illing a weapon ofensive', rafaga (Rig Ved IX 61 2), et fat=fer as oftafia IT S VII 20 1) So also The letter in these affixes is indicatory It might be said ' t 15 sup riluous to make these affixes far because these being treated lile fare will be ſky by rule I 2.5' 110^, tboy would by fire by the rule I 2.5, but then the rule VII 4, 11 (wh n lit follows, guna is the substitute of the verb and of those that end in the long 7) would also have applied to thegn alixes, and woull lave caused gura. It is to prevent this guna of the letter that ne base annexed an indicatory * to these allises . .

·TOI. II PART II CAT II 99116) -- 1111111111" - Varl --- ſlao alion Ft and TXT 152 of unifirart applicaoran in tho Crningrrtitena.cominimum hiening th...MARI Both m !! गद् ५,aadi (yy.! II 10 ग (Rig ) Vuri-['19 chies foar ifrycom af neth M3919 I! Sir efet, and rinthacket alli ratur asha, कि पशि वाशि,freiful Fieri --Insatiscs får anlity 13 fart 13 Int mais (Em) rook o" भर पर, यत् and पर A५, mire पति, जाति, पापा (183) ३१५२ । स्वपितृपोर्नशिप । ३।२। १२ । रुपमक । तसर । ममी । हुपमा । 'पनि पापमितिदागिनदी। पर। 3152 Tho alle minte, comcs, in the sense of thir ngenta hasing such a hont sc', after tut surbs try to sleep' and ष +to be thirsty'. As ag+मि-1st sipg स्पनर slocping drovey , हर 1st. Bing तुषम् covetour, thirsty. Vor.So als oft r th very to insult, la bol?', 4*, PTT 1:. sing you'boll, impal nt (Thi yirtha s found in hisia. २२५३ । शृवन्योरातः । ३ । २ । १३ । शरापरबग्दा 3153 Thic air * comes in the senso of 't'ic gants • haring suchin habitsc atter the verb3 7 to injure' and are 'to praiso', 'to shluto' A परा 'noxtour, a m chi rour animil' वादा 'prising, a hard. ३९५४ । मियः माकनी । ३ । २ । ११४ । भीभीलुका।" कपि वान्या • भीरशः। 3164 The afis e ind 57 come in the sense of the agent hasing such a habit' after the rerity भी 'to fear' Aa, urt'farful, timid , 479* timoroig a bear, a tiger, a chal'. Varf. The affis **Tebould also be stat d , RTK ३१५५ ! रयेशभासपिसफो यर । ३।२।१५। स्पाधवरा भास्या पेपरस्पर 3153. The affix पर comes, in the sense of the agents bung such a bibit co' after the verbs to 'to strad', tz*.to rule', माम् 'toshinc', पिम् ' to go ind ow to go As स्थाथ 'namorebts, w ruler, dot, भास्वर' Parsensus पेपर going destructive , fomet 'opening, expanding. ३९५६ । यश्च यः । ३।२।१७६ । याताया। सतो सेप (२२०८ तम' परस्मिन्-' (५०) इति पारित रसाधे प्राप्ते पदस्प परमात्र दिपनादी दान पानिमिपोलादी र स्वामिनास पक्ष प्रति स्थानिलामोधात् सोगे - () इति इमोपः । शल्पापरय स्वानिया मित्याती सोपे मात 'घरे एतस्यानिवत् । पार। . .

·140 18E SIDDHA VTI KLUXUDI (101. II PART II QAP II $ 9156 & 3156 The aftis in the sense of 'the agent having such a habit &c' comes after the yerb at when it ends with the afix T With the affix , the intensives of verbs are formed, as TV Vagrant an ascetic' Sea sútra I. 1 58 Tous #f+++ ATT! Now applies VI 4 48. S 2303, requiring the elusion of the of the 4 of TFI Thus 7+&+of pee: This elided. caused by a subsequent rule would have been sttaniyat by I 1 57 S 50 But it is not atbaaleat for the purpoges of the rules relating to the final member of spada, or for doubling &c. See I. 1. 59 S. 51 Now vi. 1. 66. S. 873 requires the elision of x before it But if the elided be hånivat, then it would intervens, and, could not be said to be followed by L and so there would bu no eligion of But I 1.58 S. 51 declares that for the purposes of 4 elzsion the vowel substitute is not s'hanıyat. Thus पाया +o+वर-वादा+o+o+पर Now the या of पा requires tobe elided, if the elided ba sthaniyat. Bat this is prevented by the same rule (I. 1. 58 S 51) with regard to a fafigii Note. To understand this sthanivat question properly, we give the following quotation from the Ashtadháyi I. 1, 58 S 51 Thus from the intensive verb auta we bave ETUTATI 'a vagrant." It is formed in this wise atra+ ** (III 2. 176)- AT972+0+27 (VI. 4 48). Here the ~ of has been droppad and replaced by lopa, on account of its being followed by the Ardhadhatuka afir se The next step 15 to drop theç by rule VI 1 68, which declares that the letters and are dropped before affires brgioning with any consonant except ure, beginning with consonants of a praty&bara Now if the lopa substitute ba considered as sthapuvat to, then the aftiz TTT 19 got an alix having an initial consonant and the role, which requires the dropping of., would not apply The satra I 1. 58 however provides for this by doll making it ath&niyat. Thus metto + Tt Now there is a rulo (VI 4 64) which declares that the final long st of a baso 19 dropped befyro krdbadhAtuka aff so having an initial vowel. Ilero thrrefore, if the Adrsa'lopn,' which replaced the votel », be considered as othenat by I i 57. S to and a bo consi tered as an aflis having a later t 11 stal youth, then bo ml of Tur requires to be dropped But this nato pruvents this and we have the form TTATIC, ES steg STETTI ALTE forma ३९५७ । भाजभासधुर्विद्युतोर्जिपशुप्रायस्तुधः क्यिप् । ३ । २।१७। Temie III wongati frarossi gigits Featuraruerin adphone vit. T FUTTER 17317 **** Feard infary ·POL II PART II Chi r II $ 3158 THE XRIDINTI AFFIXES 141 3157. The affix free comes, in the sense of 'tho agent haring such a habit &o after the verbs ** 'to slune' <re 'to shine' ge "to injure', at 'to shine', wat 'to bo strong', q 'to fill', to move rapidly' and 'to praise', when it is preceded by the word gay a stone', Thus foren Ist sing force' splendid', re 1st sing 'light'd , ***Tu, at foreve (VI 4. 21) Ist sing 'who injures' d. yiti faer lightoing', ** 1st sing ***strength, s 1st sing so 'what fills, gat, 'swift'. In the case of long vosel is the substitute of by applying the next sätra, where the word great shows that the rules of legthening &c , apply also. Thus Skid ait:pl 3: See partika under that sätra. ZtET (VI 1. 71) a priest (VII 2 92) The com. pounding of the noun gr&van with a root 15 anomalous and formed by this Būtra Aftor such compounding fra 19 added Though by the universal rule III 2 76, ths afix fere would have come after theso terbe also, tho repobition of the affix shows that stuf«for does not apply in tdchchhılıha affixeg ३१५ । मायेभ्योऽपि दृश्यते । ३ । २ । १८ । frrei fari forte fuata forritarar I wafiwrtet u futur पचिव चिद्रस्वा । सया वार्तिकम् । विधि प्रयवस्तुमुडकीस पी- Narva o foartearfaitaiaga Qaffeftut pasterrat TRT ATT y fafir पाति के अरणम् । यतीति वा । पछतीति प्राट् । प्रायत तोति पायतस्ता कर । मकने का। सुसमा । अति हरि थी।।"दतिगमिजुतीना • इमिग्राणादण्यासता । दिद। जगत"तेव' ।। भपे । सस्य इस्वच । दीर्यति । । "यायत पता in 3158 The affix ferq is seen after other verbs also, besides those mentioned above, in the sense of the agent having such a habit &c As 9, 1st sing joining', fax'piercing ', fu dividing' By using the words '15 been so the aphorist 13 implied that other rules also apply concurrently with fear Thus in some cases wo find leagthening of the vowel, in some, there 18 reduplication of the root, in 8070 instances there 13 samprasdrana of the gamyonel, and in other cases there 19 shortening Th.s are taught in tae f»llowing rårtikas Vart TVhen for foll»ws the long vowel is the substitute of T'to speak , * to ask 'to praise long tn' to move through a mat, to more rapidly', and 'to serve', and there is no substitution of a vowel for the semiyowel (VI 1 16) Some of these would have been form ed by the Unldı Bâtre (II 57) 'Their inclusion in the vårtika shows that la tha tachchhiladi sense, the krip should not be superseded by 1 ·142 THE SIDD\TA LAUUDI [10 II PART II CHAP II 5 3159. 1 As, 7* 'the oica', *+fx79=79+ita (VI 1 10)=#0+ fare (VIII 2 36) ATE (VII 4 50)' who azks, 1979 TRE w o praises long', 'a vorm', 'swift', it'the goddess Lakshmı. The word which was inentioned in the last sûtra 19 red indint bere Vart-There is reduplication of the verbs ar to shine, Tito go' and I to novoke', when Forec follows By force of drisgate', the words get the designation of abhyasa so the doubling of the eighth adhyâya applies also. As, fanzo'shining , Ta'going the world. Vart—There is lengthening also of the vowel of Yst as yx: 'a crescentslaped wooden ladle used for pouring the sacrificial ghee into tho fire Vart -The root 'to feal' is shortened also, as CET 'fearing.' Vart – The verb c ' to think' has samprasarana , ag eft: 'thinking. ३१५८ । भुवः संज्ञान्तरयोः । ३।२।१७९ । fa*yta fra i fitu aducea afegia foragtare e sforon 3159 The alli e furge oomes after the veily 'to lo' when the word so formed denotes a name or a surety A«, frys 'n person called Vibhû, afay'a surety 1 e. he wilo stands intermediate b-tween the debtor nad the creditor' So also forys ३१६० । विप्रसभ्यो ड्वसंधायाम् । ३ । २ । १० । एम्पो भुधा शुः स्याम्म तु मायाम विभुम्योपमः । मभुः स्वामी । भभुमिमा । मनायां च पिy.' नरकचत। * मितवादिस्य उपसंख्यानम् "। मिततीति मितदुः। यसः। प्रभु । तर TTFUTürsewafa 3100 The aflix 3 comes after the verb yn hen it is preceded by the upisarzis for sand 79, providel that the word to be foimed does not mean on appellative A faye nil pervading, ay: 'lord, y Cruator Why do we say when it is not a proper pamc? Oberro fans' per- 501 culled Vibha Varl-The words faire duce also are formed by the affix As fm 'the sea', dye' caueing happiness I his hng the forcs of Intent cansativo as y (9) ****#ly: 'causing happiuess'. So also wagi ३९६१ । धः फर्मणि छन् । ३ । २ । १८१ । एटो पाम करणारयाद ।' धात्री जापानलनीवारपमा । 3161 The aſi, shtran comes, ju denoting the object, nftar the verb u to feede'. The indicatory denotes that the femınır e 11 form by $¢ (t) alit. AAVIRTI' the mother" whom the children fuck (1hmyzati) 2, tha Amal aki fruit, Inch holds (sladhalı) all in-diehuil prop rtica)', 'tho karib" which sustnins all), 4 tb: wil nurs'. S. Amskou111.3 176. 1 ·tije ripATA AFFIXES 143 VOL II PIRT II Chip II S 3164 ) ३९६२ । दाम्नीशस्युयुजस्तुतदसिसिचगिहपतदशनह करणे । ३ । २।१२। दायादेः स्यात्करएऽय । पायस्पनेन दागम् । भम् । 3162 The aflix sutran rith the sense of instrument, comes after the verbs दाप to cut नी 'to lend' पम् 'to hurt', यु 'to join', यु to join 597 to praise, I to inflict pain' fo 'to bind', सिंच 'to sprinkle', मिE to uine, पत् 'to fall, दस to bite' and auto bind As in Ist sing neuter 199 a sickle (int that with which one cuts) मेल 1st sung भगम् eye ३१६३ । नितुनतथतिनुसर कसेषु च । ७।२।। एषा दगा कृ सत्ययानामिदन रयात । यम् । योत्रम् । पोफत्रम् । स्तोत्रम् । तोत्रम् । क्षेत्रम् । पेदत्रम् । कम । पत्नर । दपटा। मट्टी। 3163 The rzaugment is not taken by the following Krit affires -ति तु न त प सि गु सर क and ॥ (VII 2 9) a weapon at the t e that fast ns th sohe 12.79 the the of yoke स्तोत्र ap n gyric तोत्र 'a goad सेत्र 'aligament मेध sprinkling vess | मेरम् the penis पत्रम् a vehiclo rest a large tooth The word zeer belongs to the AjQir class and hence forms its feminine in टाप (शा) and not int (IY 14) . The root To is read in the aphorism w thout its nasal 2 e as I This indicates by implicat oi that you loses its nasal b fore some affixes such as क्युर् thus we h ve दयनम् tooth And lastly as+न्ध fem मनी (VIII 2 34) and 40) a thong Mote -Thus (1) तिच्-तति: but तनिता तनितुम किम् दीप्ति: bit दीपिता दीपितुम् ॥ (१) तुन (Un I 70)-राक्त: but राषिता सषितुम् ॥ (3) ष्ट न (III 2 182)-पन bat पतिता पतितुम् so also Unadia म् (Un IV 158) as त अम् from तन् । (4) (Un III 86)-हस्तः but दणिता इपितुम् so also लीव पीतः धूतः from ल H धूर्वि forming गेट लविता पमिता पूर्विता॥ Tae affis ment oned in tho sutra refers to this Un 1 स (Un III 86) and not to the त (क्त of Nishtha for tho Mish the a takes th augment, as इसितम् ॥ (5) कथन (Up II 2)-कुलम bub कोपिता कोपितुम् पार but कागिता फापितुम् (6) क्सि (Un III 157) as फुपिः bub कोपिता कोपिनुम् । (1) कम (Un III 157)-: but रपिता एपितम् (8) सरर (Un III 70)-अमरन ३९६४ । हलसूकरचो पुव ।३।२।१८३ । परमा स्यात् । मध्धे करण इतएकरपोरययः । इलस्य सूकरस्य वा पोप्रम। मुखभिस्यथा 3161 The list is employed after the verb : with the sense of instrument, then denoting a member of the body of & plough or of a hog .

·112 THE SIDDITIVT. MAUV101 (101 II PART II Chap II S 3159. A4, 7 4 'the oica', ** titres 1+foto (VI 1 10)=#4 + FETT (VIII 2 36) PTE (VIII 4 50)'n ho 34/3, 57CTET! w o praises long', A norm', 'swiit', sti'the goldess Lakshmi'. The word , which was ta’ntioned in the last sutrn 19 redund int bere Vart -There is reduplication of the verbs to shine', 'to go' and s' to insohe', shen free fullores Bs furcs of drisyate', tho nords got the designation of abhyasa so the doubling of the eighth adbyasd applies aleo, As, Fair'shining', -'going, the world. Vart -- Toeru 19 lengthening also of the vowel of 954 as y: 2 crescentshaped wooden Indio ugod for pouring the sacrificial ghee into tho firc.' Vart --Tno 1000 E' to feu' is shortened also, as t'flaridg.' Vari-The verb 'to think' 1148 simprasfrana , as ut: thinking ३१५८ । भुवः संज्ञान्तरयोः । ३ । २। १०९ । forgyale fyr I urtekoa afegia Tazaratë e afiryto I 3159 The alli forat comes after the verb 'to be wher the ord so formed denotes a napic or a sulety As, faryon person called Vibhû, fag'a surety 1e he lo stands intermediate b-tween the debtor and the cruditor' Su also fan11 ३१६० । विप्रसभ्यो ड्वसंशायाम् । ३।२।१०। एभ्यो भुधा हु स्यान्न तु गवायाम् विभुपमः । मभु स्वामी। सभुनिता । सज्ञायाँ पिy नीमच। • मितवादिस्य उपरारुपानम् . । मितं द्रतीति मितद्रुः । शतदुः। गम्भु । अन्तर् भाषित पय नभवति । 3160 The aflix comes after the verby when it is preceded by the upisargas fa 5 and y, providel that the word to be foi ined does not incan in appellative Ac fay: all pervading', fy: 'lord, Cnator Why do we gry' when it is not a proper dame? Observe fay'a per ou culled Vibhu Vart -The words fany &c, also are form-d by this affis As for *the sea', tye 'causing happiness This has the forc) of latent cangatire as (9) fa=TY: 'crusing happiness' So also works ३१६१ । धः कर्मणि छन् । ३ । २ । १८१ । पटो भान पयर्थे एम्स्यात् । 'पात्री जनभ्यामलकीपमुख्यपमातृपु' । 3161 The aflix shtran copes, 10 denoting the object, after the verb 'to feeit'. The indicatory denotes that the furginine is formed by T (6) nflix. As w1171, the mother" whom the ohildren suck (dhayantz) 2, the Amalakı fruit, which holds (iladhdly) all medictual properties)' 3, 'tha eart." which sustains all), 4 th: Wet aursa'. Sa Amirakozı 11[ 3 176. bor ·TIE RIPASTI AFFIXES, 143 TOL II Part 11 ciuir. II S 316+ } . 4. ३१६२ । दाम्गीशसयुयुजस्तुतुदसिसिमिहपतदशनहः करो । ३ । २।१८२ । दांपादः स्यारकर पोऽथ । पारपत्र दानम् । भद्रम् । 3102. The aſlis atran with the sense of instrument, comes after the rerbs दाप् 'to cint', मी 'to lend" to hurt', to join', पन् 'to join', प्त 'to praise', पुद ' to inflict pain', in * to bind', for 'to sprinklc', fars 'to urine', sito fall', 'to bite' and anto bind'. A५ दान, 1st. sing. nruter दाम् ' a sickle' (lit, that with which one cuts), ने 1st sing. भेगम् 'cyc .३१६३ । सितुतथसिनुसरफसेपु च । ७।२।। पा दगागां कृपयानामिएम रयार । शवम् । पोत्रम् । योफत्र । स्नोत्र । हो । पत्रम् । रोपप्रम् । बेदम । परप्रा । दप्ता । मधी। 3163. The re augment is not taken by the following Kșit. affires:-ति गु, घ,, प, मि, मु, गर, क and . TH (VII. 2.9) 'a weapon', is the tio that fasting the poke'; ***** • the tie of yoko', स्तोत्रं n pan gyric', तो 'a gond', 'aligament', नेत्र sprinkling vessal', भेस्टम् the penis', पत्रम् ' a vehicle', दा' a large tooth'. The word voor belongs to the djali class and hence forms its femaining • in eru (मा) and not int(IV.14). Tac ront FT 19 road in the aphorism without its nagil 1.c as 2. This indicates by unplication that Ty loses its nasal before some affiseg such as स्ट thus we have दयनम् 'tooth'. And lastly ar+arg fem. झी (VIII 2. 31), and 40), 'n thong'. Note. Thus (1) लिच-vिe: but तनिता तमितुम, छिन् दीति: but दीपिना, दीपितुम् । (१) (Un I70)-गक्त: but पिता, सचिनुम् । (3) (IIL2 182)-4 but पतिता, पतितुम so also Unidiy.(Un IV. 158), a तम्त्रम from a . (4) (Un III. 86)-स्त: but पिता, इषितुम् , so also लोड पीता, पूत from , पर्षि forming सेट् लपिता, पपिता पूर्विता । The affir mentioned in the satra refers to this Unilla (Un III 86), and not to the s{क्त of Nrshtha, for the Muh. the a takes the augment, as इसितम् । (5) क्यन् (UR II 2)-इम but कोपिता, कोपिनुम् , Frer but कालिा, फाधिपुर (6) मि (Un III. 155), as कृषि: but कोपिता, कोपिनुम् ॥ (1) म (Un III. 155)-: but रपिता, पितुर (8) हरर (Un III.70)-पार. ३१६४ । हलमूफरपोः पुवः ।३।२। १३ । अपनो पर ट्रयाद । तात्कार इलाकापोरवयवः । इतस्य कारप वा पोत्रम् । मुरामित्यपः। 3161. The aſlis is emplosed after the verb g with the sense of instrument, then denoting a member of the body of a plough or of a hog. .

·UTIN SIDDHANTA KAUNUDI [VOL II PART II CHAP II $ 8765 cut's $ The verb includes both and, as n'a plough shara', ist the snout of 8 hog'. ३१६५ । अर्तिलूधूसूखनसहचर इत्रः ।३।२।१८४ । रिसाए । सपिनम् । पदियम् । रविनम् । पमित्रम् । मरिग । परित्रम् । 3165 The aſüx comes after the verbs lo go', 'to "to shake', 'to bring forth', 'to dig', or to bear', and it to go with the sense of instrument Thay, sfera rudder', aft* a Bichla, ufa'a fan', the cause of production', afatet ' & spade', sifat patience, vicr'an instituted obsery ance or a narrative' ३१६६ । सुव. सज्ञायाम् । ३।२ । ३८५। पषितम् । येनापमुत्पूपते पापानामिकादेष्टनम् । 3166 The aflix comes after the verb 'to purify with the force of the instrument, when the sense of the complete word 18 simply appellature, and not descriptive The verb I inclades two verbs and both meaning to purify', but belonging to two different conjugations, as wur'an 2nstrument for cleansing or purifying' such as a sieve or a strainer, and in this sense ad mrans two blades of Kusa graSS used at sacrifices in purifying and sprinkling ghee' It also means the sacred thread the clarified butter ३१६७ कर्तरि घर्षिदेवतयोः । ३ । २।१८६ । पुत्रा पार अशी बरणे देवतायां कर्तरि । अपिदमा मपिति वर्ष भाद। पुरते मेमेति परित्र । देवतावा अग्नि पनि मा पुनातु । 3167 Thc allis Tw comes after the verb g' to purify'ın tho sense of the agent or the instrument when it is respectively employed in connection with a Vedic mantri di a deity That 19 to say, when applied to a Rushi tho force :s that of an instru. ment, and when applied to & Devald the force is that of an agent As furniturf«'thus Vedic Ruhr or the Mantra of the Veda 19 sacred (through whose instrumentality onc 15 sanctificd) The word Richt here means mantra Or Esored Vedic verse' as we find in the Benta.co * yforrt sigt tietyn 'the God Agni is sacred (one that purifica) "let hum panſy ine. So also, the tas infra gre! INI ENDS THE FIRST PART OF THE KRITATFITS ܝܘܝܠ ·THE UNADI SỦTRAS. 9 The Unddi suffixes, though 15 necessary as the Kridanta once and as important as tho taddhile suffixes added to the nouns of the grand patha, arc seldom treated of in ordinary treatises of grammar as an essential subjact of grammatical instruction Pånını himself, though diffuso in other respects stops short when treating of the Unalis by saying “Una layo bahulam, they are too many Morcover tho foi mition of Unads words are so vury arbitrary and complicated on account of the insartion, transposition, substitution and transmutation of lettars by tho indeterminate laws of prosthesis, epenth-919 metathesis, paragoge, syna lepha, synesis synacresis, synecphonesis, &c, that it can hardly be brought under the definite rules of prrmutation by sindhi, or reduced under the strictest forms of grammir for the adhesion of these suffixes The primary signification of the root also is utterly lost in the drivative word formed from it Dr Carey, at the end of big Sanskrit Grammar, hag a Chapter devoted to the rules for the formation of aun_dika words and says they were contrived by the ancient grammarıın Kátslyana for th. derivation of doubtful nords in the same manner is the Sautra roots are supposed for the themes of some derivative words of uncertain origin Dr Aufrecht, in the preface to his edition of the Unádr vritto says "The Onádı Satras are rules for deriving from the acknowledg 1 verbal roots of th> Sanskrit, a number of appellative nouns by moans of a species of suffixes, which, though nearly allied to the so called hrits, are not commonly us d for the purposes of derivation Again in another place, for distinguishing them from the luret suffixes, he 'says, We find the Lrit suflixes in whole classes of verbs, employed for the same purpose, and gubject to the samo grammatical laws. The Undez suffices on the contrary, seem in both respects to baffle the efforts of the grammarian who tries to bind them to a definite rule Lastly, it must be confessed that the derivations given of Unude words are frequently arbitrary and whimsical' Decessary to notice in this plac, in the words of Goldstucker, p 171, " that there were two classes of scholars in ancient India, who entertained different views of the formation of words--the onº comprising the Nayraktas or etymologists (excops Gârgys), and the other consisting of some of th Varyal aranas or grainmariads, and the etymologist Gårgya. The former maintained that all poting are derived from perbal roots, and the latter that only those nouns are so derived in which the accent and formation arc regular, and the sense of which can be traced to the verbal root, 19 It 19 ·116 TIK SIBDULYT. K&OSADI. which is held to be their origin." The former prove the possibility of the undertaking, by the Nirhett and Unddi Stras, as Yasla says, JWTCOUTET wife 479777 974747 "that all nouos derise their origlar from Yerls , 50 says Sálatayari, and all the commentators of the Vedas " Th9 latter denied the po sibility of deriving the Unâdı words froin verbal roots. Patanjali, in his commentary on Pánını, says *17**ITTANT Astagfenfor "Unádts are crude forms without origin," and another grammarian, उसादीनि यथा जातानि तया साधूमि "the Unidi words are perfecs as they are," thus expressing the opinion that it is impossible to assign to them the same grammatical rules to which we are accustomed in other words. "We have no direct tradition," says Aufrecht, "ag to the nuthor of the sutras. They sere composed before the time of Pánni, as they are refirred to by lum in two different passages of his grimmar. The fact, howerer, that both Yasha and the author of the Kárika (175(WWE CET at*) specify Sákatáyına as the grammarian who derived all nouns from perls, speaks in favour of Nágoji's conjecture that the authorship 13 to be attributed to Sálatsyana " Again says he, on page IX, "Fhat in Virala's Ruparáis grammar, I find the statemont that Vararucht is their author." uit Egélatata ai T 7914 Taifa watu 77 7747für carftri This assertion which mahes Vararuch older than Pamını, would have a c'aim to probability But if Yarırucht be another name for Katyayana, then Dr Carey's text of the sûtras has every right to be attributed to inn. Goldstucker, however, in his atrictures on Aufrecht, would not have him for the elder Kátyáyana, but Vararůchi himself, who no ha explains from the above passage on pago 171, composed a separate work of bis own on the Unadı Sutras in order to allgstrate tho suffixe Ho does not allow the Unadr Sutras to be anterior to Púnini, but acknonledges tho suffire to be of higher antiquity, and that Pániou lired a considerable time before the author of the Unid: Sutras, who compled type for supplying the defects in Pánini s york (Dr. Rajendralal Mitra).

·PADA I $) TIC UVEDI AFFIXE 14T प्रथउणादयः। THL UNÂDI AFFIXES PADA I 3 pi garanfitealegre TFT IT!! data ott forst 1754 saat g*- (1954) i vratiar ago I TITT प्रयत्यभिभवति रोगामायुरोपपम् । मिनोति प्रथिपति देहे करमाणमिति माय पितए । पाद। Trenta 1715 ery: à 4 1 171 matffi TIETO FUTE 1 The affix un comes after ri'to do' (VIII 10), wa sto sccut to blon (II 41) Npl to drink, 'to protect'(I 072, II 17) wji to conquer' (I 593) wmi to throw (V 1) /srad ** to bo pleasant to taste (I 18) sidlı to accomplish' (V 17) and su to pervade (118) Thus F+sa=*Et 3=*7*: an art ficer artist 16 the maker att T +1+9# -- 5w (the augme t yuk s added by VII 3 33 $ 2761) = vini 14 the blower 97 +=: anus protector In th slast sense wc find it ta भुयस्तस्य स्वतया पायुराने (स्यतयान नपायुस्यतया पायु: VILL 3 11 S 363) See Iso Am rahos1 I 6 73 So also fatto onligt med अगदोडायु: ATharakosa So also मि+उ = मायु: ble phleg n (imaralosal 66") It means sound also tas + 5*=*213 Sweet St*+5=Try saint lut who helps or accomplish s the work of another y quick See Amara ko II J 15 By virtue of III 31 S 3169 the unadı aff'scs are added to roots other than those specifically ment oped in these sutras because of bahu lam ( diversely try Thus / to abandon-T5: the demon Rahu 1t that which after catching the Moon aga n abandons it at to dwell The Container the All prvnd ng It 'that in wh ch all duell or who d vells every where He who is All pervading (v&sa) and divine (Deva) 23 called V sudesa २। छन्दसीण ।१।२। मा म प्रायो। In the Vedas the nffix comes after (to go) Thus इण+उ =ऐ+उ:शाप+उपाय: m_n 19 in Fanart utgange { c (Rig I 31 11) T F and RTT trait &c (Rig I 114 8) This sty 13 a word end og in and sboald be dis rice .

·1481 TEL SIDDBATA KAOMADI (r?DA 19 1 tjogarbed from the word nie ending in T which is formed by the affis or (Seo Undd: II 118) In the classical Sanskrit the word 79T maan. ing 'life pcriol' of man, 13 Neuter and ends always in 7 Sue Amar aosh (1. 8. 119.) gafasistat! So also werer and actys i ३। हरानिजनिचरिघटिभ्यो झुण् । १।३। दीर्पत इति दारू । 'पु. प्रस्थः सानुरणियाम्'। भानु । जानुनी । दाननिषष्पोर (१५१२) इति न निपेयः । अनुबन्धद्वपमामात । चार रायम् । पाटु प्रिय धाश्यम् । एगरमादित्वारा 77' F1 3 The nffis íun comes after tlıc roots viri (I. SIG) 'to tear, sbrou (I. 192) * to give', wjini(I 862) 'to beget', chira "to walk' (I 391) and cliata (I 316) 'to pierce' Thus + 5T=7**' tiruber'(imurahosa II. 4. 1,3) lit.' thint which is forn usunder' BTS timmt' (A. K II 1,5)men hner dual stat llure the purchaslation against stalohi, ne orilained by VII 335,8 2512.3166 apply, becau«e the afite tu has two letters end of both of which are potent enough to produce sruddhi. If the triddhi force of one I tuet bloerd by VII 3.35' the other letter will product ide effect *, 'ple want' ut?" flattery' or • Nattering speech'. Another form is derived by alexing 5 undor Mſignsrádi cl74* ४। किारयोः श्रियाः । १।४। fost testation frants Tarn HIFI TÀIA Treinar Iriott *er** 1. Thn alix ñill comes after sri (IX, 19) to injure' precoded by kim, ann (II 30) to go' precedolly jaro 'Tsh+FxYT ***V-farao'l' bol ut coru.'* ' * 1.0. I and III 1 162 ) 2 +14 **CO: 't'fr 11 rus' (1 h. i 4.6) '1h4 Blant Rama kaya hia turu 102. 13anthe car on, ku arros, I run litt r' It ip sd91, r bl yk ) intain also 4. TIT 17:19:41 strain rol of 1 'Ilia aſfix ss conas after tho /tri (1 1014) to moet Over and to go ani thorolis its is chanuato. Thner-*** Prateling' os relath and is ofteret**. T** påtra * * 11 **** 597 * tn'o it, then 74 1. ***** C***** gatalo', .qa A.KI yr*****ix y zig..'zingitis *** very pis Persona ·PADA ISS TIL LAADI AFFITEA 149 6 The affit fiun come safter the /vachi (III Ut) 'tosreak' precedc by and tho 15 Changel into a Thus व + मुरवाए: (ap ncucky it that which apk or makes goud through the throat. Krike sa throat 11851 KOBA 1/4" Kſikurkki merns a peacok and a lizard (Unruta) anla cock (charindyuithi) । भूभशीत चरित्सरितनिधनिमिमस्तिभ्य उः । १।७। गीविभर्ति वा भावामी परम प्रियतेऽस्लिानि मानिसदेगा। मेले मयुरनगर। तपशः । पति भान्ति देवता मिति चाप बङ्गारिष्टिः। तमापन । तग्यते सर्मपागोणपा मगु गरीरम शिया भूमि मुरूमा । धनुः गाविप न पर्षदुः । 'परिपानि वा दति बीराम किम्मरा टु पानीयकामिका रम) । यर यपादिस्वारकुरष राधेनारयदा। 7. The aflix comes after tlic hrı (I 916 to support) /mrt (VI 110 to die) /si II 32 {to sleep), a (to cross OILr), पर (ty mon), 'to cnt' र (to go with speed), तन (to sprend), भन (to *pro luce ou yicld coin), fo (to scatter,) REX (to purifs) This 4+1=1T: *Master, Goj lit, who supports, T: 'descrt", lite then u iturly place where people die wat python' lit. who sleeps (A K. IS 5), at: trcc', lit by which the plant rs thereof cross the hell i • clinru, the food offered to the gods lite that which the Deras est स्मरा swerd,' th fist' ng a little ', 'body' (fem) Then it is cither ist or 141 Literally that by which the noose of Karın is drawn out 19 tanuns cmlodiment means furtber production of ncy karmar धनु: bow' The worl vy ending in 19 masculine Another form 1s धनुम् ending म् । Ta' masculino form 19 found in the following verse of Sri Harsha vyfoot fx So also from f-:' kinnira (400 A. K.I. 1 146. The si required by VI I 50 S 250do s not tale place as a diversity. So also + "Ur'an aquatıc birl, Int that which immerses itself in water. Rabbası suys mudgu aud Paniya kalikî aro synonyms" The * is gutturalised to * by its belongiog to Nyanbradi class The or becomes by au change. ८। अलश्च । १।८। 'सपलेपणा' पारकटियटिभ्याम् । कति रसना कटुः । पति पदतीति पहा 8 The aflis 5 comes after the root ** (I 471 to sound). Thus star+y= (an atom) By force of the words, thus aflix comes after फट् (to go) and ue (to surround), also कुटु as ' bitter' that which cuts tho tongu , यदु: Aprker, the child of a twiceborn.' । धान्ये नित् । १।। पाम्ये वाध्याय वमत्यया स्यात् । स च नित । निस्वादादाता । प्रियाणवलपहने। प्रीमिदस्याः पुमार । नियार 'प्रतिपादि-'शादिसमभिध्याय समयदे। .

·152 TIB SIDDHA YTA KIUMADI (INDI I $ 22 - 18 The affire and the augment is come after the roots (to berr frut), vr replaced by T (to go), 79 (to silute to bow down) replaced by *** ** (to consider, to think), 1 (to be born), the final 7 s of the last two roos are respectirely replaced by vand a # rhus फल+गु+3= फरगुः 'unsubstantial पटुः 'cl ver ना 'an hito ant hill A, K II 1 14 Ty'sweet and ry: ' a demon red resin of certain trees १९ । वलेक्च । १ । १८ । 'घल सवरणे. 19 The augment va comes after the root oe (I 520 .to live',) before the affix Thus av +=TET 'benutiful The root is /vala vora (1 520) २। श. कित्सन्वच्च । १। २० । रयतेर स्यात्स च फित्व बच । यिर्यालः । 20 The affir sis face and is treated like (desideratue) aftei the #(IV 39) 'to slırpen', 'to make thin' Thus foy: 'child, +3=TTE (VI 1 45 S 2370)=TT43= foto (S 2317)-fwy: (VI 4 61 S 2373) २१ । यो वे च । १। २२ । grafefa aga tofauiteraardgrzůstituta 21 The flixecomes after tho Ferb (IT 10) 'to go 17727', and it is doubled Thusza: 'alors fit for the Asram-dha sacrifice' T*T=147+3=17! IIad the affis been like tho desideratı ve ns in tho last the form would have been fags by wa S 2317 Hence the eútra kara uscg tho words dicha "There is doubling but not like Sanvad २२ । कुधश्च । १।२२। exy mama? facet on agafati transfer i pitati 22. The rugment 9 comes after thic root : (I 916 III 6) "to support, and the root is doubled Thus wysn epithet of Slia, Brown vs menns thc Valve mara fire 2, the Süldpin-the Trident currier, 3 tho Garudt binnered (ashion!, broar 5 mungon In three Bunyong it 17 masculine, wh naljat it means "brown, and th n takes the gen for of the no in it qualifica By force of tho Tori'an, tha afir comes after othar ronta also As+****!'ag.at, ti+furry 'hiller "+yazi 'protector 1 1 ·PADA. 5271 TUE UNADI ATTIXES. 183 . २३ । पृभिदिव्याधिगृधिधृषिभ्यः। १ । २३ । कु. स्यार | पु । भिमति भिधम् । 'प्रपिण्या-(२४१२) इति संप्रसारणम् । पिरहिच विध्यति यिधुः । 'विधुः शशाङ्क करे पीके पराए । अधुः कामः । पर्दछ। 23. The affix şcomes after the verbs ? (III. 1,) 'to proteot, to fill mp', भिद (72) to divide', यध (4. 72) 'to hurt', पूध (4. 136) -to desire', Yष (6. 22.) 'to conquer' [and हर (1. 741, 4. 110) to rejoice'.] Thus पुरा [+कु-पु+5 (VII 1. 102 S. 2494)-पुर+r]. ' much' heaven; the name of a prince, the pollen of flowers fugo 'Indra's thunderbolt', lit. that which splits asunder fagfrom tra, the c is vocnlized to by S.2412 It means the moun, lit. he who pains the lonely whogo lover is absent'. Tne Visvakosha gives its meaning as "The moon, 2, the camphor, 3, tho Hrishik.gh, and Rakshasn. SH: 'God of loro', y: expert' rgt' pleasant','sun', 'tre',' Rahu.' २४ । कृयोरुञ्च । १।२४। करोतीवि कु.। गुणरतीति गुरु। 21 The affix y comes after the roots x (VIII. 10) 'to do', and 7 (IX, 28) 'to sound' and vis substituted in the place of and follows such uby S. 70. Thus कुष: 'a species of amaranth, गुरु! 's spiritual preceptor. Kuru is the name of a King: it means 'a priest'aod 'boiled rica 'algo. २५ । आपदुः सुषु स्थः।१। २५ । 'सुपामादिषु च' (१०२२) इति पत्वम् । प्रपष्ठ प्रतिकृतम् । दुव । सुष्टु । 25 The affix हु comes after the verb स्या (I. 976.) to stand when it is preceded by थप, हुए and म. Thus अपतु : ' unfavourable', 'a child' दुष्ठ: 'a wicked parson. ' पुछु ।' good person.' The 8 of Eat is changed to v under VIII. 3. 98. S. 1022 as these words are considered to belong to the Sush&madı clasg. २६ । रपेरिच्चोपधायाः।१।२६ । घनिष्टं रपतीति रिपुः 26 The affix कु comes after the verb प (I. 428) 'to speak', and its penultimatt sy is changed to Thus figi'enemy' lit. who talks always to the injury of one. २७१ अर्जिशिकम्यमिपशियाधामनिपशितुग्धुग्योघहकारश्च। १.२७ । यति गुणानुजः । सर्वातवियल पश्यतीति पशुः । कन्तुः । अन्धुः फूपः । 'पांगुर्ना म स्यो रजा'। तालव्या अपिदरल्याच भबसूरपासवा' । माघत इति बाहुः पीपयोर्भुजः । 20 . .

·164 THE SIDDEAVTA KAUBADI PADA I $7) • 27 Before the aflis is substituted for you (I 242, I 186) 'to gain', 97 is substituted for 5(I 1037) Što sec,' the augment is added to me (I 470 869) 'to desire,' to spor (1 493, 869, X 180) 'to be afllıcted ritli disease', long 18 substituted for the short of oft (10 179) 'to destroy', and I for the final of 2 (1 5) 'to oppress' Thus : straight, lit who acquires or takes up good points or qualities wys 'cattle' lit who seo all without discriminating anything my *cupid ng a well', urg: 'dost : manure, 97* 'arm , lit that Yhich obstructs The word "rg 19 spelt es aig also It is masculine Sco A K II 8 98 (araat &c) The three words to art and are spelt with the pala al Talso instead of the dental Tag Th TnT and 975 I ETT 13 mascun lino , while its synonym Titi 15 both masculine and fominino as yuri ८। प्रथिम्नदिधस्जा सप्रसारण सलोपश्च । १ । २८ । प्रयाणा कु. रप्रसारण भस्जे पलोपा । पशु एवः । पक्षवादिस्वादकुरवम् । पति तपणा एगु॥ 28 The allix is added to the roots au (I 802) 'to becomo known', ** (I 804) 'to orusli' and yTH (VI+) to try', and thero is the rocalisation of into and tho olision of the v of brasy.. Thus mi wido, : 'delicato vyl'n Rishi The # 18 changed to v ng the word is considared to belong to tho Nyankrádi class literally it means 'ho who parch 9 up by the force of austerity २९ । पघियह पोर्नलोपश्य । १ ।२६। पासनललप्पलनातीना था तो रावणापाते । पभेदः। पर 20 Tho alix comes after the roots - (I 109, 1721 220, 231) 'to lcap' and ** (I CG1) 'to incrcase' and the nasal . 13 elided Thus wyi'light' orgi' mang' Vart-Tio 17 13 optionally replaced by tin the following - Alo, mala laghn alams and apgul That me or te, Or y or of wer and for unic i Raguu is the name of a King, tha ancestor of Sri Rama Chandra ३२. कर्णतेनुगोपश्च । १।३। 30 Ilic aflix y comes after tho root ** (11.30)'to corcr', and tlic of tfic serb 13 chiod thereby. f * 'Ile thigh ·TADA. I 53 THE UNADIATEIXES. 155 ३१ । महति स्यश्च । १।३१ । . 31 Thom of * is sliortened when the scnsc is that of great'. Thus **' precious'. ३२ । निः फरच । १।३२॥ लिप्यतीति निसरया । उदातोपोमित्र । 32. The aflity comes after the root frue (I. 731, IV. 77, X. 38) 'to embrace', and the final is changed to # # Thus fomy 'scrvant', 'a libert ne','astronomy'. ३३ । प्रापरयोः सनिशभ्यां हिन्ध । १ । ३३ । या पतीस्यातुः । पर मातीति परः । पोरादित्वासारणोपारपरपि। 33 The verb रान (I 027) 'todig up', preccicl by था, and (9 18) 'to hurt', prccaled by to take the affix y.and thereby the list romel and the consonant following it aro elide l. Thns xy' a mous', Iits that which digs all round, TTU 'A weason in general', nt that which hurts an cnrmy. The rordrumes th-fornvi also, by the closion of v of and eth Prreho/?r2 )1 cl 253 ३४ । हरिमितयोमुवः । १।३४ । 'गतो स्मारिपित्योपपदयोकु य प हित हरिभिपते परत । मिति भितः समुद्रा 31 Thic verb 3 (1 902, 1.31) 'fo run', preceded by efror fra, takes the allir s under the same circunstanccs. Thus fig: a hind of tree', fans. 'Ocean ।१।३५॥ पतमापति मतदुः । पाहुशारकेवडादपि । द्रवपूर्वमिति दुईमाता मान्दुमा । 35. So also when s (I 002, V. 31) 'to run's preceded by ३५ । शते . Thus uagi= Erfa literally that which roos 10 a bopdred differrent chippels By force of the ford træ, the Affis comes, even after the rootsingis. Asr (5+=+3=51 7 tres) R branch of a tres, lit. that which goes up. That which posses "drn' or bratuches, is called a tree. S 1915. ३६ । सरुश कु पीयु नील लिगु । १।३६ । पाते कुमत्पपाता निकायले । एते रेषनागलादेशः । रारा कामः ।रो मुरवार। 'गर्मा कोतपरयो । पिस्तरीय पुगागनच । पोयुर्वापस बात सुदर्ष चा निपूर्यान्सगिगता ·136 TIE SIDDHA VTA KÄOMADI (PADA 1 93 . 2 5 यस्मारकुरदने दीर्यश्च । नीला कृमिविशेष गृगालहा 'नीला इति पाठान्तरम् । वत्र धातारपि दीपः। लगे सो प्रस्मात इस च । सगनीति लिगु पितम् । लिगुमूरः। S6 The five words tre, vesty stars, and fay are irregularly formed by saflis. GT 13 from to dig' (1 827), ug from Jaff to doubt' (I 86). In the of khan 39 replaced by before the affixu Kharu means cupid cruel, stupid and a hora It is the natue of a Daityr also means also wbite It is the name of Siva es masenhe means 'a dart spear spike javelin dagger, 'a stake' a nail, pin or peg, 'poison', 'a measure of twelve fingers, the line of altitude', 'the trunk of a tree'. 3 gr is from Jap'to drink the st 19 changed to f and augment 73 added before I It means & Crow, time, gold, 'the son, wwful 4 F 13 from afat' to go (I 164) preceded by for the sowel r is lengthened before 1 Some derive it from its + +, the va ofera 19 elided and tho augneut y 13 added Another form 19 stark where the root vowel is also lengthened 'It means 'an ins ct,'a jackal, a largo black beo fay from * to adhere' (I 823) the 19 changed to x fery (Neot) the 'heart, fary: 'A block head (masc) ३७ । मृगय्यादयश्च । १।३७ । शाकुमरपयाला निपाल्यग्वे । एग पातीति एगर्याधः । देवपुर्धार्मिवार । मित्रगुतोकयात्रा fror i 12 favets 37 So also tho words met 'lunter' &c are arrogularly formed by the affir şi 1 hus gorge a hunter, lite "ono riho goes (y Ati) after deer, fago * pious, Tvrtat an expert in worldly matters, friendly' It 19 an Akpitiyant Acre -Jlry ayız means 'a jackal hunter the Suprums Spirit. Onts wuris not cnumerated abovo also le long to this claus potes to check ' an c'ephont,'a trea', 'tho trunk cf a tree an atom, a frut.' it Ary fus generally mean by this word 'a tree', the Blechchhis apply ut pliut (Jy") So also weis' to go 'yallory &r, with to vredhs of the rust vowels vafi'lo bo proud, sesi'ncing ३८ । मन्दिगाविमधियतिपटक यह फिभ्य उरम् । १।३८ । Tomar iegt afres IqY WYTI tarnosti ova'sirer या। 35 llc aflix weer comes after the verbs arma (1 17) to 136 &c, 1 (101) 't voir', ** (1 001) 'to olurn', ** + ·PADI. I. $ 40 ) TNE VYADI AYTIXES. 157 (I. 918) ' to beg', (I. 93, 620) 'to resisť and wf (I 67) to count or marl'. Thus somet'e stablo for horseg' at 'night' lit. in which anıınals, roar, RYT'& town', UT 'canding', 3T: 'a churiat, a tree', agri'root' blood' oa r of the body', 'drink', 'sprout'. The word is wit also with long , when it belongs to the Kharjur&di clasy, and takes ibo afix ३८ । व्यथेः संप्रसारणं किच्च । १।३९ । "यिपुरधाररसपा। 30. Tho nflix str comes after the verb ** (I. 801) 'to bo afraid, or vexca', thor is changed to " and the aflix is treated as if it had an indicatory ! Tlus fagt: 'a thirf' a Rakshas', sce V.4 68. S. 676 Padamanjari. Notc.---Another reading of tho sâtra 1919: ATI' ut i By this *the is changed to v also. According to this seading we cannot get the form fage 1 But this is a valid form as found in the Vedas:- i farger TTTATI So also ut fugt fuglafret i Thero 19 however another word feyr with lh also It 13 derived from t'a yok: or axle' compounded with the proposition fa and means 'whose yoke or companion 19 gono', henco, distressed, love lorn ४० । मुसुरदर्दुरौ।१।४। भुकुरो दर्पणः । पाहुलकामकुरोऽपि । दरिदार पातोदिनभ्यासस्य रविटसोपय। 'दईरस्तापदे भेफे पादाभारहाद्रिभेदयो' । दस परिहकायां स्यानामजाप्ते दरम्' रति 40 The words SFt 'a mirror', and opefrog', are formed by ste atis. Apother forin of ITT 18 *** Th s is because of the word babulam. From wdri 'to tcrr' (IX. 23) is obtained by reduplication, and addiog vaagment to the abhyasa, and eliding the final consonant, with the vowel that rreccdcs it Dardurah meras cloud', 'a frog', a musical 10strument like fute &c','a mountain', and the name of a mouutain in the south. The Feminine est means 'Chaņdık - Dame of Durga'. The Neuter in group or ass-mbly of villages'. (Visca Loga). Nole-From 1*' lo adorn' (1. 89), is formed by addiog er and dropping the na al It means 'n mirror', 'the Bakula tree', 'the rod or handle of a potter's heel'. Durdurr is derived by some by the guiña of dri, and the addition of the augment Lestead of 777er other read. ings are 'दाम जाज्ञ and याममाला ·158 TIL SIDDHAXTI TAUHIDI. [rADAI541. - ४१ । मद्रायश्च । १।४। तरता रिपाराले जापानपुरी भास्वमेव का पर्व | ATMENT सरमा पतरिवारोऽपि पुरानो सान मामुन्दरपाधिपति रस्तिका 'दोषygust 11. So also with the Tords 90' a kind of fish' and the rest. These are words tormed by the afil सर । 1 From /नदी is formed चद्गुर Fth the angment ! It is the name of a kind of fish /मदी'to be glad (IV. 99) ./' to colour' (I 403), ine augment us । It means white, and 'a domon' Karburam (Neut.) 'water', 'gold'. Karburah (mago )'sin',' an evil spirie', Karbura (rem ) none of a plant.' 3 ayte from FT (IX 37) 'to bind' As it belongs to the Khar- Juridi class also, बम्पुर with long & is also valid. It means • bent', and "lovely' and is used in all the three genders. Vart --The augment कुक् is optionally added to the / to accept (I HI) before the affix परन् । As कुक, nor कुकुर 'adog.'. Simtlarly/me to move continuously'-पानुर'hurt',/ar to blow'- TUTT the augment 74 1$ added 'a trap, a pet'. ४२ । असेरुरन् । १।४२ । असुररामायण । धासुरु 42 The verb अम् (IV. 100) "to throw up takes the affix . 4. Thus sigo: 'a demon', with the wee of the Prajñadı class Witt 'demoniac'. (V 4, 88) ४३ । मसेश्च । १।५३ । पाच पादे 'मकरन्' इति पश्यते । 'मसूरा मपुरा ब्रीदिम्भेदे परययोपिति । मसरा मसुरा चामा रयानीप्रिभेदयो । मसूरी पादरोगे स्यादुपधाने पुनः पुमान् । 'भरमसुरी मो इति विश्वः। 43. The Terba (4 112) * to measure'' to become changed' also takes the stafix. Thus मसुरा' kind of small pulse ' 'a harlot' In the Fifth Pada, there is asatra declaring that the verb मम takes the afix परन् । So we get मसरा a lentil,' a harlot'. In thes- Benses the words are masculine optionnily namely भर: or मसूर । while भरी means a kind of disease, small pox', and भरा (masc) means pillow', also ४४ । शायशेराप्तो।१।४४ । शुरदापय । खारा । पतिपत्म्यो। प्रमः पा मारस्तु पिता तो भरा ·PADI I 548] TEX UXADI ATTIL 159 44. Tho vorby (5 18 ) to pervade, preceded by the abbreviated form of my takes the allix so when the senso is that of obtaining Thus पशुरः 'father in law' थ+सम् + परम् - T ++उ == 'wife's father, or husbands father'. Fem खना। See Amarakoga. (II 631) ४५ । प्रयिमहयोष्टिपच् । १ । ४५ । चविष: महिषा 45. The affix fere comes after the verbs wa (I 631). 'to protect', and HE (I 766) 'to worship'. . Thus विष: 'The Ocean, a king', मरिष: 'great' (Buffalo) • The dermon Mahisha . As नुरीयं धाम महियो विक्ति। So also उत माता मरियममधेनत् । Fem. महिपी'Queen' ४६ । अमेर्दीर्घश्च । १।४६ । सामिष त्वनिया मासे तथा स्पादोग्यवस्तुनि । 46. The aflix टिपच् comes after the verb अम् (I. 493,869) •to eat' Thus धाभिषम् - food , " flesh food', 'an object of enjoyment'. ४७ । रुहे द्विश्च । १ । ४७ । 'हुशायरोहिषा'। रोहियो गभेदे स्यादौडिर्ष प तुप मतम्' इति बसारापतः । 47 Tho affix fere comes after the verb « (I, 912) to grow, and there is vriddh of the vowel of the root Thus रोहियम् 'akind of deer' kind of straw'. Thus एतु गम्वर and रोरिष are different kinds of deer areas (masc) 19 a kind of deer, afrat (neut) 10 grass (Sansaravarta) ४८ । तवेर्णिद्वा ।१।४।। "तव' इति सोप्रो धातुः । तसिपताविपावग्यो स्वर्ग च'। खिया तविषी-ताविपीनदी देवन न्या भूमिव । 'सविपी बलम्' इति धेदभाध्यक्ष । 48 The affix fere comes after the verb ta' to be powerful and it is treated as if it had an indicatory Ti The as 19 a Sautra root. The words afari and arfari mean tha Ocean' and 'heaven' The feminine afarent or mfast means 'a rifer', divine nymph, daughter of Indra', and 'the earth' afast means power' according to the Veda Bhashya, as in the following Vedic Mantras -दो वृषस्य तषिषीय एदस्यात्र तविधीभ्यो बिरशिद । It means strong, and old in the Vedas. Gold is one of its meanings 4.

·100 TOE SIDDI VTA KAUMADI. [PADA I 549 - ४ । नञि व्यथे ।१।४ । घथियोऽग्धिसूर्ययो । प्रधयिषी धरातायो। 49 The afir हिप comesafter the rerb यर (I SO1y to be agitated', when it is preceded by tho urgative prrticles Thos Goof: The Ocean'' the sun The feminino ogreat, the carth the midnight ५० । फिलयुक्च । १।५० । किल्पिषम् । 50 Thoaugment or is added to fore wlica theaflix comes after the verb किल (VI 61) 'to become white', 'to play' Thus fofera sin', 'discase' a fault ५१ इषिमदिमुदिनिदिशिदिभिदिनन्दिचन्दितिमिमिष्टिमुहिमुचि- रुचिरुधिवन्धिसुपिभ्य. किरच् । ११ । ५१ । इपिरोमि। मदिरा मुरा । 'मुदिरा फामुकाघ्रयोः इति विश्व मेदिन्यो । सिदिचन्द्रः। विदिरोसिकुठारयोः । मिदिर पजम् । मन्दिर गृहम् । खियामपि । मन्दिर मदिरापि स्वार, रति विश्वः । चन्दिरी चन्द्रदस्तिमी । तिमिरं तमोऽक्षिरोगक्ष मिरिः पूर्यः। मुदिरा काप परयो । सुषिरा दाता । पिरम् । कधिरण । यपि० । अप पोषरो अपिर विनम् । अपकमित्याये। 51 The afir fair comes after the verbs « ( 59,) 'to wish', पदी (4_99, ) to delight, अ (I 16, ) 'to be glnd', खिद् (4 61,)* 10 suffer pain', शिदिर (73) 'to cut off', दिर (72) to perce through' मन्द (I 13) ' to praise', पन्द (I_68) 'to be glad on rejoice', तिम् (468) to be wet or damp' निI 1011) + to malc Inter', 'to wet's (4 89) to lose cousciousness', 5+ (6 136) "to relcase', ** (I 781)' to shine beautıfully', ( VII 1) 'to confine' ry (I1022,) to tie' T (4 74) to become dry' Thus rferro' fire afect' wine greco a cloid, a libertine (Vispa and Medini hosis) सिदिस an ascetic , the moon foto: a sword an axe fifty Thunder bolt, मन्दिरम् houss It is fem also नदिरा Vissa Kos: दरम् an elephant the moon तिमिरम् darsnss', eye disense fafts ''The sun, मुदिर 'Blockhead go lof love a libertine gferte'n generous man पिरम् ' Bright बधिरस् 'Blood , पश्सि Deat From /पुप 'to dry is formed yfurt a hole according to others it means 'dry Nole --Ishiram.food also Chilırah 'fire rops or cord aspad, Mandirim A city,'n house mandirth (masc ) 'an or all Mihira 'the sun, the mind Rudhirah (masc ) the planet Mars (n ut) saffron, and blood क *an axe ·102 TIC SIDDHAYTI KAUNODI. frads I 5 55 form palid under the Irishodarndi cl299 (VI 3 109) 5 fras'a hero',' bryant' from the snutra root/48 6. sfere 'ambassador', 'lucky', 7 altretta Rik', 8 feiresti 'an astıologer", "it' talkativo: 10 alfways Indian cuckoo', 11. Hari ' that which happens. By virtuo of babulam, e'to bo crooked', siendo ५५ । फमेः पश्च । १ । ५५ । offer 06. Tuo afir y comes after the rorb anu (T 170,)' to desiro', and the 19 changed to all Thus vf77: 'Tanny' 'the namo of a sage', 'a dog' 'Viskou inccnee', fem 'a broin cor', 'a kind of timber', 'a leecfi, 'n firc,' the sun'. ५६ । गुपादिभ्यः कित् । १ । ५६ । गुपितो राजा तिजिस मियाकरा दिल पनम् । 56. The aflis my comes after tho rerls ya(I 422)' to proteot' Lc. and the allie is trenta as if it 11211 in indioitory at Thus free' a bing', faforere the moon ftat'forest, from gupů to protect tijn (1 1020) to sharpen and enha (1 844) to cover ५७ । मिथिलादयश्च । १ । ५७ । मध्यन्तेात्र रिपचा मिथिला नगरी। पयिता-पथिका। 57. The words fafam 'ton' and the rest are formed by er allis, Thus forferest'the name of a city literally where the oneinis aro crushcd, (mathyante)' So also fear a traveller These aru from mathe (1 901) to agitate', and pathe (I. 900) to go ५८ । पतिकठिकुठिगडिगुडिदशिभ्य एरक । १।५८ । पते पक्षी ग ताप कठेर कृच्छ गोषी । फुठेरा पोशः । पाहुल पाम्मुन्न । गरो मेपा। 1758: 170 T: 1 58. The aflix comes after the Terb, 4 (T. $98, IV. 51) to fly', 77 (I. 356) 'to suffer prin oi trouble', pfo (I 805 ) 'to be blunted ', ** (I. 811) to watei' ( 677) 'to preservo' and TT (I. 1038)' to bite,' Thus vati a bird 'a traveller' wit'a man leading parful life' T'water pot' lhe nasal 18 not ad lıd as a diversity for the roft required a nasal the root being really 9981 TRT cloud', 'globe' :'cruel', 'ferocious.' ५९ । कुम्बेर्नलोपश्च । १।५। EL ·PADI. I. 504] THE UNIDI AFFIN. 103 60. Tho alix 545 comes after the verb ** (I. 103.) 'to cover' and the ntsal of the root is clided therebs. Thus तुर: the God of wealth: ६० । शदेत 11१।६०॥ पराप:. है - . ब . 60 'The affix w comes after the root मदत (I. 008,) 'to reristi', and the cis changed to al Thus gåti'an enemy', ६१ । मूलेरादयः । १।६१ । मा निपारयाते । भूलेरो जटा । एथेरो गोता। गुदेरी सोपात मोरो ना। 01. The words wic anil the restar formel lrs me affix. Thus tratti 'a lock of hair', it'a prot ctor' siti'a block hrad; oft 'n blicksmith These nro from mala 'to catablish or take root' gulha 'to surrouod', Jguda to protect. /yuba to corer, and /uuht to fistat. ६२ । फोरोतपश्च । १।६२। क्षपीता पक्षी। 62 The aur प्रोतम् comes after the rerb कय (I. 403) 'tofas', tho is changed to s. Thus कपोत: a pigeon'. Note-From /पार 'to colour' is derived फपी'a pigeon'. It is so called because its thrort 13 Inriously colonred. They of star is redundant or rath r misleading. Tna word पोत : has alrrays ths acute on the not the alix as in the lines : पद कपोह। दमानी कृषोति। देवा पोत परिणो मदिर।. ६३ । भातेवतुः । ९ । ६३ । भावति भार G3. The affix रनु comes after the root मा (II. 42) 'to shinc', 'to glitter'. Thua भवान् 'your honor', 'your shining excellency'. ६४ । फठिचकिमयामोरन् । १।६४ । पटोसपको 61. The alis are comes after the root, afc (I. 365) 'to suffer pain', and ** (L 93, 820) 'to be satisfied'. Thus virt: 'Hard', 'fall.' i'a kind of bird'. As tranfit. समविा (Magha). . .

·161 THE SIDDIATA ITUMUDI [P1D1 I 365 ५ ६५ । किशोरादयश्च । १। ६५ । क्षिपूर्वस्य गृपातेष्टियोपः। किमोऽग्यसोपा । फियोरोश्विशादा । बहोरा साधुः । 65 The fire and the nest are formed by her affix. I hus fruti'the young of any animal', VTC:' a saint'. I rom 1' to injure', preceded by fry, is derived FETTT: 1 The ft of the root is elded and the final of feny 13 dropped It means 'a colte' the sun', 'n youth, a medicinal herb', 'sandal Trom /srha (I 905) पौरा ६६ । कपिगडिगरिडकटिपटिभ्य भोगच । १।६६ । पीति निर्देशान्नपा । रूपोलः । गोलगपडाली गुडफपर्यायो । कटेशः कटुः । पटेलः । 66 The affix पोलच comes after कप (I 808) 'to shake', गह (1 811) 'run or flow as liquids' *** (I 65, 354) cheek', *2 (L. 315, 342) 'to corer from rain', पट (I 318,) 'to go' Thus am cheek' the nasal is elided as it is go słown in the stra, Tien: 'raw sugar', Terreno 'raw sugar', *?rat' bitter', an 'a hind of w cloth and vegetable,'' moon light' Some red करि (I 302) instead of फपि, and frm पापहल .. 1 chandala फल 'to sound,(I 527) करलाल: "the noise of the waves' ६७ । मीमातेरूरन् । १ । ६७ । भपूरा 67. The aflis erty comes after the reib mit (IX 1) 'to injure'. Thus age: 'n peacock' ६ । स्पन्दे. समसारयां च । १।६८ । सिन्दूरम् । GS The affir se comes after tho rorb या (I. 798) 'to flow out and the य 1s changed to ॥ Thus पिन्दरम् ' a kind of tree , (neut ) red lend' ६ । तिनिगमिमसिराध्यविधाश्मुशिभ्यस्तुन् । १६० । भिमातीति ऐनु । तितुत्र-' (३१६३) पति भेट् । तन्तु । गम्तुः । मात दधिनम् । भमत प्रति चोदि । 'पर स्वर- (३६५४) इमाट् । वदिशोत्यमुर्तत इति मते तु बाहुल पाए । घोर्षिाला । पातु । कोष्टा । 69 'The aflix तुम् comes after the rerbs fण (V. 2 ITE to tue', तनि (8. 1) 'to spread', गगल (I_1031) "to go' गभी (IV. 112) to complete', सच (I 176, 1010) 'to sprinkle', अपि (T G31) • to protect', ** (III 10) to bear', 'to support', ** (I 009) •to lament'. - ·PADA 1. $ 70) TIF UVADI AFFISES 165 . - . । , Thus : 'n bridge''ndam. No इट् augment becans of tho prohibi. tion of (VII 29). तनुः 'athnid'मन्तु 'guag', मन 'sour creara 'तु: that which unite' It 19 iar asglin" (II. 4 31) Te 'a cat.' It 19 thus formed सम् +++तुम् (I 4. 20) Trug sutra शिविर (I. 1. 6) 19 understood in thnt sutra (VI 4 20) according to come. So theroeno guna Thuis T I TIJ ' an elemoat', n'a jackal." 901 पः पिच्छ । १७ । पिरतीति 'पोवनी दियारे । 70. The affix it comes aftor the verb * (I. 972) 'to drink, to preserve and is treated as a fer whereby tho is changed to ई (VI. 4 66. S 2462) Thus"पी3 fire', 'The sun' २१ । नतेश्य तुः । १ । १ । अस्ति। स्पास्म चकित । 'मनुः सीपुष्पकासपो' । 71. The allir comes after the verb s (1 963, III 16, .29) 'to go',and it is कित् ॥ Thus serson' and menstrual period &c The word has acute on tho final As रायसम् पश्मीनाग ७२ । फमिमगिजनिगाभायाहिभ्यश्च । १।७२ । एभ्याः स्यात् । 'कन्नुः यदपियो । भरपराध । जन्तु माथी । 'गाः पुरको पगन्ध गायभेऽपि च' : भानुरादित्यः । यानुरागकालयो' । रसि भी। रेड कारणम् । 72. Tho alix comes after the verb ** (I. 470, 869) to desire', मन् (IV 67, VIII. 9, K_169) 'to think', पम् ( 862, III. 21, IV.41) to be born', गा (I. 998, III 25) ' to sing' भा (II. 42) to glitter', * (LI 10, to becoms', and fx (V 11) to go.' Tans कस्तुर ' the heart', 'hama lor3, मन्नुः 'offenc.', जादा - animal', गानुः .the malo cuckoo' 'boe' 'a cclestial singer', and a song 'मानुः 'The Bun', argi ' time, wind, traveller', when neuter, it means 'a demonta 'caust... ७३ । पायः शिः।१।७३ । 'केनुपताकपा'। 13. The allist comes after the chayri 'to honor' and कि 1s substituted for पाए । Thus केतु: 'comot', 'n banner: Thns चाय +refe+तुः । १४ । साप्नोतेई व श्च । १ । १४ । - . - . '(I.929) । पारीर।

·166 TIE SIDDE INTA KUHUDI. (PADA 1. $ 86 74. The affix तु comes after the /भार (V 1.4;X. 295). perrade', and the rowel is shortened.. Thus 7.' body.'' & sacrificial auimal'. १५ घसेरतुन । १।७५ । . C . ar 75. The aflis stcomes after /vasto dwell," (I. 1034.) As वस्तु ' an object.' ७६ । नगारे णिज्च । १। ७६ । 'घरस्तुर लिया। 76. The affix v .comes after the rerbas (I.1051) to diroll, Then the sense is that of a house and it is treated as if it had an indicatory . Thus चारत *s house. A. Kosha iI.2.19. ७ । कृजः फतुः।११७७ ।' कार्य। 77. The afir comes after tho Forb y VIII. 10) 'to do' Thug met '& sacrifice' yajia. ७८ । एधिवयोश्चतुः।१।७८ चतुर पुषयावरदरगदवान् । 78 Tlo aflix y comes after thororb **(T. 2) to prospor," and षद (I. 1053) to carry.' Thus ruk: a man', थार्नु 'an ox;'a traveller.' The affix the an in-, dicatory and so tho word 29 cad-acute. Thus rätt ut ato' 7961 90 । जीवेरातुः । १ ।। 'श्रीमानुरखियां भक्त घोषिते जीवाप 79. The aflix भा3 comes after /पीप (I. 501) 'tolire.' Thus 070194 (masculine), 'food.' 'lfo,'' a medicinc.' A. K. 11. 8. 119. ८०। प्रातृकम्पद्विश्च । १।। नीतिपय । वाहवास्तिवादभिषगापुरमा कृपीर। 80. The aflix very comes after the verb ) (T. 495) 'to lisa' and there is rşiddhi oft, Thus mor 'long-lıred', 'mson',' drug,' and 'an agriculturish,'* * phyacinn.' A. Kosha I. 3 10. III. 1. G.

·FIDA I $84) TUZ UYADI AFFIXES 167 TIV * a worm &r var a ११ । पृषिथगितनिधनिसर्जिसर्जिभ्य छ । १।८१ । वर्ग: पुसि करीमानो कपनमा प्रिया मता । पम् । तन्। । धभूः पत्रए । पर्ण शने । सघषितं । खन व्यधने । रापामा। 81 The aflix comce after the verbs 1 (1039, VI 6) * to plough, ** (I 497 869, VI 28) to drink, a (VIII 1 T 296) 'to sprera, ** (III 23) 'to become rich (1 213) 'to gain (I 217) 'to pun', and the words so formed aro fem inine Thug e fire of dried cow dung, cultivation an army : body & bov, Ta's 'a mercbaat 'ali, htening was cutaneo 19 erup lon scab Thus in tho Rabhasa kosa wa finl karsûh pimu karfshägnau bar sar nad am &c Tng Med n kosa saya karsů 15 masculine and means fire of dried cov lu g anl it is fum n la vh nm aning canal s rjů m mrchiut faigh n ng haran m Crator Rudra ८२२ मुगुणश्य ।१।२। wa: fun! 82 the affis * comes after the TT (II 57, X 304) to olenn, and there 19 guna of the ri into ar Thus *7': purihet on A vasherman The vriddlı orda n. 1 by VII 2 114 S 2473 19 990 as de by the guna spec fically enjo ned by this sutra ८२ फ । सोई इवा । १।२ क । UTES IT! 82 A l'he vugment of 19 adued to w after the verb ay (X 11)' to breal optionally Thus i or break ng ८३ । बहो धप । १।३। पर्भायात्रु पाधी । 83 Thes abstitute v replace the Tofas (I 1053) 'to orrry's before the affix en Tnus ay a wife a daughter in lay A Kosha III 3 101 cy IOZIT I giyi digid ng 81 The affix û comes after the Furb ** (1 034) 'to injure' and the is changed to u Thus itch acab ·स 167 THE SIDDHASTA KAUNODI. [PADA I $ 85 ८५ । णित्फसिपद्यतः । १।५। कान: गतिः । पावरपधारिणी । धारा पिङ्गलः । 85. The aſſis o comes after the verb, ** (I. 139) to go? पद (IV. 60) 'to go' भ (1 983, III. 16, V. 29) 'to go' and the affix is पिता * l bus pirti'a lance', arg'a shos' SITI yellow.' Tag word #ty means * indistioct speech',' a sort of spe ir or lance', 'understanding'. ६। मणो इश्व । १।६। (भारलमधद्रव्यम् । 86. The aflix e comes after the verb w. (I 471,) 'to sound', and the w of - is changed to r Tnus पाह'a raft', 'a float' ८७ । मशि लम्येनलीपश्च । १।८७। 'तुमायलादूरभे ममे इत्यमरः । 67. The aflix e comes after the verb 4** (I 102, 401,1' to hang down', and the nasa] is elided, Then the negative w pic. cedes it • Thns लाव: 'the bottle gourd' so called because it floats on water and does not sinh (Iimbate) in it See A K II 4 153 ८८ । केन एरर हास्य । १।८।। कशाद उपपदे गुणातेका स्यादेमादेशः। 'परेशकन्दे खी' । पाहुल सात्यये को सीपुचिच 88. The affix a comes after the verb (II. 18) to hurt', preceded by nod tho is changrd to g. Thug करो'akind of grass', and a root' By force of the word dir. ersely' (III 3. 1. S 3169) the afix i (short) Rlso comes as wor! Tag formar 19 alwaya feminina, the latter is masculino and nouter, ८९ । ओ दुद प।९।। तररयासस्व हात स्यादापतका। 89 The afiix comes after the yerba (I 1018) to cross orer', to which is added the augment. Thus it a wooden ladle'. Se A K II. 9. 34 दरिद्रातेालोपश्च । १ ।। व धाव यो तपोलापः । कुदः । 90. The affix a comes after the rerb दरिया (II GI) 'to be poor' and the rand st of the rerb aro clided ·PADA. I. 5 93.) THB UNADI AFFIXES. 109 Thus ti . Thus a kind of leprosy', 'a cutaneous disease'. The word of of the sutra is a compound of ++ SAUT # Notfo-Bhojadeva takes tho word as atataqı beginning with a Но explaing it in two ways: (1) fc7-77=ut, and the form then is as for the s@tra then means, the fo and vt of daridrå are elided. (2). +5+5=of! In this view the second t r. of darıdrê is elided, Thus that With short e, the form is : Thus there are four forms (1) dardrd : (2) dadra (3) dardd T:'(4) g: dardru by Mpigaytadi classe (un I. 37). १ । नृतिशध्योः कः । १ । १ । मुनर्तक । घरपानम् ! 91. The affix comes after the verbs (IV.9) 'to dance', and mv (I. 797, 922, X. 195.), to mock at to fart. Thue qui a dancer', qu' the anus'. १२ । ऋतेरम्च। पतिः मोत्रो धातु । ततः कूरमागमय । रहूदेवनदी सत्यवाच । 92. The affix comes after the verb c (a sautra dhâtu) and the augment w is added to the verb a celestial river' and 'true speech' The x is a sautre dhatu. ९३ । अन्दूदृम्भूजम्यूकफेलूकर्कन्धूदिधिपूः । १।३ । एते प्रत्ययान्ता मिपात्यन्ते । प्रदूर्यम्धनम् । 'दुभी ग्रन्थे । निपातमान्नुम् । हुम्भः। अस्था- Turutste FormatTRI Firarrangerary ma'ruzdra. To इस्योऽपि । जन्युः । कफ लाति कफेन ग्लेमातकः । निपातनादेवम् । कर दधाति कर्कर्ष। दरी। निपातनान्नुम् । दिधि धैर्य स्यति त्यातीति विधिप: पुनी। केषित्तु 'अन्दहजम्का' रति पन्ति । 'एक उत्के' द सर्पजाति।। कमेषु' । काला परद्रव्यापहारी। 93. The words to, 9, 7, na and fefwo are formcd by afix. Thus wei'n chain, a fetter, 'an ornament worn round the ankles', ry snake'. . * The rosu apple and its fruit', ( a thief) a kind of annual plant or herb which dies after becoming ripe', 'phlegmatic'. ** the jujube tree'. fefue The second husband of a woman twice married'. Note-From Jadi 'to bind' (I. 63) is From an 'to accept' (II. 49) is derived to with the upapada *** From 5315'to support' (III. 10), with the upapada ** is obtained TTS (2) From the out' to striog together' (VI. 34) is derived gryta composer, a versther, a reciter'. It is declined like to Another form is : without anugvâra. (3) The word **f 15 formed by adding the augment & to the root jan before this affix. Some derive it from / jamu,'to eat' (I. 499). - . 22 ·170 THE SIDDIASTA KAUHODI. [PADA I, S 91 By force of' dirersely,' there is short y also, as #g!! As xa the hae घस्य भन्योः फलामो नदीभूय प्रवर्तते । (4) **+2+3='phlegm producing.' The insertion q the irregularity. (5) *77***pat what supports the crabmie badart or jujube The Insertion of the nagal is the anomaly (6) feftu+*+- Refre literally, “who abandons (syatı) the firmness (didhi), z.e a widow who remarries Some read the sutra as प्रदू-दान-पपू-का। In this vier bosa ing'a spale,' is derived from (VI 29)' to pain' (7) **** 19 derived from trith the augment sri It wcaos 'ons who steals the property of another,''a thief. ४। मृग्रोरुतिः । १।४। मार्गष्टपए। 91 The affix sfa (ut) comes after the roots VI (VI. 117)'lo swallow', and ! (VI. 110) 10 die' Thug "The wing of a bird', 77'wind'. This last word has two other forms also, si and Tai all meaning wiod and breath Tho word The belongs to Yaridi class, (VIII 2 9) and wath wag forms otrai ९५ । यो मुटप । १ ।। forca efecerea T I TUTU yafrina1 95. Tho alix afa conics after the root T 'fo & alior with the augment y added to it. Thus t'gold','a kind of grass' The word 19 feminine द६ । पेरुलच् । १।६। oxyfer yra7 forintot 75" TUTTås pommes 96 The allix voy comce aſtei the vcrbr. (1.711 IV. 110) to rejoico''to bo satisfied!' Thug ro's decr', 'A lorer'. By force of the word 'direreels', this nflix comes after the root e'to rain'' to corer' (1 310) also benutıful' inconstant'. ८७ । हसरुधियुपिभ्य इतिः।१।। 'tfernthe tufafaitare' ? 'dit' fadere ? Ilyen for TH VITI I OPETTA (or prera) from thfefe for rent 97. l lo aflis rfor (it) comes after the roots ut (1 057,111 15)' to steal', 7(1.952, 111. 17.) ' to go', /«lt (1 912)'togiom* on)/(1 711)' to pleiso'. Tyut pfcx 'A quarter of compass, direct os,.. 'Jellow!, .74** o... best for meris, gras' 4 'the borx. ol the san','s bay born!

·TADA I S 101) THE OYArt atrixdi 1/1 + try the Yer' hari: kak ibhe monchit vir 'gniter ofre 'Imato of a kind of dro' a trotin'. Vyn's ita ****** * * {yinlunth 0151031 Dhapishi Thn in the Bill yo yong 1 37" *** difet'th malt of the doce call i mossi pe #19 In An' lon is call drohl" Similarly TT*fer "the lawals of a mao 13 child somit 6। ताईग्लुिक च । १ ।। writto 09 'The air tft comes after the rerly (13,259)) bent', and the chusatire a fe is elded f Hitelhicping liteonlly this wherh srilan (tidnya's) criti. I pretende wiferto da *** Sit am fairent TITUSI 09 Tuo aflix dłsz comes after the routy (11 02, L. 306),) 'to be appeased Th 19 arron cunach' Tho let. T 1909 1908 13 ja replami by VII I. S 475) nor thn augm-p cong before all this 15 anomalou: b-cans of tbn bsdalam tho Unlt a fizes are deversely applied Nole -Tac aflix roull not h170 lakca y by the poolbe"07 of me «Fa Fe (VII 28 S 2951), bus taas 54 17 24 s Tic 1 by thn Vriks **77) "she do 3 nos como buforo in frit afisen brysomina with a ra, ma saint' hrnc thu abovexplanat 07 The word Then masculins maas "sha ball" 1: Om 179 "a canach an ealand pro १०। कगेरट.।१।। sa: ss sàn gia, sự tin visit It 100 Tuo aflis 57 (atba) conca aft - the root /«Y(170) ito desire Thus it 'a tortois. According to th: Berlinlah his *- when mas.al na rings tortor, alwa -, 'Awarr By the force of 15 word '8511 ihs aür 077 ir 1'17 grow old' Assbard, -old old dreaepi, pala, cro.L' ११। रमे द्विप।१।१२ । ** fres 101 Thais 7 (atha) cones after the root (I (400) "to delight, and there is Vradhi of the Towel of the root Tong TTET Tc name of $53 puaicAdm. ?.

·१२ । शमे रु।१ । १२ । 1 102 Tho alix < (hl17) comes after the root /** (IV. 92,) to bo appeasca' Thus we tho conch sh 11'th bono of the forch-al, 'n hundred billions Nole --That is nnt nor is it replaced by ** (VII 12 S 175) २०३ । कोष्ठ ।। १३ । WTTI 1 203 The amis ? (tha) comes after the /** (I 470, 831,) to sound' Thus i thoat, *tho peck vicinity sound, 'n kind of tro ९०४ । फरास्तपश्च । १। २०४। Taurus I TERE I TUM 11 OR 101. The alliran (aln) come after the dou (IV 80, V 20, TI 24,) 'to becomo satisfied' Thus trop creeping plant' By the force of the word 'and in the atra thus fix coma aftur tho root Jer also Thu TT a crccp r It should be distinguishod from the word fra 'th three myrabolang Sco Amarakosa II 9 111 Comparo IV I 21 S 479 whero this word is cousid red as a Dvig 2 compound Foto and face are also valid forms १०५ । शपेर्षश्च । १ । १५४ । 47+ 1 105 The affis ** (la) comes after the root or (IV 59) 'to curse' and the ris changed to u Thus Tuma variegated colour Nole - Another reading 19 TAHU ! १०६ । वृषादिभ्यश्चित् । १ । १०६ । वृपलः । पललम् । बाहुलझाइगुपः । सरलः । तरलः। कभेक । कम्बलः । मुछ सरहने' पुगलए । लोडिन्छ । लाङ्गलम् । फुटिकथिकोतिभ्यः प्रत्ययस्य मुट् । अमला । कुटेरपि । हमला । कश्मलम् । बाहुलकाद्गुणः । कोमलम् । 106 The alix 69 (ala) comes after the root Ja (1 738) to rain and the rest and it is considered as if it had an indicatory ch Thus qu'a horse Sadra Similarly from /पस पालम् & swect meat made of ground sesamum and sugar flesh demon The athy is being face would not have caused gunn but owing to the Utuada diversity it docs so in the case of me and JT Thus 45'a kand 11 mire TETI 9n ·173 TUL UNADI APPIILS PADA. I. $ 110) of pine trce1" straight', 'artis. As in the following versc o focorant धनायन्ते फशिनुमाः । न यमी न च पुमागा यस्मिन् संसार फागने | Here every noun has a double meaning Similarly ace 'trembling.' 'liquid.' १०७ । कमे युक । १ । १० । 107. The affix ** (ala) comes after / (I 170, 869) 'to desiro' and tho augment is gx Thus *** " the hing of serpents + e, Š.sha', 'a dew jap..'& wall'' small worm,'' an upper garment of wool , when ne u ter it means 'water.' It means also a blanket of wool' Similarly from so 'to break' (Divadı). we get op '& mace, club,' 'a pestle,' other forms of this word are you and मुयला २० । लङ्गे द्विश्च । १ । १० । 108. The aflix ** (ala) comes after the root Vafit (I. 164) 'to obtain',' to go,' and there is vriddlu of the root. Thus alter'& plough' २०० । कुटिकशिकौति भ्यः प्रत्पस्य मुटु । १ । १०९ । 109 lhe aflix e comes after the verbs (VI 73) 'to curre'lo whip' (1 762, 939, II 11 ) and (I 999, II 33,) "to groan to Lum,' and there is augment se added also Thug tay' an opening bad The affix is added to $t also, as कुङ्गलम् करमल Sin, 11% delicate' In this last word the solu has taken guna by una li diversity Nole -The affix *7 comos aftur other roots also as a anadı diversity. As from /y or /कुरा रलेपणे we get कोयला or कोसला 'the name of a country From 7 ore or a profisions for a journey,' 'a bank or shore,' jealousy' From it wita, by the elision of the we have ma? 1 Tae feminine afir siç 19 added as it belongs to the gaur&di class. It means the plantain tree,' & flag.'' a king of deer,' 'the Bimba planti' From * t we have many 'water,' 'copper, A lotus,' 'space,''a medicimrnt.' The masculino **** maos'a kind of deer wet means an excellent woman expert trained". From afzetary we have 475 ' orb', 'a district, a circle of a kiog's near and distans ocighboars congesting of twelve kings' १९ । मजेष्टिलोपश्च । १ । ११० । From JST wa get a .

·174 TAE SIDDIYTI KAVJUDI. (PADA 1 $ 110. 110. The affixa (ala) comes after Van (I269, II, 57.) "to olcan' and theio in clision of tho finrl yovel with the consonant that folloys it. Thug kuryem', 'excrement', 'impure secretion of the body','magan or covetous. ११९ । चुपेरच्योपधाया। १ । १११ । 111. The aflix ** (ala) conies after the root VT* (I. 130, VI. 125) to moro slowly' and is changed to w before this. Thug very unsteady'. The masculine 993 means 'quick silver', 'fish', 'the châtaha bird', 'a sort of perfume' The feminine un means • Lakshmi', 'lightening 'long peppar'. १९२ । शफिशम्यार्नित् । १ । १९२ । सकलागलम्। $ 112 The aflix e (al) comes after the T* (IV. 78, V. 15) to be able' and *** (L. 870,) to be appeased' and it is fara Thus T & part',' the scales of a fish', bark My Bin' 'fases,' calamity'. ११३ । छो गुग्हस्वश्च । १ । ११३ । ETH 1 ASTFETT 17: 113 The affix it comes after the root 7 (IV. 38) 'to cut', whereby the vowel of the root is shortened and the augment yk is added before the affix Thus 1972's goat,'' a blue garment' another form is art as the word belongs to the Prajiadi class ११४ । अमान ताइह ।१।१९४ । दपा पडा। पण्डः । मण्डः परहरिम्नहस्तः पाहा। बाहुलझारपस्वाभापः । पर। बचातः । तालष्यादिरित्यपरे । पहः । गपहः । धरहः । पपा क्लीयः । पपडा बुद्धिः। 114 The affix + comes after a verb ending in a nasal. Thus cert 'A stick, soos 'A widow' 'a slut', T. 'a fragment or portion', 'candied sugar'' & flaw in a jewel' at 'the castor oil trea', ferment', 'scum of boiled rice', 'a maimed or circumcised man' "he whose hands ara cat' : 'an egg,' ATTI' a group or multitude' 'a bull', 'an eunuch' The of the root is not changed to & as required by VI. 1. 64 S. 2264, 89 a unadı anomaly. Sowe read it as West with the palatal a t'the cheek,'' a mark', 'a hero,' the temples', 'boree's trappings','a bubble',' a kind of dus2233, TAI'violent, I'A cunuch', TUTT'windon'.

·PIDI L : 117.1 TDI 17717! Toit-Tbs in this apboris is a parte di terapia tb- l-Ibars 7,5, apday So steb Jaija! L:2, komerci, zl.sedia tba Aslide chys!. tkarzy!!!és ending in que caly the 34, yard or Sw Kashil zrdny Ashes&gl. The above to:ds are derived to * to ww. (IV. 34) Jun 'to play' L 305), hann 'to dig' (L. 827). wins'is thiak' (IV. 67), rand throu' (L 239), 2011. gb (L 193), J4291 'is gira' (VOL2). Jgmts go' (L 103) chap'to gire' (L E33), para o barist," *3 :3.5. (1995). ११५ । हादिभ्यः फित् । १ । १९५ । TTTTT ti fatti SEVI IT! ETI 1'35 mi' TITYTO 116. The afiz r is fut after a verb beginning with a guttaral. Thas r. 4 bsal shaped 14131, TET' 2 Betisn', glitres:!' MickenFrom tug'd, to rapport'oret meznisz". Eole in the ground for fire" a kind of measure', '& ca:ural basin of waver', de grimz30' Kanadala boul: gri als means 's $a tors is aanlity From Jhama 'to wisb', is formed to It was a rm, pun of a t, 20 A.TON, 22 opportuny, wzier, vila, prz'a place, hoe eta. . Fron guat sale inarticolato yat' come Ti, & globos or bull,tommado or 99'365-3, sa el-phaoi's armor, the cost to the milk bed.ge plant. T'he winga baíz is like TO HIŁ Edge plant. i, WEIT'aimed bar' Shirz. OTTIC' Lord of eleporelos." Prora TT7 Wandar, we 5 Trr: 'a bas." ११६ । स्पाचतिनृडेरायालजानीपचः।१।११६ । fotomur77 tari TTTI I CITÁTVITT**** frstaro 116. Tee alüs tres corres after the root for (L 975) to staad', *** fterilite rast 7 9181 to bez, ani in altor the root * (L. 209, IL 57,) * t1f3=h or to make pare.' Tais atito t'a ples', r'a Este is brood rezoirs stiiaal fire. Essa gras'. mista'ziya Sila... who c.54 kus bois.' de-Ta- mi 77 mld bure gira 5795 by t'ı 25 bsruth: 151 21 ? ११ । पतिपिष्टम्मामानन् । १।१४। TITES: 1911 117. The asir Oticones after the roots (I. 895.) 'to 1s', ard VTE (L. 235) * to become violent. abs.

·174 TAE SIDDAYTI KAUNODI. (PADA I $ 110. . 110 The afis (alt) comes after ma (I 269, II 57) 'to clenn' and thcio 19 elision of tho final vowel with the consonant that folloys it. Thug uq'sin', 'excremcnt','impure secretion of the body','mean or covetous'. १११ । चुपेररुयोपधाया। १ । १९१ । पपलन्। 111 The affix ** (ala) contes after the root 197 (I 430, VI 125) to more slowly' and is changed to before this. Thus TET 'unsteady'. The masculine 779: meaus 41ck silver', 'fish',' 'the châtaha bird , '& sort of perfuma' Tae femuine wert means Lakshmi', 'lightening ' long pepper'. ११२ । शफिशम्यानित् । ।१। ११२ । यफलम् । यमलम् । 112 The aflix et (alr) comes after the WTT (IV 78, V 16) 'to be able' and (I 870,) to be appeased' and it is frau ſhus ***'a part', 'the scales of a fish','bark777'sin 'fweg,' calamity ११३ । छो गुन्हस्वश्च । १ । ११३ । হশঃ । সয়াবিন্দ্রামঃ। 113 The afix * comes after the root (IV 38) to cut', whereby the vowel of the root is shortened and the augment TF is added before the afliy Thus thai' a goat,'' a blun garment' another form is kui as the word belongs to the Prajñadi class ११४ । अमान ताडह।१।११४ । दरता । रपडा । सपहा । मरडावरहरिहम्मदस्तः । षहा। माहुलकारवश्वाभावः । पपर। राता। हालण्यादिरित्यपरे। पह । गपहा । पहः । परा लोपः। परसा पुद्धिः। 114 The affix 7 comes after a verb ending in a nusal. Thus **! 'a stick', ter '& widot 'n slut', te 'a fragment or portion', 'candied sugar'' a flaw in & jewel,' RYT: the castor oil tree'. "ferment', 'scum of boiled rice', : '& maimed or circumcised man' 'he whogo hands are cut' Sex: 'an egg,' ti'a group or multitude & bull', 'an eunuch' The of the root is not changed to y as required by VI 1. 64 S 2264, as a upadi anomaly Some read it as it with the palatal * # * 'the cheek,' mark', 'a hero,' the temples', 'horse's trappings',' a bubble', 'A kind of duºA$, TRI'violent, '& eunucl', TET'Trudon'. . $ ·175 PADA I $ 117.1 711 OXADO Arrizit. NoteThe se in this a phorism is a pratyahara mraping the letters ,,, and No such pratyahara, howescr, 14 found in the Ashtr. dhylji the pratyaharis ending in I ntc only three y, and my i So Kashid and my Ashta izasl. Tho absro words are derived from damu to tanio (IV. 91) samu'to play'(I. 006), khann 'to dig' (I. 927). mapa 'to think'(IV. 67), „vand 'to honor,' (I. 290), Jamı to go &c' (1. 493), shanu 'to give' (VIII.2). gam'to go' (I. 103) chaga ito giva' (1. 833). W pana 'to barter,' to praise. (I. 406). ११५ । हादिभ्यः फित् । १ । १९५ । wntierit ti FOTEUTT I SITTI MITTEITE! I'Y 'TOI WYCH I 115 The afis x is free after a verb beginning with a guttural. Thus year. "A bowl shaped vessel,' T' A section', ya treacle' t'a bec', Nole From kun 'to sound, to support' comes rou meaning holo in the ground for fire" 'a kind of measuro', 'a Dataral bagin of water', while grey means 'a Kamaudalu borrl'. Tai also means 'a son born 19 adnluery'. from „Kamu 'to wish', 18 formed *****! It means a stem, * portion of a tree, no arrow, an opportunity, water, vile, private placa, " A Bta fr. Trom uguá 'to maha inarticulate sound' comes i, a globe or ball, trencle or mol 199.9, an elepbrot's armour, the cotton tree, the milk badge plant. ItRET "he whos: hair is like stor milk hedge plant. i.e, WETUTT'inntted hic' or Shiva Or 75141+ to' Lord of sleep or sloth." Iron yy' to wander', we get y'a bee" १९६ । स्पाशतिन्जेरालज्वालजालीयचः । १ । १९६ । तिनुतेरालप् । स्थालम्-स्ली। चतघ् । पारवाला। होलीयम् । मार्जातीयो दिदाता। 116. The alix swap comes after the root eat (I 976) 'to stund', TFT after the rout na (I. 918) ' to beg', and strane after the root ya (I. 269, II 57,) 'to wash off' . to make pure.' Thus FTTT or futet 'a pluto', 'a hole in the ground to receive sacriacial fire' 'kusa gras'. Atalita: 'a catyta Sadra one who clt inses hus boug.' Note-Tae root fat would have given Fitu: by ths afir alono. Why read thu aflix as at? १९७ । पतिचण्डिभ्यामालम् । १. ११४ । पातालम् । चाहाल । प्रमादित्वादवि पापडालोडपीत्येक। 117 Thc affis comes after the roots * (I. 898) 'to ils', and the (I. 298) * to become fiolent'. सा ·TAS SIDDHANTA LICNODI. 170 (PADI I. $ 115, Thug e " the lower world whereinto people fall owing to rin," TURTER' 1101', according to soins the form is veikt, tds sriddhi taking place as the word is considerad to b long to the PrajoAdi class. ppt afara fortafoghutanfoferufsqua: FireTM!! PAPP=1 omta fata forma greteri i IRTISATIE 118. Tho afir way comics after the roots ** (IV. 23) to grow tired', fort. (VI. 130),' to enter'. far (I. 330) lo curso', to cry ont against', ra(11, 1) 'to kill', 5. I. 605) to bo united', v (I, 608) 'to shako', me (I. 802.) to go', one (1. 187,1015)' to derelor.' Thus TUI 'a lind of trco, a kind of grord' frama: 'Big, 'ling, somin', farti 'a cat' at 'the fibrous tons of a lotus, T'A potter', 'the orall, my 'n strap, etwa city'. Nolo.--. A trce, a sword, tha bark of bimbo), #cburial murk on the forehmail. fammi nams of Ujjwant, of a rirer. forestato poll, a kimet of decr, a lind of bird ११८ । पतेराष्पतिपि। १ । ११८ । 110. Tho affix adgach comrs after tho root v (I. SOS) 'to fly', then mcinin, an insect, Thu na biti, 'an tr-ct. It means alra a kiol of ri, quick pirit, thanun, al rd, ·rana I $ 1951 TX UYADI AFFIILS 1 IT 12? The after comes after tho ronts (I 03, III 17) 'to go, and < (V 8, IX 38, 1 271) 'to choose', 'to worship', 'to cover', and there is Vrid Thu Thus utt an antelope werf 'the handle of a sword dot --Th se vor la ore derived from vari gatau and spb Taranc, Saranga m means tho spotted deer, the cochoo a largo crane, tho Namiogo. an elephant, a lotus tho cha aka bırd As a diversity (balulam) this aflix comes after 'to lead *tho orange trco the juico of the pepper piant. १२३ । गगम्यद्यो ।१।१२३ । *Free gree: 1 123 Tho affis my comes after the root PT (I 1031) 'to go' und * (IT 1)' to eat' Thus TT The river Ganges WETE'll sacrificial oblation callod Purod&sa Noe -By diversity (bah slam), the alix comes after th“ root sy to go algo Ass the countri called Abga tho body tho mn ans the sub Budiary or supplemontury port on &c १२४ । छापूसटिभ्य सिस् । १ । १२४ । धागा। गः । सग । बाहुलझार पिर घमादरे गमरवाभाषच। पिपतरसा। Terima TYTT TA TI 124 The Mirrones aftrr the roots T (I 198) 'to out, (I 1016, II 12) to make pure (11) 'to separate' and at 19 fe Thu, 18 goat 1 terally that which is cut for the giko of sinfice a b tel nut arecn out so called as the mouth 19 purified by chewing it aheap WET: a sword Note By the force of the word bahulam 'direraely' this affit comes after the root for 'to disregard d spise (I 3'6) also and the was not changed to Ti As Tacm fickle, no inconsistent lorer Badha v -पिणेगाव पसनभेष काचिन् । १२५ । मृन किट च । १ । १२५ । at of TVEIT fomfaTHET: 1 123 The allir e comes after the root z (1 916, III 5) " to support with the angment and it is the Thus vcni a lıb rtine (shidg) a large bisch be (ala) the bark of Lauras caszia (FTR Rati) the cloud roser (a Lund of bird) (dhomgåta) B T! As in the Sisupala ·178 TIE SIDDHANTA KAUNODI. (Pada 1. $ 1.0 १२६ । सपाखरा । १ । १६ । 126. Tho affix ou soith tho nugment comes after thic root (IX. 18) 'to kill' and the correl is slios tened and it 19 Thus a bora tha top or summit of a mountain ele-s ion lordship, a syringe, a nvk or aga, the horn of the nison, & lotus et fonu gold used for ornaments, a kind of fiskı 1.c, shent fish, a kind of medicaoal root, a kind of poreon. 979 I otipi 9791 सद् चेपमुक्त । पा 127. Tho alis roomce after the root (II 81) to injure with the augment when it me ins a bud. Thug it a birde The vriddhi takes place by VII 2 115. S 254 There is another word vry meaning' & borr'. It 15 a Tuddhita word derived from of an Fea fourtis Wige u १२८ । मुदिपोर्गग्गी। १। १२८ ॥ int 128. The affix ma conies after the T* (I. 16,) 'to rejoice.*** and the aflix n after (I 981) 'to swallow. Thus TET & kind of bean, a sea bırd', to the sage Garga. papie 1 54374729959: 'Pippi भरभरपा पथी । म स्वामी।बरपोपुलरोपः। 129. The very comes after the roots T (I. 916), 'to do' I 982), to go' y (1 916) 'to support,' ** (IX. 20) 'to Choose' Tans , & hive, a box or basket of bamboo, Tini's rogue' or a bird, wirea king,' roofan eruption on the face Note -Karapda means a small box or basket of bamboo, a bee hive, A sword n sort of duck, liver. Varanda means a multitude, a pimple or erupuzon on the face, a veranda, a heap of grass, the string of a fish book, A pochet By divers-ly(babulam) we get from ' to cross or flow,'t the stripg of a fisi hook, old, wood, a raft १३२ । शुभसोदिः । १ । १३० । सरत् । 'दादपस्नयो । मानना ।

·PADA I 135 ) TEE UNADI AFFIIL*, 179 130 The allix safe comes after the roots (IX, 18) to in. gure and (IX 23) 'to tear', the end ate (III. 18)" to slune.',, l'hxis Tu autumn', Tra hcart'' bank and were sun.' Yote -Sarad means a year, the season called autumn. Darad means the heart, terror ftar a mountain, precipics, a bank or mogad Bhagad means the sun, a fish, a Lind of duck, timo, a float, the hinder parts, pudendum wuliebre, a mouth. १३१ । गुणाः पुरहस्यश्च । ११ १२१ । हप 131. The affis it comes after the root (IX 23) 'to toar," the yotel is shortened and the augment or is adiled. Thos 'stone's Note-Drishad means a rock, largo stone, or stone in general, a millstonc, a dat stone for grinding condiments upon. १३२ । त्यजितनियजिभ्यो सिस् । १ । १३२ । 2 Ivica: 132 The aflix afc comes after the roots * (I. 1035) to forsake' at (VIII. 1)' to extend' afo (I. 1051) 'to worship'. Thus the 'or that,' ar that, at who, which or that. Toege are Pronouns belonging to the Sarvadı class, १३३ । एतेस्तथ । १। १३३ । - 133 Tho aflix sfa: comes after the root = (II 30) 'to go.' and the augment of is added, ani v is gunrted to po Tous en this Pzt a traicfar: 1p PIPI Tee raranara'dants'enfin purga' rfa ait tavat nyaforturi 7 TOTT! 131. The affix afc comes after the rout? (I. 082) 'to go.' Th118 Ew204', 'cloud',' a bee." In the Veda-bhashya, commenting on the hyına afat yma &c. sayuna explains the word ottwal by my fat*** "th hoocy fue २३५ । राधेलोपरख । १ । १३५ । पट्यायः 130. Tlio affix afc comes after the root ap (1. 172)' to dry,' and the nasal is olided. Thus t'air.' 0 ·180 TUB SIDDHISTA KAUNUDI [PADAI 136 . १३६ । पारयतेरजि. ।१ । १३६ । पारदमुशर्प 136. The affix ufa comes after the causative root uift (x 368) to accomplish'' Thus पारक् or पार gold १३७ । प्रथेः कित्सप्रसारण च । १ । १३७ । प्रभम् । परापिपाठापयत्वर । 137 The affix शनि comes after the verb प्रथ (I 802) to becomo farrous and there is Tocalization of the < into it Thus प्रपा separately' Thus word is an Indeclinable, as it has been listed in the Svarlidi class १३८ । भिय. पुष्ट्रस्य श्च । १ । १३८ । निप। 188 The affix gforcomes after the verb ut (III 2) to fear and the 14 shortened and i augment is added Thos ficaram a physician १३८ । युण्यरिभ्या मदिक् । १। १३८ । 'पू गोभी पातुः । अस्मद् । परमद । त्वम् । थार। 139 The aflix ofere comes after the verbs va a Fautra root and ** (IV 100) 'to throtr.' Thus पुनः300,' प्रमई ' Theyush 19 8 bentra root १४०। प्रर्तिस्तुहरुधुक्षितुभायावापदिपक्षिनीभ्यो मन् । १।१०। पपई प पी गए । अर्मचघरोगः । स्तोमा अंशतः । पाना । होगा। एो गमनम् । धर्मः । र पुरतम् । चामम् । मचारि पौष । भान पादित्यः । भामापापा भीमनपा । पर। या प्रमापार पक्षारोपपत्र भेमा । 110 Tho aflix comes after the fourteen roots (I 083) 'to go,' (II 31) '10 praise', 7(VI)'to anoint' to produoc, (III 1) to give or to take,'. (082) 'to 80,'** (I. 018) 'to maintain,' for I 255) 'to raste,' (II 27) 'to sound,'T (IL 4) 'to shinc,' T (II 10)' to attain,' 7 (II 41)' to moro, to blor,r (IV. Go) ' to go,' प ( 153) ' to worship' and at (1050) • to carry' Thus the rye disease', 148 racrifice' or 'assemblage,' w.sacrifico, has offering in fre, gorg, ***s duty, religion, dry happiness free nhnd of cloth a room on the top of a houso Apother form ist with Yridul, as belonging to l'rajoldi clas* * the sun, ti a period of three hours पाना bosuulol rile पाच - lotus, SIM CCEsumption from पर to Lonor नेपा the foundation of anal. - .

·TADA 1 142 TUS UXADI IFTIES 151 Vole -Soma moans a kind of plant, acctar, the moon A ray of light, camphor, watcr, air, wind name of Kubera, of Shrra, of lama, of Sagriva, chief, fico gruel, sky, Dharını mrgos holy, usage, naturo, disposition resemblance, a sacrifico non Lilliog, tho upínısbad, tho lav, a bor, Yama, A drinker of Soma Ksbauman meaos linen, silken cloth, Tore silk, an airy room oa thi top of n hongo, the back of au edifice, a fortified place before the building, linsced, flax Bhaina means pass100, wroth anger, the sun, brightness, lustro, splendour, a sisters' husband Varaa means wealth, namo of Shiva, of cupid, nn udder, left, vila &c. vimi means the fimalo of a Jackal, a maro, a slo Agg, the female elephan) Padma mcans lotus, an army arranged in tho form of a lotus, trcastre, a lugh number (oue tbougand billions), an elephant Nemna m ang half a part, a boundary an enclosarc, finco tho foundation of a wall fraud, deceit evoning, a holo a ditch, a root, acting, dancing upper part Vedic food PX?I agra: Trasteitaka i popup fisfecratorita's 111 Thonflix comes after the root (III 8 ) to leave, the st is cluded and it is trorted as the desiderative with our Thus fx crooked, and slow The aflix is to be treated as the dtexerative affix , when it is add d to the root om Tho regalo 19 that chor, 19 cu luplication (VI 1 9. S. 2301) and the ndding of by VII 1 79. S 2317 for the o of the reduplicate n+मन+मा+रनि+मनि! | Tho neurs fort is the natio of thgars plant १४२ । भवतेष्टिलोपश्च । १ । १४२ । QUITACEATH fearer that I har feinta tra l'ITTFT-' (2549) ma ठी । नयादी ते पुण: । धादिपादादप्रयापनिरपशदालन । तैपामारवारवाद । पस्तुतस्त स्वरादिपाटादव्य एरवर । पदवीति भोट । 112 Tuo affis y comes after the root ** (I 631) to preserro' and there is elision of the portion of the Tous qThe sacred syllable (Um), the pranara Tho elision of fe ordained by this sütea appists to the fe portion of the afwt 7, and not of the base / For were it intended that the ft portion of the baso was to bo el ded, then the easier thing would have been to call the affixu a faz afhr, and the indicatory < yould have elided the fa the bart.

·132 THE SIDDIASTA KAUMUDI. [PADA I $ 143 This += år + m 500 + -The penultimat and the final care both changed to me by VI + 20 S 2001 Then thng3 to 5 9 Cos lege into one long $184, += the wy changing * to guna stw, Ujvaladatta erys Tro word she is an Iud clipable because it 13 listed in the of class (1 4 57 S 20 and I i 37 S 117)' Bu i* 23 & nie sko for atfe words ara Ind clinab-s only then when they do not denot any substince bit she dunot s the Supremo Substance So 16 9 005 an Indeclinable under Chidi cla99 As a matter of fact it is an Aryaya, becaux it 18 ruad in the Svarth class (I I 37 S 447) The God 13 called on the Protector because Ho protects (wafa) 'यो भरने स्वीवो रो पति विरपा । १६३ । पसेरा प। १ । १४३ । 113 The afir comes after the root (I 661) to ent, with the substitution of w força Thug 079: 1 collection a villago literally that which swallows up or 19 swallowed up that is which compreh nds all Cho word dry means battle 11 in sıcal no a FETITTI MT70791, 4T*t where grâma has the mesoing of coll ction १४४ । पधिलियिधिशुपिम्य शिर । ९ । १४४ । * TTH i Egitt titko i fons det i 'yeteftatori 114 The aflix T is fau after the verbs T (I 631) 'to prescrvo, Fax (IV 2) to ser, fem (V 2, IX 6,) to bind, and (IV 74) to drv This set town Flight for all your fre air eun Ia tbe Veda Bhashya tha word ett pl to espla ned as an of TT under tå verde vfa Ta C&C Ia tha feminine the form 18 OTT the long - 19 shortened, Uma 18 & pame of Pârvati Exit meays rays Some say it means thread for all I! 15 A Pronoun It is listed in the Sarvaning class el splendour the sun In the Vede bhashya it is explained by the word « strength १४५ ॥ पियुधीग्धिमिश्याधुसू-यो मा । १ । १४३ । rii aurajz tutit atelistigri T71 DGT i ofron re TETTHET 1914 | T**8187 TITITE Mieta 1411 145 l'he afli * connes after the roots 5 (IV 19, VI 50, IX 03) to go to desire to hill to gise 74 (IV 61) to fight in (VII 11) to light 56 (IV 101) thror up the (I 10 12) to go (V 9 ) to shake 1 (II 21) to bring forth ·YADA I $160] TIL OYADI ATTIXX3 153 Thug y the desire, the spring rensra Some rial the roast mith long t which mrans' to go' Thon thr word is free to an 1-107, warrict, TTK fuei, esp cially that which 13 ugod for the sacrc firo, 5 a sacriler 197*1 cloud Timoko, ks. heasca. By forco of the word orgal, wo get fierronad' also from trigo So algo urny from * to beget' pramºnas sacrificar, thiol, fio tara dark-blur, blaok, TATYT night, a hato, a dark woman, the indige plant, basil, roti namo of a sacred fig trecat Allahaba.l, a clood, thn thorn oppla, the cuckoo, n Black pippor, naa silt. f & yoman who has borne bo child ren, a cow, turmeric the Priyangii creeper १४६ । युजिरुधितिजां कुश्प । १ । १४६ । शामए । रथमए तिमाए। 110 Tho aflis sit comes after the roots g* (VII 7.) to unito, ** (1 781) to shine, and fez (I 1020) to sharpen, and the final of tho veu is changed into the guttural Tous That a couple, 1799 Gullred, radient, fara sharp (benca) ning २४७ । होईि । १ । १५७ । 117 110 allir vita comes after the root (II 2) to kill, *Turli is replaced by for Thus fit the winter season, frost, who sandal tree १४ । भिय. पुग्या । १।१४८ । भीनाभीप 118 Thc alfix it comes after the root of (III 2 X 278) to fear', with the optional augment ** Thus 47: terrible to fearful These are to well known pamos of the Minhabha-atn also १४९ । धर्मः।१।१४८ । patirgua franca 119. Tho Ford que is irregularly formed fith the saffis. To the roots to sprinkle, to shine (III. 14) 13 added the affir tt and the vowel s 13 gurated to form in Note -- 1 hot, beat, sommer, perspiration, boiler, san shine, juice, milk १५ । ग्रीष्मः ।१ । १५० । प्रसते पाहायस् । 160 Grishma is irregularly formed.

·181 TE BIDDEAVTA KUVUDI. [PADA 1. $ 151. To the root ve to eat (I. GG1) 19 added 45. and spomalougly we get a summer inson १५१ । प्रथैः पिवन्तममारणं च । १ । १५१ । पपिपी परिपेने। पपपी। यी प्रयिती' पृसी इति शादासंचा। 151. Tlio nflix foar come, after the verb ge (1 809) 'to become favious', and the is changed to i This yraat the earth Sorao read the affir , then the form 19 yetu Some made the ADX and then the form 29 ya? In the Sabdarnara we have got quan Note — The indicatory of the affi. denotes that the feminine je formed by The full text of the Såbdirnaya -graat yurit yuat ve TTT रया। - १५२ । प्रशूमुपिराटिमणिपटिविशिभ्यः कन् । १ । १५२ । भरणः । 'मुष मादी । ' स्याहतुपूर्व पा' । मुना सलपिका। लट्या परिभेदा फल कर पाए। बाइसधादिाधे किमपि । खट्दा । विश्वन । 152 The allir et comes after the verbs wo(V. 18) to crvado, (I. 803) to extend, ee (I. 320) to growy chuldish, Ew (X. 175) to close, az (I 331) to desire, and f** (VI 130) to enter. Thug wmai a horse for the rainy season, the sun, a drop of water, em a sparrow, 120ower, «ray ein, another diverselv made form is FTTT also Kanya is the name of & Bage also reala couch, favor the univers. Note :-en means & house, & fruit, a kind of musical instrum»nt, & Parrow, and game * means bin and the sage Kanva fra menns a drug or gred used to cange fermentation in the manufacture of spirits 597 literally that which is desired by the persons fecling sleepy-viz couch. १५३ । पपशीभ्यां बन् । १ । १५३ । वो गाता । ये च पवा भक्षा घसावे निपावोग्यम् । 'गव मित्राय पदया। 153. The aflix 9 comes after the roots (II. 3G) to go and a (II 22) to sleep Thus var going, ae happiness v going moving, speedy, quick. It means also & cours", way, or a Bourger, a fleet hors3 a9 PT TYTO # When not denoting & substantire, it is an Indeclinable. So also train मित्राय परताय । Note - According to Uvaladatta a m-ang male orgia. The aning given to it in the Veda Bhäsbya 19 that happiness.

·186 THE SIDDEANTA KAUBUDI (PADA I $ 156 ¢ 1 Nole --According to Ujjyaladatta this word is derived from a to worship', the st is changed to 6: means n sacuificer TH17 accord ng to him In the Vedic Dictionary the word u 19 rend in the list of greatdenotiny words In Rigveda I 36 1 778 Sajana explains va as an The word frst is derived from top to lick The # is changel too and 19 not gunated That by shich they lick (lıhant ) 13 called feet tongka, titat 19 from T to s allow Thit by which a thing is an Ilowed is 191 throat or nick There is added th augment * to lie flia From याप 'to obtain , we have at 'air 171 means the intes mal worms 9 tape vorm , some say it means wind in bo vels Note mirat is derived from it to 1 jure The sutra gives us also tho form श्रमीया (अप्या+अमीय = अप्वामीया) Ii the word in the text be अमीषा then it is dcrused from m'to brill and means affliction terror 11 mon an enemy Thue in the Rig Ved. VII 55 1 the word 1961 is explained AS अमीयाना रोगाना नायक। १५६ । कगशदभ्यो व । १। १५६ । कर्षः काम पाखुस । गर्वः । शर्थः । दयों राक्षसः। 156 The allira comes aftei tho roots (VI 110) to scatter, 7(VI 117) to swallot, (IX 18) to injure, ((IS 23) to ter Thus *** destre arat mes pride is an epithet of Shirn, was a demon १५७ । कनिन्वृधितक्षिराजिधन्यिधुप्रतिदिव । १।१५५ । योतीति था । युपेन्ट्रा । तश । राजा । धन्या महा। घय परासनम् । दाषा पर्यः । mfatter safer falcat fatit 157 The affix that comes after the roots 9 (II 23) to mit, (T 738) to sprinkle, 77 (I 655) to make small, ** (I 871) to slunc, ufou (I (28) to go, E. (II 31) to go before, afaita (IV 1) to play Thus it young man y tho s in the ear or Indri A carponter, crur kirg moon van d sert, wasto, va a low car the sun wafeaiadny १५८ । सप्पभूभ्या तुट् च । १। १८ । 97) 10S The affix tfit comes after the roots (I 127) to connrct, and ut (V 18) to occupy, and the rugment r, is added thereby Thus TF SY n t eight I'r * Taa ind interc d rire ? thesn t o num tale १५८ । नशि जलते । १ । १५९ । 139 Tlc tflix fat comes after the root * (III 8) lo lease, perculed log tic 10/tire 30 Thuer des That which s pirts,thi Narkocsy from light, or Temoves fusifa) th darkney ·- 1 197 Dada I Siro) TILLSIDI AFFIXES १६२ । श्यतु सम्पन्शीहन्तो दन्स्गहन्गमयन्विश्यासपरि- ज्मन्मातरिश्वनापयन्निति । १ । १६ । no ****TET71747 11977) I atit XTI ITT I T7153 mil'. VATTET TÉTapi for PET STít, 'fr11912 Fanfa rin ang ferrageTE I forgalta ūn yangi ITVPT70777) quifT94701 121 OISTTI O TITRES I TATITAE 911 FETT: 1 Digit Te Tariftri este furtifierina ofront yazisini yaratat operasi i mufca waalfar hraft i varf TATTI' T*7979TET UT TITT I WANTII wing tot 171 100 Tho rords why from fira (I 90) to go, t from (I 687) to sprinklo, TT from go (I 706) to nourish, try from far to go (I 673) rn from 177 (IV 132) to wet, fast from fent (IV 01) to lo kind, nt from 7* (VI 122) to purifs, starp from 1 to measure, forte from TC (II 10) to cst, vicar from OTTE (I 862) to proclucc, qrafit from fred (I 1059) to grow and prar fron ** (1 321) tu rorslıp, are forme.) math fin amir. These thirteen words are irrugularly forıncd with the ſix fx Thus from far to go, increasu' ye hase m'dog' from ayat' to sprinkle' se get Ul'o' So also it from 7th grow old * 11om fps to go so have atte, the is kngth»na7777 13 the dis290 of the spleen, the cnlargement of spleen maine moon and is from free to wet as the noon cnus 3 yut From foto på a90' 59.**** friend''2000' Thin root vowel is gunata { bare to ou from It ww get *** 'hrad, because ove fronts or loses coNSl0u9n099 wh a struck on this Part The 3 of 57 19 lengthened, and 19 replac 1 by w and then augment 13 unsurt d That which sinds into ho boncg 19 778 tho marrow of the bone far con s from are priced d by a That duch caly (terfer) all, is forts51 firw, th all-Joyourer Picafira or moon' becaus, it grows all round It is from * the p nultimate is elded, aud 113 added at the end b for the nth traferas that which grows (Rufa) in the mother (araft)---mother space the of the roat fre elided Irom to honor '1- derived Tot Indra'. The 5 23 changed to raud the augment Te is added before the afis Note -Taoallis bore 13 ft nnd not afrai So that it is not a fa&affis, Wat 19 the name of the sun and of Patris. In his gloss on the Rig Velz rers, die ATA 56 Sảyanı explains the word ticar? by titrat running or walking round, He drives it from manj preceded by sie and the attic of the Unûd, 1 151 elided, and the udatta 13 on the first syllable. Ujjraladatua ruads it as forut from $a sautra dhitu. T1019 ·188 TRESIDDHANE KAUSTUDY [PADA II 15181 . . CILAPIER II. १६१ । फहभ्यामेगु ।२।१। करे वर्गपद्रपद 161 The affix g comes after the roots (T 919) to do r (1 917) to take 1 Thus go an elephant, res peisc scent: a respactable womno a copper coloured deer १६२ । हनिषिनीरमिक्षाशिभ्य क्थन् । २ । २ । पमा पिपरणः । कुटः । गीषो मेता। रघ: फाटम् । 162 The affic क्यम् comes after the roots इन (II 2) to lill, 97 (IX 10) to extract, st (I 950) to carry, (I 906) to play, CT (1 078) to shine 2 Taus 4 a man who is ead or depressed you: laprosy a leader, is a chariot a limb Ty nood turmeric Mole:-Kushtha means leprosy a well as a scent गीय Is explained as स्तोत्र 'hrmn 10 the Veda Bhashga on the mantra भोपनीमधवान गुतायः १६३ । अये भूल । २।३ । 163 The affis the comes after the root (III 5) to' support, to nourish, preceded by sun 3 Thug yu: bathing at the end of a principal sacrifice for purifcation It means the end of a sacrifice or 3 Jña १६४ । उपिपिगार्तिभ्यस्थन् । २।४। पोष्ट दोष्ठम् । गाया। । पालकादोंपा। The affix पर comes alter the roots उप (I 127) to burn, * (IX 46) to extract, # (I 983) to sound, and (IIL 16) to .o 1 Thas also a lip (lower or upp»r) stegt any one of the viscern of tho body, such as the heart lungs &e the belly abdom-n na granary store zoom 91 a religious verso, vt desire By force of babulam, we get 1741 from V to go It means stelling intumescence २६५ । ससेर्मित् । २।५। मा समूहका 165 The affir an Is vिe after the root (I 052) to go 5 Thus era & collection or multitade in general, a company of merchants, carayan of traders troope १६६ । जवउभ्याभूषन् ।२।६। अाप पाठ । बरपा रथगुप्तीना । वषया। 164 C ·380 TIE VYADI AFFIXES PADA II 10 $ 1701 1 160 The affix it comes afiei the 1oots (II 24) to gros 6 old, decay, and TI (V 8) to choose Thås 774 Hesa, eu a sors of woulon ferco or freer with shich chariot is ponil d £y 3 duienen agune collen 211 2rmour coat of mail, a shield, a group In the Veda Banshyn Varu tha is the natue of an Asura १६७ । पातृदियचिरिधिसिविकासका । २।७। पीयो रवित पीपम् । ती शास्त्राध्यक्षोपायोपाध्यायति । 'अवतारजिष्टर- भारतीतसुचविगुतम् इति थियः । तुत्याऽग्निः । उपर सामगेदा। रिपथम् । वायुगकारपि । 'रिक्यपृषथ धन पसु । सिक्थम् । 167 The allir comes after the roots (L 972) to drink, (I 1018) to cross over, g (v to giro para, ** (II 54) to speak, ice (VII 1) purge, for (VI 140) to ooze 7. Thus at The sun, ghee, até means 'science, road, field a remedy or expedient, a teacher a minister an avatars a sage remnants of a meal water, mengtrual courses of a womau' - Visvakosha It means algo *. holy place of pilgrimage, gen fire collyrium, sulphate of copper, indigo, small cardamons * Name of the Samaveda, foi realth By forco of bahuli, the flix comes after also As अपम् । सिक्यम् boiled race १६८ । पर्निरि।२।। fwa Ta! 168 The aflix comes after the verb (III 16) to go, preceded by faça 8 Thus fast: Name of Si ma Veda In the Veda Bhishya on Tante fra Frant this word 13 explained as feet'injury १६९ । निशीथगोपीथावगधा ।२।। firmitatsiti afya 12 ani sana: enat i 109 The words fanta maid-night, nate pilgrimage and *74 bathed carly in the morning, are formed uregularly. 9 frafra: means mid night or night in general nutazata place of pilgrimage ui= bathed in the morning Notes --Nisitha is from site to sleep, with the upasarga fr Gopitha from Wat to drink with the upapada itu Aragatha from me to go, with the proposition 54 and the root yowel is shortened. In Rig Veda I 19 1 the word #141 19 explained by Sâyana as Bra* 'Soma drinking' Swimt Dayanand esplains it as IT urtigfaat waaritsa or Ta "a learned wan or a king,' or mai f495571Eta = a niver or a tauk. १७० । गश्चोदि । २ । १०। दीया सामो भागविषेपः। . t ·190 THF RIDDITANTI KAJIUDI [PADA II 105170 । 170 Tho iſlis at comes afta tho 100t* (I 963) to sound prece led by य. 10 Thug r14 tha s cond port of the Sama Veda or tho chinting of thr Suma Veda १२ । समीण । २ । ११ । रामियो पहिला र ग्रामछ। 171 Jie afliegt comes after the root (II 36) to go, pucce dua by एम्॥ 11 'I hy vra: battle fire In the Veda Bhashyo on Rig Ve la IX. 95 4 the word afiret is explained अडानि ॥ It means where they ro for success #taifa wordt war In the classical literaturo also the CT preced d by ry and endiogia क्ति has this m aning of battle , as in Amr Loshi II 8 106 where समिति: means battle १७२ । तिथपृछगृथयूथमोथा । २ । १२ । तिनलोपा । तिथोऽनला फापच । पृष्ठम् । गूथ विष्ठा । पूध समूः। 'मोयमनी मास्पे मी: मस्थित उच्यते । 172 The words faz fire, love, yo the brel, mercrements, 34 floch, and star the nostrils of a horse, ve irregularly formed with the ailir यफ ॥ I2 The word तिय 19 derived from /तिश निशाने (I 10°0) The latter 13 elided before the affix थक् ॥ It mis fire and Jesire or love' Trom /पु रोचने (I. 737) is derived पृष्ठ: which incar s bach of the body Iron /r to evacuate (VI 106_1s obtained गूथ the lengthening is anomalous (nipitana) Irom 1 fat (II 23) comes up and simularly the sowel 19 lengthened It means a herd a coll ction a Hock rrom / गटी (I 1006) is derived fita by the guna of the root von el irregulırly (neuter) imeans the mouth or noze of a horse #19: (rase ) werna ' march or journey Qucre May it not bo derived directly from Atz wafat (T 919) २०३ । फायितश्चिपिशफिक्षिपिक्षुदिसृपितृपिपियन्युन्दिश्यि- तिवृत्यजिनीपदिमदिमुदिरिदिशिदिभिदिगन्दिधन्दिदहिदसिदम्भिव- सिवाशिशीसितिधिशुभिभ्यो रक । २ । १३ । शानियमो रपस्वात् । पलि यलोपः । स्फारण । म्याक्मादित्यारपुत्वम् । सका । पर । | सिमए । क्षुद्रः। मद्यन्द्रः । तृपः पुरोहाशा हो बलवान् । यन्द्रा पूजक दी उाद्री जलपारियन कुत्रम् । हो रिपी भ्यनी यान्ते गले पर च दानवे । बने। धीमीरम् । पद्रो ग्रामः । मद्रो देशभेदर । मुदा प्रत्ययफारिणी । सिट्रो रोगो दरिद । बिभिद्र बनम् । मन्द्रः । चन्द्रा । पपागति पदोऽपि । दिमागुचन्द्रमा दामी चादा दिमदा नि । दामि दवायद । मा एमा स्वरुप प ( 4 समहारथे। " - ·TUE UNADI AFFIYES 191 PADA II 13 § 173 S 3168] . 173 The list comes after tho following 32 100ts, 1 ETút (I 1516) to increase, 2 754 (VII 22) to contract 3 ( 136) to deccire, 1 (V 15) to be able, 5 for 11) to send 6 gíza (VII 6) to pulverise, 7 m (I 1032) to go 8 T4 (1V 86) to be satisfied, 9 VE (IV 87) to rejoice to le proud 10 T (I 11) to enlute, to pinise, 11 9547 VII 20) malc ct, 12 fear (I 778) to be white, 13 meg (795) to iemīın, 11 737 (I 218) to go, to throw, 15 wa? (1 050) t) cairy, 16 * (IV 60) to go 17 7441 (IV 99) to lejoice 18 97 (I 10) to rejoice, 19 fez (IV 61) to be soirorful, 20 fafat (VII 3) to divide 21 fuff! (VII 2) to dude, 22 /Hit (I 13 ) to piuise, 23 /aft (I 68) to rejoice, 24 (I 1010) to reduce to ashes, 23 /21 (IP 101) to throw up 26 TY (V 23) to defraud, 27 wat (I 1054) to dwell, 28/07 (IV 51) to sound 29 1ta (II 22) to sleep, 30 EU (1 757) to laugh, 31 Viru (I 18) to go, 32 T4 (I 786) to shine Thus 1 *enlargement Faq + The a 18 elıded by which 19 a valâdı affis, by $ 873 2 From Vaa we get act=ani The * is changed to r as the word belongs to \yankvadı cias; It moans butter So also 3 79 crooked 16 Indrı and a tr e 5 fame quick Ogni sinall7 Tinoon 8 qa encrific al ca ce or purodusa 9 द्वमा roserfit 10 TI: worsh roer 11 nl nl of a quatic animal 12 frwng white lcpiosy 13 i an enemy a soun ), darkness rock wheel and the denion Vr tra 14 Trom 17 ve get att: l'he aja is replac d by st by II 4 GS 2.92.15 Flomat we get the water 16 2:n village 17 to Joy, an l the co int: v called Vladra 19 yer a real, a coin, a sccret s gn of recognition 19 fast a dise 23 pool 20 funt hole 21 fut a thunder bolt 22 4: deep sound 23 r* moon other form 1977 wt hout formed by unffs of Prcl adı class find in the Subdarnasa the synonyms of moon rre fit vt FTT, Ta and 1 24 : tore 25 777 a divine physic an 20 anl small 27 llo root is vocalis d to y mod wt lt rent ta an 1 the # 19 1 ot changel to though it com s after y b cause of the ving LUL wh ch orduus t it when T 19 follo scd by there is no mard any a c 6 ३१६८ । न रपरतृपिपजिस्पृशिएपहिसवादीनाम् । ८ । ३ । १९० । रेफपस्य एकास प्वाटोमा परनादोला घ मूर्धन्या न स्यात् । पूर्वपदाव (३५४३) इति पाल प्रतिषियन इति वृधियोऽभिप्राया। गासवगि- (२२१0) -तिमाहमपि न स्रो ररिमः । उपागे।। यात्रा दिया। यात्र मन्दिरम् । शीरोज लो भूगी। सिधा या पम् । * मुसेरम् . । मुस्त्रम् । याहुलकोदथु। An- A9 Ye दभ्र can f 11 3 - ·192 TEE SIDDHAYTA KAUMUDI (PIDI II 13 $ 174 3166 The substitution does not take place if = follows tier as well as ir ? Tu and go and the words listed in in the Sarandi class This d bars the chaoge othrwi3 r quired by VIII 3 106 S 3613 according to the opinion of Kiis ki yrittt 10 in tha Vaid cl taratura also thero 19 no change, much less would there be such a change in the classical literature and so VIII 360 S 2£10 also does not apply Thus U + =! ray e Amarakosi I 3 33 and in the same II 9 66 1 cow 28 Ironn TT we get or 'a day at teinplo 29 Trom is derived to a python snake 30 From o comes : a fool 31 From reg wag & fra I saint 32 T gives Et meng Ty white By force of the ord so this aflix 17 comes after go (IV 111) โรง as TTT m aming a p stle, a tear It 19 synonym oflevat a tear Noe -In the Dasapidt 33 roots are given namely the root ar 19 inserted between in and arou The example 136'ox Madhava also has the same १७४ । चक्किरम्योरुच्छोपधाया । २। १४ । "मालमुष्पम् । मोरया। 17+ The allis rah comes after 9 (93) to satisfy, v (1 906) to play and the penultimate is changed to 14 Thus far an ac d a sour i del ght taw y bright doe - Ixim m ans sourness and a kind of cane or sorrel and *** f fexta n = the sourncss or acidity obtained from a tree १५ । यो पते ।१।१५। Fager! 170 lhe ris a comes after 3 (1 913) 'to do'preceded by for and thereby the stof the root is changed to # 15 Thus - चिकुला The n con २६ । अगिसम्योदार्थश्च । २ । १६ । TI ATIT! 170 The nfix in comes after the verbs T (I 193) 'to sprak'a (IV 93)'to gron tirel and there is lengthening of the rowol of the root 16 19 - 01 manga, av red metal १७७ । निन्देनोपश्च । २ । १७ । निद्रा 177 The aſtir * comes after Viare (I 66) to blamo', and there is elision of the nasal before the alüx 17 Thus -fext "leep ·194 TNX OIDDUXTA XUNUB? (VAD411 229 183 le Tole - In the chhandga we have from viridh i to incrers anym मुष्ट तया where मग्नुपर्धयन्ति ॥ So also य इमा वाम f om/jant to produce नमयामाम॥ Thus पर्ष गुप: पर्यानि गोपचम्ति hot winds whtch care the leaves to dry tp the wit ter scagua Similarly agai=vulfa praefa which cause the lerves to fall do va The winter season As in the sentence वान्ति पर्व शुधो धातास् ततः पर्ण मुधोऽपरे । १३ । जोरी च । २ । २३ । जीरोग्ण व्यत्यो। 183 The affis is comes after the verb 75 (I995) to go, and replices the of the root 23 Thus i an atom Vedic qu ik swift Accord og to Visrakoca it mmans a swor i, cim n geed So nlso Aledını According to come the root is Jyå to grow old (11 29) Thus 9+=fort (vocalisation by VI 1 10 S 2412)*70 (tengthening by VI 4 ? S ?353) This is an opinion apparently fnding its support in the Ilahabhash,a where in commenting on 1 1 4 ruta tra Tige the rartiha 5770707 is set nside on the strength of the rartiba fins at मसारणम् ॥ १४ । सुनुवागृधिम्य क्रन् । २ । २४ । सुतारा धीरः ।। 181 l'he affix 7 comes after the rerlis (V 1) to Tress out, * (II 21) to bring forth, T (III 10) to support of (IV 136) to be grcely 21 Thus 7 WBC Int that which is d stilled sometimes it m ans tho goblet or vessel The masculine si incape a god to merye 'the fun! te, gata Ficafa fe fe witt: m stroog minded 71491 snffron & vulture A greedy prison १८५ । शुसिधिनीना दीपंप। २ । २५ । जमी।। रातोपानीलामीरा द्रा। 185 The aflis Ascomesafter „I(095) to go, y ff (2), to bind „fa (V 5; to gather, FX (V 1) to tuow away, and there is lengthening of the root of the rowc! 20 Thug - Itin bero tho sa to the lion sit a plough, Na mg 100 thr Orcin It a szutra root like you noe -II a hero warrior lion a Loar, the sup tho Sain tree namo of lo larr the grand fath rof Kp shng thu Arka plant the Chitraka treo Va ploigh, the sum the Arka ant a rag a burk a cloth or girment a Decklacc of pearls consisting of orttipe ttroba, mala crest the dress of A Baidhist pries, a ADOTT of wirl with str kes701 / a cricket tell w se gertle fuur tun ·PADA II 2851881 THE UNADI AFFIXES. 195 C भीe the occan a limit boundary, a drink, beverage, a particular pari of amountain १८६ । वाविन्ध । २ । २६ । धीघ्र विमत। 186 'The afix kratr comes after Jindht to shune' when preceded by vz From /शिधी 'to shine (VII. 11) we get विप्र I thus शि++ प्रारfø++ (the nasal 13 clıded by VI. 4 24 S 415)=fire pute, clean, the eky, wind air, fire १८७ । वृधियपि या रन् । २ । २७ । पनौचप्रा प्राकारा 187 The affix v comes after /पृथु (I 796) 'to increase' and /सुदप (I 1062) to sow seed lbus qui lenther, w or as a field, a rampart earth work, mud wall, a bank or moun i of any kind the slope or declivity of a hill, a summit or peab the bauk of a river the foundation of a building, the gate of a fo tified town a ditch the circunferance of a sphere, dust, kui a father, & Prajapati wa lend १८८ । चन्द्रावविप्राथुनपुरगुरभद्रोग्रमेरजेलशुद्धाशुनागौर- वन रानाला जम्वाधियति । निपातकाशाभाय। शो माया । इदिइन्द्रः । धान लोपा ॥ भयम् । पशोऽसी वीरकै पो । दुर उपवाया इश्वम् । 'थमः । मधुम्यान लापा । फुप्रमर पयन । चुन सुनम् । तु पिले तने रेफलेप: । अगुणः। शुरु। सुर छेदने रखा। गुशाभापत्र तुर भसाप | भद्रप। अच समवाये चस्य गः उद । प्रिभी। मेरी । परी लाभलो जल नरद्रयम् । शुषेप क शुभम । पल ।यलः । गुत् वृद्धिः । गोलित पीते' पन भो । यो विभागी । यो गुणाभावः । हरा भरे च पारिणि । गा मा पाला । 186 The words ऋज 2 leader, इन्द्र foremost, अग्रग first, पत्र thunder fan Brahmin $77, forest a face, je razor, Tt hoof, wo wise, vi mightv, और drum भेल timed, TRA pure, shute, पर Flute and yellowish, y: divider, it water, per gailand, are sor formed with the affix ri 28, These nineteen Words are irregularly formed by the affix ! There 18 no gunn of the root vowel as an maly Thug 1 29: 'a leader' It 19 from /ऋतु गति स्था नादिषु (I 189) 2 From /इदि परमेश्य । 64) इन्द्र: Indra th- Inner Self, the sun 3 From afir qat (I 680) wr9 first over, Burplas front a weigif=pala The Dasıl 13 elidad 4 From /वर गती (1 271) *** m dia non l tha thundr bolt 5 From / 374 to sow s ed' (I 105 %) com a fast, the penult mate is changed to ru 6 From fx #txira (I. 453) comes pay foast The nasal is elided 7 From /षि .

·190 THE SIDDIKITIKI 30D (PADA II 30 $ 190. ' to kiss' (I 46) comre 14 fco' lho nasal 19 clıda hero also O From se fait (VI 52 and 5!) comes go 'thu razor Thus US +TER T Tho roga is chdui anul tharo 19 no guni 10 Irom cora (VI 52) com a similarly at: hoof, the 19 eli led and thera 19 no guna 11 I romuft *91 (I 12) conneg uzr or 47 with the clision of the Daual. It incang good, auspiciouy happiness gold # fragrant grase aron A bullock 1 p cius of wagtail hind of elephant an impostar, nn epsthet of mount floru 12 Irom 7 17874 (IV 114) com's , tht is changed to " It menns ficrce formidable cui Nomiota mixecasty, Namo of Rudra 13 Iron Fana (III 2) com act. Sometimes tho ( 19 changed to wand wo get agt or so oft a kettledrum 14. tai n bont A raft a float, timid foolish, unstrady tall ngalo 15 Trom wra (1 198) or vegfer gavê (IV 56) comng ut, the 718 changed to #Similar to the last va have gis also shero e 19 changed to #17 bright tho planet Venug, Name of the preceptor of asurag the month of J Festha fro tho chitraka plant, the ess«nco of anythrog the male and female energy y wliite, some of Shiva & discaso of ths whito part of the eye fresh butter sour gru 1 16 From ott (1 997) by sirddhi of the root vowel wo get one white, ghınıng, i tre the white mustard the moon a kind of buffalo a kind of decr, th planet Jupiter, the name of Chaitanyn , yellowish color na Nome of Parriti a virgin the earth, turmeric th- tulsi plant 17 From 97 H (f 191) comes a wealthy 18 from varmt (II 36) comes to spirituous liqvor, Tater the earth sprech food 19 From 777 TA (II. 63) 29 derived Tet the 19 changed to a farete name of a district 10 est Bengal pame of a tribe nana of Visho 1, RTEra a field, high ground a wood near A village, fraud at a garland wreath chaplet, a row, line series, a group a string, necklace, a rosary a streak १८ । समि फसे उपान । २ । २९ । 'बस गती । सभ्यतगम्ति पलाम जमा अस्मादिति सफमुको दुर्जनः । शस्थिरम् । 189 The un comes after the root 757 (I 913), to go, Thon preceded by the preposition of 29 Thu9 919m unsteady, fickle, bad, wicked Literally ha from whom people thoroughly (ar) run away (1) whom people religiously Aloid १८७ । पधिनशोणु कन्कनुमौ च । २ । ३० । पो का । पापुका सूपकारः । ननु । न गुमा । 190 I hi afli 957 comes after the Terbs 9 (1 1015) to cooh, and 7" (IV 85, to become invisible and the of Te is changed to the augment 4 is anded to 1 30 ·PADII 35 ; 19) THE INADI AFFITTI. 107 Iron 1997 (1 104)) to cook inlogg * IV 8) aro derived 979** 'cook' nnd er injurious destrucive, email toin. A nagal 19 ingcrt vl in the Irst loan of the affix chu s vrider in the cys of ** * १९१ । भिय. फुपान् । २ । ३१ । virt1 . 101 The affus Arulan comes after the root bhi to fear (III 2)31 Thug ** timid, cowardly a tiger & grckal a bar, nn om, a kanp of sugarcano n a forcst wood १९२ । कुन्शिल्पि मायोरपूर्यस्यापि । २ । ३२ । रजकाफः । परक । नप भने । पन्नः । गुनासपए। 192 When the ord to bo fouined denotes an artisan, or is a namo then the aſſia hoin is added to a ront, cren when not preceded by an upapada (15 mell as wlicn preceded by an upapada) 32 As r garde Belpın or an artisan or art ats From 15 m (IV 58) 17e get a washermer MFE #77 ( 23) 21:55 marrine-cutter,' ono whose profesion is to enaho sigar cane into su 7751! Hero thero is an up?pada ra, the word 18 cqual to 1960FT* Ar examples of Sarjük or Appellation -Fron vos metu dis (I FO) 70* & spf * wander og mendicant From 40 p (1 938) 731n ressal used for drinking spirits From post (VI 46) 47** & dog Name of a sage. Trom /** (726) ****'e dog' १९३ । रमे रश्च लो वा । २ । ३३ । रसको धिशासी शमका। 193 When the affir IT is added to the root the 13 optionails changed to " an the form at assumes is either ফ' or 'দ্ধ। 33 Top word *: murny licenti) 19 *** is the name of a sage १९४ । जहातेद्वे च 12 13 1 पाकररयागी कालच । 191 When this affix ky un 18 applied to the ITE (III 6) the root is doubled 34 Tie vord Thi is derived from the rati (II! 8), and means abai doring 1 aving time, the child the slough of a snake १९३। मो पम घ । २ । ३५ । धमका कर्मकार 193 When the affir hyuin is applied to the manst the root assumes the form of va before the affix isalded to it 33 ·198 DE SIDANTA XUSUDI. (PADI JI. SA $ 196. Thus धनियाद करोति, नि पासपुनक्ति, पापा पमा कर्मचारीक्षा. (The herald 1, the blackemith.) From th3 root /Tr framet: (1. 974) 'to blow' is derived *** n blacksmith १९६ । हनी पध च । २।३६ । 4 196, Tho root r is changed to my wbon this aflix kvar is applied to it 36 Thus i fan exccutioner', 'A murdarer,' a kind of reed' By force of 'bahulam the ntfix kvun comes after other roots also m57 frein (X 353) gives yFit's juggler, chent, roguc' Similerly Tutego (VI 141) gives *** 'cutter' This diverso application of the affix it is shown in the next satra. १९ । यमुलमन्यत्रापि । २।३७ । 'हुए विरणाप । शुरुका । कृतकम् । 137. Theafir it comes diversely after other roots also 37. Thuy कोपयति, विस्मय फारयतीति हकः (the magictan the juggler) कृन्तति fæ fe in the gita, funte das #r*! (the axe) fazfer dra fecerut water the pearl piereer an instrument for boning diamond, pearl &c), ** *** Age* 10U TATU (that which makes food savoury, generally applied to a hwd of lemon tree called oil on, or its fruit, tha acid juhica or which makes food agreeable ), enfatfatema paramour), তদ্ধতি Crowaalfa 5**: Thomat e (that which gives off, a dorotee or a cloud) १६ । कृपेर्य द्विश्वोदीचाम् । २।३८ । कार्यक:-कृयका। 198. When this aflix kyun 18 applied to the root (I 1039), there is vriddhi of the correl of the root, acoording to the Northern grammarians 38 Thus gum: or 141 It is derived from the root a falta (1 1039) The word as means a husbandman cultivator, a ploughman. has the additional sense of attractive, drawing. The neuter ym medus A plough share १० । उदकं घ । २।३९ । मपश्चार्यम् । 199 Tlus affir hrun is applied to 377 V11 20), to foim the void udala 39 From undi hledane (VIT 20) 13 derived it by kyun aflix and The word ni could hive been deris ad regularly under the preceding gatra 38, e it,19 name, ts sparate mention here is a supertuity. 15 AntaDS Water ·PADA II 45 $ 205 ) THE UNADIAY FII. 199 . thes २०० । पश्चिकृपोः किफन् । २।४। वृश्चिका । कृषिका 200 The affir innt is applied to the roote fannd 79. 40. Thus, परति दिनधि पति वृधिका विपी जीय विशेषा एक कीटोका A centipede a Scorpion , aloo an earth worm , पति येग या कृपिफ the ploughmsn. These werds are from /ो प्रल रेदने (VI II) and /उप विशेखने (I 1039). २०२ । प्रालि पणियाषः । २ । ४१ । माणिक पपपविक्रमी । प्राधिक परदारोपजीवी । 201 The affix किदार comes after the roots पy Ind कर., preceded by the prefix at (ie rand var) 4.1 Theso are derived from /पण व्यवहारे to barter, (I 466), and /पप (1 716) to injure The word prof means a merchant, a trader and . माक्षषिक: a catamite, a man supported by another swife २०२ । गुपेीर्घश्य । २।४२ । भूषिक सासुः । 202 When thug hihan affix 19 applied to the root of 5 is lengthened 42 Thus afat a mouga It is derived from /प स्वेथे (1 707) to steal २०३ । स्यमेः संप्रशारणं च । २।४३. पादीः । सीमिदो दृवभेदः । 203 When the fix hrhan is addel to /syam there is vocalisation of the root as well 43 The force of च 23 reli,' is that there is lengthening algn This मीनिक्षा * kind of tree' It also menns an ant hill au ant The roots स्वाद (1878) २०४ । शिय इकन् । २।४ । काय मता। 201 To the root at is added the affix कन् । 44. Thus tfak'the purchaser.' The root 15mita grafsfirad (IX. 1). २०५१ साडि पशिपनियतिखनिभ्यः । २।४।। प्रारणिका । शामिद । इन्द्रमीशा किरातच । भापतिका सपना देवास्तव । पारारिको पिशो परापमा 205 This affix ikin is also applied to the roots पण, पन्, 4d and try then they are preceded by the preposition 2 # 15., Thuyापशि shopke per It is a supa fmty, for n hen we get मापषिका by shira 41 ante, a fortieri re get'पापलिका । From /पy we get जापनिका an emerala, sapphure, kirata or barbarian. It comes from /पन पहतो (I. 487) From /पतृ गतो (1 868) comes आपतिs a hawk, falcon, M ·200 THE SIDDHAVTA KUNUDI (PAD4 II 46 $ 209 accidental unfores en sent froin begren From Era (I 927) comes चासनिक:rn. 14 U-12 abog gger, litcher miner a thief # spade poá 1 Funer2UTETTIIN स्पैन । हत्येना। हरि । सविना। 206 The affır yne is applied to the roots xa for, and W # 16 Thus from that (I 1012) comes in the white color a falcon from Falor y te euat: (1 959) comes Fedar a thief Some read this as F#m without ! From TO (I 947) comes kfres a deer the white colour a goose the sun, Vishnu Shira ficat one of the four class of women & yellow Jasmin , & gooi gol leo image name of a metra the green color, turmeric, mudder Proin a tuu? (631) com a afant an officiating priest at a gacrifice an Adovaryu pogi at Frog I 71391 farar 207 The affix inach is treated as f** when added to tho root vrt 17 From th roo quitar (IL 19) we go wiat bin It m aos sorro v and curve also २८ अोरज प।२।४। atuaari I ft 1 208 The atfix in ich is added to the root Vaja and the root vja (I 218) is replacel l» ajr 48 lo other words the root remains unchanged Other ise by the general rule II 4 5F S 2292 the root ajn rould have been replac d by ./11 This prevents that subst tutiou This ufwei The word means skin See Amnmkosa II 7 47 २०९ । बहुलनन्यत्रापि । २।४ । पाटिनम् । मलिन् । लिगम् । इरिकतम् । मते यत्पपिदिनम् । दिसापि दिनन् । 209 1 ho affix inach comts diversely aftor other roots also Thus / 75 798 (I 357) gircs as afety hard on TTT (I 891) gives me a lotus 97 UTC (I 522) gives a fost dirty /कुरिदारे MI 239) giye gimny Name of a city the capital of the Vidarbhas Mole - fax hard stuff, crucl inexorable sharp gising pun mas tbichet afont or excetmeat made with refined sugar en carthen vessel for cooking kicat ciak, Fater jar sien dirty foul, uaclean, soiled black, sofal, lox, fantd woman during menstruation, ·19883 PU II 2171 TECIAN IIFIE 201 40 कुपिष्टमम् is the nam of neits •A मगर पुषित भएको यो the eggborn Wine to the city huninin (Sort Harsh :) hintunath nimn of Asant also who90 disc altits arc cilla freist! 411 है। . Ta nflix inach is ndded to the root /दो IV 40) ala Irm /दो प्रयाडमे we get दिनम् 'dy or ion Tuttulya on Tafa ford tri atever 19 cut (fex = 758) on a Parushi (teftes पणि) te on a sacrt 1 day b longs to th ) vy पनि दिन निकल देवानाम् ॥ 110 word दिन means nday also २१० । द्रुदक्षि-पामिनन् । २।५ । दुविधम् । दक्षिणा दक्षिया । 210 The affır is applied to tlıc roots, and for 50 Trom Jaru गती (I 192) and /laksha पद्धो (I_639) we get धिषण ani दक्षिणम् and दक्षिणा Thusbषति गपति पते प्राप्यत वा तत् दविष दुर्ण गुपक्षम् पराक्रमी पा (Property polling anl power) दसते व ते पीप्रकारी भवति पार पक्षिया गती यामभागा परत गनुपर्तन it honest courteous submis ava) प्रिया च दक्षिा दार मनिटाचा (1 gift due to the Bralımanas o o C 14 ops of rig ons obarvance) २१९ । पर्स किदिच्छ । २ । ५१ । परिण गुभ्यम । 211 2010 affix in an licn added to vri(III 16) to go. tiited 28 1 fore and thesis replace i ls sont t, winch 13 1ollowed by a bv 1 1 51 S 70 51 T! 19 ऋष्यन्ति गस्ति यत्र यामाता जनास्त परिणम् (at is rt or salin an 1) Ti Aar+इमम् (no guna bcca 1s ths atiir is trust ! 43 कि, । ऋs replac ! by r by the expr ss ral ofhasur art+ 1 51 S 70)a feidh s rt, dreary r goinmal tahit २१२ । वेपितुहाईवश्व १२५ विपिनए । दिनम् । 212. When the affus inan is id led to rep (T 391) to shako, and tuli (I 773} to distres , the lors of the roots pre shortened to and s respectively 32 Thus घेप+मन् विप+हमन्- विपिनम् forest तु+हमन् - तोहानन्- बह+इन हि cold sRON २१३ । तलिपुलिभ्या च । २।३ । तसिन पिरले तोके स्वच्छेऽपि तिन त्रिषु । नरम् । 213 So also the roots तल anl पुम take th affis son, and tuo Tuot ronc remains short 53 .

·202 THE IDDI INGÅ I IL MUDI [1 DA II 51 5214 ३ ५. * - - Thus t-aragfa afafagalfa afera (lonely - litary landf i and trung parent) पोलयति महान् भवतीति पुलिमम् (ser side or r vsr st) These are from /तल प्रतिष्ठायाम (58) and /पुल महत्वे (Y..61) २१४ । गवरत उच्च । २।५४ । पौरादिस्याडी । गुर्विपी गर्भिणी। 214 To the root गर्य IS applied the affix इनम् , and the ot of garv is replaced by 3 54 Thus गुर्विषी । गर्यति प्राप्नोति गर्ययति मुचप्ति वा सा गुर्पिणी गर्भिणी था । The root 19 गर्व मोघने । गुर्षिणी means a pregnant woman The f minide long & 19 added as the word belongs to Gaurâdı class. २१५ । रुहेश्च । २ । ५५॥ शरिणा 216. This affix हनन् comes after the root ne (I 912) to sprout 55 Thus the form 1s रोहिशः । रोहति धीतेन जायते स रोहिणsndi masatre another form is afrui as the word b longs to the Prajndle class २१६ । महेरिनएच । २ । ५६ । चादिनन् । मादिनम् । महिम राज्यम् । 216 To the root मह 1s applied both इनन् and दमण । Thus महति मझते पूश्यते घर हमाहिनम् (the kingdom) also महिनम् The affix इनम् is drawn into the sutra by forc of the word प also The root Is भ६ प्रजायाम् (I 766) In the Veda Bachyn the word मादिनः । explained as महनीय: or पूनिया - adorable worship worthy Se Rig Veda एतस् रमिन्द्र माहिना भन् (1 1653) २९७ । विश्वचिपच्छिशिस्नुद्रुष्णुज्या दीर्घा सप्रसारण प। २ । ५७ । धार। माट । श्री। । स्वत्यतो पतादिमिति व यशोपकरणम् । हरियम् । कदमू कामरुपी कीटच । भूराफारी भरस्वत्या पिया जवन तियाम् । 217 Tho affıx vip is added to the roots rach pracholil, sri sru dru, pru and ju trliereby the vowels of the roots aro • lengthenel, but there is no change of the sems rowel of the root into the corresponding vor] 57 Thus पच+कवि -पाक Tho scmi rowel 4 requ re t to be changed into - by VI I 15 S 3409 but the above prohibition prevents th s. Similarly *****fore=HTC The vocalisation req ured by VI I 10 S 2412 19 prevented Tue छ !s changed to a by VI 4 19S 2061 11919 changed to a by VIII 2 Y6 S 294 which is chingid to r (अन्य) and then to E (परपा) thus we get S माद, dual माशी pl प्रामा Similarly विधि-वी। Sirailarly 4+ faqaf sacrificial la L literally from which butter &c, flors into the sacrific al fire . . + ·IRLA II 605220] TIC UADI AFFIXey 203 . . . Similarly 5+ *Tran 'gold Smilaily wgay-१ : a lowd person, an insct. Similarly ri meaning sky, Siraywatt a dumon and swift Note -यक्ति यया सा वाक्,{words) पृष्यतीति माट् , (as याद मा ) a disciple , श्रीयते यति या मा श्री. (a design of nature, beauty) या सति पस्या या साध। PUTUT IT (n Ancrificial ladle , & Cisca le) पते प्राप्यते दुखमनया सादिरपय था (Gold) कटेन प्रपते गथ्यतीति फटमा कामुको जना कीटो पा (a lewd person , an insect) अति गीत गण्यतीति गयोगरयो चपन प्राका विदा पा (a rabbit a horse a bull, the sky knowledge) So also tfic forms of प्रायट् (thortuny s ason), द्वः (the gate keeper) उदरिषत् (whoy), शुक् (अर्थात स्तुन्ति पया सा, hymn} Thes words are from the roots परिमारणे (II 54) प्रदीपसायाम (VI 10) श्रि सेषायाम् (1 9451 नु गती (1 987) दुगती (I 992) मुरगवी (1 1006) and y trat (n.sulra-dhatu) २७ । घरमोतेवश्च । २। ५८ । थापासघिद्धा 218 The affıx mfag comes after the root se to persado (V 14) and thoroby the Jong vowel wat is shortened into 58 Thus, थाप्नुवन्ति घरोमित्याप: । धापा (waters) This word is always • feminine and plural in declension thus w797, 49, aft: 2941, &c. The Wor i mins earty water Sc Amira kosa I. 10 3 Thus चाप + विप अप । It is declined as above, te Nom PLYTT Acc PI ***: Inst Pl saf41, Dat Aby Pi **** Goa Pisar, Loc २१८ । परौ बजे पश्च पदान्ते । २ । ५९ । पुणे विदीयों स्ता पदान्ते तु पद्य । परियाट । परिणाजी । 219 To the root + preceded by the prefix aft, is added the affly fra vylioreby the short of vraj 19 lengthened into I, and replaces when it is final ini pada 69 Thus परितः सर्वतो पति स परित्राट् {a tmendicint) Thus परिष+धि - oftare but in the Nominative Singular it is considered as if it was aferro Then the q 19 changed to by जयत्व and चष rules. The root 19 प्रगती ([272 The dual of प्ररिहाट् 15 प्ररिवाजो and the plural is परिवाना। २२० । हुव लवच्च । २ । ६० । . 4 220 The affix fere is added to the roots and the Fowel 13 - lengthened and the root is doubled as if the affix was to 60 -Thus:-जुहोति ददात्यत्ति वा यया सा : {wooden ladle by which ghee 15 poured into the sacrificial re) The root is F दामादनयोः (III 1) ·204 TOL DIDDHI TA KALADI 11 11 113971 < + 62 14 २२१ । सुव क । २५६१ । सुवः। 221 Tho affixa is applied to the roots to flow 61 Thus - ufat YTHEATC U: 41 (a sacrificial ladle, meaning the gr na as El, Art II 57 preceding) Similarly (motionless constant) २२ । चिक्च । २०६२। इफार उच्चारलार्यः । क इत्फुत्वम् । शुक् । 'घुवं च स्तुपाठ मष्टहदि । 222 The affıx fre is also applied to the root Thus Vanhatt arrange (a sacrificial ladle) The affix is really the x is for cuphony and * 15 indicatory, by which they is changed to a guttural Thus 5€ dual mal, pl ! The plur Le for in 4*ts found in the follo ving चवं च पश्च मदि। २२३ । तनोतेरनश्चय ।२।६३ । सनोतेचिक्प्रत्ययः । पनो पथदादेशश्च । स्थक् । 223 The portion ay of the root on to sprend is replaced by the syllablo a va, when the affis fue() 19 addel lo it os Thus सम्+चिक=तुव+च = स्वप nom S स्वक् skin Tie s ibst tute is the full syllable a va cons sting of t vo latters, and and not merely Hence Bhattoji uses the word dibda 111 epilarding. this sūtra for the meaning of the word the see A K II 6.62 २२४ । ग्लानुदिभ्या डौ । २०६४ । ग्लोरमी 221 To the roots _glai (I 962) to be dejected, and unud (VI 2) to propel is added the affir dau 61 Tl as temat: moon + st=ito boat ship See A II'3 14 and I 10 10 २२५ । विरव्य यम् । २०६५ । होरिस्येव । ग्लोकरोति । कृम्मेवाका (४९) रति मिनियमार्थमिदर । पणादिप्रत्ययान्य Ta vafa 225 The words formed by dau are not indcclinables, except when they take the further affix chyi 63 The wordt is understood in this stra Thus ret ettia Here the c19e afix is elided, as the word 13 treated like a chua formel tuddhita, and hence is iadeclinable It means भाली। ग्लीः सम्पगते तथा करोति, converting that which was not glass (or camphor) into camphor te encainphoring & The present stra 19 in fact a niyama or restritivo i ule for at restricte * tho too wido scope of I I 39 S 449 by which crery word form d by the knt affia st, would have been ipso facto an indeclioabic. As Unads are krit affixes a word forped by at would an iud clinable But this L 7 ·205 PADS, II 7082303 THT UNADI AIXFY . sQtra rcally eays that a unadi word formacd by an e or st, 2 or at affix 19 not an indeclinable, unluse it is ased with the force of chui aflix Se the fullowing sâtras for and staffixes. २२६ । राते हैं।२।६६ । रा।रायो।राया। 26. To the root /ra (II 16) to gre, ts added the affix dat (२) 66 Trus रा+हेरे। Its declined thus t+मु रा+मुप् (VII 2 85 S 286) Dual रायो। PI राया। रे means hre, sharp, gold, and riches २२७ । गहोंः।२।६७ । 'गो रिस्पे पलीव किरलनुभदयो । 'प्रीशु स्यादिगि मारल्या भूमी च भुरभोधपि । 'लियो स्वर्गपरस्मिाधाणलोममु' । पाहुलकादपु तेरपि हो । दीपी स्यान्तरिषयो।' 227:- To the root /gam (I. 1031) to go' is added the affix do (पो). 87- Thus ग हो गो। In declining this word shtra VII 1 20 S. 284. applus. Tie num.S is nito alccording Kesava, this word means, when masculine, the sun, a bull a ray of light, a kind of sacrihco when femi. funci incans, a quarter of thu compass, the goddess of speech 2 e Sarasvati, the carth, the cow when both nasculine and furninine it means, heaven, the under talt of• Indra, water, ray, a region of the sky, an arrow, and the half of the body. u By' force gf. bahulara the affix connes after /dyut (1. 777) to shine. Thus ita lem, Heaven and firinainent. १२। धमेश्च डू ।२।६। दिमे । अगा। *228. To the root /bhram (IV. 96) to wander about, as added the affix di (क) as well as to the root/gam 68 Thus धूः brow,' By force of the word च ' and', the affix is applied to Thus sit & servant, literally one who goes in front २२९ । दमे होसिः।२।६। दो दोषी। 229. 'lo the root dam (IV 91) to tame, is added the affix dos (षोम्) 69 lhus **+ sterfte dual atat the fore arm According to Śrubarsha the word is tmasculine, as दोषं तस्य । It is neuter also, as ककुद् दोषधी used in the Bhasby It is feminine also as t'arm' as in Dhananjaya Kosba, २२०। पणे रिज्यादेश्च वः ।२।। पणिक् । स्रापार । 'नगमो धाषितो वधिक। .230 'lo the root /pan to barter, to prnuse (1.466)is added the alix iji (*); and the initial is replaced by an 70. पम् also .

·200 Tite 411 DIA 14 KAUBO DI (PADA II U1 $ 231 CA Thus +=+=ufinom safn a tra ler Iho wor! whes the afhx without changing the scnge As थाणिज: a tradr Su Amara osa II J fort paris मैगमो वाणित्री पणि । २३१ । वशे कित् । २ । ७१। 'उचिगनी चापि च । 231 The affix ii coming after nvas to desire (II 70) is treated as fa and so causes vocalisation 71 Thus "T+=gfu The vocalısa son takes place by VI 1 16 S 241 It means fire and ghee (clarified butter) २३२ । भृन उच्च । २ । ७२ ॥ भूरिषभूमिः। 232 The affix ijl is fm after the root „buri to support (I 946) and the final of the root is replaced by long which is followed by< (I 1 51 S 70) Th 18 x+y=x+y=ffer nom syfte meaning the earth २३३ । जति सहोरुरिन् । २ । ७३ । अनुरियनम् । पहुरिरादिस्यः पृथिवी च। 233 Tue fi urin comes after tho roots was to release (IV 102 ) and wali to cadure (I Jus) 73 Taustufe: the thundu bolt 'the wired 'the hungry for the sun and the earth th enduring the loog siffering No es the words orgft and rgfcare used in th following Riks- स्वयं पिप्यतुम् । Here wca (dat va) 13 explained ag ar an u Ta tho Nik नीपायमान जमुरिम रयेनम, the word बसुरिस् Is explained as तु धत ॥ In उप्तस्य aught beter the word of it is explained by 17 tha: (RF IV 38 7) २३४ । मयुरुवृनो युच् । २ । ७४ । सवमचन्द्रमाः। यवनः । षशा कोकिला। यरपः। 234 1o the roots /su to distil (V 1) /su to mix (II 23), ru to sound (II 21) 1n1 vr í to choose (V 8) is added the afli vuoh (wa) 71 Thus सयम: moon पवन: the Yivana रयण: the cuckoo and परMakind of tree Mole - an extracting the Somr jilico a sacrifice A libation bathing generation 71 a tribe of foreigners Gro k, an lontan I bounding Ev fem is the name of a river I a bitter herb, and the neuter to means a rampart a bridge 7341 40 TATTI RISY stagi varet T7, torati fasterit TITUERTE 6 tope ·PADA II 78 8234) TIE OVADI AFFIXE 207 233 Thenfis yuch 18 added to the root Jas to perradlo (V. 18), and therels 19 19 replaced by ris 73 I hus +10+ITa of ornim nt for wearing roun! the waist of worn 11 Tho rori एमा tongne has a lental ! It is derived from a to tasto of the Chira li claqe (1385). It na foru od bv the nflix nens it belongs to the NandAdı cingg As a mattre of fact, both wor is 677 en 1 marc on liff rently empinsed to denoto a girdle and a tongue Tho mus of this sâtra incla log w trial) (11 51) The In will tako or by agaVTATET (sco brlos II 78) It inclides / I 745) an 1 swing ( 385) २३६ । उन्देन लोपश्च । २ । ७६,। • 230 The of undi (VII 20 is clued, tran thn nffie #ch 19 militer 76 this +11-11471 ml bolil rior, gran mal in 1 conk drith milk a clo1 waft the 1206 called balå 311a cardifuli ) २३७ । गमेर्गश्च । २ । १७ ॥ गमे यादमादेमा । गगनम् । 237 When the afli 77 19 nded to the root me to go (I 1031) the wis cliengoal to m 77 T114 porn pia wfeafurfa mong the shy tha firmament Sec A hi? 1 २३८ । यहुलमन्यत्रापि।२।। पुण्यात् । स्पनरोपना। 238 Tuc alix gris adelcal diversely to rarious other roots witii ririous other forms 78 Ihuy धोततेऽसीति दशेतमा प्रदीपो वा (light), स्यादते गतीति पदमा चोदा Ancharnot) जयते प्राप्नोति येन तस्मय (eyes), पादरपालादपतीति परदन (sandal wood) रोवताली रोगा। Tuc bright ehy a hrudcom, roman a kind of yel • low Poment usually called tanti Sulus vra: jellow, the ebony true) &c Tote – Th 9 words are from the roots./drut (1.777) to shine agindu (1 708) to flow, wnf (I 950) to lend, chadı (I. 63) to rejoice, rach (1 781) to shine * At a war chariot air bering kind of tree call d tinisha ratus Test eyes tai sandal Food, a kind of monkcy, and more nant of a rigur tris kind of medicinal plant called Bhadrahalı रोपमा a red lotus florer, sellos pigm nt, a handsome spomin fen dark Salmalı, bright a stomachic, dam of one of the fire artons of cupid thron Foto throwing, a missile name of a tree (jiraha) Similarly from / to go consaplly (I. 3) preceded by trx, Te get Taq: the Pirala inc From to ·209 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI [PIDA II 195239. ) * २३९ । रञ्ज क्युन् । २।७८ । रजमम्. 239 The root to takes after it the affis van (ana) 79 Thus अति पक्षापयनेन तद्रजन फुगुम्भया (safflower, saffron, a kind of colour resernbling the deepy llor of the saffron) (जनी (night) More The root 4t) colour (I 1011), cakes lyut also and we get जनम्। l'he Allix a97 being fe causes the clision of the nasal Diversely (Uhulam) tha atix comes after कृप also, 19 कृपया। २४० । भूसूधूभ्रस्जिभ्यश्चन्दसि । २।८० । भुषनम् । मुवन धादित्यः । धुवनो वहिनिधुवन सुरतम् । मुसनमारोबम् । 210. In the chhandas, the affix पयुम् is ndded to the rootss, मू,थ, and Yध। 80 Thus भवतीति भुवनम् (the world, the earth) सूते सूबते था सा मुवनम् (God, the sun)धूनोति कम्पयतीति पुनः अग्नि; (ire) निधुवन (the act of contion.) गति परिपक भवति इति भूजनम् a frying pan (the act of frying) Nole — to be (I 1), to beget (IV 2$, to shake (VI) yes to fry (VI 4) tale by un in the Vaidic literaturs. By bahulam the affix is found after these roots in secular literature al 0. भुवन a world the earth, the heaven a buing mankind, water See A bol 1.6 धम्जनभूम यु (VI 1 16824121+भृज+यु जगत्व VIII 4 530 52) ज+यु-भूजजमम् a frying pin See A.K II 9.30 २४१ । कृपृजिमन्दिनिधान. क्युः । २ १८१ । किरणः । पुरतः समुद्रः । जनमतरितम् । मन्दन स्तोत्रम् । निधनम् । 241 The allis y comes after the inots , fa, effe and मि+ था। 81 Thun -किति पिति परपम्पफारमिति किरण: (the rays of sun or moon) पिपर्ति पालति परयति या प पुरणा (जले # understootl) sa , # বাকি पूजनम् (thy sky, force) यो येन या मदते तोति स्वपिति कामपते पा तन्मदनस (a layran, a lover), मित पाति पत्तन्निधरम् (death) The roots are Jiri to scatter (VI ING, Ipri to prot ct (III 4)/vr it to avoid (II :9) madı to praise &c. (I 13), thi to support (III. 10) निधन means the destruction, and family, rare २४२ । धूपेर्धियचसंज्ञायाम् । २।२। विषती गुमाधिपार धी।। 212. The affix यु comes after the root पy (V. 22)and when thuis aflix is added, tric form his clinnged to fura, and the word so formed denotes a nums. 82 Thus yयोनि प्रागल दगा धिषणा Ja A torrr A KI 321, An epithet of Brihaspati tho preceptor of the Gol, fyrai the sp och, prals , hymn, (int llca, understavling, earth, a cup, bo rl ।

·+ 1 1 at means an ess plant, & thorn, the speech, a reservoir, (VII. 1 70 S 361), as F=fagn mans an egg plant, wben PADA, II. 848 241] TIIC UNADI Frs 209 २४३ क । हन्ते घुरच् । २ । ८३ क । 213A. When the affixed is added to the verb 1, thc 100t clinnges itself to you Thus fra FTTY 07 Agafao you a sound-lit. that which manifests on bung struch २४४ । वर्तमाने प्रपद् यहम् गहज् जगच छतृयत् । २।४। farcuatrat: i log dah TTTT: 1 gefa la TU I RETT I imaginaria 201 The words yus, TET, EU, and an aro formed by the affix fa, and 19 liko ti aſfıs, and the forco tho affix is to dcnote present timo like the affır toi 84 These words are formed by tho aflix sfa 1 From yg da to spriuklo (I 737) comes yafra a drop of water It is ncuter and always used in the plural. The singular 19 gui Thero 19 no guna of the root vowel. Similarly Tra 13 from the root to incrcase (I 771) FTT 18 from to worship (X 321) Ara is from me to go (I. 1031), and Try is replacci by Nute --These word are really formed by the afflix fa and not It 19 treated like to which is an efira affix and consequ ntly Vir 1.70 S 351 apples, and we got sy in 1617 1 In the feminine, we have the by 1V. 1. 6 S 455 as a Note –Erd the words get&c been up formed, then we coul I have casily omitted the words and run from this sätra. But they are not w formed. IIad they been so, then the vıkaranı te would be added to the root he and there would be 1 by VII. I. 80 S 455, and an optional form all would arigc The accent moreover would be governed by VI 1 186 S 3730 in that case But if the affix be taken ng afa then it being an Ardbadhatuko affis, the viharana Te 19 not uided, and so the above difficulty does not arise. Henc Bhattoji tihes these words as formed by the alix afa and not try though the ufa 13 treated liko we for some purposes Note -_The example given above 19 grufva plural of you in order to indicate that tho word is neuter when meaning a drop. When muculine 26 means & decr A name of a metre, a wrapper or mantle By being treated as ro there is When masculine, it mcans. Blahat the at is also the name of the luto neuter, y means kingdom Great priaciple of Såpbliya, the mighty of Nirada, and great is the name of the Intc of Visrârasa, materit of Tumbara 27 ·210 TIC SIDDIASTA KUSUDI. (PADA IL. 8+ $ 244. and guest of Sarasvati. Sco dfigha I. 10 (wthxati Haigus:). ma is neuter whon meaning tho world, the universo: when masculino it means wind, nir. It has all the threo genders hen mcaning immorcablc. omat nicans tho carth, tho world, a kind of metre, and man kind. Thomasculine Ta'air,' boing treated as a formed takes n (VII. 1. 70. S. 361); and in declined as me, dual monit, pl. a: 1 But the wa derived under dyuti-gami-juhotinim deocha (Vartika uader III. 2. 178. S. 3158) 10t being rg like is declined as जगह, जगती and भगतः। Thug meifa forafa frafer TTT 49 (A kind of dcer, a drop of any liquid) affrontaset (large). Fem, vrát a portion of the Vedas). २४५ । संश्वस् तृपद् बेहत् । २।५। एते निपात्यन्ते । पृथक र शवदापमिपुरपर्यम् । संधिनोते. मुद्दकारशोपः। संघकसका। तृपदम् । विपूर्वावन्तेष्टिलोपा इव प च । 'यदीपमातिनी'। 216. The words samschat, třipat and vehat aro irregularly formed by ati alix. 85. These are Nipatanas. They are enumerated separately from the last mentioned words, in order not to apply satri-sad-bhava to them. T is derived from for (V.5) with the preposition T The offer is elided Y means magic. Trom vi (IV. 86) comes 'umbrella.' from to kill (II 2.) comes are with the upasarga for The w of 19 elided, and thor of fa 18 changed to IT a barron cow, one who destroys the womb. See A. K. II. 9. 69, Note :-The feminine of art would be agat had it been Satri-liko. But it is not so: and sirata (IV. 1. 6) does not apply. According to Subhuti Chandra siqa is derived from + fou to swell. Ty means moon also, २४६ । छन्दस्यसानच शुजभ्याम् । २।६। WUUTFI TUT: I WOTI 1991 216. After the roots su to go, and wjri to grow old, comes the aflis asinach in the chlandas. 86. Thus van a road, a path, a way, at an old man or an invalid person. Nole:--But in the two verses #7? &c. (Ny. I. 62. 1 & 2) the word 7981aTa is explained as farata very powerful. It mcans also a cemetery but then it is differently derived. २४७ । ऋञ्जिरधिमन्दिसहिभ्यः कित् । २।७। मसानो भेषः । वृधमानः पुष्पा । मन्दसानोऽमिनीवछ । ससानो पो भएछ। 217. Tho aflis stry is forte after wriji (I, 100) to fry, vridhu (I. 790) to increase, madi (I. 13) to praise, and Woala (I. 905) to endure. 87.

·PADA. II 91 251 } TEIE UNADI AFRIXTS 211 Thug 4597711 a cloud TOTA: & man, 1967*firo, a living creature, TYTI a peacock, a sacrifice. Note -The root fa takes T as it has an indicatory, and thus pasal 19 never elided here Thus there can be no guna of 5 i So also offre and ER Therefore with regard to these thrco roots, the forms would have been the same, whother the affix were fac or not The difference would be with regard to y only. The above three roots might ensily have been read along with of the last sútra. The word vw in the next sutra could also have been omitted. Thug 10stcad of three apporisms, two would have been enough As, ***F491H1 TT safsat afre errati and wait fara u In the Mantras #7172 grarti sad and shall TESTT TT the words have been given their etymological meaning in the Bhashya, and not the meanings as given above २४ । अर्तेर्गुणः शुट् च । २।८८ । whistatsfy: 248 The way to go (I. 983) takos guna whon the allis aganach is added to it; and the augment sut() is inscrted, 88. Thus Y+घसाम-पर++सानच घर्गसान: the fire the killer of ) enemies Note - In the Mantra satenfara TVATA, the word sora (dative) 19 explained in the Bhashya by two Fofas to the killer of enomios. २४९ । सम्यानचस्तुवः।२।९। Ferart arato 249 The allix dnach is added to tlo root ystu to praise (II. 31), when the preposition is in construction with it. 89. Thus Feavat an orator, a good speaker २५० । युधिबुधिदृशिभ्यः किच्य । २ । ६० । पुधाना । धुधानः । शानो लोकपालका। 20 The aflix anach is added to msudd to war (IV 61), „budlır to know (1 924), and drısır to see (1. 1037), and it 19 ft 9. Thus goa: an enemy, an opponent. gyak a preceptor. : & guardian of the world By bahulam it comes after 4 also. As tres Qarord In the following shlokthere is play on the words you Diser', arri' sword,' and it 'a treasury' 'a sheath.' पाणेन पय फार कृपणः सह गण्यते । परेयो दानसमये या स्वको विमुञ्चति । २५१ । हुईः शनोलुक् छलोपश्च । १९९ घाराणवन्द्रमा ·212 TOE SIDDHANTI KAUHUDI (PIDA II 91 $ 351 251. The affix Qnrch is added to tho desidei ative of the Õhurchha, when the siga y of the desiderativo is luk-olided, and the of the root is lopa-elided. 91. Thus yg rat tho moon. Note :--The root hurchchha to be crooked (1 226) when in the desiderative, takes 177, but the ti is elided and so also of the roet. In the Yajur Veda mantra #ARI TETTUR Tat the word juhuranam 19 explained as wtfeetafet crooked'. Sec Iså upın ishad my cdition p 30 २५२ । शिवते र्दश्च । २।२। foferaat geeft 232. To the desiderative of the root śvita 'to mrke whute' (I. 778), is added tho affis anach, tho affis ry is clıded and of the root is replaced by FI 92 Thus fofiatat proas in conduct, virtuous, holy Note The affix 19 f*c and so there is no guna Of course, in the desiderativo there is reduplication So Amarahoji III 1. 46 Kshirn swami derives this word from frafe rara (1 10), with tho affix it with the force of ferc In other words he makes it the Perfect Participle of frvHe apruently has over looked thig gatra The difficulty with the root fraft is that tho nasal causcd by fee will not ba chided and are 192 Vaidic affix २५३ । तृग् तृधौ शंसिक्षदादिभ्यः संज्ञायां धानिटी। २।३ । #: activa en prima Triat entfACT, TIETTI mari de tau, কবিঃ মীমী খাৱ গান্ধী ও খ। মধুবাব। হয় অথবাদম্ব হাম দার। খাম पा पेहत वा दन्ते' इति प्राप्रपा । 'सा स्पारधारथी बारूपे घेरयायामपि द्रो । 253. The allix trın comes after sans, to pratso (I. 704) and tho affis trich after hslad and the rest, when thc trorit so formcl is a name; and tho afliscs do not tako tho intcrincinteru 93 T1119 79+=ste noru jer, dual tad, pl TCIH The root 13 11 sutra dhatu nnd means to cut, to cnt It is Anu At'ct 10 19 founl usul in the Rig Virsstad 706177, and in tho I llowing phrase taken from thio Brahminig of IT ATT VA Thug +TOE, nom , TTT 1 It meany a chriotcr, n gate hocper, on off spring of t sûilrn fath r and a Vaishya wiſu Nole - Io cxptuning the stra VI 4.11 $ 277, it has nlready been sud that th- wonleum de lave bren used in that sätra in order to teach by implication a niyan or refriction-nnmely the unali wordis forme i ug 77 or do 1106 get lengthicoed, cxcept the uglit wonls ramsi &c. *p*u aficalis mentionel in that sätra. Tlie yord ero is not among the way - ·213 TADA. II. 03 6 265.) TITE VYADI AFPIXES. ciglit, henca its declension is tect and not terit, and face and temir Ag in tho Thuo rord has ncute on the first syllable as the aflix is frei mantra प्रापग्राम उत अस्तामु विमः। The word wife in Taifa refers to roots like me tofuret (II. 66). Thus TIRTI, du. Tikaid pl. TERTITI I Tyra or Farafa 77491 TFT : . It is the nnmg of the Buddha Similarly #TIFATI Sec VI. 4. 11. S. 277. Its durl and plural are forfritt, ATTENTEI I The lengthening in both cases is by the sätra VI. 4. 11. S. 277. According to Medini Koshi ymt means the son of a sudra produced on # Vaišya woman. This is the meaning taken by Bhattoji in the text above. But according to Amarakosá it is the son of a südra by a Kshatriya woman. Similarly from it to lead, wo get with the preposition the noun gritat a kind of Ritrik priest. २५४ । बहुलमन्यत्रापि । २।४ । मन् । पाता। हर । गता। इत्यादि। 23 1. Diversely also other words are formed by the addi. tion of and to other roots. 91 Thug wat from and Far from 1 Tags sutra is suprfluous for the word srit of the Inst aphorism pould havo mado thesz tw) affises applicable to other roots also. २५५ । नप्त नेष्ट त्यष्ट होत पोत भ्रातृ जामात मातृ पितृ दुहित् । म पतन्तयने नप्ता पीसो दौहित्रश्च । मयतेः पुग्गुणच । नेष्टा । रिवरिवोयम् । स्वष्टा । होता। पोटारिषभेदः । भ्रानतेसोपः। भ्राता । बायां माति जामाता।'मान पूषायाम्' मशोपः। भावा । पारामारस्येश्यम् । पिता । दुदेस्तृष इट् गुमाभावश्च । दुदिया । 233. The following ten words are irregularly derired, vis., (a grandson), qe (one of the chief officiating priests at a Soma sicrifice), za (namo of a Vedic God), ite (a sacrifi. cial pricst), gle (one of the sixteen oliciating pricsts at a sacrifico), vra (brother, Taig (son-in-lar), #TE (mother), faz, (fatlior), and it (daughter). 93. These ten words are formed by tşın or trich. With the negative particie w added to the root / to fall (I. 898) is formed The son's son or daughter's son is so called because through him the ancestors do not fall from heaven into the Waraka called gui From A to lead (I. 350) we get ter by guna of thc root and inserting tha augment get It means the leading priest in a Soma sacrifice ·214 TIIL SIDDIANTI RAUMUDI (PADA. II 95 $ 255 to From free to shino (I 1050) is obtained them by changing the of the root into R It meins the divine Architect, a carpenter From Whu to sacrifica (IIL 1) comes to the Hotşi priet From Jpa to purify (I. 1015) comes the word at the Potri priest. a kind of Rıtvik. From bhraj to shine (I 194) comes my brother. The of the root is elided From me measure (11 53) with the upapada sat wife, comes turg son-in-law, literally he who measures causes to bo measured the wife. From ATT to worship (I 1021) comes The of the root 1g elided From på to protect (II 47) comes fear, the 1 of the root is changed to a From the root duh to milk (II 4) comes giaThe aflix y takes the intermediate ag an exception nor does it cange guna २५६ । सावसे ऋन् । २ । ६६ । Or at mother FAUTI - 236 The affix my comes after the verb wo to throm (IV. 100) preceded by the preposition I 96. Thus ++T=ET N. S FUTT (sister) Another ruling of this sâtra is ystè 'TThero is no difference of mong, gia: or at di menu the same The Commentary adopts the first २५७ । यते द्विश्च । २ । १७ । UTAT I 'Taher wrote TaiT: ENTENTTI 237. The iflix se comes after the verb (I, 30) to attempt, endeavour, strive, try, and there is vriddhi of 1 97 Tnus at (a husbinds brothers' vifo) The vives of brothers aro related to each other as IT sisters in lary Sue Amarakosa (II 6. 30) for tho above verso of the text २५ । नजि च नन्देः।२।। मनादप्ति नमान्दा । इह पद्धिर्मानुवर्तत प्रत्येके । नमाग्दा तु स्वणा पत्युभ नन्दा नन्दिनी च पा इति यदाया। 238 'Tho alis ? comes after the top (I 67) to bo glad, when it is proceded by tho indeclinablo - and thero is vriddhi of the root 98. Thus water with yriddhi of the last sútra, (husband's sister) literally meaning one who is never satisfied, howerer one might strive to please her Others do not rend tho anuyritt of yriddhi in to this gatra The form thco is Thu3 in SabdArnave we find the husband's sister 19 pangadi, also called anpaadi, and nandini' ·215 PADA II. 102 $ 202.] THE OXADI AFFIXES - २५ । दिये।२।। BTT I Tefante uit'. 259. Thic allire comes after feq (IF.1) 'to joke.' 90. Thas fat or eto (husband's younger brothr) Thus Amtrakosha 81ys: पाला: स्पु प्रातः परया स्थानिको देदेवरो' The brother of a wife is chvol sala, that of a husband, dorſi or dcvara" (A K. II. C. 32). २६० । नपते हिं च । २ । १०० । गरो ।। 200. Tho aflix is added to ni to Icad (1. 050) and it is Tra 100. Thus 1+ 2+ (the fe portion of oft 15 cluded, bccausc thol nflix his an indicatnry 3)=1It is decim. I ng SA, dani -07, p. 1 २६१ । मध्ये स्थश्छन्दसि । २ । १०१ । -'(2415) TTT "FOTEUTET UTSTY". Her far i tett. मध्ये 261. In the ollandias, tho affis which is fea, comos after tho vorb far to stand (I. 075) when the word sadye is in composition as an upapada. 101. Thus t+FOT**ata+60+ (velided because the affix 19 fer)= vid try Now applics tho following vArtika which is to be found under katra VIII. 8.97 S 2018. (sco my AshtadhyAyl.) Vårtila. The T of stha, ethin, and othſi is changed into when preced by emba, Amba, go, bhQmi, savya, apa, dri, tri, ku, ścku, sanka, angu, mafiji, puñji, parame, barbis, diri and Agol. Thercfore +7= pohd It meang o charioteer and is declined as S. Feher, dual vent, pl. Thi The locatirc sign in wed is not elided because of VI. 3. 14. &. 972: र। अर्ति सुध धम्यम्पश्ययितभ्योनिः । २ । १२ । we rasfrutati wie galfti i sefar i vefert safti i warfare Tyfti i wefits i fer i xiqua. ** 202. Thc allis af« comes after the folloring eight yerbs riz:- (1. 983) 'to go or more, or obtain' (I. OS2) 'to more (1 088)' to support', *7 (I: 97!) to blor', 'togo' (I. 495), * to cat (11. 51) ** 'to protect, defend or moro', (I. 631) and to cross' (I. 1018). 102. Thng + sfittici 'n piece of wood of the sámi tree and for Lind. ling the Bacred fire by attrition'. परति 's moth, Fas, road of cours' similarly the word of is derived from the root it to injure. It means a read, path. But in Veda Bhlebya ·216 TUTE SIDDIANTA RAUMUDI [PADA II 103 263 on Havarrfor it 19 esplained by fenntattar (Ry I 31 16) utføre the carth face the tube & blow pipe the artery or verd also reati safa: motion or way, voit the thunder bolt of Iodra • literally by which 13 enjoyed tho hingdom by Indra at means the sun also start tho earth arrotho bont The word ruft: maght turmeric or red 110 or lotas is divers ly formed from the root 151 to be delighted to dye color paint &c Tyre w of the root is also diversely elided To the root is added the affix of Another form 19 tuhat The long (Fra) 19 ided by TATTTT &c २६३ । भाडि शुपे सनश्छन्दसि । २ । १०३ । wypufasfuataal 203 In the chhandas the affix wfæ comes after the desider ativo of the vorb va 'to be dried' (IV 71) proceded by SITEI 103 Thus we 0+0+ AFT=Synfas (wind or fire) being worshipped on account of shining very quickly or causing sorrow to one s cnemies. २६४ । कृपेरादेश्च च ।२।१०४ । चर्षणिजना। 26.1 Tho affix ofr comes after the verb 'to plough (I 1039) and the initial # is changed to 101 Thus 6+-Fa=fou: (a man) Mote - In the Va dika Nighantu the form ofa: merning a man 19 read in the list of Fatti But Ujjvala Datta has rerd the sutrr as marca w: and so he hus derive 1 th form us for meaning a barlot But this is not correct Had it bcen 50 the sutra would have stood as ren from the toot dhr sh The Veda Bhashya also explains the word ofas in thc sumo way when commenting on the mantra sitarantaa: n (RY I 37) २६५। प्रदेर्मुट् च । २ । १५॥ अनिरमिः। 265 Tho afix xh comes aftor the serb to cat or destrov' (II 1) to which the augment 9e is added 105 Thus +9+aft=wgfas fire २६६ । वृत्तेश्च । २ । १०६ । वर्तनि: गोवर्धनस्त पकारान्मुट् घर्मनिरियाद। 260 The affix we comes after the verb 'to subsist or oxist (I 795) 106 Thas qa+fQ=safari'a yay road Soc Amarahasa (II 1 15 ) Bit accordiog to Govardhana the augment it, is also to be added This पूत मुद+ अनियमित aroid ric feminine form is धर्वनी with the sीय of कृदिकारात् । C ·PADA II 210 $ 270] TEE UNADI AFFIXES 217 268 २६७ । क्षिपे किच्च । २ । १०७ । चिपचिरायुधम् । 267 The affix sztre comes after the verb for 'to discharge, to let go &O (VI 5) and the affix is treated as fha 107 Thus feg+fra foafy: a stroke with a whip a weapon In the Vede Bhashya faeft: 18 explained by two throw ng in the mantra 4 art faoi geraft 1 (Rv IV 40 4) २६ । अर्षि शुचि हु सृपि छादि छर्दिभ्य इसि । २ । १० । जर्षिर्याला । इदन्तोऽप्ययम् । अर्धाजन्ते अर्चयः । गोषिदतिः। यिः मर्पि । स्मन्- (२९) इतिहस्यः । दिः पटलम् । बर्दिर्थ मनव्याधिः । इदन्तोऽपि । ' छतीसारमूलपान् । The affix fer comos after the verba (I219) to worship. (I 198) 'to grieve', 5 (III 1) 'to offer or present as an oblation to fire , T (I 1032) 'to creep or crawl' orfe (X. 290) to cover und (Y 51) 'to vomit 108 Thus we + Firefo (a ray 1ght: flame ) The affit of the unadı (IV 138) also comes after this verb Thug wy* +revfa (ray, Aame of fire or of the morning t vilight) sfer formed with tho affis ffer is neuter but she's formed with the affix r is feminine and its plural 19 savar as in a safe I got 71 light lustre radianco s+rfo=form clar fied butt r for offering 72+-upráce clarified butter effect the roof or thatch of a house The word is always f main ne Sco Lingapusasina III 21 Sae A K II 2 14 The final of Erf s elid d by VI 4 51. S 2313 and the penult mato vowel of wife 19 shortened by YI 4 97 S. 2985 *+Facule (vom t ng sickness) The aflix < also comes after this verb The word of ending in 19 also a valil form Vomitting As ca atatue TT&ftarent+770771 २६८ । प हेर्नसोपश्च । २ । १०६ । safe af suyraat: 1 209 Ile of 'to grow, in-rezso ' (228) is elidad when the affix tft comes after it 109 Thus t+सि. m fire the kusa grass at means fire Sza Amarukosa I 1 57 २७० । द्युतेरिसिनादेश्व ज ।२ । ११० । rut #11 270 The affix fun comes after the verb at 'to shin bo bright or brilliant (I 777) and the.initial letter, that 197 is ohnnged to 110 26 meaning . .

·218 HTTE -IDDHIANTA KUIUDI IPADA II 1105270 the sun, - As . -- । Thus त+इरिन् =ज्युत+इसिन्ज्योतिस light, lustre', thre, sight, the star २७१ । बसौ रुचेः सज्ञायाम् । २ । १९१ । यसुरोधिर्यशः। 271 'lle affı iti comes after the verb to to slune (I 781) when pieceded by ag and the word so formed is an appellative. 111. Thus यमुरुन्+इसिन् =घमुरोथिम् 1 sacrifics, religious ceremony By bahulam, this affix comes after the single uncomfounded verb also रोचिस्। See Amarakosha I 8 34 २१२ । भुव. फित् । २ । १९२ । । या रामुद्रा । 272 The affix ita con es after the verb » (I 1) to become' and the affix is treated as if it had an indicn. tory । 112 Thurs+पिन् = भुविस् 'the ocean' २०३ । सहो धश्च । २ । ११३ । मधिरना पाम् । 273 'Ile nflix fer comes after the icob T (IV 20) 2 cuduro, to support,' and tho is changed to v 113 Thus सह+रपिन् = सधिम् an or, a bull २०४ । पियते स्पुक् । २ । ११४ । 'पापियाममुद्रयो । 271 Ti caffir afon comes after thir Torbat{I 072) toclrink' and the augment yg is nl-o ndded to at 111 Tuns 11+5* +ripasafe 'th sca, tho cyc २२५ । रुसिः । २ । १९५ । जनाए 27. The allixir counes after the rerb (IV. 11) 'to bo born ' 115 Thus ***sfer broth, production २५६ । मने या बन्दसि ।२ । ११६ । 270 In thic chliandas thio allir fe comes after the verb **(VIII 9) to thank ani thon is ebanged to . 110. Taas st+fvers: Lar (cupare also Un I 18 ) ·220 THE SIDDHATA KAUMUDI [PADA II 120 5 2800 * } Thus मुह+उगि गुहुन् । It is an अध्यय or indeclinable and mea 1s com stantly २८१ । बहुलनन्यत्रापि । २ । १२१ । भाषः। परिषतु । 2S1 This atir comes diversely in other places also 121 This माया'. Irern d min', परिपतु । २२२ । क ग शू वृञ् पतिभ्यः ष्वरम् । २ । १२२ । 'करो ध्यानरक्षको गर्षरोहकारी । परी रात्रि पर प्राकृतो चनः । पयरए । 282 The affix care comes after (VI 110) 'to scatter" म (VI 117) to swallow, (IX 18) 'to kill, destroy, injure', 9. (V 8) 'to choose, select and (I 918) 'to ask, beg, request' 122 Thus n+परच-फर्धs a tiger, a demon' a Rakshasa, गप्पं 'a proud man', शर्वरी 'ight', पर्यत 'a barbarian, चटपर 's quadrangular placo or courtyard ' Note -वर्षe also means curly hair, a mode of dancing the class of weapons वर्षस a kind of basil Tot yellow sandalwood, ver million, gum myrrh २८३ । मौ सदे । २। १२३ । ' निरस्तु अवाला' । पिहरी राधिका शादियु द्वितीयः पादः । 288 Thonflix city comes after the verb 6 (I 907) 'to sat doun' preceded by the preposition नि 123. Thus fr to T+TE=fronto 'mud or mire firerit maght The 19 changud to by VIII 3 66 S 2271 CHAPIER III. २४ । विस्वर इत्यर धीयर पीयर मीयर धीयर मीयर गहर कट्यर संपद्यरा। भाग सरभरपपाता मिपारयन्ते । दिर् न सपोलारोमा franril 'पा । सोला। भी.रो Riel + किसी पर जोर निमारण । तोरीमातिविधि । भीरा परिपाट। Arkrar Inारप । वदो बदर । मईचारापना । परे। पाये। 281 Ilic followin; rloren morils are irregularly derived with the addition of the allir a Chlntrari, chliatson, dhtrirn, niinra, ruliara chirura nfrari, &ahrir, hatrarn, inmynile irt 1. i. faran fit for cutting hostils or reguish, from the rerb for locat (Ill 3) **Ta bours, á bower', [rom 159 verb or lo curet', (1 851) VIR. - .

·PADI 111 3 9 2861 TUE UNADI AFFIXES. 221 & The final of the verbs and Fez 19 changed to and thero 19 20 gunation of of for 3 utaci' a fisherman' from the verb er to hold, to support (III 10) 4 stat: 'fat, large, or a tortoise from the verb 'to drink' (I 972) or from the verb to grow, increase, gwell. (I 1013) Soma darivu it from 979 (1 595) Theo is elided by VI 1.68 S 873. 5. Ritst: 'hurtful, injurious or the leader of an army' from the verb er 'to measure (II 53) Some derive it from Hit 'to injure' IV. 29 Quere: or it (I 596) 6 147' a tatter, rag,' the dress of a mendicant, pirticularly of a Buddhist mendicant, from thel verb fe 'to collect, to gather', (V. 5) the r of which 19 lengthened before this Unadı affix. Quere or from eta (1 594) changed to 1 7 9 one of the mixed tribes being the offspring of a Rajputri by a Kshatriya, it also means the ocean or a hunter from the root ata 'to be large or strong' (I 597) 8 ti'a trader, a religions mendicant from the verb at 'to lead' (I. 950). Quere Or from ita (I 508) 9 Tote' a cave' from, the verb e'to dive or plungo into' (1 600) The long at 19 shortened before this unidi affix 10 कटवरम्' eauce, condiment or the skim or whey of curds from the verb to go or to rain,' (I. 315) FUET & kuog', from the verb 'to go', I 1033) preceded by the preposition Ty Ther of the verb qy is changed to 7. . According to come, 174 : (a kipg) 19 derived from the verb (to go or move) preceded by the preposition + By bahulam we get en from the root 5 (III 1) with the preposi tron i The 3 of the root is oluded It means proximity privacy, & solitary or lonely place 254?frefaictafa+27 72 13131 'इमा य नपे पायो । सिनः काणः। जिनोईन । दीनः । सः । कमः । 285. The aflix comes after the verbs , 'to go' (II 36) fast to bind' (V 2) for 'to conquer' (I 993) 37,'to waste' (IV 26) on to burn' (I 727) and to protect or defend' (1 631) 2 Thus Til F=We lord the sun, a Jing', fo'ope eyed), frate the Arhat of the Jainas or the Buddha'oi an old inan, 771, a poor man , TRI warm, i wanting deficiept satra VI 6 20 S 2054 causes * Note - f female of a mouse, or shrew. २८६ । फेममीनी ।३।३। पती निपाभ्येते । स्फायतेः फेनः । मीना। The words #7: the foam, froth' and with a fish' arc anomalous 3 1hºge are irregularly derived by the addition of the affix it to the verus स्फायू to swell, increase' (1 516) and wits 'to injure' (IV 29) & replaces sphay 286 ·022 TIE SIDDITANTA KATYUDI. - (PADA III. 4$ 287. २२७ । कृपेर्वरौं ।३।। 287. The aflix va comes after the Torb ri 'to plough' (I. 1039) when it means one of the colors 4. Thus ye+TT=: ' the dark color, Er shna is the name of the son of Satyzvati (Vgåsa), name of Kesiva (Siri Krishna), # crow, name of Arjuna, It is the name of Draupadi, i grupe, a Liod of-plant. 17. black papper, iron २८८ । बन्धेर्प्रधिबुधी च ।३।५। 11: IEI! 288. The aflix opt comes after the verb uns 'to b'nd' (T 10221 when the Adeśas grit and pfa replace it (the verb) 5. Thus धन्ध+प्रश्न, 'the sun', 4+4+7=ga: 'the foot of a tree, an epithet of Sira स्। धापवस्यज्यतिभ्यो नः।३।६। 'धाना भ्रष्ट यवे सिय' । पर्ण पत्रम् । पः किशुका । 'यसो भूल्ये धेतने छ । प्रजेर्षी । पेनः । प्रमादित्यः । बालकाच्छु जोतेश्रोप: पर। 289 Tho affix comes after the verb writo hold, to contain', (III. 10); to protect or fill', (III. 4); a to dwell, inhabıt, lire' (I 1051); va'to go, to drive', 1.219), and wa, 'to go, wall, wander' (I 38) 6 Thus 0+1=UTFII f'fried barley or rice', q7F 'a leaf' or 'the Pulls? tree 7 - 9 as, 'price bire or siges W+*=t. the root st is replaced by the root sit before frdhudhâtula afixes (II 4 56 S 2292.) a means a thief or Prajapati + -5WT: 'the sun, wind, a traveller'. Toe nord situs 'a lame nian' is diversely derived by adding tho unida aflix op to the root 'to go, more' or hear (1 987 or 989) No e-There is no vocalisation of and there is gone of at the contrary would have been the case had the affix been 7 (FT) linu the Jaut. २९० । लक्षेर ।३।। gaf TGITTAI ETTHEUTETTII referta RET TA A1fx for. तपको समय रामभ्राता । 'लावासियोपाया पारसस्य च मया'। 290 The aflix comes after then to mark (X 5) when it Iulongs to the Churadi class and the root also takes the augments e anıl çı 7 Hluy ay(which in the Churadi class becom's ) + 6*** a name, «ign', but whan it takes the atiçment, then +++ the step brother of Rima'. The feminine 71 incins a gooso, and other a female Şarasa bird, . or षच ·PADA III. 10 $ 293.1 THE UNADI AFFIXES. 205 Molet --Tho ncutor nouns TV and we both mean a namo, a mark, Tho samo Inkshana and Lakshmana iphun masculins are the names of a brother of NQma. piepraafisatautat: 13151 ना भदी। 291. The allix comes after tho root "to honor, to worship' (I. 192) and the penultimate rourel is clanged to . 8. Th is the father,' a riscs. There is gunu of the short renultimate २९२ । सिपेप्टे' च ।३।। दीपारामान गुणा। स्मन पादिरया। पाहुल कारकेचप्लोमा। अट् । भातफयादाण VII total 292. Tho afix - comes after tlio zoot fora, 'to scw, darn stitch together or neare, (IV. 2)', and the fe portion of the root (namely a) is changed to h. Thus fua+#= taat 'tho sun'. The word egter is diversely formed without changing tho fe portion tog Thus foreta=foto-f3-4-4 (by the Paribhasha afegaFCF Avata)=#: (VII. 3. 86 S. 2189) Nole:--Sco Kaiyyatı on VI 4. 19 S. 2561 and I. 1.72 S 26. Nad tho gunr tahun placo first, then the form would have been fou + fer tot +*+25+*+1284+matata: (tho * 19 gunnted by V1.3 819. 2168.) But this is not tho valid form. Thcrefore the rol fer is not gunated but changed to a for the true a lesn is antaranga as coinpared with gurin, २८३ । फूएसिद्रुपन्मनिस्य पिभ्यो निर । ३ । १० । पर्णः । वर्षः। 'वर्ण चन्द्र पोच। सेना। द्रोणा । पन्नो भीधेति । पानपोदना । सानो 293. . 4 The allir comes after the following roots aalit is face Whereby the acute fulle on the first syllable, via, to scatter, (VI. 116), I ' to cho930', (V.8. IX. 10), to decay, to become oil', (IV. 22 and IX. 24; X 272) fv, to bind', (IV. 2), 'to go', (1. 992), TT 'to praisa' (I. 107), 57 to breathe (II. 61), 411 to sleep' (II. 59). 10. Thus to mitir enr', ang's color'; vt 'the moon or the tree; to 'army', ndersa measure of capacity', ***I ' a soabe'; wing food; North dream, sleep.' No'e:--Karna is the name of the first port of Kunti, Varna means caste, color, fumo, protiag, letters of alphabet.

·THE SIDDUVIA KAU TUDI ITAD 111 11 २९४ । धेट इच्च । ३ । ११ । : feryat TT 291. The affix comes after the root to drink' (I 951) and there is short substituted for the final of the root 11 Thus trefa+w=in' the ocean'. The feminine Car means a river, speech, and in the Vedos, a milk cow also Note --Had the a been not replaced by then the twould have been changed to wt before the årdhadhâtuka affis and the form would have been VTT Or 1773 See VI. 1. 45 S 2370 २९५ । तृपिशुपिरसिभ्यः फित् । ३ । १२ । तुणा । गुप्त सूर्यो पनिछ । रत्र द्रव्यम् । 295 The affix comes after the follotring roots and it is ferre, og 'to be thursty', (IV. 116) ve to be dry', (IV. 71) 'to' roar, yell, cry out, scream' (I 745) 12 Thus retr=greer "thirsty' yn 'the sun, fire', tergi 'a thing, object. २९६ । सुशो दीर्घश्च । ३ । १३ । VTT VETTI 296. The affix comes after the root (V 1)' to extract Soma juice, or to perform the Soma sacrifice), and the vowel o of the root is also lengthened 19. Thus u+=qu'a slaughter house'. Note at 'a slaughter house, the sale of meat, hurting, balling, the soft palats, uvula, girdle, zone, mutaps, n ray of light, a river, & daughter, & elephant's trunk. born, produced, blona, Llossomed, empty, a flower 269 रमेस्त च । ३।१४। रमयतीति रहस् । 297 The affix comes after the root re'to sport (I 900) and the x is changed to 1.1. Thus +=tax'a gem'. The affixis added to the causative of Zaxo Wardu xxus 3 Y), SUM TAL २९८ । रास्नासारनास्थूगावीणाः । ३ । १५ । ta 4759 I ETUT TEKSTRI I FITT TTREHITUT eta 1 29S The words at the incense or the name of a plant, ETET "lho dep-lap of an ox', for the post or pıllır of a house', and storithe lute or the lightning' aro irregular 15. They are derived from the following thus: by adding tha aflix a to the roots to 'to taste', (1.85), o 'to sleep,' (II 69), Cart to rest, depend on', (I. 975), at 'to 6 move', (II 39), we get the above words ·Tans eig: priesfamiliar with tho Yajur Veda', pada III. 20 $ 803 1 THE ONADI AFFIXE. 225 २८ । गादाभ्यामिष्णुन् । ३ । १६ ।. गर्गापा । देणुशांता। 239 The aſfix that comes after the roots 'to sing' (I. 966) and 77' to gisp' (III. 9). 16 Thus + Toit, ' a singer, an actor', 'A giver, i.e. a gono. roms man ३००। पत्यशूभ्मा पस्नः । ३ । १७ । रिसमाप्रपामरापरम् । 300. The affix ksna comes after the roots mo 'to surround, cnoompass' (VII. 10) and wm 'to pervade' (V. 18). 17. Thus wat Umui 'all, whole, entire, or green water, the flank or hip". -2+1 ATTi'not broken, entire' ३०१ । तिजेपश्च । ३ । १८ । ती 801. Tho affix recomes after the root far' to sharpen' (I. 1020) and the vowel of the root is lengthened 18 Thus font razstre 'sharp The royal of the root is lengthened. The word minns pungont, ficry, Aitre, popper, iron, war, Pousod, death, sea salt, plague Note - Thig word is dechoable in all the three genders, but it has different mcanıngs when used in the ma-culine and nenter. different mưanings of this word, any dictionary may be consulted ३२२ । सिरधोपधायाः । For the 19. 302. The afix tot comes after the rout fara 'to embrace, to unite,' (I. 73.1and the penultimate vowel, 2 e r ja ohangad to s. Tous frye+Ta»TUTH' hesutiful'. ३०३ । यगिमगिशुन्धिदसिजनिभ्यो युए। ३ । २० । tviras arger mit frigogoro TTFTTI I nvgi wetti 303 Ti caffux se cones after the roots oi'to worship (I 1051), y to think', (IV. 67), vir "to cleanse, purufs' (I. 71) TC to bite, destroy, oror porrer' (IV 101), me' to bo bora of produced' (I 862) 20. diatrees, sacrifice oranger', ufrossrobber or thief', and the 'creature, firo of the creator, 1. 6. Braduai'. 93 ·226 THT IDDHANTA KAIBIU DI [PADA III 215304. 4 - ३०४ । भुजिमझ्या युक्त्युको । ३ । २१ । पुण्युर्भागमा । दृत्यु।। 304 Tho affixis ym and rga como respectively after the roots to eat, to rulo or proteot do', (VII 17) ard 'to die, perish' (VI 110) 21. Thus मुज+पुस्-भुष्पुः " food, a pot, ressel', g+युक्तुष्पः ' deach '. ३०५ । सरयुः । ३ । २२। परयुभदी। शरिति पागसरप । परपुः । 303. The affix अपुः oomes after the root g' to go' (1 982) 22 Thus (+visage the name of the river, on the banks of which stood Ayodhyf. Some texts read the affis In that case it will be पर and not सरपुः। • ३०६ । पामीविषिभ्य. प.।३ । २३ । पाति शत्रुगादास्मानमिति पापम् । तमोगापापः । नेपः पुरोहितः । बालकाणामा नीपो पक्षविशेषः । येोपा पानीयम् । 306 The affix प. comes after the root पा 'to protect', हII. 47), नी 'to leutl, carly (I 950), विष् 'to pervade, spread through' (III 18) 23 Thus +=479 BID' The word fitrrally means that from which one should protect or defend himself that which should be guarded against. He who is immersed in or mixed up with it is called पापा 'a wretch' or singer भी+पाप a prnest' Owing to divers ty, when there is no guna then it is 7771 the Kadumba tree वि+पाघेप: water ३०७ । च्युयः शिष । ३ । २४ । युपो पश्नम्। 307 The affix at comes after the joot v 'to more, to sperk' (I 1004) and it ie fra and so causes no guna of the root vowel 21 Thus यु+पा- गुप: "the mouth' literally through which one speaks Another rending is 97: farur The root 18 19 to more slowly (I 430) The noun 1994 a languid valler ३० । स्तुवो दीर्घश्च । ३।२।। स्तूपा गुयाया। 30s. The affix v comes after the rootस्तु 'to praise, enlogize, oxtol', (II 34) and the short s of the root is lengthened 23. Thus U+T=ET: 'a beap, pilc, mound, a Buddhistic monamentº . .

·HADI III. 23 8911.) TIIT UVADI AFFIXES 227 1 1 ३०८ । गुगभ्यां निच्च । ३ । २६ । wtfen ITIGIITTITET 309 l'ho affi, causing lenglicnin of the preceding : comes after the roots's 'to extract $0.312 juico or perforin Somn sacrifice, (V. 1) anil ' lo hill, destros (IX. 1S) and it is 'Fare (which thereby places thc ncccnt on tlic first syllable VI. 1 197 s. 2686), and it is form also and so there is no guna.. 26 We rend tho nnuyritts of fix loro by virtue of "and." Thug atvia soup, a sauco', tho lengthening tiles pincron account of diversity 1+1=p*r'a windowing basket,' here the long 10 peer takes place by virtuo of VIII. 2. 77 S. 354 ३१० । कुयुभ्यां च । ३ । २० । कुति गपका चरिणामका पर्याय बनपरिमापमिति पो पला। 310. Tho affir o comes after the roots g 'to sound, to moan, groan, cry, ium, (I. 999) anil I 'to join, unite' (II. 23). And thio vowel of the root is lengthoned. 27 Thur 9+*592 the well, literally, that in which frage manhe noise 1+1=9 sacrificial post, literally that to waich animals for sacrificato fastened'. ३१९ । पप्पशिल्पशप्पयापरू पपर्पाल्पाः । ३ । २८ । रामे ते पप्रत्ययान्ता निपात्यन्ते । गमतेन कारस्प परपम् । 'तपी कोपरलारकारी पी. सरस्थान शिल्प फोगलम् । हिमायाम । मिपातमारपत्वम् । गप पाशवर्ष प्रतिमाशयय । पाप पा । पापो प्रशलोमणे' चापं । रोतेः । 'कप स्वभाये गोदय ।प। पर्यं पर पालत पापीठ च । 'तल भविष्ठरकरणे । नुरादिखिचो छ । 'तरूपं ययाददारेषु । 311. Ibc befen Fords kbashpa, silpy, śashpr, básbpa, rûpr, parpa, and talpa aro irregularly formed by i 29. Thus c 'anger or violence' from tho root hy 'to dig', (1 927) the of which is changed to 2 frent'an art from the root o'to meditate, contemplate, (I 556) the long fof which is shortened. 3. पापम् 'Joung grass or loss of intellect' from the root ve 'to kill or destros', (1 763) the T 18 irregularly changed to T'teurs', from the roof try 'to hornss, oppress, (I. 5) the r is changed to t. 5. H 'form, apprarance or brauty' from the root 'to cry, to sound, (11. 21) the short 5 13 chroged ta long « G. taq'soung grass, house, a rheel corriaga in which cripples are moved about', from the root' to fill up or gratity (IIC 4; 7. 77 'a couch, & wife, an upper story' from the root *7 'to fix, to establish'. (X. 56). This root belongs to the Churddi class and so there us the eligion of for when this affis 19 added 4.

·228 TEE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI [PADI III 299 312 । स्तनिह पिपुषिगदिमदिभ्यो गोरिल्नुछ । ३ । २९ । 'धयानात- (२३११) इति खेरपादेगा । लनपिनुः । वर्षयित्नुः । पोपपिरतुः । गयियों- बया । पदयिनुमदिरा। 312. The affixitnuch comes after the causatims of stina (X", 313) to sound, hțisha, (IV 119) to be pleased, pusla (I. 732) to nourish, yada (X, 313) to thunder, and /mnda -(I, 853, to intoxicate, 29 Thus fait fø+**FS+*+ (the former is changed to w by VI.4 55 S. 2311), rafat 'thun tering, & cloud, falling sickness', viagra gladdening, gold, a sop', stafogte' cuckoo or the twice born, the Brahman', fara "talkative, lastful', refert 'the god of love, a drunken man,' the wine. ३९३ । कृहनिम्यां कत्नुः । ३ । ३० । ya furto affar • 313. The aflix i ktnu comes after the rootsy 'to do' (VIII. 10) and my 'to kill' (II. 2) 30. Thug +=a'an artist'. There is no guna As tho alix is faut a huuter or disease and a weapon. The of the root no 15 elided by VI 4 37. S 2428 The same takes place in the following s@tra also, Note By force of in the above wu 7, the word hatat means hanta killer also In the Dasapadivſitti tho affix 19 read as hnu without *; and the example giren 19 ry: agent and to check, the w of han is elided diversely add jigatou 19 given as illustration from T1 But all this is crroneous for we find hatnu and britnu in the following As yTM (Rv. I. 4. 1). TEN A (kritnu), rapu raa (Rr. 1. 25 2) vitayerayu Badatai opath of five (Nr.' Il 31.0) Io hus Dantu vrıttı Nadbara also calls the allir hinu end le ciplains the form उपाना। Sec Dhatuyritti of Madhav, under the root 1 Aotr - Tome and enemy in the Vedas ३१४ । गमे. गग्यरुप । ३ । ३१ । 311 The illis *** 1 comes after the root omalo go' (1. 1031) tire is out the root is reduplicated.co lih tle De siderntire 31 Thus we+nw: Breath, hilo ३१५ । दाभाभ्यां नः । ३ । ३२ । Nigeim I WITTE ·229 PADA III 38 $ 321 ] THE UNADI AFFIXES 4 815 The affix y comes after the root op 'to give' (III. 9) and to shine' (II 42) S2 Taas iyi'a donor, valiant', i rays,' the sun' ३१६ । बर्गश्च । ३ । ३३ । • 316 The aflix y comes after the root o'to speak' (II 64) and the r is changed to t 33 Thus talkative' ३१७ । धेट इच्च । ३ । ३४ । vafa atafa Tu 317. The alix scomes after the root of' to drink' (I 951) and the of the root is replaced by short ri 34 Tnus +y=futuruq: a cow, literally she who gives such to her calves Had the not been replaced by r it would have been changed to I by VI. 1 45 S 2370 ३१८ । सुवः कित् । ३ । ३५ । 'सूनुः पुग्नुझे रखी। 318 The affix y comes after the root T ' to beget' (II. 21) and it is treated as face, and so there is no guna of the sowel 35. Thus son, a younger brother, the gun'. Visvakosa ३१९ । जहातेद्वेग्न्तलोपश्च । ३ । ३६ । 1 . 319 The aflix comes after the root 7 to abandon (III 8) which is reduplicated and the final(vowel) is elided 86 Thus eT+1=+='name of an ancient king' The first 19 changed to by VII 4 62 S 2245 ३२० । स्यो गुः । ३ । ३७ । स्याकीले स्पिरेरे। 320 The affix : comes after the root 'to stand' ( 1975) 37. Thus enige 'a peg firmness and a dama of Siva' V18vakosá ३२९ । अजिधरीभ्यो मिञ्च । ३ । ३८ । अजेयी । वेतुः । पददेपभेदयो।। रणर्बयो। तिम तिः'। 321 The affix 3 comes after the roots to go' (I 210) to select', (IX 38), A'to go and to hovyl', (IX 30) and it gets the designation for which places the accent on the first 38 syllable ·PADA III 45 $ 328.] TUE UNADI AFFIXES, 231 → ३२५ । शुकवल्कोलकाः । ३ । ४२ । शुभेम्त्यलोपः। शुकः । 'यस्क परकतमखि पाम् । 'एप दाई । पस्य ला| उपका। 395. The words yw'a parrot, the Sirisha tree; name of a son of Vråsa ; the name of the Minister of Råvani, aki 'the bark of a tiee' orar a meteor, are irregularly formed 42 These words are formed by adding hal affix to Tyto shine' (I 450) the final letter of this root 13 elided, try to gº, approach, hasten', (1 520) and / 5 to buro', (1. 727) the is changed to respectively. ३२६ । इरभीकापाशल्यतिगर्चिभ्यः कन् । ३ । ४३ । 'एले गुल्यान्योयला' । 'भेको महकमेषयोः' इति विश्वभेदियो । फाका । पाक: मियः। शकं सपानम् । घरका पथिका गरी रायययछ । मः शरीरयापुः । 326. The affix *7 comes after the roots a' to go'(II. 36) 17to fear' (III 2) to sound', (I. 901) 'to drink'(I 972)", to go", (I. 896) wa'to go walk 'vander', (I 38) ar to cleanse, sound, to therten to hurt', (1 107). 43 Thus += 'one, chief, alone', *+*13** '& frog and according to the authors of Visva and Nedını, also a sheep or rain 47** 'a crow, a lame man, bathing by dipping the head only into water, a sectarial mark, a kind of measure, name of a Dvipa, name of several plants, a multitude of crows , & modus coeundı *t 'very young, grey. ness of hair caused by old age, cooking, boiling &c.' T*T*=**! the scale of a fish, bark, rind, a part, portion fragment FEI' A traveller' limb or member of the body'. Then the vital breath life wind. Some say /march is a sautra dhāru भर्च पति-भ यति (Vida Bhashya ) By force of age, the affix 5 comes after the root of 'to sharpen, whet, make thin, attenuate' (IV 37) Thus 11+='name of the sixth Dvipa, power, strength, the peak, tree &c. The root of becomes ut by VI.1 45. S. 2370. ३२७ । नौ हः । ३।४४॥ जातो फस्याग्नी। मिदाका गोधिका । 327 The affix 54 comes after the root v 'to nbandon' (III 8) preceded loy the pre-fix fr. 45 Thus fast + 9 = FRETRT'a kind of lizard, the Gangetic alligafor.' Seo Amarakosa I 10 22. ३२ । नौ सदेर्डिच्च । ३ । ४५ । (fattat treat 328 The affıx comes after the root सद to be dejected (I 907), when it is preceded by the prefix for and to split, to go, ·232 THE IDDBANTA KAUMUDI. (ruda III. 45 $ 328. the affix has the force of free whereby the last forel with the consonant after it is to be elided. 45. Thus fr 75,+=fare golden coin equal to one larrha or suvarna of 10 måshas'. i he is changed to by VIII. 3 66, S. 2271 Wishka means a dinara, a thunderbolt, an ornament, gold in general, a piece of gold. ३२९ । स्यमेरीट् च । ३ । ४६ । स्चमीको बएमीका वृषभेदह । इट् इव इति केचित् । स्पमिकः । 329 The affıx * comes after the root at 'to sound' (I. 878, and the augment te is added to the affix. 46 Thus fuq+c+ofauti 'an ant hill, a hind of tree.' According to some 'the augment ke 19 a short and not long t. So the form 19 of 1 the ३३० । मजियुधुनीभ्यो दीर्घश्च । ३ । ४७ । atxi faretaafuati' I GATI Angrist arfirdas i 330 The affix at comes after the roots w' to go', (I. 218), "to join, unite' (II. 23)' y 'to shake, agitate, (V. 9) *t 'to lead' (I. 950) and the short powel is lengthened: and so there is no gunn. 17 Thns *taaten 'wind or a bird', yar'a louss', • wind' TT 'a channel for irrigation' a kind of tree. Note. Jaja is replecrd by vi by II. 4 56. S. 2292. ३३१ । हियो रश्च तो वा ।३ । ४८ । '11*117 T'I 331. Tho affix it comes after the root rt to blusli, be modest (III, 3) and the e is optionnlly changed to er; tho FONCI of tho root is lengthened and so tlcro is no guna. 48. Thus *7*7 or that bashfulness' timiditr.' ३३२ । शकेरुमोन्तोगत्युमयः । ३ ।। migraissfm 'sfr' STATOI TOI 17" I RI s ufors 332 The four affixes **, *, fra and sia come after the root * to be ablc (V. 16) Thuis yn'e biril in general, e ruiturc' a kind of song, an amru, a progunge:c. arge's kind of binil, sort of inerct, 13fm'a virili nini Lord, vnlture', an mgle or kito; a rock;pano of the tillaın iu Jababharata. ३३३ । भुयो मिच । ३।५। wolonii***** THOTËT I saimniicimui 'ferradt errefime' 3:33 The affix for comes after the root y' to bm';(I 1). 60. Thus ytferveytt (1ļI. 1.3 S 2100) + Tu nefore the present 10. limo ·PADA. III. 343 337] TEE UNADI ARTIKET 233 By force of Tri, this aflix comes also after the root ' to protect' (I. 631). Thus wafratagns of a city; the modern srxfeft'. So also after the root of 'to speak' (I. 1053). i'hus effens ag in favorite A tumour.' Nole ft f. ia another name of the present tenso Seo Mahabhasbra प्रतिभतीपर प्रदोतव्यः॥ The affix comes after ** also. As ***faya simman Here the initial of <r 19 elided, and the root changed to ya Tho feminino 19 gonit' by ste (IV. 1. 65. S. 520). ३३४ । कम्युक्षिपेश्च । ३ । ५१ । 7** 'fourgomont' AVTAT*1 lyngi mfariai's 331. The afix my comes after the roots fire' to throw' (IV. 16) and y' to be' (I 1) 51. The bho 19 read into the gatra by the forco of 'and'. Thus fratry->for trei 'the spring season' according to Ujjaladatta, the body, a fragrant smell,+ aray'a master, the sun', the fire, the moon. ३३५ । समुह नदेश्च । ३ । ५२ । froat i no forgatasi 335 The affix recomes after the roots 'to sound' (1.55) and for to throw (17. 14), 52. By the force of 'and', the verb kship 19 read into this sacra. Thus +TUI 'A cloud', feest'wind'. There is no guns as the affix 19 fev (I. 1 5 S 2217). ३३६ । फषदारिभ्प उनन् । ३ । ५३ । 'करणोपराभेदा वारकरवा च कृपा नवा पाहाणम् । 336. The affir t comes after the roots to scatter. - (VI. 116), 'to ohoose', (V. 6) Ç'to kill, hurt, (IX. 23) 53. Thus ta' pity, a kind of a tree, ** mancompassion; Atsi 'the ocean, firmament, the aun, the Varuna tree' PRYscperity, cruelty, horror'. The affis is added to the causative of the root dri. namels to dari ३३७ । प्रो रष लो वा । ३ । ५४ । Tort 337 The allis one comes after the root ' to cross oror' (I 1016) and the ç is optionally changed to m. 59. Thas +514A1 Or 1975 'a young man' The feminide is oor mont Thr itu added as it belongs to the Gaur&d: class. . 80 ·284 THE BIDDIANTA RUBUDI [PADA III 556338 . ३३८ । सुधिपिशिनिषिभ्य बित् । ३ । ५५ । मोन्लेजमाति।। पिपिपुगए । 388 lhe atix se comes after the roots ry 'to bo hungry. (IV 81) fox to sbape, fashion, form', (FI 143) fær 'to associate with, to unite', and it is treated as feet and so there 19 no gung 65 Thus n+मान: name of a savage race the Mlechchas पिन: A slanderer traitor a spy fagre a pair couple sexual union Note -मिथि 18 a sautra root पिन means also cotton, a crow saffron a goblin ३३८ । फरलेगुंक्च । ३ । ५६ । पारगुना पाप्रपादाए । कारगुमः । 339 The afix un comes after the root to bear fruit (I 668) and tle augment शुक् is added to the root 56 Thus पल+शुक्+जना - पवमा 'name of Aryana A name of a river kind of tres As this word belongs to the perfe class of Ganapatha, the affix comes after it Thus पाणुना। ३४० । अशलशश्च । ३ । ५७ । F- . A 340 The affix wt comes after the root . to eat" (IX. 51) which 18 replaced by * 57 Thus अप+लम् +उ = गुमर garlic ३४९ । मर्जेर्णिश्च । ३ । ५८ ॥ भईन। 341 The affix ot comes after the causatire of 7 to go. stand (I 189) and there 19 tho elision of for the sign of the causative 58 Thus प+पि+उन-म+0+-पईन: name of the third Påndava who was a son of kuntı by Indra Note -The root may be st of the ChurAdi class (x 186) Arjuna means white, clear bright peacock, & cutaneous disease a tree the only Bon of his mother ३४२ । तृणास्पाया पित् । ३ । ५८ । दिवोदाई वृष । 312 When wy means grass, thio affix is treated as for which thereby places the accent on tho final syllable 59 Tbus ta kind of grass PAM ·PADA, III 62 $ 345 ) TIIE UNADI AFFIXES 285 riyer: O Note: -at & procuress, bawd, a cow, a kind of serpent, name of Ush& wife of Ani ruddha, name of a saya silver, gold, slight inflammation of the white of the eye, grass. ३४३ । अतेश्च । ३।६०॥ • 313. The affix it comes after the root 'to go' (III. 16) and it is treated as fwg, throwing the accent on the final (VI. 1. 163. S 3710) 60. Thus +=*#' the sun ,; tawny, perplexed, embarragged, dumb, red color, the dawn personified as charioteer of the sun, a kind of leprosy & poigonous creature, a plant, molasses.' ३४४ । अनियमिशीभ्यश्च । ३ । TEPI .' 'बयु देवमग्विरम् । मुमा । युनोग्नगरा। 341. The affix on comes after the roots "to go', (I 248), 'to check, ourb, restrain', (I. 1033) and 'to sleep' (II. 22): and the affix is fure 61. Thus wzA (II. 4. 56. S. 2292)+oyaggie' & temple; ayat the river Yamuna, Jumna, uans, Python Note :--In the mantra formar for det som fin forety, the word ogn is ezplained as solattfor' thoughts' in the Veda Bhsåhya. In the Nighantu, Váyuna 19 read synonym with wat and A DETI ५४५ । यसपदिहमिकमिकपिम्पः सः । ३ । ६२ । पईन् । तमोसमायो' परसपर 'कंसोधी पारमाणपत्र - 345. The affiixecomes after the rootsy' to select', (IX 16) 'to cross', (I.1018), at' to speak', (I. 1058), «t' to kill' (II. 2) to shine', (I. 470), w' to injure' (I. 710). 62, Thus terre'a year', me flood or the ocean'; **+ ***TER'S calf, a boy, son', one just born, but the neuber Tere means 'the breast'; *** W87, goose, Jack, Samings, tho sa prazne sval, the individual soul, the vital airs, thesar, Shiva, Vishou, an unambitions monarch, An ascetio of a particular order, a spiritual preceptor, one free from malice, a mountain, envy, a buffalo.drinking vessel ; also the name of the maternal uncle of Krishna. '& star an asterism. Note :-In T &c. thee is no intermediate becaus) of the prohibition of VII 2.9. S 3163. The 19 not changed to AS & diversity. But there 18 TRU change in mau Though all commentators on Uñadi satras have given tot and er niet as illustrations : yet the forms aig and many aro alto valed according to the authority of the Mahabhåshya. In the other alternative, the forms will be re and are Or the latter förms may be ovolved from far afir ·236 TIL SIDDXANTA KAOUUDI (rada III 62 S 345 with 7 affix, or by adding the afax * to the causative roots of these and under the vertika wa fer (See III 3 58 S 3234) adim a continent, such as cardt, Jambudripa a year, rain , art . the rainy season the earth a desire thirst, ut a call, the young of an animal, a boy son **** drinking vosgel, cup, can goblet, bell metal, white copper particular moar T: lurking or hiding placo, the end of the lower garment A creeper, grass, dry wood, the arm-pit the barem of a king the interior of a forest the side or fiank, a woman's girdle, a surrounding wall e part of a boat, tho or bit of a planet a buffalo e gato. 12 a star, sin ३४६ । सुपेरञ्चोपचायाः । ३ । ६३ । uro 916 The alix comes after the root fi 'to burn' (I, 736) and the penultimate - 19 changed to short 63. Thus fa+'the Indiau fig-tree, one of the seven Dvipas or continents of the world, - aide or back door the space at the side of a door, 40 899, an e88 ३४७ । भनेीर्घश्च । ३ । ६४ । T! 547 The affix comes after the root my (IV 67), and the wis changed to s 61 Thug += 'desk meat the Kalkoli plant ३४८ । प्रदेवने । ३ । ६५ । • to think, 848 The affis e comes after the root (V 18) when it means 'to gamble' 63 Thus += 'a die The is changed to by VIII ? 88 S 294, then changed to by VIII 2:1 S 295 It means al &rls Axle a cart, the beam of a balance latitude of a place rosary seed, a weight a plant a serpent, the soul kaowledge lave an organ of sense ser salt, vitriol ३५ । स्नुवश्चिकटयषि यः किस् । ३ । ६६ । चुपातहरमनपसनामार। 949 The affix r comes after the roots 'to flow, to trioblo', (II 29), Y 'to out, to wound' (VI 11), yo to cut', (VI 141), and sto go', (VT 7), and it is treated as fore and cnuses vo guna Thus to 'daughter in law or a kind of a tree', ***** +-+-+'& tree 'The T is focal sed to as the effix is f« (HII 16 S 2412) Seo III.2 36 S 298 and 295 xref water, ku 66 ·237 GADA III 70 358.] Tik twitt !!! + a star namn of a mountain, & bcar, a kind of plant ocrth. pl. thin pleuades. pyo sasiat 131891 seitsf;?? spyt xfa! 350 Thic allix comes after the root to go, to küll', (VI. 7, and the word so formed in cane a species of on animal. 67 Thus + T'Rbrar; a name of a mountain': Though the word has been forined by the last Otra nlso, the pros nt autre maak? niyami, namely fish never takes or crcept wh nit denoto sa Apocits while the other thrco root tako s without any such restriction ३५१ । सन्दिगुपिगुपिम्पश्त । ३।६। घमासान । पुरताला पूर्ण बराल 301 Thcnflix coinos aftor tho roots are to wct, mniston, (VIL 10), 1 to be angry (IX. 15), and to citract, (IX 10). and it is treated as fart 68. Thug yog+Pat's sprog, fountain', thor of the root is elided by VI. 4 24 8 415 . Pri'a bunch of flowers', a pillar, a porl necklacs, the plamage of a peacock. Be the one'. २१२ । गभिपययोदकी।३।६८ । परमानदेवा पक्ष 362. Tho nffix * comes after the roots ar 'to coret', (IV, 130) and we to purchase, to praise' (I. 166) tbo and of the roots are respectivels changed to rand ' Thus TI+AT+TATI'the God of lorc', +7******** 'a fort night, &c. Q. The ordinarily would have bren changril to by w role, and so we get 9851 dns No 'The Tra 13 asiddhi, and so torre would have been my by VIII. ? 37 S 326. ३५३ । अशेः सरः । ३ । ७० । 4 953 lhe affis « comes after the root = 'to pertade' (V. 16) 70. 'Thos + tokig a letter. The sis changed to e, and the latter to by S. 24 and 295 The word means all porrading, the suprema: Brahmin, 5* Summam Bonum, the letters of a3 alphabet Duvaladatta reads the affia as rey having an indicatory 7, but it 1c correct. For would place the accent oa the fing: syllable (VL 1. 197 S. 3686): while ·938 THE SIDDHANTA KAUHUDI (PADA III 70 $ 353 the word has acute on the mi Idlo by the affix accent (III 1 3 S 3708) As in the following Rik mantra utset Titan (Rv. I 164 39) and the following Tajush mantra घोपि यतानि पष्टिकाराणि । Soulso the Mahabhashya at the end of second Ahnika sayg ina TASTE ३५४ । बसेर । ३।११। - 304 The affix it comes after the root o'to dwell' (I. 1054) 71 Thus 78,+FT-utet 'a year' The 7 of 118 changed to because € 18 an Ardhadhituka affiz beginning with . (VIII 4 49 S 2342) ३५५ । सपूर्वाधिवत् । ३ । ७२ । संपरसरात 355 The affix comes after the root 'to droll when It is preceded by any upapada, and the affix is treated as fra which places the accent on the last syllable 72 Thus yatre+पर- 'a year So also creati sfiat: &c Some read the patra as gata, which is incorrect, for free accent 19 pot limited to parte only As in mantra ETOTT faretra the accent 19 on the final १५६ । धूमदिन फित् । ३ । ७३ । nigami TTI ranfmutare I YTUS INTUTI12847 ofert at ToteT ! 356 Ike nffix et comes after the rootsy 'to do', (VIII 10) to shake', (V 9) 'to be pleased, satisfied' (11 99), and 1t 19 trented as for 73 Chng +-t a dish made of milk sessamum and rice Here the 19 not changed to b cause of the force of a diversely whiob governs all the Unidi satrag Votr' the grey color , here also 19 not changed to because of the force of Tati envy jealousy &c But 7 mests & goat But in the Vedas the etymological meaning of the word rut 19 taken namely cauge of delight Thus in दुनिन्द्राय नासरत and तसिग्पो मश्वरमिन्द्र पामच (Ry X 80 9) ३५७ । पते प ल ।३ । १४ । पटवता पश्या' 357 lhe affix e comes after the root ro to fall, to move', (I 8981 ani the of the affix is replaced by Thus +9989: a road ३५८ । तन्यषिभ्या कसरन् । ३ । ७५ ।' a peniprog frum! U ·289 Pada III 70 $ 362) TUE OSADI ATTIIES means & 368 The affıx TTTT comes after the roots *t to stretoli', (VIII 1) and 'to go' (11.7) 75 'Thuis +9*TT the shuttle See Amarakoah & 111 2. 24. The is elided by VI 4 37. S 2428 ***TERT: '& priest, a thorn'. Note --Riksharam means shower of rain, and siksharah m a.priest But in the mantra T *** gerar the word anrikshardh is explaiped as thornleus ३५८ । पीयुक्तणिभ्यां कालन्द्रस्वः संप्रसारणं च । ३ । ७६ । पीमा सीमा पियातो वृक्षवा । कुषालो देवमेस। 360 The aflix «tut comes after the roots ot! (a santra dlatu) and where to bound' (I 477), and thereby the root piya 18 shortened to forg and kvan is vocalısed to se respectively. 70. Thus +10+ reforma dame of a tree', here the long tor fra bad been shortened, crtay'tho namo of a country'. By the force of diversely' which governs all the Unldı sOtras the word word (a skull) is formed by the addition of the affix www to the root ww (to break) Thus Wort TOKY (VII. 8 53 8 2864) TTT BOTW (the Tin is elided by Vi 4 37 S 2428 ) ३६० । कठिफुषिभ्यां कानुः ।।। ७ । कठाए। पी। कुपाकुरविर पूर्पर। 360, The affix wty comes after the root to live in distress', (I 956) and yes to extract (IX 16) 77 Thug 7+7'a bırd', $or fire, the sam, & monkey Note - Ujjvaladatta reads the root ** (1 716) to injure instead of ge, and gives the example mig however against Dictionary lhe Medını reads the word yg Quere Is there any word as myt? ३६१ । सतैर्युक्छ । ३ ।। 'frigataeftate 361 The aflix we come after the root tomoro' (1.982) and tho augment is added to the root. 78 Thus +5**** gt' the wind, the river, a wheel, firo a deer, the thunderbolt of Indra, the suns disc or orb ३६२ । पत्ते द्विश्च ।३।। matge ImageITFATTY IMATI 362 The affix it comes after the root Tt' to be, to exist' (I. 795) and the of the root 1 vriddhied 79. This 19, ·240 TETE SIDDRAYTA KAUMUDI [PADI III 798363. . Th18 TT+79=matge 'the egg plant' By the force of your diversely which governs all Unadı satras, thes of the after a 19 replaced by .. Thue re+का+कार्क-बाकिम । ३६३ । पदमित्संप्रसारणमाझोपश्च । ३ । ८० । 'प्रदालु चिके पाने पिके च सरीपे' । 368 The affix काकु, comes after the root पर्द ' to break wind', (I29) and it is treated as far, the is changed to rs, and there is clision of the ~ of the root. 80. Thus पई+काकु-प्रदा' a scorpion, a tiger, a panther, a serpent or a tree' ३६४ । सृयुवचिभ्योऽन्युजागूजकुचः । ३ । ८१ । भगुणाजक्नुते ममात्रपुः । 'सरपपुपातपोः ।ववाणः । पचर्षिप्रवामिनी' । 364. The affixes wrat, TV and was come respectively after the roots y 'to go', (I 982), 'to unite', (II 23) to speak' (II b4). 81 Thus t+मन्युच-सरपयुः & cloud , and wind' 9+ TITO TUTT: 'rice gruel , A.K II 9 50 बच्+माबरपुः 'a Brahman or a good speaker . Note --The word ty has been explained in the Veda Bhishya ag पोप्रगामी swiftgoing, in commenting on the mantra सरपयु रस्य मुरण।। ३६५ । प्रानक.शीभियः । ३।२। थपानकीनगराभयानका। 365 The affix comes after the roots to lie don', (II. 22) and भी ' to fear' (III 10) 82 This सी+चानक पपानका ' a python', भयानका "fearful, a tiger, name of Rahu, the sentiment of terror, one of the nino sentiments 10 poetry (रस) ३६६ । भाणको लुधुशिशिधाभ्यः । ३।३। सधायक दाम् । भवाणकोवातः । पिक्षणक्षा लेना । पूषोदरादिरवारपडे कलीया। "णिहार मारिकामले । 'धाणको दीनारभागा'। 366 The aflis * comes after tho roots to cut', (IX 13), ' ' to shake, agitate', (IX. 17), शिष 'to smell', (T 174) and भा 'to hold, to nourish'. (III. 10) 83. Thus r+भाषषलवाणकम् ' a suckle, scythe:, वायक: ' wind', णिपणा mucus discharge from the postrils', the final of this word u sometimes elided by the force of VI. 3 109 S 1034, thus fupras'the mucus of tho nogo, rust of tron, a glass vessel, *'s gold coin, part of a diparn. Note ---In the Vakramaditya Rosa Singhdna means fames Baterie नारेमा पिपिने ·IADS III 873870] TAX TN DI ATTIXI! - - १६७ । सरगुपदायिदोमिग ।३।४। पदारे। पाप मापन | दर पारा पिप से Hि। 367 Tho Fords otin fire brand torch', aforin Indle, spoon', and wोमी 'a sacrificer ' are irregular 81 Thega are drive i froin tho respactiyo roo't o' to burn (1 727) with the ad lition of tho alfix , thc c of the root Icing replaced by 1.5 to hurd, kill' (V 31) with th addition of the eflir for and to morahip' (III 1) with the alix fayi Sco A K 11 9 34 for darvi ३६८ । हिप कुप रश्य सो या।३।५। धापा । 368 The afts comes after the rootी 'toshy bo mo. dust or slly'(III 13), and the of the root 19 optionally obang. cd to 85 Thug +* etist or tigi modost or beshlul'. The affix being fary does not cause guna ३६८ । एसिमग्रिपयामिदगिपूर्षिभ्यस्तम् । ३।६। रचपलारपाद । जित- (३१५६) रवि नेट् । रला नः । गत बामाता। माता I TE | 'सोता पारिएको।' । पोतो पाराहिमपा । पालमादीचा पाप लिया 369 Tho affu my comes sftor the ton roots i to smile, laugh'. (T 757), 'to die', (VI 110), ' to smallow (VI 117), पम् 'togo', (II 36), या 'to blow', (II 41), अर 'to go,' (T 4931, 'to towo, conquer', (1V 94), «' to cut', (IX 13), x' to cleanso, to purify: (IX. 12) and yeto hurt, injure, Lill (1 601) 80 The re augm nty prohibit.l by VII 2 93 3163 Thrsn+र- 7* 'the hand', to the earth 'the mortal the human being पत। the holo', ha dsor or antelope', 77 Wind', 'the end, maar A tooth होत tears : mark or sign', n n child - bons'.... roguo , thou of 13 slided by VI 1 66 8. 873 and not by VI 4 21 S. the penultimate as lengthened by VIII 2778 354 By the force of age diversely which goreras all the Loadı aQtens the affix it comes af er the root or to sound of which the short is leng thepod Thus T+तम-स्तर'un dust matted harr' ३१२ । मध्याप इट् च । ३।८७ । मापिता 370 The affix that comes after the root 'to obtain', (V 14), preceded by the prefir" and there 19 also the angment 67 81 . 2665, ·242 THE RIDDIANTA KAUMUDI (PADA III 885 871 1 Thus r+मा+r+नापिता n barber The is not elided as A dirersity Soa VI 378 S 757 ३१ । तनिमभ्या पिच्छ । ३ ।। At The 871 The affis my comes after the roots to 'to spread', (VIII 1), and 'to cio', (VI 110) and is treated as fria hich causes the nisnl of tan to be clided, and prorents guna of mri 88 it Thus ast'any stringod musical instrument, wind व-death ३०२ । अग्निपुसिभ्य क्त । ३ ।। शहर । जितम् । घृतम् । शितम् । 872 The Aflix comes after the roots 'to smear, to malo olear', (VII 21). : 'to sprinklo, to shine', (III 11) and fe to bind (V 2) 60 Thus wear a tiger a kind of fish Ths 13 according to Ujjraladatta This appears to bo wrong for he cites Vigra kood wie ! TH#, but the true rending is vere but not rame clauded butter feav Bilver white color bound when used as a fm nino meang candied sugar By the force of agar diversely which governs the Unkdı sútrag the affixe comes also after the root on to go Thus th-मृतम् gleaning truth water, worship ko ३७३ । दुतमिभ्या दीर्घश्च । ३ । । It I 7701 379 The aflix comes after the root to co , (1 991), and my 'to spilad' (VIII 1) and the rout rotels are rosiec tirel lengthenea to long and 1 90 Thus 5+ Tate messenger Its f m ding is nit (Gauradı ) fier is from al ktich + = father brother &c * word of endearing address By the force of pH diversely which goreros the Unadı sůtras, tho aflix - comes also after the root f 'to sleep to lie down पी+- चीतम् or शीता। पीता means the furrow made by the plough It is synonym of 'ht ३०४ । जेमंट पोदात्त । ३ ।। ali It is Th 13 ·rada III 955 378.) TIE IMI attity. 371 The allia din courg after jl (1 693), and thicrols thio allir tokrs the auginent rhich is tratta aw the of the root is lengthenes 01. By forc of 'an!', tharo 19 langthening of t'ia vovle op die ruga This f**** to Armela's 'a closi, e aountain, « 1390744**, en epithet of Indra'. Xo's -ac ording to some this 41:11 13 111 to be ann ruhi ona, that 14, not approrot x or camp : I by any liah lunc:lyruth. word tant in the (tunapj'ha in th 79120 class ३५ । लोटपलिती।३।। una: 71*** TT wget tenni fan, 375 The word mwinolol, a lump of earth' and afmet 'groy hair, mud heat' are anomalous 12 They are irregularly drived froin tuo repctis punts tnn. Il 13), and to gº, moro' (1 802) by tho al lition of t' afbx * thi robh the Mof tho aflix 19 replaced by Innithomb of thn TOOC 19 also gunatud Th19*****77+15+- Somit urly free Noleme 19 both masculine and nautir so tha pluralis nefror तोटा ३७६ हश्याभ्यामितम् । ३।३। frenat alatt 376 The allir 177 comes after the roots r 'to stcal, rob' (1 917) and A'to go, more' (I 1012) 03 Thus T+7effer'gnen er jellow color, #+677-70+T(VI. 1 45. § 23701 etme' white color', brilliant ३१91 रुहे रघ लो या।३।४। atfest youp** infra 377. Thoallis ant com g after tho root L 'to gro', (1. 912) of thich the vis optionalis chinuged to Thus [+-afrired color, saffroa, a kind of dear, akud of 6:1 or of blood' No'e Rohits means red, a fos, a kind of deer, red bore dom ! Harishchandra's ton, a kind of fish, n. blood, saffron, a straight rain tot. Lobita corper, WATS, a scrpant, a kind of rice ३८ । पिगे: किष।३।। for TV 378 Thooflix ne comos nfter the root for to shape, to light, to adorn' (VL 113) and 13 trosted as fut Thas few+mefafandash: 2 ·214 TIL BIDDITIVTA KIUNODI [PADA III 06 6379 ३० । दक्षिस्पहिगृहिभ्य भाग्यः । ३।६। **1977 rug!! TI, TO TFI TYTOR ITTIRI ITO 379 The aflix a comes after thoroots to hear', (L.990). to grow', (I 039), fer to desire for', (1 323), II 'to tako' (I 681). 96 Thus **. TE ATITI'an animal fit for sacrifice', s'& vulture, an opithet of garuda' TITI desirous of obtaining, or a star' and TO a house holder Mile - In the Veda Bhashya on the mantra sans pe wafot etes the word Grncajja is explained by woute sorthy of hearing So also the etymological meaning of Tutu 19 takon in the mantra turut ArT मिरपा ३८० । विधिपाग्यः । ३ ।। quafi raforce | "मित्र यो रिधिपापा। 880. The word feferon is formed by reduplication of the root at 'to bold, to nourislı', (III 10) and adding tlo aflix olur and the augment qui 97 Thus o 37+*+12=Fxfowi 'n false friend, spuituous liquor'. As in the mantra fer at freement The reduplicate s 19 changed to I Bizt all these are erroneous. Nole - UjJvAladatta reads the satra as frot, and derives the word from «fa with tho upapada dadhi the word meaning clarified batter The author of D18apadt frittı derives it from dhish to sound (DII 22) by reduplication and withont guna and changing the of the reduplicate into wi The author Prasada also give the same derivation The Vedic reading 19 दिपिपाय and not दधिपाप्प Quctre may not the word feireta be derived regularly from far (III 22) with reduplication, sant of gunation and adding stor? In thuolew, the aug ment yg nccd nos be added ३८१ । प्रज परयः । ३ ।। हरेषः । स्तषः 361 The alix Tu comes after the root (V 9) 98 Thus +TTT ETTE' the bust, the chief' ३८२ । सघ सस्पश्छन्दसि । ३ ।। सपेय पुरुषर्पए । 382 In the chhandas, the alix comes after the rout 'to praise II 31) 99. to choose' ( ·PADA III 1069388 ] TIE OYADI ITTIXB: 245 . 'to Thus स्तुप पुरवहन (Rr x 1206) तुपेवा-स्तोतपर worthy or deserring of being prarsod पुष्पर्पसर वारूपम् protman in form' Ujvaladatta reads the sđtſa as transitar and gives the example area Indra prevents gnna, and cut augment is added This is againet the Veda and the commentary The word 15 stusheyya and not stureyya in the Vedas ३३ । राजेरन्य ।३। १०० । राम्पो पति। 383 Tho affix** comos after the root te 'to shine (I 874) 100 Thus ow+चाय-न्या fire R&janya meaning a Kshatriya is formed by ou under IV 1 137 S 1153 It has starit on the final ३-४ । शरम्योश्च । ३ । २०९ । परसपस् । मपवर 384 The affix va comos after the roots म injure (IX 18) and रम् 'to play' (I 906) 101 Thus +पष-सरपप . place of refuge सपयच pleasant del ghtful ३८५। भनि च । ३ । १२ । परराषए। 385 The affirmer comes after the root 'to go', (III 16) and it is troated as fwer which places thio acoont on the first syllable 102 Thurstar - परमपर "forest ३८६ । पम्प । ३ । १०३ । घु पंचनाचा पर्णग्य पोषयो। 386 * Ile word to my cloud, Indra ' 18 11 regular 103 This is formed by adding the affix शम्य to the root पुष to spru kle (1737) and changing the to! It maaps & raia clou l thur deri g cloid and Indra and Vishnu २-७ । ददेराम्प ।३१ १०४ । पबाम्यहापागियाग्निनो । The affix e comes after the root ar to speak' (I 1059) 104 Thus बर माग्य-पापा A liberal or generous person, & fuond speaker The line free frmitt us from Ajayakosha ३८ । समिक्षियनिवधिपतिभ्योऽनन् । ३ । १५ । अमत्र नाहन । नपरबत्रा बानापुर। पवर्ष वनाए। 388 The afli, aut comes after the roots I 'to go's 387 , ·246 THE SIDDEANTA KAUNUDI. (FADA III 105 388 Astar यात्रा (I 193) * 'to go ', (I 092) * 'to Forslup, (I 1051) 'to kill ( 14 and edito go', (I 898 105 Thus सम्+शत्रशमनम् & pot vessel नामम् Bråkman who maintains the sacred fire, on a deadly weapon 999 a wing pinion a feather & veh clo Note ---Seo Amarakosha for #999 TT (A K II 5 86) Sad VI 3 75 S. 759 for another dorivation of an Iccording to some Jajatra means aga hotra ceremony But it really means the deity worshipped in any ceremony and has been so explained in Veda Bhishya on a वायुतिन गहता सपनप्रेरगति ॥ ३८ । गठेरादेश्य क । ३ । १०६ । फडनम् । खलपोरेयस्यामरणारकरार । 389 119 fiz ust comes after the root of 'to distil, to run as a liquid , (I 814) and there is changed to 106 Thus +91-** a kind of vesgel 2 wife Since is inter obangeable with a ao va also get the form 6919'y wy fe, hip ३८० । एनश्चित् । ३ । १०७ । घरमा चमगपी एनु। 390 The affix e comes after the roots to olioose (V 8) and is treated as far wluch thereby places tho accent on the last syllable 107 Thus q+yest a strap thong or g rth of leather Sce AK IP 10 31 In the following verse the fet accent is paton: -UTATUT दार्या मानानः। ३८९ । सुषि कन ।३ । १०८ । 'पुषिदा कुटुम्बकम् । 391 The aflix ww comes after the root fry to kn (II 50) preceded by the preposition 108 Thus सुषिद् + क्षत-विदेमम् a relat ve Note Some read the aflix as katrap wth fired But it serroneo 15 for We do not find the accent of नित 10 परस्पते अविवसाथि राया ke lhe aff'x accent is here on (111 1 3 read with VI 1 139 ), and ३९२ । फ़तेर्मुम् छ । ३ । १०६ । कृष्णा लाम् । 392 Tho aflis comcs After the root y' to cut' (VI 11 and there is also tho augncnt 109 Thus **********y a plough Mote --The Ford Erintatram is explained as that wbioh ought to bo cut, namely, a forest, in the maptra T 7**** RT X &G 20) 1 ·218 TRI SIDDEANTI XAVUUDI [HIDI III 1133306 है . . २६ । शीशपिरुगनिवधिजीविमाणिभ्योग्यः । ३ । ११३ । योग्या स्वाद । पयोगिरा । पपया रपया कोहिला । नसा पपिका पाया परमो धर्मः । मादीति पाटे बाददे परम वा वाया सोता तत्पर । नीमप माना माणयो बलवार । पालकाचनिनिल्याप । 'मनमा गना याग्विागितस्तु वमयी दनः । 396. The affix * comes aftor the seven roots ot' 10 lic down', (II 22), यप 'to ourse', (I 1049), 'to sound', (II 26), गर'to go', (I. 1031), बस् 'to cheat', (I. 20% and X. 163) गीय to lire' (I 504), and #ty to breatho' (II 01) 118. Thus #+442999: 'a python', rhai'a curse', 1991 'the cuckoo', Wat a traveller' a road, aga'a rogue But when the reading in the text, . . in the sdtra 1s बाद (to salute) instead of my, then we baro पदया 'n praiser, a bard, one who deserves praige', 879: 'life', 'strong, powerful, breabting. 'By VIII 4 19 S 2478 the F 18 changed to Ti By the forco of a diversely), which governs the Unadı satras the afix y comes after tho roots ar 'to be calm or quiet or tranquil'(IV 92) and दर to restrain (IV94) Thus it tranquility, calmness, twai'self restraint See Amarako-á IHI 2 3 for the verse यमयातु पना याग्तिर्वाग्तिर दमयो बना। ३८७ । मनश्चित् । ३ । ११४ । भरपो लोकपाला। 397 Tho affix comes after the root r to nourish or maintain, (III. 5) and is treated as far 114 Thus + '& govoreigo, fire, a deity presiding over ono of tho regions of the world. ३० । रुदिविदिभ्या स्त् ि। ३ । ११५ । रोदितीति पाइप: विशुः। नीति विषयः । 898 and faz to know (II. 55) and is treated as fry 315 Thus पद्+य-पदा मिः 'weeping, or crying child. विषयः "knowing or the science of yoga': Note -Ujjvaladatta has read the attra as fafaraf fire o e the afli we comes after the roots *(to cry) and forge and 15 treated as fre, and 80 he has evolved the form+अप-वषः। The author of Dasap&dı yritti has read the satra as eft fafevar face But we have followed the Bhashya and so have read tho patra as the foferat fet The afir is free for in commenting on the stra mit gert &c (1 21 S 2461) Patanjali while enumerating for afixes, mentions at thus ले पुमत हादरा ! पति शमा महरति . The ath u wa comes after the roots 'to wolp"(tí 68,". . है ·249 PADA III. 118 1401] THE UNADIATIXE. . - . ३८ । उपसर्ग वसेः । ३ । १९६ । भावगपो पर सवमयो मामः। 391. The affix y comes after the root पण 'to drcll. (I. 1051), when preceded by an upasarga 110 Thue चा+व+-प्रावण्यः ndwelling houss', राम्याप 'n village'. No'e - Ulpiln latta king read the sutra na strontatt hercas others hrvu rund it .9 wifs uits According to this latter riow, Avasatha is the only form, and not simvasatha ४० । अत्ययि पमितमिनमिरभिलभिमभितपिपतिपगिपशि- महिभ्योग्राप । ३ । १९७ । प्रपोदयपोएन स्पात् । पततीत्यवमो पारारमा र । चषतीरवयसो राजा भाव । नगरपरिनामाः मोमपानपान । तान्यायरिरिति तमसोपकारा। करसोरमुला । भी गयो । समयो पर पापकन । ममति मन्यति वा नमम मात्रायः । तपसा पक्षी पाय । पतयः पची। 'पप फराकिमत'। पापा पाद्रव्यम् । महर्म घामम् । 100 'the affix www comes after the following thirteen roots • 01 --जत ' to go ' (I 39), अय् 'to protect ' (I 631), चम् 'to drink, to cat' (I 197), तम् 'to desiro' (IV. 93), नन् 'to saluto' (I. 1031), muy to begin to embrace, to long for' (I. 1023), FH ' to obtain' (I 1024), मम 'to injure' (I 788 and IX 48),तप 'to suffor pain' (I. 1031), पद · to go ' (I 898), पन् 'to praise' (I 167), पर · to purchase, to honor, to praiso' (I. 466), TI to lionor, to respect (321), 117. Thus w+आमच-पतमा 'wind, the aoul', it. that which constantly mores, , the cup for drinking Soma juice', lit 10 which they drink n' a king, the sun', lit. he who protects &c, 79'darkocu', aut larorable, kindly disposed), लमा ' violence, anger, Jr तम! Tealth, in solicitor', WTI ' the sky, the ocuen', al'tho suo the moon a bird', wut'a bird', **81'the jack fruit', an article of sale, a commo dity', महसस् knowledge Volet f common filsz, hemp ligered परnress can ladle &c used at scrices for drinking the Soms juice, a cake made of barley. wer the bread-fruit tree, a thord, a kind of monkaj, / a kolof malads ४०१ । वनस्तुट् च । ३ । ११८ । घालशादारवालापाठहा। 101 The nflix *** Corces after the root &' to weare, to SCT (I 1035) and thero 11 also the augment. 118 By force of fou (durergely) which gorerns the Onali stras, ths at Us Tantios. Thasa+r+wrstrei'the reed. . 32 ·250 TEE BIDDIANTI KAUHUDI. (PADA III. 119 $ 402. Note: In the Dasapadt yritti, the autra is read as forever, t.e. all the abovo oporations take place after the root o'to go &c (II. 39) Thus +TE ATY sedert ४०२ । यहियुभ्यो णित् । ३ । ११९ । पापोग्बगरा वापरणसंपाता। 402. Tlo aflis muy comos after the roots 'to carry (I. 1058), and y'to join' (II. 23), and is treated as fua. 110. Tbos + To: 'the python, a water courbo'; TTT ' a heap of grass'. There, is vriddhi as the afix is forgo ४०३ । वपश्व । ३ । १२० । वय गधी। वाप: पाया। 403. The affix toy comes after the root ang 'to go,"more' (1 804), and is treated as fea, 120. Thus yo+W=F+' & cron'. ४०४ । दिवः कित् । ३ । १२ । ford-fatto 404. The allir *** comes after the root forget to play (IV. I.), and is treated as fata 121. Thus fr+-farea or forw'a day'. ४०५ । फराशलिकलिगर्दिभ्योग्भच । ३ । १२२ । WTI VARI TI I 1 405, Tho affix we comes after tho roots 'to scatter' (VI. 116), to injura' (IX. 18), "' to go, to tremble' (I. 896), a to scratch (I. 526), and a to sound, to roar! (I. 58). 122. Thus ******** the back of the hand from the wriet to the root of the fingers, the trunk of an elephant, a young camel', 'a young elephant', u'a gruas hopper, locust, a moth', ***: ' a young clephant", po 'a denbey, the white water lily smell. an insect. ४० । ऋविषिभ्यां फित् । ३ । १२३ । 123. 406. The afis yang comes after the roots 'to.go** (VI. 7)and parto sprinkle' (1. 738) and it is troated as fare This weens 'a bull', '& bull'. Note --Risbava means bull, the male animal, the best of most excellent, the note , the bolloor of the car, a bour's tail, a crocodilo's tail, a dried plent, name of an entidose, an incarnation of Vishnu, a sacrifice.

·PADA III. 128 5411.1 THE UNIDI ITFIXES 251 ४०७ । रुपेनिम्नुच । ३ । १२१ । 'परिमायाम्' । भरनादमिरिक्षावाद पदेिगा। सभी मतदतिमि'। 407 The aflix e comes after the root ta 'to bo angry (I. 721) and is treated as fre (which thereby places the accent on the first syllablo) and also as far The root ru_y replaced by. 124. Thus प् + अम+धमा हुपमा ' an elephant in rur'. ४० । रासिवमिभ्यां च ।३ । १२५ । रामभा। यस्तमः। 408 The allis y comes after the roots try 'to cry' (I. 657), and av 'to go, to cover, to enclose (I. 520) 125. This राम् +अभा-रामा 'an ass, adonkey', परतभा 'a cowherd, a cook, beloved, dear, kapreme, a lover, a favourite, an overseer, a good borse ४० । विशिभ्यां झच् । ३ । १२६ । परस्तो मत्पियिन्तः । परवलम् । 409. The affir मच comes after the roots to grow ola' (IV. 22) and few' to enter' (VI. 130). 126. Thus r+म+मावः (VII. I as 2169)-MVaold, decayed', वैपाया 'a small pond, pool, fire'. A KI 10. 28 Note-By the force of गुत (dirersely) which governs all Upadi satras, the affix** also comes after the root (I. 776) 'to deserve, merit, worthy of, thus we+Team'a l'uddhist or Jaiba przost. ४२० । हिमन्दिशीबिमाणिभ्यः पिदाशिपि । ३ । १२७ ॥ रोन्दो पुषभेदार मदत पुत्रःजीवन्त घोषषम् । प्रायस्तो पापुः पिरवानी रोवी। 110 The affir comes in the senso of benediction after the roots 'to gror' (I. 912), pre to be glad' (1. 67), 517 'to lird' (I. 691), +at to breathe' (II. 61), and is treated as 127 Thus +मच्-रोहतs tree', ra 'son', भीतdrug. lite'; प्राचन्ता Wind Sincs the affir u treated as fod, the feminines of the above words are formed by adding in Thus Aquart #teamt ४११ । तृभूयहियसिभासिसाधिगहिगरिष्ठजिमन्दिभ्यश्च ।३।१०। पम्पो मापात् । स च पित् । तरलत: समुद्रः। तरती नौका । मातः कालः । पातो यायुः। बस व भूवः। भासवः सूर्णः । सातो भिक्षुः । गोटादियामिव 'बामा- (२३) रवि देरया । गरयातो जसः । नलयम्ती भूपरम् । प्रातः परपुत्रासातो . - 411. The affix my comes aftor the following ten roots and 2. is treated as fathel. to crous ofer' (I 1018) I 'to be ·252 TAL SIDDIANTI KAUMUDI (rada III 129 g 412 सावन्तः भएर यस्ता (I 1) 3 HT'to carry' (I 1059) 4 7 'to live' (I 1054) 5 preto shino' (1 655) 6 07* 'to complete' (V 17) 7 'to distil, to run as a liquid' (I 8111 8 * 'to decorate' (1 314) 9 for 'to conquer' (I 593)and 10 meg 'to be pleased (I 67) 128 Thus 1+wata:' the ocean' Since the affix is treated as fore the feminino of the word wat will be formed by adding a to it thus, arar a boat at 'the present time , frat the wind Fa: the spring , that the sun the mendicant. The roots TE, fwand rug belong to the surf subdivision of the wife class and they get the designation of fat hence by VI 4 92 S 2568 they retain their penultimate short vowel before tho causative for BF VI 4 55 S 2311 अय् substituted for the r of णि before अन्त So गपडयन्ता cloud ornament जयरता 'the son of Indra नादयन्त: a son ४१२ । हन्तेर्मुट् हि च । ३ १२६ । हमत. 412 The affix * comes after the root r to kill' (IT 2) and thero is the augments The root or in replaced by ft 129 Chus +16+*=fr+se+=faat yinter season ४१३ । भन्देलोपश्च । ३ । १३० । भदन्त प्रजित । 413 The affix it comes after the root we'to tell a good news to be glad (I 12) and of the root is elded 130 Thus +9+a:'un ascetic ४१४ । ऋच्छेरर । ३ । १३१ । ध्दरा श्या । वाहुलक जर्जरझझरादयः । 111 lhe affix e comes after the 100ty' to go (VI 15) 131 Thug VR harlot. By the for o of u (diversely) wh ch governs the Unidi satrar the wor ts sa a kind of song the recitation of scholars, or (the banner of Indar, and moss) and * (a kind of drum the Kalı age, & can« staff) are respectiv lg lerived froin the rooots are to read to discuss , wo (to say, to speah) and ** (lo speak ) ly add og the aflix at noe -Sâmi Dayananda Sarasvati derives such words ag TTT, 75, मापर करा, सीकर, कोटा, शबर, समर, वर्धर, पर, कपर, पिनर, पायर, शारापर, manie mare, ata &c in short all words endings in at, by the force of the (livers 1s) shich governs the Un&dı satras According to him, a 13 the fumınino form d by adding to to the word **, tho s being replaced by # by VIII 2 18 S 2350 as belonging to the form class ·239 TML UNADI APPIXES PADA III. 139 5 419 ४१५ । अर्तिकमिभ्रमित्रमिदेविनासिभ्यश्चित् । ३ । ९३२ । पक्ष्योरसिम्स्यात् । भार कपाटम् । कमरः कामुकः । भ्रमरः । नमः । देवरः । वासस 415. The affix * comes after the six roots 'to go' (III 10), time to love, to be onamoured of' (1.470), 7 'to travel' (IV. 96), to eat, to drink' (I. 497), and causatives of free to play' (IV. 1), and to 'to live' (I 1051), and it is treated as form li. e the accentis placed on the final syllable'). •132 Thus +vaud a covering, '& door', *T: 'lustful, desirous', YAT!' a bee, a lover', VTi' a kind of an antelope', dat: 'brother-in-law, 2. e. husband's younger brother', : ' a day of the week'. Note :Some have read in the sutra format instead of uforas Accordingly they derive the word TUT: (a cuckoo) from the root or to roar, to sound' (IV, 54) with the addition of the affix ve ४९६ । कुवः क्ररन् । ३ । १३३ । कुरा पतिभेदः। 416. The affix Al comes after the roots to mako noise' (II 33). 133. Thus 5+ *=1T: an osprey,'a ku da bird'. ४१७ । अगिमदिमन्दिभ्य भारन् । ३ । १३४ । •सहारः । मदारो वराद । 'मन्दारा पारिजातका' । 417 The allix It comes after the roots to go' (I. 155), "' to be pleased' (I, 863), palp' to praiso (I 13). 134. Thus + TWIT: 'charcoal', the planet Mars, : 'a bog, an elephant in rut' 'a thorn-apple or dhatura, a lovir, libertine, writi the coral tree, an elephant', the celestial tree, the Arka plant, tho dhattura plant, heaven a cheat or rogue. After the root /mada, there comes the affix áru also, as #7511 ४९८ । गहेः कष्ठ ध । ३ । १३५ । TC: 1 418 Tho allis ante comes after the root og 'to distil, to run as a fluid' (I 814, 65 (a), and it is changed to . 135. Thus 7 + 1777-**7 'the tawny color, a servant. ४१९ । पगारभृङ्गारौ। ३ । १३६ । .ऽभ्यामारन्नुगुक इस्वछ । शारो रसः । 'भरा कमकालुका'। 419, The words TFTT: ' sexual passion' and Ft (a golden vise or pitcher) aro irregular. They are derived from tho respective roots 'to injure' (IX. 18) and pito nourish or maintain' (III. 5), by adding tho ali's ance and tho augments 1 ·254 THE SIDDIANTA KAUKODI [PADA III 136 $419 and UH Thoro 18 slıortening of the potel of the root also 136 Thus +1+1444 ttu the erotic bºntinent love passion coiton marks made with red load on the body of an elephant C: a golden vase or pitcher & vase used at the coronation of a king ४२० । कञ्जिमणिभ्या चित् । ३ । १३७ । फटिना सोना । कमारो भपूरः । मारिः । 120 The affix WITT comes after the roots *57 (a jautra root) and qu' to purify' (II 57), and is treated as fwa and so the acute is on the final 137 The root 45* 15 & gautra one Thus ***+ & peacock the sun an elephant the b lly, an epithet of Brahimi a hermit otti a cat ४२१ । कमे फिदुरुयोपधाया । ३ । १३८ । चिदित्यनुपरवोदाचा। कुमाः। 421 The aflix comes after the root * 'to love" (I 470), and is treated as fra and the penultimate rowel of the root is replaced by - 138 Thus **+ HITT-TTC: a Bon The anuvritti of fere comes from the previous sätra and so the accent falls on the last syllable Note - Ti meong xaon, boy, & yoath a prince an beir apparend, name of Kartikeya of Agni a parrot groom Varunadri ४२२ । तुपारादयश्च । ३ । १३८ । TUTTI I TUTTI I VITT WTF Tho words tusara and tlie restare irrcgulirly formed by the addition of the allir my 139 Thus 1 90 from the root to please (IV 75 ) 2 WRITTI a pond from all to make e sound ind cating any disensc (I 651). 3 ETTO the mango tree from tho root v to suffer (1 905) ४२३ । दीको मुट् च । ३ । १४० । Tyrettango 123 llc affix 157 comes after the root o'to perish, dio' (IV 20), as well as the augment 110 Thus +4+ met a go!. len coin g४ । सतरप पुक्ष । ३ । १४१ । C 422 ODOWY 121 The allis 91 comes after the root 'to mord' (III 17) as well as tho augiment 141, ·PADI III 14554281 TIE UWADI AFFIXES 255 Thus y+पुक+पा-एर्षप. mustard seed ४२५ । उपिकुटिदलिकपिजिभ्या कपन् । ३ । १४२ । जयपी परिपूर्पयो । फुटपो मानभाया । दसपः प्रारणम् । सरपं शाकपत्र । समपं पतन । 425 The affix per comes after the roots eg 'to burn' (T 7270 •to be crooked (VI 73), दल 'to burst open, split, oloan, crack (I 581) कम् 'to bind (I 181) पञ् 'to churn agitate (I 250) 142 Thus उप्+कप - उपप: fire the sun कुटप: a measure of grain , दसप: a weapon कच a vessel for vegetables साप clarified butter :- ४२६ । को सप्रसारण च ।३ । १४३ । कुपपद। 4.26 The affix** (kapan) comes after the root to sound, jingle, tinkle' (I 477), and the semi vowel is vocalised to su 143 Thus P+v9-9 . dead body' ४२७ । कपश्चानधर्मणस्य । ३ । १४४ । रघर 427 According to Chakravarmana, the affıx ** should be used instead of kapan which thereby places the accent on the firat syllable of the affix itself 144 Thus क्वण + कप-कुर पर। 'The accent is on the irst e of the afix ४२० । विटपपिष्टपधिशिपोलपा ।३ । १४५ । पत्थरोभी कप प्रत्ययान्ताः । बिट पदे । 'विष्पा । भियतेरादेः पः । प्रत्ययस्य युट् । पापम् । पिष्टप पुनस् । बिमले। मत्यमादेरिरमर । विपि मन्दिर । परत: मप्रसारणम् । सलप कोम पर। 428 The words पिटपा 'a branoh of a tree, पिष्टप: 'a division of the universo, faford'a temple , and 44: 'a creeping plant aro irreglarly formed the affix पर to the roots पिष्ट 'to sound (I 338), विग् 'to enter (VI 130), and a to go, hasten (I 620) 145 rhus विद+सपा-टिप: a branch a bush a thicket पिए+कपन् The of the root for 10 changed to 4 and there is the augment and the Į 18 also changed to u hence दिए +कपर-पिम् ++कपा-पिष्टप: a universe a world ci fare per In forming fafor the augment re comes before the affix *** Thug fro+T+T-fafies a temple an abode a palace Thug + FRITT a creeping plant soft grass, a shrub atta - These are formed by adding The word sod is formed by the roots undergoing Samprasarana Hote-The word पिटप is so derived frout /विध acoording to Ujjvala But others tend the sütma differently, instead of free they read ·250 TUIE HIDDITA VTA KIUAUDI (Pada IIT 156 $ 420 + This stins inoro approprinto as frga 13 a well known worl, as पत्रपध्मस्य विष्ट । A R II IG ४२६ । वृतेस्तिकन् । ३ । १४६ । चर्तिका। 429 1 ho allix fay como after the root ne, to be, to exist, subsist' (I 795) 116 rhus get fartafa' a quail, a print brusb' ४३२ । कृतिभिदिलतिभ्य कित् । ३ । १४७ । pferat i faferani firfers i enfrent un 430 Tho alix fare comes after tho rools 'to cut' (VI 111), fits to penetrate' (VIL 2), ** (a sautra root) and 13 troated as fara 147 Thas wa+fany for the third of the 27 lapar mangiong or asterisms consisting of 6 stars, the Pleiades, fafara' a wall partition & small house lizard' for a kind of lizard'. ४३१ । इप्यशिभ्या तकन् । ३ । १४८ । WATI VAT 431 The affix any comes after the roots to desire for' (VI. 59), and we'to perride (V 18) 118, Thus पप् +कामाष्टका a brick . wat 'a collection of three days begioning with the 7th day after the full moon the 8th day of three months on which the mines are to be propitiated Note --Satra VII 3 44 S 463 might bayo caused the insertion of an , but it is not so becauge Pånını bumself reads at as ek in VI 3 65 S. 1009 Others say that VII 3 44 S 463 19 anitya because had been nitya where was the necessity of reading a separate affir tikan ४३२ । इणस्तशन्तशसुनौ । ३ । १४ । Part NITU PUTII 432 The affixes art and not come aftor the root roto 149 Thus w+atti & Bráhman Similarly TTT nom formed by tasasun, the 18 lengthened to st in TT by VI 4 14 S 425 The dial 19 pagst pl ATE: 1 This word means a dappled horse also The adjective te means of a variegated color ४३३ । वीपतिभ्या तमन् । ३ । १५० । यो गत्यादी । तनम् । पत्तनम् । 433 'The affix any comes after the roots at 'to go, to perrade' (II 39), and to fall (I 898) 150 Thus +7ste 'pay, bire, wages, vine'a town, city a musical instrument Sco A II 2 1 go' (II 37) 9 Tout ·257 PADI. III. 15734401 THE UNADI arriIES, - 484 ४३४ । दृर्दालभ्यां भः । ३ । १५१ । पदमा स्थापितक्रयोः'। The aflix w comes after the roots drt (IX. 23) 'to respect, tear honor, worship' and दल 'to burst open' (I. 581). 1bi. Thus t+Hदी kusa grass used at sacrificial ceremonies', दरभा । wheel, the name of a sager .४३५ । अर्तिगभ्यां भन् । ३ । १५२ । * 435 The illis in comes after the roots s 'to go' (I. 983) and or to sotund:(IX. 28). 162. Thuafuta mira child, from it we get what also with the affix कर. ग. the momb, the belly, conception &c ४३६ प्रणः फित् । ३ । १५३ । भा 490 The affix ww comes after the rootry to go' (II 30) and is treated as for 153. Thus r+भन्दमा 'an olephant. See Amarakosd II 8 35 ४३७ । असिसश्विभ्यां क्थिन् । ३.। १५४ । अस्थि । सक्थि। •437. The affix गिन comes after the roots अस् 'to throw (IV. 100) and सन् 'to stick to, to adhere' (I I036). 161. 'Thus अस्+यिशस्थि' a bone पथि the thigh'. ४३८ । पषुपिकुपिशुपिभ्यः फिस । ३ । १५५ । मुभिर्वहिः । कृषिः । शुक्षितः । 438. The affix of comes after the roots free to burn to draw out' (IX.46 and | to become dry' (r 74) 166. Thus alt fogfer fre' thelburning of a house, oil, fe: the beli the womb, a cavern, the sheath. vísi'wind' Inght, lustre. ४३९ । प्रशनित् । ३ । १५६ । . (I 786), कुष् । अधि। 489. The affix hsi comes after the root sy 'to pervade (V.18) and it is treated as निद. 166. Thus ufq=ufe'the eye'. ४४० । इपेः क्सुः । ३ । १५७ । 33 ।

·258 TEE BIDDBANTA KAUNODI (PADA III. 158 $ 441 440. The affis comos after the root re'to desire for (VI. 50) 107. Thus +95ergo Pangarcano' Ses Amarakosa II 4. 163 ; ४४९ । मषितस्तृतन्त्रिभ्य १३ । १५८ । alla teret i atto a tutti i motitartean, 411. The affis comes aftor the roots w' to protoot' (I. 031), 'to cross opur (I 1018), ito, corer' (IX, 14) and yux' to rulo' (X 180, 158. Thus togato a woman wo has monstarated'. ' a boat', o'smoko', sot the string of a Pluto &o ४४२ । यापोः किद् द्वे च । ३ । १५८ । पपीरला । 'पपी. पापोभसूर्य पो।। 412. The alfix t comes after the roots to go, obtain (II. 40) and or 'to drink (I. 972), and is treated as far and there ia reduplioation of the roots 189. Thus 7+-49+ford'a horse', the gun, is presented by the afir being regarded as किद. So also to the son and the moon'. ४४३ । लक्षेमुंद च । ३ । १६० । । *47.1 regofry gitas Tree 449 The a mix comes after the root or 'to mark" (X.0), and there is the augment FE and the sign for 18 elided 160 Thus +JE+teauft 'the goddess of prosperity CHAPTER IV. ४४४ । वातप्रनीः ।४।। पासपद उपपदे भाषातोरीमाथवरकिट बातममी।।बीपी। 441. The afix t comes after the root 47' to measure, to limit' (II. 63) proceded by the word ma (wind) and is treated as fara 1. 1 hus 678 +--++-trauefto (an antolɔpe, literally that which is as Aloed as the vind) This word is both of the masculine and feminine gender Note: Since the affis is fus. the loog of it la elided by VI 4. 140 S. 204 See A, K II. 8. 7.

·230 m IV 284451 TIL UNADI IFT1275 . । Acoording to Amárs all animals having 1990, or four or six feet and all ruptin aro of both genders Subhâtı, Chandra Lice bare also taken att as of both genders. ४४५ । ऋतन्यजिवापापमिद्यत्यनिशिभ्यः कविग्यतुमलि- जिष्णुजिष्ठगिसम्स्यनिपिनु स्पसासानुकः । ४।२। छापा मारा। पत। बहिण्यच् । 'राष्टिा रो राि भोलि प्रताति। मोतिय हुन् । हामी राशि भनिन् । शातित । अमेरित निष्ठ। राषिरात्र रिह मिष्टो भाग अवतरिम । अपिमोनांमद । नापन् । पररया । प्रतरि- पिए । प्रतिषिः । पक्षिा। पालिकाकोरमा कामः । रपे करमर । पोखरामा । पायो दुराना । मेरो । कृपामुः। 416 The trelre affixes भनिन्, पतुन, शशि, पुन्, , , ***, xfax, efe,'e (or saccording to some), are and so come rospectively after the trelro roots R to go' (I. 093), पर, 'to spread' (VIII. 1), 4x to decorate, to go' (VII. 21), पम् 'to beg' (VIII. 8), ** to go' (VII. 21), safi causatire of Wri to go', म 'to be pleasod' (IV• 00), पर 'to go (I. 38), w togo' (1 155), to sound' (II. 33), s'to join' (II. 23), and y'to becomo lean or thin' (IV. 117). 2 1. Thus far-fwe'the closed fist', the elbow, the distance from th: elbow to the end of the closed fist, a cubit wcfue a cabit of the middle loogth, from tho -elbow to the tip of tho littlo &inger, an ell. It 29 formed from rator with the negatire particle. Tho vowel 19 changed to by bandhu (VI. 1.77. S. 47) br.fore the 7 of afvre So we get ratai In.. Dasapadi cho allir is atnich without vond 80 it causes guna, and then the regular form is aratni 2 दन्+पार-तापनुः wind, night', a cloud, a thund. : erbolt s. साति-माहि tho joined palms'. 4 पर+धुन-धनg : part of the ontrails of an ainmal offered in sacrifice; tbs rectam'. uretransfoue, 'the sun'; according to come, thetallis may comes after tho root so, so thoy evolve the form ofiary: the sun'. 6. *** E- the heart, flesh in the heart'. 7. पद स्व-मस्या 'aish'; namo of a country'. 8 पद+रपिम्-विपि 'agrest, it a traveller: nams of a son of Kuba and Kunudaratt and grand son of Ramone 7945 प्रति a finger'. 10. Tus or orat an armour, a prickly', Hhrus. 11."s+शान-पास a kind of Khadira. 12. [+पानुन-कृयाना Hire'. Note-Tho ford tangata has been explained by niko thandered, in the mantra werfergast for a real grey, and by its or clood in the mantra quor fewertige; and by soft or thunder bolt in the meantra sa fa **** For xfx7 tha mantra staffer The word of is derived from 5 . 3 ·. 260 TIE SIDDIANTA KAUNUPI. *{PADA 1V. 3 $ 446 the causative of we; the gr is added by V11.3. 88 S. 2570 and tho causativo sign is elided by VI. 4. 51, S. 2318. ४४६ । श्रः करन् । ४।३। उत्तरसूत्रे किग्रहणादि काकरस्य यत् । शर्मत। 446. The affix karan (kara) comes after the root 'to injuro' (IX. 18). 8. In the next søtra, the afar is treated as fax therefore we conclada that it is not so in the pressat ona, 80 tha e of ths afix is not indicators and is not elided, and the guņa operation in not prevented. Thug 1+ ***w sugar: candied sugar,a pebble, grarel, amal/ stone, a fragment, any bard particle. ४४७ । पुपः कित् ।४।४। पुष्करघा 447. The affix * comes after the root 37 to nourisha (I. 732) and is treated as fontes4. Thus yn *** gnty'a pond's bloo Jota,, the tip of an elophant's topguc, the skin of a drumu, tho blado of a word, the sheath of a smord, an arrow, air, sky, atmospbaro, a caça, intor, intoxication, the art of dancing, war, battle, union, a place of pilgrimage in Ajmere, the bowl of a spoon, a part, portion; a kind of sorprnt, a kind of drum, tho Bulan cpithet of Krishna, of Shiva &c. ४४८ । कलश्च ।४।५। W! 418, The alix ay also comes after the root "to nourish (1. 732). 5. Thu 77***-roay much, copias, full, completo, rich, macmaci rnt, mull; cxcillent, , non!, nons, loul, thonint.n kini of drain: nn goithre of Shiva, of mount llru; a particular plaukinn of capecily, ale to bo ostan! of four morils of (vol. Yeni toffa: 1816 Textil Ilim allir ffe corner after the root my to go (1.1041) TI. 14 way to TomsToTiamson who inundo $%. The Pooram ***If that of lidt Irisr. v III. 3.. S 3171. Thu naff oferint 14 teler to this ut. X ft iyi ·961 THX UNADI AFFIXES PADA IV 12 6 455) 450 The affix kfw comes after tho 1000 mg (to yo) when piccoded by the proposition we ind is treated aq fort (whoro by thn penultimato vote of the root is lengthenod) 7 Thus पा++नि-प्राणानि 2 प्रामामी 'coming future Tqvufu • ४५१ । भुवश्च ।४।८। atott 451 Tho nffix for comes after the root s' to be' (I 1) and 18 treated as for 8 "Yhus vt fumfov Dg 17 future'-scafe 3 ४५२ 1 में स्य ।४।। प्ररथायी। 452 Tho affix pfa come, after the root fat (1 075) 'to stand preceded by the proposition : 9 Since the affix 19 treated as fury and as the root stem ends in wt tho augment * (?) 19 ordained by VII 3 33 S 2701 Thug #+1+tfr - SEAT+*+ FASTT departing going * ४५३ । परमे किस् । ४ । १० । VANTI 153 The umrix Tit comes after the root for to stand 10 (I 076) preceded by the word om and is treated as fina Thus परमे+मा+मि-परमेष्ठिन n पामेष्ठी An epithet of Siva &a Noto -Tae affix being regarded as fm, caus s the elusion of the wt of the root tot by VI 4 64 S 237 By VI 39 S 966 the locative ending of To 18 dot elided as 18 19 & name See A K I. 1 16 ४५४ । भन्थ ।४। १९ । मम्मतरिभिः किरस्यात् । किरवानकारत्तोपः भाया । मामानी। मम्मानः। 45% The affir yfw comes after the 100 Ft 'to churn (I 43) and is treated as fara which thereby causes the eligion of of the root 11 Thas + fx72+ fosfaa churning stich Its Nom formg Bre tutti protut Rret: by VII I 86 and 87 S 366 and 367 ४५५ । पतस्य च ।४। १२ । Tai ronta 455 The offis in comes after re to go (I 898), and the final of replaced by i 12 ·262 THE SIDDHANTI RAUHUDI. (PADE. IV 13 9 486 Thus *** firma + stametfi n. 8. Treti, Tan&o. Sea VII. 1.88 and 87 S 866 and 867., Note : --The word w is another word baving the same meaning. It is formed by sy affix of Pachad: as we find in Sabhdoi Ohandra rri qet From te with for of Matup-gange, we get Indra lit. lord of heaven or thunderbolt. The nom sºis (the long -7 is by VII. 1.86 S. 865, and is changed to by VII. 1. 86. S. 366) dual wart, pl. FUTTI I This is according to Ujjvaladatta i meading heaven and thunderbolt, is derived by adding the affix x do the root fr do dwell (VII. 114) preceded by the thus morat &278 gofret safety that in which the Devas (ribhus) dwell or decay, namely heaven or thunderbolt. Bat tho Dasapadt derives the word ribbukshin from the root to gº, with the afix gfe. The autre given there is wingfert This sutra is quoted in the Veda Bhashya on suuremad) (Rig Veda I, 112, 4), l'ho diff rence in these two etymologies consists in this. The first (formed with wfor affix) is fipal acuto: for the rof ra gets accept of the sfis (III. 1. 8. 9.3708). In the other case, the accent 18 anomalous ४५६ । खजेरामः ४।।१३। खनाक पची। 456. The affix * comes after the root, r' to churn, agitate'(I. 200). 18. Thus tut'a bird, a churning stick'. Note :-Swami Dayananda Sarasvati saya that the word met 'n current, stream) from the root op (to move slowly) can be evolved under the present sätra by the force of g (diversely) which governs the Unadi Otras. ४५७ । बलाकादयश्च ।४। १४ । ut I 7 1 TURKTI 407. The worábba Musa &o ara irregular. 14 The words catent '& crade, a mistress,' Tetuta pencil or stall atick used in painting the eyes with collyriam' and that'a banner,' are irregularly formed by adding the affiz im to the respective roots to to breathe, to live' (I. 893), ' to shake, stir, agitato ' (I 896) and to 'to go' (I. 898). Nole:-SyAmi Day&panda Sarasvat!, andor the present adtre places also the following words :-- 181 (a femalo elepbant) from the root (to know); VII (A barricade) from the root 5 (to oleanse); 95747 (a bird) from the root re to go or more).

·(8 TADA IT. 18 $ 481) THE CRADI ISTIT ४ । पिकासापाला ४.१५ । word for me ishrg'ot7 femrat maitse muit' EII 408. The words piadka do. are also irregular. 13. The words ferrei (tha trident or the bow of Sírs) and * (* pard) aro irrogularly formed by adsling the athis * tn tba ropotina tosis of 'to protoo!' (II 47) tha ar of which it replaced by fand which receives the aogmeat raiso; and ot' to beat (S. 43). Sco Amarakond III. 3. 14, for the rors) TTT matt Nola :-Undor tho present satra, Stami Dayananda Sarastail places tho following words also:- (o pood) from tho roos me (ta bret): PWI (prosperity good fortano) from tho root 1 (to bo glad) ' tW (a kind of grain or coro) from the roost! (to go, moro), matatu (tho cloudy 6ły) from tho roo$ T (to sbia) with the negativa particle 4. for (oil cako) from tho 700) fare (to grind), tha e of which is changed to *** thero is the augment of t amatai oranla (ngs-plan!) from the root (to exint), bo of which is rriddhird. Te (tha betel not tre) from the roos I (to souod indus:inc:ly), the gapalion being protented by the in the nf. ४५ पिपूपिम्पानीकन् । ४ । १६ । the thenifer 'rfem kontine's 480. Thcaftix tare comes after the rootout to injurc (1.710). und to commit a mistako'(IV. TOL 10 Thu, "+tuma kind of a burd'; VI. 4 00 S. 260$ In the 0446 of the soos sw, tha ofiss is added to the cansatste bømm. Thus + fattom+for+tre (VI. 4. 90. S. 2C0$)-frut (the fuss elded by VI. 481.8 2812). It means the mucus discharge of the eyes Sa. A. K 11.0.67. ४. मनिापिम्पो किन। 181791 timi $60. Tbonfix to comes after the roots to breathe (II 01) and m'to bo glad (IT. 110) and is trentains fot. 17. Thas + top-ray '10 army.png'an organ of wense'. HITU: ATITI NISI WTTTT Wazoivotti TUTTI 'freut into sfer. राषि 401. Tho affix to comes after the root o'to sound' (I. 976) then it is conjugated in the pros intensire, which is replaced by r. 15. 1 - ·264 TAI SIDDHANTI TIUVODI (rib. IV 19 g 462 Thus ********#******(VI 1 0 9 2395) +tar (VII 4 62 S 2245)=+*+*v + IKT(VII 4 85 S 2643) - घर का+ईक- कान-कासीका a small bell or ttukling ornament ४६२ । अपवृक्षा तक चाम्पासस । ४ । १८ । भरीको हिसः। परीको विवाह रोका टिप्लोमा। 462 The affır y comes after tho roots 'to 10jura' (IX 18), 'to maintain' (IX 19), and *to choose' (V 8) Tho reduplication of the roots tahes place, and the augment 19 added to the reduplicato 19 Thus I+TI+OF+(VII 41 86 s 2244 and 1151 S 70)=#++*+ **P(VIL 4 60 S 2179) A* ' & rogae, a mischievous man,' em' the sun', dan 'curly hair , ४६३ । फर्फरीकादयश्च । ४ । २० । 'पुर स्फुरले । चस्मादीक्षामा परादेया । परीक किएलपप ईरी पारिसर । **er våte fafractit CTII Varighet Tirtant torna i want a fost i podigare* TERTIB Quitorista Ferrara 403 The words cha do are irregularly formed by the addition of tbe aflix tm 20 raus we add the affir tæt to the root ng 'to throb palpitate" (VI 95) which is replac d by C 95+ ****** Tampa young shoot or branch Nole –In the above mentioned manger, Dypvaladatta evolves the form फरीकर. But Tattsa Bodhin says that in fact it is derived by the operation of the previous 80tra 1 e the reduplication and the substitution of for of the root, elision of u and tha augment ** take place and thus wir is formerl Bcause in the the gana s@tra visa wh ch 19 mcluded in this class we read the anuyritti of rec so that anurrittz phould be read into this būtra also Similarly van a musical instrument from the root or to hurt to kill (IX 23), and make the body, from the rooD to grow old' (IX 24) are formed by the addition from the affix tee The vord fify. (the Tamarind tree) is formed from the root fay'to make wet (IV 16) by adding the augment on to the reduplicate and changing a to x and affixing कर Gan i sutra The augment is added to the r'duplication of otu The word rare ( bạetle) is form d from the root wc to walk (I 691), to the reduplicate of ybich is added ths augment 5 when the affi. t* follo19 The i of the preceding ahtra 1 ooderstood here also Ivatead of adding ths agement te to the reduplicate se 18 added the case of a ·8 265 PADA IV. 23 & 466 ) TIE Ovadt irrints 'and करीका The words ' a poor man A pauper, a wicked man 'a water jar with hole in the bottom from which the water drops upon the object of worship are derived from the redoplication of the roots q' to dio' (VI 110) and to do' (VIII 10) respectively and adding the augment and the aflis Thr word gran1 (a lotus a musıcıl instrument) is formed from you to be prous (VI 43) the letter 3 19 added to w and then the augment and the afix **t come after it Tbus 97+=+5+5+5=94 an tiger fire one of the eight elephants that guard and preside over th eight cardinal points 1 € the elephant of the S E direction Tho other meanings of this word are, a lotus flower a white parasol a kind of : rpent a species of rice a kind of leprosy a kind of mango tree & pitcher A mark on the forehead a medicine drug Note-the palm of the band with the fingers extended n young shoot or branch softnegg for a shoa : a frog a cloud a hind of musical instrument * a musical instrument 11 general ***t the body a region country a picture fatat a kind of bull But faiparát: means the tamarind tree & sour sauce watch a large black bce ४.४ । ईपे फिद्धस्यश्च । ४ । २१ । रबीकर पताका। 461 Thc affix tn comes after the root to'to go (I 612), 18 treated as far and the long of the 100t is shortened 21 Thus t + fry=1419 reed rusb stalk of grasg 10 arrow a sort of sugar cane prole a parater s brush The fa prevents guna fact that the short T 19 ordained to replace the lo g of the rost vould have prevented guna The making of the affia a fra is undecessary here though it is necessary for the subsequent sätras ४६५ । ऋजेश्च । ४ । २२ । भूजीक उपाता। 465 The affix tit comes afte the root Tw' to go' (I 189), and is tieated as fra 22 Thus +शिशुभीक: pollated smoke name of Indra name of a mountain ४८६ । रातर्नम्च । ४ । २३ । सपीका साला। 466 Ihe augment and the affis tat come after tho root o'to go I 992) and the affix is treated 18 fra 23 Thus +31+*et saliva See Amarakosa II 6 67 The very ·266 THE SPDUANTA KAUJIUDI [PADA IV 245 467. ४६७ । मृड कीफच्कङ्कणी । ४ । २४ । varat i ro i fwy: 1 467 The affixes tar and we come after tho root "T '10 be gracious do (VI 38) and are treated as far 21 Thus ettirati name of Siva a fish deer , Er+TgE346 ' a child. Uljvaladatta roads the affix as stati But it 18 wrong The word * is end acute owing to fac accent As in the verse सुजीके घस्य Jidt for the accent is facin ४६८ । अलीफादयश्च । ४ । २५ । कीकता मिपास्यन्ते । 'अल भूपणादो । सलीक मिथ्या। यिविपक्षीय विमिप खेदछ । 'बसीक पटलमा इत्यादि। 468 The words with (false) do are irregularly formed Twith the affix फोकच् । 25 Thug 'to adorn (I 548)+* Tewly the word in (unpleas antness) is formed from the root ve proceded by the preposition for and adding the affix *T The word with the edge of a thatched roof' 18 91milarly formed from the root vrt to go (I 520) So also other forms Note - The word reftas (An ant bill) is formed from the root or with the additions of the augment se and the aflix toy The word 47815: (the cow, the horse) is formed from the root (to carry) the vowel of which is vriddhied before the affix tn7 The word grat*: (an epithet of Kamadeva of Siva of the elephant of the north east quartur) is formed from the root TT (to go) preceded by ya, and the root y takes be augment r Thus *++*++ +*+-tuatatu The word at: (the name of a Rishi) is formed from the rood (to restrain) by adding the affix ४६८ । कृतृभ्यामीपन् । ४ । २६ । करीयोऽत्री गोमये। तरीपस्तरिता । 469 The aflis comes after tho roots 'to soatter (VI 116) and 'to cross oper' (I 1018) 26 Tous + tqv=*' dry cos dung: So also afas 'a boat'. ४७० । शपभ्या फिच्च । ४ । २७ । पिरीप ।पुरीयम् । 470 The alix tot comes after the roots 'to injure' (IX 18) and to nourish' (IX 19) and is treated as foi 27. Thas the fasts: (a lind of a tree), the of the root ? is changed to og by vil. 1 100 S 2890 read with I 1 11. S 70 So also yoiat'fæces', .

·PADA IV. 30 $ 47.3.] TEE UNADI AFFIXE. 207 The 3 changed to 35 by VII 1. 102 S. 2194, rend with I. 1. 51. S. 70. Sec Amarakotá II 6. 68 899wizyta 18751 "जीप पिष्टपचमम्'। 171. The aflix fit is fore wlion it comes aft'r the route "to procure' (I. 212) soluvch is replicor by 27. 28. Tous +=+*+1=1519'a frying pin' Note :-It also means tho i esidur of Somn. Sze gloss on the Bantras मनीषिणं अषणसवत थिये, पणत्यो पातु भवाम् अजीपी &o. Seu Amarakoss for the VOTSU sta favor (A K II 4. 32). ४७२ । अम्बरीपः।४।२९ । अयं निपात्यते। अधि पदे । 'पमरीया पुमानाष्टक' । समरस्त 'झोपडम्बरीप पाटोमा' । 172. The word verta: is irregularly formed. 29. It is from the root 'to sound' (I. 403) by adding the affix for The author of the comment on the Uņidi satras says whon ased in the masculine the word nie, means 'a frying pan'. The author of the Ainarakoss says that the word and when used in the neuter gender means a frying pan. See Amaralose IL. 9. 30. Note: --The masculine form wire: is given by the author of the Uņadi satras only; but in Sanskrit lexicons, the word is exhibited in the pluter gender. It means also regreb, remorse, yrs, battlo, one of the bells, a young animal, colt, the sun, the hog plum plant, name of Vishạn, natac of Sive, Dame of a king of the solar raco who was celebrated as & Worshipper of Vishņu. ४७३ । फशपकटिपटिशौटिभ्य ईरन् । ४ । ३० । करीरो वंशारा । परीरम् । पोरं फलम् । कदीर कादरोजघनमदेवश्च । पटीपपरा **T6: FITXI Metrecutfrancis'i funfurleton 473 The affix to comes after the roots to scatter (VI. 116), 'to injure' (IX. 18), 'to fill'(IX. 10), se to rain, to cover (I. 315), and to go (I. 312, E 'to speak'(X. 212), and ute to be proud or haughty', (I. 3101. 30. Thus it fq=&fct' the shoot of n bamboo', TAC 'the body'; 10 a fruit'; tc: '& cave, thbip'; tett: 'sandal wood, the God of love, that in the capid', utert: 'An ascetic, a hero'. As in the Gina paths, the word het is ed Umerated in the wife class, it takes the sfix tay also by V. 1. 124 S. 1788 Thus ititsa (pride, arrogance. &c) By the force of a (diversely) which governs the Uņ&di satras, the words fretta (a man) from the root fe'a wonder '(I. 287) fs AFC (ths variegated color, the orange tree) from the root xu (to walk, to step), fit: (the citron tree) from the root ** (to eat), ao (a quixe) from ·PIDAIV 403493.] THE UNADI ITTIXIE 269 479 The words visha and vihd ars irregular. • 36. The affix it comes after the roots st' to bring to an end' (IV. 39), , and or to abandon (III. 8) when preceded by the preposition for and thus theso words are formed. Thus fatit-w7=faat (intellect), fattot=fazt (heaveu). • Thase two words are Avyayay (or Indeclinables) ४८० । पच एलिमच । ४ । ३७ । पवेलिमो पहिरप्यो। 480. The affix पलिमच comes after the root 'to cook'(I. 1015). 37. Thus पच्+ एलिम पलिमा 'fire or the sun'. Tho force of the aix is to denote the agent. A similar affix is found among the krityas (afant), but with Pasgive force. Seu veurka under III. 1. 96. S. 2834. ४८१ । शीडो धुक्लक्वराज्यालनः । ४ । ३८ । चस्यारमत्ययाः स्युः। शिधु मनम् । शील स्वभावः । शैयला येवालम् । बाहुलकावस्य पो अपि । 'धेपाल तोमखी पालो जलनीलिका'। 181. The four affives धुक ला, पलम् and वालम् come after the root शी ' to sleep' (II. 22) 38. Thng st+y=sty 'on alcoholic liquor', lit. which sends one to sleep', गी+लम् = शीलम् 'conduct' , lit. the innate tendency , the latent tendency, the germs of which sleep in the nature. 11-1 =: 'the green moss like substance growing on the surface of water, a kind of plant', शी+पालन्-शेवालम् (the same as येषल). By the force of ago (diversely) which govern, the Unadı satray, the घof यल is optionally changed to प Thng turet or : as in the Sabdarnava"वाल यशो मसी पाली जलनीलिका'। ४८२ । मृकणिभ्यामूकोफणी । ४ । ३८ । महको मृगः । काणू फः काकः । 492. The alliges Fran) *** come resprotirely after ile roots to die' (VI. 110 and कण ' to sound' (I. 476) 39. Thus F+ऊस 'a quadruped, a peacock;' ण + ऊ गण == सापक . " crow. ४.३ । पलेरुकः।४।४। यलूका पक्षी उत्पलमूल च । 483 The alia xk comes after the rooot to go, hasten (T 520). 40. Thus ar+**=*i'a kind of bird, the root of lotus'.

·270 TIL SIDDIAATA KALNUDI. (radi IV 41 344 ४८४ । उकादयश्च । ४। ४९ । मले। प्रशारण । 'उलमाट्रिपरको । पाराकोरमारभरतकायोगी wyfimi 194 1hc Fords उसका do aro irregularly formed by adılmaz tho affis ** 11 Thus sys1 Indra the 01l 1: formed by adding the aflis m* to the rent (1 520) wh ch und rgoes Samprasarana It is to name of a county and its hing who was an ally of the Kurus (a spxater) is derired by adding the afic * totho nasamy (to aprak) after its boring undergono reduplication in EU In cas ro basc Thus बह+व पद पाणा An Orator So Amarako III I 83 (a bear) from n'to wound (I 525) plas ** Ginamit Tho nugment Tuis adidtory before the AT*** Thus makin bell) from * to control (IV 02) and all ng th> mugment and the nitr ** It incanga Birairo shell A conch sh !, a #rail to edge of tho in nisl pro aberspca of an elephao niesora Sara #lo peor med per noch dop Dg the fun of rm fuirrrsoly) and foreras i Crld? sating a word as '« res, S. are derirei unler ! pres nt tuli **INI a juckal a fowling the rosa rilete *11 robot m! Vasure lo trda, ve kind of perfusso AVma) barmor plant ·271 PADA IV 18 $ 491 ) TAR UN ADI UTFIXES . Kg I 7181881 wie 187. The aflix fu comes after the root 'to go' (I 953), and tho is roplaced by 41 Thug + =*&+fQ=8før a wave, bellow'. Instead of try with long the short s might have been used as yve and then this would have boet lengthened by VIII 2.77 S 351 The word ürmi mords also current, flory, light speed, relocity, a fold or plait in a garment, a row, line, a human infirmity, distress, the course of a borse, missing regretting, Association &c. ४८८ । भुषः किस् । ४ । ४५ । भूमिः। 488 The nflix for comes after the root » (to be) and is treated as forces 45 Thus x+freyf**' the earth' lit on which cr-atures co do into bring ४८९ । प्रश्नोते रश्च । ४ । ४६ । ररिमा किरणो एजुध। 469. Tho afix for oomes after the root w' to perrade' (V 18) which is replaced by a 46 Thus we+face+fQ=ffens' the ray of light a string, cord, rope, a bridlo rulo, a goud, whip, an eye lash, 8 m-asuring cord a finger. ४९० । दल्मिः । ४।४७ । 'दश विपरये । दरिमरिष्द्रापुषन् । 190 'I he word dalmi is also forined by mi 47. The affi, fx comes after the root or to split (I 581) Thus पल् +मि परिमा Indra's thunderbolt yep istrutuft ut fit. 181851 पालकापणस्य । वेणि स्यात्यापिण्यास प्रवेखी च खियामुभे । यानिः । शलि।। 491 The aflix fr comes after the roots at 'to go to shine, to be beautiful' (II 39), wat 'to become old' (IX. 29) and 75 "to be hot with fever or passion' (I 81318 By the force of 5# (divergely) which governs all Unldı stres the # of the atix is changed to after the root #1 Thus + fredat 'braided harr'. See Amarakosá II. 6 98', verfti 'old age', fot 'speed, anger a disease of the female'. The of PET 13 changed into s by VI 4 20 S. 2654 Note –Under the present rule, by the force of To (diversely) which govern: all Unadı sdtras, Swâmi Day&pardda Sarasvati evulres such words ·. 272 THE BIDDRARTI KAUsubt (PADA IV 48 $ 402 as gifot 'the carth' from the root frit) dwell' and for buying, purchasing' from the root mt' to purchase'. Note -By the rule XT FITTE &c the feminine of these words 28 formed by to Thus tot braided bair, hair twisted into a single unornamented Lirard and allowed to fall on the bach, said to bo worn by voinen wiose husbands are absent from them, continuous flow, current stream, the confluence of two or more rivers, the confluence of the Ganges, the Yamuna and the Saraswati See Amarakosé 11 4 69, varfas old age, decay, quit. ting, abandoning, a river, stream, oppression, deprivation, loss. för swift, speedy, quick, running, praising, specd, an epithet of Aditya or sun, the body, the Brahm, anger, a fiery weapon. ४९२ । सृपिझ्या फित् । ४ । ४ । fati i 'fani gfxqat', 402 The affix fat comes after the roots ( to move' (I. 982) and एप 'to sprinkle' to moisten' (I, 738) and 19 treated as faran 19 Thug + farafa: 'a goad a hook to drive an elephant', grem a name of Yadava, an ancestor of Krishna, a cloud, a ram' Note — fa 18 masculine also when meaning a goad as used in Blagha WIT TURN for fuarga 1 According to Amarakogs it is feminine II 8.41 gfam means heretical heterodox, raining, m a cloud, a ram, a ray of light, name of an ancestor of Křishna, name of Kirshna, of Indra, of Agni, atr, wind, a heretic ४९३ । भङ्गेलोपश्च । ४ । ५० । wfgii 493 The aflix fr comes after the root of 'to go' (I 155) whereby the nasal is elided. 50 Thug w+f=wfat m.'fire, name of various plants ४९४ । यहिनिश्रु युद्रग्लाहात्वरिभ्यो नित् । ४ । ५१ । HIT: Ifus , alios marisen: 1. Fraufae 494 Tho alix fire comes after the roots of 'to carry (I 1053) far to help. (I 945), - 'to hear' (I 989, ! 'to join, to unite' II 23), 5' to go' (I 992), al' to be weary' (I 952), * to kill' (III 8), and the 'to buri, to 20.0 with speed' (I. 512) 51 Thug 45+fastfA 'fire', & linc, a roi, sifa: 'the hip the loins gift 'womb fari'an oval vesvel of wood used for holding or pouring out water , rufa' decay', ufu (loss), af speed, the mind, & Sloka, 1 + ·PADI. IV. 3*$ 4971 tin tiết phi 173 By the free of 757 (litert 1)) turk poterat tt-l]ns la sairas, the worilt **f* faling froin thr 193! 57 (la fatla) ani fría: none of A trarren belonging to the bilo of the Talarn from tha rostlog down ni cvolvel mur thorpeant AQ*r* ५५ । प्रिमिपाणिनिभूतिं । ४ । ५२ । Afrikortafsirom, 1 f2 Tid: tasty! IT FITTACI ITFETI wtf 77*** CVTECT #PITITII GT*T*** feañermeister 103 'lho worels ghrini, prisni, pirrhni, ciûrni and blûrni aro irrcgular. 02 Tho following live words 11: - fer(run ahın), zyra, a dwari, nifres' the heel', fet'n sum of n hundind consina', ufro the carth, a deemed! are irregnlarly formed by Ardeling the affix free to the reporting rools to spranklo (I. 085), kyg,to touch (VI 128) by clıdıngıls I, yutosprinkle (1.737) by vriddhi of 19, 5, 'to go' (1 601) bs substituting for its penaltımato vowel, and 'to nourishi, maintain' (III. 5) thg of which is replaced by er Nol.-In Rv I. CC. 1 the word fe's is explained ng galt napporter, nourisher, Xole Swamt Dayananda Saragento places tho vord of (rollipg. rorolning) from tha roos g (to sprinklo) in this lis.. ४६ । एदूम्यां पिन् । ४ । ५३ । 196 Thc affixfire comes nfter thc roof to scirct' (1.8) and to worslup, regard' (VI 118) 53 True 9+ Fang-afds' Toracious, des our r', do'n Inllo, apron' fons. Tat syith Cream Ic ४। जस्तनाग्रममा छिन् । ४ । ५४ । enfeti infoferii iarag'i ofrons : 197. 'Uw_fix_fire. Ifa), come after the roots o'te rol wil IX. 21), 'to injure' (IS 18) 7' to cover' (IN 11) and org tontalo froin slrep (IT 63) 51 Tar+fransities' an Bre, the bule n cart', it's daaractivo, n finge', wtfär'an officiating pui sint a cicrific', nefas a king. The Aflix being for the long is changed to fr - VII. 1. 100 S 2390 Th fr 19 noi eli led VI 1.67.S Jii noiwithstanding. ४ दियो ये दीपश्चाभ्यासस्य ।। ५५ । 7ffer frontalt 33 .

·174 TEE SIDDITIVA KAUNODI (PADA IV 55 $ 498 198 The afix Luin (ve) comes after the root fm'to sport, play' (IV 1) Tho root 18 reduplicated and the short forel of tho reduplicate is longthened 55 Thus ftatim far fra+ fan ficfe: 'the heaven, salsation. Nulc mitra shining risen (AS 1 stor), priui boiled rice heaven an -opithet of Agu, Brib ispatı final omancipation In Re I 18 दोदिधिष 13 cıplained by the manifestor Viva i granicaufarfarhinifera 1 Bry? कृषिस्तावमायद्रव्यम् । पृप्तिर्वरा । धास्थाई पत्यं च । पषिदीप्तिः। स्यपिरतवारा। दीपते। फिकीर्वाद विकोदिषिधापा । पादुपसाद स्वदीयोविनिमयः । पापेश किकिदी 499 Tho words krivi,ghrigly, chhavi, sthavı, ana hiktdıvı oro irregular 56 The words fa: (an instrument of weaving) pie ( boar) fas (light) rafa (a wenver) fait fait: (the bird known as chitale or blue jay) are irregularly formed with the affix sfars from tho respective roots to do (VIII 10) to sprinkle (I 740) to cut (IV 38) T to stand , (1 957) the vowel w of the last two roots 19 shortened to and for to play' (IV 1) preceded by the word fant By the force of r* (diversely) which governs all Unådı etras in front forest the short TB are some times changed to long ones and vice versa As in the line who farfeetfanti ५०० । पातेति । ४ । ५७ । afat 1 500 The affix fx comes after the root or to protect (II 17) whereby the final vowel of the root is elıded as the affis has an indicatory s 57 Thus 7+3faeufiri master, lord husband ५०१ । शकेन तिन् । ४।५८ । यकृत। 501 The affix fore comes after the root on to be able' (V 15) 58 Thus va+fie ordare, erore ment, especially of animale Saa A K II 6 67 ५२ । अमेरवि ।४। ५८ । for TETIT 502 Tuo alix als comes after the root w' to go' (1 493) 59 ·rana IV 04 $ 807.) TRL ONADI AYTIZOS 178 Thug ytsafarafas time, the moon'. ५२३ । पहिवरपरिभ्यश्चित् । ४ । ६० । atform 7781 l'achatratformati' i wtfai Aly: 1 503. The affix afit comes after the roots at 'to carry (I 1053), ag 'to direll', (I. 1051) 'to go' (III. 10), and is trated as fra 60. Thug set oftmarfăi 'wind'; qafas 'a house, night'; safa'anger'. ५०४ । सन्धेः को वा ।४।६९ । margfaatat1 501. Tue allix va comes after the root 'to go' (I. 203) thor of which is optionally changed to 01. Thus we + faowa: or Terar sind, firo'. ५५५ । हन्तेरंह च । ४ । ६२ । Farfai FutFTET srt i fra sframtur fation for re- 75 fai' 505. The affix «fer comcg after the root o'to kill' (II. 2) which is replaocd by s. 62. Thus +ufac7&+wfa f. svefat alms, charitics, a gift : lit. by which misfortunes are warded off. See Amarakost 11. 7. 30 for the lino प्रादेशन &c प्रादेगन, निर्वपर्ण, अपवर्जन are synonyms of ति: a gitt. ५०६ । रमेनित् । ४ । ६३ । fa Gratti 506 The affıx ww comes after the root to play, to rejoico at' (I 906) and is treated as for which thereby places the accent on the first syllable. 63 Thus tu+wastafar the God of love; time. .५०७ । सूखः क्रिः । ४ । ६४ । सूरिः। 507. The affis fsi oomes after the root (IV 26). 64. Thus + fixafe' & God, the bug, a learned or wisman, a sage: A priest, & worshipper, a title of respect given to Jaina teachers: name of to begot' , Krishna. In the Dasapidi the gâtra reals thug, 7Fog togt. There the of fox 19 not an anubandha or indicatory letter, bat is part of the affis. In this view, the resultant word 13 efra, declined os :-Nom. S , dd. ofruit, pl aftu: 1 Tie in fe is not indicatory, but 13 part of the aflix for too reasons. In the nest sútra tha aflix fare is taught, where the 15 indicators.

·276 TEE SIDDUANTA KAUMUDI [PADA IV 05 $ 508 Had the offre been indicatory, it would have been briefer to say it ht, and omit it from tha next satra, Secoudly T has not the accent of far, it is finally acute Ses Rv I 22. 20 तविभ्यो. परम पद राय परपन्ति 99 &c. + The commeatator on D291pådf his talen 1 as indicatory and gives the example as Tfal But it is wrong as the accont is not on the tuiste ५०८ । आदिशदिभूसुभिभ्यः सिन् । ४ । ६५ । af tifa Tufc norr I VITITI 508. The affix fit comes after tho roots to eat' (II 1), to perish'(I 908), y 'to be' and yw 'to siune' (1 159) 65. Thug ye+fingat'a mountain', uff candied eur, 411 tlaphant, lightning', u'fe plenty, abundance', 'fire an epith & of Braba Inan'. Note.fi m an epithet of Vishņu, of Brahui, of Siva, of Indra, n gold. ५०९ । बनयादयश्च । ४ । ६६ । निग्नता निपात्यम् । अफ्रिक्षभेदो युबराक पाव स्विप । यति बम् । 'अहिरनिय cor', afar tar ung: I aferait: I 15*177 Ft 509. The words vaikri dc. are irregularly foined with the affix FATE 06. Thus to be crooked (I 88)+fireman'a kind of musical'ınstrument, the timber of a roof, a rib of an animal.' Ito cow' (1.1052) + falafe: 'field'. , To the above two instances thn of the roots uz and or has not undergone Samprasarana, a to speak (X 255)+fmfirt & flot', y' to go' (1 109)+fafa (a foot) दद् (at is a सो प्रधानु + . not enomor sted in Dhatu patha but found in the sätras only) + fare unforto (sl sep) fum post with ate of sofremte &c (to fear) + fotofi (a drum) lere guna has taken placo by the force of a (direrea!s) though the afar is frei ५१० । राशदिभ्यां दिए । ४।६७ । far ft yest: 1 510. 'llo alix fay comes ofter tho roots a'to gire' (II AS) 07. and at 'to perish' (I. OOS) Thus tft firq-afso'mglt', AT+ farufu 'an elephant, a cloud naruo of Vishnu in the Vu la ish&shja on fames agride the word 15 explained as th: name of a Royal zago. ११ । देसिमिय।४।६८ । viipaloittavil afstamme ·THE OVADE ATTITES Pada IV 11 9 514 ) 277 611 Tho affixus fafir and far como after tlic root चह (to cat) 68 The+ fx frafer (a des ourer) Its Nominativo forins as , sufugit also it +frcu**(None of a celebrated sage) Its Nomiua tivu foring ari afst, wit, • Yole --Ujjvaladatta roads tho sútra as fat and 60 according to lum, tho affir 19 fan tho is indicatory llc gives the example as afi But this ts not right Lor the form of could have been evolved by the afıx fag of the preceding eQtra, whero vyas the necessity of teaching a Dev affix fay for the accent of a fat whether formed by trip or frin is the paino for a fura 18 unaccented (111 I 48 8709) and so the root retains its accent in the caso of faran Govardbags also reads tho båtra as Vyjraladatta but explnına at diffurently saying that the of brın 19 not indicatory but part of the allir Hc gives tho cramplo as Swt dual aferent pl wfaat But then the difficilty would b; as to nccent The word af*t has acut- or the final as 1a otrat sfat are and strofa ufway (Rv A 116 1) Wo have the authority of Kaiyata for reading the sQtra as my fafira Schaiyata s gloss on y ATFET (L !. 63 S 263) ५१२ । परोनिन् । ४।६। • vara: yuti 512 The allir stay comes after the root o' to go! (1 898) 69 Thns +sta-vafx: a bird Nole-There 19 another Word vafay ending in I It 19 deriv d fron **' wing with the caddhita affis vfu with the force of matup declined as eitt, safir aftur &c ५१३ । काति-पामीचि । ४ । २ । मरीचिताकपीचि परतबो निनादव। 513 Theaffix tf comes after the roots t 'to dic' (VI 110) and 'to sound' (I 476) 70 Thus 1+ tft fat the name of a Prajapati & ray of light mirage, fa: A sound a tre a creeper in flower fem a cart ५१४ । श्वयतेषित् । ४ । १ । वीषियोधि । 51 The alis ffe conies after the root into increase, to swell'(I 1039) and is treated us for which thereby places the accent on the last syllable 71 Thus for tifq=rtir' sickness, disease It is & miser ·278 TXE SIDDRAYTA TAUKODI (PADA IV 72 9 515 616 ५१५ । वेभो हिप । ४ । १२ । afTet 150mosferos! 516 Thonis ffe connes after the root Xito treace, to corer (I 1035) and 13 treated as for thereby the final vowel of the root is elided 72 Thus + freestras (wave, billow, pleasure, leisure). fh3 word of Tith a compound forms wafa: (nama of a particular hell) lit where th To 13 DO vibration nor pleas ire ५१६ । सहनिभ्यामृपन् । ४ । ३ । KOTTA I The lix Jst comes after the root 'to go '(III 16) and 'to l ill' (II 2) 73 Tbus +=W** the sud FT a Rakshagi a Demon ५१७ । पुर कुपन् ।४।७४ । पुर अप्रगमने । पुरुषः। सम्पामपि- (३५३९) इति दी: । पूरयः। 517 The aflix got comes after the root is to becomer head' (VL 56) 71 Thus 95+gvai a person no guna as the afix is fini By tho fatra VI 3 137 S 3339 the lengthening of the vowel of the root also takes place So gria male being man men mankind an officer the height or measure of a man the Supreme B ing the pup I of the eye th soul the Pinnaga tree the first third, Gifth seventh, onth and eleventh Bigos of the zod ac the seven divine priac ples of universe ५१८ । पूनहिलिभ्य उपन् । ४ । ७५ । पषम् । तदुपासुषम् । 518 The aflix cry comes after the roots to protect to fill (IX 19) to bind (IV 57), want to count, to sound' (1 526) Tang +पर-पर्यन् hard abus gross spotted variegated, iga: (name of a Ling of the lunar race) uyig'a o, foul angry cruel dark ille a buffalo filth Moc --T ac ent of 5 s 10 palous It is first acute on Mantra देवा प्रकृयत् मारस्य विरणम् । ५१९ । पीयेरुपन् । ४ । ७६ । पीर पति पौनो धातु । पीयूपम् । शासकाइले पीपूपोऽभिनय पया, 619 The allir ke comes after the root ita (wluch is a sautri dhátu) 76 Thas sha+Tatountetar ambrosia Sce AKI1 51 See gloss ·IDA IV. 80$ 323 ) 47 T1IL OXADI ATTILI 77. By the foren of in (livergely) which gogrine all Unlu -array, the Towel of this root is som times gunated and s3 wo get the form &7? (n c. tar, the milk of a cor that has calred within veu dıyo) SOAK II. 0 64 for thn tino Oggisfenol 11 -Swami Dayananda pincts the word agt (x hool, gond) andre this Otra, deriving it from the root (to count, to mark). ५२० । मस्जे । ४ । ७ । * 620 Tho'allit comes after the root onto lathe, to sink, to purify' (VI. 122), and there is thic augment at Thus 9+ **TERT Itho being elided ly th rartika via tela Tag under VIII 2 2J)+5+UT(n box , Maider) Note ---Tho y of many becomes w by på rule, thn the 57 19 changed to aby rule, thus the base is majj, which with rác gires palyje. A with two w's Or one is elided by VIII 4. 65 S 71. 4781 TÊTE 1 81951 गापा-गा। 821. lho affix it comes after the root ng 'to chcek, (I. 386), and there is thic augmentit 78 Thus गर+आपन-ग) or गपमा amouthful, handful of water • ५२२ । मर्तररुः । ४ । ३८ । 4 822 Tho allir + comes after the root 'to go' (111 10) 70 Thus ****-**i'an carmy'. Its Nominative formenre , w zt note --The affix 19 art ending with and not arus rnding with me Sayana however has taken this aflix as ar tus In exį laiding Trai in . I 18.3, he swys 80. IT: 18 dos howerer genitive of ararus, but of weft wu formed with truy and the negatite II It is from the root 7 to give with the Vardic Perfuc: Part cipial affis *T* This er being a Tatpurusha, hag acuta on the first by VI 2. 2. S 3736, because the first merbar retains its accept White bad this word been formed by the afix or (if there branch an Aflix), it could never brie acuto on the Grst syllable lo fact Sågana has hims If coplained them (tative) in this way, in hissglocs on mitra Tiitti ITX Blonorer there is & word ending in as in the mantras afrafety ni and artrit oft &c. See also Rv, I. 147 4 ५२३ । कुटः किए।४।८। VITATTTT fit fpirati ·280 TIENDHANTA KIUMUDI (PADA IV 80 5 523. 523 1hc allir ** comce after the root 'to currc, to bend' (VI 73) and is ticated as fara 80 Thus 5 +*: a tent, & cock Why the author says that the affix it after yg should be treated as fra 19 difficult to understand Bec&liso by I 21. S 2461 all affixes coming after the root sa nro treated as fru and thus do not cause tha guna substi tution of the vof 5 ५२४ । शफादिभ्योग्टन् । ४ । ८१ । Taetsfamiofafrundt i DETI HITG: ) 24t: fwent te truf 521 Thicaflix wit comes after the roots 7* (to go) &c 81 Thug **+ *C70If a carriage, *(to 50)+*=*:' military accoutrements fear 'to play(IV 1}+42Tzzat'an artist', 'to scat ter (VI 116) + 46T="! an elephants cheek'. Or from you to do (VIII 10) Note Onder the present stra Svamı Dayananda Sarnawatı places many such words Ad ETT mati, ti noci, TT pot watt &c Note --Some derive : from Sak to be able (V 15) fati i from desrı devado (I 529) ki mcana also safflower x crow, an athiest a degraded Brehmona a man of a low prof us on & m 1sical 10strument the first Sraddha ceremony portrmond in honor of a dead person et a cov difficult to be milked YFY I pafcafe#fe*UiTSFAT181571 *** Banforam fefe that I TRI PHI **WASANTE, EVT? बादिकर। 625 The nffi **** comes after the roots to do (VIII 10) and (these two are Liutri dhutus, not being enu 82 merated in Difupitha) ind eft to run to corer (1 315) Thus + s*r="T4 'uixed, sariegated : kind of tree', E: a kind the stem or stall of A pot herb ths end or point, of musical instru ncnt ५२६ । कदेत्पिक्षिणि । ४।३। 526 The affis sure comes after the root a(? Sutra dhatu) and is treated as fra slun meaning a kind of bird 83. Thus क + शम्मच - कादम्बा kind of gora The affix being treated as fra causes pidhi of the c d ronel of thu root by VII 2 1158 254 ५२७ । कलिकोरम ।४।४।

·PAPA IV. 88 8531] THE UNADI Arrixts. •281 . 527. The affir सन् comes after the roots कस्. ' to count (I. 526) anl कई to rumble as the bowels, to car as a crow' (I 60) 81. Thus +पम-सनमः 'apen,areed for writing with;rice which is sowa in Miny-June and ripens in December January', a thref, a rogur. फईमा "inud, mire'. ५२८ । कुणिपुल्पोः किन्दच । ४ । ८५ । 'कुण यादोपहरपायो' । फुषिदा यद।। पुलिन्दो जातिदिया। 525. The affır faaet comes after the roots iga 'to support, to converse or speak with (VI. 45), and पुन् 'to grow, to become tall' (I. 894). 8. Thus पुण+किन्दच्फुषिन्दा ' noise', पुलिन्दा 'name of a triba , s savage, abirbarian'. ५२८ । कुपेर्या वश्च । ४ । ८६ । कुपिन्दकुपिन्दी तन्नुवापे। 529. Theaffix फिद come after the root कुप् 'to be angry' (IV. 122) of which the ris optionally changed to a. 86. Taus फुर+किन्दप कुपिन्दा or फुषिन्दा (a Weaver). Note -By the force of बहुल (diversely) which governs all Unndi satras, the word wfetre (a terrace before a house-door, a place like the squaro nt the door) is derived from the root stel (to decorate) with the addition of the alix हिंद ५३०। नौ पल्लपिन् । ४।७। निषाषिरालिङ्गकः। 530. The affie ofert (athi) comes after the root ys brace, to fasten (I. 1036) preceded by the preposition नि. 87. Thus fa+257 + FrTefits (the # is changed to q by VIII. 3.65 S. 2270)+पयिन् -निपंम् (the last consonants being changed to ग by VII. 3. 52S. 2863 because the afix has an indicatory gh)+पिनिगपि: 'an embrace', a bow man, a charioteer, a car, grass, the shoulder. ५३१ । उद्यतैश्चित् । ४।८८ । उदरपिा समुद्रा 531. The aflix wiera (athi) comes after the root to go' (III. 16) preceded by the preposition उ and is treated as चित. 88. Thus उद++पयिन् उदरमि: the ocean'. ५३२ । सतेसिंच । ४ ।। सारथिः। 36 •toem- .

·THE IDDHANTA KAUMUDI. । . . 282 [PADA IV. 895532 532. The affix afz7 (athi) comes after the root 'to move togo' (III. 17) and is treated as चिद. 89. Thug yt197preferi 'the charioteer'. ५३३ । सर्जिपिज्जादिभ्य रोलचौ ।४।। प. । फरापल्लूर गुफासम् । पिङ्गल फुपतिः । सो दिर' (गर) साङ्गलम् । फुटलः । तमेथुपदिश्च (गणसं ।) । तामूलरू । गुणाते ग्वृद्धिव ( गपy ) । गाईका दुषो कुश्च। (गणसू।) दुकूलम् । कुलम् । 533. The affixes it and he come respectively after the roots पई &c. (to pain, to be uneasy), and पि (to killy do. 90. Thus of (I. 247)+कर-प'date palm'; कृ to be able (I. 799)+ करक. 'camphor'; पल्ल् 'to cover' (I. 521)+कर-घरल: dried flesh', पिन (X. 31)+लए =पिज्जूलम् (the leaf of the Kust grass), a to go, to go lame' (I. 154)+जलचूलालस (the tail of an animal), G.S. The vowel of labg takes vriddhi. फुए to embrace (IV. 109)+अलच् - कुमूला 'agranary; पर to be fatigued (IV. 93)+छल G.S. The augment युक् is added to the root' which is also sriddhied. Thus Mere 'the areca out, the pan leaf ' to hurt, to kill (IX. 18)+*99, GS The augmeat 5 19 added to the root which also gets wriddhi, thus forming माईल: a tiger, a wolr'; a demon, a bırd, an eminent person; s'to go' (I 991),+ serrands' to sound' (I. 999) +खलन G. S. Both /du and /ku receive the augment कु. Thus कलर woven ouk, a bill garment', and 9*** chal, a fire mado of cbaff, a bolo, an armour'. ५३४ । कुवश्चदीर्घश्च । ४ । ९ । कृषी चित्रलेखमिक्षा। B34. The affix v comes after theroots to sound' (I.000), the rorrel of which is also elongated. 91. Thus *** (tho female breast) Aa tbe alfix has an indicatory ८, therefore ity femininealorm is made by addingी, thusी (small brush of har, a pencil). ५३५ । समीयाः । ४ । ६२ । सनी मानीतीरिती। 635. Tho affix recomes after tho root ry to go (II. 30), preceded by tlo preposition TT, and tho TOFCI of the root is clongated. 92. Thus *++ camer'lcroccan'. It feminino is forraad by Adding it, thoshta doc'. ५३६ । सिवेष्ट रु च।४।। inila 330. Tho allxtComes after the root fry to ser.to write' (IV. 2) tuc fe portion of which is replaced by *. 03. .

·PADA IV. 985541.] THE UNADI AFFIXES, 283 . Thas fa+T='a pointed shoot or blade of Kusa "grass'. The feminino is with tg as it a noedle. ५३. शनेर्थन् । ४।४। शम्बो मुसल. 537. The affix पर comes after the root पम् 'to control' (92) 94. Thus e+वम् = सम्ब: 'the iron head of a pestle'. ५३८ । उल्बादयश्च । ४।५। धम्माता निपात्यन्ते । 'उध समधा । चस्य लत्वं गुणाभाषच । यो गोगपः । शुष वामम् । मिम्बा। विम्बर । 538. The words उरव ckc., are irregularly formed with affix. 95. Thus we 'to collect together' (IV. 114)+7=ETET 'the womb', the L of the root is changed to and there is also absence of guņa. गुप् to grieve' (I-198)+व-गुरुवर 'copper, a rope', there being also as in the previous instance the change of g into 7 and absence of guna. भी (to lead)+बन् =निम्बा (the Nimba tree), and ची 'to pervade, to conceive, to be born' (II. 39)+मन् विम्बर 'the disc of the san or moon'. In these two instances the roots wit and at receive the augment yg and their long vowel & is also shortened to before the aflix *. The word fora is forted from the root 7, since there is no difference between the letters पand , (बश्योरभेदात). ५३८ । स्थः स्तोउम्बजबकी।४।६। विष्रयजयक पती स्तस्तादेशव : 'स्तभ्यो गुण्वस्तृषादिना। स्तबका पुष्पगुच्या 530. The axes it and sex como after the root foto stand' (I. 975), whereby eu is changed to Fr. 96. Thus Fer+FT=RET: 'a clump of grass &o'; 'a banch of flowers १४० । शाशपिभ्यां ददनौ।४।७। यादो जम्यालयप्पयो। यदः। 540. The affixes and come respectively after the roots to sharpen, to make thin' (TV. 37) and a 'to ourse' (IV. 59). 97. Thus यो+६=भाद: ' mud, young grass'. श+दन-यादा 'noisa', Itus different from the er meaniny u word. ५४१ । अब्दादयश्च । ४ ।। अपतीत्ययः । कोवे गध)। कुादा। 541. The words or &c. are irregularly formed, with the aflxay. 98. .

·28+ < TIT, RIDDHANTA KAUNUDI [rsda IV 99 3 542 5 Thus it (to defend, protect)+ TOT (A yrar) Gana gútri. The augment num comce aferu (11 33) Thus to souod'+47= a jasminc flower', the verb receiving the nugment si Nole:-Sufimi Duy Ananda durires the words , *: and gone by the force of the present sutra ५४२ । वलिमलितनिभ्यः कयन् । ४ ।। पलवस् । मलयातमय:। 512 Tloallis at comes after the roots eat to go, (1 520), to hold', (I. 522) and then to spread' (VIII. 1) 99 Thus to OT=40'a bracelet', 7443 'name of a mount un range in the south of India, abounding in sandal trees', utt: 'the son'. ५४३ । साह्रोः पुग्दुकौ च । ४ । १० । पृषर भाया हदयम् । 543. TLC afix 47 comes after the roots to choose' (V 8) and < 'to steal or rob' (I. 917) which respectively recrire the augnionts ge and 5. 100 Thus +95 += 'refuge, shelter', T+5+44745744 the heart' lit. that which is attracted or stolen away by sense objects. ५४४ । मिपीभ्यां रुः। ४ । १०१ । मेरा । पेकः सूर्यः । बाहुलशास्पियतेरपि । 'भवत्थरया पार पेरोसीर्दिभरणी। 541. The affix comes after the roots fo 'to throw, to scatter' (V, 4), 17' to drink' (IV. 33) 101. Thus f*+T=Ăn 'the Meru,or the Polar mountain', 7+iott'the sun', By the forco of 25 (diversely) which governs the Unadı satrag, the affix comes after the root 4 (to drinb) also Thus tha sun'. Hatta Chandra we find muret : &c ५४५ । जम्यादयश्च ।४।१०२ । अनुपाणी । च । अश्रुषी। 545 The words og dc aro irregularly formed with the aflix 102 Thus eryto boget (IV. 41)+rak'ths collar bons', the of the root 1s changed to all Its Nom dual 13 wget. vt 'to parvado' (V 18)+7= 'tears', dual vasti Nole -Similarly forg (a pot berb, a kind of tree) from the root ut (to lie down) with the augment is and the afir ç the long of the root being shortened Under the present rule, Swami Dayananda places such words as farang Bud &c. Asia + ·. 265 THR UNADIAPPIXE HAPA IV. 10558181 . . ५४६ । रुशातिभ्यां कुन् । ४ । १०३ । पर गमे । यातयतीति ।। प्रशादी पादास्यत्वम् । 510. The affix comes after the roots r to crs, homl 103. (II. 21), and षद् 'to sharpen' (I. 908) in the causative. Thus P+7E T'An antelope'. ft (causative) +21=Ta'an enemy'. The word is hand nit or the shortening takes place as the word is considered to belong to the प्रसाcिlass ५४७ । जनिदाच्युसृथ्मदिपमिनमिमृभ्य इत्यन्त्वम्बगिन् शक्स्य- ढहटाटयः।४। १०४ । जनित्यो भातापितरी । दात्यो दाता । योमो गम्वा सीपुरपथ । भूणिमुपदद। सूर्या पाया पप धाक मल के चमत्स्य । पादः । हित्याहिलोप: । ममतीवि नदः गेस्तूपा । विभक्ति भरटा कुलालो भूतकर । 517. 'The following nine afixes स्था, स्वर, भणनिन्, या, स्प, e, rt and come respectiveby after the nine roots wy to bo luorn, to begot', (IV. 11), A to give' (III. 9), Y to drop doun' (I. 1001), पृ 'to move', (III 17), 4 to choose', (V. 8) मद् 'to bo pleased' IV. 99), पम् 'to be confused' (I. 882), ग 10 salute (I. 1030) V to support, to maintain' (III B) 104. 'Paus अन् + इत्यन्जनल्यो 'the father and mother'; दा+श्या-दात्या 'a giver, a generous man'; y+*v=eta.' a goer, oviparous, void of virtuo' the vriddhi is caused by the Affix aq being regarded as fra It firme c'for the goad to drive the elephant, the moon, the son, the air', the affix for being regarded as fru prevents guna operations taking place and places the accent on the first syllable, as it has an 10- dicatory Pi whereas the accent of some formed under Uņadı IV. 49 (पृषिभ्यां कित) has the accent on the last syllable. पृ+यक्षमा 'ginger, a root a rat, 15+F4-Freut (n fish), the accent being on the last syllable, whereas the word of formed under Uņādı sútra IV. 2 has the accent on the first syllable. *tate: 'a eunuch'. As a diversity, the < of the root ap 1s not changed to though so required by VI. 1. 64 S. 2264. The < 19 nos i Compare urs of Taa, Un l. 99. ma+2=1t: (an actor), tho Fof the root is elided by the air being regarded as fot. V+भरटः 'a potter, a serrant'. ५४ । अन्येभ्योगपि दृश्यन्ते । ४ । १०५ । पेपमतम् । अयम् । 618. These affixes come after other roots also. 103 Thus पा (to drink)+स्व-पेस्दम् ' nectar'. 'to nourish+पास much', ·286 TRE SIDDHANTA KAUHODI. (PADA. IV. 107 g 510. + < Nole.-S ami Dayananda places also the following words poder this sætra.--V12:-*I KEI! arcuri tarafa: ५४८ । कुसेरुम्भोमेदेताः । ४ । १०६ । फुशुम्भम् । कुमुमस् । कुस्तीदम् । कुरितो भनपदः । 519. The afixes FR, 5A, & and arome after the root se 'to embraco', (IV. 109) 106. Thus FC+0FF=F97% safflower'; FT+5=Yn 'a fower'; 954 f=8CTury'; Fc+=grea: 'an inhabited country. ५५० । सानसिवर्णसिपर्णसितण्डुलाशचषालेल्वलपल्वलधिष्ण्य- शल्याः।४। १०७ । सनोतरसिमस्यय उपचापतिः । साममिहिरण्यम् । वृनो मुपच । पमिर्जतम् । प । पसिर्ज- लगृहम् । 'सड आपाते' । तण्डलाः । अकि सक्षण उप । हुशः । परालम् । पालो 4T***'Iran RTI I 98498 i foryst mat i ATTET ATC: i forvet i retasi 'यस्य वा पुसि यदुर्ना'। 550. The words Sánasi, varṇasi, parnasi, tundula, erikusi, olinshala, ilvala, palvala, duislinya and salya are irregular. 107. These words are irregularly formed thus 1. pfer (gold), from the root to give, (VIII. 2) with the affix sfs the penultimate vowel of the root gets vſiddhi. 2. ai forr (water), from the root q' to choose" (V.8) with the additions of the augment yr and the affix for 1 In tho Daśdpadi, wife is read instead. It means Lokapala and is to be found in the Mantri wafety forget, 3.vfor'a house standing in the midst of water, a sum. mer-house', from the root op' to fill' (III. 4) with the alfix sfe aod tho augment 4. mera (rico) from the root ay to beat' (X. 49) with tho augment Tand the attix any. It is end-acute, as the aflix is fear Sco mantra tu argany faraxa! 6 yeni 'the goad to drive an elephant' from tho root yeto mark' (I. 87) and the alix TV, It is also end. acute, because the allir is feri As in the Mantm alere su 2 (Ry, I. 134. 6). 6. varet a wooden ring on the top of a sacrificial post', from the root ar 'to cat' (I. 038) and the aflix santi Ojjralacatta gives tho atrix AS WELBat we do not find the fore accent in the following and NETTE BATEN or <* i gfam 1. TANI (a demon; one of the firo stars in the bead of Orion) from the root pay to go, to sleep' (VI. 03) and the dirty. The irregularity consists in there being no guna of the root rotel. 8. PRETTY' a small pool or tank lit, in which thoy drick from the root or to drink'(I. 972), the long yonel of which is shortened before the augment ve and the aflis m. 0. f(house, A Beat, firo kc) from the root to coaquer (P. 22) sad tha allir ve Tac of the rooi w cbangod to without beiog followed by<. 10. "TRT 'A spuar, ·PADA IV 111 $ 554.] TAE UNADI AFFIXE 287 . Javelin, dart' from the root w to shake, to go.'(I 896), and the aflix s. Id 19 masculino also and means a porcupine, hedge hog, the thorny shrab, extraction of splinters, a fenco, boundary, the Bulva aad Madana trees, a kind of fish, name of a king of Madra ५५१ । भूशक्यविभ्यः क्तः । ४ । १०८ । • मूलम् । था प्रियवदे। चालो रसः । वाहुलझादमे । अम्लः । 551. The alix comes after the roots to bind' (1.1016), 'to be able' (V. 15), 'to sound (T 403) 108 Thus += 'the root of a plant'. So also 7971 speaking kindly sweet speaking See Amarakoga III 1. 36 It mcang also affable, agree able lit he who can or knows how to speak, an able man Another form 19 **** From se to sound, we get out acid taste By force of Bahulam (diversity) the affic comes after wife to be all (X. 180). Ag vai acid The long we is shortened as a diversity. ५५२ । मावाससिभ्यो यः । ४ । १०० । भावा । बाया । सस्यम् । बाहुलझात्मुनोते। सव्य दक्षिण्वामयो।'। 552 The affix + comes after the roots ar to measure' (II. 63), 7 to out (IV. 38), and or. 'to sleep' (II. 69) 109 . Thas + frat 'magio illusion', Tar' shade', reaccrop' By the force of a (diversely) which governs the Ona ir satras, the affix comes after the root (to perform a sacrifice) Thus strand "the usual position of the sacred thread when it bangg down over the left shoulder'. It means also left, left hand, southern, contrary, right, Note ---By the present rule, Swecal Dayloand derives the word a (another) from the roots (co breathe) with the athx ५५३ । जनयंक । ४ । १९०। 'ये विभाषा' (२३१९)जिन्य पुर। जाया भार्या। 553. The affix comes after the root were to be born, to hegnt' (UL. 24). 110. Thus ot+a battle 'e market, a fair, at the friend of a mother, the relation of a bride, at a father By VI 4 43. S 2319, the Top 19 optionally replaced by long wr. Then the form will be 7+7=747 (wife) ५५४ । आम्यादयश्च । ४ । १११ । • पगण्या मिपापाते । रम्तेयंगहागम उपचाशोपच । पप्या भाडेयी । प्राण्या प्रजापतिः। 'कनी दीही । करदा। बक्योरेक्पम् । वाया। 554 The words aghnya dc. are irregularly formed with the afix tee 111. > ·288 TIE SIDDHAYTA XUXUDI (PADI IV 112 5 355 Thur m'to kill (II 2) + trosi B; VI 4 08 S 2363 the root vowel of Tisclidel, by VII X 64S 358 tho ( 19 changed to Then a tho root receives the augment Te, the letter » precedeg the root Soma+m*** and by adding the augments it becomes moras the creator but when feminine प्रसपा'a cow According to somo yauat is not formed with the augment ste but by the negative particle T Similarly war (girl) and put are formed with the affix ** added to tho roots i to shino' (I 488) and m'to bind (I 1022) as 7 and 1 are considered to be identical, the from 19 ore also It moans barrez Note --The word 94 (morning and evening prayer) 19 formed from the root 47 (to hold) preceded by the preposition and followed by the affix According to Ujjvalidatta 13 formed from to sound with the affıx and the augmacot 5* The word is first acute as it is formed by (VI I 213 S. 3701) According to others it is formed by and so is end acute See also VI 2 8 S 3742 where you is said to be formed by the affix 695! ५५५ । स्नामदिपद्यर्तिपशकिभ्यो पनि । ४ । १९२ । चामा रसिक । महा शिवः । पद्वा पाया । 'पर्वा वरणगर्मयो। । पर्ष ग्रन्थिा प्रस्तावन । यकवा इस्ती । कीवी । यक्वालि 655 The affix afto comes after the roots a 'to batlug', (II 43) E' to be pleased, (IV 99), ve' to go', (IV 60) 'to go (III 16) 'to protect, to fill (III 1) and a 'to bo able' (V 15) 112 Thus Er+ara care inom S FIAT a tendon muscle, tasteful way 'an epithet of Siva fond of enjoyment, at a road way or a horse running and unworthy censurable ani a knot joint a book, section 464 an elephant the feminine of this word is formed by adding the augment and the aflis t, thue T40 B finger See IV 17 S 456 for the segment Tu The word is used in this sepse in the Blantra vaca din It also meads a kind of metre A river a girdle ५५६ । शीनुशिरुहि जिक्षिसृधभ्य वनिए । ४ । । ११३ ITATATTI I TETT ETTETE I TTT : i fazat er i format org: 1793 anifatı धृत्वा विध्या। 556 The afix tefta comes after the roots to sleep', (LI 22) ' to cry, to lament, (I 909), «E'to grow' (I 912) for * to conquer, (I 903) fr to dwell, (VI 114), T' to go', (III 17), 'to support (I. 9165 113 ·280 PADA IV. 11TS 560] TIE UYADI AFFIXES, 1 Thur गी+फनिपशीयन् 'n large snake, Python' कुश्पम् 'n Jackal', पन् 'a plant', प्रिस्थन् ' a conqueror freeन् ' wind', मृदयर'the creator', धरपन् 'an opithet of Vishnu', ५५७ । धाप्योः संसारणं च । ४ । १९४ । धीवा कर्म करा । पोवा स्यूलः । 567 The affix कुवनिपु comes after the roots ध्ये 'to con. template (I. 957) and प्यै 'to grow' (I. 1013) which also undergo Samprasaranz. 114. Thus it fratar'clever, an artist', f79t'stout' The lengthening is by VI. 4 2. S.2559 ५५८ । अदेर्ध च । ४ । ११५ । अध्या 558. The wait comes after the root se'to crt' (II 1) of which the finals is changed to u. 116. Thus पद्+ कमि-अध्यन् ' a road. ५५८ । म ईरशदोस्तु घ । ४ । ११६ । त्या मयत्वा च सागर मेवप्रथरवरीच मदी। 559. Chvalfir mafara comes after the root &' to go' (II 8) 201 te 'to perish' (I. 908), preceded by the proposition , to which is added the augment de 116. • Tus +++गि -प्रेतर्वन् 'the ocarn , म+द+तु+पनि प्रयत्व tne ocian'. The feminines of these words are formed by adding the affix ty (IV. 1. 7. S. 456 ) Thus tant and an a river'. ५६० । सर्वधातुभ्य इन् । ४ । ११ । पषिरनिः । तुहिः । तुपिका बलिः । पटि देवयनि । कायत इति कायिः पतिः। यल्लिा । मरनी। केलिः । 'मसी परिणाम । मसिः । वाहुल कादशः । कोटिः । दलि. । बोधिः । मन्दिः । कलिका 560. The air comes after all roots 117 Thus पच् to cook (I. 1045)+इन् पचिः (firs). मुद्धिः (face) from the root तुइ 'to break' (I. 374), तुहि (mutb, face) from तुह् to injure, “to press out (I. 295), वलि ! 'a fold or wrinkle on the skin' from the root घन् 'to go. approich, (I. 520), afz 'circular from th» r» 'to surroun 1(1.311), जि: 'a srcraficer' from यज् 'to sacrifice' (I. 1015) Similarly we have देवयतिः 'a priest or sacrificer to the Gods. 'the city and Kasi or Benares", from the root ETT 'to shine' (I. 678), fa: (an ascetic) from a 'to go ' (I. 30), महिल: 's kind of jasmine' from मल्ल “to hold, possess', (1.523), कलि: 'play' fron केन् 'to sport' (I. 370), मणिः 'ink' from नम् to charge form, to weigh' (IV. 112), stie: (a crore, 2. e. ten millions) from 37 - ३ ६ ·290 TIL SIDDHANTA KAUNUDI {PADA IV 118 $ 561 - 1 yer wifi 'to curve, to bend (VI 73). Though I. 21 S 2461 would prevent the guna of 95, yet it takes place by the age rule which governs the Unâdı sůtras ffer: 'the son, amorous sport', from for 'to sport amorously' (VI. 69), afe: 'perfect wisdom or enlightenment' from the root reto know '(I. 911), afect (joy) from toy to be glad' (I. 67), #Fa: 'strif, quarrel 'from a'to sound' (1.526. Nole -Some hold that the words to g*: 13 an interpolation, b-calzo redundant The real sūtra 19 FH ५६१ । इपिपिरुहिरतिविदिशिदिकीर्तिभ्यश्च । ४ । १९८ । 'परिर्षियापहाविन्द्रे भेके सिहे हये रवी । घग्ने काले सपणे च यमे पाने र कीर्तितः' afrit afrit afats i arti 1&fcte i alfae , 561. The aflix comes after the roots to steal' (I 917), for 'to grind' (VII. 15), E to grow' (I 912), ket? choose' (I 795), fag' to exist (IV. 62), fag'fo cut', (VII 3), 'to name, 'to glorify' (X. 111). 118 Tous teikia name of Vishnu, & day, the God lodra, thạ fros, the lion, the horse, the sun, the moon, a parrot, an ape the God Yami and wind', afar 'lightening', aftsin religious man, 1 tree, a good', "anything wrapped round, a pad, an ointornt', Riga Joninid man, an altar, a name of the Goddess Saraswatz', afer 'a cutt 7, 278 glory: ५६२ । इगुपचारिकत् । ४ । ११९ । Far i pafasi gfai a farfar I Gigantea ferfaring for opfer a great फूर्षिफा। 562. The affix t treated as fie comes after those roots which live for their penultimato an is vowel 110 to plough' (I. 1039)+7="fo: 'a farmer", "fo: 'n kage' 'to approach' (VI 7), ofa: 'puro' from ot to griovo' (I 193), farai (rcitiag) from fag "to shun' (VI 10), by tho furo ofegat (diversely), it 19 somstiu233 Writtsa at forfai ats), fino a pintar o brush) from a 'to druso out, to m31Wuro' (I. 300), thr fomno of this is oft Home -Svi nad the Q!r299 yir for and make the effir fx no For favoll miko las) monts apayida ofrei But it is not cornc. final.scut by alix accato But no find that far, vfi bure acut, on thy firauns in th» Janting afa gofus ** fefe (Rv. I 1.2) dal vivian Noes-The wordt ya da ars als troudly the part of firen under III 3. 10, S. :3235, but there 19 dienas in noin 7:*a Inicy luare amurs on th mal as in the Santra sint flats y ffure your (11 1 31 13) whero ofta hat Acols on this fit she svete fa URIATSILLIT, Gre, pleasja, parul Thus कृष from a fat fat ·PADA IV. 1235560.) TITINADI AFFIXPO, 201 + ५६३ । भ्रमेः संप्रसार । ४ । १२ । मितिः । पासादमिः। 503. The affir rr comes after the root भ्रम् 10 trander (IV. 06), which also undergoes Samprasiranm 120. Thus va+T7=tikrosir mudd. By th- frcunforsvorily) which güverus thc Uņdı sátras, there is also the from wiat (whirl wiad) In the glogs on thr mitru yra pagar wat afra, the word bhſımı 14 explained by गरगोन दरिद्र जनम् । ५६४ मितगितिस्तम्भामत इच्छ । ४ । १२ । बिना । ममारणाने मिरपि । तिमिर्मस्यभेदः । यिनिमंत्रक गुरुपोलिसा 56 The allis e comes after the roots me to walk, to stop I 502) तम् to be sulficated, to be fatigued (IV. 03), पर and स्तम्भ (these tro are सोxroots) and is treated as कि. The of theso roots is replaced by r. 121. Thus n+मिमिा, sometimes ther of the root andergory Sampra. surana and then wo get कृमि (an intestinal worm), तिमि:'' the ocean, a whale fish', fer for black, white', ferfrie 'the ocean'. ५६५ गनेरुच्च । ४ । १२२ । अमिता *605. Tuo aflix पर comes after the root झन् 'to think' (IV.671 of which the wis replaced bytr. The alix is treated as कित। 122. Thus wittyfuza sago, lut who hnows, or ho thinks, n thinker, ५६६ । वर्णलिरचाहिरण्ये । ४ । १२३ । पनि सोमस्य बलिरादेशः रोपहारयो मिसिा प्रारया विधारिये पर्थिः पुषर्षम् । 560. Tue affix re comes after the ront of which is replaced by पल rion not meaning दिल्य i.e. gold) 123. Thc alix TT 19 trented 24 f* The ront gray is a stotra ono i, e ont found in Dhatuptah. but only inthi satras. Pusप +र-पम् +r -सित 'a tax, an offering asually religious, ihan in this masculino gonilor, but when in the feminine gonder, it means a folij, wjpkle'. The root वर्ष is not replaced by व wnen it means दिलय (gold)- Thus वर्ष +मर्पिः ll ५६२ । घसिवपिपजिराजित जिसदिहमि राशियादिवारिम्प ४। १४ । 'मिदनानि' । वापि वापी। यात्रियंटाशि-रात्री। प्राविनातिनादि 'हारपि।मितिदशतिनि । वामिला। वादिदार । वालिम्पनी । प्रलेसोर। बाराति पिशाती। इ.

·292 TID SIDDEANTA KAUDUDI {PADA IV 124 $ 561 567. The affix comes after the roots on 'to dwell (I 1034) 'to sov (L. 1052), 'to sacrifice' (I 1051), 17 'to slune' (I. 874), ** Ito go' (I 272), a' to decay' (I 907), ET ' to kill'(II 2) to 10ar' (IV.54), and causativo of or to say'(I 1058), and of causatı elof q' to choose' (V 8) 121 Thus get starft a small hatchet Note --This w rd vayı 19 found in the following text of the Vai seshika -वास्यादीनाम् इव करणाना कई व्यापार्यवनियमात् । So also in the sfaha bhashya यास्यर्यमिति सप्रस्कोः इति सलोपा प्राप्नोति । वापिः (a well), यामिः (a sacrificer), eyfort or tu in strenk line), sifte (a gust or gale of wind), af: (charioteer), the root takes the preposition fa, thus faretra, (here by VII 3 54 S 358, the of 7 19 changed to 7) F95+ 9 = faufa: ' a hammer, an lion club The Top 17 18 replaced by a by VII 8 32 S 2574 urf: (fire), afi (a learned man), atfe: (a place for fastening an elephant, but the word oft when of the neuter gender njeans water) By the force of age (div rs ly) eft also means a caravan Note --See vartikas under III 3 108 S 3285 for some of th“se formy ५६८ । नहो भश्च । ४ । १२५ । नाभि स्याक्षत्रिये पुसि । प्रापयतु लिया। पुण्यपीति फेषिद । 568 The affix va comes after the root me to tie, to bind', (IV 57, of wluch is chinged to भ 125 Thug T6 + 1 = tfy: 'a Kshatriya when the word 19 used in the masculine gendur but to the feminine it means the narl Some uºcit as masculine when mining even navel See Linginosasuna fotofur ५६८ । कृपे द्विश्छन्दसि । ४ । १२६ । कार्षिा 569 In the Ohlandas they of the root or to plough (I 1039, undergoes vriddh before the affix * 126 Thus we +=ts fir , ploughing In the secular literature the form 19 #fati 490 1 7 stati81 879 1 wifi , TI 570 The affix at comesafter th root to injure, to kill (IV 18) the of which undergoes yfidding phien tho Ford 127 Thus (IT 18)+9=trf 'the brid called Sarika' The r of wift 19 change to by considering it to belong to offer 07 class xud so is evolved the worul mifere rice, the livet cat. me ins a vulture ·rIDIV 1623515] THE ITYALAFFIXF, 203 . . ५११ । फल उदीचाफारुयु । ४ । १२ । कादिगिएपी। 671 Tuc affix . comcs, after cinsin: Fridellu of the root 'to do' (VIII 10) wlicn thic sense is that of an artist 128. Thus r+rm-कारित 'an artis:'. ५२ । जनिघसिभ्यामिण । ४ । १२ । धनियमात । पासियनिश्च । 572. llo affix va comes nfter tho roots w' to produco' (IV AD and पम् 'to eat tI717) 129 Thus wat met 'birth a woman, a mother the vpi idht 19 prevented by VII 3 30 S 2512. Tb 13 fomiaino g nder 15+Taifa fire, and food ५०३ । पज्यतिभ्यां च । ४ । १३ । पातिग्राना चाति पही। 573 Tho affis for comes after the roots w' to go' (I 215) and अत् 'to go constantly' (I°38) 130 Thus ***+Tswf' battlo , fara hind of bird' Nole —By tho forco of age (diversely) which governs all Unadı affires, tho root w 19 not replaced by 11, 19 required by II. 1 50 This Una li sūtra 19 in ficta vartika She III 3. 10853285 ५७४ । पादे घ। ४ । १३९ । पदाजिता पदातित 574 The affus ver comes also after thio roots wx nnd Then preocded by tho Ford are 131 Thus पाद++र-पदाजित (a foot soldier), पदातिः । By VI 8 52s, 990, पद 19 substitute i for पाद ५५५ । पशिपणाप्योरुहाप्रलुको च । ४ । १३२ । पोस्ट् । रापि पुरुषः। पचायतेरापनुस् । पाणिः कः । 575 Tho affus comes after the roots vu 'to pervado (V. 18) and come to bargain, to praise' (I 460) Thoof 14 replaced by and the sale of stie 19 elided lufore the affix 132 Thus +ra+rane ship पचाय+म्पादित (shand) Th root us alwaystakes जाय brill 1 2S 2303 Thsशाय sordand to b ell by the pris 1 : süten. ५७६। यातेहिं च । । । १३३ । किपीतियां बीस्पषि। . .

·294 THE SIDDHANTA KIUIUDI. [PADA IV. 133 5576. . . 576. The affix इण-comes after the root पा 'to blow' (II 11), and is treitel as fe'li e the last ropel of the root is eltded). 133. Thus tror=rat'a bırd'. The feminine is at: ५७७ । प्रे हरतेः कूपे । ४ । १३४ । मदित कूपः। 577. The affir se comes after the rootr to steal' (I. 917) preceded by the proposition 1, (then the word so formed means a well, ard is treated as frc. 131 Thus #+E+y=fe'a well'. Sy maraLośá I. 10. 26. ५५ । नौ व्यो यलोपः पूर्वस्य च दीर्घः । ४ । १३५ । ध्ये सयादालोपक्ष नेदीपः । मीयिः। भीकी पर गयो मूलपाने च । 578. The affirre comes after the root व्य (to corer) preccd. cil by tho proposition for. Ther of the root zo is elided and tho sliort rof the prefix fris elongttel 135. Thus fr+:+रण -नि+या+r(VI.1.45 5. 2370)-futur+reीति 'a cloth worn round a woman's wrist. See Anirilogi 111 3 211. ५५५ । समाने रयः स चोदात्तः । ४ । १३६ । सभामा उपप पा स्पस्मादिपरपात । न frry मनोपरामर re- इत्यादेपर र एलिशा 670. The affirm comes after the root on ' to relate, to tell (II.31) preceded by मान anil is treated as fre. ani srir is replaced by mich luas tlic uditta accent 166. Thos turn to WeT+re++*.***. 7fm 'A frian1 Man. S. WIT Mole-Ujraladatta crp'nına thu addst log kering 't' alie my which hry a IAtin ac*oni cones afe? What This wrong Frits of mis current buro, nnt of protex of the art i. no: the Pronony (r), but an ahinorinkithiraef aamsunuwrer afन hanrat. outhnirein the last ura साहिघिमिम्पांम।४ ।। Th870 ·PADA TV.1118.९) TIur tSAntarrtrrs. 215 men- - Naer-The wori fromis in thirira V. 120 ५ 360 ५१ अम।४।१३। ifuोकिसिभिः। 591. Tho To meg aftur the route online in romels. 139 Tuy tay Man | 11. ^ )+ fet thº in ',at 1 Ify (11. 13) T's fath: thin Irbolt of Intra', nito 'Atnat'a bax fyr rlo.lire, fron Tito crore orer'(I. 10181, fu'amay man,nn:', frm Found, (ir. 33), nि'an rnemy from to go (IIL 1G), नि (shark ber) frou (to 8") thg bing changxi to w by mouldiring to brist the Kapılak Ali cines परामिकप्पपसियमियनिगमिध्यनिग्रन्पिपलिम्पए ।४।१३८ । नापिरिमारामानिनिरिमाराचा मिति पर 699. The nffis i comce after the roote my' to d'it 927), कto injure (I. 110), पाtogo'(1219), धम् 'to thror (IV. 1001, धम् to corer'(II 13), 'बर 'to honor, (I. 101 and VIIIS), म to lorc, to forslıip'(I. 192) ani VIII 2, Ery to counl'I 591 and x.313), 'to tu (252), and nw to more(I 895) 130. Thus 191+ Terper'n nun, "fal injuriofi barmful', ufus mine tion'मा 'n srorl', पति 'n cloth', in fire', ना worup. gir', मनित un!', nिjnt.नि 'an animal or fur Arother fim of in 14 mars fare m nos legging alo ५.३ । पतेश्चन्दसि । ४ । १४ । 681 Tho affix comrs after the root (to crist), in thic Chlinndis. 110 Tarama+r-*f*'anything sprappaul connl', an ointmoet, mr-'*", ang cm tin, this work of a limpeza Praga, a surgical 104* rum ni, a arrerk, asmelling. ५५ । भुः किष्य । ४ । १४१ । Tir alix comes after the roots lo protact, to ent(Intry and is treated as fst 111 Thuyrifa hre, untile, if ants a thr arrainin.. ५ । मागपतिभिदिखिदिम्मरण । ४ । १४२ । Asttimरिनौडिरोगोतामा निरिinfo समाना मिरगीति मार दिया।

·296 TOC BIDDIASTA KAUNUDI.. (PADA IV. 142 5 585. 'to 683. The affix comes after the roots *' to scattor (VI. 116), ' to stalloir' (VI 117), ('to injure' (IX. 18;, fill' IX, 19), 'to ourre' (VI 73), fired to divide' (VII. 2), fara *to pengtrate' (VII. 3) and is trcated as forza 142. Thus *+r=fafci a borr, a hog; frfer: 'a hill, a hugo rðck, a disease of the eyes, an honorific title given to Saayasins'; fotos 'a locust, a killer, a sword'; gft: 'a city, a king, & river'; gier'a house, a body, ; fufti'the thunderbolt; fefei' an are'. ५-६ । कुडिकम्प्योनलोपश्च । ४ । १४३ । 'फुति दाहे' । कुहिर्दया । कपिः । 580. Tuo affix t comes after tlıc roots Fe'to burn' (I. 289) and matu shake, agitate' (I. 100) of which thor is elided. The affix is treated as fr. 113. Thug 'E+**F: 'the body'; far'a monkey'. ५८७ । सर्वधातुभ्यो मनिन् । ४ । १४४ । faqat xfarem og EN ISTHITHI FUTHAT TY1 'FET" (2654) Erfar mens i • T*T*T 587. The affix after comes after all roots. 141. Thus y'to do' (VIII. 10)+7=m*7 act, 'work'; p*** (skin) from as to go' (I. 591), HET 'ashes' from HT to ceasure to blame, to shine (III. 18); *4(birth) from the 'to beget' (III. 24); v*HT 'happy, prosperous' from 'to injure' (IX. 18); EURE 'strength, fixuty' from Fent to stand' (I. 975), 7'a disguise' from the Churådı erfę to cover' (X. 398) the penultimate wt of &re is shortened by VI. 4 97 S. 2985; 1997'a name of Indra' from 'to protect' (I. 1014) preceded by the preposition u lit. he who delivers excellently. ५८८ । बृहे।उच्च । ४ । १४५ । भकारस्पाकासा'ब्रह्म तस्वं तपोधेदो ब्रह्मा विमः मजापतिः । 588 The affix #fat comes after the ruot t'i'to grow, increase' (1 772), the nasıl being replaced bo 7. 115. Thus +=the Nom Sing. 19 gr'one who knows Brahma, a Bråbmapa, the creator'. The neuter means Brahman the Supreme. It means austerity and the Vedas alco yre I starfhui FT 181 28€ ! 1 घरमा। समा। 589. The affia fit comes after the roots yn 'to peryade' (V. 18) and 4* ' to be able' (V. 16) in the Ohhandas 146. Tbus It=4794, 'eating or perfading, a stone, a cloud'; *** a name of Indra', ·297 PADA IV. 14955921 THE UNADI AFFIX£4 A है प्रपया। 500 ५८० । भृधृसस्तभ्य इमनिच् । ४ । १४७.। रिमा कालः । भरिमा कम्यम् । चरिमा पम् । सरिभा यायुः । तरिना वरपर । गरिमा Thic affir rafre comes after the roots 'to skcal' (I. 917), 'to nourish ' (III DIY'to hold' (I. 948), म to moro (III. 17),er to cover (V.6, 4 to injuro' (IX 18) 147. Thus r+मित्र परिमन nom. srरिमा time or death', मरिनम् ' relation' परिणम् 'n form, figuro', मरिमन् 'wind', स्तरिमन् 'a bed, couch', गरिमन bearing 'bringing forth' Vote -In the Dasapadi the affix is read as tनन् with long tand fog । According to it tho anu sittt of chhanda, runs in this sûtra so that theso are Vardic words. This view appears to be right The Disapadi satra 1 स्मभ्यामीमन, and forms are सरीमन्, स्तरीमा .c, as found in the following mantras पातस्य पगें अभवत् गरीमति, स्तीण व गुट रीमा जुपाचा &c. The words ada also, in the salrn after the nest, indicates that these intermediato sütrogare Vandic ५८१ । जनिमूड्स्यामिमनिन् । ४ । १४८ । अनिमा जाम । मरिमा पृत्यु।। 091. The aflix kafara comes after the roots ora (to veget) and to dtc) 148 Thus ना (III. 24)+हनिन् निमन् 'burth, offspring', (VI 10) +ममिच्नरिमन् death. ५९२ । येशः सर्वत्र । ४ । १४९ । हादगि भरपायर पेरपण देगा तनुपापड पादित सामनी मनी रति इति । 592 The affis tufay comes crery Flicre after the root a 'to wcavo (I 55) : e both in the Vaudio and secular litor. ature. 149 Thus #traineda (a loom), this word belongs to the off claug (II 431S. 816) It is read in the Ganapatha both in the पामादय class "2 100) and संकलादय class (IV.2 75) See सामनी देमनी in the Kasika . - rritu A Lor cording to Vrittikira, thus word is of the feminine gender and iline or neuter as required by II. 4 31 S 816 Shr. ho says the word form वेमनी 18ns valid as सामनी a rope for trying l or the formation of the word सामनी, sce Unad: IV. 152 ५५.३ । नामन्सीमन्व्योमन्रोमन्लोमम्पाप्मन्ध्यामन् । ४ । १५२ । सानो निपारयते । मायटेनेनेति मानसिनोवेदीपः। सीमा । सीमानो। सीमामः।पये गप् । भीमे । सीमा । ज्येोपस्योत्व गुः । व्योमारोवारोमा सोना पाया पापम् । ज्यान परिमार देवद। 38 - ·298 TIE SIDDHIANTI KAUMUDI (PADA IV 150 $ 593 + from 593. The seven words nåman, simin, rroman, roman, loman, påpman, and dhyüman, aro irregularly formed with the affix जमिन • 150 Thus I. 'Ara'a name', from the root # to repeat -" to remember, (1.076), the irregularity consists in the elision of the p of the root Store (a boundary) from fe ' to bind.' (IX 5, thor of which is elongated before tho affix it Its Nom forms are star, start, th: The word store formşuts feminine with fra (IV 1 13 S 461) Thus it's Nom forms are 191, sia statt 1 3 197 (the sky) from s to cover (I 1056), the final of which is replaced by & which undergoes gnina ART the hair on the body of men and animals ', from the r 'to cry (II 24) 5 g 'the hair on the body of men and animals, 'to cut' (IX 30) 6 71 (sin) from * to drink, (1 972) with the augment 7 EATHT measure lustre, splendour from t'to think to contemplate '(I 957) By the force of G# (diversely) which governs the Unadı sůtram, the following words are also irregularly formed under the present rule 'consumption from a 'to worship (X 153) tam 'the moon , from to send, (I 987) tarq 'a house the body &c. from a "to hold* to maintain' (VII 10) ५९४ । मिथुने भनि । ४ । १५१ । उपसर्गनियासपम्धो मिथुनम् । स्वरार्थमिदम् । मुयो। 594. The affix for comes after roots which are coupled with a Preposition 161 The relation of an apasarga with a verb is called fage or coupling. Such compound roots take the affix ft jostead of fra The differenco 19 in the accent The word formed by afro will have acute on the first syllable as the affix 19 fate (VI 1 197 S 3686) Whilo a ford formed by afa will have the affis accent for all affixes are first acute if not otherwise provided for (III 1 3 S 3708) le the accept will fall on the last syllable Thus from to injare (IX 18) Tre base with a focus (Un IV 144) 147 but with fr we get **70 Ia compounding th sa words with the preposition they retain their accent by VI ? 133 $ 1973 Thus af or ytat", one under Un IV 144 and the last und r the bÛtra ५८५ । सातिभ्या मनिन्मनिणौ । ४ । १५२ ॥ Evalfa UTI I WRITI 595 The afises afare and spre come respectifely after the roots 57. to pat an and to, destroy' (IY 39) and **' to go' (I 88). 162 إلى C ·PADA. IV. 153 $ 596 } TIE, UN IDI AFFIXES 290 Thus ettefimusay 'appeasing the Sámaveda itself', so called because it is very difficult to study. This word is of the Deatergender, its Nom; forins being in, , fa. Similarly. +uftw=1' the soul. This word is of the masculine gender. Note: These tryo affixes hivo indicatory.t and , whjoh show that by bath the accent is placed on the first syllable (VI. 1. 197.5 3680) ,and by, the latter (a), vriddhu is substituted for the end vowel sofya. stem (VII. 2. 115 S. 254). ५८६ । हनिमशिभ्यां सिकन् । ४ । १५३ । "Freefafx'i afoni 596 The allis ferre comes after the roots 'to kill (II. 2) and I 'to huoi' (I. 760). 153. Thug it for fort'a female goose i. e, a gander, fam'a Dy'. ५८७ । कोररन् । ४ । १५४ । 597. The affix at comes after the root 'to sound" (II. 33). - 154. Thus += 'mixed, intermingled'; A reader or lecturer. Since there is no difference between 9 and 4, the feminine ‘of war 18 **t formed with (IV. 1. 42. S. 500), meaning & fellet or braid of hair. In other places the feminine form of the word is 47 (a female reader or lecturer.) ५९८ । गिर उठच् । ४ । १५५ । 1 698. The affix 46 comes after the root ग to swallow (VI. 117). 165. Thus TUTTET' a kind of bird'. Note :--Some do not read the sûtra as given in the text, but analyse the word Ts, as ta namely onc who fites with wings (garut) and say that the affix + comes after the root to fly (I. 1017).when preceded by the word ta, enumerated in the Gunapatha under arft clas. The affix having an indicatory causes the elision of the final vowel of *t; and the a of my is elided by taking it to belong to the Prishodaradi class. Thas met *78=7*TII ५९८ । इन्दः कमिनलोपश्च । ४ । १५६ । to be sup 599. Tho alix comes after the root me remely powerful' (I. 64) of which tho nasal is elided. 166. Thu watafoarte this ·300 TU SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (PADA. IV. 157 $ 600. Nole-Duvaladatta has read this 80tra ng reifing with Bat we do not find the fore accent in idam in the Vedas. Thus in res per Arm (Rv. VI. 44 16), a stan ig (Rv. VIII 64.,8) tho accent is on the second, and not on t, which would have been the case if the affix sere face (VI. 1. 197. S. 3686) Bat in Nasapadi, the s@tra is read as ret 46 i.& the aflix comes after tho roqy 'to go? ६० । फायतेहि मिः। ४ । १५७ 1. बिन्। 600.. The aflix fifa "comes after the root & 'to sound' (L 961): 157. Thus #+frem faz 'what, &c'. The alix having an indicatory s causes the elision of of the root R. Note:-The final r in fefa is merely for tho sale of caphong. In faćt, DasapAdi gives the affix ag for and not fefet ६०१ । सर्वधातुभ्यः टन् । ४ । १५८ । TUTTE WETI TTI'' (2054) fo TATT I GETTI 601. The aflix comes after all roots. 168. Thus me 'to dwell (I. 1054) +TY-T '& cloth'; on to throw (IV. 100)+gyer's weapon', te 'to injare' (1.763) +- a wcapon', nifer to cover' (X. 290)+Fem'an umbrella, iho long w of the root is shortcned by VI. 4.07, S. 2985. The words liku t'a long' from toto fill' 11.899) ya 1 from epilo drinh' (1.027), g'a looth' from 'to bilo' (I. 1039 &c. are formed by this rule. ६.२ । भ्रस्जिगमिममिहमियिरपणं एदिष।४।१ WII U NETYANO wrote Ti Deri Toy TTTI 002. Tho alix my coines alter the roots to cook (VI. ), me to go (I, 1031), *y to loir dorrn, to sound' (I. 1030), re' to kill'11, 21. for 'to enter (VI. 1361), ard we * to perrade' (V. 18.) and it causes the siddll of the ronel of the rout, 160. Tipo y light, by VII: IS1,15 w* ixc1d), ord by Vill. : 368 311,141 tag '2.11g, 115 citboat is the charge for y'0"; WE'AS **'; mrad đest *:*:* to ren: sy. (ai foto TEOL ·Pada 1V. 104 $ 607.} 70% UXADI AFFIXES. 901 . 603 Thcallix y comes after tlicroot fra'to shibo' (IV.1) which is replaced by me 160. The letter in the satra indicates that the root substitute undergous vriddhi by force of the last sûtra. Thus factore&terenita'light'. • ६०४ । उपिखनिभ्यां फित् । ४ । १६१ । Tufarq STANITETI 603. The affix to comes after the roots op 'to burn' (1. 727) and atto dig' (I. 927) and is treated as fac. 161. Thus gatoare.' a camel"; man'a spade, an oblong pond. ६०५ । सिविमुच्योप्टेरूच । ४ । १६२ । सूत्रम् मप्रस्। 605. The alix ct comes after the roots for to sepp (IV. 2) and s' to save' (VI. 136), the fe portions of which are replaced by . The aflix is treated as fac. 162. Thug fantocm=x+7=77'a thread'; (urine). Note: These two words could have been formed from the roots and of the Chur&di class also (X. 360 and 361) by the affix » (III. 8,56 S. 3231), but the difference would be in the accent. ६०६ । अमिचिमिदिशसिभ्यः क्त्रः । ४ । १६३ । शास्त्रम् । धिप्रस। मित्रम् । शसस् । 606. The affix « comes after the roots ve' to go' (I 493) fq' to collect, gather' (V. 5), face to love' (I. 779), and aq 'to injure' (I. 703). 163, Thus + Alopig an entrail', intestine' ; feina a picture, firma 'a friend" Tera weapon'. Note:- The lengthening in antram is by VI. 4. 15. S. 2666. All these words are end acute by affix accent (III. 1. 3. S. 3708) as in je मारवाणि पेचे चित्र देवामास् । मित्रं मयन । गतस्य यस्तमसि । ६०७ । पुयो हस्थश्च । ४ । १६४ । $ 607. The alis ktra comes after the root 'to purify (IX. 12) of which the long * is shortened. 164. Thus +=gh son'. Note:-Some derive the word gras g'TT ***FTEHTC Tài, e, one who saves from the hell called 9. In this senge the word will be formed thus :-+1+(III. 2. 3 S. 2915). ६०८ । स्त्यायतेई द । ४ । १६५ । 19883 ·308 THE SIDDRANTA KAUBUDI. (PADA. IV 165 $ 608 608. The aflix drat comes after the root had to sound, to collect, crowd' (I. 959) 165. Thus F#+3,9=at's womin'. The afix having an indilatory causes the elision of the fè (1. e 2) portion of the root fet. Then the of the root 13 elided by VI 1 66 S 73. Thus the stem formed 19 ". The feminine is formed by adding to by IV 1.5 S 470 ६०९ । गुधृवीपचिवचियमिसदिक्षदिभ्यस्त्रः । ४ । १६६ । 'गोप्रस्थानामवंशयो' गोत्रा पृथिवी।परम् ! पेत्रमा पनम् ।वर वामदासत्रा। f 60g The affix a tra comes after the root u to speak indistinctly (I 997); Y' to hold (I. 948); 7 to go, to beget (II. 39); ** to cook (I. 1045); "* to speak;(II. 51);«ere to abstain' (I 1033); to go, to break' (1 907) and 7 (tt 19 sautra root) 100 Thus + Ros' family', its feminine is nat'tha carth, wie the house, 899 'tho cano', 'the Bicred Gro maintained by a house holder', 'the face', 47'an instrument', ny'scrihcial session', the Kshatriya ciste. ६१० । हुयामागु भसिभ्यखन् । ४ । १६७ । समय पात्रापात्राधिोत्रभू मखा। 610 Tho affis tran comes after the roots to norifice, to Trorship (IIL 1), a' to go' (II. 10), 41 10 measure (II 61): to lcar (I OSO), and 4e to censure, to blin' (III 18) 107. Thus 5*ment 'a sacrifice or worship', 0751'going', 'A Inengore', any' he iring, the car', al'a pair of bultown, a leathers vessel for holding water ६११ । गमेरा च । ४ । १६० । TKV 011. The alix *7 comes after tfic root te ' to go' (T. 1031) of thucli ris roplaced by 1 109. Ting + 'the body. ६१२ । दादिम्परबन्दसि । ४ । १६८ । TRITY 012. In the Chbandas tlo nflix comes after the rooli 'to cut' (II, 60), and the rest. 160. Taos +7Tey'en irerum nl of milling, a ckla', u'a try del from the nosi n'to drsak' (1.97?), An'a fidd' from the rostfrit dwell VI 114). . " ·803 PADA IV. 1745 017.) TAR URADI IYIZ), ६९३ । भूयादिगम्पो शित्रम् । ४ । १० । भाषितावादिधागारिनोदए। 613: Tho affix fani comcg after tho roote 'to bo' (I. 1), 'to bpcak, to inform' (1. 1056) and to stallot (VI. 117). 170. Thas + ferrom'tho three worlds i. c hearer, enrth and lower regiusis. The indicatory of the adix causes tho vriddhi, afaria musical instrument'tator', ६१४ । घरेयते । ४ । ११ । wift 1.7 011. Tho affix for comes after tho root or to walk (I. 601) when tho derivativo word mcans 'conduct'. 171. Thug vetfrauerfal conduct, behavior'. Note:Tho word fra has been also formed by Hafiz, as alrcady taught before. From this word, wo can get frie by sy of Prajnadi clasy. But the diference is in accent. Ep4 o sfornfeta pitati818921 Mir । पहिलन् । परिधी गरे । एवमादिभ्य वत्रा । श्रोत्र महापन । पम् । पर Atato 010. The allir ilra and uira como respectively nfter the roots m'to pervado' (1.18) and trai' to protect' II. 1014) and like these 172 Thus stewiray'a thief, an oblation of rice'; afm'a raft, boat; wfom? cho carth': *+FTTE' gond, hind of discase'; **7 'a cloak, moutlo' from usii (1. 8) ६१६ । अमेट् विपति पित् । ४ ! १७३ । चनिया पत्र 610 Tho affix tx, treated as fra, comes after the root me to go (I. 193) then tho derivativo Tord means 'an enemy'. 173. Thug at first' an enemy's. Q. Is it not + för a non friend. +fwaafy which is Negter. ६१७ । माः समिपिनकपिभ्याम् । ४ । १७४ । भादिरी गिरकरणमा स्यात् । परारिवादष्यपरवर । पनया। शिक्षा । 617. The affix o comes after the roots to 'to go(LT-06) preceded by the prepasition and to extract (1. 710) preceded by the preposition fr. 174. The derivative words are arrays, (uodeclinables) since they are cooperated in the list of words beginning with Fre dic (1. 1. 37. S. 447).

·30 THE SIDDHANTA KAUXUDI (PADA IV. 175 / 618 Thus retr.+371*** ' duly, scasonably'; FREET' Dear', hard, close by &c. t By the forco of ye 'diversely'shich governs all Unidı sätras, por (nt night) 19 furmod from the root 57 'to be bad or corrupted'. (IV.76) with the affix wt, f74'at day,' is from the root fit to abido (IV. 1) with the ntlix 57, there is no gina of the root by the ge* (divergely), at the oblatiou of food offerred to the pitris or mancs of deceased uncestus,' from the root fm'to bo sweet'i 18) the # being changed to by the force of wya' diversely'. Epsi ferat: **: ** 1 8 1 294 1 **TETU I 'fru nou formu 618. The affix* comes after the root fra to think (I. 39), of which the final 19 replaced by t. 175 Thus frateforme 'grcany'. There is ant of guna as a diversity See A maraknak? II 0. 4G for the loe for ager Ferrey &c. ६१९ । सूचेः स्मन् । ४ । १६ । 619. The affix e comes after the 'root to pierce' (X. 327). 176. This ef+FHT=The five, subtle The for 19 elided Tue 19 cluanged to , and the # to ६२० । पातेईम्सुन् । ४ । १७७ । 1981 640 The affix or comes after the root i to protect (Il 47). 177 Thus पा+दुससुन्-पुस the या of पा s elded by the afix being हिए, V is changed to nnusyâra. By VII. 1, 89 S. 436, vp is substituted for the final of y qin the strong cases So Its Nom forms are yमाम पुमासी, पमाष: they bring added in the strong cases after by VII 1 70 S 361 This word is, however, differently derived in the Mabâbhâshya, while others read the eâtra as gut! ६२१ । रुचिभुजिभ्यां किष्यन् । ४ । १७८ । facafregi yfsat : 1 621. The aflix forsee comes after the roots to 'to please' (I. 781), and yw' to protect', enjoy (VII. 17), 178. Thuis wat fortalesforce'agrecable, pleasing', gfacas'a scrvant. ६२२। वस्तिः । ४ । १७८ । infecufämnt materialul Eleme' I II wifey TNI fingrenaditum .

·DA IV TX" $ f} TIE IRAILAFILE . . 022 Ilir allix ft comes after tlic r it gets *10* del to corer' (I 1051, 11 151 170 Ph w or +17oral th rlloin n, the patari! all by entering the 1195cl Ti rol 71 m at !! woven clo I th ſmut hn of a girm nl,t! **116 !! el reloof formet 1) th foreofidate is il forests in * Tont. YTT 'to rul (Il ) tihcarlinth Afx for altri Th . TIHTI punherent by the hits So alan firms thinir of arge, this womLalangiloth CTTTT cl144 of th Om Ath? It i* f Insul fronth acts throw (IV 10)) with thauppala m uint1111. Itlerilly rs 2019 h 9 homilia•** (*refeth maintain (**) Ag21 hsilizue or the men da tha Vindhya lulla ६२३ । सायसे । ४ । १८० । FaiTTI OFFTITITITUTITI 023 'Ilic aflat fo conies after the ruota to be (II 00) proceded by the prepositions 150 Thus it to fit refron & rm of bang I. mor! 12 nn ir declinadi 19 at 14 i numcrated in th class of 1177 S 117. ६२४ । यो तसे । ४ । १८१ । fanfite 021 The aflix fa comes after the root m'to fade away (IV 103) prorlel by thc preposition fr 181 Thu fa+10+ fra fanfieri n mewur oft n, thanat e 12 angulis being the distuner b tre n th ext! I thonban! the liceu fins r. Sınılırly foufre from the room () rul ) ६२५ पदिप्रधिम्या नित् । ४ । १२ । पत्तिमतिषित • सियादीनाम्-'तीद। The afbr Fr comes after the roots 7 'to go(IT SO) and so to be fimous (I SO') and is trented as fare 152 Thns पद+ तिति a for man *+faye fafa: 'c libries, fima. The twt e h 13 rou JF I th agm nt be th Torsha Ta girea in the Si' lhantı huumul urdo III 3 103 S 3 SO, bu in Kisiri under VII ! ६६ । कूणात स्वश्च । ४ । १३ । हति।। 626 The illis fx co ncs after the root to tar(I33) of thich the long is shortenrd 183 Thes + farfar a lealb s bar for E43 Ta'cr, bles 20 ·306 TIE SIDDITANTA KUVUDI [PADA IV. 1835627. ६२७ । कृतकृपिभ्यः कीटन् । ४ । १८४ । किरीट पिरोपेष्टनम् । तिट सुवर्णम् । 'कृपीट कुशिधारिणी। 627. Tho aflis ott conies after the roots * 'to scatter, (VI. 110) त to cross orer (I 1016), कृम् 'to be reak' (I. 799) 181 Thus +फोटन् = शिरीटम् - a dindem a crown', तिरीटम् gold', कृपीटम the belly, water, forest'. Note -In the DaSapadi, the satra is read as कम कृपिञ्चपिभ्यः | Accord ingly, a fourth example is given there ay *** (to sliku)+10=aratasi ६२८ । रुधियधिकधिकुरिभ्यः कितच् । ४ । १८५ । पिमिष्टर । उपिवम् । फुषित परिमितम् । कुटित कुटिलम् । 628. The allix foram comes after the roots to 'to please' (T 781), वच् 'to speak (II 51), कुच 'to utter a shrill ery as a bird' (I 199, 200), कुट् 'to be erooked' (VI 73) 183 Thus सम् + फिवम् = कचितम् pleasing, agreeablo', व+फित - उचितम proper', the of the root undergoing smprisirana b for the affis having an indicatory क by VI 1 15S 2400 कुषितम् 'small, little', कुटितम् crooked. ६२९ । कुटि मुपिझ्या कमलन् । ४ । १६ । फुडूमतम् । कुप्मलम् । 629 Lhe allir कालन् comes after the 100th फुट् 'to be crooked' (VI 73) 2nd कुर् 'to pull out extract (II 6) 186 Thus कुट+मलम् = कुड्मत 'an opening bud tu the later, he!! कुष्मलम् cutting altat ६३० । कुपेर्लश्च । ४ । १८७ कुल्मल पापम् । 630 Ilie afix TT comes after the root the प् of wwwela s changesl to ल_ 157 Thus कुकमलन् - कुरमलम् 'sin' ६३१ । सर्वधातु- पोग्नुन् । ४ । १८८ । चेत । सरपय । सदः। 631 1 he aflis wyr comes after all roots 188 Thus चित् to percere (I 89) + गुरघेतम् 'consciousness', सरस् a pond from y to move' (III 16) it forins its fominine with ta thus viat'a laigalabe, tra' water milk from it to drink (IV 33) ve' an assembly, frotil सद to nyure, to cut (I 907) Other words are also thus formed by this affix as Toallight) from 'to shino' (I. 176), TET 'weeping' from 'to weep (II 58), वयम् ' age' from पी 'tego, to grow &c', (II 39), अगर प - ·PADA IV. 193 S 036.) THE UNADI AFFITI 807 food, boiled rico' from ' to brentho' (Il. 61), *** darkness, from * to fado' (IV. 03), TEH' courage' from the to endar (I. 905), 796 'nusirrity' from 17' to burn' (I. 1034), great' from 'to worship' (X 321), THE 'heaven' from mu' to injare' (1 789), awdust, powder, dict' from 'to color' (I 1018), the nasal of T* 19 chided, because the aflix 19,*** after this root, as is taught in the subacquent sätra IV. 216. The words mat, ad, mn and to ending in ware niso valid forms. They are derived by the allix vy (Pachadı), cxcept ty which is formed by क (पायें कपिधान). ६३२ । रपेरत एच्च । ४ । १८ । रेपोश्वदाम् । 632 Tho affix wit comes after tho root to speak distinctly, to praise (I. 128) of whicle w is replaced by to 189. Thus ta+wTetor 'low, vile &c'. See mantra utrarut where tho word is so explained in the gloss, ६३३ । अशेर्देवने युट छ । ४ । १० । fura erat i qui 633 The aſis wit comes after the root sya 'to perrado' (IV. 18) when the derivatire word means praise, and there is also the augment190 • Thus +39 +97=7#prary' 'The word dan incins pralec ६३४ । उटजेर्यले बलोपश्च । ४ । १९१ । tatt 031 The affix 91 comics after the root ym to make straight (VI 20) when the derivative word ineins strength. Thero 19 the elision of of the root also 101. Taug yx+57*** strength, power, light, aura ६३५ । श्वेः संप्रसारणं च । ४ । १८२ । सदा वसी। बलपर्यायोज्यम् । 035. The aflix styt comes aftor tho root fra to go, to swell, the q of which undergoes Samprasûlana (i, e. is changed to ). 192. Thus fu+7=7 strength'. This word is of the Deutcr gender. Its Nom. forms are 14, meit, Taifa. ६३६ । श्रयतेः स्वाङ्गे शिरः किच्च । ४ । १३ । थपतेः सिर धादेयोग्भुम्किन्छ । यिरा। सिरसी। 636. The alix 87 treated as fara comes after the root for to serro (I. 915) which is repaced by fat: when the derivative Ford means a part of the body. 193.

·308 E SIDDHASTA KAUMUDI (rada IV 1944 637 41 Thus fut T-Are the head'. Its Nim forms are fats, forci, fastfo The word forcending in is also a valid from, as for TTC गया पिरे (Vayu Purana) ६२७ । अर्तेरुच्च । ४ । ९९४ । C . 637 The alix 791 (treated as f) comes after the root to zo'(III. 16) wlucl is replaced by Ji 194 Tuus +997=ITq 'the breast excellent ६३८ । armat शुद् च । ४ । १९५। wat cat ! 638. The afix wyr comes after the root o'to go and also the augment y yhen the deu atio word means a diserse 105 Thus T+9+91=: piles' ६३८ । उदके नुट च । ४ । १९६ । घरमुस्यात्तस्य च जुट् । अर्थः । पर्णसी। 639 The allix wey comes after the root 'to go', and also the ruzments when the di rivative word 11 ans water 196 Thus +*+1=witr, strum flood. Its Nom forins are us wai, &c ६४२ । इण नागसि । ४ । १९७ । V: 1 010 The allir vit co nes after the root T' to go' (II 30), and also t'ie augment 17 rlien the derivative word monns 'sin' 197 Taus ++91-***'sın ६४१ । रिचेर्धने घिच । ४ । १८ । ATHRATT I forrige 1 271 577) 011 The allir vyt trented as fat comes after the root fry to purje' (VII 1) anl also tlo rugincnt , licu tho derituo word indicates 1970 196 The affix lxing treate 1 as fes, the sy of the root sa changed to (VII 3 52 S 2863) Trius Fre+15+ UT-F +3+watu 'scalth, gold. (Tboy being change ito by VUIT 4 9 S 107) Note -In Da42 It sritti tha augment se is not read into the natra, and tho crampile giren w fat, $aut ca. Ugsalidatha reals the poim as ·PADA. IV 202 9 645) TEE UNADI AFFIXZS, 309 richer dhano chit kichcha' and he gives the cxainplo fosse Bat they are both wrong. We fiod tho form 2 TE in the Vedas, as in feed for alle wati, ofte praeg :(Rs. VII. 4. 7). ६४२ चायतेरन्ने हस्वश्च । ४ । १। चनो मता। 612. The aflix sur comes after the root era 'to Torship, to discern' (I. 929), the long 5 of which is shortened to short y, and there is also the augmont when tho derived word has some reference to food. 199. Thus are +15+5=74+9+9=. Food, delight. Thoq of the root is elded by VI. 1. 66 S. 873 Vote –The word 13 * and not ou as wrongly given by tho author of Dasapadi vritti In the Vedas we find चमो दधिष्व पyas and मुवेदयिष्य *7*1 rith the dental 71 ६४३ । घशीड्भ्यां रूपस्वाङ्गयोः पुट् च । ४ । २०० । tut 643. The affix we comes after the roots 'to choose' (IX. 38), and it 'to sleep' (II. 22.) and also the augment ses when the derived words mean form' and a part of tho body' respectively. 200. *Thus +1+warię formº; A++ wyniu'tho penis, a testicle, & tail. Note - See the pantra stafarroarafia I The word das ending in w is also a valid forma, as in the verge TECT TEST THE ६४४ । सुरिभ्यां तुट् च । ४ । २०१। Ftat i tat 644 The affıx 57 comes after tho roots to go, to flow' (I 987) and it' to trickle' (IV. 30), and also the augment पों कपम् । TETE TE: 201. Thus 5 972 tag 'current', the senses tart a flow, current, the semen, the quick silver. ६४५ । पातेर्षले जुट् च । ४ । २०२ । पानापाजसी। 645 The affix wit comcs after the root 'to protect' (II. 47), and also the augment , when the derived word means strength'. 202. Thus +5+41= (strength) Its Nom. forms are the et &c. Ujjvaladatta reads the augment as Te but it is incorrect. In the mantra turn the (Rv. III. 27. 28) the letter 13 w and not r?

·810 THE SIDDIANTA KAUMUDI [PADA IV 2035646 ६४६ । उदके धुट् च । ४ । २०३ । पाया। 646 The affis y comes after the root or to protect and the augment y wlien the derived word nieans 'viter' 203 Thus पा+घुट्+मुन् = पायस् water A KI 104 ६४७ । अन्ने च । ४ । २०४ । पायो भक्तम्। 647 The alix and the augmert ge come after thio root ar to proteot when the derived froid means food 2018 Thus पा+पु+शसुन्-पायस् food ६४७ । प्रदेनु धौ च । ४ । २०५ । अर्भक्त माध्येमुन्मुभागमो धादेशच । अन्धोजनम् । 648 The affix star and the augmente come after the root w' to eat' (II 1), the of which is changed to when * the derived word means 'food' 205 Thus +म+मुन्-अघम् food AK II 948 ६४ । स्कन्देश्व स्वाङ्गे। ४ । २०६ । स्काधारकापसी। 619 The alix wit comes after tho root fm 'to go to bo drg' (1 1028), tuo of which is Chianged to when the derived word refers to a part of the body' 206 Thus का अनुरस्कन्धम् the shoulder Its Nom forms arc E*TT, स्कन्धसी ६५ । पाप फर्माख्यायाम् । ४ । २०७ । कर्माख्याया स्वो मुद् च पा । अमः । श्रपा । पाहुसकाए । पापा पापणी। 650 The affis not and optionally the augment se como after llo root ry 'to pervade (V 14, the lon, of which 19 shortened to sliort thon thc derived word rofers to fork' 207 T! us साप+मुम्+समुन् =षाम् or without the augment जुन पप Hor! sacrific al act or rite form shapu By the forco of agar (diversely) which gorerns all Unndi satrng the long wt is neither shortened inor the augma nt to added to tho root are, before the afiरजमुम् Thos UTTE 18 formed It is of the Neuter gender an 1 meang water 810 a religious ceremony Its Nom forms aro 1, मारपीkc ६५१ । रूपे जुद्ध । ४ । २८ । प्रात्री or 'form' ·811 PADA. IV 214 $ 657.) THE UNADI AFFIXER. VFR 1 651. The nflix *IT and the augment como after the root sta (to pervade), the long st of which is shortcard to y when tho derived word means 'shape' or 'form'. 208. Thug sg+r+1=TANF (shape, beauty). Tter of the rout is changed to by VIII. 4. 5.4. S. 52 ६५२ । उदके नुम्भौ च । ४ । २० । 652 The affix wyr and the augment 4 como after the root sure the g of which is replaced by w, and the long w is shortened to y, when the derived word means 'water. 209. Thus wra+*+91=THE 'Water'. ६५३ । नहेदिवि भश्च । ४ । २२० । T! 653. The aflix sur comes after the root of 'to bind (IV.57), the g of which is replaced by *4, when the derived word means the sly'. 210. Thus += 'the sky'. ६५४ । इण भागोऽपराधे च । ४ । २११ । TE TITUUT 654. The affix were comes after the root 'to go' (IL. 36) which is replaced by **, when the derived word means fault, a wrong act. 211, Tbus T+U=+19=WIT'fault, offence, e1n'. ६५५ । अमेहुंक्च । ४ । २१२ । 655. The aflix wit comes after the roots to go'(I. 493), and also the augment 1. 212 Thus &+*+7=57 a sin, trouble, anxiety, care &c. ६५६ । रमेश्च । ४ । २१३ । 656 The affix *7 and the augment come also after the root t'to play' (I. 906) 213. Thus +*+5=tr enjoyment, speed, eagerness, violence. ६५७ । देशेग्ह च।४। २१४ । रमन्तेऽस्मिारहा। 057. The affix comes after the root te (to play) the of which is changed to when the derived word meansa place, 214. Thus **+ *99=tra '& deserted, lonely or hiding place; a secret, my. atery, solitudo &c', ·a14 TEE SIDDHANTA KAUNODI UNODI (PADA IV 223 666. The difference between wfs and ST 18 in accent only. otherwise the forms are the saiñe A foot joined with an upagarga is called mithunan Thus Tor formed by 97 Un IV. 190, but stig under the prescat sutra. Similarly मुपयस् । सुस्रोतस् &c. ६६६ । नजि हन एहं च । ४ । ३ । अनेहाः । भनेहसौ। 666. The affix wit comes after tho root r 'to kill' (II 3) preceded by the negative particle 11, and the root v 18 replaced by of 223 Thus + seawatert fere (without a rival, incomparable, 'pot killed or destroyed or obstructed). Its Nom. 19 mins by VII. 1. 94 S 276 Its Nom Dual is witrat. ६६७ । विधाज़ो वेध छ । ४ । २२४ । fagytatta a 667. Tho affix vfu comes after the root fours ('to hold (III. 10) preceded by Fat) and the root for is replaced by as 224. Thas font to wis = ++f='the creator, Namo of Brahman'. Its Nom. sing 19 @UTI I ६६८ । नुवो धुट् च । ४ । २२५ । मोषा: 668. The affix asi comes after the root ."to praise (II. 26), and there is also the augment se 220 Thus +T+wfe eate the panegyrist. In tho Jantra mim stefa ver the word nodhah 15 explained in the Neruktı by mitut soft warfar the Rishi is called nodhas or he who pr 41509 ६६९ । गतिकारकोपपदयोः पूर्वपदाकृतिस्वरत्वं च । ४ । २२६ । असित स्याह । गुसपा । भावेदाः । 'गतिकारजोरपदार' () गुत्तरपप्रकृति स्वराये पति परयानुदात्तत्य माप्त दरवायामिवर । Thc affix ofer comes after compound words which hage for thoir first member either a gats Trord, or when the upapada is a haraka ; and tho first member retains its original accent. 228. This sQira regulates accout. Thus it reg 'to burn (1 1031) +afrag'ner Similarly nairy from fr (II 65 and VI. 138) B: VI 2 139 S 2973 compound words those first member is a gulo proposition or a Karaha noun, retain the accent of their adeund member, And the first member bocom anali*ia. Thue sotra makes an caciption 669 ·PADA. IV. 2325,675 } TRE UNADI AFFIXES 815 , to it and declares that each compounds, when we formed, retain the accent of their first member, and the second member becomes anudatta. ६७०. चन्द्रमो डिव । ४ । २२० । चन्द्रोपपदामाकोडसिः स्यारस पदित । पदमाः। 670. The affix afer treated as far comes after the root भी 'to measure' (III. 6 and IV. 34) preceded by the word चन्द्र as upapada. 227. Thus चन्द्र+मा+असिचन्द्रमा प्रतिस्पन्द्रमम् 'the moon, a month, camphor'. It N. S. is maar de toatete pl. ******* i Haradạtta explains it by चन्द्रवत अमृतं च दिव भीयते प्रती। ६७१ । वयसि धानः। ४ । २२८ । षयोधास्तपणा 671. The affix for treated as for comes after the root 4 'to hold (III. 10) preceded by the word षषस् as upapada. 228 Thus पयम् +था+असिवयोधम् (a young man); its Nom. sing is पयोधाः ६१२ । पयसि च । ४ । २२९ । पयोपा समुद्रो मेवा 672. Tho affix wfe treated as for comes after the root ni (to hold) preceded by the word nie as upapada 229 Thus पयस्+या+अतिपयोपस् (the octan, a rain cloud), its Nom. sing. is पयोधाः। ६७३ । पुरसि च । ४ । २३० । पुरोधा। 673. The affix wfe treated as fore comes after the root v (to hold) preceded by the word पुरस् as upapada. 230. Thus पुरस्+या+अपि-पुरोधस् (a family priest, particularly that of a king). Its Nom. sing. is yttets : ६७४ । पुरूरवाः । ४ । २३१ । पुरमादस्व दीर्घा रोवेरसिश्च निपाश्यते । 674. The word gitare (the Nom. sing, of which is guar) is irregularly formed with the affix «f&. 231, The short of gris elongated before the root o'to sound' (II. 24) to which the affix हि is added. Thus पुस्++ प्रसि= पुहरयस् 'the gon of Badha and Ild and founder of the lunar race of kings. ६०५ ॥ चर्बहुलं शिच्च । ४ । २३२ । चा. 675. Tho affix of which is diversely treated as fw comes after the root ***to observe' (IL.'7).* 232 ·316 TEE SIDDEIXTA XAUNUDI. (PADA IV 138 5070 Thus +*+afety'a God, lit. sceing or guidiog men'. By the affix being treated as for, at gets the designation of Sar Fadhâtuka (III.4 113 S 2166), henco 18 not changed to ver, as 19 the cago when the affis 19 not treated as far Thus ***+ WETETT (a nomo of Prajapatı). Its N 3 19 494701 ६७६ । उषः कित् । ४।२३३ । 676, The affix safe comes after the root o 'to burn' (1 727) and 19 treated as fad. 233. Thos TOY the dawn'. Notel-In the Dasapadı, the sätra is read as a fat ie the affix «f« treated as face comes after the root or (to dwell) Thus + aforemo Before w beginning afhxes it is declined like store, as wynefits See Vårtika ter under VII. 4 48 ६७७ । रमेरुनसिः। ४ । २३४ । 677 The affix sefe comes after the root 'to control, to restrain' (IV 9:4) 234 Thus **+onfer="UTT'fire. See A. K. I. 1 59 for the rersoppf &c Sometimes there 19 lengthening of the e, as in it (Rv. V.4 18) Where damQpah is explained by Tante permanent charitably disposed, generous, or controlled of mind. Weet wat agt(RY V.42 12) The Dasápadi gives the sâtra as it was with long s1 According to it, the word with short 3 19 a diversity. ६७८ । अङ्गतेरसिरिरुहागमश्च । ४ । २३५ । wfii 678 Tho affix who comes after the root i(to go) and also the augments and F. 235 Thus sx (I. 155) +me+wfuafifts (the name of & celebrated Bage who composed some of the vardika hymns) ६७६ । सर्वैरप्पूर्वादसि । ४ । २३६ । T: I start yfH : SETI 679 The affis afp comes after the root 'to more' (III. 17) preceded by the word , 236. Thus rep**free (a celestial damsel), its Nom. sing. 15 TTT The word 19 said to bo gererally plural, ey II The singular 15 ending in long ari ·ma.T.SSS TRENADIATIXES. 817 . ६८० । विदिभुजिम्यां विश्वे । ४ । २३७ । विश्ववेदाः। रिषभोगाः। 680. The affix afo comes after the roots for 'to know (II. 55) and मुम् 'to feed, preserve' (VII. 17), when preceded by the word विश्ष. 237. 'Thus विश्व+विद्+असिविष घेदस् 'Firo', its Nom. sing. is घिरव घेदा। lit. he who knows all (formet afar). So also forretny 'Indra'. lit. he who preserves all fara TVA I The forms forradt and forma vitatu given by Ujjvaladatta, with the locative casc-sign anelided, by virtue of VI. 3. 14. S. 972, does not appear to be correct. The locative of former is, with fewe In the following there is no locative siga : -dtet were firmatan and sपामगा प्रहरी विषमोजाः । ६८१ । वशः कनसिः । ४ । २३८ । प्रसारणामाः 681. The affix «*fer comes after the root (to desire). 238. Thus ro (II. 70)+ erfgene (Name of Şukra). Its Nom. sing. is OUT दुरादिषु चतुर्थ पादा। . CHAPTER V. - ६८२ । अदि भुवो डुतच । ५।१। 682. The affix हुस comes after the root (to be) preceded by u (an Indeclinable, meaning sudden). 1. Thus अध+जुत-स+उतषतम् (curious). The affix having an indicatory + causes the elision of the vowel of the root . ६८३ । गुधेरूमः । ५।२। गोधूमः। 683 The affix t comes after the root IT'to wrap up, envelope' (IV. 13). 2. Thus ru+मगोपून: 'wheat, the orange'. ६४ । मसेसरन् । ५।३। मसूरा मय पादे घसेरन 'मरे' या पाल्यावा। 664. The affix **1 comes after the root 'to veigh, mea. Bure' (IV. 112). 8. - ·४18 TRB BIDDBAXTA KIUNODI. (Easi.143685 7 Thas 48+*E= a kind of pulsę, a pillow By Un&d I 43, It was taught that the aftes y comes'after the root ny giving the form मसुरs with shorts | Thus we have two forms. ६८५ । स्थ किच्च । ५।४। स्यूरो मनुष्य 685 The affix e comes after the root far to stand (I 975) and is treated as far Thus स्थानमाल-स्पर 'a man' As the affix is कित, it causes the eligion of the long *7 of the root In the Alantra Freea mat mat a ti (Ry IV 21 4) the word sthdra 19 explained by sthola · fat, bug, steady. तेरतिः । ५।५। पावि स्वामी साता पधिराज 686 The affix sfa comes after the root or 'to protect' (II. 47) 5 Thus पा+शति-पाति: ' master, lord, husband, सम्पादित (the lord of birds) ६८७ । वातेर्नित् ।५।६। 'पातिरादित्यसोभयो । 687 The affix wa comes after the root ar to move, to blow and is treated as fore 6 Thus att fastifa: 'the sun, the moon' Se Rabhasa Kosha for the line वातिरादित्यसोभयो।। ६८८ । अर्तेश्च । ५।। प्रारतिवेगा। 688 The affix sfa comes after the root (to go) and is treated as foret 7. Thus « (III 16)+ afarafar. dissatisfied languid' ६८९ । तहे को हलोपश्च । ५।। . । 689 Tho affix ty comes after the root or 'to injure, hurty kıll' (VI 58) of which the 15 olided 8. Th 19 (Teqvs grass No gana as the affixsचित । ६८० । अनुटित निताहिस्य उलग्तयहरप । ५।। दिवाने पुटपने साप बापावरदिबा बाहुना) 600 Tuo atlix y comes after tho roots to chooso' (V 8) Pe 'to roll ( 336), इन् 'to spread (VIII I), and ar to beat' X. 43), Fluch aro replaced by me, O ·PADA 5. 133 004) To: UXADI IMTIxXJ. 810 Thogy or se or may be rettigette an: 'sico' lt. ebat which 19 picked, or rolled, or stretched or thrashed. Nola ---Although by Uñadı IV. 107 (wait ft &c), the word om was irregularly formed, yet tho difference between the word formed under that atra and tho ono formed under the pecsent eütra consists in tlid position of tho accent. The afliz sny of the prestat aatra, being for places tho accent on the last syllable (VI. 1 '163 S. 3710), wher cag tho accent was placed on the middle agllable of meta formed uader IV. 107 by forco of RTITET. (III. 1. 3. S. 8708). ६९१ । दसैप्टटनी न मा छ । ५। १० । Serti apatill 691. T'ho affixes t and a como after the root (to scrTC), of which tho is changed to 5. 10. Thus, tetr Or Terör or rar's slave, n servant'. The y of tho second aſfix shows that the accent should be placed on the first syllablo. Tho attix having an indicatory e shows that the word tika the aliz vrt ap forming its feminino. Thus Turtata atat. ६.१ । दशश्च । ५।११। दामो पीपरा .692 Tho affixes and operations applicable to me by tho last sûtra, also apply to TTT (to bitc). 11. Thus + or Treat or fara fisherman'. ६६३ । उदि धेसिः । ५ । १२ । *<7fETTUTTEUTATII 003 T'ho affix eft comes after the root fe 'to collcct, to pick up' (V. 5) preceded by the proposition t. 12. Thus c fx+for the afix having an indicatory counce tho chsion of the fe portion of the root' + tverly'londig, bigh, aboro'. 18 an I declinable, being enumcrated in the list of words beginning with *** (I. 1. 37. S. 437). ६४ानी दीर्घश्च । ५। १३ । 691 Thc artis pra comes after the root fo (to collect) proceded by for of which tlie short ris elongated. 13. Thus fafetofoanh 'loer, below. This word is also on Indoo linable. ६५ । सौ रमैः तो दमे पूर्वपदस्य घ दोपः । ५। १४ । ritratta di FTE formanfrotto TI THIETI 29 ·320 THX SIDDATTA KIOLODY (PADI Y. 14 693 603. The affix * conies after the root or to play (I 906) preceded by 3 when the word so formed refers to puiashment. The short of ris elongated 14 The affir having an indicatory = causes the elison of the 24sal () of the root Thua TPTT: "kindly disposed, calm". ६९६ । पूजो यपयुक्हस्व च।५।१५। यस्मात्या पुरवर। 696. Tho aflix e comes aftor the roots to purify, to cleanse (IX. 12) and also the augment ry The long vowel of the root becomes shortened 16. Thus +55+ virtuous deed, boly, sacred, para Sto's ६६७ । स्रसे. शि कुट् किञ्च । ५। १६ । med for at treats foreret i fart 697. The affix at treated as fara comes after the root L to fall or drop down, to slip off or down' (L. 790), and also the augment कुद The root 18 replaced by Fr. 16 Thus Etnofe+370fmct's loop or swing made of rope, a barden or load carried 10 a sling'. The afix being treated as faz prevents guna taking place, ६ । प्रत. क्युरुष्च।५।१७॥ उसीमेपा। 698 The aflix y comes after the root = 'to go' (III 10), and croplaces the of the root 17 Thus +=YTTI & sheep or ram The which replaces x 15 followed by by I. 1 51 S 70 The I becomes by VII 11 S 1247. ६ हिरीरनीरचौ।५।१८। frota igrati 699 lhe alises fry and to come after the root forg' to kıll, to injure' (VII 19) 18. Thos fita + try or fre=frett: or fritti'a tiger, a wicked man', Nole --The two affixes indicate different positions of the accent १०० । उदि दृणातेरजलो पूर्वपदान्त्यलोपश्च । ५। १९ । 700 The allixes Tv and ser come after tho root to teor (IX 23) preceded by the proposition se, of which the last 19 letter ( e ) is elded Thus or stay or more or other the stomach'. Note--The two affixes fndicate different positions of scoot VI 1 193 S. 2676 and VI 1 163 S. 8T10. 1 ·PADA V. 255706] TIE UVADI ATFIXES 321 उदात्त. ७०१ । हित्पनेर्मुट् स चोदात्तः । ५। २० । धनल् च हिस्स्थाद्धातोर्मुद स चोदात्तः । मुखम् । 701 . The affixes च and प्रल treated as हित come after the root up to dig (I. 927), and also the augment se which is 20 •Thus न+मुं+पघू or अल्-+7+मुखम् (the mouth. The affixes being treated as fac cause the clision of the fe portion of the root, tho augment being sc is placed in front of the root. Quere-Wbet is the necessity of two afixes here, any of them would have been enough. सन् २१ प्रसा 702 The aflix o comes after the root aq 'to go' (I. 493). 21 Thus u+सन् = the shoulder'. ७०३ । मुहः सो मूर्च। ५। २२ । भूः। 703. Tho affis to comes after the root st to be confused (IV. 89) which is replaced by t. 22 Thus 1+0= 'an igporant man' ७०४ । नडलोपश्च । ५। २३ । ७०२ । अमेः मरत. 704 The afis or comes after the root are to bind (IV 67) of which the is elided 23 Thus न+navra nait' ७०५ । शीडो इस्त्रश्च । ५। २४ । शिसा 705 The affix v comes after the root भी to sleep (II. 22) of which the long # is shortened Thus भी+रा--पिता "the perk of a mountain , the wick of a candle', the creat Nole -No guna takes placejag thelshortening of the root ivowel has been specifically ordained. ७०६ । माङ जो मय च । ५।२५। मयूरः। 706 The aliserer comes after the root to measure (III 6) which is replaced by FI 26. Thus ita' a ray of light, beauty, flame'. 41 ·322 THE SIDDHAXTA KAUMUDI IPADAV 265707. 909 । पालिगलिभ्यां फगस्योच्च । ५ । २६ । फुलफा शरीरावयवो रोगछ । गुरुफा पादनम्यिा। 707. The affix फ comes after the roots 'to count, to sourd', (I. 526), and set to eat (I. 579) and the correl of tuc roots is replaced by उ. 26. Thus +फफ्फुल्फा'disease', शुरुष: ' the anale'. ७०८ । स्पृशेः श्वएशुनौ पृ घ । ५। २७ । थपगुमो मत्ययो '' इत्यादेशः । 'पाश्री र योधा'। पर्णरायुधम् । 708. The affixes खण and yr come after the root m to touch' (VI. 128), which is replaced by 27. Thus रूपम् +खण्+रवण = पार the part of the body b low the arm. pit'. प+शुन् =+गुन्-प: an axe', a weapon'. 90८ । श्मनि श्रयतेईन् । ५। २८ । मम्वन्दो मुरापापी । मुरुमात्रयते इति रमनु । 709. The affix जुन् comes after the root पि' to serre' (I. 945) preceded by मन् (face) 28 Thus नए+मिश्नरमय हुन् मध। 'mousinche and board' Irlorally, that which serves the faca'. The afix having an indicatory * causes the cligion of the fe portion of the roob. ११० । अम यादयश्च । ५। २० । धथुमपन्जतम्। 710. The words मधु (tearsjdo are irregularly formed. 29. Note --According to some, this word 13 formad by adding tho ntfix पर to the rootu (to purrnde). According to others, this word is formed by adding tho afix ut to the root fa preceded by the negative particlo ** But tu opinion of Ujjraladatta as to the formation of this word from the root or with the augment and tho atlir YT 19 incorrect. Siuco the alüx has an indicator; z it will causa thu clision of the whole rout in whose stend will be lift a zero only १११ । जनेष्टन्लोपष। ५। ३० । 711. Tho allis et comes after the root ay 'to beget' 30. (IV. 11), the 7 of Fhich is olideil Thusa+Ramermitted haur'. १२ | मरास्प जम्मए । ५। ३१ । परयो बहादेपा पदाए । महा। 712 The alix ar comes after the root ot(to beget) which is replaced by 'T 32.. . मटा। ।

·PDIA V. 355716.] THE CYADI AFFIXES. Thus **+9+07 Tho fiminino of tbs will b3 77 leg from the ankle to ths knes by IV. 1. 4.5 451. ७१३०। हन्तेः शरीराययये वे च । ५। ३२ । अपनम् । 'पहाग्निता सोकटया मोरे अपर पुरत' । 718 Iho alis se comes after the reduplication of root to kill (II 2), when the derived word, refers to a part of tho body. 32 Thus,*7+7+Wasantho hip and the loins'. Nole -Thot 13 changed to by VII. 3 63. S 430. Sno AmarakoshalI.674 for the verso पाद विम्या पीपमा। सीपुर ७१४ । लिगेरन लो लोपश्च । ५। ३३ । सकारस्य लोपः किया। 711. The nux y comes aftor tho root लिम् to torment, to distress, to be afflicted, to suffer (LX50) thor of which Is elded. 33 Thus झिए+प-वेशhair' ७१५ । फलेरितगादश्च पः। ५। ३४ । पतितस् । •715. The afinर त comes after the root पन् 'to succerd' (I 563) of which the initial letter (*) is replaced by s. 3. Thuy +रतच पलितम् 'grey hair ११६ । कृमादिभ्यः संज्ञायां वुन् । ५। ३५ । पारका-करका । फरक मरम्-भरका । 'भरको नारजोरपि विविधोया । भर गगनस् । फोरका कोर 716 The alix 57 comes after the roots 'to do' (I. 940) dc. when the words so formed refer to tho names of somo olyects 35. Thus +बुनकर+प (VII 11.S.1247, which ordarns the ruletttation of a for thonflix चुम्) -करका 'the water por of an ascetic'. Is feminino फरका formed with टाप् means hail stone, So also **: 'A braa let of gold' from * to rain' (I. 315), , TC or माकम् 'hollfrom 'to carry' (1 817), 12 the Deirûpakosha, there is also the word मारक TEST' the shy' from 'to move' (III. 17), *t or wty'a bad, ap anblown flower' from FI 'to sound' (VI. 51) ११७ । चीशयतेराद्यन्तविपर्ययश्च । ५ । ३६ । कोषको वभेद ·324 TAE SIDDHANTA KAUHUDI (PADA V. 30 6717. . 717. The afix y comes after the root site to suffer (X. 284) the first and second consonants of which clango places. 36. Thus घी+तुन फीषक: (a bamboo). ११८ । पचिमच्योरिच्चोपधायाः।५।३७ । पेचका मेषफः। 718 The affix it comes after roots ro 'to cook' (I. 2015) and to be wicked, to cheat (I. 18u), to the penultunate letters of which is added re. 37. This 7+7=74+w=69'an onl', ô's peacock, the moon'. ११९ । जमेररष्ठ च । ५। ३८ । जटर। 719. The aflis, comes after thoroots to beget' (I 802), the of which is replaced by a 38 Thus + TEHTY 'the womb'. ७२० । वचिमनिभ्यां चिच्च । ५ । ३० । पटरो भूखः । 'पटरो भुमिणोपडयो' । विदादिरयाग्माटर० । गर्गादियामाटर्यः । 720 The afix ve trented as fea comes after tho roots are * to speak' (II. 51) and to hnow' (IV. 67), tho last Ictters of vluch are replaced by a 39 Thus += '&n ignorant or n cunning mın', a coch sage, intoxicated, drunk. The form 174T 13 also correct ng thut is read in the Ganapatha in the fa577 c1198 (IV. 1. 201). Tho form até 19 also corrcct as it belongs to the miraclass of the Ganapatha. ७२१ । सर्जियातेरलपी पूर्वपदान्तलोपश्च । ५. ४ । 'बई रायो। 721. Tho affiros vor and come aftor tho root vdrl.to tcar' (IX. 23) preceded by the last letter of which is clıded. TUT 10. Tho tto Aflixos mark the difference in accent. Thug 5+ TI O Traser'a bravo mano, or a Rakshisa'. ७२२ । फदरादयश्च । ५।४१ । TESTIT former 722 The ords (granary) de arc irregularly formol Trith thc alires to and from tho root (to tear) vith the Iudcclinnulee kri, mrl and sri. 1 ·PADA V 47 $728.. TEB UNADI AFFIXBs. 325 . Thus g+E+अ or पच-दर granary', to+a+शत् or अधूप *sporting', ++थल् or पच्दर ' a snake' ७२३ । हन्तेयुनावग्तयोर्धत्यतत्वे । ५। ४२ । पावनो मारमा 723 rphe affix v comes after the rooot दम् (to kill), the first letter of which (z c ) is changed to and the second (ie ) to 42. Taus इन्+पुन्- पतनसम् (VII. 1. 1 8 1247)-पासमा 'a Laller ७२४ । अमिगमिक्षमिभ्यस्तुन्यद्विश्च । ५।४३ । मान्दा पथी। गान्नुः पथिका ज्ञातुर्मयकः । 724 The affix at comes after the roots to step (I. 602), me (to go), to forgive' to endure, to suffer' (I. 469), and causes Vriddhi 13. Thus a+तुन् सातुः (a burd), गातु ' a traveller', पान - a mosquito'. ७२५ । हर्यतेः फायन्हिरध् । ५ । ४४ । कयामत्यय । हिपबम् । 723 The alliy muy comes after tho root vo to go, to le tured (I.817) which is replaced by हिर Tus दर्य + कन्यत् - हिरच् + अन्य-हिरपयस (gold) ७२६ । पुनः पासः । ५। ४५ । कोष । यित्वादिस्वारकास पत्र। 726 The allis ute comes after the root * 'to do' (VIII. 10) 45. Thus + पास कर्पाः 'cotton' The word Fray (cloth) is formed by adding the affix vण to कर्पास by IV 3. 136 s 1516 ७२७ । जनेस्तु रश्च । ५ । ४६ । अईस्ती योनिछ । 727. The aflix comes aftor the 100t 7 (to beget), the of which is changed to 46 Thus जन्+तुज : an elephant, the female organ of generation'. The word in the strz is exhibited without any case aflix ७२८ । कतिर्डः। ५।४। . उ । 728. The affixe comes after the root out to cover (II. 80). 47 Thus ******* (the causes the elision of the fe of the root) It forms its feminine by the affia ty, Thus ad + tre sout' wool, a circle of hair between the eye brows.

·326 THE BIDDIIANTA KAUMUDI, [PADA V.488729 । धाग्य ७२९ । दधासर्यभुद्ध । ५। १८ । 729. The affix up and tlo augmente come after the root पा to hold (III. 10) 48. Thus धा++यत्-धाम्यम् ' wheat, barley, paddy. ७३ । जीर्यः निश्च यः।५।। 'जिवि सालपक्षिणो' । माहुलका इलि च' (३५४) पति दर्शन। 730 The allir time comes after the root to grow old (IX 21), and I replaces the 5 of the root 1.9 Thus r+कि शिर (VII. 1. 100. S, 2 890)+ क्रिम् - जिय+रिल-शिदि। "Time, bird'. By the force of which governs the Unldı safras, the penultimate of fort is not elongated, as is required by VIII, 2.77 S 354. मथ्यतेयलोपी मश्चापतुटू चालः। ५। ५० । पण्यवेलमत्यपा स्यातस्यापतुमामो धातोर्यलोपो नकारद्यान्यस्य । ममापतालो विषये। 731. The affix शाल and the augment आपतु comes after the root arato bind' (I 541), of which is olidod and the final letter (sc 4) Is replaced by न. 50. Thus माय + पापन+पाल = मम+भात+पाल - ममापताल: an object of gense १३२ । जेः कीफन् । ५। ५१ । एजीम इन्द्रो मछ। 732. The aftix tit comes after the root came to go' (I. 189) 51 ? Thus q+कीकर-जीका 'Indra, smoke'. ७३३ । तनोतेर्डतः सन्यच्छ । ५ ३ ५२ । 'तित सिमाये। 733. Thc aflix diu which is treated like the Desideratiro affix ve comes niter PA TOOLS Beasil VII 1) - Thus a+तता उतित (the ft being tirded by the alur haring an indicatory sites-तित 'n Blove, a parasol' The wof the redupltcate is changed to r by Sanyadbhava (VII 4 79 8 2017). Thus 19 010 of those rare words in which tito vowels in juxtaposition do not coalesc". The word is both masculine and neptcr. ७३४ । अर्भकप्पुकपाफा वयसि । ५। ५३ । '' हो। तो पुन् । मनाप्पातादेशः । भय कुमगांप्रसारलचा पिते कन् । 731. The nords wiss (A boy, child, the young of an aninın!), 737 (chuld) and 91** (a child, young ono) wuco referring to 'ago,' aro irregularly formed. 13. - ·PADA V.583187.1 THE UNIDI IRRIXE. 327 . Thu my to increasa' (IV. 135) + Tra+remix the r" replitced by). st' to increasi, ri99' (1. 802) ****y (thun mergoing trenmpra. paramo before the aflix having an indicators *}**** Ty". पा 'to drink" (1. 072)+*10Y a suckling child, or n grown tip clulil. ५३५ । प्रवद्यायमाधमार्यरेफाः मुत्यिते । ५। ५४ । पनि यद । पवन । प्रपतेरमा । पाप पापमा | सना | सतायो । रिफलेतीदादिकाफ। 735. The trords पक्ष (censurable), पपप (sinful, wicked), (lor, mean), मर्थन (mean) and Rs (lor, riley ard irnegur larly formed rhon they refer to 'censurable conduct. BI. 'Thus, with the negativo particles, to tho root' lo spunt (1 1058) 19 added thosmrat, प्रवद्+क्ष-पवाग अप् 'to protect (I. 631)+सम्पमा । The cofthe root m 1sreplaced by u, thou we geb the form अपन. 'to go' (III 16)+प, Nom. S. सी . Texto boast, to soun«!' (VI. 23).+ 19 *low, rile, contemptibis. Tho root /fr belongs to tho Tula th class. ७३६ । लीरीहोईखः पुट् च तरी परामुत्सनयोः । ५ । ५५ । तरो मत्ययो क्रमारतो धागोस्वामस्ययस्य पुट। सित रिपटरि कुश्मित । 730. The affires ward come respectively after the roots सी (IV. 31) to stick, to melt and a to injure, to horl' (IV. 30), tho long rowol(i e. t) of which is shortened, and they receiro the augment पुट्, when they refer to .clinging to, adhering to,' and censurable continct' respectively 55. Thus eff+x=f6+ 4 = forme besmeared, ndhered, joined" + ररि++ररिम 'sun, Impurity'. ७३७ । तिगेरीचोपधायाः फन्लोपश्च लो नाग्च । ५। ५६ । जियो कायापशया इत्यं सत्य लोपो सामानशीनाशो साहित्यात पिलर 737. Tlio affix*y comes after the root farm to be afflicted, to suffer (IL.50), the penultimate of which is replaced uy long faud is clided, and the augment माम् is added. 56. Thus हि +को+मा++कीगायः (a,name of Yama). It is not clear why an nfix baring an indicatory * has been taught in thig kůtra, for the guņation would bare been presented by the penultimate of tho root being ordered to get the t long. ७३८ । भनोतेराफर्मणि यरट् च । ५। ५५ । पगारापारावर । सिर!

·399 THL SIDDITA ST. KAUNUDI. (PADA 1.67 $ 789. पद 788. Tho affix comes aftor, the root 'to porrado' (V. 18) whon tlio ford formed from it rofors to 'baring the power of granting succoss soon'. 57. By tho force of in the satra, the penultimato letter 19 replaced by f (as in the last stra) Thus y+प-रिपर: 'God'. The feminine will be smn with all as tho alfixjis fer. The accent is in the middlo (III 1.3 S, 3708) for all afixes are Adgudattı As a general rule Tho word tract may be the feininino of বি also The latter is formed by adding afre to tu and is changed to by IV. 1. 7. S. 456. Tho accent hero is on the first syllable : for Fanip and nip are accent less. But iftorit beformed by adding #ta (g'atit- EU) then the accent 19 on the final Thug tract or fria or fract: Tha word frakt formed by the afix any added to the roat to under III. 2. 175. S 3155 makes its feminino trets with trg (58 a) ५८ । क । हन्ते रन् घश्च । FT DITEUTETET RETT: Fuit varat turi penerasfafafirfefa VITRI 58 (a) Thenfis ta 19 added to the root r to go (II 2) and the letter 19 substituted for the final Thus 7+text housu lit. that which is visited by guests. It 18 & Dasapadt satra ७३८ । घतेरुरन् । ५। ५८ । चत्वारा, 739 The aflis otcomes after the root v to beg (I. 018) 58 Thus 4-877egs (four) its Nom pl is 9747T: (VII 1. 08. S 331) Note --The und T10 the affix ory are for the sale of accent, for the purpose of this stra could have been served by simply saying the affix उर' &c. instead of उरन् 9४२ । माततेररन् । ५। ५८ । 740. The affis very comes after the root sa 'to go' (I 38) preceded by the preposition . 59 Thus +7+7= wag morning. It is an Indeclinable, being enumerated in the list of words beginning with Fly &c. (I. 1 57. S 447). Note -The vi portion of the aftis 19 used for accent, as in the last sutra. १४१ ! अमेस्तुट् च ।५।६०। शस्तनध्यम् । 7,11, Tho aflis e comes after the root 'to go' (I. 493) und there is also the augment or in the middel wat ·PADAV 665747] TIE UNADI AFFIXFS 829 . . ७४२ । दहे! लोपो दश्च नः । ५। ६१ । गमत्ययो धातोरस्त्यस्य लोपो दकारस्य नकारा। मगः । 742. The affix ग comes after the root दद् 'to burn' (I. 1040), the final letter (C) of which is elided, and is changed to * 61. Thus द+गनगा 'a mountain, the sun &c' १४३ । सिचेः संज्ञायां हनुमो कश्च । ५। ६२ । गिवतेः कमस्ययो इकारादेशो मुम्प स्यात् । सिका। 748 The aflix a comes after the root free to sprinllo' (VI 140) when the word derived from it denotes the name of a thing'. The of the root is replaced by r and there is also the पुम् augment 62 Thus पिच् + मुम्+क-सिहा ' lion'. 9२४ । च्याडि प्रातेश्च जाती।५। ६३ । फमश्यय स्यावा व्याघ्रः। 744 The aflix comos after tho root or to snırll' (I. 973) when picceded by faand and when the word formed refers to a jati (ee a class of animals) 63. Thus fa + TE++=5170 ' & tiger'. The affix having an indicatory causes the eligion of the final vowel of the root ७४५ । हन्तेरपुर । ५। ६४ । पोरम् । 715 The affix at comes after the root ri(to kill) wluch is replaced by पुर् 64 Thus पम् +अ =पुर+प पोर "fearful, dangerous . ७४६ । क्षमेरुपधालोपश्च । ५। ६५ । चादमा 716 The affix v comes after the root s' to endure, to suffer' (I 469) of which the penultimate vonel is eluded 65 Thus R+र+ शन It forms its furninige rith tho aflix cty So we have sa kshma (the earth) ७४७ । तरतेहिः । ५। ६६ । प्रयः। श्री। 747 The allis fe comes after the root o' to cross over' (T 1018) 66 Thus त+द्वि-विर् (VII 1 100 S 2300, VII 1 1018 2571)+ट्रिनि three. The affix having an indicatory s causes the elusion of the fe portion of the root Is Noro pls प्रय, Accusatire pl 1s श्रीन् &c. 42 ·830 TIIC VIDDIA TA KAUMUDI TPADA V. 673748 9४ । ग्रहेरनिः ।।।६७। पणि । सीप । पाणी प्याधिः । 748. The affix sit comes after the root or to accept (IX. . 61) 67. Thns ग्रह घिमि-ग्रहसि। an imaginary organ supposed tolte between the stomach and the intestines. It forms its feminine with the affix की Thus अहसी' diarrhoes, dysentery'. १४ । प्रथेरमच । ५ ॥ ६॥ 749 Tho alſıx who comes after the root to be famous to prosper. 08 Thus प्रथ+धमन्मपमा first'. Its plural 1s प्रयभे or प्रघमार (I. 1.33. S. 226) ७५० । घरेश्च । ५।६। *tho v 750 The affix we comes after the root ng 'to go (I 591) 69. Thus चर्चम-परमा - Tasb, ultimate, final'. Plural चरमे or परमार Qicere.-- Why to separate satras, could not this be included in the last, ७५१ । मङ्गेरलच । ५। ६० । मालम् । 751. The affix अलए comes after the root of to go, move' (I. 167). 70. Thus म+चल = मङ्गलम good fortune, prosperous. The Unadı afiscs are three hundred and twenty-five in number, according to Jñanendra Swami whose commcntary we have followed 10 translatiog and explaiding these sûtras इत्युषादिषु पञ्चमः पादः। ३१६९ । उरणादयो यहुलं । ३।३।१। एते वर्तमाने मचाया च बहुल स्युः। पिदविहिवा शप्युदयः । 'मासु भातुरूपाणि मस्ययाम ततः परे। चार्या विवादनूषन्धमेतष्दाखमुणादिषु' । 3169 The aflises 'Un' and the rest, with the force of the present, and with a sense simply appellative, are attached diversely. The phrase ' with the force of the present' (Implying neither pasb nor future time) and with a 80250 sıraply appcllative' (and not descriptura) must be read into this sûtre by apuyritti from gûtras III. 2. 123 & 185, ·PADA V.72 3107.) TIF UNA DE AYYITP4 331 P, ug the word divers ly it 19 indicat d that thrs Alixcy nro, of churja applınd after roots about which thoy nre ord und but they com alzo nít r roots about wluch they are not orduned. Sometimes we n0195 iné rth it application by scolag Actiiri words Somo lliscs, though thero bu 110 express injinctio i regarding thi m, are to bo inſure I to belong to thiqclan, Tno musim in regard to thr Undlı affixes is that when, in npp 11atives we find the forms of verbal roots nu i affixes coming aftor thm thon wo may know, from the result as presented in the word, what are tho indicatory lotters which the affix must be pourl.35 d of in order to produce the result Thcka Unddi affixcs como after a limited number of roots, and no' after overy root, ng the affixes taught in Panini whogo application 19 genernl, henca tho word age has been employed. Morcover th ro hag bcen no cxbaustive enumeration of tho Bovcral roots after which thc's affixes como only soma of them have b en collected on works treating of Uitali affiscs Thus tho igh the affix is ordained aftnr 57, it coin also after * ng TT In fact there is a long discussion and it was n moob point at the time of Pinını whether these words 8111 to bo formd by Und Ir affires wero really dorivntivc, or primitivo oney Sloreover all the opcrations of these affixes have not been shown, that:4 their effects are not without remunder (T70) They are valid and good if found in sacred Scrip turcs or s cular literature The authors of Aeruklas and grammari. ans of the school of Salatayann, consider all nouns and sabstantics (*) as derivative words from simple roots (ET) Th refore there tho derivation of a word is not apparent, one should infer tho existence of proper bago (apia) and affi< (1797) to form such a word Tho following slohns will be of som: 49 to the stu lent for ascertaining tho Una li affixes 4779* FRETETEI TTTTTT777 TT TTTI कार्यसपषिध तदुक्त नेगम हिम रिमुभा ॥१॥ পদ থাঙ্গা, কি অন্ধাক্ট দেয় স্বীক। पन्न पदाविशेषणमुरप प्रत्ययतः प्रकृतेश्च नमाम् ॥ .. ३१०० । भूतेापि दृश्यन्ते । ३।३।२। 3170 Tho Unadi' alltfus ?re seen also attaclied Frith the force of the past time Sy the 11t sätrı it ing taught that the Und lı afires come rith the force of th: prent time The present a horin teaches that they corne, with the forca of the past also, not as & & veral rols, but in spacial cha 4 The force of the words are seen' b ing that no general rule can be laid ·332 THE SIDDnAVIA KAUMUDI (PADA V 78 3 3171 down about it, but on finding that certain yords have past significance we conclude that the affs in that particular case has the force of the past time. Thus ta+afq' a way, road' (that which has been established as a rule), 5+ afar=a*'shin' (that which is lived 2n), so ako HERE · ashes' (that which has been reduced to ashes) ३११ । भविष्यति गम्यादयः । ३।३।३। 3171 The words 'ganun do have the sense of the future time. For the word to see Unddı IV. 6. It is formed with tfa aflix, Tho force of the future time is in the affix, and 19 go ordained, and not an th original word which takes the affix. Thus we see that the Unadı affixes, in a way, do come with the force of not only present but past rod fature also though in the latter two cases its scope is very limited As Top The intending to go to the village', witht. that which has to comg' So also heart' departing', afadh' an opponent, (who 19 going to obstruc. #fratet 'going to be awakened'. So also afactant' an adversars", afaritat ' an enemy, Afarát, worat, erat, &c. The Future, for the purposes of this rulo, must be anndyalana futare : & the nffix should come in the sense of what will happen but nos in the correo of the current day In other words the force must be of tho first futur. 7, nnd not of the second future re. As itt spuit uruha intends to go to the village tomorrow' ३१०२ । दाशगोनी संप्रदाने।३।४ । ७३ । put w WWE forrad i Tarrat pe fratsfrfor 3172 The words 'disa' and 'goglion' aro irregularis formed, and the allis in thcso denotes tho idea of the Datire or Recipient The word it comes for the root to giro' by nuding tho alfix stor ander II 1. 131 S. 2396. Thus lxing n T word toull hara other syiso denoted the ng nt by III 4 67 S "$32. The prevrat ontra makes it depotn the recipient or haroth forc of thn dative case. Thus 479 incana 'to whom somrthing 19 girea { ¢ A #Tvant. Sunilarly goghindm3 nomran the kill of mir, but 'ls on whose coming, thing cur is driven in order to give him that is to say, a gucht' irregularly formed on nagino wbich 19 milo arılırabic to thin procedure farmats, ons in late &^, 40 lnnt then manlarly formed wonl gogh a wh eh inrana ' killor of cow'or A 'Chandah' Tous Ti-Ttapa, **** सानानि ·333 Cuap IV 83175 THE KRIT ArYiXF9 1 ३१५३ । भीमादयोग्पादाने । ३।४ । १४ । fra 11 I AFTUTRI I ST1FT , wofas 8173 'Tho ronis blin' do aro irregularly formed a denoto aulation. Thcso words are formed by the Unildi affixes Tat9 11+1Mai (Un | 145, 149), 7+*+** -uteni (Un I 148) &c. By the next stra, Unali words do not denote ordinarily than recipient and the ablation The present strainakce them do 8o in the case of arfe sords. The following is a list of Bhimili wyordy - 1781, optai, Harta (Un. III. 82) *T1, T*, (Un I 7), yra: (Un IV 45), *: (Un IV. 217), mehi, (lyut) peto (l'n V 22) 45, , or soft (Un II. 61). « (Uo. II G?) va fiors (Un III. 112) ३१०४ । ताभ्यामन्यत्रोणादयः । ३।४ । ७५ । *HTMITTETEAcinári mootfafa i opisut wafer ergo in afara preferent तदिति धर्म। 317) The Forda formed by Unadı' aflixes denote othor ders than tlieso tivo, 1 c rccipient and ablation The Unårlo allixts being a subdivision of kril affitis would have, by III, 407, S 2832 denoted the agent. By the pregnt sätra they are modo to denote the object, the instrument and tho location also The word has bren us d in the batra in order to include the word sampra la na also. For, had the søtra been vastuta), only the Apd lana haraka would have been excluded as being the nearest, but not so the Sampra. dana hdrala Thus faätsatu fae (Un IV. 120) agriculture 4. e what is ploughed' (object), 81 a foreigo: (Un I 69) 'a thread what is drawn out', qpfafa my (Un. IV. 145) 'a way t.e that 13 established', wfcaq (Un IV. 145) 'brın' (in which they live) - 1 THE KRIT-AFFIXES --(Continued) CHAPTER IV. ३१७५ । तुमुन् एघुली क्रियायां क्रियार्थायाम् । 1३।३ । १०॥ faerata fetargra afatetut valt att TTTAKATTEUNENE पादि। कृष्ण दर्शको पाति । अन्न धासस्पेस शादयो न । पुनामुक्त। 3175. The allises 'tumun' and 'avul' are placed after a verbnl root, with the force of the future, when the word in construction therewith is another rerb, denoting an action performed for the sake of the future) action. The word coding in 19 an Indeclinable as it ends 10 1 ·334 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [KRIT IY $ 3176. you reply that As my fa'he goes to eat', 419 Tafa' he goes to eat' Here the upapada or the verb in construction is cafa, it denotes an action performed for the sake of the fature action (feat), namely, eating Why do we say denoting an action'? The uppada must be az action and not a substantive, as far fa UFT STI: ' inatted hair is for the purpose that he should beg' Here the affixes aro not employed. Why do we say ' performed for the sake of another action'? Obsarge urat arasufa Fre: 'running, the stick will fall.' Obj.-Now, it might be asked why weer 19 taught a second time, then 10 w29 alieady taught generally by III 1. 133, S 2895 and that being a common rule, would have applied to this subject also ? If the future affix ould have prevented its application, in conditional sentencns like the above, wo say that the rule of non-uniform aflixes applying sugultaneously 'given in III 1. 94 S 2830 will step in and will conduce the application of or in spite of at: Ant-The repetition of the afix ryu (ordained to come after a verbal root, when the word in construction therewith 19 another serb denoting any action performed for the sake of the future action,) 29 for the sake of prohibiting the application of the affixes like T &c. in dcooting the aboto sense, that 19 to gay, the role of 75TTT (III 1 048 2830) does not apply here and we cannot optionally amploy any other affix, with this gerundial Bence. Thus we cannot say an 'he goes to do', but we must saya instead. Thesa affixes form the gerund of the infinitive of purpose "३१०६ । समानक केपु तुमुन् । ३।३ । १५ । अफ्रियार्थीपपदार्थमेतत् । राज्येशकई केपूपपदेषु पावोरतमुस्यात् । दवि भानुम् ।ष्टि ats 011 3176. Thc alix 'tumun' comes after a ferb), hcn naother rerb meaning 'to tisk' is in construction, providest thint 'the agent of both the verbs is the same Thus,दति, पष्टि or चांदति भो 'he deares to ent', बामपते पोखम् in wishes to cat', fattantie afing GIFT refordleaires to obtain for her husband the Pinakn handed God Sira'. But why do we sny when the agent of thr Infinitio and the serb oro the same'? We can not guy por efo tutt'Voji1}ı'n wishes Doradattr to cat, for bore the ngrity of yx and the are 1 : the We must say. पुरुशाम Instrad of भोजन । Why do not we use it hcro-reatifi 'Fishing, hun do a'? 13 240*3 the Infioiture is never found in asch contactopy In other words, the Infiniture in Aris omployed when both the serbe hare the same agent. Pumca ·Kat IV 1178.) THIF TUHOV AFYI. 335 ३१७७ । शकषाग्लाघटरभलभागमहाहांस्त्यर्यपु तुमुन् । ३।४।६।। 197427 vratayotg10 1 INT 1959 17 Y*1*11giets surfer मययतातरस्यात् । धालमति विद्यात या मातम् । 3177 The allie 'tumun' is addci to csery Terly, when another voib ink'(to be able), 'dhriel' (to make bold), 'jal' (to know), 'glu' (to be wearicd), 'glinť (to strac), 'rabhi' (to begin), 'labli' (to gct), 'Kram' (to strout) 'sali' (to leur), Sarl' (to be pleased or to condescend), and a verb laring the samo meaning as'as' (to bo), is in construction. Note Tho use of tho Iufinative in out formed by the rule, differe from that given in III 3 10. S. 3175 In that tru the Infinitive in the force of purpogo' and here there 19 no s ich force Morcover in this can thcro is an upapada is construction though that ap pada 19 a verb, an III, 3. 10, there was no such upapaila Thus umfang 'In am able to eat. Similarly unforfa -- पटो-धारमते-लमते-मकमते-मरते-ईति-अस्ति-मपति- or यिदाते भीम 'ho knows', he is wearid, ho strives, he begins, ho gets, he proceeds, bir bars, by condescends or he 13 to cnt'. The word we in the strn applies to the root wat only as it is nerest to it. As wfer or wafa or fantasia ३१७८ । पयोप्तियधनेवलमर्थेषु । ३.४ । ६६ । पर्याप्तिा पूर्ण वा । तद्वादिषु सामर्ययधपूपपदेषु तुमुनस्यात् । पर्याप्त मत मधील फुगला परित्यादि । 'पर्याप्तिपपनेषु' किम् । प्रल भुपाया । घलम! किम् । पर्याप्त भुके । मतदेह गम्यते न मा सामर्वम् । 3178 Tlo allix 'tumun' comes after a verb having in composition with it alam' and its synonyras, when thoso words crpress 'to be capable of something'. Tho woril caffe means 'capability, ability, fulaess' Thus लिखितमपि të afrua muna (Hitopadesa) 'who is able to avoid that which is sianp d on his forcherd'. *17 **** fra: (Kumir•11. JO) 'h19 p nancy is able to burn the worlds'. wier et fantai Ti fost (Vikramorsasi 2) 'I have power to know every thing.' HITAT: gran vat skillful Another interpretation of the satra 19 " the alis tumun is added to a verb, hua it hus in composition with tt, the word wife or V7T OF A synonyrı olalım bqving the songs of piryapia." Tang wafat tag, भोला भोक पारयति । in cating Why do we say 'parz&pti sacbana-sbonnyms of pary aptı or capable ? Obs rre जल भुवा ।

·836 TIE SIDDRAVTA KAUMUDI. (KRIT. IV $3179. Why do we say 'alum or its synonyms"? Observe water he eats fully? Here muchness is indicated, and oot the capacity of the cater. ३१७८ । कालसमयवेलास तुमुन् । ३।३ । १६७ । पर्यायोपादानमोपलवार्थम् । कालापूपपदेषु तुमुनस्यात् । काला समया घेतानेरा था भानुम् । प्रेपादियानिशानुवर्तते तेहमा 'भूतानि कालः पवतीति दाता । 3179 The affis 'tumun' comes after a root, thon thru Trords "kila', 'samaya', and 'veld' (all meaning time) aro in composition Thus कालो मोक्तुम् time to eat'. धमया खलु स्मामभोजने हेदितुम् ' It is time to bathe and take food , tant tefimo to eat'. In short, Infinitive in gi may be used with words meaning time , as veedisenterat anire face this 19, indeed, the time to show myself Why do not we use the Infinitive here si rafa ymfortimo donours all creatures'.? The sense of direction &c is understood in the gatra from S 2817 so when 'direction &c'19 not meant, the Infinitive will not be used ३१८० । भाववचनाश्च । ३।३ । ११ । भाव रयषिताय पश्यमाखा पप्रादयः क्रियापा झिपापा भविष्यति ।। पाणाग पानि 3180 An tlic affixes that aro ordained to como after a root with the force of denoting tho micro action of the verb, such as do (III. 1. 13.) 175c also the forco of the future, Trhon the word in construction there frath, is another perb denoting an action performed for the sake of tho futuro action. A« TTTTA wfe 'bo goes to sic efica', sad safer be gous for tho wake of success', Tufati ३२८९ । अएकर्मणि च । ३।३।१२। *** fmaratat femeteala i MISTITI I NTVWat rufr, med बादीगर बातायो पुति। 3181 The affix 'an' comes after a root rith tho forec of the future, irhen lo nord 12 con fruction with it is in tho nccusatıro casc, and mlieu tho action is performed for thondo of another action, The word 'fatarows andersil bora. The foren of torerly this of a connectiro partic!o By III. 21. S 2013 tha aſfix vratne A mot when the wond in compition is in the nec quiso cam. Tit. 15 A griral injunction, ant th* role of TITTY DO applying, the as woult hare delartel is exalra ly ruil, kathn aprift it Dann an aparirls rols (an elc*p.120 or a spornirilo with or part ut** probe which has the necqualis (16) in capution))}thias wibo *** o'a janıslıction, proren! tho apli-atım diyor 111... 108 3137 , 4*.] - € ·KRITIV.: "1931 til e dy AFFIX 897 1 X . ETHN b, th rule of a 1 4 2, 3.175 it will deber the nflixcs like a &c. tla s cunce after even thogo serbs also which were cspccially inmily operition by Ill. 2 : S 201510 Thus hy rulo 111 * 311 mp » Ill? I could not have com u after simp' verbs en ling in Hदा togive But tho presons with a guru dial All cong even aft r auch verby As गोदायो पति hrges to 810 C»#4 and not that So also inertia f'bo gocs to give blanket, tarrat Tufe 17+7=7 (VII, 8 33) So also trueretarfa ' ho goes to cut wood' In this cago stay would have been applıcd crcn by III 2 18.2013 ३१८२ । पदरुजविरास्पृशो घन् । ३।३। १६ । मषिपतीति निवृत्तम् । पदमी पादा । जतीति रोगः । विगतीति पेपः । गतीति 3182 Iho aflix 'glaữ' comes after the roots 'pad' (to inco), 'ruz' (to pun', 'vis' (to cater), and 'spris' (to touch) Tho anurrit of futuro docs pot extend to this sátra Tho affixcg hereinnfter taught como in all the tenang As t+19=U7C1'foot', FT + Win 'diseaso', so ao: 'entrance' Tha vcrb FGT takes u wlicn the scnsc 19 that of 'distrcog ng dis aso' or warmth 'Tho tvord ei meaning 'touch' is formed by a lding th affir , un lur rule III I 134, 15 frit fatio Thera 19 diffuronico in accent b tweco thcso two froris ३१-३ । स स्थिरे । ३ । ३ । १७ । fa ya femment feat att veta mintain For YES if varetag af* 07948 I firard aufvi i waruffaaraalse vefatta अभिरादिनमविषये सारपतीरपः । विपारो मत्स्पा । 'सारो पले हलाये । 3183 Thc affix 'glizñ comes i'ter the serb 'sri' (to more) 1 hen the agent 19 permanently fired Tho word feat morns an object remaining et ady throughout any priod of time. The which thus remunog permanent moves through any interval of time will apply to the agtut of the scrb - TT 'An essence , 63 TUTTI 'tho essence of sandal', oft'i tho essence of citechni W?y do vc say permraently fixed ? Obucre et mores, TTTI that which fors' 1 art -Tha nord go formed alo applies to diseas, fish and strength Ag fra dyantery The &u09c of causative us 1 brat here in the mot / Ths. which causes the excesire for of blool &c. is calld atxerant fa'a fish , It's ang b Sic Amaral oss Thus Y+पत्र 43 ·340 THE SIDDIANT& KAUMUDI [KRIT IV.53190. . - Both the phrases, 'when denoting mere condition (974)' and 'a karaka which is not an agent' are understool in the succeeding aphorisms. Sze. II. 2.6S. 756 about मा Compound. ३९९० । परिमाणाख्यायां सर्वेभ्यः ।३।३ । २० धन् । प्रजपायधनार्यमिदम् । सहस्तपालनिधावः । वी पूनिष्पायी वी कारी।"दार- जारी कर णिमुश्च "दारयन्तीति दाराः। जारयन्तीति जाराः। 3190. The affix 'ghaữ comes after all roots, when the word so formed is the name of a measure. • Thus नि+चि+धम् =निचे+4 (VII. 2. 115) =निघायः (VI. 1.78) 's heap'; as एकस्त एदुनिघाया; दो शूर्पमिष्णायो । 'to scatter' + = कारः । दोकारो, नया By using the word 'all' in the stra, it is indicated that the affix v (III. 3.57) is also superseded when this sense is to be indicated. Otherwise the affix yr would only be prohibited by the Paribhasha :-" Aparadas that precede the rules which teach operations that have to be suparseded by the apaváda-operations, supersede only those rules that stand nearcat to them, not the subsequent rules". Thus we being taught in III. 3. 56 would be superseded, but not so ** taught in the subsequent aphorism III. 3.57. Vart:-The affix re comes after the causative verbs eifc and orrfc, and there is lub clusion of the causativo affix fog, when the word so formed is related to the verb ag agent Thus crcafa wn=ETT:' Vifo' (leto' who dirides brothers' a xifa brvaking up the brotherly love); sprafat =चारा.'a paramour'. ३१८१ । इङश्च । ३।३ । २१ । पत्र । उपवादः । उपेत्यास्मादधीयते उपाध्यायः । "अपादाने सियामुपमरुपाम तदाताच्च चा सोप् " उपायापा-उपाध्यायी। “य वायुषर्ष निघतेषु " ''त्यविभक्तिको निगा। गारो वायुः। करणे पनु । पारी पर्श: । चित्रीकरणमिह पारवर्षः। निधियते प्रावियते- जननेति मितमावरण ! बालकाटकरणे । 'गोरियाकृवीधारामायण पिगिरे गायकृत. मावर इत्या 3191. The affix 'ghai' comes after the root in' (to study). This debars (III. a. '56), As अधि+r+ पधि+277-समाय। a lesson or lecture'; उपाध्याय (पेत्यास्मादधीते)'at cher'. Vart.-When the word to be formed is related to the scrth re n५ an ablative, the word is feminine als and optionally takey that allir 10. A सत्यापीपपा-उपाध्याया or पाण्यावी 'a femalk torcher'. One who herself teaches, and not the wifo of a teacher, Varl.-The aflix comes after tho root wh n thi 8formed means • wind', 'color', or 'coror. As पारा 'vind', 'green colonr's. silfurgentata ad fafel met "generally lean in autumn, liko a con Without the aliado oyer it." .

·341 KRIT IV $ 3194.) TIK GRAN AYIX. The word is shown in the vârtika without any case-affis. In IT meaning wind', the affix has the force of instrument. In Ma' green colour', the sense of the root is to give diverse colours or to paint. Tho word fra meads by which any thing is covered. It is formed by affix added with the force of instrument, as a diversity, to the root ata. In to the is lengthened by S. 1044. The words whaatti dan KateTTi' where no cover is made'. ३१९२ । उपसगै रुवः । ३।३ । २२ । पञ् । संराषः । 'उपसर्ग' किम् । रवः । 3192. The affıx 'ghañ comes after the verb 'rû' (to roar), when it has an upasarga in composition with it. This debars wq (III 3. 57). As ditta clamour', vaca: &c. Why do we say .compounded with an upasarga"? Observe tas . Bound', ३१९३ । अभिनिसः स्तनः शब्दसंज्ञायाम् । ८।३।८६ । प्रस्मात्स्तना सस्य मूर्धन्य । अमिनिष्टानो वर्णः । 'गदसंशाया' किस । अभिनि। स्तमति . 3193 Ther of For is optionally changed to g after the double preposition for fire when the word so formed is the name of a particular letter (i. e. visarga). As sufirfaritraut, sfufaena fatuitas or sufirfirmat : or farmitte ar The compound preposition ufur-fae causes this change, and not any one of them separately Thus Apastamba:-*t you tagantutan Hinirani, 0194719 atatue "& name (nåme) should be such that it should consist of two syllables or four-syllables, that its first portion should bo a noun (nama-purva), and its second portion a verb (@khyata), that it should end in a long vowel (dirgha) or a visarga (abhinishtâna), that the first letter of such a noun should be * ghosha or sonant letter (ghosha-vad. adı), and a semiyowel (antastha) should be in the body of it." Thus the names द्रविणोदा, परिधादा fulfill these conditions and are good names. Why do we say when it is the name of a particular letter.'? Observe अभिनित स्तनति सृदङ्गः॥ The anurritti of समाये ceases from this place. ३१८४ । समि युदुदुवः । ३।३ । २३ । संपूयते मिचीमियते गुडादिभिरिति संयामा पिष्ठधिकारोउपूपविशेषः । संद्राषः। संदायः । 3194. The affix 'ghañ comes after the roots 'yu' (to join), 'dru' (to run) and 'du' (to burn), when in composition with the preposition 'sam'. As gara: that which 19 mixed with sugar &c. a sort of sweet cake. TES, *19: 1 But Apu: where the preposition is not sum.

·842 TIF SIDDIANT: KINUDI. [KRIT. IV 53195 - ३१५ । निणीभुवोग्नुपसर्गे । ३ । ३ । २४ । यायः । माया । भाव । 'मुपसर्ग किम् । प्रश्रयः । प्रशाया । ममयः । फया 'प्रभावो रामा' इति । प्रकृप्टो भाय पति प्रादिप्तमाः । कथम् 'राज्ञो नय इति । वाहुल कात। 3195. The affix 'ghni comes after the rosts 'sri' (to go to) 2'1' (to lead) and 'blû (to be), when not in composition with in upasalgn This debars the alix ? (III 3.56 S 3231) As याय: shelter', माय:'. means, 179: 'a condition'. But with upasargas, we have मयया ' respret', प्रणय: 'love', प्रभव: D source How do we explain the form प्रभाव In प्रभावो राक्ष: 'the splendour of the king? Here the word प्रभाव 19 not made from the compound 1000 **+ , but by compounding # with ra by the rales of Prait saunası, meaning 'excellent condition'. How do you explain the forma ma in re Cra: ? Here the root #7 has taken the nflix v diversely by III 3 113 S 2841 ३१९६ । वौ क्षुश्रुव । ३।३ । २५ । विधाषः। विधायः 'पी' किम् । पयः । श्रयः। 3106 The affix ghai' comes after the roots 'kshu' (to sneeze), and 'sru' (to more and hear) when the preposition Ti is in composition This debars the affix ve (III 3 575. 323), as factent cough , f2771 'flowing forth''celebrated' But when without the preposition for wo have क्षय: and था। ३१८७ । भवोदोर्नियः ।३।३।२६ । प्रवनायोऽधो नयनम् । उम्नायः अर्धनयनम् । कयर 'उम्नयः उमेश इति । पाहुलझात् । 3197 'The affix garl comes after the verb 'nt' (to lead) when the prepositions ari' and 'ut are in composition, As अवनायः "throwing down , उन्नाव 'eleration' How do you explain उन्नय .in उन्नयः पदार्याना ? Hero the afix is. 'nch, by the diversity of III 3 113 S 2811 ३१९८ । मे द्रस्तुस्रुव ।३।३ । २७ । प्रद्रायः । प्रस्ताव प्रस्तावः । ' इति किम् । द्रवः । स्तया वया। 3198 The affix 'ghaſi' comes after the 100tsdru', 'stu" and" sru', when the word in composition is pra' As मद्रावा, प्रस्तावा, मवावा! But not so In द्रा स्तय: where thore 19 popra ·RRIT. IV.53202] THE OLAN ALIX. 843 . ३१९ । निरभ्योः पूल्वोः । ३।३।२८ । निप्पूयते पूर्णादिमिरिति निष्पायो धान्यविणेषः । अभिलाया । 'निरभ्यो।' किम् । पया। लया। 3199 The allix 'guañ' comes after tho rooots 'pů' (to purify) and 'lu' (to out) when 'nır'aud'abhi'arr respectively mi composition. The root y refers to both , and 79 Th. I 3 10, S 128 must bo applied hiere, and thus fat comes beforu g and wfår bufore As निष्पाया a kind of grun lit purified by' vinnowing', afiant' injving'. But ua: and a, without these prepositions ० ३२०० । उन्योर्गः । ३ । ३ । २९ । उद्रास निगारा उभ्यो।' किम् । गए। 3200 The affix 'ghafi' comes after the root gri' when thic upasaigis ut' and ni aro in composition The verb गू here refers to both the verbs 'to male sound', and 'to swallow'. As उद्गारर समुद्रस्य 'the roaring of the ser', निगारो देवदत्तस्य 'tho swallowing of Devadatta'. But when without these prepositions, wo have धान्ये । ३ । ३ । ३ । 'क' इत्यस्मादाम्यविषयकादुन्योर्घस्यात् । उस्कारो निकारो याम्य विषेप इत्यर्थः । 'धान्ये फिम् । मिलोस्करः । पुष्पनिकर । 3201. The affix 'ghali' comes after the verb 'Kri', when the preposition, 'at' and 'ni' are in coniposition and when the sense of the verb relates to grain. The verb here means' to scatter', and not to injure', because no words formed by this affix are found in Sanskrit in that wense. As उत्कारो धान्यस्य ' the winnowing of corn', निकारो धान्यस्य 'the winnowing of corn'. But when not referring to grain, we have iterent: 'a heap of alms', youfanti' the essence or heap of flowers' ३२०२ । यज्ञ समि स्तुवः । ३।३।३१ । समेत्य स्तुन्ति यस्मिन्देशे छन्दोगाः स देशः सस्तावः । 'यो किम् । संस्तवः परिचयः । 3202 The affix 'ghafi comes after the root 'stu' when at is preceded by the upasarga 'sam' and tho word refers to sicrificial subjects As सस्तावरपन्दोगानास् 'the Sanstava of the Chhandogs, सस्ताय (-समेत्य Frafra fe#7 CU TOTI * @11) means 'the place which the Brûhmanas repenting hymns and prayeis occups at a sacrifice'. But when not referring to sacrifice we have सस्तवरायः the mutual praising of the two pupils'. 3. e. becoming acqurinted with each other. ३२०२॥ . .

·844 THE SIDDHANTA KAUHUDI (krit IV. $ 3203 1 ३२०३ । प्रे स्त्रोग्यज । ३ । ३।३२ । 'प्रय पति छेदः यत्रे इतिमकृतत्वात् । प्रस्ता। अय किम् । यदिपा मस्तरो मुष्टिपिणेष।। 3203 'The affix 'ghan comes after the root stri' (to cover), when pieceded by the preposition 'pra', provided that the word so formed does not refer to sacrifice'. The division of the sandhi is straḥ + ayazie, and not straht- yayfic because there is no necessity of repeating yajie in this satra, as it could have been drawn by anuyritti from the last. As, OHUI ' a bed of conch', ARCHETTI 'strewing of genis'. Why do we say when not meaning sacrifice ? Observe af TETT'a handful of straw. ३२०४ । प्रथने वावशब्दे । ३।३ । ३३ । विपूल्स्तृणातेर्षपादशादविषये प्रयने । पटस्य विस्वारः । 'प्रथम किस् । तृविस्तर।। 'यदे किम् । अन्यविस्तरः । 3204 The affix'gliañ comes after the root stri' (to cover), whore the preposition 'vi's in composition with it, when the sense is that of extension, and such spreading does not refer to words The word #4# means 'extent, circuit, range. Ag Tey ferrate 'the extension of the garment'. Why do we say 'yhen mcaming extent ? Obscrve qafont col lection of grass' Why do we szy 'not referring to words'? Observo विस्तरो परमाम् ' prolhxsty of words' or प्रयविस्तारा। ३२०५ । छन्दोनानि च । ३।३ । ३४ । 'सत्यनुवर्तते । विष्टारपतिबादः । विस्तीर्यतास्मिामरायीत्यधिकरणे .प । तता कर्मधारया 3203 Tho uffix 'gliani' comes after 'stre' with thc upr. sarga 'vi', when the word so formed as tho nimo of a inetro The word * here means prosodil metro such as Gayatri &c, an! Thus not cdo Veules, shawise the son or would not have buen use 1 fa tep+fa+E+ (VIII 3 991 e fagit: 'tho name of a mctro call cd Vishtårn Puaktı. The whole word faerdie is the namo of a metre, and is not a rond! ending with thu alix ghafl, only a inuinbor of this words the first part ends with ghan Tho Retenth cas afir in the word Eurig hay cho foron of location t e when the word 90 form l occan 19 & portion of a nunc of a meter, it 13 nob the full, bath, but it is in the name forms a portion of ths namo It 19 a Karmadbiraya compoand. ३२०६ । छन्दोनानि च । १३1४। frastrenadavate TT TT, TTa s pfa rego c .

·Kui IV 3209 ) ONA APTIX. 315 3206. Also vlion it is the name of a motrc, tho irregu. lnr form for 15 tiscd. By adera 111.3 34 tho trord forgre is formed denoting a sort of matro called faer Why do sye say when denoting the name of a Clihand19' Obscrvo Te forates * In fact the gaten mrhce unnecessary tho satra III. 3, 31. To avoid this difficulty, somo kay that tho katra III 3 34 19 not coafined to tho preposition yि so that we can form प्रतारपतिः । संसारपक्ति। ३२०० । उदि ग्रहः । ३ । ३ । ३५ । TUTE 3207. Tuo affis 'ghinñ' comes after the verb 'gral' (to scizo), rhon tho proposition 'ut' is in composition, Th14 debars the aſfix , As Turi'lifting up'. ३२० । समि मुष्टी । ३ । ३ । ३६ । मल्लस्य संग्राहा । 'मुष्टो' किन् । द्रव्याप मंगा। 3208 Tho nffıx 'ghañ' comes]after the root 'grah' Then in composition with the proposition 'sam', whicn thc senso of tho root refers to fist The word gie mcang 'boxing, fist', as, ** ET HOTI 'O i thos clenrhing of thu hut of tha athlete', sont gfg** HOTE! 0 I tho scizing of the boxcr', menning grnaping firmly Why do we say ' refurring to list'? Observe sa VIITT'A collection of grain'. ३२९ । परिन्योलो ताषयोः । ३।३।३ । ofertovatfüzelfzuten vragen erana faat, afforda mrefor समानारनपमेनेस्पः । एपोनन्यायाचित्रमित्यर्थः । 'दरतापयो।' कि । परियो विद्यार। ज्ययामापा 3209. Tho rilie'garñ come after the roots 'ni' (to lend), and' 1' (to go), when the prepositions 'piri' and 'ni' aro respectively in composition with them, and win the words so formed respectively mcın 'a gime' and 'propriety or arrangement or lnir'. Ilere ngun yo tabe help of I 3 10 in interpreting this säter The Terbs off + it and fu++ tike when respectirely mraming'gambliog' and fitness'. Ag afrenar TTT For he hills (or takes) muy pieces bg moring a chesamin." Ucre vitets4541**** means 'the moving of chess pieces from erery side, and en finding the game.' So alzo fr+*+ vafa+&+Taf+9+9=rata: 'justice', propriety',' logic'. - ·348 THE SIDDHANTI KACHUDI (ERIT IV. S 3215 Batracitat 'a herd of hogs', because it 13 a mere collection So also Wat TTS t'the collection of what is done and not dono', *97** 'the collection of proofs' So also पानझम समुच्चयः "the barmonioas development and treading the path of wisdom and York both simultaneously . Here there is no he in either of the two senses, it not being a collection of living roimals the aflix ghan 19 not employed ३२१५ । फर्मव्यतिहारे पस्रियाम् ३ । ३ । ४३ । सीलिङ्गे भाधे पच् । 3215 The affix nach' comes after a root in denoting reciprocity of action, and the word so formed is in the feminine gender. The word en means 'action' and is not the technical Karmn' mcan ing the accusative case , aferent means reciprocity or interchange of action The word so evolved is feminine in form and denotes mera "action (T4) also The anubandhnin vy is qualitative nod 13 added to distinguish this affix from other affixus thus in V 14 S 3216 thus particular affix is meant Thug fæ+*++*+9+9+371 =Eleme(V 4 14, and VII 3. 6' mutual abuse' So also outagut uutta The aflix Tu forms only an Imaginary stem, for this stem mast take thu y by V 4 14 which even does no form tho complet svord until the affix ite of th furninine 13 added 11hy do we say 21 thu f minine'? Obarve cfacimena ३२१६ । राच स्त्रियामम् । ५। ४ । १४ । 3216 The affix nữ ) come ritlio it changing the acne, after a word onding in the offer nach (+1–}, rhon the word is femint Rr III 3. 43 thu nffis vr 19 ordained afurf mainiac wor is denoting reciprocity of action The alix va comes after such a wor! vithout charging the a 1, when the thung donoted 18 feminine. Thus wetental ज्यापाशीपत. ३२१७ । न कर्मय्यतिहारे।७।३।६। W* 027 TUTTI ROTAFIR i tot 3217 Tho prolhition and the rugment, ordin d lly VII I, S 1099 do not npris to a word which express the reciprocity of an action Ar vytaxtd), mint mini, utal. Sco III 3 43 ani V. 4.14 ३२१८ । अभियिपी भाय मुम् । ३ । ३ । ४४ ।

·349 ERIT IV 3219 ) GIAN AITIS 3218 The affix 'inun' comes after 1 root in denotin; condition, when co cxtensiveness is meant The ford fufafy means co-oxtensiveness that is to say, the completo Thus comprehension or relation between the action and the quality rafame a general or tum iltno 19 uprorr ***+71+1 (V 4 15 anu VI 4 16+) -sfera g neral confusion , 50 2TTL a general flow or stream Why do we say when meaning co extensiveness ? Observe waitei, सराथा मद्राया । 378697 sqfUTU 14181 PPI *****978 (9784)eriam aa'a 3219 The affix an (+-) comes without changing tho sense after a stem ending in tlie affix inun (yu ) By II 3 41 tho affix it is added to & root to express a condition resulting from a universul co-operation of the action denoted by the root But a worl formed by ruw is after all an imaginary word it requires tho further addit on of this allis vu to make it & completo word In fact all svärtha affixes generally complete the not fully developed word Thug kuriem on wafewau The fe portion is not elided because of VI 4 164 S 1245 ३२२० । माक्रोशेम्वन्याग्रह । ३।३ । ४५ । प्रय नि एतयो देस्यात पापे । प्रवग्राहस्ते भूपात । अभिभव हरयः । निग्राहस्ते भूयात । बार इत्यर्थः । माक्रोये किम् । अवग्रहः पदस्य । निग्रहोंरस्य । 3220 lhe affix phañ comes after the verb 'grali (to seize) in composition with'rra', and 'ni', when malediction is mtint To gh Ju 19 immediately bear we take the anuyritti of 2 (III 3 16) beca 1se we see that its anuvfitti is possible The void mu meang c1r8 ng As भयग्राहो त दे षषसभूयाद cursed bo thou O sinner Soalso निग्राहस्ते भूयात् । Wly when meining cursing ? Observe want 4 forti ३२२१ । प्रेलिप्सायाम् । ३।३ । ४६ । पाप्रपारेषा चरति भिक्षुः। 3231 The affıx ghaí comes after the root's ralı' when the ord pra is in composition and the sense denoted is the desire of acquistion As 7991 vafa fwg frostet' the Bhikshu walks for the sake of alme, carrying & vessel en band hapa mia famigurat carrying ·350 TOP SODDIASTA KAUHUDI [KRIT. IV $ 3222. a sacrificial lidle, the Brahmunz walks about for his flo' The word fpret means tho wish to havoʻsomething Why do we say when meaning desire of gain'? Observe AHTIQITUTI ३२२२ । परौ यज्ञ ।३।३।४७ । ETV परिणाहा । फ्येन वेदे स्यीकरणस् । 3222 The affix 'ghaſ, comes after the root'gral', în composition with 'pari' then it relates to sacrificial subjects Ag : fcute: the northern fencing of the sacrificial altar, wurfrater 'the southern fencing of the sacrificial altar' Why do we say 'when relating to sacrifices'? Observo fcn: 'the fencing of Devadatta', ३२२३ । नौ य धान्ये । ३।३ । ४ । ' इति सुप्त पञ्चमीकर । भीवा। घाये कि । निपरा काया । तिम्पिपयेऽपि माहुल पादप । मपरा विषत् । 3223. Tlio affix 'ghañ,' comes after the verb yri, preceded by 'ni', when tho sense is that of grain The here means both and and 19 in the Ablative case, tho cuso affis being elided. This debars the affix 4 As after rice growing wild or without cultivation', Why do we say' meaning grain'? Observe fraty **1' & virgin gæl'. The proper affix is ktın, but up is added diversely as act (Sec III 3.58 S. 3234). ३२२४ । उदि अयतियौतिपूद्र वः । ३।३। ४९ । उच्चायः । उदावः । उत्पाबः । उदावः । कथ पतनान्ताः समुष्कया।' इति । बाहुलकात । 3221 The affix 'gliañ comes after the verbs sri', 'yu', 'pî' and 'dru', when the preposition'ut' is in composition This debars the affix ach (III 3 50) Thus srai'risiog of a planet', 1974: 'mixing', JINT:'purifying ghee', and a flight'. How do you explain the form ut in cautar: 99:? The word fonet'optionally in the next søtra, exerts a retrospective effect on this stra, and the form is an optional one This 19 a most unusual thing and 19 called foreiratas 'the maxim of the lion's backward glance' It 19 used when one casts a retrospective glance at what he has left behind, while at the saths tim, he is proceeding just as the lion, while going onward in gearch of prey, now and then bºnds his neck backwards to deo if anythiog be within its reach. ३२२५ । विभापाङि रुनु वो । ३ । ३ । ५०। प्राराका-शारवाशाशावा-धाम।

·KRIT IV. $ 3220.) GIA AFFIX. 351 3223. The affix 'gliañ is optionally emplogril. aftor tho verbgru' (to rour) and 'plu' (to flort), udien tho preposition âu' is in composition As witres or 12710197, 19171 or what'bathing'. ३२२६ । अवे ग्रहो वर्षप्रतियन्धे । ३।३ । ५१ । furaha na I 49771-10: I'afaty farqi TT TTET I 3226. The affix 'ghañ is optionally einplored after the 100t'gralı', whon tho word 'ara' is in composition, the senso being withiolding of rain. The word 'optionally' 19 understood here. The word coafuary means the absence of rain, from somo crus0 or another, when the scrson hag arrived, as we or Mart 2AFT' tho draught of rain'. Why do we sny. when morning obstruction of rain'? Obserre wat पदस्य। . ३२२७ । ने वणिजाम् । ३।३ । ५२ । में प्रदेचा यणि सवरधी घेत्प्रत्ययार्यः । दुलाममिति पाषत् । इलाप्रपादेश पाति । तुलाप्रमाण। 3227. Tho affie 'ghañ is optionally employed after tho verb gral'in composition with 'pra', when the word so formed relates to commcroc. Both tho words grah and vibhasha aro understood hero By 'relation to commence is meant here the string of the balance, and not commerco in general. That string by which a bulanco 19 held is called Hat or तुलाप्रमाद, as तुलामगादेव परति or तुलाप्रपहेच परति, and this may be satd of any person whether he be a trader or not. Why do we say when belonging to commerce'? Obserre HTTTTT 'tho whip of Devadatta'. ३२२८ । रश्मौ च ।३।३ । ५३ । TI-ATI ! 3228. The affix 'gham' comes optionally after the verb gcalı' in composition with 'pra', when the word so formed mcans a rein The word vir means here the bridlo by means of which horses &c. jorned to tho curge, ara held under control , 18 #TV1 or Hütti 'arcin'. ३२२ । वणोतेराच्छादने । ३ । ३ । ५४ । विभापा प्रत्येव । प्रचार-प्रदरः । 3229, The affis 'ghañ comes optionally after the perb yfi' (to choose), then 'pra' is in composition, and the word 80 for med means 'a sort of covering ·352 THE SIDDITANTA RAUHUDI. (KRIT IT $ 3230. As Atti or 40'a cloak, a veil'. Why do we gry when it means a covering'? Obscrvo ****** ३२३० । परी भुवोग्यज्ञाने। ३ । ३ ॥ ५५ परिभाषा-परिभवा । अथवा किम् । सर्यता भवनं परिभया । 3230 The affix'gliañ 18 optionally employed after the vcrb blu', the spord 'pari' being in construction, when tbc sonse of the word so formed is disregard'. The word wat means 'contempt', 'neglect', 'disregard' &c As ofrut or femal'insult, humiliation'. Why do we say 'when meaning disregard'? Tho word fra: may be then construcd to mein मर्वतोभवन - परिभया 'surrounding'. ३२३१ । एरच् । ३।३। ५६ । चया। जया। "भपादीनामुपसंख्या नपु सके कादिमित्यर्थ " । भयम् । वर्षम् । 3231. The affix'ach' comes after a root ending in 'i' or f'(when mere action is denoted, or when the sense is that of an appellative, the word being related to the verb from which its name is deduced, but not as an agent). The words within brackets are to be supplied from sâtras 18 and 19 and these words are to be supplied in every subsequent sutra far as Otra III 3 113 This debars * The pin ma is qualitative, in satrag like VI.2 144 Thus, was collection', wat 'going', stat' victory', u' wasting'. Vart - In this connection the words 7 &c should also be ennerated. As 13+YAW fear, we 'rain'. These being neuter words, otherwise would have taken the affix a &c but for this Vártia. ३२३२ । ऋदोरम् । ३ । ३ । ५७ । utratgautareti KITTI I UTI Ya: 179: I FTTI I FT: 3232. After a root ending in long 'ri', short'u', or long 'ü', there is the fix 'ap' This debars पत्र. The 18 indicatory for the grke of accent (III 1 3); as +10=*: 'scattering ?*' beverage, poison', m'arrom', 1-4: 'barley', - 'reaprog', -T: 'innowing corn'. The yin 15 merely for the sake of euphony it is not r changed ipto y, for then by the rule that which follows 7 is also called are short only would have been taken and not long *(I. 1. 70) ३२३३ । वृक्षासनयोर्विष्टर. ।।३।३ । समयोर्षि पूर्वस्य रखापत्वं निपात्यते । विष्टरो घृतपानं च । 'पप-रति किम् । वाक्यस्य ·KRIT IV. $ $236.) AT Arix. नामिति पतध्यक्ष 3:33. Thic srord fees is irregularis formed in lhe sense of "trco" and " «C71." This worti sa form d by addling the allia are' to tha roos ficcola by tho proposition for Tlus free run from Why do we ony then in uning a 'teu' or A'ant'? Obe ITO HTTTTT99* ferats Se sat III. 3. 57. S. 3232 by what is rd L1 hrro instead of a ३२३४ । ग्रहयद्यनिरिषगमरप । ३ । ३ । ५ । JIFUTTI TUTTIGE LIST ITTI I MIT" frailty. HUAT TUTI TEI" **fry Informat" ft. पक्रन् । चिलिदम् ।। 3231 Thc allis ar' camcs after tho serbs 'gralı', 'rri', dri', 'nischi' anal gam'. This debars va, nnd 10 tho clan of fafathe allir vis dcbirrerie de Tri planet', atrin Loon', To'tcaring, a carc'; for 'cartripty', qui marul Thn verb Fafa would have taken * bat takes to which canso diffnen chce of accent. Vari. The rooty vyand ry should also be incladd in this;ns #1 obcdicnt', 'lnttle'. Vari.--"When the range is that of , the nffis 19 dircc:ed to be employed, after the following verbs., I, 97, , nnd 77 A, 574a tnblc-land' (on which they more), STW sexxl for bathing' (in which they bathe), 491' place whare water is distributed to travellers' (that out of which thny drunk), afas: (VI. 1. 16)'an awl, a drail' (that by which they pierce); forna 'no obulacle' (in which they are obs'rucleil), 1991' battle' (where they fighl). Vart -1 he roots sa ar redaplırated before the orix ! This rartika comes nndur vi. 1. 12, relatiog to reduplications, Thas 77, चिझि and are: ३२३५ । उपसर्गेन्दः । ३।३ । ५६ । प्रपपाद 3233. The affix 'ap' comes after the verb 'ad (to mt) Then an upasarga is in composition Thus:+3+. Now applies to following eatra by which 18 replaced by v ३२३६ । पक्षपोरष । २।४।३। पोस्त स्यापरियामाहा । निमः । 'उपसमें शि 323G. And then the allir and follow, is the substitute of शह . 45 ·352 TIL SIDDIANTA KAUNODI. (KRIT IT $ 3230. As atute Or no 'a cloak, a veil'. Why do we say when it meras a covoriog'? Observo TT ३२३० । परी भुवोग्यज्ञाने।३।३ । ५५ । aftar-pferati sa strâ' fine market afsi 3230 Thc affix'ghañ is optionally cmployed aftor the Torb'blu', the word 'piri' being in, construction, when the senso of the word so formed is disregard'. The word **1mcans 'contempt', 'peglect', 'disregard' &c. A9 feat or s'insult, humiliation'. Why do we say 'when meaning disregard'? The word ufani may bo then construed to mean won=ufcwar surrounding'.. ३२३१ । एरच् ।३।३। ५६ । पया । जया । “भयादीनाशुपतम्या गपु सके कादिगिपत्यर्यम् "। भयम् । वर्षम् । 3231. The affirach' comes after a root ending in 'i' or 1' (when mere action is denoted, or when the sense is that of an appellative, the word being related to the verb from which its name is deduced, but not as an agent). The words within brackets are to be snpplied from sůtras 18 and 19 and these words are to be supplied in every subsequent sdtra as far as sätra III 3. 113 This debars vs. The çın r 18 qualitative, in sūtras lıke VI 2. 144 Thus, i 'collection', sot going', si' victory , var' wastiog'. Vart-In this connection the words we &c should also be enmerated. As tit+994 'fear, wie 'rain'. These being neuter words, otherwise would have taken the aftis a &c but for this Vārtika. ३२३२ । ऋदोरम् । ३।३ । ५७ । quututgavf-artT IS ITT: I ATI ITT: 19** RETORITI 3232. After a root ending in long 'ri', short'u', or long 'ù', there is the affix ap'. This debars 4. The T 18 indicatory for the sake of accent (III 1 3), A3 +79=*T: 'scattering -:' beverage, poison', 7--06'arrot'; y-ma'barley', qu 'reaping', .-'wionowing coin'. The Tin is merely for the sake of euphony it is not change? anto , for then by the rule that which follows is also called the short only would have been taken and not long « (I. 1. 70) ३२३३ । वृक्षासनयोर्विष्टरः । ८।३।३ । नयोर्षितर्वस्य सापत्वं निपात्यते । विटरो पृषभाहन च । 'घृष-' इति किम् । पाक्यस्य faturi t ·krit IV $ 3230 ) Al Arrit 393 सख्यानम् 3231 + 3233 The word feet is irrogularly formed in llic scasc of "trec' and " sent This word is formed by adding the afix org' to tho toob ta preceded by tho preposition fan Thus faed qui a foot#? R Why do we any Thea incinng a 'toco' or 'Eat ? Obarro LATT41TTET fakat: S c shtra ID 3 57 S 3232 by which is added hero instead of all ३२३४ । ग्रहहनिश्चिगमश्च । ३ । ३ । ५ । धास्यात् । पत्रचोरपधादा । ग्रहः । परा दिसानिधयः । गमा। • afrutta 19T:I : 1 "पत्र कविधानम् • मस्यः। विस्ता।"द्विपकर कृषादी नामिति पतथ्य स्. । चनम् । चिलिदम् । धनधा। Tho alix'ap'crmos after tho verbs 'gral', 'Fri', dri', '218ch' and 'gam'. Tbig debars , and in the case of fafathe allir *19 debirred Ag T'a planct , 9t: * a boon i tearing, a cave , furua: 'cartaiaty', w: march Tho verb fara would have taken up, but takes se which causes differ ence of accent Vart — The roots og and should also ho incladed in thig, 19 oraz obedient til attic • Vart -When the sense 19 that of 4, the affir eis dirccted to bo employed after the fullo ving verbs - ETI, 7 be, and TTI Ag AU o table Innd (on which they more), AE yes cl for bathing (fa which they bathe) saro' n place where water is distributed to travellers (that out of which they drink) wavi ("I 1 16) an awl a drill (that by wh ch they pierce) fett: no obstacle' (in which they are obstructel), 'battle (where they fight) This Vart – Thu roots * &c. are redaplıcated before the affix** vårtıka cornes under vi i 12, rclating to redaplications Thas 54, चिलिदम् and पवनसः ३२३५ । उपसर्गेऽद । ३ । ३ । ५६ । LIETTI 3235 The affix 'ap comes after the rerb 'ad 'to cat) when an upasarga is in composition Thus #+24+ser Now applics the following satra by which at 19 replaced by T 1 ३२३६ । पजपोश्च । २।४।३८॥ भदेल स्याइभ्यपि प्रपतः । विए।। उपसर्ग किम् । पाता। 3236 And when the aflis and follow, ver is the substitute of प्रद . . 45 ·334 TOE KIDDUANTA KAUSUDI [KRIT IV.53237. As fori (II. 4. 38) 'half chewed morsul', 798 voracious" Why do we say when compounded with an upasarga ? Obserre पासा grass' पद+घम् = पम् +II 4 38)= पार।। ३२३७ । नौ ण च । ३।३।६०। मी उपपदे प्रदेवः स्यादामा म्यादा मिपसा। 3237. And the fix 'ns' as well as 'ap' comes after tho vorb'ad, (to eat), when tho upasırgı 'nt is in composition As fi+पद+पनि+माइशया VII 2 116) - feeding', मि+अद +पनि+पम् + (II 4.08)-नियमा 'ca.ing food. ३२३८ । व्यधजपोरनुपसर्ग । ३ । ३ । ६१ । पास्याए । व्ययः । जपः। उपसर्ग । भाष्याचः। उपजापा। 3238. The affix 'ap comes after the verbs 'vyndh' and jap, when no upasarga is in composition with them. This debars पम् As ज्यथा 'wound, जप. 'muttering Why do we say when upasarga less / Obserre पाण्याचा उपनापः । ३२३८ । वनहसोर्या । ३।३ । ६२ । अस् । परे घन् । स्वमा-स्वामः । इसा-दामा अनुपसर्ग इत्येष । प्रस्वानः । प्रहामः । 3239. The affis 'ap comes optionally after the verbs •sran' and 'has' when no upasarga is in composition with them. Thus स्पा or स्वाना • sound , et or 'laughter' But with upasargas, we have only one from , प्रस्थान: a loud nouse , महास: a loud laughter- ३२४० । यम. समुपनिविषु च । ३ । ३ । ६३ । रध्वनुपसर्गच यमेरमा । रायमा-मयामः । उपयमा-उपयामः । नियमा नियामः । विपन:- बियामः । यमा-यामः। 3240 And the affix 'ap comes optionally after the verb 'yam' when the upisarga sam', 'upa, 41 and vi, are in composition, or even when it is upasarga less This debars पत्र As सदमः or सयामा 'restraint', उपयम: or उपयाम: marriage , firahi or faxevas restrictive rule, faqat or fagnas check, distress , यम: or यामः। ३२४१ । नौ गदनदपठस्वनः । ३।३ । ६४ । अम्बा स्यात् । मिगदा-निगादःनिनद-निनाद निपटा-निपाटा। मिस्वना-निस्थानः । 3211 The affis 'ap' comes optionally after tho verbs .gad' (to speak), 'nad' (to sound), 'path' (to read), 'svan' ito sound), when the upasarga 'ni' is in composition with them. This debars vs Thus farct or fatet 'recitation , firmat or farge 'nouse, निपटा or निपादा reading , निस्पन or निस्वान • a nouse' . . - ·mit IV. § 3345.) AP AFFIX 355 ३२४२ । कणो यीणायां च ।३।३ । ६५ । HITIVTV771ferta arTTTT FUTT I mig fortrifrom NET-muti teel 5*1-* II 3210 The allix 'ar' comes optionally after thc rerb 'kran' (to jın;le), lien 'ni' is in composition with it, a, tell As irlien it is Trithout any upacarga, or when 'fulcis meant. Tarsdebart tho nffis 7 Tau, fax71 or farmer'n minscal tono'. *TIOT 'gonnd'. When it refire to 'Anth', most hiro momo upasargr not nccessarily fr, og TITAT1TT. But not so horc, afavarat on, where the upacargo Bring safe anil the word not referring to a fabr,' no option is allowed When fut 1 not m ant, thr up girza must lis fe or no npsirgs nt all, for the opinat application of tho nflix say To Sim np. w takes 25 optionally and thrco conditions - let wh n procrded by fr, or ?nully when having no uplarga, or 3rdly when it rofers to 'fato', and then it 1n036 bars got7 uprgirga. ३२४३ । नित्यं पणः परिमायो । ३ । ३ । ६६ । ATTETTE I TA*****TUI ) Ganita wanitat affaat gevra is freat l'alcata fapt Ti 32b. The ali rap' comes insariibis after tho verb.pan (to barter), rhon tlie scnsc is tlit of micrsarc The word foredlinvariably' 19 usul in th: aphorism in orier to konp thonnuvsitor of the word optionally Thus wartwi'n handful of radies', HINTA: 'n han llul of vegetable'. A small bundl. of rulushng & tied together for the purposcs of sale is q-called. Those words o condarily Trave come to me in a nacisure eqnal to n halful, irrepicture of any thing. Whan notimaning mngure, we have to 'trado'. ३२४४ । मदोग्नुपसगै । ३ । ३ । ६७ । परमदान उपमहानाया। 3214. Tho alix'ap' comes after the rerb 'mad, Flicn not in composition with an aipasargy. This debirs x As formato 'pride of knowledg", IT: pride of Trenlth', ya**'pride of family'. When companded with apagırgu, We have preret.mnd, vatt'crror or circlcennes'. ३२४५ । प्रमदसमदी हर्षे । ३ । ३।६८ । ** ft I WITZI 3215. The trords 'primada' anl'sammıdı' are irrrgularly formed, mcining 'jos: .

·856 TIE SIDDIANTI KAUMUDI (KPIT. IV. $ 3246. and vua AS WRITAİ HAFI 'the joy of girls', stierat ***: 'the rejoicing of cuckoos'. Why do ve say 'when meaning delight'? Obserre #IT: circles ness', #4791'frunzy'. ३२४६ । समुदोरजः पशुपु । ३ । ३ । ६६ । संपूर्वाऽजिः समुदाय उत्पूर्वश्व प्रेरणे तस्मात्पशुविषयकादास्यात् । 'अपनयो।' इत्युत् प्रावो पा समजा पशूना मघा । उदा पाना प्रेरशस् । 'पशुषु' किम् । समाजी ग्राह्मणानाम् । उदान क्षत्रियाणाम् । 3216 Tho affis'ap' comes after the verb 'aj (to go), when the prepositions 'sam' and 'ut' are in composition, und the void so formed refers to beasts This deburs us The root means to go, to throw. When preceded by , it means collection , and preceded by so it muung 'drrring Ag Teyyen a herd of cattle', 1981 Ta' driving forth of cattle Tho A 18 not changed to t7, because II. 4 56 S 2292 ordaining this substitution excepts the affixes ध Why do we say when applying to cattle? Observe the mouth, Toto ofstuteti ३२४७ । प्रक्षेपु ग्लहः । ३।३। अपशब्देन देवनं लक्ष्यते वस्त्र यत्पदपेश ग्रास ग्ला' रति निपारयते । अषस्य गहलः। 'व्यास्पधीमभिसरणलहामदीव्यन्' । 'प्रक्षेषु' किम् । पादस्य ग्रहः। 3217 The word 'glalır is 11 regularly for med, when the sense of the root refers to gambling This word is derived from the root T The verb ve tahes the offic w and thus forms Te, and then irregularly 13 changed into , 9 WTF? HERE'cast of the dice the bnt to be d luseret on the fall of the dice Why do we say' when referring to gambling? Obscrvo treti Others say, this word is derived regularly from the root ac'ta grmble', by adding the affix wy, and thus debarring Th y supposo, therefore, the existence of the root ay to explain the fort I The counter example wbich they would give 13 ree: 'receiving', formed by adding the affix पम् । Th 15 tnytarter 1047 (Jlâgh VIII 32) ३२४ । प्रजने सर्तेः । ३ । ३ । ७१ । *** STATHIETTIVTT: 1 579 "TUTI TUI for I wfvur@ g fy, महापा--(३२९६) इति ।। 3219 Tuc iflix.p' co ncs after tho rcrb'sri' (to flom), in tho sense of impre,nating (tlıc covering of cours dc). This dcburs vs The worl ext means 'tho first covering of a cor by As maitytatt impregnation of cow', FITIITET: 'impregnat on of cattle.' C bull ·KRIT IV : 382 ) THT AF ATIT 119# rlo yod explain aransi an! prarara! 'Ihyar his shinñ with th foror of loration d noting A ann an lup 111.3 $. 1200. ३२४ ) सपसार घ न्यम्युपविपु । ३ । ३ । १२ । faktor ATI I 37771 FATTI PO TI ATITIS * 3210 Tlio nffirop comes after the reab liv. to roll when the prepositiona 'ni, ablu', 'upa'nnd 'Fl' are in com. po ition Trilh it. and its simirore) is changed into the corres. ponding rotel Thit debin A4 fa++7=fæ+s+- (VI 1. 103) Forf 87 ** (VII. 3 81)=firani (VI 1. 78)'invocation', afirttı invocation'; ET17: 'ansitation, free calling'. Baterai'n gommons'. ३५ । शाहि युद्धे । ३।३ । ७३ । IstrasfrafoWRIITTI I 'T? f I VIGTI 3230. Tuo afir'ap' comes nfter the terb'line' then thic sFord in composition is tho upisarga 'dü, and tuc scmi-romel of the root is changed into its corresponding TOTI, tien tho Tord so forned incang battlc. As witar battlo' (where they challenge cach other) Bat otherwise war' calling ३२५१ । निपानमारायः । ३ । ३ । ७४ । पाप यते। मेन गारमादिमोदवापारपदामा । 'पापानिपार पाप 3231. The word 'Abira' is irregularis formal tiro incan. ing 'troug!.. Tho wor i wit*: 19 irregularly formed from by thon prefix xt, tbas sampras trans, and th rpid lhi of the vostel Thu T++=+7 BITI+= TRT'n trough ncir n well for watering cattle'. Oborot 137 Tracallı is. Eren in the wond W1 thr son of calling is onder. stool. It is that place frar a melt containing water, wberc catila ang called or invited to drink water. Thus we forgd (dmaralosh I 10 28). ३२५२ । भावेग्नु पसर्गस । ३।३।। समुपक्षप यो प्रसारमा राद्वारे 3232. The nis ap' connes after the rerb 'hre' and there is the change of the semi-romel to its cororsponding towel, when the root ix upuan rogoless, and mere action is denoted. As mai'calltag', mito ftmy.

·358 THE SIDDIANTA KIUNUDI. (ERIT. IV. $ $253. Why do we say when no up19nrga 1$ 10 composition with it? Obeervo TETA I Though the anavșitti of the word he was understood in this Aphorisra from sútra 3184, its repetition here shows that the pauvritti of satra 3188, which was running, must not be taken; so thnt this word applies to agent-käraka also. ३२५३ । हनश्च वधः । ३।३। ७६ । अनुपसर्गादन्तेर्भावे यस्यात् । वादेण्याग्तोदात्तः । वन दस्युम् । चाइन् । पातः । 3253, Tho affix'ip' comes after the root o' Then upasırga-less, in the sense of mero action, and Tadur' is the substitute of han' before this aflix. This w has udat a accent on its final. The affic which is antidåtta generally (III. 1. 4) thus becomes ndAtta As any 'the killing of thieves; 177€TTIR 'the killing of robbers". When action is not denoted, the affix,y applieq; ns #14: ' a blow. So also when an apasarga is in composition with it; as 1978, T1 The word in the aphorisms dozs not connect *7, with the substituto , there being no co-ordination, it refers to the nffixes under discussion. Thue we have the affix va also ; as vra: 'killing'. ३२५४ । मूतै पन । ३।३ । ७ । wfar afera aferrafinat praefuit I, TUTTI I STUTTII ETT 'Bunu martuar yfa vine puf w48 3231. Tho affix 'ap' comes after the verb 'han', Triin the word so formed menns solidity, and 'ghan' is the substitute of han. The word mean'hardness', 'solidity'. Thus *'n mne of cloud'; from sola card. For do we say oth or BF7****** Nero tho quality is taken for the thing qualified. ३२५५ । अन्तर्घनो देश । ३।३ । ७८ । मायामविशेषायनयन । 'जस्ता'रति पाटारमा 3233. Thc rer) han prrccdel hr tha mond'antar' tukce tho atlie'ap' and 'glinis the substituto of the word 'Jan', Then the ord so formed ńcans 'a countrs. As sort*+7=UTC+13+ to was 'nama lof a country or Bahika': (n porch or court, an open spica bofore the house between the entrance door and tho house) Somo write the word with a vns was, thint is also fald. Why do womay' when meaning n country'? Obscrvo poelst strihing in the middlo.

·KRIT IV S3239.1 THE AP AFFIX 359 ३५६ । अगारैकदेशे प्रघणः प्रघाणश्च । ३।३ । 90 । द्वारदेश द्वी प्रकोष्ठायलिन्दी शाभ्यम्तरो बाझच । तत्र वा प्रकोष्ठे निपातनमिदम् । मषिय दिने पास प्रकण हन्यते इति प्रघणा-प्रयायः । कर्मपयप् । पक्षे वृद्धिः। 3256 The words'praghaṇa'and“ praglån ire irregularly formed, meaning a portion of a dwelling house. Thug #tu: or Anrur'a porch before the door of a house a portico' The ap has the force of object There is sriddhu in one alternative. On both ades of an entrance to a house there are open spices The outer-yard 18 called prag hâna or pragh ina. Bec use p rsong entering strike that ground with thưir feet to throw off dust and dirt-80 it 19 will stricken ground indeed This is formed from Twith #, irregularly Why do we say when meaning a portion of a house ? Observe surat i ३२५७ । उद्घनोग्त्याधानम् । ३।३ । ८०। अत्याधानमुपरिस्थापनम् । यस्मिन्काष्ठम्यानि कानि स्थायित्वा तश्यन्ते तदनः । शधिकरणे । 3257. The word 'udghana' is irregularly formed in the sense of bench'. This is formed from va+Irregularly Thus **' a carpenter's bench' (the wood on which placing other planks &c the carpenter planes, carves &c) The ap has the force of location When not having this sense we have ugurat' uneven' ३२५८ । अपघनोरङ्गम् । ३।३।१। sa mitrai IT ITT FÅ F# O TÍT TERTG: 1 TÔ sq i raatsiara 8258 The word ' anaghana' is irreguarly formed means * a member of the body. This is formed irregularly from +7 Thus पपन: a lambor member of the body The word om ang a portion of the body, such as hand or foot, and not the whole body The ap has the force of Instrument here Otherwise we have अपपाता । ३२५८ । करो योविद्रुपु । ३।३।२। एषु पता करयोऽस्याद्धमादेग । यो एण्यतेऽमेनेत्ययोएना । विपनः । दुधनः । दुषणा' रत्येको । 'पूर्वपदात्मवायाम्-' (८५५) इति स्वम् । सषा कुदारस्य । दुर्घवः। 3259 The allix'ap comes after the verb 'han' Then the ayas', 'vi' or 'dru' are a composition with it, then the word so formed is related to the verb as an instrument, and *ghan' is the substitute of 'lan'. As saitett a forge hammer' (whereby the iron 15 destroyed), format 'mallet', : an are' lit the tree (dru) cutter words, Some write ri, the e being changed into a exther by tále VIII. 4 8 S 857 or by ·360 TIL SIDDIIAXTA KAUHUDI. [Kaur, IV. F3260 including this work in the class of war (IV. 2. 80). 'Dru' means (5rco. ३२६० । स्तम्ब क घ । ३।३ । ६३ । स्तम्ब उपपदे : सरोकायादारापरे समादेषवा सम्बना-स्वय एन । साय इत्येव स्तम्यपाता। 3260. The affix 'ka' also comes after the rerb ' 'han', whon 'stamba' (a clump) is the word in composition, and the relation of tho word so formed to the verb is that of an instrument. Tho word in the gatra draws in we from the last aphorism and in that case घ replaces . Thus स्तम्यम or स्तम्यपम: 'a Emall hoe for weeding clumps of grass'. In the feminine gender, tho forms are ATENT as well as स्तम्यपना । When is added ye bayo Thus ++ (VI. 4. 98) प (VII. 3.54). When थप is added, rm is totally replaced by TI When instrument is not incant, we have स्तम्य पावा। ३२६९ । परौ पः । ३ । ३ । ८४ । परी इन्तपस्यात्करणे पापम्दश्चादेशः । परिणग्यतेनेनेवि परित। 3261, Tho affix 'ap' comes after the verb 'han' when the upasarga 'pari' is in composition, and the relation between the word so formed, and the verl), is that of an instrument, and 'gha' replaces 'han'. Thus efter 'en iron beam used for looking or shutting the gate, an iron club. By the next sutra, we get another form of this word. ३२६२ । परेश्च पारयोः । ८।२।२२ । परे रेफस्य लो या स्पाइप देवगन्दे । पलिया-परिधः । पर्या-पल्या 'सप्तमपी घ.' (२००३) इति कृधिनस्य न ग्रहवं व्याख्यानात् । 2262. Ther of परिis changed to m before ghar and anka. As परिघः or पलिपा, पर्व: or पस्यदः। The worb u here means the word. form घ, and not the technical of तर and तम। See I. 1.22. S. 2003. ३२६३ । उपप्न प्राश्रये । ३।३। ८५ । उपपूर्वादन्तरपस्यादुपपालोपछ । था वयसम्देन सामीप्य लक्ष्यते । पर्वतैनोपदम्यते सामीप्येन गग्यादति पततोपना 3268. The word 'upaghna' is irregularly formed meaning 'an inclined place for leaning or support'. It is formed by adding अप (III. 3.76) to the verb preceded by tha upasarga se, then eliding the penultimate of t; this is the irregularity. Theu by sandhi rules is changed into Titi This form would have been given by the afis * also, withoat any irregulanity, ·INIT IV $ 3266] THE APAFTIX 361 'Tho word sina refers to proximity, contiguity. Thus vaataan 'tho declivity of the inountan', so also 97979* ' bordering tho vıllago'. Why do we szy' when meaning 'support'? Obserye viategras i ३२६४ । संयोद्घौ गणप्रशंसयोः । 1३।३।६। सहनन सपा । भायेऽए । उग्यत उत्कृष्टो शायत इत्युदयः । फर्भपय । गत्यर्थानां युदपयं. taifastai 3261. The words 'sangha' and udglia aro irregularly formed in the sense of a collection', and 'a praiso' respecto ively. These words are thus formed, va+t=a+E+*+5t: Thug 49: TURTY'a herd of cattle', so also cut motor' an excellent man' who knows well The word 'respectively 19 inserted from 1. 3. 10. When not used in these senses, we have rear 'anion'. In sangha, tho ap has the force of condition', and in udgha of 'object', as all roots mcan. ing' to go', denoto also 'to understand, so'han' here menns 'to know', in udgha. ३२६५ । निघो निमितम् । ३।३।८७ । समन्ताग्मित निमितम् । निर्षियेपं इग्यन्ते पायन्ते इति मिपा वृक्षाः । समारोहपरिणादा इत्यर्थः। 3265. The word 'nigha' is irregularly formed in the senso of 'as lugh as broad.' Tn word fafira mcang 'measured all round' i, e' ng high as broad' literally that which is known (hanyantezzjñiyanto) fully. As fort qurt trees as high ag broad'. fie regt squaro or cubic or circular halls. Otherwise, when not meaning 'as high as broud', we have foretata blow'. The word निमित- समताम्मित, समारोपपरिणादम् । It may be derived from er or from fet In the first case it will mean 'measured' and in the other, 'crected, built'. Professor Bothlingk refers to 4pastamba Dhar ma I 20 30 for the meaning of this word. ३२६६ । द्वितः क्तिः । ३।१।। घयं माव एप स्वभावात् । 'प्रेम नित्यम्' । नित्यप्रणारिकप्रविषयः । पद पर कायम म विग्रहा। हुपच । पाकेन निवृत्त पक्तिमम् । इरम् । प्रिम । 3266. The afix Wtri' comes after tho verb which has an indicators du', when denoting more action dc. The phrases when the s’ase is that of mºre action', and 'when the sense is that of an appellative, the word bɔiog related to the perb from which its name is deduced, but not ag agent', are of course understood this, as in all tho previous aphorismas. Then by IV.4.20, S 1570 (of th, affix teft, 13 alvass the augmeat) we mast add , for we can not use the affix fr'alone, but we must always use Formua Thus 3999 to cook** ·862 THE SIDDIANTA KAUNUDI [RRIT IV.53257. . दावर . पनिमम् ' what is rupa', जुप-उनिम्स 'somn' (VI. 1 16), कृषिमा artificial ३२६७ । द्वितोऽथुन् । ३।३।। अयमपि स्वभावागाय एव । टुवे । चेपाः। वयषुः । 3267. After that verb which has an indicatory tu', the affix atbuch, comes with the force of denoting mere action de As दुप-देपयुः 'a trembling', टुलोषि-रखपशु: swelling , 'sneering, इ-दवयु: burning ३२६८ । यजयाचयतविच्छमच्छरक्षो नड् । ३ । ३ ।। यः । वान्ता । यमः । विश्नः । मरन । मरने चासन्न-' (२999) रवि चापकाग्न संभ. सारणम् । जित्य विश्न इत्यत्र गुणनिषेधाय । ररूपाः । 3288. After the verbs -yoj' (to worship), 'yach' (to ash for,) 'yat (to strive), 'violichh' (to shine), 'prachchh' (to ask) and 'raksh' (to preservo) comes the alix'nin' with the force of denoting mere action do The conditions of S 3184 and 3188 are understood here also The of " is for the sake of prohibiting gana or vriddhi (1 1. 58 2217), as for 'sacrifice', mot solicitation, the effort , faza: (VI 4 19 S 2561) "lastre', no gunz becanse of Ei 471 a question , रण: protection. The root by VI I 16 S 2412 ought to have changed its e into the feu affix w Its not doing so must be taken to be an irregularity before countenanced by Panui as we know from the fact that Pånint himself uses the form TI in III 2 117 S. 2777 ३२६९ । स्वपो नन् । ३ । ३ । १ । 3269 The affix 'nan' comes, under similar circumstances, after the verb 'svap' (to sleep) The final e Is indicatory and regulates the accent (VI 1.197 S.3686) as स्वप्रा' dream' ३२७० । उपसगै घो कि ।३।१।। प्रधिः । प्राधिः । उपाधीयतेऽनेनेत्युपाधिः । 3270 The affix 'ki' comes under similar conditions, after a "ghiu' verb (I. 1. 208 2373), when an upasargs is in composition with it The 19 10dicatory, by force of which the final u 19 elided (VI. 4 64 82372) Thus w+दा+कि प्रदिः in present', मषित tho periphery of a whcel , outfirs' fraud', watt: 'vanishing' ३२११ । कर्मण्यधिकरणे च ।३।३।३ । रघुपपदे भोलि पापिया जहानि पीयन्टेरिनग्निविति। .

·KRIT IV. $ 3272.) TITE KTIV AFFIX. 363 . 1 3271. Tho affix.ki' coinos after a 'gliu' verb, wlicnu word in the accusative caso is in composition with it, and when tho relation of the word so formed to its yerb, is that of 'loca. tion'. As wafi'the ocean (in which tvater 13 held)', ofw'a quiver (that in bich arrows are pat) The word 'location' in the aphorism indicates that tho words so formed should brve no oth-r significance Tag word in tha aphorism drays in the alfix fix froin the last sûtra ३२७२ । त्रियां क्तिन् । ३ । ३ । ४ । alfamart foretrganisering Trang Farifafasi yfir Karat-KAIF Elfakrar fæ ATTET I forargata fufe 'ri' tfa al समाधेयम् । युपत्रीपिस्तुभ्या करणे .. श्रूयतेऽनया बुतिः। योरिपेच रष्टि । नुतिः । eui*at fenfiagragnai", napofa intrarier Freis for it TITE-" (9093) fa infanfraaft that is free ofx ' (2009)Tas i frasi maat fer for femrat 01101*fafa: 1"* Recifras ofert "fari 'तिमपीच्यते। संपत्तिः। विपत्तिा 3272. To oxprogs an action do. by a word in the feminine gender, the affix ktın' is added to the root. The conditions of ruleg 3181 and 3188 are understood here also This supersedes v4, stand va afires, buing taught subsequent to them Taus yfa .action', fafar 'a gatharing', afat 'understanding' Eufai praiso', eritas 'gwelliag. Taz form **f& 19 erroneous, for FRI is changed to sit only in the Nishtha (S 3011) Or it is derived from th: root evilla forined from the Past Part la with for and adding ri Thus Fotia + (**: x1) = sifa (VI 1 22. S. 3014). The for is added to P p. este to make it a root by the gara-sätra given under the Cboradı ** (No 303) Nole --The affix Llin should be declared to coma aftur th: verbs 27 to get' &c Thus fre 'gettiog', afs'accomplishmeor', for shining', erfero' a slip', erfari'd straction', firi' gain Parr:-So also artar da verder wir sirsahin'e 'to wish' and 'to praise', when lostrumont is meant, as Fat' car'ı(that by which wo hear). 80 tfel, a sacrifice' or 'a wish' from faj and ish. ofas ' praise. No'e.-The afbes fa comes after the verbst to ba exhausted', ** 'to fade, 'to grow old' and ' to learo', as varfer exhaustion', varfuz ' fading', varferold age', rifloss'. Vart -The afiis fit coming after verbs ending in long and the This form 13 thas Forbs &c. 19 libe & Nishtha. Thus afe: 'scattering evolved + fery=fa+fa (VII 1.100 S. 2390) -fos+fa (I 1 51 $ 70% =utet fa (VIII 2. 77 S. 354) At this stage, a 19 changed into * by the ·C 364 THE SIDDIANTA KAUMUDI (KRIT IV 93273 affix boing treated as a Nishtha (VIII 2 42 S3018) and th18 18 changed into w by the ordinary rules of sandbı, 80 also site 'praus f. old ago', otra drying f*: (VIII 2 41) 'catting, gfari 'joining, was 'agitation' gmi destruction' The wrof hlåd is shortened to by ths analogy of Nishtha (VI 4 95 S 3073) by dividing it into two! AS मई Similarly afås i Fefa 1 The w of ug and is changed to y by S 3037 Vart --Before finu afhx 974 18 always changed to fa, as sitfai *Loss , destructiou, showing reverenco lhe affix ft 19 added to wa by considering it as belonging to the class of wra do Sco abov: Vart Otherwise it would take the aflix by III 3 103 Vart -The affix fag comes after the verbs #47 &C AS ***' progp rity', fast 'a calamity , afate 'access. The affis i 19 also crployed after these verby -as fet fagfti The verby &c are 21 verbs of kryâde class + ३२०३ । स्थागापापचो भावे ।३।३ । ६५ । F# FUTTEISTETES I falas i gefeafa: i mot fat i vifas OFFRE 'अवस्था सस्या रति । 'व्ययस्थायाम्' इति शापकात् । 3273 After the 100ts 'stha' (to stand), 'g' (to sing) på, (to drink) and 'pach' (to cook), tlı aflix 'htin 19 employed when a word in tlıc fumiame gendei denoting a 'Invie actio 1' is to be expressed This deburs the athir (III 3 1068 3283) which generally sup i eds in cases of compound verbs ending so long Tous sterfa: a journ you (VII 4 40 S 1074) Equitfa: a singug aloud , 8+ Fifor (VI 1 45 S 2370) =*+fa (VI 4 66 S 2162), n'a conc rt #1)fai a cistern, सपीति drinl ing together , पति cooking The repetitron of the wor i TT in this aphor s n i spits of its azuiritti being understood from S 3181 is to exclu le overy other sigmtcance How do we get fro ns like अवस्था nd सस्था ? Par hins If in his sůtras has used forms like 'ITTFOL &c. See I 1 34 S 218 This is enough justification for us to deri ve forms liko ETT HEUT &c by applying the afik ve under S 3283 in spite of the piesent sůtra which requires us to apply only ३२७४ । उतियतिजूतिसातिहेतिकीर्तयश्च । ३।३।। भवतनवरत्वर- (२६५४) इस्यूठ । अति । स्वरापं पवनम् । उदास इति रिपते । at gfa: 1 537374757 TOTEUR I Ftà: orfar l 'trakafauteur- (3098) तो धे प्राप्त इत्याभायो निपात्यते । नोवेर्वा मनमन- (२५०४) इत्यास्ये कृत स्वराय निपातनम् । die maat fa: fasi 3274 And these toids 01: *ûtı' (preserving, sport), *rûti' (jun), ‘juti' (velocity), sâtı', (destruction), 'lioti' 1 ·hrit IV. § 3270 ] THE KYAP AXXIX. 865 . (1 weapon) and 'kirti' (fame) are anomalous forms, acutoly acccrried. Tho anuvritta of the word docs not exist in this, but the word 57779 of the last AshtAdhyâyi sätra S. 3120 is understood here. The word *fa 15 thus forracd -" to protect't-fT=+fH (VI 4 20 S. 2651} *fast This form is regular and could be cvolved from III 394 nico, but not ko th&accent Tho regulurity m afas and gfăt consists in the lengthening of Sinto o, in ufa: thc w of the root & which becomes et by Vi. 1 45 S 2370 is not changed into y, as rule VII 4 40 S 3074 r qured and the is the irregularity This form may also be derived from the root or with perfect proprioty, excopt ng to the accent, which would be regulated by the preacnt sutra thus vu++fu (VI # 12 S 2504)=fa The form fit may by derived either fron दम् or हिमोति । rautagaisu upolev i garufu afafilt u (Rig I 7.4) 'O Indra mnyet thou mighty, defend us in battles and in fights of a thousand duels with thy mighty protections' So also offers ३२०५ । ब्रजयजो वे क्यप् । ३।३ । ३८ । घण्या।इण्या। 3275 Thio alix 'hyar' comes after the roots 'rraj' (to go) and 'yay' (to worship) acutely accented, in forming a word in the femmino denoting notion • This gup rs destiny Ta is quat 'wandering abont', 79(VI 1 15 S 2409)' worshipping. Thu g of 647 19 indicatory and though it serves no purpose in this sûtra, 1t 14, ho Ylvur, necessary in the next, for 10 19 by force of at having that we adulna 1, VI 1.715 28 8, in the ords forored in the next tu horism १२०६ । संज्ञाया सननिपदनियतमनविदपुश्शीभूमिण ।३।३।। treft: foyer TTT TETTE 1719 TUI. tify amit for पाध्यम् 108 TFSFULFAFX Trit fast regrotinia faut I 71 ftatueritfafx fatet for at taastio mifanorat far i gauti rat, IQTI var fast re fofast i 3276 The allis kvap' comes aftur the followin: verbs in forming n wond in the feminino denoting 'an appella tire' and 18 aoutcly accented on: - - 990-2)', 'wishad'. ni-pat', 'man,'ral, 'suñ', 'siñ , 'bhrñ and 'in Thus that an a-sembly' Vart -Th. ** 1* not changed to 7 berfor the affix hy op inspite of 11 + 36 S 9202 from 'A small b d or couch'. fateat slippery ground', *v*t 'the rape or the back of the Deck', by which one understan is when a mun 13 an anger', farm lnowledge', TA1(VI. 1 71)'extraction of soma juici, parturition', vt bed, goat'wages service, 4T 'a latter' palanquin', ·8GR THE SIDDHANTA KAUMunt. (ERIT IT S 3277. 3299 कृजः शप।३।३। १० । xai' tfa tofamenti i 97943 TITILATAT I Love wifetif 27 og fare 3277. And after the root 'kri' comes the affic 'sa' in forming a feminine, as well as the affic 'lyap'. By the forco of the word or we draw the affix into this sætra, and by the process called it for at we can split up this aphorism into two (1) yt: 'after the root thero 19 tho affix kyap'. As part 1 (9)'and the afix as well as ktın Thus i nat, and fat When tho affix 19 added, the rous assumes the form fxu by III 1 67 S 2756. ३२७- 1 इच्छा ।३।३। १०१ । विर्भावे पो चगभाषच मिपास्यतेचा परिचर्यापरिसष्टगयाटाटामामुपसंख्यानप"। यो यथप निपात्यते । परिचर्या प्रा । परिभर्या परिसरणम् । धन गुणोऽपि । मृग सम्यपणे सुरादावदन्तः । अतो लोपाभावोऽपि । मे यदि सितोपा । गया । घटते पकि स्पसदस्य fiated genera un frafratia screar 1 **opăcati af IT TE SWITC-atirati 3278 The form 'ichchla' (desire) is irregular. The word is thus formed पप् +-इण्य+-इच्छा The या ordained by III 1 67 S. 2756 19 not added, this is the irregularity. Part -The follwing words are also irregularly formed' fcurf 'perambulation', the guna is also an anomaly, pierat attendance service, QT4T 'hunting' from the churâdı root wriga (No. 137) to search' it ends 22 * This * 18 not elded, the fr 15 elded b fore and 77* I WETCUT the habit of roaming abont as a religious inendicant. The affixes - and are irregularly added, and the syllable u 19 reduplicatod, but not in the first portion, while the vowel 19 lengthened Vart — From the root st? We have either site or arat 'wahing' The first is formed by thº affis v the latdar by which brings 10 (III. 1 67 S 2756) ३२७ । प्रत्ययात् । ३।३।१०२ । Arvatavat styra fwTTATRICURI FATTI fatet I g*TUOTI 3279. After the verbs that end in an affix there is the alix'a, the word being feminine The verbs that end in an affix are derivative roots such as D?gid ra tives, Causatives Intensives and D nominatives Though taliog affixes they are called uta (III 1. 329 2301), after these verby the affix o 14 used in forming the feminine noun Thus *+5=1' to wish to do, this is a Daritative root, efter this root festo we aid » Thus forte + (VI 4. 43 S 2308)=funt Then we add era by IV 1 4 $ 454 and get festet the desire to do', 90 also fortet the desira to take', pater the desire to be liko e gon', 541 पक ·. KPIT IV.5 3281] THE AFFIX 367 - desire of a son', naut' much cutting, tear 'itch'. The sůtra is also found a9 अप्रत्ययाद । ३२८०१ गुरोश्च हलः । ३ । ३ । १०३ । गुरुमतो इलस्तारिष यामकारा स्यात् । ईशा । जहा । 'गुरो।' किम् । भक्ति ।'ला' किन् । भीतिः। * मिष्ठायां सेट इति वक्तव्यम् हि । प्राप्तिः। 'तित्र-' (३१६३) इति मेट् । दीतिः। '* चितुवप्रहादीनामिति याच्यर " निगृहीतिः । निपदितिः । 3280. The affix a' comes after that verb which has a prosodially heavy vowel and ends in a consonant, wlien tho word to be formed is feminine. This debars क्तिम् । Thus कुएहा 'an adulteress'; दुपटा 'a tigress'; रा 'effort', कहा 'supplying an ellapsis'. Why do we say which has a prosodially heavy vowel'? Observa भक्ति: 'devotion'. Why do we say ' which ends in a consonant'! Observe Hilfara' polity'. . Vart.-The affix ktın comes after roots which take an indicatory * in the Nışthâ. Not here as wtfgti The ktın does not take re by VII. 2. 9.S.3163. So we get दीप्तिः । Varl.-The affix fa, J and fatake g augment after us and words of similar formation:-as विधीतिः, उपस्तितितिः, निकुधितिः । निपतितिः ३८१ । पिद्भिदादिभ्योङ् । ३ । ३ । १०४ । पिट्यो भिदादिभ्यश्च खियामह । जम् । अमोजि गुराः' (२४०६) । परा। प्रपूछ । प्रपा । मिदा । विदारण स्वायम् । भित्तिरण्या। विदा । सुना। कपः मप्रसारण च । कृपा। 3281. The affix 'ai' comes after those verbs that have an indicatory 'sh', and after 'bhid' dic, when the word to be formod is feminine. Thus has an indicatory I, the real root being From it we have told age' (VII 4 16 S 2406 causes guna),; 491-97bashful- Dess'. So also from verbs of the Bridadi class we have f*t' breaking', in the alternative we have füfer 1 So also fear cutting': fafert 'cutting', पारा 'a knife, an iron instrument', शार्दि: ' distress', पारा a stream'; तिः । The list of Bhiddur verbs will not be found given in one place in the Dhatupalha. They have been collected from different Ganas, and are the following भिदा, विदा, विदा, चिपा, गुदा (गियोपथ्यो।), बदा, मेधा, गोधा, शारा, रा, am, पिया, पारा, धारा लेखा, रेखा, बड़ा, पीडा, पपा, वसा पूजा, सुजा, कृपा । (पासप्रशास) and there is rocalisation of the rof krap. As s +शक्षा-पा। ३२८२ । चिन्तिपूजिकथिकुम्बिचर्चश्च । ३ । ३ । १०५ ॥ पद स्यात् । युरोपवादः पिताना या मार्ग ।

·368 THE SIDDE ANTA KABUDI (ERIT IV. $ 3282 . 3282 De aflix'ai' as well as tho alix 'yuch' uomos after tho following verbs, forming feminine words 'chint" (to thinh) půj' (to voislup) kath' (to uarrato), 'kumb' (to corer) and charch' (to learn) The force of is to include the affix go into this sátra (se III, 3 107 S 3'8+) All theso verbs belong to the Churadı or 10th class rod would have exculsively taken 9 by III 3. 107 S 328 1. Thus forar'thought', go'yorship', wit' narration', FFTT 'a cover ing',' a thick petticoat, moet recitation'. When thu affix is the forms are fait &c (VII 1 1, S 1247) ३२-३ । भातश्चोपसर्ग । ३ । ३ । १०६ । घर स्यात् । तिनोउपधादा प्रदा । उपदा। treagiert ist i stranfi 'उपसर्ग पोः का' (३२००) इत्यनेन कि । अन्तर्धिः । 3283. The allix 'an comes after those verbs which end in long å when an upasarga is in composition, and when the word to be formed is feminine This supersedes तिन् Thus मदा, प्रघा, उपदा, उपधा &o Vert --'or the purposes of this rulu the particles 10 and अन्तर ghould ba treated like upasargas Thus wel 'faith vast (I: 4 59) So also for 29 added by S 3270. As vrafts ३२८४ । ण्यासनन्थो युच् । ३।३ । १०७ । अकारस्थापवादः । कारणा। हारणाशासना । अम्धना। "* vfgafefafa fa याच्यम् । घटना । यन्दना । वेदना । वषेरनिच्छार्थस्य - अधेषखा परेर्वा पर्य पगा। परीष्टिः। 326 After verbs ending in '21, and after 'As (to sit) and sranth (to loose) there is the aflix 'yuch' when tho word to be formed is feminine This excludes the affix * (III 1 102 S 3279) Thus + fare unit, Aft+37=ercut (the 19 elided by VI 4 51) 'the causing to do', Fewr the causing to take', 'the sitting', 67027'the loosening' The root ofte taken bere belongs to the Kryddi class, meaning to loosen' and 19 not the 6 of Churê li cl 195 for the lattar would be included, as a matter of course by belonging to the Chura li cings which class of verbs take the affix सि । Vart-Tho verb 'to move', 'to praiso, and for ' to feel, should also be onemºrated 19 taking it Thus ven shaking, front praistog', 8777'knowkdge, ſecling, pain' The verb TE hrre belongs to the Tadıdı cl193, and means to move' and not thoug of thc Charådı clas ·1 #1 Virt -The affic comes after rc As far atfetThe ditt r. Vart -The affix e comes after the verbs &c, as, tst, fe, &c Kutt IV $ 32851 THE NVOL Artix. 869 Varl - The affix 75 comes after when it dons not mean'to desire.. Thu Jul solicitation, aut'the searching after' Vart;-So also optionally when it takes the upasarga eft, as, waar or vaigz'investigation by reasoning' ३२८५ । रोगारुपायां एल्बहुलम् । ३ । ३ । १० । •प्रददिका । प्रवादिया । विचम्किा । क्वचिन्न । गितिः । It grafirana I want i funt "विरतपो धातुमिदैये । पचिर-पति. atent, fiat TaTI *UTTI I TI," afemi* "*40 पहुलवचनादकारलोपा । मत्वर्थीयः । * नादिभ्य: *' साक्षिा। सातित । पादिभ्यः "यापित। वासिर । परे भेद।। " इकृप्यादिभ्यः । कृषिः । “गिरि। 3285 The affix 'n vul' comes diversely after a verb, when the word to be formed 13 a feminine noun. being the name of a disease.' This debars fy and all the rest. By using the word staat in tho sätra it is meant that the word go formed by this affix should be the appel. lation of the disease The word 'diversely shows the usual licence in the application all the rules of grammar. Tnus awfT (VII. 1. 1 S. 1297) vomiting,' auf diarrhoea', faufintitch' scab'. Sometimes this affis does not apply, ag frafas bead ache' Vart.-The affix nvul 19 employed also in simply pointing out tho meaning of the roots, thus what to enjoy', treat to'lo down' &c. Vart.-The affixes Tv and frame are also employed 10 merely pointing ont the roots , 19 fufet, fafar rufas uzfar &c The constant use of thego affixes is to be found in these very gâtras. In the aphoriging the roots aro exhibited in various ways, thus in § 3224 we have the root for and y exhibited as wat and that These latter forms indicato nothing more than the simple roots So also, seo VIII 4 17 S 2285, VI.4 49. S 2631 Vrert —The affix fre 19 employed in merely pointing ont letters, ag **17: means the letter * , 80 also *It the letter , (7t: 'the letter Vart -The affix * 13 employed in pointiog ont the letter , as Varl-The alis e comes after the word wat in merely pointing 16 out, and there is eligion of the final' diversely, as to: Varı -- ſhe-affir rr comes after the verbs wit &c, as wito, midi, पादिः । ence 19 10 accentSee S 3696 1 ३२८६ । संज्ञायाम् । ३।३ । १०६ । अन पालो पईस् । बालपुष्पग्निका। 47 ·370 TNT SIDDIANTA KAUBUDI (ROIT IV 9 3288 3286 The afliç'nyul como, after a yorbal root when tho word to be formed is an appcllatıyo Ag 97**YTTHET a sort of game played by the people in the eastern district in which udd&lzka flowers aro broken or crushed' orografrat ' a'eort of gama , regonfe51, 179ITET, Axfx7, atent first ३२८७ । विभापारयानपरिप्रश्न योरिञ्च । ३ । ३ । ११० । परिमान भारुयामे न स्यात् । चापयत् । विभापोक्तेयाप्राप्त सम्मेऽपि । कां त्वं कारि-कारिका-मिया-कृत्या-कृति पाकार्षीः । सर्वा कारि-कारिका-फियर-कृत्या-ति- aardigd utfo-TK-474 1 9774-f5-477-7 3287 And tho affix iſ comes optionally after a root, whon a question and answer 19 expressed (as well as 'avui and other affixos orduncd by other rules) The word sfratt menns ' question and with means answer in the sutra In making the compound of these words the logical sequence is not observed Tho compound 76477 Ferti may however de justified on the ground that in a Compound a word consisting of smaller numb r syllables should stand first (II 2 34 S 905 ) and hence dkhydna 19 put first Tho force of 19 to draw tha agurricts of the word from the lagt sQbia into this By the word "opt oailly 1t29 m ant that those afixes which would otherw 139 present themselves from the subsequent rules should also be applied th 19 Q-कावं कारिमका What work dit you do? A - H I did all work Optionally we may have instead of wife tha follo ving also Q-ATBTITRI #707, fa, fiat, krake A -पी कारिका or फुल्यो or कृति or क्रिया कोर्ष ।• Statlarly -का गनि (tutt, fi &c) TT A árufe So with So also 7 TFT or पाजिका का याषिस् or याचिका &c Why do we say la question and answer! Observe yfa and rfatto ३२८८ । पर्यायाहसोत्पत्तिषु वुच । ३।३ । १११ । पर्याय परिपाटीक्रमः सईयमहः योग्यता । पर्यादिषु होत्येषु ग्वा स्यात् । मषत WYKTI I vamt i Toftgafoxi fai ufuk #yoga i उत्पत्ती । इभषि का उदपादि। 3288 lhe affix 'npuol comes optionally after 1 Foot in the sense of succession, merit, debt or production The vord gta meang turn or order of succession, means worthy of respect y means debt owed to another and safe meang birth or production This rule sup 1sedes fT and other affixes Thus (1) 1 si am your tirn of sleeping , nadljina your turn of eating first (2) ईति भवानिपुनक्षिकाम you deserve to have a meal of sugar and molasses (3) wafuata mafa thou owest me a meal of sagar and molagges stufast a meal of rice , 41 stfakt' a drink of milk. (1) Trafaret से उपादि ·IRIT. IV. $ 8 289.) TIK AYI AFFIX, 871 .. The word ' optionally' is understood in this sátra al90; 49 fartsteeth The forms given by and are the same, the difference is only in the accent. (VI. 1. 193, S 3676 and VI. 1. 163 S. 3710). ३८ । आक्रोशे नयमिः । ३।३ । ११२ । fawidfa fuqaro i59972sia: fat gizita isataforca te gang i wefat r 'कृपयुटो पहुस' (२८४१)। भाषेऽकर्तरिय कारके मंत्रायामिति च मिवृतम् । राजाभुश्यन्ते रानभोजना। गालयः । 'म सके भावे क्ता' (३०९०)। 3289. The aflix ani' comes after a vorb when the particle 'nam' is in composition with it, and the sense implicd is that of cursing. The nnovșitti of the word 'optionally' does not extend to this aphorism. The word wat means to curse. This supersedes the affixes f? &c. Thus vitFTER THE 10 may failure be to thee, Ogioner'i meurmefariannee'may he be disappointed'. So also witafara w 1470 wafati Why do we gay' when meaning to curgc'? Observo vyfarned HEFT the non-making of his mat'. Why do we say when 7 is in composition'? Observe yara qan TUTT'may death be to theo, O 1 sinnerº 1 ३२८६ । फ। कृत्येल्युटो बहुलम् ॥ ११३ ।। gfTe u gaan TTKI STUIT TE agorag wafa 3259A. The alixes callel' kritya' (III. I. 95) and the allix 'lyut', are diversely applicable and have other senses th in those taught beforc "The anuvšitti of the phr1sus' whºn denoting action' and when the relation of the word formed to its parent verb is not that of an agent', which began with stras III. 3 18 and 19, does not extend to this sätra or further. By saying 'diversely' we mean that they occur in other places than those where ordained by the rules. Thus the dritya affixes are ordained to come when act' or 'object' is to be expressed, but they come also whon the hdraha is other than the objective. Thus Tiit powder for bathing'; In naut'a Brahmana' to whom a donation is to bu made'. In the first of these examples the powder' is the 'instrumnat expressible by the 3rd case, and in the second the 'Brahmını' is tha recipient expressible by the fourth c193; so that in both cages the afix is applied without any express rule. Similarly, vyp 19 ordained to come in denoting instrument, location, and & verbal noun (III. 3. 115 and 117) But it is applied in other senang also. Thus toilet Tradi 'halls for the eating of kinge'; init Naife. dresses to be worn by the 'king'.

·872 TAE BIDDIANTA KAUNUpi. (KPIT. IV $ 3290 6 . By using the word "difersely', even the Arit affixes are applied in places other than those cxpressly ordained. Thuserervare fra TICHI Te gang! For accent sca VI.2 150. ३२८८ । ख । नपुंसके भावे क्तः ॥ १९४ ॥ ofern vefach ni att he went vafa # 8289B The allixkta' is ndded to tho root, when action is expressed, the word being in tho neuter gender. Thesa are neuter abstract nouns thus, firap laugh', oferte speech', Tlfort sleoping'. So also mai, fra &c. ३२९० । ल्युट् च । ३।३। ११५ । शिवपना योगविभाग हराया। 3290. The aflix lyut' is added to the root, then tho name of an action is expressed, in the neuter gender. Thus ved TIET' the laughter of the student', thout beauty', saya speech', to sleep', 1787* seat. So also ford # The separation of this satra from the last, in which at might well have been included, 19 for the sake of the subsequent aphorism, in which the aquvritt of luul only ruos, and not that of ३२८९ । कर्मणि च येन संस्पर्शात्कर्तुः शरीरसुखम् । ३।३ । १९६ । येन स्पृश्यमानस्य कई गीतमुत्पदाने तस्मिकर्मएयुपपदे श्युत् स्यात् । पूर्वेचबिडे नित्यसमामा धनम् । प्रय पान मुखम् । फरि विकिस् । गुरो। मापन मुखए । गुफा बर्वा फितु करें। 3291. T'he aflix 'lyut' is added to a root, when the name of an action is expressed in the neuter gender; provided that the verb has in construction with it, such a word in the accusatiye case, as indicates the thing, from the contact with which, there arises a pleasant sensation corporally to the agent. This s@tra is thus translated by Bohtlingk " The aflix e comes in connection with an object, when through the contact with that, the agent of the action feels a hvely pleasure'. Though the affir lyut would have presented itself by the last aphorism, under the circumstances mentioned in thug sutra, the framing of this satra, is really for the purpose of teaching, that the compound so formed is a force or inyariable compound 1. c a compound which cannot be analysed into its component members for every 5944 compouud 19 a frea compound, (II. 2. 19). Thus 1915 the pleasure of drinking milk', wa yo 'the pleasuro of eating rıço”. Why do we say when the word in construction is in the accusativu case'? Observe di TT PRyd 'rug from a bed of dawa 13 pleagant'.

·XnIT. IV. $ 3294 ) THE IYOT ATIX 373 Here there is no compounding as the upapada gfarat 19 18 the ablative case. + Why do we say from the contactº? Observe AT TETAren at 19 pleasure to sit pear by a fire-hearth'. Here there being ao contact between 'fire' and 'body', there is no compoundiog. Why do we say to the agent'? Observe the fate great to the teacher it is plensure, when ho is made to bathe'. Here the word Iti 18 not the agent, bat the object of the verb farofa Why do we say corporally'? Obserre TEET ofrost gora embracing of the son 29 a pleasure'. Here the pleasure is a mere rental satisfaction and not a physical one. Why do we asy'a pleasant sensation'? Observe कटकानां मर्दम दुखद 'it 19 painful to rub thorns'. In all the above counter-examples there is no compounding, see II. 2. 19 S 782 and the connected sätras. ३२९२ । वा यौ।२।४।५७ । अजेवीं या स्थायी प्रवयपर मावन । 3292. ot is optionally the substitute of w when the affix 9 (III, 3. 15 S 3290.) follows This declares an option in the case of the affix T4, the word g in the sutra refers to this affix, as, names or an tes 'deving stick or Kohup ३२८३ । करणाधिकरणयोश्च ।३।३ । ११७ । युट् स्यात् । रमपवना कुठारा। गोदोहनी स्थासीखनामाकरमाधिकरपयोरिस्परिकार: 3293. The affıs yaț' comes after a root, when the relation of the word to be formed to the verb is that of an instru. ment or location. Thus ******* an axe (lit. an instrument for cutting wood); WATTTTTT: 'palAsa catter'; vzett'& milk pail'(a vessel into which milk is milked); so laso em In other words, this affix expresses also the idea of the austrumental case (a tool), and of the locative cage (& repository). The anayritts of the words instrument and location extends up to S. 330% inclusiva. ३२९४ । अन्तरदेशे।।४।२४। *** Tivadar Di Fate I started items warratas steypirazitai grating Insti' far I vraft 3294. The preceded by short # of the root ve is changed into , vben the root follows the upasargu srus, and the Tord does not mean a country. Thug warned and watet a ·374 THE SIDDAAYTA KAUMUDU (xair IV. $ 3295. Why do we say " when not meaning a country *?' Observe *** मनो देशा The phrase word "preceded by short s' of sůtra VIII 4. 22 S 359 19 to be read into this sûtra also Observe, sarafrath Why do we say " short 5?" See szarufa# The word antar 29 20 upasarga for the purposes of change by the vårtika under I 4.65,S 766 therefore it would have caused the change by VIII. 4 22 The pres nt sûtra is made, to show that the change takes place only then, when't does not mean a country. ३२९५ । प्रयन च ।८।४। २५ । अपनप पोउम्ता गादास्परस्य । अन्तरयणम् । प्रदेश इत्येव । अन्तरपनो देश। 3295, 1 her of war is changed to e, when preceded by the word work, and the word does not denote a country. Thus atau w Why do we say "not denoting a country''? Observe watat 23:# This change would have taken place by VIII. 4 29, this special sutra is for a purposes The word 19 formed by ल्युट added to u or दए । ३२९६ । पुसि संज्ञाया घ• प्रायेण । ३ । ३ । १९८ । 3296 The affix'gba' generally comes in the sense of a n instrument or location, after a root, when the word to be formed is a name and is in the masculine gender The force of the word onto generally is to show that this rule 15 pot a universal rule. Thus rimt'the lip' of 'to cover' + (VI 4 96 S.3297 See below)=: lit that by which the teeth are covered', so also XT' breast plate , VTI. These denote instruments So also in denoting location' Thus w+*+q=Viti'a mino', 80 named because men work (akurvant?) in it wetti house' that in which men settle down Why do we say 'in the masculine gender ? Observe qur'a comb', (lit that by which men decorate) Here the affix is lyut Why do we say when the complete word so formed is merely an appellatire ? Obs rye ATI FT' the beating stick. The todicatory x 19 merely qualifying for the application of satra V1.4 96, S 3297 by wbich after the causatire nf, when is added, ſho long T 18 shortened ३२९७ । छादेर्पदव्युपसर्गस्य । ६।४।६। frequentines treiras e ati trang TUTTI I vogn 1 3297. The penultimate of the Cluradı 19 shortened ·XBIT IV. & 3299.] GtA AFFIL, 375 before the affix* (III. 3 118), when not preceded by two prepositions (or more). As तुरखदः, प्रधदा, दग्दददः ॥ But Tut: with two prepositions. The same when preceded by more than two prepositions, as gafaatti The elision of fit of wit &c., by VI. 4. 51 S. 2313 should not be considered Af asddha (VI. 4. 22 S. 2183) or sthanivat (I. 1. 57 S. 50), otherwise there would be no penul'imate to be shortened. ३२०८ । गोचरसंघरवहव्रजव्य जापण निगमाश्च । ३।३ । १९९ । war frezart Tax' (2204) xfa atuarek stsent: Trearea furfinia गोचरो देयः। संचरन्तेऽनेन संघरो मार्गः । यदन्त्यनेन पर स्कम्भाषा व्यजस्तालतम् । Fauranteturat at TUI TTYETTE I FATAUWA forzarex II Toate formare 3298. And the words 'gochara', 'suchara', 'vala' vraja', 'vyajı', 'Apana' and 'nigima' are anomalous. These words are irregularly formed by the affix e with the same force as in the last aphorism. This 18 an aparada or exception to rule III. 3. 121, S. 3300 by which after roots ending in consonants, tho affix as is added. Thus net 'pasturage', (lit. that in which the cows graze); *** 'a passage', (lit. through which they move); *** ' & vehicle' (lit. by which men are carried); h'a cow-pen, (by which they go);0701 'a fan' (by which they move the air); the anomaly in this consists in not replacing tho ** of my (fæ+*) by the substitute oft as required by sátra II. 4.56 S. 2292, Ta' market' (lit. that in shich mesi come and truflie); fames the Veda', 'a market' (that into which they enter) The force of the word in this aphorism 19 to include other words also, which have not been already mentioned. Thus **, *** a touch-stone' (lit. that on which they rub), ३२। अवे तृस्रोध । ३ । ३ । १२० । WAMTITI I VETA safari 3299. The affis'gliañ' comes after the roots 'tri' (to cron) and 'stři (to spread), wlien tie upasirya fara' is in composition with them, and then the word so formed is an appelative related to the verb either as an instrument or as a location. This supersedes g. The sis indicatory and causes the vriddhi of a VII 2.115 S 254) and is also for the sake of regulatiog thu accent (VI. 1. 195, 197 S. 3678,3686). The indicatory is useful in the subs-quent aphorism where it changes the paletals into gutturals. This state the descent" into the well &c. D'a screen round a tent'. How do we apply waart also in phrases like a 'the descend of rivers", for here the word avaldra is not an appellative? This use is ·16 TEE SIDDHANTA KIUMUDI. (KRIT, IV. S 3300. also alloycd, because the anarşitti of the word te is understood here also; so that these yordt avatara &c. may be employed in seoses ober than appellative. ३३०० । हलच।३।३। १२१ । TATTHEUTE I TITATGE I ETT atfiritsie frafat mai rasite swift. ftrattamento fortituti 3300, And after a verb ending in a consonant, comes the affix 'gunñ', (when the word to be formed is masouline, and rolated to the verb as an instrument or a location, and thereby the palatal is changed into a guttural). The whole of the phrase within brackets is to be read into this sitra from III. 3. 118 S. 3296. This excludes 1. Thug & writing' (tbad in which something is inscribed); to the Veda' (that by which all is known); Audress' (that which is entered into); Tat obstruction'; ? A way' (that on which they seek); vertit 'a plant' (that by which digenge or the liko is cleared away); Rama' (i... in which tho devout delight); font: ३३०१ । अध्यायन्यायोद्यावसंहाराश्च । ३ । ३ । १२२ । watuastentrata i formatge fra et seratafia fume" TREPITUTETUTET WITTÅTTTTY ** 3301. And the words adlıräsa', 'nfAya', 'udara, and 'satildra', arc anomalous. Thero words are formed by adding the aflii vs to the exclusion of which would have come by III.3 118 S. 3206. All these wonis an derived froin roots which end 10 rovels. Thus afe+3+vau 'n chapter or book' (itto that in which they readı, i-rotas' logro, jantico. (lit. form for *** that by which men arols 1);3-31** mixture' (lll thefire orier that in which they blend); TTT-T destruction' (lit. For i by wwbich they are destroyed). Vart: -rahara, Abara Aod &raya shoald bo enumarate — TUTTI snpport' (1st in wbroh anything is held); 11.fx --WUTTI *Tafra ver So also see ३३०२ । उदोग्नुदके।३।३।१२३ । regulativer Ringpool aforis fpafirefonteriin OTTI Sergreifeyi TOTTIE 3302 The trord 'udaika' is anomalous, then tho sento of the root refers to subjects other thin'vatrr', The word is that formel: *++**-TTI A rnesol'. Would not tbm Att harc mtu+ by Atra Ill. 3. 1:1, S 320 Sy than thr aphorisa 1 Thlut rondo e pran a pharirn in onlar to prealbi lba appliersion of the allis, wholba nord to be forward R4473' Halt ·KRIT IV $ 3305) KTIAL AFFIX 377 Thus attenta leathern vessel for oil'. So also gast Why do we say when not referring to 'Water ? Observe the 'a bucket for drawing water' ($+73+5€). ३३०३ । जालमानायः।३।३। १२४ । शानीयन्ते मत्स्यादयोऽनेनेत्यानायः। आलम्' इति किम् । धामयः। • 3303 The word 'Anaya' is irregularly formed when meaning'a net'. The word is thus formed in the sense of instrument ख+नी+प STATTI ' a net (by which they are caught), 19 7 HTFUTAT 'a det for fish', Talut unture' net for wild deer &c Why do we say 'aut'? Observe जानवः ।। ३३०४ । खनो घघ।१।३। १२५ । 1981 VERI-VTT: If Rasathaferrariaat To The FTATTI "ATTA 5T67 Tioare* 100-strati-wafr**##***** I pa afr****** 3804 The affix 'gha' as well as 'ghañ comes after the verb'kban (to dig), (when the word to be formed 19 an appellative related to the verb as instrument or location) The affix o las buen read into the sûtra by force of the word, Thus tot or -77: a spade, a hoe' The indicatory A rves no purpose in the cas of kban, for the rule of gutturalisation (VII 3 52 s. 2863) has no applicability b re Therefore, Binco some scope must be given to'g' wepfer that it applies to roots othert han 77 also A8 WT: I 95! (neut ) Vart. The affix * also comes in this sense after the verb ry Thng Sastu a spade'. The indicatory shows that the final portion called fe should be elided Vart -The affix it also comes in the same sense as I a spade. VartSo alsn the affix y, as greeti'a spade Vart.-So too the affix **** as wafT**1' a spade' ३३०५ । ईषदुःसुपु कृच्छाकृच्छार्येषु खल् । ३ । ३ । १२६ । करणाधिकरणयोरिति निवृत्तम् । एषु दुःखमुखाधूपपदेषु खल्यात । तयोरेव-' (२८३३) पति भाधे कर्मणि च ।।दुष्करा फटो भवता । अकृष्य । ईपकरः । भुकरा । "निमि भोलिया खलधाराय नेति धाग्यम् - पग्निमयः । दुष्प्रमया । मुविलयः । निमयः। मयः। 3305 In the sense of hard and difficult' or 'light and casy', the aflis 'kurl' is added to a verb, Then 'ishad', and 'dur' and su'are combined with it as upapadas. The apuvritti of the phrase "when related as instrument or location' ceases with this aphorism. The word means heavy, and it has the force of conveying that sense The word means 'lighs, easy', an! The affix comes with ths force tha words fra and convey thar sense 48 ·378 THE KIDDIANTA KASUOT (krit IV. 3306 of bhlyn and karma (S 2833) Thue Tr's mat 19 made casily by you', so also T*T: 'made with difficulty', 'made with case'. Strailarly ईपभोज: eating pleavintly , दुर्भाx. and शुभो Why do we say after 194 &c.? Segmen 1741 **'the mat which Is made with difficulty'. Why do we gry when meaning hard or light'? Obserre A branll work, of the affix tre, the letter and are indicatory , causing the insertion of a nasıl (technically called yr augment, VI 3 67 S 2942), and regulates the accent (VI. I 1935. 3670) Thu augment de mall be added in the subsequent satra, the thus has no work in this stra Vart -The ut substitution do not take place when th: affix (III. 3 50, III 1. 13+) and at. III 3. 120) com after fx, for at und eiti as tai1991, fanata 1 74**, not fait fama, festaran ३३०६ । उपसर्गात्सल्यमीः।७।१।६७ । उपसर्गादेव नभेर्नुस्वाद । ईषत्प्रतम्भः । दुष्यसम्भा । मुनलम्भः । उपातम में लपसर्गात' किम् । ईषएलभः । लाभः । 330G The augment is added to gh price led by a Preposit on, before the affixes (III 3 120) ind og er Thus ईपदमलम्मा, गुमलम्भ , दुष्प्रलमा, प्रलम्भः विप्रलम्भा, 1 bis is a Nijama rule, and restricts the scope of VII I 6+S 2582 Befor, thu vowel affires Gree nud 7, the root u gets the augment or only then when it is preceded by Preposition, and not other viso as *77* rada u ३३०७ । न सुदुा केवलाभ्याम् । ७।१।६८ । उपमर्गान्तररहिताभ्या मुदु लभेर्नु न स्यात्सरपी। सुनभम् । दुभम् । केपलान्यास किम् । भुप्रलम्भ । अतिदुर्नम्मा कय सर्दि अतिमुलाप्रतिदुर्लभमिति। पदा त्यती कर्मप्रयधनीयो वदा भविष्यति। 3307 Tlie augment ga is not added to beforo anit Twłupy vrh stwo (without another Preposition along math them) pricedes the root. Thus मुलभम, दुर्लभम्, मुलामा, दुभिः॥ But सुप्रलम्भा, दुष्प्रलम्भःn The word To 18 used in the sūtra because 95**f is in the Instrumental case and not in the Ablative. Had it been in the Ablative, there would have been no necessity of using the word aast, for the rule would not have applied, when a preposition intervened bctwcen these and the root. In ufagem, the word gfa is not an Upasarga but a Knrmapravachraiya , when sfa 19 used as an Upasargn, we have ufagatus# If the words arraig bu construcd as Ablative, then also the use of this for a purpose sqılar to tbal 2 a boyc.

·380 t TIIT SUDDIASSA SAVUDI IKNIT. IV $3311 t pound contru II 2 14 $ 708) So alsu agteTTIL I 32$ 694) The # 19 in these two by VIII 3 45 $ 159, and VIII. 4 10 S 1054 debarred Why do we say and after ac? Observe fazem Why do we say THAT'final in a Pada'? Observo ponfa, genta a The word is cquivalent to or Locative Tatpurusha , and does not mean final of a Pada Therefore the rule does not apply herm yeferter (ins sg) FTR Here the *19 added by V 4. 154 S 891 Whorar oft'ce=yufare (a Bahuvrıbı). The 19 by VIII. 3 396 S 153 Before the ofix #, the word yefon 8 a Pada (1 4 17 S. 230) and thus ? () is final of a Pada but it is final of a preceding meraber followed by another Pada The rule, in fact, applies to compounds, the buing final in the first terra ३३११ । श्रावश्यकाधमर्ययोर्यिनिः।३।३ । १० । अपायकारीपदायी। 3311. The affix' nini' is added to the root in denoting agent, showing that thore is some necessity or indebtedness or obligation on the part of the agent in connection with the aotion dozoted by the verb Thug w TT wit must be done The compounding bere takes place by II 1 72 S. 754 So also to ought to be given a hundred. ३३१२ । कृत्याश्च । ३।३। ११ । घावश्यकाधमपर्ययोरित्येव । अवश्य इपिसेव्यः । गत देयम् । 3312 The affixes called 'britya' also como after a root when the sense to be indicated is that of necessity or oblıyam tion'. Thus अवश्य हरित सेव्य: Hari must be served necessarily' मवता खम अवश्य करा कर्तव्या करोया, कार्य: or कृत्या you ought to make tha mat Tace, ea &c, 'you ought to pay a hundred ३३१३ । क्तित्तौ च संज्ञायाम् । ३।३ । ३१४ । भावो तितर स्यादायिपि धायाम् । वितुत्र-' (३१६३) हवि मेट् । भपताइ तिः । 3313 The affixes 'ktich' and kta' are employed after afroot, when bencdiction is intended, provided that tho whole word so formed, is an appellative The affizes therefore give the sense of the agent, with the addition that the action is simply the object of a prayer of some one who wishes that that may be the action of that agent the seuse being simply appellative Thug airasigara 'a weaver (lit map he wense), fat or gfær -na (11 4 45) 'wealth or gift', gfo:- 4*ATO SUCCESS', figata or respect. Ths are agamules of Funds firmed by tho affix for words formed by w in this sunse we have देवदत्ता-देवा रन देषामु: 'Devadstta 4 भवता पब T il the niti hoa nlrendy onco ·KILIT IV $ 33161 KTVA AFF1X. 881 - bren generally ordained, its reptition here is to prevent its being superseded by ferri Cher of four is qualifying Saly, distinguishing it from f&c and is useful in sàtra VI. 4 39 bulos I be affixes do not take nugment (See S. 3103) ३३१४ । न क्तिचि दीर्घश्व । ६ । ४ । ३ला । *afarci anfaiteuretnia tofautfeatut fefe vifai i frant afrat i afrat 1 3314 Before the affix fry, the above roots neithor drop their nasal nor lengthen their root-vowel The above roots 2 e. anudattopadesa, ending in a nagal, and ++ and 77f7, do not lose their nas al before for Thus frás, aids, ofv*se Tho lengthening would have taken place by VI 4 16, S 2666 wner tho pasal was not elided that alvo is prohibited. ३३१५ । सनः क्तिचि लोपश्चास्यान्यतरस्याम् । ६ । ४ । ४५ । समात तिच्याच वा स्पास्लोप पा । समुतात् । सातिः। तिः । सन्तिः । देवा ए देयासुदेषदत्ता। 3315 The long 134 optionally substitut il for the final of u belore the affix fim, and there is also eligion optionally of the Nasal Thus we have three forms of pforts and státu So niso zat) ३३१६ । मलखल्योः प्रतिषेधयोः प्राचां क्त्वा । ३ । ४ । १८ । प्रतिधार्थयारल खस्योपपदयो वा स्यात् । प्राची यह पूजार्यम् । 'अमेवाव्यपेन (८३) रति नियमामीपपदसमासा । 'दो दरोः (२००७) । पल दत्वा । 'उपास्या' (२४६२) । पौरव 'wathi' font retai sfanti'fimr I STO: I 3316 According to the opinion of the Eastern Grammarians, the affix .ktva' comes after a verb, when there are in combination with it, the words 'alam' and 'khalu', expressing the sense of probibition. The apuyritti of the words in the Vedas &c' does not extend frrther. Thus we can do not make', vy steat do not drink' or changed to * by $ 2462, wel met «ferat do not weep. Ogırl? So also want to (S. 3077) by which 7 changed to re Why do we say when there are small and ru! Witness artido Dot make'. Why do we say when expressing prohibition'? Obseryo To decoration The phrase ' in the opinion of the Eastern Grammariaga'shows that it 18 an optional rule Therefore we bave spent ta' do not weep. Or if rule III 1 94 be applied then the use of the word Tent is for the sake of merely showing respect (půjártha, the gule could have well stood without There is no upapada compouading because of tha restriction of 8.783. at ·382 TIL NIDDII ASTA KIUNUDI. (*11r IV $ 3317 ३३१० । उदीचां मालो व्यतीहारे । ३।४ । १९ । ध्यतीहारय माहः पत्या स्यात् । धपूर्वकालामिदम् । 3317 According to the opinion of the Noi thern Giamma. rinns, tho affiltrl' is added to the root'men' (to exchange), when the senso is that of into change (though the notion denoted by the former vond is not prior to tho action denoted by tlo latter word) ३३१८ । मयतेरिदन्यतरस्याम् । ६।४।७० । भेड मारोतादेशः स्याद्वा स्यपि । अपमित्य पाचते । अपमाय । दीपावास याप्राप्तमपि। याषिरया अपमयते । 3310 muy optionnlly be substituted for the up of wafa) before स्य॥ Thus अपभित्य घपगाय। Thus faren ara 'having offered an exchange, he asks' +8+ कथा-अप+मा+यप्प+मि+तु+प (VI I 45 and 71) 4+ Firm (VII 4. 10) This is an optional role as the phrase according to the northern' indicates So we have in the alternative aratursenta 'baving asked he exchanges, and this is the more general use of h ra, namely, 16 comes after that verb which is concerened about a trine anterior to that of the other , see III 4 21 S 3320 Tho eutra III. 4 19 S 3317 19'an exception to III 4 21 The root ** has been exhibited in the Bâtra S 3317 as Ers, with the vowel instead of This indicates the existence of the following Paribhasha "A root which when destitute of anubandhas, ends in either , or , must not be considered to have ceased to end in either 7 wt ord, when an anu bandha has been attached to it' By this Paribbâsha must be regarded as endrog in , and as therefore ? may be substituted for the vowel & (VI 1 45), even while I remains, does assame the form and is consequently, by the prohibition 7r in sûtra I 1.20 S 2373, forbidden to be termed i ३३१९ । परावरयोगे च । ३।४।२०। परेण यस्यावरण परस्य योगे गये धाता परमा स्यात। धमाप्य नदी पर्वत । परनदीयागो So that I fama tena fenato StoiatritiSA #987: 1 3319 The affix 'ktvå is added to 1 root, to denote what is situate on that (para) side or on this (avaia) side of somcthing The situation on the t'the other side nod this' side is called परापापोगा। Thus gara ele wat feedi 'the mouutaia is situate without ·383 KTYA AFFIX. IT IV. S 8321.] g reached the river 1 e on thus side of the river, the river being on her side Here the word waa is qualified by the word at which is int from which the situation is takin, and which in this case, is on ber side of the mountain Similarly अतिक्रम्य तु पर्यत मदी स्थिता ' the 13 situate on the other side of the mountain'. Here the relation en the mountain' and theriyur' 19 of wat and I ३२० । समामकर्तृकयोः पूर्वकाले । ३ । ४ । २१ । PATA Firutadt: gerra faphatgiât: FeaT FUTTI yanat Tafa i feraty. । धारया भुवस्वा पीत्वा जति । अनुदात्त-' (२४२८, इत्यनुनासिकलोपः। विष्णु नत्या । स्थरत्यादी 'अयुका फिति' (२३८१) इति नित्यमिहभायः पूर्वाधिप्रतिपेभेन । स्पस्या । ITATI 3320 When two actions have the same agent, tho affix rå' comes after that verb wlich takes place in a time Prior to that of the other (z e. the Absolutive in trâ' rs to tbat action which precedes in time) Thus y#74 #fahwing eaten he gues', 1773 tafa'having druok, Os'. The rule is not confined to the crse of two verbs thus, fareat, that, FT, Fran Tufa' having bathed, drank, ezten and given, he gots' Similarly from a fan Tut Etfa' He praises Vishnu, bowing down'. nasıl is clided by S 2428 In the case of ETT &c, there is always absence of the re augment, because of the prohibition of S 2381 by rcupation. As स्वृत्वा, सस्या and धूत्वा । Why do we say 'having the suma a gent'? When the agents are erent, the gerund cannot be used, but the Locutive Absolute construc. I will have to be used to express the sime sense Thus भुक्तवति प्राक्षणे fa 2497: the Brahmanı hıving been fid, Devadatta goes'. Why do we say 'which denotes prior action'? For, if the actions are eval, thu gerundial construction will not be employed. Thus rufaa afa y he goes and chatters' ३३२१ । क्त्वि स्कन्दिस्यन्दोः।६।४ । ३१ । vadrataia Araf TT RIK***a I si ATFEEST I FAI*T*T-FUTTATI 3321 **** and fare retain their nosal before the affix ktra Thus **** and esfuerat or *****t, the Te being added hen farg 18 mandlered ay having an udicatory * in the, dhatupâthr. When TE 19 lded, ktvi 18 no longur fær by yritue of I 2. 18 S 3322 and clision would ot take place, for no rule of clision would apply in that case ३३२२ । म क्त्वा सेट् । १।२।१८॥ भेट त्या किन्न स्यात् । यिरगा। पेट् किम् । कृपया।

·384 THE SIDDIAITA KAUUDI. (KNIT IV. $ 3322. 3822 Tho affix ktoi when it takes tho augment y lie then it is set) is not lit Thus afazat i So also faierat, efiro, af, from feasy for and to sweat" to shino', 'to bo', Why do we say &c? Observe great, no gupa. ३३२३ । मृहमदगुधमुपतिशयदवसः क्त्वा । ११२ । ७ । एभ्या सेट् पापा कित । हिरवा । 'लिया था-' (३०४६) इति पेट् । हियित्वा-क्रिष्टिया । sferar i sferar i 'F'(2606) fa favou i farat e fofamant i gfarar i पुरवा 3323. The B7 klyd 19 horyover, kıt aſter mrid to be graci. ous', mrd 'to squeeza', gudb' to warp up', kush 'to tear', klis'to suffer', vad to speak' and vas to dwell. All the soven verbs mentioned in this sûtra arı te verbs, and take an intermodiate . The before these verbs would not have been lat by virtue of the last satra, therefore arose the necessity of this stra to provide in anticipation an exception to that satra, in favor of there verba, where the effix htvd 19 necessarily hit. "Thus yfer being gracious' gfernt 'having squeezed'y fazar'having wrapped gficat'having torn', fparut 'having suffered' or force by S. 3019, ofernt having epoken' efarat 'having dwelt The Tv of and one is changed into by the rule of Samprasarana (VI 1.15 S 24 19). It is fang after , forg, 5, by S. 2609 As of eat, Faferent gforce and tear (vocalisation by "S 2412, and lengthening by S 2562). Moreover in the case of the verbs TV, y and fri, S 2017 would have made ktva optionally krt, the present sätra makes it necessarily so ३३२४ । नोपधात्थफान्तावा । १।२ । २३ । E au factura i Farafraz ITF342-71**'1997for Arfurat fat! 3321 The set ktva is optionally kit after the verbs having a penultimate T and ending in and The result of being hit is that the nasal 19 dropped In other words the dropping of the nasal 13 optional in such verbs Thug from It we have ufacut or ofrutat having twisted' ufurat or y freet'hasing tied sound' fat or afrurit. The word "Nishtha does not govern this satra, and comes to an end with the last Ashtådhyâyî sätra This rule does not apply to verbs that have not a penultimate thongh they may end in or As aforat and Africa 'baving reviled offent 'having tied'. Here by $ 3322 the Fut tid being not-bit, the vowels of the root fer, and have been guna ted. A verb may have & penultimate but if it hag not final or the rule does not apply. As +7+7'having dropped' fazat 'having killed'. Had it been £1t, the nåsal would have been dropped ·KarIV.53320.] RTYAATPIX. 255 - ३३.५ । यघिलुमच्युतश्च । १।२।२४ । सेट परया किवा । पषिष्या पहिल्या पिया-पुशिष्या तिरया-लिया। 3323. The set Llori is optionally hit after the verbs oanch, 'to cheat', lunch 'to pluck' and șit to dare or abhor.' After the above three verby, the lira nffix being elt mry or may not bus alil. As afaret of free haring cheated'. So also ofront or oferar luoving placked' wfazat or oförti 'baring dared'. When the verb za fit takes thon is toe it is not goreroci by tuis aatrn. See satra III.1.29. When the lita is not ac! but anif, then thero is no option allowcu. A५ पनाम्यावा. ३३२६ । तपिमपिफशेः काश्यपस्य । १।२ । २५ । ए मेट् यस्ता किया। तृपिस्या-तर्पिस्या । पित्या-पिया । धिरया-करियरलो घुपात-' (२३१७) इति या किया । धुतिया-दरोसिरमा । निषिरया-पिया । 'एला' किम् । रित्या । गुपपात्रम् । यतिस्वा । ता' कि । पपिरामेट किन् । पुसमा । 'पतिवरिट (३०) । उपिया । पुभिस्या-पिग । ' सनापाम' (२०४१) रति नित्यमिट् । चनिया । गती तु । अस्पेपि । मुभिल्या-साभित्या । 'भो बिमारने (2015) पती । विमोदमेतु मुम्या। 3326. The set tva is optionalls kit, according to the opinion of the Rishi Kasyapı, after the verlis trislı' to byc thirsty,' msislı 'to prinkle,' anil kris to become lean. Ar first or afirm'hivog threbudil,' from or wiarni haringernin. hledd,' gimit or afirm'haring becomo lean. By sutra 3322 theo hans ncrer lit. This patrn adds another exception to that gun miral, The specil mention of Kasy apr 19 for tho male of showing rrapact. The e is already understood in this sutra by Anurritt from aatra 3321 ३३२६ । या । रलो व्युपधाद् घलादेः संरच। १ ।२।। 332G. A root.ending in a letter of me. Pratyanara (orary consonant cscept rand 1), and beginning with a consonant. and laring a penultimates or r optionalls gunates its tour! before the te ktra and san. Thur तिरया or दोतियामिशिरवाल नेतिया। Thy enting in a consnant other than or s't Obserre from where firy ends ta *1 Thy haring or sasrrnultimate! Oberre are from my where the penultimate is 1 Why biglaning with a conronso:"! Obrite vinent from me Thy do me sayti'? Obserye TITTI ३३२६ । र । यसति दुधोरिट् । ७।३।।

·386 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI [KRIT IV 533200 3326B The affixez ktvâ and the Nishthâ always get the augment after the roots vas and kşhudh. Thus उपिस्था। दुषित्वा or धाधित्वा। ३३२६ । ग । अञ्चेः पूजायाम् । ७१२।५३ । 33260 The ktra and the Nışlthå aflixes get after tio root alichu to honor'. Thus शचिस्या। But when alich means to go there is the optronal form . भक्त्वा also. ३३२६ । । । लुभो विमोहनेः । ७।२।५४ । 3326D. The ltra and the Nishtiua take after shubh when not meaning to be greedy Thus uftear or afisat I But That being grecdy' ३३२७ । अबश्योः क्त्वि । ७ । २ । ५५ । भाभ्या परस्य पाव इट् स्यात् । जरीत्या-अरित्या । शिल्पा । 3327 Tho affix kha takes the augment, after pand As a ficar or irat, and Farat was prohibited by VII. : 11, S 2381 and would havo been optionally te, as it has an indicatory loog # by VII 2 44 S. 2279 Hence this rule The special mention o Atsa, stops the anuvrıttı of kta and ktavatu ३३२८ । उदितो.वा ।।२।५६ । अदिता परस्य परया इस्पा । गमिरवा। 'धनुनासिकस्य वि- (२६६)ति दी। मागया । दात्या-दयित्या । 3328. There is optioually the augment of atr, after a root which has an indientory.shorts ॥ As समु-यमित्या or गाला the lengthening is byIVI + IBS 2060 - धमिरवा or तागवा, मु-दमित्या or दाम्त्या . So also दरवा or दपिया। ३३२८ । नमश्च स्त्यि । ६।४।१०। म उपधाया था दीपा स्यात् । मन्नादी विश्व परसादया-त्या जति बिम् । ऋमिरया। 'पूज्य (०५०) रति घे। पविश्या-परवा। 3329. lhe penultimntc of {w is optionally lengflcncii, before tho affis htra when it 19 jurladı, that 19, without the augment r.. Thus an or मागवा, but मिया only, with re aagment word Titti is understood here from VI 15 S. 2060 But then wy 19 Placed by the rule does not apply a महाप य. ThRYOn the maxim सतनामपि विधीन रिपोरया बाप's baburanga tabstitution of el supxrudes cich antaranya rolc. - ·KRIT IV.533321 KTVAAFIT. 387 -A - ३३२ । फ। पूछश्च । ७।२। ५१ । 3329A T'ho htra and the Nislithe optionally take after पू. Thus पवित्या (1 2 22.5 3051 causes gunr), or पुरया। ३३३० । जान्तनशां विभापा ।६।४ । ३२ । जान्तानां नये मलापो या स्यादिस्य परे। माया-महपत्या । त्यस्या-रवस्था। मरित भयो-' (२५१५) पति नुम् । तस्य पशे लोपः। मट्या-नया । 'रपादिभ्यस' (२५१५) इती पधे। मशित्वा।" झलादायिति वाच्यम् । मेह । जित्या । अदित्यावेद । परे। प्रपस्या- अपत्या । 'जनसन-' (२५०४) इत्यायम् । सारवा-समित्या । 'दतिस्पति-' (२००४) तीरयम् । दिया । सित्या । मित्या । स्थित्या । 'दधातेदिी' (३०94)। रिया। 3330 The nasal may be optionally elided beforc ktvå in a root ending in sr and in 2 Thug पछतवा or राग भक्तया or भक्तवा, नरवा or नया ॥ Sce VII 1 60 S 2517 for the augment # in au When re comes, we have nfurat u It takes by S 2515 Vari.-The elision of takes place before the jhuldde kové nnd not when it takes the augment zĘ! Th refore not nwy, which formg its Thereforo gerund as safsaresti The root being fac the E 19 optional. bof re the jhaladi ktva, the forms are शक्त्या, or अङ्क तथा । The final of cry * &c are replaced by st before ktvå (S 2504) Thus खात्या or समित्या । The roots afa vafa get by S 3074 Thus दिवा, पित्वा । मिरया । यित्वा ।, Ihe fe replaces at before ktva (S 307G) As दिया। ३३३१ । जहातेश्च क्त्यि । ७।४ । ४३ । दित्वा । बास्तु । हारथा । श्री अग्धिा- (३०८०) । माया । 3331 दि substituted for हा (वहाति) before पल्दा ॥ As हित्या राज्य बन गतः हित्वा गष्यति । The rule dous not apply to u जिद्दीते ॥ There we have दास्वा गतः ॥ The wp is repliced by one before ktvå AS METU Seo S. 3080 ३३३२ । समासेग्मपूर्वे क्त्यो ल्यप् । ७।१।३७ । अव्ययपूर्वपदेउनसमा फ्ल्यो स्यबादेशः स्यात् । ठक् । प्रकृश्य । 'अनन् किम् । अत्या। पदासाययशाग्नेह। परमकृष्यों। 3332 In a compound, the first member of which is an Indeclinable but not न स्वप 13 substituted for त्या । Thus प्रकृत्य, प्रहस्य॥ The trâ 13 added by 111 4 21, the compounding us by II. 2 18, and तुझ by VI 1 71 पार्वतः कृत्य The trh is added by III. 4G and compounding is by II 2 22 मानाकृत्य, द्विधा कृत्य, The tva is added by III.462 Why do we say ' in a compound'? Observe कृत्या इत्वा. Here the counter example 1s इत्या, which is preceded by an In thclinable कृत्वा, bntast, - TITI ·RIT IV.33336] THE LTAP ATIX. 889 . 2. 66): फउ सिचत (s being substituted for r by VII. 118yat+प्रसिषद (उचो VI 1. 87) कोसिषद (यो-यो VI. 1. 100) Now applies our satrai By VIII 3. 59, y coming after it required to be changed into , but here, the single substitute 19 considered to be non cffectivo for thrs purpose. Similarly कोऽस्य, योस्य, फोस् यो । Similary in water thero is the addition of by VI 1 71 S. 2858 though actually preceded by a long voel. That vowel had resulted from the ekådesr of for TI 1, and thig elâdesi is considered as if noneffective for the purposes of augment. Similarly in मा हुन् । य- A. Here also (ITS) 19 considered asıddha. The te is added by S2858 ३३३४ । वा ल्यपि । ६।४।३८ । अनुदातोपदेशानां पतितनात्यादीनामनुनासिकसोपा वा स्यास्यपि । व्यवस्थितविभाषेयम् । तन मातानिटाया नास्तानिटां बनादीनां च नित्यम् । भागस्य-धागण्यामात्य-मपाम्य । प्रहस्य । ममत्य । प्रवस्य । वितत्य । 'अदा अग्धिा (३०८०)। '४ अन्वरमारपि विधीदिको एयपाधते x' । अग्धिविधी स्यग्रहणास् । तेन दिस्वदत्वारवेत्वदीर्घस्पटिटो यपि न । विधाय ।प्रदाय । मसभ्य । प्रस्पाय । प्रक्रम्य । जापृश्य । प्रदीय । 3331. The nasal of the roots mentioned in VI. 4 37 S. 2128 (i.e.anudatta ending in a nasal, and धनादि and सनादि) 19 optionally elided before the afix ?T* This is a vyavasthiti.vibhasha. The option applies to roots endido in In the case of roots ending in other nasals, the elision is compalsory Thus प्रपस्य or मयस्य परस्य or मरज्य, मत्य or प्रणम्य, सागस्य, धागण्य but no option in प्रादत्य, ममत्य, मापत्य, वितस्य । By S. 3080, घद् 1s replaced by जग्ध before स्यप् । From this we infer the existence of the maxim 'a babıranga substitution of lyap sa persedes, even the antarang rules' Because if this maxim did not exist, tho substitution of Jagdh for we before lyap would follow already from the word fra in S 3080 In the case of प्रधाय and प्रस्थाय this maxim applies --अन्तरजग्नपि विधीम् पहिरको स्य बापते "a Bahiranga substitutton of रुपए supersedes even antaranga rule'. JYliat are these antaranga rules superseded by the substitato स्य ? (1) दिस्व-tha substitution of kि for धा (VII 4 42) Thus दित्वा but मधाय and not मंदिया। (2) दत्वं-the substitution of दद for दो (VII. (3) बारव as required by VI 4. 4,46)-as दत्वा, but मदाय and not प्रदरवा। 42 as wear मखाय and प्रसन्य २ (4) Niwas स्थित्या but मस्याय । (5) ईत्व by VI. + 66, as पोस्वा but अपाय ॥ (5) दीर्घत्व by VI 4 15, as शारदा but प्रय (7) उद् by VI_4_19, पृष्टया bus यता (8) क-15 दात्या (9) इट् (VII. 2.6)-देविरवा but मदीय ।

·300 TIIE SIDDILANTA KAUNUDI. [KRIT. IV.58335. . । . ३२३५ । न त्यपि।।४।६। स्पपि परेशुपारपादरी पट् । प्रताप । ममाय । प्रगाप । अपाय । प्राय । प्रसाप। 'भीमातिभिमाति-(५८) पापम् । ममानिमापदाय । frभारतीयता (१५०)। विसाप-दिलीप । विमानता। विधा। 3335. lho substitution for w7 under VI. 4 00, 8 2102 does not apply when the absolutiro aflix पर folors Tमा, स्पा, गा, पाtandan Thus प्रदाय, प्रपा सभाप भरपाय, प्रगाय, प्रपाय, महाप and पवायThe alix स्पm as the substitute of परपा, 10 for flix by I 150 The mi replaces the vowela of funt and tefa by S 2503 Thus ante fute and Te 1 In tho c144 of eit there is option by S 2508 As forerte or fari Tho fu 1s cliled b fore lyap A8 उत्ताप, विचार्य। ३३३६ । त्यपि राघुपूर्वात् । ६ । ४ । ५६ । लापूरिवारच पेरपादेश पारपि । विगषण प्रमण । प्रतिपय सर्वात कम मपाय। 3330 qis substituted for the x of f« before tho Absolutire aflirming wen tho rowel preceding the rug light Thrs मपभम्प गता, भेदमय गता, प्रोभिएप्प पिडप्य. Why do we any preced od by the short ? Obs rve RL Ras the rowelr codengthorts long Her, VI 4 Slapplics She shortening the elision of and the clision of * should not be considered as 841]dhi as their place of operation 19 nat the same Thus wtfarver, th s T 19 shortened by VI 4 92 and wo have af This shortening is not to be consider d ns 29udha, for if Asiddha th ro ving no laghu půren the pres nt rule would not apply Similarly aire 19 the lotenstve root, its # 18 elided by VI 4 49 this elision 19 not considered as astfilha if it were asıddha, tla * of för svouli not be laghu Similarly tho clision of u in me which is a root which ends in m, (see Dhatupitha Chmadt 309), is not considered as anddha for similar reasons ३३३ । विमापाप १६५४५७ पानोता त्यादेको बा स्यास्यपि । मापय्य प्राप्य । अय् 1s optionallv substituted for the rif ir beforo the affix पप after the verb प्राप् । Thus प्रापप्य or प्राप्य गतः॥ This how ver does not apply to the पाप substitute for T, as swot " (VI 1.43 VII 3 86) The maxim of Pra tipadokta applies here २३३८ । क्षिय ।६।४ । ५९ । थियो यपि दीपः स्याद । मशीय। 3337 .

·RIT IV 57342.] TIK LYAT ATTIX 391 . 8338. A lony is substituted for tl o sof fr before *** As मदीप उपचीव ३३३८ । ल्पपि च । ६।१। ४१ । पेनोपपि प्रसारक न स्यात् । प्रधाम । 3339 The semisonel of & is not yochligaid viien tho Participiul allir 197 folloiry. Tius प्रवाय, उपाय। ३३४० । ज्यश्च । ६।१।४२ । मायाप। 3310. The somioiel of wat 'to groir olil' is not vor alisel when the allir y folloirs Thus प्रश्याम उपापाय । ३३४९ । व्यश्च । ६।१।४३ । उपव्याय. 3341. The semisoivel of car (od) 'to coper' is not vocalisci when the affix स्यप् follors As मव्याय, उपध्याय The separation of this aQtra from the lagt 19 for the enko of the subsequent sätri in which the angeruti of ra run, ३३४२ । विभाषा परे । ६।१।४४ । परेज्योपा मप्रगारण स्यालपि । दुबापिरवा परावाद हा (२५) निदी।। परिधीप-परिष्याय । पम् मुरणादाय स्वपिति मे मिनीस्य समरिति । शादाम- भीतमोत्तरकासेपि वापरामपोरनुपत्तेस्तदपिवषया नविष्यति । 3342. Tho Tocalisation may optionally the place when ध्ये preceded by परि takes the fir स्यम् । Thus परिषीय पूपम् or परियार The augm nt m prannted by 11. 1. il is debarrcd by VI 4 2 S 2559 which causes the lengthening of the vowel since VI 4.21s subscquent to VI 1.71. Yart. The phrase पुराए पादाय स्वपिति नेगिनीय पति •ho story, with hw mouth open, and laughs with his eyes closed, is raill, though tho allix at 19 not added to the verb denoting prior ac ion sleeps first, and then while so sleeping he gapes similarly he laughs firs: and then closes the eyes. So nokirican be properly added under the conditions to verbs denoting subsequent action. There being noktra, a fortiori there can be no Igap a 2:0. The artıka makes an exception Though the 'sleeping' and 'laughing' preceded th- action of 'saping'aal opes', they may ba sand in so far to be subsequent to thos. I or be ·392 TIIB SIDDIANTA KADUUDI. (XRLT, IV. $ 3260. 1 . 3383 1 simuler WFT 13181981 पीना पुन्ये धीरये पूर्व विषये एमुस्याह क्या च । विस्यम् । स्मारस्मार नमति पिषम् । स्पृश्यास्पृश्या । पायंपायम् । भोजभोजम् । श्रायथायम् । "चिपणभुलो-' (२०६२) पति मुरूपरे जोया दीर्घ । गामगामम्-गमगमम् । 'विमापा पिपणमुलोः (२०६५) पनि नशा । लम्भलभ- THEHE ! afecafeailve fH 45 i 14 detsforeca-' (2860) fa GTI METTET I TAVARATUrqi 3343 The aflixes namul' and 'ktra' como after a root, Then re-iteration is to be expressed The phrases when the agent of both the verbs 18 the same' and after the verb whose action occurs first in time' are to be read into this sutra to complete the sense. The force of us to introduce the affix 747 into this stra The aflixes Live and ramul express're iteration' then only when the verb 13 doubled, and not singly. Seo rulo VIII 1. 4. S 2140. Thus FATT ATT Hafar falang" Constantly remembering lie bors to Shiva' So also we may have en gratia fua conreying the same sense Similarly पायाय or भोज भो or याप वाय sxe. By VI 4 93 S 2762 there is optional lengthening of the penultimate vowel before namul, as a tw or TH I lhig is of courge confined to the causative the roots In the case of the root labh, there is optionally the augment i in serted, as I ***? Or wing by VII 1 69 S. 2765 Bat we hage already explained in that sätra that the option taglit theruin is a rcstricted one (vyavasthita vıbhäsd) and the yt is compulsory and not optional after pra &c. Thus HHU HAFT4 only one form In the case of jfigri there is guna by VII 3 85 S 2480 AS TTCT ST Tho samo 3s the case when the root takes the causative nu also ३३४४ । नयद्यनाकाङ्क्ष्ये । ३।४ । २३ । यच्छन्द उपपदे पूर्वकाशे पत्प्राप्त तग्न यन पूर्वतिर क्रिये तद्वाक्यमपर माकापते पर। यदय मुक्त तवा पति । इस पत्याणमुली म । अनाकाशे किम् । यदय भुषस्था जति रातोऽधीते । 2341. Ile affixes. ktvå and namul' are not added to a root, when the word 'yad' is used, in a simple sentence, tluch does not depend upon another to complete the sense The sordu means 'inter-dependence or the inability of l word, phrase or sentence, to indicate the intended sense in the absence of another word, phrase, or sentence In other hords when there are tiro actions one prior and another subsequent and they complete the sense of the sentenco, without standing in need of any other verb, in such a caso, Atvd and namul are not used, when the word yad is in composition This satra probibits the affix hivd also, though the aflix panul 19 in immediato contort Thu 7 mar 1, 7548 zei da, having caten, ho cooks, having read, he sleeps ) ·KI IV 533161 TIE NABOL AFFIT 393 12 con- But when there is inter dep ndence or प्राधा wo have पदय अफया जति, अधीत एव तता परम् । Professor Bothtingk trarustates at thes nection with the above mentioned Absolutives will not be applied, unless the two yerbe required one more as compl ment ३३४५ । विभापाग्रेप्रथमपूर्वेषु। ३।४ । २४ । भाभीएय इति मामुवर्तते । एपूपपदेषु समानक कयो। पूर्वका घरवाणमुली वा स्वः। अग्रेभोज जति । अग्रेभुषत्वा । प्रथमभोजन-प्रयममुश्त्या । प्रभातम्-यमुपस्या । पो लडादयः। घन भुक्त ततो यजति । ग्रामीशपये प्रणिप्रतिषेधेम नित्यमेव विधिः । अग्ने भान भाग पुजवि । भुक्त्याभुक्त्वा । 3315 The affixes ktva' and 'namul' come optionally after that verb which denotes the prior action, when both verbs here the samo agent, provided that tho followirg words are in composition -'agre, 'prathamı' and ' pûrva' This is an Aprdpta vibh lehd The word re iteration 19 not under stood here Thus अग्रे, भोज पूजति having first eaten he goes In the simo sense we may use also अग्रे मुक्त्या पति । Smilarly प्रथम भोज पूजवि or प्रयम भुक्त्वा जति। Sunilarly पूर्व भोज पुति or पूर्व भुत्या पूर्वति । By using the word optionally it 15 indicated that the regular Tens 9, such as th Pres nt &c may be employed also Taus अनभुले ततः जति ,' he eats first and then go s The rule 13 compulsory when re iteration (S 3343) is de ot i, for then that rule thoughp tor will debar this sabse quent r lo As ग्रे भोज भोत बनवि or मुकल्या मुक्त्वा । ३३४६ । कर्मण्यामोशे कृन्न समुञ् । ३ । ४ । २५ । फर्मपयुपपद प्रामोये गये । चोरकारमानोति । करोलिकच्चारथे । धीरगदगुष्यात्यर्थः । 3316 The affix ' ] hamufi is ndded to the verb ' kra (to utter), when a word in the accusative case is in construction with it, if the sense intended my lhes 'abuse of the afir wys the effic ent portion is 14 th indicatory introduces the rigment भुम् (VI 3 67S 2912) Thus चोर कारमाक्रोपोते he reriles him as thif le calls oat 19 ab 1s thou art a thiof thou art a robb The person is not really made a thief but making him a thief is to express ones Indignation Th- verb here means 'to utter ३३४७ । खादुमि णमुल । ३।४।२६ । स्थावर्षेषु पनो यमुस्स्यादेमकर्तृ भयो। पूर्वकाले । पूर्वपदस्य मा वस्य निपात्यते । स्वादु स्वादु कृत्वा मुक्ते स्वादुझार भुङ्क्ते । अपग्मकार । लयण कारम् । संपनलशादी स्वादअर्यायो । यासहपेय इत्यापि । स्याड कृत्वा भुङ्क्ते । 50 &e ·394 THE SIDDIANTA KAUMUDI (KNIT IV $ 3347 4 - 3947 (When the actions, signified by the Forbs 'kri and another, live tho sime agent), the affir' Damulis added to tho Terlan (which is concerned about a time anterior to that of tlic othor), provided that a word signifying 'sweet' is in composition The words within brackets are to be read into the satra by anuyrittu from III 4 21 S 3320 Thus सादुद्धार or लवण कार मुक्त he eats having made bis food sweet or geasoned So also TTTT! The words and लवन are synonyms of स्वादु। In the sutra the word utsy is used ending with a v It 13 an anomalous form and indicates that & must be added to the uppadas in these c19 $ the object served by this form being that rule IV 1 44 S 502 by which feminine of words like this ending in 3 is formed by long does not apply here Thus स्वाहीस कृत्या पयागम् भुको स्याहार यवागूम भुङ्क्ते। Here though TOTT 19 feminine the attribute is still farg and not farsit By applying III 1191 S 2830 we have the affix put in the alternative Thus 15 goat 5 All these affixes form abs ract nouns (478) as they have the sense of the affix aty (III 4 16 S 3113) In connection with 991, the Instrumental case can not however be used re we cannot use the Passive construct on eg स्वादुकार यषागर्भ ज्यते देवदतेम will be wrong ३३४८ । अन्यथैवकथमित्य सिद्धाप्रयोगश्चेत् । ३ । ४ । २७ । रिपु कूनो मुरस्यात् । सिद्धोऽप्रयागजियेषभूतवत्कृप । व्यर्थत्यात्प्रयोगानई पी । अन्यथाकारम् । एषकारम् । कपकारम् । इत्यकार भुका । इत्य भुत इस्यपः। सि- रति fær forsvant TTT YEAR 3318 When the words anyatha (otherwise), 'evam' (80), 'katham (how) and 'ittham (thus) are compounded with the verb thon 'namul comes after 'krı (to male), if it be such that its omission would be unobjectionable When is the non employment of a valid 7 When the same senter co w ll remain correct by omitting ie when witho it employing it the same ndia will be expressed Thus शग्यपाकार, क्षार कपकार or इस्कार The eats otherwise, he eats so how does he eit or he eats thus fu fact, the sentence 47947#TC is equivalent to your Why do we gry of the non employment would be valid? Witness Vaian Id The eats having turned his head aside. Here yo could not be aparcd. ३३४८ । यथातथयोरसूपाप्रतिवचने।३।४।। कृप्रापिदाम पाणयेवा पपया मतिररने। पयावारम भाइये तपासार मोरपे किंवान। 3310 The affix 'narul is added to the root ri' (to ·KRIT IV. 33353.] THE NAMOL APTIX. 395 that way, । • it, anul tho sentenco denotes an angry repls (if the omission of krin' is unobjeotionable). Whert one questions or replies in indigna ton, displragire or anger, then as this construction valid Thus तयाकारं भोक्ष्ये तियानेन 'I will eat in what is thnt to you'! Similarly यथाकार भोषये, जि तथानेन । Why do we say when an angry reply 15 rorde'? Obzerve 2915EUTSK भोषये तथा त्वं दापि ' in what way I will eat, that thon wilt see'. Why do we say when the omission of a would be valid' ? Witness WUYTTIST fact sheets for anita 'what is that to you, in what way turning my head I will eat'? ३३५० । कर्मणि दृशिविदोः साकल्ये । ३ । ४ । २९ । फर्भपयुपपदे णमुरूत्पाद । फम्याद परयति । सः कस्या पर्यः । माधयेद भोजपति । पप ग्रामपं जानाति लभते विधारयति या त अयं भोजयतीत्यपः। 3350. When the object is compounded with it, the verb dris' (to sco), or 'vid' (to know), takes the affix' namul', to denote the total number of such oljects. Thus *Tali utafa 'he woos every girl that he sces z. e all the girls seen'. ग्रामपधेद भोगयति 'he feeds as many Brahmanas as he knows, tae. all whom he knows, finds or thinks of' ३३५१ । यावति विन्दजीवोः । ३ । ४ । ३० । यापट्वेद भुक्त । यापलभते तायदित्ययः । यायाजीवमधोते । 3351 Tho aſfix 'namul comes after the verb 'sid' (to get) and 'jiv', (to live), when the word yâvat, is combined with them As a yo' ho eats all that he gets'. Tarttunuta' he studies as long as he lives, 1 e throughout his kfe'. ३३५२ । चर्मोदरयोः पूरेः । ३ । ४ । ३१ । कर्मयीत्येष । धर्मपर तृणाति । उदरपूर भुङ्क्ते । 3352 The affix 'namul' comes after the verb 'pur (to fil), when the words 'charmin' and ' udar' are compounded with ít ag object. Thus उदरपूर मुक्के he eats so as to fill his belly' ? धर्मपूर तृषावि 'he spreads 80 as to cover the skin' ३३५३ । वर्षप्रमाण जलोपश्चास्मान्यतरस्याम् । ३।४।३२ । फर्भपयुपपदे पूरे मुल्यादकारलेोपन या समुदायेन वर्षममा गये। गोपदपूर वृष्टो देवा । गोपद वृष्टो देवः । 'यस्य इति झिम् । उपपदस्य माभूत । भूपिशावितमम् । 3353. The affix 'namul' comes after the verb ' pur' (to fill), when the word so formed expresses 2 measure of rainfall; and optionally the long 'î' of thuis 'pûr' is elided. . . - ·396 THE SIDDHA VTA KAUMUDI (KRIT IY $3354 Thus trouge or try get qa: ' it rained filling op small puddles (lit the impression made by the foot of the cow on the soil) at or ama tet 24: ' It rained filling up all farrows' Why have we used the word met of this pur' in the stra? Tho long *of 17 18 to be elided, and not the long , if there be ray, of the upapada. Thus भूपिकाबिलपूर or भूषितालिम पृष्टो देव । Here the long a of is not shortened ३३५४ । चेले कोपे । ३।४ । ३३ । घेलार्थेषु कर्मगुपपदेषु क्नोपेर्णमुल्स्यावर्षप्रमाणे । लक्नोपं पृष्टो देवः । पसनीपम् । धनक भोपा। 3354 The affix 'namul' comes after the causative of the root 'Inûy' (to Tret), when there is compounded with it a noun denoting clothing', in the accusatire case, as an upa pada, if the whole word so formed expresses a measure of tho rain fall The verb mitro is the causitive root formed from the simple root to wet Thus घेलको पृष्टो देवः or वरा क्नोपं or यमनकोप &c.b rained so as to wet the clothes ३३५५ । निमूलसमूलयो रुप ।३।४ । ३४ । ET I muffraga din trufa I VI TORT For at mavzati frumore Fifa 1 A516 gefa Ifrae ona muitadi i ymurfe sutru farnarfeciua पराभवम्धाद्वेदः । तेन सामाग्यषिपभायेर यियेपविरीयभाया। 3355 'Ilic affanninul comes after the verb.kash' to rub, when the words ' nimûl L' and 'samul i'ire compoundel with it in the accusatiro c ISE Thus framtid **** he scrapost lost to the econ mg np of the roots , # ta he scripes up to the scraping up of the roo. In fuct, th & rond of thc mot ard the rocvatself d note the sime thing the wholo e 116. nice fantaTOTTA &c 19 rqual to partner arafa and refu: From this strı up till 4 * $. 3367 tho sibs governing the prus nous ford must be drive i from tho &im root from which the g runi is dried Tnough tho surb 34 th saarne in the antecedent an ijth slae quent get there 19 a slight diff runa of meining tho serbal dari satıra qualifis the verbs and thus intensifis tham aning of this simpla omt SIIT + + T. Word purri kalades not gorern t'ison ! the ob mu nt stras ३३५६ । शुष्कर्णरुक्षेषु पिप । ३।४।३५ Taigintage i grå f**Fv i gafemptats a total 3:30 I lie nffix. nimul comes after the rerb pisli' (to funt serb ·KRIT. IV $3358.] TAK NÁVOL AFFIX. 397 . grind), then the words 'gusliha' (dry), 'chûrna' (porder), and rühshia' (dry), in the accusative case aro compounded 'Witli it, Thus txer forferrik Farfe'ho grinds'it dry grinding i. e. grands it dry', wat foie 'ho grinds to powder grinding 1 e. grinds till it becomes a powder , redd forefig' be griods it dry'. llera also an appropriato verb from the game root far must be used to govera tha gerand. ३३५७ । समूलाकृतजीवेपु हन्कृञ्ग्रहः । ३ । ४ । ३६ । फर्म पीत्येय । मूलपात इम्ति । प्रकृतकारं करोति । नीयमाई पाणि । जीवतीति जीवः । गुपधलघेण: का। जीवन्तं मातीत्यर्थः। 3357 The affıx'namul' comes after the verbslan' (to hill), 'kri' (to make) and 'grah' (to seizo), when the words, • samûla',' ahşita' and 'jiva' in the accusative case are rcspectively compounded with them Thus Tantra Pira (VIII. 3 32 and 54) 'he destroys so as to tear up by the roots ? e he totally extirpates', **maſa "he dous a thing which was not done before', 7 TAHTE TETfx' captures him so n9 to preservo his life, 1 e. captures him alıve'. Here alco appropriate verbs from the same roots are used to govern the gerund. The affir á 13 added to sila becruso it has a penultimate v vowel, and so ofta means 'living' and is cquivalent to wafa ३३५ । करणे हनः । ३।४ । ३७ । पादपात इम्ति । पादेन इन्तीत्यर्थः । यथाविध्यनुप्रयेागार्यः अग्नित्यसमामार्थोग्य पागः । furtuTEMA feguar q' (38€c) fa veza i 3358 The alfix' nymu!' comes after the verb'han', when a word in the Instrumental case is in composition with it. Thus weer af fra (VIE 3 32 and 51)=far af fra he strikes the Vedr with the hand, Tha Ta frat'he strikes the ground with the foot' Reading this sûtra along with III 4 48, S. 3369 vo find that here does pot mean to kill, and the further difference betsreca tas aphorism and that is, that in the case of this s@tra a cognate verb from the same root (S 3367) must be used, as the geraad, not so in sätra III 4 48 becaust 111. 4 46 S 3367 applies here also, and an appropriate serb from the same root 19 employed to govern the gerund Further this gâtra 19 for the sake of forming Invariable compounds with the upapadas, such as According to Patanjalı this affix comes after under this apphorism, eren when means 'to injure', thus ciunteracting rule III 4 48, S. 3369 by anticipation, and in opposition to the general principle of interpretation enunciated un rule I 42 Thus wfesta ta' he kills with the sword'; fra' he kills with arrows'. - पादघात ।

·. 398 THE SIDDHANTA KAVUDI. [RIT. IT ISRO C ३३५९ । स्नेहने पिरः ।३।४।३८ । निस्ते येन तस्मिाका पिपेर्समुल् । उदपेपं पिष्टि । उदोन पिष्टीत्यर्थः । 3359. The affis namul, comes after the rerb 'pish' (to grind), when a word in the Instrumental case denoting 'liquid' is in composition. Thus उदपेपं पिमष्टि उदकेन पिमष्ठि (VI.3.58 8 996.) ' hegrinds with water'; aaraa foafe' he grinds with oil'. Here also III. 4. 46 9. 3367 applies, and an appropriate verb from the same root is employed to govern tho gerund. ३३६० । हस्ते वर्तिग्रहोः । ३।४।३९ । रस्ता करणे तवत पर्तयति । करवर्तनास्तेन गुलियां करोतीरवस्तग्रार पहाति। फरयादम । पाणिग्राहम् । 3360. The affix 'namul' comes after the verbs 'rarti (causative of rxit) and 'grah' when a rord denoting 'hand in the Instrumental case, is in composition. Thus हस्तवतं, करवत or पाणिवतं वर्तयति = इस्तेर पर्तयति he revolves by the hand'. So also, a TRATANTE Tutfa he takes him by the band'. go पापियाम, करगाहम &c. Here also rule III 4. 46 applies and appropriate verbs from the same roots must be employed to govern the gerund &c ३३६१ । खे पुषः । ३।४।४। करण इत्येव । स्व इत्यर्पयाणम् । तेन स्वापे पर्याय पियरे व अनुस् । स्वपोपं पुष्णाति । अनपोषम् । गोपोपम् । 3361. The affix*ņamul' comes after the verb 'push' (to feed), when a rord in the Instrumental case, hering the senso of' sva' is in composition. The word ra means self', 'kinsmen' and 'property'. Thus स्थपोष पुग्णाति the feads umself'; शामपा, गारपिट, मायवाद,स्वाkc. See I. 1.68 Rule 3367 appltes here also. ३३६२ । अधिकरणे वन्धः । ३ । ४ । ४१ । पक्रया बनाति। चक्रेबजातीत्यपः। 3362. The affix 'namul comes after the verb + bandh (to bind) Then a word expressing location is in construction with it or course, III. 4.46 S. 3367 applies here also, and the gerund mub be governed by a verb from the same roobas bandh. Thus नाति 'he binds to the wheel'; या माति' he binds in a snare'; बिपादि 'ha binds in the list. बारवाणाविरोति। ८ ·KRIT IV. $ 33661 THE NABIUL AFIX 399 ► ३३६३ । संसायाम् । ३ । ४ । ४२ ॥ बनातेनुमायाम् । मोवाध बारिकाधम् । पदातिशावधम् । बपिपाण HOT TATTI 3363 Tfic affix' namul comes after the verb. bandh' (to bind) then the word so forned donoter an appellative Thus stand a 'ht binds in the manner called huncha han. dhana or 'heron knot', agitate afa or wt'he binds or 19 bound inn 'peacock knot.gifa mavabound in a knot call-d attdlıkd ban lhana'. All the above, kraunc a hındh ina &c are names of various sorts of bonds or knots'. The rule II1 4 46 S 3367 also applieg here. ३३६४ । कोंजीवपुरुपयोर्नशियहोः । ३ । ४ । ४३ । जीपमा नश्यति । जीवा मश्यतीत्ययः । पुरुषवाद पति । पुरुषो पाती पर्षः । 3361 The affix "nunul' conies after the roots 119 (to parislı) and val' (to carry), when the words 'jiva' (life) and purusha' (person) expressing the agent of these verbs, aru respectively in construction with them Thus itanie wyfa=slar xafa 'he perishes, so that his life perishes 2. e. dies away', gray aria the man carrica, e e the man becoming a servant, carries another on bim gta fra 1797 fai ३३६५ । का शुपिपूरोः । ३ । ४ । ४५ । जय फर्तरि । कर्वशोपं शुष्यति । घृतादिकर्व एव तिछुभ्यतीत्ययः । कपर पर्यते । सध्यमुख एव पटादिविकादिमा पूर्णा भवतीत्यर्थः । 3303 « Tho aliis 'n mul' comes after the roots 'sush' (to dry), and pûr' (to fill), when the word 'ûrdhva', denoting an agent, is in coinposition with them Thug arauta gcafa qi=gtigstix the tree is dried up while it is still standing. Compare agisawaraefaget.' or wither like the up heaved gragg drying up (Bhattı, III 14), gt gia 'the jar is filled full to the brim' such as by rain-water &c, the mouth of the pitcher &c berog upwards Rule III f. 46 S 3367 applies here also ३३६६ । उपमाने कर्मसि च । ३।४।४५ । पारकर्तरि। निधाय निहित जलम् । पृतषिद मुरविवमित्यर्थः । प्रहकनाय नः । अजय TUTE THE 3366 The affix'namul comes after a root, when an object or an agent, denoting similitude, is in composition witlı it. The word 'agent' 15 read into the stra, by virtue of the word 'also' That with which any thing is compared 19 called 647 or object of caraparison or similitude'. As parterapeffragat 'water was kept as 89 carefully ghee as kept. gefrag fairer was kept as gold'. The force is ·400 TIK SIDDHANTA KIDUD! (XRIT IV $ 3367 that of a thus पृतनिधारा निहिता-घमिप निहित । So also when the object of comparsion 19 3 agent thus mai he perished like a goat So also TTT9, 719, &c ३३६ । कपादिपु यथाविध्यनुप्रयोग ।३।४।४६ । यस्माषणमुक्त स एवानुमपोतष्य इत्यर्थः । तयेवोदाहतए । 3367 'Ibo same verb should be emplored after the gerunds formed from the verbs "kash dc the verb from whish tho gerund is derived From stra III 4 31 up to sutra III 44 & verb from th sime root must, be employed in the subs-quent part as a przyoga from which the gerund in namul was formed This rule has be 2 allastrated in the examples under the previous aphorisms The present 19 a restr ctive or niyımı rala This chapter deals with affixes employed in denoting syntactical relation b tween two verbs (atero TAHT). Se III 4 1 soa gur ind in namul would of course be followed by some verb as anuprzjoga th present stra declares that the other verb must be from the same root as the gerund ३३६८ । उपदशस्तृतीयायाम् । ३ । ४ । ४७ । इतः प्रति पूर्वकाल इति सबध्यते । तृतीयाप्रभृतीग्य यतस्याम् (०८५) इति पा सभासः। मूलकोपदय भूक्ते । मूलकेनोपदयम् । परयमानस्य मूलकस्य भुजि प्रति फरणत्वात्ततीया ।। दाप्युपद पिना सहन याम्दः साधस्तथाप्याोऽस्त्येव कर्मत्वात् । एवायतैय यामध्यम प्रत्ययः सभाछ । तृतीयायामिति वचनसामर्यात् । 3.68 Tue alix'namul como, after the root dans (to bite) preceded by the preposition 'upa then 1 word ending with the third case aſfix is in composition with it The Upapario samdea is optional in th s cas (II 2 21 S 784) Thus भूलझोपद या मुक्त or मूलकेनोपदयम् भुक्ते 'he ents after haring rehshed the food with radish Similarly 19tTTT? Or 1999 rlih d with goger The words as &c in the above examples are th "objects of the verb S485, and instruments of th verb yr i Though there is no ayntactical relation between the btr and the rad sh yet the s o of tho passage connotes such relation because it (radish) 13 the obj ct of the verb to bita So even in the absenc of v rbal concor lanc th ro is log cal concordance and so this gives rise to the rfix and the compoundus More over the use of the word tritijâyám indicates this Note The sease is this The whole s nt nice when analysod stands thus 1 TT TT he eats with tha rad sh Hosy do s ho cat te what does he bite when eating? Th word is the logical object a se ring to this question but it 1900 P 1 ta th agat nco It 19 by contuxt that To supply tlus word in the ar 11; 313 of the scatenca yazd * The ·ARIT. IV. § 3370.) NAMUL IFTIA,'- 401 whole sentence thus 19 hor=#**99477-ES Thus though there is no velbal agrcernent, there is logical concordance If the affix were to be added only then where there was a terbal concordance butween the word in the rostrumental case and the root, then the proper coustruction of the satra ought to have been gratia J istelike Fila (S 3358) But it is not so Påņını uses the words तृतीयायाम, & bigger word thana, implying thereby that the lostrumentality of qahr 19 with relation to another verb than Tha word *** 19 not related to ed as an instrument kåraha, but rather as an object käraka and it 19 jastrumeutal karaka, by mediation, to the verb TERI By the rule of OTSE** (III. 1 94) the afax 79 (or its substitutc TT) mony be optionally usedl, wherever we may use the affix wy! Tbus भूलक्षेनोपदस्य मुक्ते। ३३६९ । हिंमार्थानां च समानकर्मकाणाम् । ३।४।४ । तृतीयान्त उपपदेऽनुप्रयोगधानुनां । समानफर्मकादिमायां शमुएस्पात । दण्डोपपात गाः atafa Taitrun FENETICA CATTUre'.xfa FE? ***T SICHTETT TT: कालयति । 3369 The affix 'ņimul' comes after roots having the sense of 'hing' (to strike), when the object of this gerund is the same as the object of the main verb, and when the noun with which it 19 componinded ends with the third case-affix. Thus TTTTTTTT: Caufa ' be collects together cows, beating them with a club Thcompunding 19 optioaal (II 2 21) Thus, we have also Grey Similarly with other verbs having the sense of fire thus, दपहलाएम् or दपन ताहम् । Why do we say when the object of the gerund 19 the same as the object of th- main verb'? When the objects are different, uy will not be einployd. Thus ITT TRENNETU, Taraft nr: *9afa having beaten the thuf with the club, the cowherd collects together the cons'. ३३७ । सप्तम्यां चोपपीहरुधकर्षः । ३।४।४ । उपपूर्वभ्यः पीतादिभ्यः सप्तम्यम् तृतीयान्ते पोपपदे णमुल्स्यात् । पार्योपपीर येते- पार्वयोरुपपीडन्-पारर्याभ्यामुपपीडम् । पुजोपरीघ गाः स्थापयति । युजेन-पजे उपरोध था। पापयुपम धागाः भाति । पाणावुपमर्थ म्-पाणिनोपकर्षम् । 3370 The aflix 'ņamul comes after the roots 'pid' (to press), 'rudh' (to obstruct), and Irish' (to draw), when they are preceded by the preposition 'upa', and when they are compounded with nouns ending with the seventh case-alix or the third case-affix, 51 ·402 THE SIDDIANTA KAUMUDI (KRIT IV $ 337] c The phrase 'the 3 d crge fix' inust be rer i into the sûtra by virt 10 of the word Thus crûtexts Da he sleeps pressing on his sides The compounding 19 optional (II 2 21), so we have in the ularnativu, पार्वयोरपपीहम or पाराभ्यागुपपीहम् । So also पूजोपरोधम् (or पजे उपरोधम् or प्रजेनोपरोधम् ) गा च्यापयति 'he stations the cows 80 that they are all in the fold IT** (or grada or faptama) TTTTI I Tufa i It is Bhvidi s here aud not Tudidi ३३११ । समासत्तौ। ३।४।५० । gratarekite and greacairan FORTA I BUDE I 20 TET I स्तयारम् । इस्तेन दीवा। 3371. (The affix'namul' comes after a root, when a Trord in the locative or Instrumental case is in composition with it), and when immediate contiguity is intended 2 fo fill together by the cars' The word aufimeans'immediate contiguity' Thus Tree (or केशेषु ग्रादम् or केगेपिस) गुप्यन्ते having closely caught each other by the hair they fight. Similarly Tots or tag on or ffauiry, so also oferta taking stick , STICHE &c See Il 2 21 ३३७२ । प्रमाणे च । ३।४ । ५१ । pitarea atiteta i patent after a fewfki pratara atenda, 3372 The affix 'namul comes after a root, when 7 noun in the Instrumental or Locative case is in composition with at, and when a mersure of length is intended The word **u! means length or extension' Thus पङ्गलोदकर्ष (वय गुले shay or mainta) e Feather he cats pieces of the length of two fingers See II. 2 21 ३३७३ । अपादाने परीप्सायाम् । ३ । ४ । ५२ । परीप्सा स्वरा। पप्पोत्याद धावति। 3373 The affix 'namul' is added to the root, when a noun in tho Ablatiro case 18 in composition, and when 'haste' - is intended . The word tour means 'haste, hurry' Thos steerd (or atat para) orafa having risen from bed, he runs awny That 19 to say he runs with ench a haste that he does not perform eren the neces4979 ablutions &c, but as soon as be rises from the bed he runs off Similarly 1979 tal frafa be drinks milk from a hole in the vessel ho being ra such a haste that he does not care to driok from the proper aperture migrenagere Apoft 'he rats cakes bot from the frying pan's not witing till they are placed on a dish.

·KRIT. IV 6 1376 ) AJUL AFFIX 403 Why do we say when meading hurry'? Observe, win7072 refa *having risen from the stat, he goes' Here 'haste" not being intended, the affix set ( 249 ) 13 employed See II 2 21. ३३१४ । द्वितीयाया च । ३ । ४ । ५३ । परीयायामित्येव । प्टिमाइ युधन्ते । लोग्दादम् । 8374. The affix 'nannul' comes aftor a verb, then a word in the Accusative case is in composition, and when 'haste' is intended This पष्टिपादन (or यष्टि ग्राहम) युध्यन्ते they ight, haring hasthly taken up sticks That 13 they are in such a haste to fight, that they do not tarry to take up the prop r weapons, offensive, and defensive, but engage 10 fight with anything that is at hand, such as aticks, stones &c. Sima larly लोग्राम or लोटुग्रहम् । २३७५ । अपगुरो णमुलि ।६।१।५३ । 'गुरी सामने इत्यस्पैचो पारस्पायणमुलि । सस्यपगोरं पुण्यन्ते । अस्पपगार। 3375 There is optionally the substitution of s in the room of the diphthong of the root se to exert when preceded by the preposition we and taking the affix usa The affix is forming the Absolutive Participle 19 added by III 4 22 aul the word formed by it is repeated Thus VTCTTTTTT or with AIRE a So also this aflix is added by III 4 53 as, SETTIIT gura or, weg var goria "they are fighting with raised swords' ३३७६ । स्वाङ्गे ध्रुवे । ३।४३ ५४ । द्वितीयायामित्येव । प्रधे स्वाङ्गे द्वितीयान्ने पालो मुल । भूविशेष कथयति । भुवं विदेपर । 'अधुघे किम् । थिए उरिषप्य । येन विना न जीवन वधुवम् । 3376 The aflix 'namul' comes after a root, when a word in the Accusative case 19 in composition, signifying the limbs of one's own budy, when the limb is such that its loss will not destroy hfc Thus u fut #nafa'he narrates throwing his eye brows (glances) about in all directions शक्षिनिकायस् बरूपति be prattles, having closed the eyes Faty word 19 The 'I word denoting a thing which not being liquid or gaseous and being capable of being pusceived by the sengoa and pot being one produc d by a change from the natural state exists in a living belog or though found elsewhere actually or at any particular time had previously been known as existing in only a liviog being, or is found to actually, (not figuratively ) the aime relation to the being 16 15 18, as a Bimilar thing has to a living being' ·402 THE SIDDIANTA KAVUDI {KRIT IV. S 3371. The phrase' the 3rd tige-nfie' must be rearl into the stia by virtis of the word Thus Teaterte ta he sleeps pressing on his sides! The compounding 13 optional (II 2. 21), so we have in the nlternative, पार्षयोपपपीड or पासोम्यामुएपीहम् । So also जोपरोधच (or जे उपरोधम् or पूजेनोपरोधम् ) गा स्थापयति 'he stations the cows so that they are all in the fold'. 4 oregon (or qaratai or wyfanternea) To fa i It 13 Bhvadı here, aud Dot Tudad). ३३११ । समासत्तौ ।३।४ । ५० ॥ तृतीयामतभ्योर्षातोर्ण मुरुस्यादमिक गम्यमाने । कैपग्राइ युध्यन्ते । फेयेषु पीरवा । FELTETTE I TRT SHOUT 3371. (Tho alix 'ņamul' comes after a root, when a frord in the Loortive or Instrumental caso is in composition with it), and when immediate contiguity is intended i e 'to fill together by the cars'. The word of means'immediate contigati'. Thus me (or Taor ***on) ya'baving closely crught each other by the hair, they fight'. Similarly FATITET Or the men or reagira, so also greater taking a stick', stocure &c Seo II 2.21 ३३१२ । प्रमाणे घ । ३।४। ५१ । तृतीयासमन्योल्प । दङ्गलोरक पण्डिका हिनत्ति । फालेर वाले धोत्कर्षन ।' 3372 The aflix 'namul' comes after a root, when a noun in the Instrumental or Locative case is in composition with it, and when a mersure of length is intended. The word starry means 'length or extension' Thus पालोत्कर्ष (वयंगुले yung or guyanakta) afarni faqafg'be cnts pieces of the length of two fingers' Ste II. 2 21. ३३७३ । अपादाने परीप्सायाम् । ३ । ४ । ५२ ।. परीप्सर वए। शय्योत्थाय धावति। 3373 The affix 'namul' is added to the root, when a noun in the Ablative case is in composition, and when 'haste' is intended. The word tot means 'haste, hurry' Thug Teet (or Topit PATA) wrofa' having risep from bed, he runs away That is to say, he runs with such a haste that bo does not perform even the necesaary ablutions &c, but as soon as he rises from the bed, he rang off Similarly 14**quat foafir'he drinks milk from a hole in the vessel', he being 19 such a haste, that he does not care to drink from the proper aperture. nigruara gate naft 'he eats cakes hot from the frying pan's not waiting till they are placed on a dish, 1 ·KRIT. IV. $ 8376. XAHOL AFFIL. 403 Why do wo say when meading burry'ObscriC, WITH TOIT TE 'having risen from the seat, he goes'. Here'haste not being intended, the affis ** ( 171 ) 19 employed See Il. 2 21. 3398 i gruritarai 713181431 परीणयामित्येव । यष्टि ग्राई पुष्यावे । लोग्राम् । 8374, Thoaffix'namul' comes after a verb, when a word in the Accusative case is in composition, and when 'haste is intended. Thus यष्टि ग्राहम् (or यष्टि ग्राहम) युध्यन्ते they fight, having hastily taken up sticks'. That is, they are in such a haste to fight, that they do not tarry to take up the proper weapons, offensive, and defensivo, but engage in fight with anything that is at hand, such as sticks, stoncs &c. Sini. larly लोष्ट्रयस् or लोन्ग्रहम् । ६३१५ । अपगुरो णमुलि । ६।१। ५३ । 'गुरी बदामने' इत्यस्येचो यात्स्यारणमुलि । अस्यपगोरं अध्यन्ते । पस्यपगारम् । 3375. There is optionally the substitution of s in the room of the diphthong of the root yt' to excrt when preceded by the preposition and taking the aflix wa The affix og forming the Absolotive Participle is added by III. 4 22 aprel the word forraed by it is repeated. Thus TTCTTTTTT or warna- AKCE ! So also this afix is added by III 4 53: as, kurie Jura or, tegrare your "they are fighting with raised swords'. ३३०६ । स्वाड्रेग्ध्रुवे । ३ । ४ । ५४ । द्वितीयायामित्येव । अधुये स्वाङ्गे द्वितीयान्वे धातो मुल । भूविक्षेप कथयति । भुद विक्षेपः । "अधे किम् । गिर उरिषप्य । येन विना न जीवन वधुषम् । 3376 The alix'namul' comes after a root, when a yord in the Acousative case is in composition, signifying the limbs of one's own body, when the limb is such that its loss will not destroy lifc. Thus w farsi taia'he narrates, throwing his eye brows (glances) about in all directions'. wfer fantay sayfa 'he prattles, having closed the eyes'. The maig word is "a word denoting a thing which not being liquid or gaseous, and being capable of being perceived by the sengag, and not being one produced by a change from the natural state, exists in a living being, or though found elsewhere actually or at any particular time, had previously been known as existing in only a living being, or is found to actually, (not figurativels) the stre relation to the being it 19 in, 13 a similar thing has to a living being".

·404 THE SUDDEANTA KAUMUDI. (KRIT IV $3377. 1 The word 94 means 'non-gital organ', or a limb which even being cut off, does not necessarily destroy life Therefore, we cannot use the affix win in tho follossing las head is not an wa limb ~17 Taula "he narrates, hyving thrown the head on one side' Compare VI 2 177. ३३१७ । परिक्तिश्यमाने च । ३।४ । ५५ । सर्थवो विक्षाध्यमाने स्थाहितीयान्ते अमुल्ल्यात । विपेप युध्यन्ते । फरनगर पीरयात इत्यर्थः । 'उरोविदार प्रतिषस्फरे नसैः । घुधार्थमिदम् । 3377 The affix'namul cores after a root, Tenå word in the Accusative case denoting a limb of one's own body, which is completely a Micted by the action, is in composition The word with means 'completely hurt or afit cted' This : afatd or otita gorditegt fleta: they higbt so as to afl et thuir Whole bosom' So also for o or faciataxi The difference between this and the last sûtra concrets in this that th29 sätra applies exco to vital organs, such a' breast', 'hcad' &c, while the last aphorism applies to 'non vital organs' only ३३७८ । विशिपतिपदिस्कन्दा व्याप्यमानासेव्यमानयोः।३।४।५६। fgetranfireda i faltira o forgiford UGEESTESISHT isto vrü maaniata faraferarfui yra dar si fiarta ano yetu futacittetri' (1980) Fa 1974 g wafa i vaieta FaurTARIFTOTT I JUTT मोरपे पशुतरच तपापि उपपदार्थमायापागि पुति । भुयेगमास्त। गेरमामधेशम् । मेहमानुप्रयेपममुमयेयम् । पप गेहानुपातम् । गेहानुभपादम् । गानुपादन । धमा तु गेहस्य समुलतस्य च प यस द्वित्यम् । 3376 The afux namul comce after thic Terle 'Tis (to cater), 'pit' (to fall), 'pidi (to so) and skan!' (to 1127) when a word in thio Accusative case is in cmposition, and when the sense dcnoter is that of complete pervasion and total absorption. The word of (or swara) mean, the fullaod completo perrasion of tric enbgtnnect witin tinctions (uenot i' dy trio verde om, de flic word situr m^2n8 1991 fuous performinc of any scul n or nheory lon testo at. In oth e vords frequenes of nu action is not 7* #orl top thirrelor nf o to the noun (in banccusative c* )and TTT to th rerb (11cb ay lis) Th • two words hire thermiq menech ro na th. words fame ant stegt in patr: VIII 1. I$ 940 and by the appliest on offint rol, Loth tha noon and th serbomaritsins rep utru? Thomerol Jonnut, wi}} not apply herr when ths je pun ing by II.: 1. # whi ath?* 34 10 common in (f real II. 291, inakee mmpmation onls Op 1 794) n thriller 139 of this nain Tufanll ! m-sat, ani of this verb starter freqscocycrar desst puslupauca* It ant. That . & ·KNIT IV. $ 3370.) NAMOL AFFII. 405 . गैहावमवेयमारते, (or गैरंगेहमनुमवेशमाd or गेमनुप्रवेशमनुप्रवेशमास्त) 'having entered the benee, he sits down', meaning either,'having entered every house in n.ccession, he sits down', or 'having repeatedly entered the house, he sits down'. Similarly with the roots ut, we may have three examples as in tho last, and so also with the roots and exe Thus गेहानुपातमारते (or गेहगेहलनुमामास्ते or मेहमनुप्रपातमनुप्रपातमास्ते), गेहानुम्पादनास्त (or मेहरमनप्रपाद or गेममुमपादमनुप्रपादम), हायस्कदमारते (or गेहंगेहमवरशाद or गेमवरकादमयस्कन्दर)। Why do we say when the sense is that of all or frequency? Observa arauafrTa YER'having entered the house, he cats'. Q.-By sätra III. 4 22, namul would have been valid, when dbhikshna. slag meant, and dbhikshna and a sevd mean the same thing i.el'frequency, Why then ordain namul again, by the present sđtra, in the sense of aseva ? If you say, we repeat it, in order to prevent the coming of the affix Fer", that is not so. For would come by TSURT rule; (see III. 1. 94 and III. 4. 47). A. -The repetition is for the sake of Upapada-samasa with a word in the accusative case, Under III 4 22,5 3343 there was no upapada, while in the present cage there is an upapada, Professor Bohtlingk translates thış sû tra thus:--"Ford, 7, 9, and to ir composition with an accusative, form the absolutive gerund in w (ņamul), when one wishes to express that every object of that name is , completely affected by the action, or that the action is constantly repeated in that ohject " ३३१० । अस्यतितृपोः क्रियान्तरे कालेपु ।३।४ । ५५ । फ्रिपामग्तरपति व्यवधत्त इति क्रियातरः । तस्मिन्यात्वर्थे वर्तमानादस्यतेस्तृप्यतेच कालपा. पिप द्वितीयान्तेषूपपदेषु णमुम्स्यात् । पदारया गाः पाययति । द्वपरमत्यामम् । पदतर्ष । पदन्तम् । प्रत्यममेन वर्ष योन च गर्वा पाक्रिया व्यवधीयते । श्रय पायित्या पहमतिमय पुनः पाययवीत्यर्पः। 3379. The affix 'namul' comes after the verbs throw) and 'tộish' (to thirst), when it is intended to express an intermission of the action denoted by the root, provided that a word in the accusative case denoting time, is in composition as' (to The word fakutat means the interval between two actions'. Thus GATIRIH Or TARIT 71 TITTíh 'he gires drink to the cows, after an interval of two days, 2. e every third day' So also one or Truefa'having kept the cos thirsty for two days, he makes them drink'. That is to say, 'having given them a drink to jay, he gives them another drink after an interval of two days'; &c. TT:

·400 THP SIDDIIANTARAUNUDE (KRIT IV 53380 . ३३-० । नाम्न्यादिशिग्रहो । ३।४ । ५ । द्वितीयायामित्येव । मामादेशमा । नामग्रारमाहपति। 3380 The allix namul connes after the roots Adis and 'grth, when the word 'numan (name) in the Accusative, 2$ in composition Thus मामादेशमाषष्टे he mentions it telling his name मामग्रार मामरादि •he calls me by taking my name (te by my name) ३३८१ । पव्ययेऽयथाभिप्रेतारुयाने कृष क्त्वाणमुली । ३।४ । ५९ । अगाभिप्रेतारुयाम नाम प्रिपत्योः प्रियस्य नीचे का इस्य उच्ने हटवा उल्याकारमप्रियमाषष्टे । भीषे कृल्य-भी।पृल्पा-नीकार व्रत । 3381 The allixes 'ktya and .namul come after the root kri' (to make), when an Indeclinable word is in composition with it, and the merning is the communication of anything in a disagreeable or undesired way The word अयथाभिप्रेतारख्याम means literally to denote the expression of that wh ch is not really intended 2 e & Tanner not su ted to the propr communication of that news gach as communicating a bad news in a loud voice and good news in a low voice The co npounding being optional the affix at may be replaced by ste Thus we have three forms मीधे कृत्य, मी कृत्वा or नीचे कार Thus if one had com punicated an agreeable news like the birth of a son 10 a low voice the other may retort कि ताई पल मीः कृत्य or नीधै कारमाचशे and so if one had communicated an unpleasant news as नाम प कन्याते गर्भिणी in a loud voice the other may reply कि ताई वषलो कृल्वा उप कृत्य, or :कारमाप । (See II 2 22 for compoun ling) ३३८२ । तिर्यच्यपवर्ग । ३।४।६०। तीवाद उपपदे कन्नः पत्याणमुलो स्तः समाप्तौ गयायाम्। वीर्य कृत्य गवः । निर्यकारम् । सभाष्य गत इत्यर्थः । 'अपवर्ग किम् । तिर्य कृत्वा काष्ठ गतः । 3382 The affixes ktvå anl'namul come after the root "Lr1, when the word 'tiryak is in composition in the sense of carrying to the end The word means completing or finishing Thus तिर्यक् कृत्य विर्यक् कृत्वा or तिर्यक कार गत: = समाप्य गता having completed he went a ray Why do we say when meaning completion ? Observe विर्यक परवा काठ गत: having placed the word obliquely he went away ३३८३ । स्वा) तस्मत्यये कन्वो ।३।४ । ६१ । अषतःकृत्य गत । मुलताकृत्वा । मुलताकारम् । मुखतीभूयं । मुखदोमूत्वा । मुस्ततोमाधम् । 3383 The affixes 'htra' and 'namul are added to the roots 'bri' (to make; and (bhu' (to become), in composition 4 ·VANUI ATEIX. 407 FRIT IV. 58384.1 with void denoting a member of oni s og body , when the allix'tay' 19 joined thereto Thus मुख तारय गत: or मुखता कृत्वा गतः or पुरता कारगतः | Similarly पता भूप तित्ति or पता भूरवा तिष्ठति or gता मात्र तिष्ठति । ३३८४ । नाधार्थप्रत्यये व्यर्थे । ३ । ४ । ६२ । नाभार्थप्रत्ययान्ते व्यर्थविषय उपपदे भुयोः बस्याणमुली स्तः । अनाना नाना कृत्या भानाकृरकमाना कृत्या-नासाकारम् । विनाकृत्य-धिना कृरवा-विमाकारम् । मानाभूय-माना भूत्वा- मानामावम् । सने द्रध्यमेव भूत्वा एकधाभूय-कथा भूत्वा-पाभाथम् । एकपाकृत्य-एकया फाया-एकथाकारम् । 'प्रत्यपग्राण किम् । किरया) यात्वा । 3384 The affiros 'kts à' and 'namul' are added to the roots 'krı' and 'blû, when a word ending in the nflix'nê' (V. 227) or in an affir having the force of 'dha' (V. 342), or Innving the sense of the aflix'chvi' (to make or to become gometlung what it had not been before, V 1 50), 18 in composition The two words *777' various' and fant 'without are formed by the Affit (V.2 27), affixes having the force of u are 9, 67, va and to (V. 3 42 to 46) which are added to numerals in the sense of 'part' or fold' &c The force of chvz has already been explained Thus नाना नाना कृत्या गतानामा कृत्य गता Similarly माना कृत्वा or मानाकार So also विमा कृस्य विना कृत्वा or विना कारं गता। So also नाना or विना भूप-भूत्या or भाव गतः । With words formed by चा and cognate afixes, we have -विधा or वध कृत्य-कृत्या-कार-भूय-भूत्वा or भाव गता . But not so in हि कृत्या, पृथक् कृत्वा । Why do we use the word 'affix (744)' in the satra? Without it the sutra would have run thus नाधाय व्यय, and then any word having the Bense of at, which has the force of 'except, various' or the sense of T which muans' part or fold , when 10 composition with or y, would have taken the affiर मुस् and क्या Bat ibat is not so. Thus the words from except and qua'reparately have the sense of m and a resprctively, as रिस्कृत्वा, or पृषा कृत्या। . Why do te say' when the upapada has the force of the afir chvi'? Observe नाना कृत्वा वाष्टानि गतः । The word धर्ष In नापार्य qualifies only the term पा, and not wr, for thore 19 no other alia baying the sense of 12 which is a single affix taught in V. 27, while as shown above there are other affixes having the forma of eti The composition optionally takes place by II. 2. 22 ३३८५। तूप्णीमि भुवः ।३।४।। पायादे मुवा वयानुसो वा । तयों भूप-यो भूत्वा-जुचीमान् । . 1 ·408 THE SIDDHANTA KAUNUDI. (KAIT IV. $ 838 1 3385 'The affixes ' Itva' and 'namul are added to th root bhû, when the ord "tûelinta (silently) is 11 congos tion Thus patys ma 271, or grapping buving beconte silent. Th repetition of u in this sůtra shors that the anuntti of does not ruu into it and altogether ceases ३३८६ । अन्वच्यानुलोम्ये ! ३१ । ६४ । भयद उपपदे भुवः स्वाभुली स्त प्रानुकल्ये गम्यमाने । अन्याभूय प्रास्ते। अन्याभूत्या- 5379781T" I SU: #a: prar nut 1747 STORT Tatoorseitet feneri भावामूत्वा तिष्ठति । पृष्ठतो भूत्वेत्यर्थः। 3386. The affixes'ktri' and 'nımul' come after the root "blû, when the Tord 'anvak', in the sense of being favournably disposed, is in composition. The word virgat merds' agreeable, friendly or favourably disponed, or dolog according to the wish of another' Thus gx4T - 14T or ***T HTATEA he is•favourably disposed , 2 e he stands in front or on the fanks or in the rear, ready to help Why do we say shen meaning friendly'? Observe war ar fagfa he Terpaing behind. इति कृदन्तप्रकरणम् । Epilogue परप लोक्षिकपदाम दिङ्मामा दर्षितम् । विस्तरस्त यथाशा दर्मित सादौस्तुभे । metrorai fragtas tot festrarhitet het garantera att a रविधीमट्टोरिदीक्षितविपिवाय सिद्वारतकी मानुत्तर धमास । Thus a little gaidance to the use and formation of the classical words has been shown (18 chese two volumes). Their full expositiou 13 gireb, According to proper authorities and test, in the Sabda Kaostubha. Vay this Siddhanta-Kaumud the wyorla of Bhattojı Dikshita be acceptable to the two great Lords -Bharapi and VirtanAtha. Here ends the uttarardha. ОР TIE SIDDHANTA KAUNUDI. OY PIATTOTI DIKSILTA 1.1 07.

·FOR SALE. 1. VEDANTA TATVATRAYA OF SRI LOKA CHARYA SWAMI.-- Translated by Manmatha Nath Paul B.A. B. L. A very important book on Metaphysics. Cr. 8vo: pages 83 : price 8 annas. . THE THREE TRUTES OF THEOSOPHY._"Vedanis Series No. 4—is a very ably written pamphlet, by Babu Sris Chandra Vasu, B.A. It is very useful for propaganda work, especially for Bengal and North-Western Provinces. As the price is only ONE ANNA, OR RS.5. per hundreil copies, intending propagandists will do well to distribute this among their friends and respectivo communities." -Tho Theosophy in India. 3. A TREATISE ON WATER WORKS.-In Bengalee, by Swami Vijnanananda (Ilari Prasanna Chatterji, BA. LC. E) It treats of purification and supply of water, appliances and machinery, distribution of water, guarding against waste &c. Intended for the use of the stadents in Enginecring, Engineers contractors and municipal officials. Royal 8vo. pages 240 completo in two volumes contaiuing 82 plates comprising 280 figures; price Rs 5. LIFE AND SAYINGS OF SRI SRI RAM KRISHNA PA- RAMHANSA DEV.-In Hindi, by Swami Vijoanapanda, Royal 8vo. pages 149. Price Re. 1. 5. THE ENGLISH WORKS OF RAJA RAM MOIAN ROY.- With an English translation of 'Tahfatal Muwahhiddin (Hit Arabic Persian pamphlet ) This edition also contains some additional letters, an introduction and 4 illustrations, Cr. 8vo. pages 1008 Cloth. Gilt lettered. Price Rupees Fre. 6. THIE BENGALEE WORKS OF RAJA RAM MOHAN ROY. Cr. Bro. 836 pages Cloth. Gilt lettered. Price Rs. 4. To be hand of–THE MANAGER, PANINI OFFICE, BAHADURGANI, ALLAHABAD.

·The Si Kauriu IUDI OF BHATTOJI DIKSHITA, Containing the original text with noc?, an l explanations in English bag ( on Tulfvabolhini, Kisila and other Commentaries TRANSLITED BY SRISA CHANDRA VASU, BA. AUTHOR OF PAVINI'S ASETADHYATI, dc, dc, do To be completed on three Volumes, Royal Octavo about 2,500 pages (Dorst and Third volumes completo in 1.275 priges already out Seven hundred pages of S.cond volume arv also out and the rust will be out soon ) Price after completion of the work Rs 40 Subscription in advance 20 The S ddhanta Krumudi of Bhuttoji Dikshita requires no introdaction to the public The translation follows the same lines as was adopted in the previous work the Astitadhyayı Extracts from opinions on Ashtadhyayı. The Right Hon'ble F Maxl/uller, Oxford, 9lk February, 189,- ... From what I have s mn of it it will be a very useful work hat should I harc gu en for such a work forty years ago when I puzzled nog head over Pirinis sátras an 1 th Commyntaries ***I hope you may BOCC"cd in finishing your work The Right lon ble F. Max Muller, Oxford, 30th April 1899-- *** Allo y me to congratulate you on your successful termination of Paninis Grammar It 119 A great undertaking and you have done your part of the orh most admirably I say once more, what shoull I have given for such an edition of Pimini when I was young and how much time would at have saved in and others Whatever people may siy, no one kuowa Sanskrit, who does not know Panını * . * Professor T Jolly, Ph Di Il trobar(G-rmany 23r11 April 1993 Notlung could have been moru fratifying to ma no doubt than to get hol l of a trustworthy translation of Panipa Ishta dh; Ay, the inlar! work of Sukrit litrieur , 2n1 I shall gladly do my best to to this palabla work known to lyr1s and stų lents of the immortal iterature of ancient India in this country